IR_346-348CL_22E
Short Description
cr 346...
Description
FCR XG-1/CR CL CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
Document No. 010-054-22E First Edition : Oct. 20, 2000 22nd Edition : Dec. 10, 2010
Printed in Japan
Export Restrictions Applying to this Equipment Japanese export restrictions and foreign exchange regulations apply to this equipment. Therefore, government approval obtained through due procedure is required in order to export or otherwise remove such equipment from Japan. Note that the same restrictions and regulations apply not only to the main unit but also to after-sale parts, service manuals and service training (for exporting or transferring technology) when such items are dispatched or shipped to foreign countries and when service training is given for trainees from foreign countries.
Precautions in Using the Service Manual This manual should not be used by anyone other than the servicing staff members qualified through the training specified by our company. Since this manual contains confidential information including engineering knowhow related to product development, it is prohibited to distribute the manual to users or to allow them free access to the manual without obtaining prior permission from FUJIFILM Corporation. This manual is intended to assist the service person in the safe and efficient servicing of the equipment described. The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures contained in this manual and must not be used for purposes other than those which are described herein. The equipment should only be used by persons having recognized qualifications and, if relevant, having adequate training on this equipment, especially regarding protective measure such as laser radiation protection. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that existing legal regulations regarding installation of the building with respect to the equipment are observed. Moreover the legal regulations regarding the operation of the equipment are to be observed. Incorrect operation, or failure of the user to maintain the equipment in accordance with the schedule of maintenance, relieves the manufacturer or his agent from all responsibility for consequent non-compliance, damage, injury, defects and/or other malfunction. FCR is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. Copyright © 2000-2010 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
CR-IR348CL Service Manual
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
WARNING
CR-IR348CL Service Manual
Important Notice Concerning this Manual
This manual is written for International distribution (including distribution in the U.S.) and therefore may contain references to mammography related options. Mammography functionality for this product is not commercially available in the US, pending FDA Approval. This functionality must not be activated on US models, the only breast related functionality available in the U.S. is the Specimen Imaging Application.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
CR-IR348CL Service Manual
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
MD: Machine Description......................................
2
MT: Machine Troubleshooting...........................
3
RI: Reinstalling the Software..........................
5
MU: Maintenance Utility. .......................................
8
FR: Function-specific Reference....................
10
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:................................ 47
SP: Service Parts.......................................................
12
Name of the Target Product of This Manual:........................ 47
PM: Preventive Maintenance. ............................
13
Introduction.............................................................................. 37 Safety Precautions.................................................................. 41 Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility........... 42 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)..................................... 42 Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001............................ 43
Caution for Handling Personal Information.......................... 48
IN: Installation IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357.... 14 IN-B: Installation – Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/ 359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372.... 16 IN-C: Installation – Connection to 9000 Series Equipment.... 18
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx IN: Installation – Appendix....................
19
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.......................
21
PC: Performance Check........................................
35
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
1
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
MD: Machine Description 1. System Configuration.......................................................
1
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF................................................ 28
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection. ................
2
2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780. ........................................................ 29 2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF............................................ 30
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection.....
3
2. Connectors and Slots.......................................................
5
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110.....................................................
6
4. Software Function Overview............................................ 33
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60. ........................................
7
5. Relationship between RU and CL.................................... 41
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260.....................................................
8
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow............................ 41
2.4 Dell Precision WS340...................................................
9
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE. ........ 43
2.5 Dell Precision WS330................................................... 10 2.6 Dell OptiPlex GX270..................................................... 11 2.7 NEC PC....................................................................... 12 2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280..................................................... 13
3. System Connection Examples......................................... 31
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview.................... 45 7. Ordering Function Overview............................................ 46 8. Cluster Connection Function Overview.......................... 47
2.9 Dell Precision WS360................................................... 15 2.10 Dell Precision WS370................................................... 16 2.11 Dell OptiPlex GX620..................................................... 17 2.12 Dell Precision WS380................................................... 18 2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745. ........................................................ 19 2.14 Dell Precision WS390................................................... 21 2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755. ........................................................ 22 2.16 Dell Precision T3400. ................................................... 24 2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF................................................ 25 2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760. ........................................................ 26 2.19 Dell OptiPlex 960. ........................................................ 27 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
2
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
MT: Machine Troubleshooting 1. Error Code Table...............................................................
1
1.1 Referring to Error Messages.........................................
1
1.2 Precautions..................................................................
4
1.3 Error Message. ............................................................
4
2. Using the Event Viewer....................................................
5
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/ Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software. ........................ 34
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer. ......................................
5
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver..................................... 41
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer. ............................................
5
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)............... 48
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer...........
7
2.4 Details of Events..........................................................
8
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)......................................... 51
2.5 Saving the Event Log. ..................................................
9
2.6 Deleting the Event Log. ................................................ 10 2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer. ............................................ 10
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/ Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only). ....... 30 4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency.................................. 30 4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound................................. 32
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)......................................... 53 5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures. ......................................... 53 5.1.2 Device Test Procedures........................................ 54 5.1.3 Log Save Procedure............................................. 55
3. Information Useful for Error Recovery............................ 11
5.2 Service Parts Replacement........................................... 56
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization................. 11
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement......................... 56 5.2.2 Covers. .............................................................. 57
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure................ 19
5.2.3 CPU Fan. ........................................................... 57
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)...................... 21
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive................................. 59
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options............................................. 23
5.2.7 Housing Fan........................................................ 61
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)....................................... 24
5.2.9 Memory.............................................................. 62
4.1 Checking the Memory................................................... 26 4.2 Checking the Hard Disk................................................ 29 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
5.2.4 Hard Disk............................................................ 58 5.2.6 CPU................................................................... 60 5.2.8 Power Supply Unit. .............................................. 61 5.2.10 Motherboard........................................................ 63
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization. ........ 64 5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup.... 66 CR-IR346CL Service Manual
3
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.1(B)).................... Appx1 MT-1 Appendix 2 Cooper Application Error Message Table...................................... Appx2 MT-1 Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function Error Message Table...................................... Appx3 MT-1 Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement Error Message Table...................................... Appx4 MT-1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
4
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
RI: Reinstalling the Software 1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)....................................
1
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS.....................................
3
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000.............................
4 2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000. ...................................... 4 2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 14 2.1.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 17
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP................................ 22 2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP. ........................ 22
5. Installing the CL-AP.......................................................... 87 5.1 Installing the CL-AP...................................................... 87 5.2 Replacing the Menu Database...................................... 91 5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS). ......................................... 91 5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other than Japanese)............................ 95
6. Installing the Screen Saver.............................................. 98
2.2.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 30
7. Installing the CL Components......................................... 99
2.2.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 36
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later). ...................................... 99
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista............................. 42
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later).......................................... 100
2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista....................... 42 2.3.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 55
8. Installing the Standard Key.............................................. 102
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2................................. 61
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key. ................................. 102
2.3.4 Setting the OS..................................................... 62
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key................................... 103
3. Setting Up the Monitor...................................................... 82
8.3 Installing the Standard Key........................................... 104
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel. ............................................ 82
9. ****BLANK****.................................................................... 105
3.2 17" CRT Monitor........................................................... 83 3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300....................... 83
10. Option Key Installation..................................................... 106
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200. ................................................ 83
11. AP Key Installation............................................................ 108
3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor...................................... 83
12. Initializing the Image Database........................................ 109
4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack......................................................... 84
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)......................... 111
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP.................................................. 84 4.2 For Windows Vista. ...................................................... 86 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
14. Restoring the CL-Config................................................... 112 15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)......... 115 CR-IR346CL Service Manual
5
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
16. CR-IR346RU Settings........................................................ 117
6. Touch Panel Driver......................................... Appx RI A-9
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility.............................................. 117
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole)............... Appx RI A-13
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server............................................ 118
8. FRIS Modules [Applicable only in Japan]....... Appx RI A-14
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config......... 120
9. DVD-RAM Driver [Applicable only in Japan].... Appx RI A-15
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings.............................................. 123 18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................................. 124 19. IIS Network Virus Protection............................................ 127 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2................................................................... 131 21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size.................................. 137 22. Setting the Event Log....................................................... 139 23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only)........... 142 24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)........................... 143
10. POCKET id Console-AP................................. Appx RI A-16 11. ActiveSync...................................................... Appx RI A-20 12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation)................................... Appx RI A-21 13. Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-22 14. Precise Enlargement Software....................... Appx RI A-23 15. Windows Mobile Device Center [Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-26 16. QA ROI Measurement Software..................... Appx RI A-27 Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name........... Appx RI B-1
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs......................... Appx RI A-1
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)............................................. Appx RI C-1
1. CL-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-2
Appendix D Upgrading the AP............................. Appx RI D-1
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server......... Appx RI A-3 2.1 For Windows 2000/XP................................ Appx RI A-3 2.2 For Windows Vista..................................... Appx RI A-4 3. RU-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-6 4. RU M-Utility..................................................... Appx RI A-7
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement.... Appx RI E-1 1. For Windows 2000/XP.................................... Appx RI E-1 2. For Windows Vista.......................................... Appx RI E-4 Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver....
Appx RI F-1
5. Option Keys.................................................... Appx RI A-8 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
6
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)............................................ Appx RI G-1 1. Installation Flow.............................................. Appx RI G-1
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size..................... Appx RI G-17 22. Setting the Event Log..................................... Appx RI G-17
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS..................... Appx RI G-3
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1....................... Appx RI H-1
3. Setting Up the Monitor.................................... Appx RI G-14
Appendix I RAID-related Settings.......................
Appx RI I-1
1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode...................
Appx RI I-1
2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration..........
Appx RI I-2
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and Installing the RAID Driver...............................
Appx RI I-4
4. RAID Structure Confirmation (only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT).........
Appx RI I-7
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack............ Appx RI G-14 5. Installing the CL-AP........................................ Appx RI G-14 5.1 Installing the CL-AP. .................................. Appx RI G-14 5.2 Replacing the Menu Database..................... Appx RI G-14 6. Installing the Screen Saver............................. Appx RI G-14 7. Installing the CL Components......................... Appx RI G-14 8. Installing the Standard Key............................. Appx RI G-14 9. ****BLANK****................................................. Appx RI G-14 10. Installing the Option Key................................. Appx RI G-14 11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the User Interface........................................... Appx RI G-14 12. Initializing the Image Database....................... Appx RI G-15 13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting the LUT file)....................................... Appx RI G-15 14. Restoring the CL-Config................................. Appx RI G-15 15. Creating the FTP Server................................. Appx RI G-15 16. CR-IR346RU Settings..................................... Appx RI G-17
5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged RAID Configuration HDD (only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)......... Appx RI I-8 5.1 Confirmimg which HDD is damaged............. Appx RI I-8 5.2 Replacing HDD. ........................................ Appx RI I-10 5.3 Rebuilding RAID........................................ Appx RI I-10 5.4 Verification................................................ Appx RI I-12 6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool (Windows XP / Vista only).............................. Appx RI I-13 6.1 Installing the RAID Status Display Tool......... Appx RI I-13 6.2
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings............. Appx RI G-17
6.3
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................ Appx RI G-17
6.4
19. IIS Network Virus Protection........................... Appx RI G-17 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2.......................... Appx RI G-17 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Setting the operation of RAID Status Display Tool............................ Appx RI I-15 Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370 (Intel® Application Accelerator).................... Appx RI I-16 Disabling RAID Status Display Tool.............. Appx RI I-16
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC) [Applicable only in Japan]............... CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI J-1
7
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
MU: Maintenance Utility 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility..................................
1
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions.............................
4
3. Various Configuration Settings — Setup Configuration Item.............................................
8
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items.................................
8
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items. .......................... 10 3.3 Saving the Configuration Data....................................... 11 3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY.............. 12 3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION.................... 24 3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION............ 28 3.7 Configuration Details — 7. CONFIG OPTION................ 55 3.8 Configuration Details — 8. CONFIG QC........................ 57 3.9 Configuration Details — 9. CONFIG PDA...................... 58
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection....... 72 8. Management of Various Databases — DataBase Utility............................................................ 74 8.1 Initializing the Image Database. .................................... 74 8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue......... 75 8.3 Initializing the Patient Database. ................................... 76 8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation Database (Only for B version). ..................................................... 77
9. Setting the Magnetic Card — Magnetic Card Setting.... 78 9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format. ......................... 78 9.2 Defining the ISO Card Character Read Code................. 78
10. Setting the Barcode — Barcode Setting......................... 79
3.10 Configuration Details — 10. CONFIG QR...................... 59
11. Customizing the QA Items — Customized QA Item....... 81
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection. ...... 60
12. Setting the Selectors — Selector Setting....................... 83
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function. ........ 61 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup................... 64 3.14 MAC Address Manual Input. ......................................... 65 3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup........................ 66
4. Display Optimization — LUT............................................ 68 5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup.................................... 69
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files — Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool.................. 84 13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier........................ 85 13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later.......................... 86
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags — DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting................................ 88
6. Retrieving EDR Data — Retrieve EDR Backup Data...... 70 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
8
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
15. Setting the POCKET id Console — P-Console Setting......................................................... 89 15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data............................... 89 15.2 Registering the Device ID. ............................................ 90 15.3 Checking Version of the POCKET id Console Application.............................. 91
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
9
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
FR: Function-specific Reference Print Output Function................................................... 1-1
DICOM Tag Mapping Function................................... 2-1
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP.................
1-2
Creating/Deleting Markers.......................................... 3-1
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format...........................................................
1-4
Using the DICOM Log Mode....................................... 4-1
2.1 Setup Items Table.....................................................
1-4
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Character Format... 1-28
Display Gradation Correction Setup.......................
5-1
3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt)....................................... 1-29
1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool...............................................
5-3
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion Tool..........................................................................
5-3
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool...............
5-4
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File. ...................................
5-4
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens).........
6-1
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the FilmStrFmt File. ...... 1-29 3.2 FilmStrFmt File Description Format. ........................... 1-30 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters................... 1-32 3.4 Format Descriptors.................................................... 1-36 3.5 Attribute Descriptors.................................................. 1-41 3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification Procedure....... 1-46
4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions................ 1-47
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function...................................................... 7-1 Wake-on-LAN Setup. ..................................................... 8-1 GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup......
9-1
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]......................... 10-1 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
10
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance.................................. 11-1 Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 12-1 Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing..................... 13-1 Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing. .. 14-1 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 15-1 Accession Number Data Truncation Function.... 16-1 Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 17-1 Setup of Date and Time Display. .............................. 18-1 Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows Vista Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 19-1
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector............. 20-1 1. Adding a Serial Connector............................................ 20-1 1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board....................................... 20-2 1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board. ..... 20-5 1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board........................................ 20-8 1.3.1 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver (for Windows XP only)....................................... 20-9 1.3.2 Mounting the MOXA Board................................. 20-10
2. Installing the Driver........................................................ 20-11 2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver. ............................ 20-11 2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver............................... 20-12 2.2.1 Installing the MOXA Board Driver (For Windows XP)............................................. 20-12 2.2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver (For Windows VIsta).......................................... 20-16 2.2.3 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver.... 20-19
3. Port and Service Utility Settings................................... 20-20 3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard Serial Connector and an Add-in Serial Connector are Used................... 20-20 3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used................... 20-22
Setting the Exposure Index Function..................... 21-1 Accession Number Character String Adding Function. ............................................................ 22-1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
11
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
SP: Service Parts 1. Service Parts List..............................................................
1
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List.......................................
1
1.2 Service Parts List. ........................................................
3
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users). ..............
8
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)...... 10
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
12
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
PM: Preventive Maintenance 1. Preventive Maintenance Items.........................................
1
2. Checking for a Fatal Error................................................
2
2.1 Confirming the Event Log. ............................................
2
3. Safety.................................................................................
2
3.1 Service Voltage............................................................
2
3.2 Power Plug. .................................................................
2
4. Hardware Cleaning............................................................
3
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning. ...................................................
3
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning.....................................
3
4.3 LCD Cleaning...............................................................
4
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning..................................................
4
5. Executing the Error Analysis...........................................
5
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk. ...........................
5
6. Functional Checks............................................................
5
6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to Storage onto HDD..........
5
6.2 Image Output to Film....................................................
5
6.3 Image Transfer.............................................................
5
7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of Date and Time....................................................................
6
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files..............................
6
7.2 Verification of Date and Time........................................
6
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
13
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357 5.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... A18
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ A1 1.1 Dimensions and Weight................................................ A1 1.2 Temperature and Humidity............................................ A1 1.3 Places of Installation..................................................... A1 1.4 Power Requirements.................................................... A1 1.5 Network Cable. ............................................................ A1
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.................................. A2 3. Installation Procedure Overview..................................... A5 4. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... A6 4.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. A6 4.2 Checking the Component Items. ................................... A7 4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................ A9 4.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... A10 4.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required only for units used in Japan)......................................... A12 4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... A12 4.3.4 Monitor............................................................... A13
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU........................... A15 4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ A15 4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment............................... A16
5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure if the 15" monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... A19 5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode. .......................... A22 5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [applicable only in Japan]...................................... A23 5.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... A23 5.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... A24 5.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... A25
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection......................................... A25 5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... A26 5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP............................................. A27
5.3 Setup with Service Utility. ............................................. A30 5.3.1 Starting the Service Utility. .................................... A30 5.3.2 CL System Information Setup................................ A31 5.3.3 Setting the LP Information..................................... A34 5.3.4 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... A35 5.3.5 Exiting the Service Utility....................................... A36 5.3.6 Changing the Menu Database (for non-Japanese versions only). .......................... A37
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses. .. A40 5.5 Procedures for Changing the CL Host Name. ................ A40 5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other Equipment. ............... A40 5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... A40
5. Software Setup.................................................................. A17 5.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. A17 5.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... A18 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
14
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
6. Checkout Procedures....................................................... A41 6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU......... A41 6.2 Checking the Connection between the CL and Other Equipment. .................................................................. A43 6.3 Checking the Output Image. ......................................... A43
7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion.......................................................... A46 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File. ...................................... A46 7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File....................................... A47 7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log........................ A49 7.3.1 Verifying the RU Error Log. ................................... A49 7.3.2 Deleting the RU Error Log..................................... A50
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU......................................... A50
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
15
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
IN-B: Installation – Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372 4.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... B27
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ B1 2. Installation Workflow........................................................ B2 3. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... B6 3.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. B6 3.2 Checking the Component Items. ................................... B7 3.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................ B10 3.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... B11 3.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required only for units used in Japan).................................. B13 3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... B13 3.3.4 Monitor............................................................... B14 3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box................................... B16
4.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... B29 4.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... B29
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility......................... B31 4.2.1 Starting the Service Utility. .................................... B31 4.2.2 CL System Information Setup................................ B32 4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... B34 4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database................................ B35
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection. ..................... B40 4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment............. B40 4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... B41 4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series) Connection. ................................................................. B42 4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility...................................... B42
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment............ B16
4.6.2 Setups Necessary for the CL................................. B42
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ B17
4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR.................................. B44
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core............................................. B17
4. CL Software Setup............................................................ B18 4.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. B19 4.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... B20 4.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... B21 4.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure if the 15” monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... B22
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information. .... B46 4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing Function) Setup................................................... B47 4.6.6 Saving Configuration............................................ B47 4.6.7 Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in device is connected)............................................. B48 4.6.8 Settings for Transfer of Image Processing Parameters (only for A02 and A03)......................... B50 4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup. ....... B52
4.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode. .......................... B25
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection............................. B53
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [applicable only in Japan]...................................... B26
4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... B56
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility................. B54
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
16
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit). .......................... B58 4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)............. B61 4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address. ................................ B62 4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing function).................................................. B62 4.7.7 Setting the Selector.............................................. B62 4.7.8 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More CLs............................................................ B63 4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files.... B63
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection......... B64 4.8.1 Changing the CL IP Address. ................................ B64 4.8.2 Performing Setup with the Service Utility................. B64 4.8.3 IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing function) Setup.................................................... B67 4.8.4 Selector Setup..................................................... B67 4.8.5 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More CLs............................................................ B69 4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup......................... B69 4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup. ....... B71 4.8.8 Wake-on-LAN Setup. ........................................... B71
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
17
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
IN-C: Installation – Connection to 9000 Series Equipment 1. CL Installation Conditions [Applicable only in Japan]................................................ C1
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
18
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Appx IN: Installation – Appendix Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver............................. Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config.........
Appx IN1-1 Appx IN2-1
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option].....................
Appx IN3-1
1. Connecting the Barcode Reader to the CL...............................................................
Appx IN3-1
2. Performing Setup for IP Barcode Use...........
Appx IN3-1
3. Setup for Type B ID Online Operations.........
Appx IN3-1
4. DENSO Barcode Reader.................................
Appx IN3-3
5. OPTOELECTRONICS Barcode Reader..........
Appx IN3-4
Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses....
Appx IN5-1
1. Incorporating into the Network......................
Appx IN5-1
2. Changing the Software Settings....................
Appx IN5-1
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor Rack [Option]. ........................
Appx IN6-1
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket [Option].....................................
Appx IN7-1
Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host Name..........................................
Appx IN8-1
1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used..............
Appx IN8-1
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]..........................
Appx IN4-1
2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used................
Appx IN8-5
1. Installing the Wall-Mounting Bracket............
Appx IN4-1
2. Connecting the CL to the Reader..................
Appx IN4-2
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP Address. ...................................
Appx IN9-1
3. Setting the Reader and Magnetic Card.........
Appx IN4-3
4. Hospital Card Data Format Setup Example [Reference].......................................
Appx IN4-6
5. ID Card Data Format [Reference]...................
Appx IN4-10
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
19
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Appendix 10 Connecting a High-resolution Monitor.... 1. Mounting a High-resolution Monitor Board (When a 1600×1200 or 2048×1536 Resolution Monitor is Used).......................... 2. Installing a High-resolution Monitor Driver (When a 1600×1200 or 2048×1536 Resolution Monitor is Used)..........................
Appx IN10-1
Appx IN10-1
4.3.2 Setting the monitor........................
Appx IN10-1
4. Reinstalling the Application and Performing Necessary Settings.....................
Appx IN10-7
Appx IN11-1
1. Uninstalling the Video Driver.........................
Appx IN11-2
2. Connecting the Video Board..........................
Appx IN11-4
3. Installing the Monitor......................................
Appx IN11-5
4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver.........
Appx IN11-6
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-20 Appx IN11-23
4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-25 4.4.1 Installing the video driver................
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor......................................
4.1.2 Setting the monitor........................
Appx IN11-13 Appx IN11-15
4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-20 4.3.1 Installing the video driver................
Appx IN10-5
4.1.1 Installing the video driver................
4.2.1 Installing the video driver................ 4.2.2 Setting the monitor........................
3. Changing to a High-resolution Monitor (1280×1024, 1600×1200 or 2048×1536 monitor)............................................................
4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows XP..........................................
4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP.......................................... Appx IN11-13
Appx IN11-25 4.4.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-29 4.5 When No Video Boards Are Added. ............ Appx IN11-33 4.5.1 Connecting the monitor.................. Appx IN11-33 4.5.2 Setting the monitor........................ Appx IN11-34 4.6 Adjusting Width and Height on the 2nd Monitor (Common to VREngine/SMD5 and FireGL V3600)..................................... Appx IN11-36
5. Changing and Setting the 2nd Monitor......... Appx IN11-37 5.1 Changing the 2nd Monitor........................... Appx IN11-37 5.2 Settings Necessary for the 2nd Monitor to Recognize the Linking Application............... Appx IN11-37
Appx IN11-6 Appx IN11-6 Appx IN11-9
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
20
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)........................
1-1
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output)......................................... 2-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
1-3
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
2-3
1.1 Installing the PEI Board. ............................................
1-3
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................
1-5
2. Software Setup...............................................................
2-4
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation. .......
2-4
2. Software Setup...............................................................
1-6
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................
2-5
2.1 CL Software Setup....................................................
1-6 1-6 1-7 1-8
2.3 Service Utility Startup. ...............................................
2-5
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to Other Connected Equipment...............................................
2-6
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES).......................
2-7
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key. .............................. 2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. .................................... 2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility. ................................. 2.1.4 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed – CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..............................
1-9
2.1.5 Setting the System Information for CL/LP Connection. ..................................................... 1-10 2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation Character Format....... 1-10 2.1.7 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 1-11
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE). .......................... 2-10 2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution (DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 2-11 2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 2-12
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup.............................................. 1-11
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other Connected Equipment. ............................................................... 2-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 1-12
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown............................................ 2-14
3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 1-12
2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 2-14
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 1-13
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 2-15
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 1-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 2-15 3.2 Image Input/output Checkout..................................... 2-15
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 2-16
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
21
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)...................................................... 3-1
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)................................. 4-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
3-3
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
4-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
3-4
2. Software Setup...............................................................
4-4
2.1 CL Software Setup....................................................
2.1 CL Software Setup....................................................
4-4
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup. .......................................
3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function. .......................
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility. .................................
4-4 4-5 4-5
3-6
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function. .......................
4-6
3-9 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-16 3-16
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function....
4-9
2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage Option Key....... 2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution. ............. 2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance................................... 2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements. ........................... 2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ...................................
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 3-16
2.1.1 Installing the Processed Image Transmission Option Key..... 2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ....................................
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution (DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 4-13 2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 4-14 2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance................................... 4-15 2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements. ........................... 4-17 2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ................................... 4-17
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 3-17
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 4-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 3-17
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 4-18
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment.......... 3-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 4-18
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 3-18
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment.......... 4-18
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 4-19
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
22
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print). ..
5-1
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)....................................................... 6-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
5-2
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
6-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
5-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
6-4
2.1 CL Software Setup....................................................
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation. .......
6-4
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................
6-5
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup. .......................................
5-3 5-3 5-4 5-4
2.3 Service Utility Startup. ...............................................
6-5
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM Print Function..............................
2.4 Printout Setup...........................................................
6-6
5-5
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM Print Function..............
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES).......................
6-7
5-8
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE). .......................... 6-10
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option Key. .......... 2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That Automatically Outputs Print Films Upon Completion of Checkout – CONNECTING EQUIPMENT.............................. 5-12 2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format Setup.............. 5-13 2.1.8 Changes in Name Elements............................... 5-14 2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function........................... 5-14
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed – CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..................................... 6-11 2.6 Service Utility Shutdown............................................ 6-12
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ................................... 5-14
2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 6-12
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 5-14
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 6-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 5-15
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 6-13
3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 5-15
3.2 Printout Checkout...................................................... 6-13
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 5-16
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 6-14
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 5-17
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
23
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online).............................................. 7-1
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)........................
8-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
7-2
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
8-3
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector [Only when using the serial i/f]....................................
7-2
2. Software Setup...............................................................
8-4
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................
7-3
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation. ..
8-4
2. CL Software Setup.........................................................
7-4
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................
8-5
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation.......
7-4
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function. ........................
8-5
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................
7-5
2.3 Driver Installation. .....................................................
7-5
2.4 Service Utility Startup. ...............................................
7-6
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup.....................................
7-7
2.6 Configuration Setup...................................................
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM Function. ......................................................... 2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information. .......................... 2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM......................
8-5 8-8 8-9
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function. .......................... 8-10 2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS Function. ......................................................... 8-10
7-7 2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection............... 7-8 2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection.................. 7-10
2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information. .......................... 8-11
2.7 Service Utility Shutdown............................................ 7-12
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup. ................................ 8-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 7-13
2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS............. 8-14
3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 7-13 3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout..................... 7-14
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 7-16
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS...................... 8-12 2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS.......................... 8-13 2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items.................. 8-15 2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017 Guideline......................................................... 8-15 2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the RIS. ....................................................... 8-16 2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study Termination Notice............................................ 8-16 2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a PPS Standard Tag. .................................................. 8-17
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
24
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup............................ 8-17 2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a Menu Name................................................... 8-18 2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function.......... 8-19 2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3................ 8-21
2.6 Changing Name Elements......................................... 8-23 2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping. ........ 8-23
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 8-25 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 8-25 3.2 Verifying MWM.......................................................... 8-25 3.3 Verifying PPS............................................................ 8-25
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 8-26
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)...........
9-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
9-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
9-4
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys............
9-4
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key....
9-5
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................
9-5
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup........................
9-6
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function. ................................
9-6
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function. ................................
9-8
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name..................................... 9-10
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 9-11 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 9-11 3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver......................... 9-11
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 9-12
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
25
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images).............. 10-1
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 11-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 10-3 2. Software Setup............................................................... 10-4 2.1 CL Software Setup.................................................... 10-4 2.1.1 Option Key Installation....................................... 10-4 2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................ 10-5 2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment................ 10-5 2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information...................... 10-10 2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be Transferred...................................................... 10-15 2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution Function. ......................................................... 10-15 2.1.7 Changing Name Elements.................................. 10-16
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup............................................. 10-16
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 10-17 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 10-17 3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS.................................... 10-17
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 10-18
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
26
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)............. 12-1 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 12-2 1.1 Adding a Serial Connector......................................... 12-2
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 13-1 CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System [Applicable only in Japan].......... 14-1
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................ 12-3 1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography X-CON]. ........................ 12-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 12-4 2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key. ..... 12-4 2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 12-5 2.3 Installing the Driver.................................................... 12-5 2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility........................ 12-5 2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON........................... 12-6 2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]. ........................ 12-9
3. Verifying the Connection/Data Exchange.................... 12-10 3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection.................................. 12-10 3.2 Checking the Data Exchange..................................... 12-11
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 12-12 5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]............................... 12-13
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
27
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)...................................... 15-1
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)................................... 16-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 15-2
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 16-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 15-3
2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 16-3
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs......................................... 15-3
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu. .. 16-3
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name.................................... 15-3 2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image Database......................................................... 15-4
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission Option Keys.............................................................. 16-4
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings................... 15-5 2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table Settings........................................................... 15-6
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function.................................................................... 16-5
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing. .................... 15-11 2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup................................. 15-18 2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup......... 15-20 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.................................. 15-21 2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings............. 15-22
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs. ............................. 15-25
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 16-4
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function. .............................. 16-8 2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE).............................. 16-12 2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT.................... 16-13 2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method.......................... 16-13
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup.... 15-25
2.9 Changing the Name Elements.................................... 16-14
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information Management Setup........................................... 15-27
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 16-15
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup............................... 15-28
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 16-15
3. Connection Verification................................................. 15-29 3.1 Study Registration..................................................... 15-29
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment.......... 16-15
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 16-16
3.2 Image Reading.......................................................... 15-30 3.3 Study Information and Image Display......................... 15-30
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 15-31 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
28
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)... 17-1
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function). .................................. 18-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 17-3
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 18-2
2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 17-3 2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver................. 17-4
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console...... 18-2 1.2 Adding the Serial Connector. ..................................... 18-2
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key............... 17-5
2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 18-3
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key....................................... 17-5
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console......... 18-3
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function........................... 17-6
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key. ............................. 18-6
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings........................ 17-10 2.6 Configuration Settings. .............................................. 17-11
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 17-12 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 17-12 3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media. ..................... 17-12 3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media............................. 17-12 3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media...................... 17-12 3.2.3 Image Storage.................................................. 17-13
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 17-14
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 18-6 2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console. .......................... 18-7 2.4.1 Setting Date and Time....................................... 18-7 2.4.2 Setting the Device ID......................................... 18-8 2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties. ................................. 18-9 2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed............................. 18-12
2.5 Registering the Device ID. ......................................... 18-13 2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application........................... 18-14 2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application....... 18-14 2.6.2 Setting Up the POCKET id Console Service Utility. ............... 18-16 2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for the POCKET id Console. ................................... 18-17 2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application and Transferring the Configuration File....................... 18-18
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
29
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
3. Connection Verification................................................. 18-21
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query). ........................... 19-1
3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 18-21 3.2 Transferring Study Reception Information from the CL to the POCKET id Console...................... 18-21 3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode. .............. 18-22
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 19-2 2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 19-3 2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP............................................... 19-3
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result. ................................................. 18-23
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only)........... 19-3
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 18-24
2.4 Installing the CL-AP................................................... 19-4
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software........................ 19-4 2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application............ 19-5 2.6 Setting System Environment Variables....................... 19-6 2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings................. 19-8 2.8 Setting the User Utility............................................... 19-9
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 19-10 3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 19-10 3.2 Web Query Checkout. ............................................... 19-10
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 19-12
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
30
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint).......................... 20-1
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 21-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 20-3 2. Software Setup............................................................... 20-4 2.1 CL Software Setup.................................................... 20-4 2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option Key................................................................. 20-4 2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. .................................... 20-5 2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition.............................. 20-5 2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition.............. 20-8 2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.................... 20-12 2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 20-14 2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................... 20-16 2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR.......................................... 20-16 2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 20-18
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 20-18
3. Verification...................................................................... 20-19 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 20-19 3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server.... 20-20 3.3 Checking Film Output Images.................................... 20-20
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 20-21
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
31
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)........................ 22-1
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter). ...................... 23-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 22-2
1. Hardware Setup............................................................. 23-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 22-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 23-3
2.1 Installing the PDI Application...................................... 22-3
2.1 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 23-3
2.2 Installing the Option Key............................................ 22-4
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items.................................. 23-5
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 22-6
2.3 Exiting the Service Utility. .......................................... 23-7
2.4 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 22-6 2.5 Setting the Configuration Items.................................. 22-7 2.6 Exiting the Service Utility............................................. 22-9 2.7 Editing the Institution Information. .............................. 22-9
3. Verification...................................................................... 22-10 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 22-10 3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function....... 22-11 3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R. ...................................... 22-12
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 22-14
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Verification...................................................................... 23-8 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 23-8 3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP................................... 23-8 3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information................................................................ 23-9 3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product Information................................................................ 23-10 3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled........... 23-10 3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled. ..... 23-10 3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled........... 23-10
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 23-11
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
32
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
Precise Enlargement Function.................................. 24-1
QA ROI Measurement. .................................................. 25-1
1. Software Setup............................................................... 24-2
1. Software Setup............................................................... 25-2
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software.... 24-3
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software............. 25-2
1.1.1 For Software V7.1............................................. 24-3
1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 25-5
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later. ................................ 24-8
1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 24-10 1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key.... 24-11 1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 24-11 1.5 Setting the System.................................................... 24-12 1.5.1 Setting the OS.................................................. 24-12 1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility. .................................. 24-12 1.5.3 Setting the User Utility....................................... 24-13 1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item..................................... 24-14
2. Confirming the Settings................................................ 24-16 2.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 24-16 2.2 Confirming the Image Display. ................................... 24-16
3. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 24-17 3.1 For Software V7.1. .................................................... 24-17
1.3 Installing the Option Key............................................ 25-5 1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 25-6 1.5 Setting the System.................................................... 25-6 1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility. .................................. 25-6 1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor.... 25-7
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement.................................................................. 25-9 3. Confirming the Settings................................................ 25-11 3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 25-11 3.2 Confirming Image Display.......................................... 25-11
4. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 25-13 4.1 Backup. .................................................................... 25-13 4.2 Restore..................................................................... 25-15
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later......................................... 24-17 3.2.1 Backup............................................................ 24-17 3.2.2 Restore. .......................................................... 24-19
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function.............. 24-20 5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function............... 24-21 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
33
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)....................................... 26-1 1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 26-2 2. Software Setup............................................................... 26-3 2.1 Installing the Option Key............................................ 26-3 2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 26-4 2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder...................... 26-5 2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows XP..................................................... 26-5 2.3.2 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows Vista.................................................. 26-6
2.4 Setting the Configuration Items.................................. 26-8
3. Verification...................................................................... 26-13 4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 26-14
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
34
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
PC: Performance Check CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist — Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357 —........................
1
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist — Connection to two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/359/ 362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372 —..........................
2
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist — 9000 Series Connection — [Applicable only in Japan]................................................
3
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List..............................................
4
1.
IMAGE MODALITY.......................................................
4
2.
FINP SETUP................................................................
5
3.
QA FUNCTION. ...........................................................
5
4.
PRINTER.....................................................................
5
5.
CSL/IDT FUNCTION. ...................................................
7
7.
CONFIG OPTION......................................................... 10
8.
CONFIG QC. ............................................................... 10
9.
CONFIG PDA............................................................... 11
10. CONFIG QR. ............................................................... 11
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List.................... 12
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
35
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
36
Introduction
Introduction Notes on the Use of the Service Manual
1.
This document is intended to be read by the service personnel of FUJIFILM Corporation or authorized agent who is commissioned by FUJIFILM Corporation to perform servicing tasks. Under these circumstances, no one is allowed to perform the following actions without the prior written permission from
FUJIFILM Corporation.
Duplicating or reproducing this document in whole or in part Disclosing this document, in whole or in part, to a person other than the authorized service personnel Lending or transferring this document, in whole or in part, to a third party
2.
Due care must be exercised when handling this document because it contains product internal structure descriptions and other confidential information. * When the contents of this document need be changed, the information about such changes will be conveyed using “Engineering Change Notice (ECN)”. The “Engineering Change Notice (ECN)” must also be handled using the same care as for this document.
3.
4.
Due to a product development schedule, the product specifications and available options/variations prevailing at the time of the release of this document may differ from the descriptions given in this document. In such an instance, a Service Engineering Information will be issued as needed to furnish latest information about inapplicable specifications and components. If you have any doubt about the contents of this document or find errors, contact your local FUJIFILM representative.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Warning and Cautionary Information Precautions during the service work are indicated by the following terms and symbols.
WARNING Serious injuries or death may result if this precaution is not observed. Damage of the unit and customer database may also occur.
CAUTION Mild or moderate injuries may result if this precaution is not observed. Serious malfunction (which may be unrepairable or difficult to repair) may also occur.
➤ IMPORTANT Abnormal equipment operations (easy to repair) may result if this precaution is not observed.
NOTE Indicates items which require particular attention during the necessary work procedure.
➥ REFERENCE Explanation of related items and terms.
Screen Displays According to Different OSs This manual uses either of the Windows 2000/XP/Vista screen displays. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
37
Introduction
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate. If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed. Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below. The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools.
CAUTIONS ● The grounding wire must be connected. ● To avoid damages to the parts/units due to static discharge, use a wrist strap putting one end on your wrist and the other end on the grounded section of the equipment, as illustrated below. ● When doing so, make sure to unplug the power connector from the socket to avoid electrical hazards.
Wrist strap
● Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration Name
Inspection
Calibration
Digital multimeter
Precautionary Labels To prevent danger to humans and serious accidents, observe the following.
WARNINGS ● Unless indicated otherwise, be sure to turn off the power switch before maintenance work, and disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Even if the power switch is OFF, 100 to 240VAC (differs according to machine specifications) will still be supplied to the primary input terminal of the unit if the power cable is connected, and this may result in possible electric hazards.
00010003.EPS
● When performing settings for several software programs, ensure that applications other than those of specified procedures must have been shut down appropriately.
● As neckties, scarves, and necklaces may get caught in the unit during work, remove these items or take precautions against such accidents. ● Never modify the unit unless otherwise specified. Modification of the safety unit (interlock, breaker, temperature fuse, etc.) will cause serious problems as it is not only dangerous but violates the related laws and regulations.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
38
Introduction
The unit is also pasted with precautionary labels. Follow the instructions on the labels when carrying out work.
■ CR-IR 348CL (Mobile model) Identification label
■ CR-IR 348CL (Lite) / CR-IR 348CL Plus Year of manufacture label Identification label
CR-IR348CL (Mobile model) CR-IR348CL (Lite) CR-IR348CL Plus
00010014.EPS
Identification label CL01002.EPS
Identification label
Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly Use Period) label
2007 Sample year of manufacture 00010015.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
39
Introduction
■ NEC PC NEC product label WEEE label CE label Identification label
00010011.EPS
Identification labels CR-IR348CL (Lite)
CR-IR348CL Plus
CR-IR348CL (Mobile model)
00010012.EPS
CE labels CR-IR348CL (Lite)
CR-IR348CL Plus
CR-IR348CL (Mobile model)
00010013.EPS
WEEE label
00010016.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
40
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions Safety Precautions (Control Unit) Follow the precautions below when installing, using, and servicing the control unit (PC). See the User’s Guide provided for details on the control unit. Input voltage : 115V or 230V Electric hazard prevention : The power cord of the control unit and CRT monitor uses a 3-pin plug. Connect it to a properly grounded power outlet. When using an extension cord, use a 3-line type with a grounding pin. Place of installation : Avoid places where dust and foreign particles may enter inside through the computer opening. Avoid installing near heaters and heat sources. Precautions when working on internal parts of the control unit : (1) Turn off the power of the PC, CRT, and other peripheral devices. (2) Disconnect the power cord from the outlet to prevent electric hazard. (3) Open the I/O panel on the rear of the PC, touch the metallic part to fully discharge body static electricity before accessing. (4) When removing the board and memory module, etc., hold them without directly touching the connectors and pins and place them in a static electricity prevention package.
Safety Precautions (CRT monitor) WARNING High voltage is applied inside the CRT monitor. To prevent electric hazards and danger, the CRT internal parts cannot be accessed. The CRT monitor does not consist of parts serviceable by the service engineer. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
41
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) This equipment complies with the EMC standards applicable to medical devices, in accordance with the requirements of IEC60601-1-2 :2001 + A1 2004/EN60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006. However, there is no guarantee that harmful electromagnetic interference will not occur in any installation environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy. In a particular environment, e.g., the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions or any device that is not compliant with the EMC Standard is used in a surrounding area, harmful interference may result, causing the equipment or surrounding device to malfunction. If this equipment causes harmful interference to other equipment or receives harmful interference from other equipment, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
This Service Manual contains the names of standards applied in IEC 60601-1-2. The names of standards applied in EN 60601-1-2 are replaced as follows. IEC 60601-1-2 (Descriptions in this Service Manual)
Standards applied in EN 60601-1-2
CISPR 11
EN 55011
IEC 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61000-3-3
EN 61000-3-3
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-8
IEC 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-11
Reorient or relocate the equipment. Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected equipment. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the affected equipment is connected. If the problem persists, discontinue the use of the equipment and consult the manufacturer of the affected equipment or FUJIFILM JAPAN.
WARNING Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this equipment.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
42
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001 (1) Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in the accompanying documents. (2) Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical equipment. (3) Information of all cables and their maximum lengths and accessories that may affect EMC. Name Network cable
Specification Cat5e or more, UTP-type straight cable
(4) The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of transducers and cables sold by [FUJIFILM Corporation] as replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the [CR-IR346CL/348CL]. (5) The [CR-IR346CL/348CL] should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the [CR-IR346CL/348CL] should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used. (6) Test items (Tables 1 to 4) Table 1 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CRIR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment. Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance The CR-IR346CL/348CL uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, RF emissions its RF emissions are very low and are Group 1 CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment. RF emissions Class A The CR-IR346CL/348CL is suitable for CISPR 11 use in all establishments other than Harmonic emissions Class D domestic and those directly connected to IEC 61000-3-2 the public low-voltage power supply Voltage fluctuations/ network that supplies buildings used for Not flicker emissions domestic purposes. complied. IEC 61000-3-3 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
43
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Table 2 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment. Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance ±6kV contact ±2kV contact ±4kV contact ±6kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered Electrostatic discharge (ESD) with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%. IEC61000-4-2 ±2kV air ±8kV air ±4kV air ±8kV air ±2kV for power supply lines ±2kV for power supply lines Electrical fast transient/burst Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital IEC61000-4-4 environment. ±1kV for input/output lines ±1kV for input/output lines ±0.5kV, ±1kV differential ±1kV differential mode mode Surge Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital IEC61000-4-5 environment. ±2kV common mode ±0.5kV, ±1kV, ±2kV common mode 95% dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations of power supply input lines IEC61000-4-11
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles
95% dip in UT) for 5 s
95% dip in UT) for 5 s
Power frequency (50/60Hz) magnetic field 3 A/m 3 A/m IEC61000-4-8 NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the CR-IR346CL/348CL be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a battery.
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
44
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Table 3 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment. Immunity test Conducted RF IEC61000-4-6
IEC 60601 test level 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Compliance level 3 Vrms
Electromagnetic environment - guidance Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the CR-IR346CL/348CL, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter. Recommended separation distance
Radiated RF IEC61000-4-3
3 V/m 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
80 MHz to 800 MHz
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m). Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey,a should be less than the compliance level in each frequency range.b Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies. NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people. a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CR-IR346CL/348CL is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR346CL/348CL should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR346CL/348CL. b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
45
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Table 4 Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR346CL/348CL The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the CR-IR346CL/348CL as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment. Rated maximum output power of transmitter W
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter m 150 kHz to 80 MHz
80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer. NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies. NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
46
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual: PC : Hardware (personal computer) used in the CR-IR346CL or CR-IR348CL controller CL : CR-IR346CL, CR-IR348CL RU : CR-IR346RU OS : Operating System (Windows 2000/XP/Vista) AP : Application Software
Name of the Target Product of This Manual: Note that the target product name of this manual has been changed from “FCR XG1” to “FCR XG-1”. Read thus “XG1” appearing in this manual “XG-1”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
47
Caution for Handling Personal Information
Caution for Handling Personal Information ● Discarding the Equipment When disposing of the CR-IR 346CL/348CL, be sure to completely discard any private information stored on it.
● When to Obtain and to Bring Out Personal Information Follow the operating procedures under the Private Information Protection Law and prescribed by your local FUJIFILM representative. When you collect logs, use such as a security-ensured jig provided by your local FUJIFILM representative, and handle the medium with adequate care.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
48
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
MD: Machine Description
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-I
MD: Machine Description
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
Reason
04/10/2001 05/30/2001
01 02
05/30/2001 08/30/2001 08/30/2001 03/20/2002 07/20/2002 11/30/2002 03/01/2003 03/01/2003 08/20/2003 08/20/2003 12/10/2003 12/10/2003 02/20/2004
02 03 03 04 05 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10
07/30/2004 11/12/2004
11 12
11/12/2004 07/30/2005
12 14
New release (FM2951) Revision for software version A02 and GX150 (FM3027) Changes in pagination (FM3027) Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) Changes in pagination (FM3125) Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) Revision for software version A08 (FM3428) Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) Changes in pagination (FM3634) Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) Changes in pagination (FM4009) Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) Changes in pagination (FM4158) A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220) Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) Revision for software V1.0(C), support provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) Changes in pagination (FM4450) Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543)
07/30/2005 11/30/2005 07/30/2006 07/30/2006 07/20/2007 07/20/2007 05/09/2008 05/09/2008 10/31/2008
14 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19
Changes in pagination (FM4543) Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) Changes in pagination (FM4952) Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) Changes in pagination (FM5201) Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) Changes in pagination (FM5356) Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460)
10/31/2008 11/30/2009
19 20
Changes in pagination (FM5460) Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622)
11/30/2009
20
Changes in pagination (FM5622)
03/31/2010
21
Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670)
03/31/2010
21
Changes in pagination (FM5670)
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Pages affected All pages I, II, 1–11, 14 12, 13, 15, 16 I, II, 1–8, 11, 14, 17, 18 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16 I, II, 7, 8, 10, 15, 16, 18 I, II, 1–3, 6-8, 10 I, II, 5, 7–12, 19-22 I, II, 1–8, 13, 15, 20, 26 9–12, 14, 16–19, 21–25 I, II, 10–16, 21 17–20, 22–26 I–IV, 1, 3, 4, 9, 12–16, 28 10, 11, 17–27 All pages I, II, 2, 3, 12–14, 17, 22 I, II, 1–4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14 11, 12, 15–28 I, II, 1, 4, 7, 8, 11–14, 17–19, 21–23, 28, 34 15, 16, 20, 24–27, 29–33 I, II, 16, 17, 22, 23 I–IV, 1, 3, 4, 15, 16, 20, 28 17–19, 21–27, 29–36 I, II, 1, 3, 4, 17–19, 21, 22, 28, 29 20, 23–27, 30–40 I, II, 1, 4, 20–22, 24, 25, 29, 31, 32 23, 26–28, 30, 33–42 I–IV, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 10, 12-14, 16, 18, 19, 21–23, 26, 27, 29, 32, 33, 44 24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 34–43 I, II, 1, 3, 5, 17, 26–28, 30, 33, 35, 37, 38 4, 6-16, 18–25, 29, 31, 32, 34, 36, 39–48 I, II, 1–3, 5–12, 14–18, 20, 21, 23–29, 38–43, 50–52 30–37, 44–49
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-II
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
12/10/2010 12/10/2010
22 22
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817) Changes in pagination (FM5817)
Pages affected I, III, 1, 5, 30, 34, 40 31-33, 35-39, 41-50
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-IV
1. System Configuration
1. System Configuration This section shows the system configuration, which includes the CR-IR346/348CL application, and the operating environment for the PC. The application is to be installed on the following PCs. The PC to be used varies with the image reader specification. PC used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) connection Dell OptiPlex GX110 (Pentium type), etc. Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type), 755 (Dual Core type) etc. NEC Model N8368-B0045S01 BASIC UNIT (Pentium type, for European use only): Hereinafter referred to as “NEC PC”.*1 NEC Model N8368-B0045S02 BASIC UNIT (Celeron type, for European use only): Hereinafter referred to as “NEC PC”.*1
For 5000MA connection Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270 (Pentium type), etc. Dell Precision WS330, 340 (Pentium type), etc. Previously used CR Console Dell OptiPlex GX150 (Pentium type), etc. Mobile models Dell Precision WS360, 370, 380 (Pentium RAID type), etc. Dell Precision WS390 (Core 2 Duo type) NEC N8368-B0045503 BASIC UNIT (Pentium or RAID type - for European use only) Dell Precision T3400 (Core 2 Duo type) Dell OptiPlex 960, 780 (Core 2 Duo type) *1 *2
The NEC PC is compatible with EMC: IEC60601-1-2: 2001. 9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan.
PC used for 5000 plus (5000 series + CL) or CL-RU N:N connection and 9000 series connection*2 CR Console Plus Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270, 280, 620 (Pentium type), etc. Dell OptiPlex 745, 755, 760, 780 (Core 2 Duo type) NEC Model N8368-B0045S01 BASIC UNIT (Pentium type, for European use only): Hereinafter referred to as “NEC PC”.*1 CR Console Lite Dell OptiPlex GX50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type), 755, 760, 780 (Dual Core type) etc. NEC Model N8368-B0045S02 BASIC UNIT (Celeron type, for European use only): Hereinafter referred to as “NEC PC”.*1 For CR Console MINI (Applicable only in Japan) Dell OptiPlex 745, 755 (Dual Core type) HP Compaq dc7800 SF, dc7900 SF (Dual Core type) HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF (Dual Core type) 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-1
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection
Operating environment PC main unit
System configuration
Item
PC main unit
Mother board (video terminal: onboard) Video RAM
E-IDE -i/f
Monitor
CR-IR346CL application CD
System area/image area (drive C) Option key CD
Network i/f LP connection i/f (PEI01A board: optional) X-CON/RIS connection i/f (PSI04A board: optional) USB connector
Celeron
; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
System memory
512MB or more
VRAM
4MB or more
HDD
IDE, 6.4GB or more, 5400 rpm or higher
FDD
3.5" 2-mode
CD-ROM drive
24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
Expansion card slots
PCI bus slot × 2 (half-size PCI board)
Network
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
OS
Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional
Other
RS-232C × 1, USB × 2
Monitor Item
USB connector
Accessories Barcode Magnetic (keyboard reader card reader and mouse) (optional) (optional)
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Pentium III ; clock frequency: 500 MHz or higher
CPU
Video cable
Description
Description
Display resolution
1024 × 768 pixels or higher
Number of display colors
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
00000042.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-2
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
Item CPU
PC main unit
Description Celeron
; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
Core 2 Duo ; clock frequency: 1.86 GHz or higher (*4)
Mother board (video terminal: onboard) Video RAM
Video cable
Monitor
CR-IR348CL application CD
System area/image area (drive C) Network i/f
Option key CD
LP connection i/f, 9000 series connection i/f* (PEI01A board: optional) X-CON/RIS connection i/f, 9000 series connection i/f* (PSI04A board: optional)
USB
PC main unit Pentium III ; clock frequency: 1 GHz or higher (*1)
System configuration
E-IDE -i/f
Operating environment
USB
Removable media (DVD)
USB USB
POCKET id Console (Applicable only in Japan)
System memory 512MB or more (*5) VRAM
4MB or more
HDD
IDE, 40GB or more, 7200 rpm or higher (*2)
FDD
3.5" 2-mode
CD-ROM drive
24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
Expansion card slots
PCI bus slot × 2 (half-size PCI board)
Network
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
OS
Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Business
Other
RS-232C × 1, USB × 3 (*3)
*1 : Pentium IV; clock frequency: 1.5GHz or higher when the FCR 5000MA plus is connected. *2 : SATA 160GBx2 (RAID1 type) for the mobile model. (60GB or more for Windows Vista) *3 : For the mobile model, one port is used for the external memory unit (DVD). *4 : Set up a single CPU by using BIOS. (For software version V6.0 (B) or later, the operation is possible with a Multi CPU.) *5 : “1GB or more” is required for software version V6.0(B) or later. (A “2GB or more” size is required for Windows Vista.)
Accessories Barcode Magnetic Remote power (keyboard reader card reader control switch box and mouse) (optional) (optional) (only for 5000 plus connection) MD000010.EPS
* 9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-3
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
Monitor (15" LCD, 17" CRT) Item
Description
Display resolution
1024 × 768 pixels or higher
Number of display colors
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
Monitor (SL-IC300) See manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
Monitor (SL-IC200) See manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-4
2. Connectors and Slots
2. Connectors and Slots This section shows the locations of the following PC connectors, memory modules, and PC board mounting slots. Dell OptiPlex GX110 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60 Dell OptiPlex GX260 Dell OptiPlex GX270 Dell Precision WS340 Dell Precision WS330 NEC PC Dell OptiPlex GX280 Dell Precision WS360 Dell Precision WS370 Dell OptiPlex GX620 Dell Precision WS380 Dell OptiPlex 745 Dell Precision WS390 Dell OptiPlex 755 Dell Precision T3400 HP Compaq dc7800 SF Dell OptiPlex 760 Dell OptiPlex 960 HP Compaq dc7900 SF Dell OptiPlex 780 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-5
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110
Memory modules The maximum amount of memory (512MB) is factory installed prior to shipment. Therefore, no more memory can be added.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
B A
Expansion card slots
00000264.EPS
Connectors (PC rear panel) Memory slots
Serial port 2 connector Video connector
Mouse connector Parallel port connector
00000261.EPS
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots.
1
2
Serial port 1 connector NIC connector USB port (2-port) Keyboard connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346CL. 00000262.EPS
PCI2 PCI1
00000263.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-6
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
F R O N T
DIMM sockets
Memory slots System board A B MD000015.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Expansion card slots MD000012.EPS
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots. PCI2 PCI1
MD000014.EPS
Mouse connector Parallel port connector
NIC connector Video connector
GX150, 50 Serial port 1 connector Serial port 2 connector Mouse connector Parallel port connector
Keyboard connector
USB port (2-port) NIC connector
GX60 Serial port connector Video connector
Keyboard USB port (4-port) connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL. MD000013.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-7
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
F R O N T
Memory slots
DIMM sockets
Expansion card slots
System board
A B MD000098.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) MD000099.EPS
Mouse connector Parallel port connector
NIC connector
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI2 to PCI4. F R O N T
Serial port connector
AGP
Video connector
PCI1 1
2
3
4
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board
USB port (4-port)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
PCI2 PCI3 PCI4
System board
Keyboard connector
MD000101.EPS
MD000100.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-8
2.4 Dell Precision WS340
2.4 Dell Precision WS340
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
F R O N T
Memory slots
RIMM sockets
Expansion card slots
System board
3 4 1 2 MD000097.EPS
MD000104.EPS
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to PCI4. F R O N T
1
2
3
4
AGP (Video board) PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4
System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Mouse connector Parallel port connector
NIC connector Video connector
Serial port 1 connector Serial port 2 connector
USB port (2-port) Keyboard connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. MD000103.EPS
MD000115.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-9
2.5 Dell Precision WS330
2.5 Dell Precision WS330
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
FRONT
3
4
Memory slots
1
2
Expansion card slots
RIMM sockets System board MD000094.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) System board
Mouse connector Parallel port connector
MD000092.EPS
NIC connector Video connector
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots PCI2 to PCI5. FRONT
Serial port 2 connector
AGP (Video board) PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5
Serial port 1 connector
USB port (4-port) Keyboard connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000095.EPS
MD000093.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-10
2.6 Dell OptiPlex GX270
2.6 Dell OptiPlex GX270
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
System board
F R O N T
MD000108.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) MD000106.EPS
Expansion card slots
Mouse connector Parallel port connector
NIC connector
A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI2 to PCI4. F R O N T
AGP PCI1 PCI 2 PCI 3 PCI 4
System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Serial port connector Video connector
USB port (6-port) Keyboard connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
MD000109.EPS
MD000107.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-11
2.7 NEC PC
2.7 NEC PC
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
System board
MD000112.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
MD000110.EPS
Mouse connector Keyboard connector
Parallel port connector NIC connector
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to PCI4. PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 3 PCI 4
System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Serial port connector
USB port (2-port) Video connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000113.EPS
MD000111.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-12
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280
● SDT F R O N T
System board location Memory slots
System board
PEG
Expansion card slots
PCI 2
System board MD000201.EPS
● SMT F R O N T
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. The GX280 has two types, one is small desk top (SDT) and the other is small mini tower (SMT), and locations of expansion card slots are different with each other.
PEG PCI 0 PCI 1 PCI 2 PE1
System board
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MD000202.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD000222.EPS
MD-13
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280
Memory configuration
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
● SDT
● SDT System board
DIMM sockets
Serial connector Parallel connector
NIC connector
F R O N T
Video connector
USB port (6-port)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
MD000224.EPS
MD000203.EPS
● SMT
● SMT System board
DIMM sockets
Serial connector Parallel connector
NIC connector
F R O N T
Video connector MD000223.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
USB port (6-port)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD000204.EPS
MD-14
2.9 Dell Precision WS360
2.9 Dell Precision WS360
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
F R O N T
Memory slots
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Expansion card slots 4 2 3 1
MD000207.EPS
MD000205.EPS
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI2 to PCI4. F R O N T
AGP (Video board) PCI1 1
2
3
4
PCI2 PCI3 PCI4
System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) PS/2 mouse connector Parallel connector
NIC connector Video connector
Serial port connector (COM1) USB port (6-port) Serial port connector (COM2) PS/2 keyboard connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000208.EPS
MD000206.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-15
2.10 Dell Precision WS370
2.10 Dell Precision WS370
Memory configuration A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
F R O N T
Memory slots System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Expansion card slots 4 2 3 1
MD000211.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
MD000209.EPS
Mouse connector
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI2 and PCI3. F R O N T
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot (Video board) PCI1
Parallel connector
NIC connector Video connector
Serial port connector Keyboard connector USB port (6-port) : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
PCI2
MD000212.EPS
PCI3 PCI Express ✕1 (Card slot) System board 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD000210.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-16
2.11 Dell OptiPlex GX620
2.11 Dell OptiPlex GX620
Memory configuration A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
MD000254.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
MD000252.EPS
Parallel connector
Expansion card slots
NIC connector
A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI1 and PCI2.
PCI Express ✕16 Video connector
PCI1
Serial port connector
PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
USB port (6-port)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
MD000255.EPS
MD000253.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-17
2.12 Dell Precision WS380
2.12 Dell Precision WS380
Memory configuration A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
MD000258.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Parallel connector
MD000256.EPS
Mouse connector
Expansion card slots
NIC connector
A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI1 to PCI3. PCI Express ✕1 Card slot PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1
Keyboard connector
USB port (5-port)
Serial port connector
PCI Express ✕8 Card slot
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000259.EPS
PCI2 System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000257.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-18
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. Model 745 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.
System board location System board Memory slots Expansion card slots
● DT
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 MD000268.EPS
System board
MD000266.EPS
● MT
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 Card slot System board
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD000265.EPS
MD-19
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745
Memory configuration
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
● DT
● DT
Parallel connector System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
USB port (6-port)
Video connector Serial port connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346CL.
MD000262.EPS
MD000264.EPS
● MT
● MT Parallel connector
System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
Video connector
USB port (6-port)
Serial port connector MD000263.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000267.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-20
2.14 Dell Precision WS390
2.14 Dell Precision WS390
Memory configuration A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
MD000271.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Parallel connector Mouse connector
MD000269.EPS
NIC connector
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI1 to PCI3. PCI Express ✕1 Card slot PCI Express ✕16 Card slot
Keyboard connector
USB port (5-port)
Serial port connector
PCI1 PCI Express ✕8 Card slot
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000272.EPS
PCI2 System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000270.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-21
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. Model 755 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.
System board location System board Memory slots Expansion card slots
● DT
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 System board
MD000273.EPS
MD000274.EPS
● MT
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 Card slot System board
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD000281.EPS
MD-22
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755
Memory configuration
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
● DT
● DT
Parallel connector System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
USB port (6-port)
Video connector Serial port connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346CL. MD000275.EPS
● MT Parallel connector
● MT System board
MD000276.EPS
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
Video connector
USB port (6-port)
Serial port connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. MD000282.EPS MD000283.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-23
2.16 Dell Precision T3400
2.16 Dell Precision T3400
Memory configuration A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
MD000279.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) MD000277.EPS
Parallel connector Mouse connector
NIC connector
Keyboard connector
USB port (6-port)
Expansion card slots A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI1 to PCI3. PCI1 PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI Express ✕8
Card slot
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot
Serial port connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000280.EPS
PCI2 System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000278.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-24
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF
A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location Memory slots
Memory configuration System board
System board
DIMM sockets
MD000286.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Serial port connector
NIC connector
Parallel connector
MD000284.EPS
USB port (6-port) Video connector
Keyboard connector Mouse connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD000287.EPS
MD-25
2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760
2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760
Memory configuration Windows XP : A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment. Windows Vista : A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board Memory slots
DIMM sockets
Expansion card slots
AWS10008.ai AWS10002.ai
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
Expansion card slots When Windows XP is used for the OS, a total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection. For Windows Vista, the MOXA board (optional) is used for PCI Express ✕ 1.
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 Card slot System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Parallel connector NIC connector
USB port (6-port) Video connector
Serial port connector : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL. AWS10010.ai
AWS10007.ai
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-26
2.19 Dell OptiPlex 760
2.19 Dell OptiPlex 960
Memory configuration A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
Memory slots System board
DIMM sockets
Expansion card slots
NAX010130.ai
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) Parallel connector
NAX010129.ai
NIC connector
Expansion card slots When Windows Vista is used for the OS, the MOXA board (optional) is used for PCI Express ✕ 1. PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 USB port (6-port)
PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 Card slot System board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Serial port connector
Video connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
NAX010131.ai
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
NAX010128.ai
MD-27
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF
Memory configuration A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000290.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) MD000289.EPS
� NIC connector
� Serial port connector � Mouse connector
� USB port (6-port) � Video connector
� Keyboard connector
� : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000288.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-28
2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780
2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780
Memory configuration A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots Expansion card slots
DCL10018.ai
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)
DCL10012.ai
Video connector (For 2M monitor)
Expansion card slots
Parallel connector NIC connector
PCI Express ✕16 Card slot PCI1 PCI2 PCI Express ✕1 Card slot System board
DCL10017.ai
Serial port connector
USB port (6-port)
Video connector (For touch panel monitor) : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
DCL10019.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-29
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
Memory configuration A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board location
DIMM sockets
System board
System board Memory slots
MD000294.ai
Connector configuration (PC rear panel) MD000293.ai
� NIC connector
� Serial port connector � Mouse connector
� USB port (6-port) � Video connector
� Keyboard connector
� : Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR348CL.
MD000288.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-30
3. System Connection Examples
3. System Connection Examples This section shows CR-IR346/348CL system connection examples.
Independent type [XG-1 system] This example represents the most compact system connection, which consists of the CR-IR346RU, CR-IR346CL, and printer. ID information entry, local storage, and local film output functions can be exercised by this system alone. In this connection example, film output is enabled either via the E-i/f or using the DICOM Print function.
Network type This example represents a system connection that is used with the XG-1 system built into an existing hospital network, to which the IDT function incorporated FCR5000 Series, IDT connection type FCR5000 Series, or similar equipment is connected.
Image output (FINP or DICOM)
IDT connection type FCR 5000 Series
QA-WS/ HI-C655
Hospital network FRUP
Connecting a printer via the E-i/f
IDT
XG-1 system E-i/f
CR-IR346CL
Printer
CR-IR 346CL
CR-IR346RU
IDT function incorporated FCR5000 Series
Image output (FINP)
XG-1 system
FRUP
IDT
MD000019.EPS
Illustrated below is an example of system connection with the 5000 plus system incorporated into the configuration shown above. This system configuration is available with software version A02 or later.
CR-IR346RU MD000018.EPS
Connecting a printer using the DICOM Print function FRUP
DICOM Print
Image output (FINP) Image output (FINP or DICOM)
QA-WS/ HI-C655
IDT connection type FCR5000 Series
Hospital network CR-IR346RU
CR-IR346CL
Printer
ID:FINP Image: DICOM
FRUP
MD000023.EPS
CR-IR 346RU
CR-IR 346CL
XG-1 system 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
5000 plus
IDT
CR-IR 348CL
5000 plus system
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IDT
Image output (FINP or DICOM)
MD000011.EPS
MD-31
3. System Connection Examples
Illustrated below is an example of system connection where the XG-1 (two or more RUs connected) and 5000 plus are used simultaneously. This system configuration is available with software version A04 or later.
The following example shows a case of system configuration where the CL is connected to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 359 or CR-IR362, 363, 364, 366, 367, 368 or 370, 371, 372 and connection can be established properly with the CR-IR355RU/356/357/362/363/364/368 for software version V3.1(B) or later, with the CR-IR366/367/370 for software version V4.0(B) or later and with the CR-IR359/371/372 for software version V5.0(B).
The system configuration that includes the IDT-IV is available with software version A07 or later. QA-WS/ HI-C655
Image output (FINP or DICOM) Hospital network FRUP
CR-IR 346RU
Hospital network
ID: FINP
FRUP
ID: FINP
FRUP CR-IR 346RU
IDT-IV
CR-IR 35X, 36X or 37X*
Image: DICOM CR-IR 348CL
5000 plus
DICOM Print CR-IR348CL
* 35X : 355RU/356/357/359 36X : 362/363/364/366/367/368 37X : 370/371/372
5000 plus
Printer
MD000105.EPS
System connection where the XG-1 (two or more RUs connected) and 5000 plus are used simultaneously. MD000020.EPS The following example shows a case where some CLs are clusterconnected (for shared study information). This system configuration is available with software version A09 or later. QA-WS/ HI-C655
Image output (FINP or DICOM)
ID:FINP
Hospital network FRUP
CR-IR 346RU
IDT-IV
ID:FINP
FRUP CR-IR 346RU
Image:DICOM CR-IR 348CL
5000plus 5000plus
CR-IR 348CL
Cluster connection (shared study information)
CR-IR 348CL MD000024.EPS
For the cluster connection function, see “8. Cluster Connection Function Overview”. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-32
4. Software Function Overview
4. Software Function Overview
Equipment
External equipment connections
CR-IR364, 366 or 367 built-in type
Equipment
Description
The 348CL can be simultaneously connected to the XG-1 RU, FCR5000 cassette type, and FCR5000 built-in type. Software version A03 does not allow you to use the XG-1 RU and FCR5000 built-in type simultaneously. The 346CL can only be connected to one unit of the XG-1 RU. Software version A11 supports connection to the CR-IR362/363/364. Software version V1.0(C) supports connection Image Reader to the 9000 series. Software version V3.1(B) supports connection to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 368. Software Version V4.0(B) supports connection to the CR-IR366, 367 or 370. Software version V5.0(B) supports connection to the CR-IR359. Software version V6.0(B) supports connection to the CR-IR371/372. Up to eight units can be connected. The connection protocol used is FRUP. XG-1 RU Uncompressed, nonstandardized, 12-bit images are output to the CL. Up to eight units can be connected. The connection protocol used is Private FCR5000 cassette Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEGtype compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images are output to the CL. Up to two units can be connected. The connection protocol used is Private FCR5000 built-in Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEGtype compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images are output to the CL. Up to eight units can be connected. (For the CR-IR355RU, 356, CR-IR 355RU, only one unit can be connected.) 357, 359, 362, 363 The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1. or 368 cassette Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images type are output to the CL.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR370, 371 or 372 built-in type
9000 series [Applicable only in Japan]
Local printer
Network printer
Description Up to two units can be connected. The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1. Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images are output to the CL. Up to two units can be connected. The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1. Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images are output to the CL. Connection possible to CR-IR317/319/325/326/ 327/329/332/335/336 and CR-MF125/126. A maximum of two RUs, one cassette type Image Reader or two built-in type Image Readers, can be connected to one CL. Connection protocol used is the CR image transfer communication protocol (E-i/f) and ID information used is the IDT/CSL-IR interface (serial). Standardized 10-bit images are output to the CL. One unit can be connected through the use of the PEI board. The CR-LP414, FL-IM2636, FL-IM3543, and FL-IM3543M cannot be connected. The double-density recording function is supported (FM-DPL only). Four film sizes (14"×17", 14"×14", 26×36cm, 10"×12" and 8"×10") are supported. The connection protocol used is DICOM BGP/ Printer SOP. The acceptable connection target is the FN-PS551, DRYPIX, FM-DP L or other specified device of a different manufacturer. However, the network printer cannot be used together with the local printer.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-33
4. Software Function Overview
Equipment
DICOM receiver
RIS
Description This device can deliver its output to one filing device and eight other devices. As the connection protocol, FINP, DICOM CR Storage, DICOM DX/MG Image Storage, or DICOM XR Storage can be used. For the employed filing device, DICOM Storage Commitment and DICOM Query/Retrieve can be used. The acceptable connection target is the HI-C655, QA-WS771, HI-C654, OD-F614/624, CR-IR 355CL or other specified devices of different manufacturers.
DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS compliant device
Network connection.
Host connection device based on Type A/B interface
Only one unit can be serially connected (via the PSI04A board).
Synapse
Network connection. Software version V8.1(B) or later.
Dose-area product meter
Only one unit can be serially connected (via COM port on the PC). Only VacuTEC’s VacuDAP can be connected.
X-CON
Only one X-CON unit can be connected serially (with the PSI04A board). For other than mammography (A04 or later)
Equipment
Description
POCKET id Console (V4.0(B) or later)
A maximum of three POCKET id Consoles can be connected to each CL. Available for workflow used for exposure operations at locations outside the X-ray examination room.
Monitor
Only one unit can be connected.
1024×768 color LCD The touch panel function is provided. 1024×768 color CRT — 1280×1024 color LCD The touch panel function is provided. SL-IC 300
The dedicated video board is required.
SL-IC 200
The dedicated video board is required.
1600×1200 Ikegami monochrome 1k monitor
The dedicated video board is required.
Magnetic card reader
Only one unit can be connected via USB. The JIS card and ISO card are supported. The functions are the same as those of the IDT-IV.
Other Barcode reader
Only one unit can be connected via USB.
Full-size keyboard
Only one unit can be connected.
Mouse
Only one unit can be connected.
Toshiba, Shimadzu, Hitachi, Philips and Siemens devices are supported.
For mammography Toshiba and Planmed devices are supported. (V2.0(B) or later) For mammography Siemens device are supported. (V4.0(B) or later) (For serial connection, use COM port on the PC.) The ID information collection and ID information sharing functions are supported.
IDT IDT-IV
Up to 16 units can be connected.
IDC-IV
Only one unit can be connected. Patient information is acquired from the host via the IDC-IV.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-34
4. Software Function Overview
Start of processing Function
Study list display
Shared study information (cluster connection)
User utility
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Exposure Description m Displaying the study list stored on the HDD (local worklist) m Displaying the DICOM worklist m The following processes can be performed with a study listing selected: Exposure QA Lock Deletion Multi-frame forced output This function enables multiple CLs to share study information and can be set up in service utility mode.
Function
Study registration (reception)
m Patient information input methods Magnetic card input Keyboard input Software keyboard input (B00 or later) Automatic ID assignment function (V2.0(B) or later) ID assignment function used for screening examination (V7.1(B) or later) Patient information on-line function (Type A/B) Local database search (300,000 items) Acquisition from IDC-IV m Exposure menu registration methods Choosing from a displayed group of exposure menus - (Two or more exposure menus can be registered.) Choosing from a study menu m Registered study list management function Displaying a list of registered studies Deleting registered studies
Performing studies
m Monitor image display Blackened images are displayed when the automatic shuttering process is specified. When an energy-subtracted image is received, the low-energy, bone, or softtissue mode can be selected. Six images can be displayed on the same window in the list form. (B00 or later) [Not available when RU and CL are connected at the rate of 1:1.] A precision image is displayed for image confirmation purpose. For a PEM-specified image, the PEM processing execution window is displayed. m Input image monitoring Thumbnails of images input for a previous study are displayed at the lower right corner of the window allowing thus to check input status constantly. (B00 or later) m The QA function can be exercised with images for study selected.
“8. Cluster Connection Function Overview” m Exposure menu information setup/ management Image processing parameters Exposure menu Requesting department Radiographer Film annotation characters Import of consumables database m Environment setup m Setup data backup/restore m Patient database utility m Acquisition and clearing of exposure result log m Customization of window display (B00 or later) m Transfer of image processing parameters to FCR5000 series equipment m Media reconstruction using removable media mCustomization of POCKET id Console window/transfer of radiographer information
Description
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-35
4. Software Function Overview
Function
Performing studies
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description m Exposure list manipulation New-exposure addition Repeat Duplication Reexposure Exposure menu change Exposure menu parameter change Exposure sequence change Image change Information change (The patient information/exposure information can be changed. The results will not be fed to the RIS.) S value/L value warning function (for V3.0(B) or later) Multiple studies performed at the same time (for V3.0(B) or later) m Automatic printing/delivery The user can choose printing/delivering exposed images successively or making prints/delivery in compliance with the instructions issued upon completion of a study or printing/delivering according to user operations. m Study suspension (suspension/termination) and initiation of a new study When new patient information is entered via the magnetic card or host-connected Type A during study, a new study can be started. In such an instance, the user can choose between proceeding without changing the exposure menu and removing the exposure menu registration. m Synapse Web Query (V2.0(B) or later) Allowing the user to view images of the same patient stored in the Synapse server
Function
Description
Starting an exposure (study)
Showing the location of a menu selected in one study/the count of all exposure menus (V7.0(B) or later) Choosing from the local worklist (list of registered studies) Choosing from the DICOM worklist Making an entry from the RIS Making an entry from an RIS component
Temporary study suspension
An ongoing study can be temporarily suspended.
Study interruption
An ongoing study can be interrupted.
Other Study termination
The study ends when all the registered exposures are made.
The user can choose between forwarding the Forwarding to QA/ studied items to QA and printing them without printing without QA forwarding them to QA. Study result management
Ordering and DICOM PPS are supported.
Setting of 2on1 or 4on1 on the study window
2on1 or 4on1 format can be set up and image position can be changed accordingly on the study window. (B00 or later)
Authority (password) can be determined to Support to the PAS operate modification of image processing security function parameters (V7.0 or later).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-36
4. Software Function Overview
QA function (QA waiting study list/QA upon study ) Function
Description
Information display/ correction
The following items of information can be handled: Image information Exposure menus Image processing conditions Film formats Distribution destination selection for each study Imaging failure setup Output log
Image manipulation
The following image manipulation functions are supported: Shuttering process Restandardization process Image processing change Rotation Marker imbedding (setting for manual/ automatic imbedding) Image composition (manual/automatic) Trimming Annotation
Operations
The following operations can be performed for images: The sequence of images within a study can be changed. The images within a study can be interchanged. Images can be moved from one study to another. Images can be output. The image erasure lock can be set. Setup can be performed so as indicate the completion of QA. Images can be deleted. The image can be magnified and the full screen display is available. Exposure menus can be additionally registered to an already delivered study. The following operation can be performed for studies: Multiple studies can be delivered. (Only studies whose images have already been output.)
Other
Window customization function
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Image output Function
Image data Output to printer output function
Description One or two (B00 or later) printers can be connected. Two-printer connection can be registered only for the DICOM Print function. A printer optimum for film output is seleceted automatically according to the “Image size” and “Film format” for the image to be output on film. The QA-WS771’s DICOM print format is complied with. The sorter function is the same as for the FCR5000 Series. Printers connectable with the following protocols are supported: Local connection (E-i/f connection) DICOM Print FINP The following film sizes are available for film output with software version B00. 14"×17" 26×36cm 14"×14" 10"×12" 8"×10" Life size (100% size) output of a long-view combined image, 12 frame image (12on1) output on a 14"×17" film, Multiple images of the same study assigned on a film (1 to 4), Magnification-ratio-specified image output
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-37
4. Software Function Overview
Function
Description
Only one unit of the filing device can be connected. When FINP is employed, standardized, unprocessed images can only be output. When DICOM is used, nonstandardized images, standardized images, and processed images can be output. Output to networkFurther, DICOM Storage Commitment is connected filing supported (one unit only). The output of 20 device lines/mm images can be generated only when DICOM is used. Filing devices connectable with the following protocols are supported: FINP DICOM CR Storage DICOM XR Storage
Image search Function
DICOM Query/ Retrieve
Description
Option key
Study information can be searched for from the filing device (Query). Based on the searched information, images can be CL DICOM QR acquired from the filing device (Retrieve). Acquired images can be output to the printer (Reprint).
Up to eight units can be connected. When FINP is employed, standardized, unprocessed images can only be output. When DICOM is Image used, nonstandardized images, standardized data images, and processed images can be output. output The output of 20 lines/mm images can be function generated only when DICOM is used. Filing devices connectable with the following protocols are supported: Output to network- FINP connected device DICOM CR Storage DICOM XR Storage Software version A09 supports DICOM Digital Mammography. Following are supported service classes. DX Image Storage For Presentation DX Image Storage For Processing MG Image Storage For Presentation MG Image Storage For Processing Delayed image delivery Patient information log function
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
A function that delivers images automatically if no actions are taken for an image for a certain period of time after it has been received. Patient information is logged in text format. Patient information used for exposures can be viewed with Service Utility.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-38
4. Software Function Overview
Image processing Function Standardization (automatic/manual)
Other Description
Option key
Not applicable to image reoutputs that Standard are generated by an external device.
Gradation processing
Standard
Spatial frequency processing
Standard
DRC
Standard*
TAS
Standard*
MFP
IR 346 MFP IR 348 MFP
PEM
CL PEM
Blackening
Not applicable to image reoutputs that are generated by an external device.
CL SHUTTERPROC
Energy-subtraction processing
Applicable when the XU-D1 is connected.
CL ES
20 lines/mm image support Image composition
Standard Composes multiple images into one CL IM COMPOSITION so that it is output on one film.
Grid Pattern Removal Removes grid moire patterns (GPR) processing without deteriorating image quality.
CL GPR
Flexible Noise Control Improves image graininess. (FNC) processing
Standard
Image up-and-down positioning
Right-and-left mammography images are automatically positioned Standard up-and-down.
High-luminance view box correction processing
Correction processing necessary when displaying high-luminance view box image processing on the ordinary view box (monitor).
Standard
* The DRC and TAS processing items are stored on the standard key CD. : XG-1 Standard key CD XG-1 system Two or more RUs, 5000 plus : Lite Standard key CD Plus Standard key CD
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Function
Description
Option key
Retake Analysis
Exposure and mis-exposure image information is stored and calculated CL RETAKE appropriately. ANALYSIS Calculated data is output in CSV data.
IP use count calculation
The number of how many times the IP was used is calculated for each Standard IP barcode. The count can be reset to 0.
Supported local storage
Temporary storage Simplified image storage DICOM file storage
Standard
Removable media (DVD)
CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B
PDI creation
Stores study results onto a CD-R
CL DICOM PDI STORAGE
User interface
For hospitals
Standard
Patient information protection
Authenticates a user at startup of the application. Automatic log-off processing Limited items available for each user Entry of mis-exposure comment when canceling a mis-exposure that occurred Re-entry of a password when changing or modifying a radiographer name
Standard
Date/time display
Displays the current date and time.
Standard
Logging in to the Service Utility
Entry of password when logging in to the Service Utility.
Standard
Image Reader QC processing
Image Reader QC processing tool
FCR QC TEST SOFT
Mammo QC processing
Mammo QC processing tool
FCR QC TEST SOFT M
Removable media
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-39
4. Software Function Overview
Function Precise enlargement images
Description Presents displayed images and their additional information on a capacity-enhanced monitor.
Option key CR PRECISE ENLARGEMENT
An ROI determined on an image enables display of width and height CR QA ROI QA ROI measurement of the ROI, as well as its mean pixel MEASUREMENT value, median pixel value, standard deviation and area. Displays Exposure Index (EI) and Deviation Index (DI) for an image. Displaying Exposure Index
“FR21 Setting the Exposure Standard Index Function” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”
Japanese English French German Swedish Italian Spanish Danish Norwegian Supported languages Korean Chinese (China) Chinese (Taiwan) Portuguese Polish Hungarian Czech Russian Turkish RAID status display
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Displays an icon to indicate the RAID status.
Standard
Standard
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-40
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow
5. Relationship between RU and CL This section explains about the data exchange operations that are performed between the CL and RU (CR-IR346RU) when they are connected.
RU-AP (solid-line arrow mark) When the RU-AP is installed, the RU-AP, RU-Config, and RU message file data are copied to the CL. The RU-AP and RU-Config data are copied to the FLASH ROM via the network.
NOTE
REFERENCE
The “application”, “operating system”, and “RU Configuration” are abbreviated hereafter “AP”, “OS”, and “RU-Config”, respectively.
The RU message file stores a detailed record of RU error events. Codes of the errors encountered in the RU are used as a key for displaying error codes and detailed error information on the CL monitor.
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow Data flow during installation process CL
RU
RU-OS (broken-line arrow mark) and machine shipment control data (chain-line arrow mark) The RU-OS and machine shipment control data are copied to the RU’s FLASH ROM via the CL’s FTP server.
FLASH ROM RU-OS RU message file RU-AP CD
RU-Config
FTP server COMMON RU-OS
RU-OS CD
RU-AP RU-Config Machine shipment control data
Machine shipment control data FD
RU-AP
Machine shipment control data Backup memory Default RU-Config settings Cleared Memory (SDRAM)
RU individual data
Data enclosed with broken lines are temporarily stored in the FTP server for transfer to the RU. Data enclosed with solid lines are constantly stored for comparison with the contents of the RU’s FLASH ROM. 00000508.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-41
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow
Data flow during RU boot process
Data flow during normal process
RU
CL FLASH ROM
(1) (1)
RU-OS
RU-Config
RU-AP
Machine shipment control data
Image data
(1) (1)
COMMON RU-AP
(2)
Memory (SDRAM)
Log data
RU-Config
RU-AP
Machine shipment control data
Log data Memory (SDRAM) Image data
RU-Config
RU-OS
FLASH ROM
Backup memory
FTP server
Backup memory Default RU-Config setting data*
RU
RU individual data
*� Network setting items such as default IP addresses of the RU and CL. 00000509.EPS
When you boot the RU, the data in the FLASH ROM is copied to the memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (1)). If the backup memory contains default RU-Config setting data, it overwrites the RU-Config data in the memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (2)).
REFERENCE
RU-Config RU-OS Machine shipment control data RU-Config
00000510.EPS
Image data The image data obtained by IP scanning is saved in the SDRAM and then transferred to the CL via the network. Log data The RU-AP copies the log data to the CL’s FTP server as needed.
The default RU-Config setting data does not usually exist in the backup memory. It is written into the backup memory only when any of the following procedures is performed: The switch activation + RU power ON procedure is performed. See “3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization”, under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”. The “Temporary Setting” procedure for the backup memory is performed with the RU’s maintenance utility. See “MU: Maintenance Utility” for the CR-IR346RU. The RU-AP is installed from the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS CD. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-42
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
Data flow during backup/restore process The RU M-Utility is used to back up or restore the various RU data.
CL
RU FLASH ROM
FTP server COMMON
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU download RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy between CL FTP server data and RU FLASH ROM data (RU-AP and RU-Config).
Machine shipment control data
The RU-AP and RU-Config are downloaded in the following sequence:
RU-Config Machine shipment control data RU-Config Backup Media
When the CL-AP starts running, the FTP server’s RU-AP and RUConfig are compared with the contents of the FLASH ROM. If they do not match, the FTP server data overwrites the data in the FLASH ROM.
Backup memory Log data
REFERENCE
Log data RU individual data
AUTO UPDATE (Currently this function is not used. Turn it OFF.)
The FTP (a network protocol for file exchange between terminals) is used for data exchange between the RU and CL.
Memory (SDRAM)
00000518.EPS
Log data A set of log data stored in the backup memory is backed up onto media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) in the sequence indicated above. Note that the log data cannot be restored.
The RU main unit is not equipped with input devices for directly rewriting the RU internal data (RU-AP, RU-Config, etc.). Therefore, a networked PC is used to rewrite the RU internal data. The CL-PC is basically used when the CL-RU connection is established.
CL
RU
RU M-Utility
Comparison
RU-Config
FLASH ROM RU-AP
RU-AP
RU-Config The RU-Config data stored in the FTP server is backed up onto media. In the restore process, the data on the media is copied to the FTP server. Machine shipment control data The machine shipment control data stored in the FLASH ROM is backed up onto media in the sequence indicated above. In the restore process, the data is copied to the FLASH ROM via the FTP server.
FTP server
Comparison
RU-Config
If a file date conflict occurs CL
RU
RU M-Utility
FTP server
Acquisition
FLASH ROM
RU-AP
RU-AP
RU-Config
RU-Config Acquisition 00010139.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-43
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
NOTE The comparison between the RU-AP and RU-Config is made by checking the file date. It is thus well to remember that the FLASH ROM data is updated even if a file in the FTP server is dated earlier than FLASH ROM data.
NOTE [Influence of RU-AP upgrade on RU-Config] When you upgrade the RU-AP, the RU-Config file date may change for the following reason:
If, for instance, the RU-AP version is upgraded from A00 to A01, the resulting sequence is as indicated below:
The date changes: When the contents of the RU-Config are changed before the upgrade (including the contents of the RU-Config setup window displayed at the time of RU-AP installation).
1.
The A01 version RU-AP is installed in the CL’s FTP server.
The date remains unchanged: When the contents of the RU-Config are not changed at all.
2.
Either the CL or the RU is restarted. At the restart, the data in the FTP server and FLASH ROM are compared with each other. Since the A00 data and A01 data differ with each other, the RU acquires the A01 version RU-AP from the FTP server and updates the A00 data in the FLASH ROM with the A01 data. On the other hand, the contents of the RU-Config remain unchanged. Therefore, the RU-Config data does not overwrite the FLASH ROM data even after a comparison is made.
CL RU M-Utility
CD
When installing the RU-AP in the FTP server, use the RU M-Utility. The RU M-Utility is a utility tool that is dedicated to the RU and used, for instance, for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup. Since this tool is required for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup, it needs to be installed in advance. It is stored on the CD supplied with the RU.
RU FTP server
FLASH ROM
RU-AP (A01)
RU-AP (A00)
RU-Config
RU-Config
The CL or RU is restarted. CL RU M-Utility
REFERENCE
FTP server
Comparison and acquisition
RU-AP (A01)
RU FLASH ROM
Support for daylight saving time/winter time (AUTO UPDATE) When the machine is operated in a region where the file time stamp varies depending on whether daylight saving time or winter time is used, it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO UPDATE function. If daylight saving time is superseded by winter time or vice versa while this function is left ON, the RU downloads FTP server data, throwing the user into confusion. To avoid the above problem, it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO UPDATE function when the machine is installed or serviced in a region where the file time stamp varies depending on whether daylight saving time or winter time is used.
RU-AP (A01)
RU-Config Comparison only
RU-Config
00010036.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-44
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview The “RU-CL N:N connection function” is furnished by software version A04. This function enables one CL to control two or more RUs and allows you to simultaneously operate two or more CLs (for permitting the RU to transfer images to the CLs in which the associated barcodes are registered). The equipment controlling the use of the above function on a network is called the RU master IIP. The RU master IIP plays an important role in establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL. This section mainly deals with the RU master IIP functionality, summarizing the N:N connection function.
NOTE The terms “CR-IR346RU”, “application”, and “RU configuration” are abbreviated hereinafter to “RU”, “AP”, and “RU-Config”, respectively.
CLs serving as the RU master IIP and those not serving as the RU master IIP The CLs serving as the RU master IIP (hereinafter referred to as the “RU master IIP”) manage the RUs. These CLs have an FTP server for exchanging data with the RUs (the FTP server is detailed earlier). When establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL, the RU needs to define a networked CL as the RU master IIP. Up to eight units of the RU (up to three for software version A10 or earlier) can be managed by one unit of the RU master IIP. On the other hand, the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP do not have the FTP server for exchanging data with the RU. They merely receive images from the RU. Therefore, the FTP server setup procedures (procedures for installing and setting up the IIS and RU M-Utility) need not be performed for these CLs.
CL (other than RU master IIP)
CL (RU master IIP) FTP server The RU data is exchanged with the RU master IIP only.
Images are transmitted to a unit in which the associated RU RU RU barcode is registered. Flow of RU data (RU-AP, RU-Config, error information, etc.) Flow of ID information and image data
Not equipped with the FTP server.
MD000021.EPS
REFERENCE The RU master IIP also incorporates the interface for displaying the RU status and error information.
Handling of data whose ID registration is completed at IDT-IV When the barcode of an IP is registered at an IDT-IV unit that shares the patient information setup with the RU master IIP and that IP is read by the RU, the image data is handled as explained below: The image data is transferred to the RU master IIP that shares the patient information setup with the IDT-IV. The RU master IIP generates a new study in accordance with the ID information registered at the IDT-IV, and stores an image in the area of the newly generated study. Only one image is to be stored per study. Even when the IDT-IV is set to issue Study Instance UIDs in relation to the same study, one image will be stored per study. For details on patient information sharing setup, see “3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-45
7. Ordering Function Overview
7. Ordering Function Overview When the ordering function is exercised, the patient information, exposure menu, and X-ray information entered at the RIS are transmitted to the CL and, after completion of an exposure process, various items of information used for actual exposures (actual values) are returned to the RIS. The CL exercises the ordering function via either the serial interface or F-RIS (in Japan only). (1) RIS
(3)
(2) CL
RU/IR
(1)�Various items of information (patient information, exposure menu, and X-ray information) are transmitted to the CL. (2)�Exposure (3)�The values actually used for exposure (patient information, exposure menu, and X-ray information) are received from the CL. MD000022.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-46
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview The cluster connection function enables network-connected CLs to share study information. When this function is exercised for cluster-connected CLs, the study information and images registered with a connected CL can be displayed on the display screen of a specific CL. This function also makes it possible to collectively manage patient information and perform an integrated output processing operation.
Function overview Study information display Various study lists (Local WL, QA, Queue, Delivered, All, Today) of a specific CL can display the study information about the other CLs within the shared range. In this instance, the study information that is not possessed by the specific CL can also be obtained from the other cluster-connected CL and displayed. Cluster-connected
NOTE If the Japanese and English versions of the CLs are used together, they cannot be cluster-connected.
Printer
1. 2.
A typical cluster connection is shown below. Study list display
Cluster-connected
RU1
CL1
CL2
CL1
Patient information database
An example of cluster connection
Printer
RU1
A B C D
RU2 MD000089.EPS
Study information database A B
Image display A
A
Information sharing
Study list display A B C D
B
Study information database C D
Image display
Image files
RU2
CL2
A
Image files C
D
MD000090.EPS
Image display Study information can be selected from a study list to display the associated image. In this instance, the CL having the study information may not always be identical with the CL having the associated image file. If the CL having the associated image file is turned OFF in such a situation, a file access error occurs so that a dummy image appears on the display. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-47
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
Study registration and study execution The “study information registration” and “study execution” processes can be performed by a specific CL in the same manner as before. In addition, these processes can be performed by different CLs as well. Registered study information can be shared by cluster-connected CLs. Study information registration
NOTE If an error occurs, it is displayed and logged by a CL that has been performing the affected process. Therefore, the error information must be collected on an individual CL basis. Example) Image reading error → Displayed on a CL that has been reading the affected image.
Study execution E F
E F
Sorting, search, and filtering Although the total number of studies to be displayed increases due to cluster connection, you can perform a sorting/search/filtering operation from a study list to narrow down the range of study information to be displayed.
Printer
RU1
CL1
Patient information database 1. 2. Study list display A B C D E F
Study information database A B E F
Image display E
A
Information sharing
Study information database
A B C D E F
B
C D
A
Image files C
D
E
Shared study information display setup Various study list setup windows are available for defining the items to be displayed and the maximum number of studies to be displayed in each study list. Share range setup With Service Utility, you can define a share range to determine what CLs can share study information. After a share range is defined in this manner from Service Utility, it can be narrowed down from a study list.
Study list display
Image display
Image files
RU2
CL2
Printer output error → Displayed on an output processing CL.
F
Shared patient information When Service Utility is used to designate a certain CL as a patient information database server, the patient information entered in a centralized manner from a specific CL can be shared by the other CLs.
MD000091.EPS
When images are read for executing a study, they are stored in a CL that has executed the study.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-48
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
Studies enabled by cluster connection When a cluster connection is established, the following studies can be conducted. Intensive QA (improved QA efficiency) After study reception, X-ray exposure, and primary verification procedures are performed by a designated radiographer at various CLs, a senior radiographer can perform a secondary verification procedure intensively at a separate CL. Centralized study reservation (improved exposure efficiency) While a study reservation procedure is performed intensively at a specific CL, the other CLs can be used exclusively for X-ray exposure operations. A study can be reserved or started by entering nothing other than patient information from the study reception window (without having to enter an exposure menu). Integrated output processing (reduced output load) A specific CL can be designated as an output processing unit so as to carry out output processing in a centralized manner. In this instance, the print option is required for the output processing CL only. Moving a study from one X-ray exposure room to another A currently executed study can be suspended and then resumed at another CL. If, for instance, a built-in type X-ray exposure is needed for a study that was originally registered for a cassette exposure, the study can be moved to another X-ray exposure room.
Restrictions on cluster connection Configuration restrictions Up to 12 units of the CL can be cluster-connected (for shared study information). When establishing a cluster connection, it is necessary to initialize the image databases of the CLs within a share range. The CLs cannot be cluster-connected while they retain their previously saved data. When CLs are to be added to or removed from an institution in which a cluster connection is established, they are allowed to retain their previously saved data. However, you must delete the image files that are saved in the CLs to be removed. When an MWM connection is used, each CL receives study information from the RIS. Therefore, the MWM tab in a study list is not to be shared. Setting restrictions The host name of a cluster-connected CL cannot exceed 10 characters in length. (When the 5000 is connected, the maximum host name length is 10 characters due to the limitations on the FINP character string length.) Ensure that the cluster-connected CLs use the same CL software version. There are some User Utility/Service Utility configuration settings that need to be the same for all CLs. For details on User Utility configuration settings, see “2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table Settings” in “OE15: Cluster Connection”. For details on Service Utility configuration settings, see “3. Various Configuration Settings — Setup Configuration Item” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
Each CL can designate only one output processing CL. All the output CLs entitled to issue an output request must be registered with the output processing CL. If the number of studies to be displayed is set to “limitless”, a considerable amount of time may be required for operation.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-49
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
Operational restrictions A study currently used by a certain CL for exposure or QA purposes cannot be selected from the other CLs (the “All” list indicates that an exposure/QA process is in progress). While a CL is running User Utility or Service Utility, the other CLs can share the study information. However, image database initialization, study-related information editing, and other similar operations must be performed while all CLs are stopped. Studies cannot be moved from one X-ray exposure room to another if they are being used for exposure/QA at another CL, registered without completing an image input, or in an output process. If the output processing CL receives a request for large-volume output, the processing speed may decrease. To keep a high output processing speed, perform setup in the same manner as before so that each CL performs output operation. When initializing the image database of a specific CL, ensure that all the CLs within the predefined share range are turned ON (with the CL application terminated). If the CLs containing any image files are turned OFF, such image files will remain undeleted.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-50
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-51
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MD-52
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
MT: Machine Troubleshooting
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-I
MT: Machine Troubleshooting
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
Reason
10/20/2000 12/10/2000 04/10/2001
00 00 01
05/30/2001
02
08/30/2001 03/20/2002
03 04
New release (FM2862) Revision (FM2950) Previous Chapter C “Error Information/Service Parts” divided and modified (FM2951) Revision for software version A02 and GX150 (FM3027) Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) Revision for software version A07 (FM3297)
03/20/2002
04
Changes in pagination (FM3297)
07/20/2002
05
Revision for software version A08 (FM3428)
07/20/2002
05
Changes in pagination (FM3428)
11/30/2002
06
Revision for software version A09 (FM3499)
11/30/2002
06
Changes in pagination (FM3499)
03/01/2003
07
Revision for software version A10 (FM3634)
03/01/2003 08/20/2003
07 08
Changes in pagination (FM3634) Revision for software version A11 (FM4009)
08/20/2003
08
Changes in pagination (FM4009)
12/10/2003
09
Revision for software version B00 (FM4158)
12/10/2003
09
Changes in pagination (FM4158)
02/20/2004
10
A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220)
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Pages affected All pages Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16 All pages I, II, 5, 6, 12, 17, 21 I, II, 5, 18 I, II, 4, Appx MT A-1, A-34, A-50, A-75, A-98, A-99, A-111, A-112 Appx MT A-35–49, A-51–74, A-76–97, A-100–110 I, II, 4, 11, 19, 23-36, A-43, A-46, A-51, A-52, A-58, A-66, A-94, A-95, A-104, A-105, A-111 Appx MT A-35–38, A-41, A-44, Appx MT A-34, A-39, A-40, A-42, A-45, A-47–50, A-53–57, A-59–65, A-67–93, A-96–103, A-106–110, A-112–116 I-IV, Appx MT A-1, 18, 31–33, 36, 43–45 ,48, 49, 53, 78 , 105, 109 Appx MTA-19–30, 34, 35, 37–42, 46, 47, 50–52, 54–77, 79–104, 106–108, 110–116 I, II, 5, 6, 23, 24, Appx MT A-1, 36, 103, 104 Appx MT A-37–49, 105, 106 I, II, 17, Appx MT A-1, 38, 45, 50, 52–54, 60, 78, 79, 90, 101, 105, 107–114, 118–120 Appx MT A-39–44, 46–49, 51, 55–59, 61–77, 80–89, 91–100, 102–104, 106, 115–117 I, II, 15, 16, Appx MT A-1–3, 5–7, 20, 38, 48, 68–70, 81, 86, 88, 90–98, 124 Appx MT A-4, 8–19, 21–37, 39–47, 49–67, 71–80, 82–85, 87, 89, 99–123, 125, 126 All pages
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-II
MT: Machine Troubleshooting
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
07/30/2004
11
Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254)
07/30/2004
11
Changes in pagination (FM4254)
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005
14
11/30/2005 11/30/2005 07/30/2006
15 15 16
07/30/2006
16
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
17
05/09/2008
18
05/09/2008
18
10/31/2008
19
10/31/2008
19
Revision for software V1.0(C), support provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, III, 4, 11, 20, 23, 40, 48, Appx MT-1, 51, 58, 89, 90, 103, 104, 106, 107, 125–128, 132–134, 137–139, 141–154 Changes in pagination (FM4543) Appx MT-52–57, 59–88, 91–102, 105, 108–124, 129–131, 135, 136, 140 I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 96 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) Changes in pagination (FM4760) Appx MT-97–153 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, III, 4, 43, 55, 56, Appx MT-1, 40–42, 91, 98, 145 Changes in pagination (FM4952) Appx MT-43–90, 92–97, 99–144, 146–156 I, III, 4, 6, 18, 19, 40, 41, Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) Appx MT-1, 22, 42, 11–129, 139–141, 146 Changes in pagination (FM5201) Appx MT-23–41, 43–111, 130–138, 142–145, 147–160 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 4, 54, 55, 61, 66, 93, 100, 112–114, 137, 148, 153, 163, 164 Changes in pagination (FM5356) Appx MT-5–53, 56–60, 62–65, 67–92, 94–99, 101–111, 115–136, 138–147, 149–152, 154–162 Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 43, 44, 65, 95, 103, 109, 168 Changes in pagination (FM5460) Appx MT-45–64, 66–94, 96–102, 104–108, 110–167
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected I, III, 1, 4, 5, 11, 13, 18, 19, 23, 28, 30–34, 40, Appx MT-1, 2, 4, 5, 40, 41, 49, 51–59, 65, 88, 89, 105, 121–124, 131, 132, 140 20–22, 35–39, Appx MT-3, 6–39, 42–48, 50, 60–64, 66–87, 90–104, 106–120, 125–130, 133–139 I, III, 4, 23, 24, 40–54
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-III
MT: Machine Troubleshooting
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
11/30/2009
20
Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622)
11/30/2009
20
Changes in pagination (FM5622)
03/31/2010
21
Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670)
03/31/2010
21
Changes in pagination (FM5670)
12/10/2010
22
Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817)
12/10/2010
22
Changes in pagination (FM5817)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected I, IV, 1, 4, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 24, 25, 29–34, 37–39, 41–45, 49, 50, Appx1 MT All pages, Appx2 MT All pages 8–10, 15–23, 26–28, 32, 35, 36, 40, 46–48, 51–64 I, IV, 4, 9, 19, 26, Appx1 MT-1, 62, 63, 104, 113, 120, 164, 166, Appx2 MT-1–12, Appx3 MT-1–4, Appx4 MT-1–4 Appx1 MT-64–103, 105–112, 114–119, 121–163, 165, 167, 168 I, IV, 36, 37, 39, 40, Appx1 MT All pages 38, 41–68
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-IV
1.1 Referring to Error Messages
1. Error Code Table
Meaning of the event (error code) A five-digit code displayed in the “Event” column implies the following.
For errors occurring while the CL-AP is being used, take appropriate countermeasures following the error codes (and error messages) listed herein.
A B C C C A:
Error-detected process 1: Module used in common in the system 2: Main process 3: Input process 4: QA unit 5: Output process 6: FINP process 7: UTILITY process
B:
Error level (See the Table Error Levels.)
See “2. Using the Event Viewer”.
NOTE Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
1.1 Referring to Error Messages Event (error code) and event source name When an error occurs, use the event and event source name information to separate the assumed causes. The event and event source name are displayed in the “Source” and “Event” columns of the Event Viewer main window shown below. “Source” column
CCC: For error level 0 or 1, this section of the error code is provided so that it is unique in the process. For error level 2, 3 or 9, this section is unique in the control. 00000071.EPS
“Event” column
00000072.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-1
1.1 Referring to Error Messages
Message
Table Error Levels Error Level
Description
0: Fatal Error An error that fully disables system operation.
A serious, fatal problem that absolutely disables the system’s stable operation. DB acc ess error System file access file error
1: Warning An error that enables the system’s operation to be continued after user intervention.
Inevitably involves user notification and the system operation can be continued by the user intervention. Causes of this error type can be assumed as follows. Data file access error Disk full Faulty LP board No response from the target destination for connection
2: Warning An error that enables the system’s continuous operation.
A slight error that does not require user notification. The system operation can be continued with no user intervention. The following causes can be assumed. Unspecified data entered from networks. (An error implying that the system can be continued being substituted by the default).
The message is for describing errors and is displayed in the “Description (D)” column of the Event Viewer’s Properties window shown below. “Description (D)” column
00000073.EPS
3: Information Information that the system development section wishes to Simple information keep. 9: Logical Error An error presumably caused by defective program. Defective program Basically, this error does not occur at user’s site. This error type has been aborted by the RU previously. The following causes can be assumed. Unspecified value returned from the method Failure in securing memory Failure in acquiring Windows resources Error returned from the Windows API
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-2
1.1 Referring to Error Messages
Identifying the problem cause when two or more errors encountered have the same error code The same error code may appear on the display even when the error cause varies. If you encounter such a situation, note both the error code and error message to identify the error cause. Event Description Event Source FFCustom MessageBox MsgBox Dialog Show 13005 Error. 13005
13005
13005
*
13005
13005 13005
13005
13005
To identify the error cause, perform the following procedure:
1.
Start the Event Viewer.
2.
Open the Event Properties window.
3.
See both the error code and error message, and then locate the associated error description in “Appendix CL Error Message Table”.
Causes
A message box could not be displayed. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability FFIdCon Recv The connection to the RU was nection error(%1).%n[%2] closed or an error occurred in Watch the connection. FFIdFilm It failed that [%1] The FfilmMarkDB” key was not Mark gets the found in Directory.ini. connection string of FilmMarkDB FFId [%1] failed in the The connection to the Menu liberating displaygroup table was not Change processing of the successfully closed. display group data acquisition FFIdPat It failed that [%1] The “LangStrDB” key was not InfoInput gets the SexMale found in Directory.ini or the ID caption 30705 was not registered in the character string data base. FFId Recv error[%1] The connection to the RU was RuMain closed or an error occurred in Control the connection. FFIdRu Magnetic card The employed magnetic card Main variation type was different than specified. Control error[%1] FFIipInput It failed that [%1] The connection character string connects to was not properly registered for STRDB the “LangStrDB” key in Directory. ini. FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in_ Main thread creation was no beginthread(%2). successful. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability.
For details the procedure for opening the above window, see “2.4 Details of Events”.
Error code
Error message
00000472.EPS
* There are two or more occurrences of the same error code (event).
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-3
1.2 Precautions
1.2 Precautions An error such as incorrectly entered image processing parameters will not be handled as an error. An error code starting with “9” (e.g.: 9XXXX) is that generated by the RU.
1.3 Error Message For error messages of software version A00 to A11, V.(B), see “Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.1(B))”.
The correlation between the error level (the second digit of an error code number) of CL-generated errors and that assumed by Windows (Event Viewer) is as follows. Error level
Error level assumed by Windows
0 : Fatal Error
EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
1 : Warning
EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
2 : Warning
EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
3 : Information
EVENTLOG_INFORMATION_TYPE
9 : Logical Error EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-4
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer
2. Using the Event Viewer
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer
The Windows 2000/XP/Vista Event Viewer is used for checking details of errors occurring with Windows 2000/XP/Vista or the CL-AP. How to use the Event Viewer is described herein, together with the startup procedures.
1.
Start up the Service Utility mode. For details of Service Utility mode startup, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
NOTE Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer A variety of information items, such as resource information, system operation status and application errors occurring with Windows 2000/ XP/Vista, are recorded (logged) to the Event Viewer. Causes of errors that occur can be specified from the following logs. Application Log System Log Security Log The CL-AP error information is recorded to the Application Log. To display the CL-AP error information, select the “Application Log” from the tree menu of the Event Viewer main window shown below.
MT000008.EPS
00000371.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-5
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer
2.
Click
.
The Event Viewer main window opens.
REFERENCE Use the following procedures if you cannot start up the Event Viewer from the Service Utility mode. 1. From the “Start” menu at the lower left of the desktop window, select “Settings” and then “Control Panel” to display the “Control Panel” window. 2. Double-click “Administrative Tool” to display the “Administrative Tool” window. 3. Double-click “Event Viewer”. The Event Viewer starts up.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-6
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer
● For Windows Vista
Explained herein are the Event Viewer’s screen configuration (shown below) and how to view it.
● For Windows 2000/XP
A
B
C
D
E 00000375.ai
A Types: A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Symbol
Error Meaning Error
Description
Warning
B Date C Time D Source E Category F Event G User
Displayed to indicate that the system has started Information normally being successful in startup of services or remote access.
Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in device driver or service startup, or loss of data, occurs while the system is running.
Displayed to indicate that the system has started Information normally being successful in startup of services or remote access. Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be attributable to the cause of the error that has occurred.
Description Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in device driver or service startup, or loss of data, occurs while the system is running.
00000375.EPS
A Types: Symbol
Meaning
Warning
B C D E
Date and Time Source Event ID Task Category
: : : :
Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be attributable to the cause of the error that has occurred.
The date and time when an event occurs. The source application that wrote an event. Event ID Event category
: : : : : :
The date when an event occurs. The time when an event occurs. The source application that wrote an event. Event category Event ID The user who has been logged in when an event occurs. “N/A” will be displayed if software that does not specify the user’s name is used. H Computer : Computer name used when an event occurs. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-7
2.4 Details of Events
2.
2.4 Details of Events
Check detailed information of an event.
Described below are the procedures used for checking detailed event information.
1.
On the Event Viewer main window, double-click the log you wish to display. “Description (D)” column
“Data (T)” column
00000376.EPS
The “Event Properties” window opens.
00000377.EPS
Description (D) : Displays detailed information of an event. Data (T)
3.
Click
: Displays the location where an event occurs, using the information based on the number of bytes or words.
.
The system return to the “Event Viewer” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-8
2.5 Saving the Event Log
2.5 Saving the Event Log
3.
Select or enter the following. I
How to save event logs is explained below.
NOTE Be sure to have media, such as an FD, USB memory stick or the like, ready to use for saving event logs.
1.
Insert media into the PC.
2.
From the “Action” menu of the Event Viewer main window, select “Save Log File As...”. II
00000379.EPS
I. Select a media drive. II. Enter the filename (e.g.: log). 00000378.EPS
REFERENCE
The “Save “Application Log (2)” As” window opens.
If “Text (Tab Separation)” is selected for “Save as Type”, event logs can be saved as text files.
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Event Viewer/Application Log” window.
5.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the media from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-9
2.6 Deleting the Event Log
2.6 Deleting the Event Log
2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer
How to delete event logs are explained below.
How to quit the Event Viewer is explained below.
1.
1.
From the “Action” menu of the Event Viewer window, select “Clear all Events”.
Click
of the Event Viewer main window.
The system return to the desktop window.
00000380.EPS
A window opens prompting you to confirm the data to be saved.
2.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Event Viewer/Application Log” window, deleting thus all event logs.
00000381.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-10
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
3. Information Useful for Error Recovery CL/RU connection recovery procedure to be performed upon RU memory initialization This procedure is used to restore the RU IP address to its default setting to recover the connection to the CL. Use this procedure when, for instance, the RU is invisible to the network. Typical procedure for achieving recovery from an LP (local printer) printout generation failure This section describes the troubleshooting procedure to be performed in the event of an LP printing failure. Messages displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier) When the RU-AP and RU-Config are written into the RU’s FLASH ROM, various messages appear on the CL monitor. Such messages are detailed in this section. Precautions to be observed during the use of output options This section offers a troubleshooting guide that you should follow when the error code 50001 (output option setup error) appears on the display.
NOTE
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization This section explains about the procedure for recovering the connection to the CL when the memory is initialized by performing the memory initialization procedure ( switch activation + RU power ON) at the RU. See “5. Relationship between RU and CL” in “MD: Machine Description”.
This section explains about the recovery procedure to be performed in situations where the CL and RU are in the following states: (NETMASK 255.255.0.0) IP address 200.150.100.50
RU
IP address 200.150.100.10
CL
SDRAM
RU IP address 200.150.100.50 CL IP address 200.150.100.10 NETMASK 255.255.0.0
Backup memory
No data
FLASH ROM
FTP server
RU IP ADDR CL IP ADDR NETMASK
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
RU IP ADDR CL IP ADDR NETMASK
Same contents RU-Config
RU IP address 200.150.100.50 CL IP address 200.150.100.10 NETMASK 255.255.0.0
RU-Config
00000089.EPS
REFERENCE The SDRAM IP address is used as the IP address for the RU. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-11
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
Recovery sequence overview
Details of “u Procedure 1” Procedure 2 Restore the CL-PC main unit IP address to the default*.
TCP/IP (NETMASK 255.255.0.0) IP address 200.150.100.50
RU
CL
172.16.1.10 Results of procedure 1 execution
SDRAM
Results of procedure 1 execution Copy the data to the SDRAM when rebooting the RU.
RU IP address 172.16.1.10 CL IP address 172.16.1.20 NETMASK 255.255.0.0
FLASH ROM
* Default settings
RU IP ADDR CL IP ADDR NETMASK
RU IP address : 172.16.1.10 CL IPaddress : 172.16.1.20 NETMASK : 255.255.0.0
Copy the data to the SDRAM (after the FLASH ROM).
Backup memory
RU IP address 172.16.1.10 CL IP address 172.16.1.20 NETMASK 255.255.0.0
Hold down the RU’s switch, turn ON the power switch.
You have to still hold down the switch at this stage.
IP address 200.150.100.10 172.16.1.20
Procedure 1
The RU is rebooted.
2.
When the memory initialization procedure is performed, the contents of the backup memory revert to the default settings* and the RU reboots.
When you start the CL-AP, the system transfers the RU-Config and at the same time clears the backup memory.
Procedure 4
1.
FTP Server
Verify that the primary erasure LED on the RU panel comes on (in about 7 seconds).
NOTE If the primary erasure LED does not come on, the initialization process is not completed. In such an instance, perform steps 1. and beyond again.
3.
Release the switch.
RU P ADDR CL P ADDR NETMASK
Restore the RUConfig internal settings to the default values*.
Procedure 3 00000090.EPS
NOTES The communication between the CL and RU can be restored to normal by performing Procedures 1 and 2. The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM can be restored to the default settings by performing Procedures 3 and 4. If the contents of the backup memory are cleared, the SDRAM will not be overwritten on a reboot. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-12
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
Details of “u Procedure 2”
5.
Choose
● For Windows 2000/XP
1.
and then click .
Perform settings as follows.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
For Windows 2000 on the desktop.
• Double-click
6.
Choose
7.
Perform the following setup steps:
.
I
The “My Computer” window opens.
.
• Double-click
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II
For Windows XP from the
• Select
2.
Double-click
8.
Double-click
.
Click
.
You are returned to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
.
The “Network and Dial-up Connections” window opens.
3.
I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20). II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
menu.
The “My Computer” window opens.
00000430.EPS
9.
Click
.
You are returned to the desktop.
REFERENCE When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes]. This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
The “Local Area Connection” window opens.
4.
Click
.
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-13
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
● For Windows Vista
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
6.
Choose
7.
Perform the following setup steps:
.
I
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
. II
The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
3.
00000430.EPS
I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20). II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
Click “View status”.
8.
Click
.
You are returned to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
9.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Local Area Connection Status” window.
10. Click [Close]. The system returns to the “Network and Sharing Center” window. AWS80302.ai
11. Close the “Network and Sharing Center” window.
The “Local Area Connection” window opens.
4.
Click
You are returned to the desktop.
.
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
5.
Choose
and then click
REFERENCE When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes]. This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
. The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-14
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
2.
Details of “u Procedure 3”
1.
Start the RU M-Utility as directed below:
In the “LIST OF EXITING RU” field, click the host name of the RU whose configuration file is going to be edited.
NOTE Make sure that the CL-AP, Service Utility, or other AP or Explorer is not running. If any such application is running, quit it. RU host name III. Specify the file.
00000446.EPS
The “EDIT CONFIGURATION” button text color changes from gray to black.
3.
Use PING to verify the connection to the RU. I II III
IV. Click here.
00000512.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (ru0). II. Enter the RU IP address (172.16.1.10). III. Click
II. Click here. I. Click here. The RU M-Utility main menu opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
IV. Verify that the network connection is normal. 00000219.EPS
4.
Click
.
The “READER UNIT SETTING” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-15
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
5.
Details of “u Procedure 4”
Perform the following setup steps: I II
1.
Click
. Choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, “FCR”.
The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes. Version A software
III 00000513.EPS
I. Verify that the RU’s default IP address is entered (172.16.1.10). II. Switch to the CL’s default IP address (172.16.1.20). III. Switch to the default net mask (255.255.0.0).
6.
Click
.
The system saves your setting entries and returns to the main menu.
7.
Click the
mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The system returns to the desktop screen. 00000195.EPS
Version B software
MT000049.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-16
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
CAUTION While the RU panel LEDs are illuminated, never turn OFF the RU power because the RU’s CPU board may become damaged. After a while, all the LEDs on the RU panel come on. A message appears on the CL monitor to indicate that the RUConfig is being updated. (While the update is in progress, the system repeats a single-beep and two-successive-beep cycle.)
3.
Click
(or
).
A menu opens.
4.
Hold down the key and click
.
The CL-AP exits.
l RU !
All the LEDs on the RU panel glow.
00000196.EPS
l CL
A message appears to indicate that the RU-Config is being updated.
0000517.EPS
The RU-Config update process ends.
2.
Click
on the CL monitor.
The RU restarts so that the updated RU-Config takes effect. In several seconds, the “Console Warning” window appears on the CL.
NOTE Do not touch any operating controls for a while. The “Console Warning” window automatically disappears. The RU initialization message appears. In about one minute, the RU becomes operative.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-17
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
7.
Editing “NETWORK CONFIG”
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
Change the RU’s IP address that is entered from the CL’s Service Utility. If you do not change the RU IP address, an error (error code: 31382) occurs when an image is read.
8.
1.
Start the CL’s Service Utility.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Save”.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
9.
From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Close”. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
10. Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
MT000006.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
3.
Click the
sign within
4.
Click the choose
sign within .
. and then
The “HostName” window opens in the right-hand area of the currently displayed window.
5.
Note the IP address indicated in the field and change it to the RU’s IP address (172.16.1.10).
6.
Click
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-18
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
Checking the PEI01A board device driver
1.
Perform settings as follows.
For Windows 2000
This section explains about the procedures to be performed when the “Status” field of the user window “Wait for Output” indicates the occurrence of the error “No Output Option” (see the window shown below).
on the desktop to select
• Right-click “Properties”.
The “System Properties” window opens.
For Windows XP No Output Option
from the
• Right-click 00000447.EPS
select “Properties”. The “System Properties” window opens.
Preliminary checkout First, conduct the following checks to verify the LP settings: Check whether the LP option key is installed. Check whether the PEI01A board is properly set and mounted. Check for an improper cable connection between the PEI01A board and printer.
menu to
2.
Click the
3.
Click
tab. in the “Device Manager” area.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
Cause If the “No Output Option” error is indicated when the above procedures are properly completed, it is conceivable that the PEI01A board driver may be improperly installed. The PEI01A board driver is stored on the CL-AP’s CD. Installing the CL-AP and starting the AP automatically installs the driver. However, if a different incompatible driver is already installed, starting the CL-AP does not automatically install the correct driver. First of all, you should check whether the correct driver is installed as directed below.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-19
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
4.
Deleting an invalid PCI device driver (marked “?”)
Note the hardware information about the PCI port.
1.
In the “Device Manager” window, click the [+] mark to the left of “Other devices” “PCI Device” appears under “Other devices”.
2.
Click menu.
and then choose “Delete” on the “Action”
No Good : Driver installation is Good : Driver installation is not normally normally completed. completed.
00000448.EPS
NOTE If the OS is installed with the PEI01A board mounted in the PC, the driver installation will not be successful causing a status where other improper drivers have been installed.
00000449.EPS
The invalid driver named “PCI Device” is then deleted.
3.
Exit the “Device Manager” and then restart the PC. The CL-AP starts up in about one minute. When it starts up, the PEI01A board driver (FUJIFILM Pei Device) is automatically installed.
NOTE For Windows XP, the installation wizard window opens after the PC has been restarted. Install the PEI board driver following on-screen instructions.
4.
Verify that the driver is properly installed. See “ Checking the PEI01A board device driver”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-20
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/ RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier) This section describes the sequence that is followed after RU-AP installation or RU-Config editing and explains about the messages that appear on the display. For details on the data exchanged between the CL and RU, see “5. Relationship between RU and CL” in “MD: Machine Description”.
Install the RU-AP or edit the RU-Config.
RU-Config installation completed?
No
Yes A message appears (code: 11025). The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM is updated. The above message reports such an update to the CL. Click [Restart] that appears on the CL monitor.
Start the CL-AP.
RU-AP changed?
No
An error dialog box opens (code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or other RU connection error code).
Yes A message appears (code: 11024). The RU-AP in the FLASH ROM is updated. The above message reports such an update to the CL.
Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU. The network connection temporarily closes on a reboot.* The above error dialog box notifies the CL of such a disconnection.
Click [Restart] that appears on the CL monitor. An error dialog box opens (code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or other RU connection error code). Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU. The network connection temporarily closes on a reboot.* The above error dialog box notifies the CL of such a disconnection. * The error code to be displayed varies with the disconnection timing.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
The RU becomes operative in about one minute. * The error code to be displayed varies with the disconnection timing. 00000515.EPS
00000514.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-21
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
Message window (code: 11024)
00000603.EPS
Message window (code: 11025)
00000602.EPS
Error dialog box (code: 31116, 31117, or 31118)
00000604.EPS
00000606.EPS
00000605.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-22
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options IIf an error message of the error code 50001 appears at CL-AP startup, check the settings for the following output options: IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED (processed image transmission) IR346 DICOM PRINT IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT IR346 LOCAL PRINT The checks to be performed are detailed below: Option key
Check Verify that the option key is installed, and then check whether SCU setup is properly completed for this equipment. The procedure is described below:
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED IR346 DICOM PRINT
1. With the Service Utility, open the “Setup Configuration Item” window. 2. Open “NETWORK CONFIGURATION” and then “THIS HOST (IIP)”. 3. Check that an AE whose “Role” is SCU is registered. If it is not registered, register it now. For detailed registration procedure descriptions, see “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”. IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED IR346 DICOM PRINT
IR346 DMS NETWORK IN-OUT
OE3. OE4. OE6.
Verify that the option key is installed. Verify that the option key is installed, and then check whether the PEI01A board is installed in the PC. Also, check that DIP switch setup is properly completed.
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For DIP switch settings and other checkout procedures, see “CL + Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)” in “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-23
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC) The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure indicated in the “Check Method/Remedies” column. Symptom
Probable Causes
NOTE Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
Check Method/Remedies
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PC’s memory may be defective. start up.
Check the PC’s memory. If it is defective, replace it.
The CL-AP (application) does not start up.
Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk may be partly damaged.
For the memory check procedure, see “4.1 Checking the Memory”.
For the hard disk check procedure, see “4.2 Checking the Hard Disk”. Output system options are not installed or not properly set up. [Displayed error code: 50001 20110]
Install or properly set up output system options.
The dummy node is not set up. [Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
Choose the Service Utility’s “Setup Configuration Item”, “NETWORK CONFIG”, “HIS HOST (IIP)” to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node. The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For details, see “3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options”.
For the setup procedure, see “2.1.4 Setup of Information on this Equipment for the DICOM Print Function” in “OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)”. The connection to the network is not established. [Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
Connect the CL to the network.
The image database is not initialized. [Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107 30151 20110]
With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
The MAC address is not acquired. [Displayed error code: 20111 20110 (Error 20111 is recorded only in the application’s event log.)]
Reinstall the network driver and then update it.
For the initialization procedure, see “12. Initializing the Image Database” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”. For the reinstallation procedure, see “4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver”. For the software version update procedure, see “4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)”. If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PC’s motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address manually and start up the CL-AP.
(Continued to the next page) 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see “3.14 MAC Address Manual Input” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-24
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)
Symptom The CL-AP (application) does not start up.
Probable Causes The selector resetup procedure is not completed. [Displayed error code: 31099]
Check Method/Remedies After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host name again. For the setup procedure, see “12. Setting the Selectors – Selector Setting” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The LCD flickers.
The refresh frequency setting is improper.
Correct the refresh frequency setting. For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see “4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency”.
The LCD touch panel does not sound.
The screen contact position correction procedure was performed twice in succession.
With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup procedure again. For the setup procedure, see “4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound”.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software. magnetic card reader Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to For the driver software change procedure, see “4.6 Changing the (MCR) does not operate. a USB port results in installation of improper driver Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software”. software. The BCR/MCR does not normally operate.
The BCR/MCR is connected to an improper USB port.
The local printer does not generate a film output.
The proper driver software is not installed. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI slot results in installation of improper driver software.
With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software.
Patient data cannot be exchanged in the ID online state.
The proper driver software is not installed. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI slot results in installation of improper driver software.
With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software.
The communication with the RU or other equipment cannot be established (“ping” does not work).
It is conceivable that the network driver may be defective. [System event log: type, error; source, EL90Xbc; event ID, 5001]
Update the network driver software version. Before proceeding to perform an update, have on hand the FD labeled “3Com 3C905C Network Driver Ver. A10 Disc 1/1”, which is distributed to the service personnel.
Connect the BCR/MCR to a recommended USB port. For the reconnection procedure, see “4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only)”. For details, see “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure”. For the driver software change procedure, see under the preceding symptom, which is entitled “The local printer does not generate a film output”.
For the update procedure, see “4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-25
4.1 Checking the Memory
7.
4.1 Checking the Memory For checking the memory, use the “Dell Optiplex ResourceCD”, which is supplied with the PC. The “Dell Optiplex ResourceCD” is Dell’s CDROM that stores various drivers. The CD name slightly varies with the PC model.
1. 2.
Verify that “1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics” is selected, and then press the key.
Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics.
The PC starts up.
2. Start computer with CD-ROM support and go to a command pronpt. Enter a choice: 1
Time remaining: 09
When the upper right corner of the screen reads “F2 SETUP”, press the key.
NOTE If you do not press the key in time, the setup screen does not open. In such an instance, restart the PC and then perform step 2.
F5=Safe made Shift+F5=Command pronpt Shift+F8=Step-by-step confirmation[N]
The setup screen opens.
3. 4.
MT000020.EPS
The “Dell Diagnostics Menu” screen opens.
Choose “Boot Sequence” and then press the key.
8.
The boot drive selection dialog box opens.
Uncheck “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:” (by removing their check marks ()). 1. Diskette Drive
Dell Diagnostics Menu [1] Dell 32-bit Diagnostics for Resource CD [2] Dell diagnostics [3] EXIT
2. Hard-Disk Drive C: 3. IDE CD-ROM Device SPACE to enable/disable
Press the key.
Please Enter Selection...
+,- to move down/up
Uncheck “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:”. Leave “IDE CD-ROM Device” checked. MT000009.EPS
5.
Insert the “Dell Optiplex ResourceCD” into the PC.
6.
Save the settings and then restart the PC. “Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu” opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MT000021.EPS
The reading process for the modules starts (and it takes about two minutes).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-26
4.1 Checking the Memory
9.
Choose “Test One Device” with the key, and then press the key. Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X
11. Press the key again.
The test type selection screen opens.
12. Verify that “Extended Tests” is selected, and then press the key.
Diagnostics Menu
Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X Test All Devices Test One Device Advancded Testing Information and Results Program Options Device Configuration Exit to MS-DOS
System Memory Device
Test for Highlighted Device
System Memory
Memory Address Line Test Memory Data Line Test Memory Bit Coupling Test
Extended Tests Quick Tests
MT000022.EPS
The list of tests appears.
Press Enter to select the highlighted item.
10. Choose “System Memory” with the key, and then press the key.
System Borad Devides Processor Cache System Memory System Management BIOS VESA /VGA Interface Universal Serial Bus Interface PC-AT Compatible Keyboards Pointing Devices Serial Ports Parallel Ports Network Interfaces Diskette IDE Devices Audio Controller Cable Detection Summary
Press ESC for previous menu. MT000024.EPS
The testing process starts (and it takes about 15 minutes when the memory size is 512MB).
Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X Device Groups
Press F1 for Help.
Device for Highlighted Group System Memory
Press Enter to select the highlighted item. Press F1 for Help.
Press ESC for previous menu. MT000023.EPS
The right-hand area of the screen shows details of the “System Memory” test. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-27
4.1 Checking the Memory
13. When the testing process ends, check for errors.
If any error occurs, its description appears on the screen. Perform an appropriate error recovery procedure in accordance with the onscreen error description.
14. Press the key a number of times until you are brought back to the “Dell Diagnostics Menu”. Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X
Dell (www.dell.com) Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X Maximum loops: 0001 Maximum errors: 0001 Loop count: 0001 Error count: 0000 Start time: 04/11/2002 15:05:29 Test status: NONE
Diagnostics Menu
Pause flag: YES Logging: NONE Elapsed time: 000:14:57
Device: System_Memory Test:Memory_Address_line_Test Release: 1068 Mod Your hardware performed optimally. _ System Memory Mem Press and key to continue. Status: Pass Sta Device: System_Me Release: 1068 Model _ System Memory Memory Bit Coupling Test Status: Pass Status Code: DOS DDG-D MEMORY 040 000 Device: System_Memory Test: Memory_Bit_Coupling_Test Release: 1068 Model(s): Memory
Test All Devices Test One Device Advancded Testing Information and Results Program Options Device Configuration Exit to MS-DOS
: Pass
: Pass
MT000026.EPS
End testing: 04/11/2002 15:20:26 - 0 errors MT000025.EPS
15. Choose “Exit to MS-DOS” with the key, and then press the key.
The “Diagnostics Menu” screen closes.
16. Remove the CD-ROM. 17. Use BIOS to restore the previous setup status (steps 2. to 4.) before startup with the CD-ROM. 1. Diskette Drive 2. Hard-Disk Drive C: 3. IDE CD-ROM Device SPACE to enable/disable
+,- to move down/up
Check these items.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT000048.EPS
MT-28
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk
4.
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk
1.
Start up Windows 2000/XP/Vista and open Windows Explorer.
2.
Right-click drive C (Local Disk C:) and then choose “Properties”.
Verify that the check boxes in the “Check disk options” area are unchecked, and then click .
MT000012.EPS
The hard disk check starts (and it takes about 5 minutes when the disk size is 40GB).
When the hard disk is normal, Phases up to 3 will be completed and a dialog box will open to indicate the completion of the hard disk check. If the hard disk is not normal, Phases up to 3 will not be completed and a dialog box will open to indicate that the hard disk check is not completed.
MT000010.EPS
3.
Choose the “Tools” tab. In the “Error-checking” area, click .
MT000011.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-29
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only)
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only) If the barcode reader and magnetic card reader erratically operate from time to time, reconnect their connectors as indicated below. Connecting to the PC back panel Magnetic card reader
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency If the screen flickers, it can be restored to normal by changing the refresh frequency setting. The refresh frequency change procedure is described below.
1.
Perform the following settings.
For Windows 2000/XP • Choose “Properties” from the right-click menu on the desktop. The “Display Properties” window opens.
Barcode reader
MT000014.EPS
MT000013.EPS
Connecting to the PC front panel (as viewed with the front panel removed)
• Click the “Settings” tab. • Click
Barcode reader
.
Magnetic card reader MT000045.EPS
MT000015.EPS
The “Plug and Play Monitor on NVidia Riva TNT2” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-30
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency
For Windows Vista
NOTE If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz. If the screen becomes disordered even when set to 70 Hertz, change it to 60 Hertz.
• Choose “Personalization” from the right-click menu on the desktop. The “Personalization” window opens.
• Click “Display Settings”.
MT000015.ai
The “Display Properties” window opens.
• Click
MT000016.EPS
.
4.
Click
.
The confirmation window opens.
5.
Click
6.
Click
.
The screen area changes and the “Monitor Setup” window opens. (When the OS used is Windows Vista, the “Display Settings” window opens.)
MT000015.ai
The monitor properties window opens.
2.
Click the “Monitor” tab.
3.
From the “Refresh Frequency” pull-down menu, choose “75 Hertz”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
NOTE If you do not click within 15 seconds, the system reverts the previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
7.
Click
to close the “Display Properties” window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-31
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound If you perform the screen contact position correction procedure two or more times in succession, the touch panel may fail to sound when you touch it. To recover the touch panel sound generation function, perform the following procedure.
For Windows XP
1.
Double-click
on the desktop.
The “TouchWare Properties” window opens.
For Windows 2000
1.
From
IN000309.EPS
of Windows 2000, point to “Settings” and
then click “Control Panel”.
2.
Select the “Touch Settings” tab.
The Control Panel opens.
2. 3.
Choose “Elo Touchscreen”.
IN000310.EPS
The “Elo Touchscreen Properties” window opens. Click the “Sound” tab and then click
. The touch
3.
Perform following settings.
panel should sound normally. I.
II.
IN000311.EPS
I.
Touch
II. Touch
to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch]. to set Touch Sound to [System beep on
touchdown].
4.
Touch
to close the “TouchWare Properties”
window. The touch sound will then be restored.
MT000019.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-32
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound
For Windows Vista
1.
Double-click
on the desktop.
The “MT 7 Software Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Select the “Touch Settings” tab.
DCL70420.ai
3.
Perform following settings.
I.
II.
DCL70421.ai
I.
Touch
to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch with
drag]. II. Touch
4.
Touch
to set Touch Sound to [Beep on touchdown].
to close the “MT7 Software Control Panel”
window. The touch sound will then be restored.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-33
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/ Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
5.
Note the hardware information about the USB ports. If USB drivers other than shown below are set up, perform the following procedure to install proper USB drivers.
If any encountered problem is attributable to the recognition of wrong driver software, use Windows 2000/XP/Vista’s “Device Manager” to check whether proper driver software is used. If improper driver software is used, replace it with proper driver software. The driver software check/change procedure is indicated below.
Normal installation of drivers Upper: Barcode reader Lower: Magnetic card reader
For Windows 2000
1.
Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2.
From the
menu, point to “Settings” and then click
“Control Panel”. MT000046.EPS
The Control Panel opens.
3. 4.
Double-click
6.
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
Choose the “Hardware” tab and then click .
In the “Device Manager” window, click the mark of the hardware information that is not for the correct USB drivers installed as above. The name of the currently installed USB driver appears.
7.
Select the item that appears at the click of the the “Action” menu, choose “Uninstall...”.
mark. From
The currently set USB driver is then deleted.
8.
If wrong driver software is set up for the other USB driver, delete it as well.
9.
Close “Device Manager” and then restart the PC. In about one minute, the CL-AP starts up so that the proper USB drivers are automatically installed.
10. Open “Device Manager” again to verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
MT000047.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-34
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
5.
For Windows XP
1.
Open the Windows XP desktop screen.
2.
Select “Control Panel” from the
In the “Device Manager” window, right-click “Human Interface Devices” and then “USB Human Interface Device” to select “Update Drivers...”.
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
3.
Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
4.
Choose the “Hardware” tab and then click .
MT0000053.EPS
The “Hardware Update Wizard” window opens.
6.
Select
and click .
A window opens prompting you to select an installation option. MT000047.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens.
7.
Select
and click .
A window opens prompting you to select a driver.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-35
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
8.
Select a driver you wish to install and click
For the barcode reader
.
For the magnetic card reader Select “USB Card Reader”.
m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before Select “USB Barcode Reader”.
MT0000054.EPS
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040022.ai
m In case of CL V8.1, or when a driver supporting a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed Select “WinUSB BCR”.
MT040021.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-36
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
9.
Clck
.
10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE A window may open to request a restart when the driver software for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or later. In that case, perform the following procedures. I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK]. The PC restarts. After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode. For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The main menu opens.
III. Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
Example of state that the drivers installed normally Upper: Barcode reader Lower: Magnetic card reader MT040023.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the following procedures. ● When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later Perform step 2 through 9. Restart the PC and proceed to step 10. ● When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed Proceed to step 10. You are then returned to the “Device Manager” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-37
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
5.
For Windows Vista
1.
Open the Windows desktop screen.
2.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Select “Browse my computer for driver software”.
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
3.
Double-click
.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
4.
MT000057.ai
In the “Device Manager” window, right-click “Human Interface Devices” and then “USB Human Interface Device” to select “Update Driver Software...”.
The “Browse for diver software on your computer” window opens.
6.
Select “Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer”.
MT000058.ai MT0000053.ai
The “Update Driver Software - USB Human Interface Device” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
The “Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-38
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
7.
Select a driver you wish to install and click
.
● For the magnetic card reader Select “USB Card Reader”.
● For the barcode reader m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before Select “USB Barcode Reader”.
MT0000054.ai
The “Windows Security” window opens.
8.
Select “Install this driver software anyway”.
MT0000055.ai
m In case of CL V8.1, or when a driver supporting a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed Select “WinUSB BCR”. MT000059.ai
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040024.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-39
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
9.
Click [Close].
10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE A window may open to request a restart when the driver software for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or later. In that case, perform the following procedures. I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK]. The PC restarts. After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode. For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The main menu opens.
III. Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
Example of state that the drivers installed normally Upper: Barcode reader Lower: Magnetic card reader MT040025.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the following procedures. ● When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later Perform step 2 through 9. Restart the PC and proceed to step 10. ● When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed Proceed to step 10. The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-40
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
5.
■ For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Open the Windows 2000/XP desktop screen.
2.
From the
Click the mark for click “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...”.
and then double-
menu, point to “Settings” and then click
“Control Panel”. (For Windows XP, select “Control Panel” from the
menu.)
The Control Panel opens.
3.
Double-click
. MT000036.EPS
The “System Properties” window opens.
4.
The “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...” window opens.
6.
Choose the “Hardware” tab and then click .
Choose the “Driver” tab and then click
.
MT000035.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens. MT000037.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-41
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
9.
The “Confirm Device Removal” window opens.
Click
.
The following window opens.
MT000038.EPS
7.
Click
.
MT000041.EPS
10. Click
The network driver is then deleted.
8. Return to the “Hardware” tab on the “System Properties” window, which was opened in step 3, and then click
.
After a while, a window like that shown below opens.
.
MT000042.EPS
MT000039.EPS
The “Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard” window opens.
11. Just Click
.
A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
MT000040.EPS
MT000043.EPS
12. Click 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-42
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
13. After completion of network driver installation, perform the following network driver setup steps from the driver environment setup window. Uncheck Uncheck
(
).
(
).
To open the driver environment setup window, double-click “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...” as explained in step 5. and then choose the “Power Management” tab.
■ For Windows Vista
1.
Open the Windows desktop screen.
2.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
3.
Double-click
.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
4.
In the “Device Manager” window that opens, click to the left of and then double-click “Intel(R) 82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection”.
MT000044.EPS
14. Reinstalling the network driver deletes the IP address and other relevant settings. Set the following network items again. IP address Subnet mask Default gateway (as needed)
MT040001.ai
The “Intel(R) 82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection Properties” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-43
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
5.
Select the “Driver” tab and click
.
7.
Insert the “DRIVERS AND UTILITIES” disk (Supplied with the PC) into the PC and double-click “autoRcd.exe” in the CD. The Dell ResourceCD utility software will go up and running and “System Model”, “Operating System” and “Topic” selected automatically.
MT040004.ai
8.
MT040002.ai
The “Confirm Device Uninstall” window opens.
6.
Checkmark
Click “Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device Rev:Axx”. A window like that shown below opens.
and click
.
MT040005.ai
MT040003.ai
The network driver is then uninstalled.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-44
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
9.
Scroll the display and click
.
10. Click
.
A window like that shown below opens.
MT040008.ai
11. Click
.
A window like that shown below opens.
MT040012.ai
12. Click
MT040006.ai
A window like that shown below opens.
.
A window like that shown below opens.
MT040009.ai
MT040007.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-45
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
13. Click
16. Make sure that
.
is
checkmarked and then click
A window like that shown below opens.
.
NOTE If sure to checkmark it.
is not checkmarked, be
A window like that shown below opens. MT040013.ai
14. Click
.
The License Agreement window opens. MT040016.ai
17. Click
.
A window like that show below opens. MT040014.ai
15. Select
and click .
The “Setup Options” window opens.
MT040010.ai
18. Click
.
A window like that show below opens.
MT040015.ai
MT040017.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-46
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
19. Click
.
20. After completing installation of the network driver, perform the following network driver settings on the driver environment setup screen. • • • •
Checkmark “Reduce link speed during standby”. ( ) ➔ Unchekmark “Wake on Directed Packet”. ( ) ➔ Unchekmark “Wake on Magic Packet”. ( ) ➔ Unchekmark “Wake on Magic Packet from power off state”. ) ( ➔ • Unchekmark “Wake on Link”. ( ) ➔
MT040011.ai
21. Reinstalling the network driver will cancel some setup
items, such as IP address and others. The following items need to be set up anew. • IP address • Subnet mask • Default gateway (as necessary)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-47
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
1.
Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2.
Insert the network driver FD (Ver. A10) into the FDD.
3.
From the
6.
Click the mark for click “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...”.
and then double-
menu, point to “Settings” and then click
“Control Panel”. The Control Panel opens.
4.
Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
5.
MT000028.EPS
Choose the “Hardware” tab and then click .
The “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...” window opens.
MT000027.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-48
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
7.
Choose the “Driver” tab and then click
.
9.
Check
(
), and then click
.
MT000031.EPS
10. Check
(
), and then click
.
MT000029.EPS
The “Upgrade Device Driver Wizard” window opens.
MT000030.EPS
8.
Click
twice.
MT000032.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-49
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
11. Select the driver whose “location” field reads “a:\w9x90xbc.inf”, and then click
.
MT000033.EPS
The “Digital Signature Not Found” window opens.
12. Click
.
A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
13. Click
.
REFERENCE Installation is completed normally when the “3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast...” window opened in step 7. displays the following information. Driver Provider: 3Com Driver Version: 4.8.0.0
MT000034.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-50
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC) The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure indicated in the “Check Method/Remedies” column. Symptom
Probable Causes
NOTE Screens referred to herein are those of Windows XP. Note however that contents displayed under Windows Vista are the same.
Check Method/Remedies
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PC’s memory may be defective. start up.
Check the PC’s memory. If it is defective, replace it.
The CL-AP (application) does not start up.
Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk may be partly damaged.
For the memory check procedure, see “5.1.2 Device Test Procedures”.
For the hard disk check procedure, see “5.1.2 Device Test Procedures”. Output system options are not installed or not properly set up. [Displayed error code: 50001 20110]
Install or properly set up output system options.
The dummy node is not set up. [Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
Choose the Service Utility’s “Setup Configuration Item”, “NETWORK CONFIG”, “HIS HOST (IIP)” to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node. The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For details, see “3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options”.
For the setup procedure, see “2.1.4 Setup of Information on this Equipment for the DICOM Print Function” in “OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)”. The connection to the network is not established. [Displayed error code: 30151 20110]
Connect the CL to the network.
The image database is not initialized. [Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107 30151 20110]
With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
The MAC address is not acquired. [Displayed error code: 20111 20110 (Error 20111 is recorded only in the application’s event log.)]
Reinstall the network driver and then update it. If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PC’s motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address manually and start up the CL-AP.
For the initialization procedure, see “12. Initializing the Image Database” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see “3.14 MAC Address Manual Input” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”. (Continued to the next page)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
For the motherboard replacement procedure, see “5.2.10 Motherboard”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-51
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)
Symptom The CL-AP (application) does not start up.
Probable Causes The selector resetup procedure is not completed. [Displayed error code: 31099]
Check Method/Remedies After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host name again. For the setup procedure, see “12. Setting the Selectors – Selector Setting” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The LCD flickers.
The refresh frequency setting is improper.
Correct the refresh frequency setting. For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see “4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency”.
The LCD touch panel does not sound.
The screen contact position correction procedure was performed twice in succession.
With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup procedure again. For the setup procedure, see “4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound”.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed. With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software. magnetic card reader Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to For the driver software change procedure, see “4.6 Changing the (MCR) does not operate. a USB port results in installation of improper driver Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software”. software. The local printer does not generate a film output.
The proper driver software is not installed. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI slot results in installation of improper driver software.
With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software.
Patient data cannot be exchanged in the ID online state.
The proper driver software is not installed. Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI slot results in installation of improper driver software.
With Windows “Device Manager”, switch to the proper driver software. The driver switchover procedure to be used is the same as the above.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
For details, see “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-52
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Using the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) enables you to perform the following. Displaying the test item list and implementing selected test items Displaying and storing the list of devices connected to the PC Displaying and saving log information Reading and storing the test file
5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures Procedures used to start up and shut down the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) are explained below.
Shutdown procedure
1.
Select “Exit” on the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu and press the key. The “Exit” menu window opens.
2.
Performs the following settings. When restarting the CL
: Select “ Reboot”.
When turning OFF the power to the CL : Select “ Shutdown”.
3.
Press the key. The CL will become as determined at step 2. above.
Startup procedure
1.
Turn ON the power to the CL.
2.
When “NEC” is displayed at the center of the window, press the key. After about one minute, the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu will open. ----------------+ Main Menu +--------------- + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +
MT000058.EPS
NOTE The setup window will not open unless the key is pressed with the timeliness. In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-53
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)
5.1.2 Device Test Procedures
REFERENCE Use the key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with “*”. For items marked with “->”, use the key to display detailed setting items. Executing the test will implement tests with all devices marked with “*” at the same time. As the default, the test implementation time is determined to be eight minutes. The test implementation time can be set up accordingly with the “Test Execution Option” (displayed at the press of the key). For details of each item, see the help function (displayed at the press of the key) that the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) provides.
Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to test each of the devices.
1.
Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
2.
Select “Test execution” and press the key.
3.
Select desired test items (mark with an asterisk “*”).
For details of the startup procedure, see “5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures”.
The “Test Select” window opens.
NOTE To conduct serial and network tests, connect a jig to the PC as appropriate. +---------------------------------------| Test Select |----------------------------------------+ | | | < > System | -> | | [ ] Floppy0 | [ ] Keyboard | | [ ] Mouse | | [ ] Serial0 > | -> | | [ ] Serial1 -> | | [ ] Parallel | [ ] VRAM | -> | | [ ] Speaker -> | | [ ] Memory | [ ] Cache > | -> | | [ ] Fan Sensor -> | | [ ] Temperature Sensor -> | | [ ] Voltage Sensor | IDE | | 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE | -> | | [ ] 00: HDS722580VLAT20 | 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE | -> | | [ ] 00: FX48++M | NETWORK | | [ ] 00: 82551QM [Ethernet Pro 100] > | | MISC | -> | | [ ] ICH - Intel 82801DB-ICH4 | | | | | | | | +--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
For the RAID specification, 2 HDDs will be recognized.
4.
Press the key.
5.
After conducting tests with the selected devices, check to see that there are no error occurrences. If an error occurrence is detected, take a necessary action as appropriate.
6.
Press the key some times to return to the Main Menu.
7.
After completing the tests, shut down the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
Tests will be conducted with the selected devices.
For details of the shutdown procedure, see “5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures”.
MT000061.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-54
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)
5.1.3 Log Save Procedure
7.
Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to save logs as necessary.
1.
Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
2.
Insert the log save FD into the FD drive.
3.
Select “Log Info” and press the key.
4. 5.
Enter a filename (default: td.log) of the log you want to save. ----------------|
|--------------- + | | | Log Info | | | | Please input the filename. | | | | td.log_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ | | | | | +----- ---------------------------------------------+ +
For details of the startup procedure, see “5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures”.
The “Log Info” window opens.
Save
Enter a log filename.
Press the key.
MT000060.EPS
The “Select Log” window opens.
Select items you want to save logs (mark with an asterisk “*”). ----------------| Select Log |--------------- + | | | Select log type | | | | [ ] [Pass/Fail] | | [ ] [SYSTEM-INFO] | | [ ] [DEVICE LIST] | | [ ] [MESSAGE LOG] | | | | | +---------------------------------------------------+ +
8.
Select and press the key.
9.
Make sure that the FD drive access lamp is off and remove the FD from the FD drive.
The selected log will then be saved onto the FD.
10. Press the key.
The system then returns to the Main Menu window.
11. Shut down the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
For details of the shutdown procedure, see “5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures”.
MT000059.EPS
REFERENCE Use the key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with “*”.
6.
Press the key. The “Save” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-55
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2 Service Parts Replacement Described herein are the procedures used to replace service parts.
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement
Dismounting procedure
NOTE
1.
When you are requesting a part to be replaced free of charge, use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log for the part that caused an error to occur.
Shut down Windows XP and then turn OFF the power to the CL-PC.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power supply.
NOTE
For details of the device test procedures, see “5.1.2 Device Test Procedures”.
Be sure to hold the plug to disconnect the power cord. Disconnecting the power cord holding the cable may break it.
For details of the error log save procedure, see “5.1.3 Log Save Procedure”. Reference
3.
Disconnect all cables from the rear of the CL-PC.
Preparation for parts replacement
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement
4.
Covers
5.2.2 Covers
Secure a one- to two-meter space back-and-forth and rightand-left, and also on top of the CL-PC.
CPU fan
5.2.3 CPU Fan
Hard Disk
5.2.4 Hard Disk
CD-ROM drive FDD drive
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive
CPU
5.2.6 CPU
Housing fan
5.2.7 Housing Fan
Power supply unit
5.2.8 Power Supply Unit
Memory
5.2.9 Memory
Motherboard
5.2.10 Motherboard
Target work
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Mounting procedure Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a part.
NOTE After finishing the necessary work, check to see that the CL-PC starts up normally.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-56
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.2 Covers
5.2.3 CPU Fan
Dismounting procedure
Dismounting procedure
1.
Make preparations for parts replacement. For the parts replacement procedure, see “5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement”.
2. Perform the following. ● When dismounting the right-side and left-side covers: Remove screws and dismount the cover while sliding it slightly to the back of the CL-PC.
1.
Dismount the left-side cover.
2.
Tilt the CL-PC so that its left side faces up.
3.
Disconnect the CPU fan connector from the motherboard.
4.
Raise the CPU fan levers to unlock them accordingly.
For how to dismount the left-side cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
Lever
● When dismounting the front cover: Insert a screwdriver in a hole located on top of the front cover to unlock it to dismount.
Mounting procedure Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a cover.
MT000053.EPS
5.
Unlock the four claws to dismount the CPU fan.
#1 [Unlock] Four claws #2 [Dismount] CPU fan MT000054.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-57
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.4 Hard Disk
Mounting procedure Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the CPU fan.
NOTE
NOTE
Use only NEC-specified hard disks. If a hard disk of a third party is used, an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main unit. Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third party’s hard disk will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
Pay due attention to the direction where the CPU fan is to be mounted.
Dismounting procedure CPU fan Cable
MT000055.EPS
1.
Dismount the front cover.
2.
Dismount the CPU fan.
3.
Disconnect cables from the hard disk.
For how to dismount the front cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
For how to dismount the CPU fan, see “5.2.3 CPU Fan”.
NOTE Disconnect cables carefully. When doing so, exercise care not to hit your hands against surrounding parts, which, otherwise, may damage those parts incidentally.
4.
Remove the two screws from the front.
5.
Remove the hard disk bay while sliding it slightly to the back of the CL-PC.
NOTE Hold tight the hard disk bay, exercising due care so as not to touch CPU or parts mounted on the motherboard.
6.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remove the four screws from the hard disk bay to dismount the hard disk.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-58
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive
Mounting procedure
1.
Mount the hard disk on the hard disk bay.
NOTE Make sure that the hard disk has been set to be the MASTER and then mount it appropriately. Note, however, that you do not have to check the settings when the NEC-PC (RAID specification) is used. Rear of the hard disk
MT000050.EPS
2.
Remount the hard disk bay on the CL-PC.
3.
Connect the hard disk power cable and interface cable appropriately.
4.
Mount the CPU fan. For the CPU fan mounting procedure, see “5.2.3 CPU Fan”.
Dismounting procedure
1.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover. For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
2.
Disconnect cables from the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
3.
Remove screws to dismount the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
REFERENCE Screws to be removed are as follows. CD-ROM drive Right side : Two screws Left side : Two screws Right side : One screw FD drive Left side : Two screws
Mounting procedure NOTE
5.
Check hard disk power cable and interface cable connection status.
Connect cables correctly, as illustrated below, paying attention to the FDD interface cable polarity.
6.
Remount the front cover.
Motherboard side
For how to mount the front cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
Drive side
NOTE If the CL-PC does not start running normally, check to see if the cables are connected properly.
Cables are twisted.
MT000051.eps
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount a drive. After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for initialization. For details of error messages appearing during diagnosis for initialization and actions to take, see “5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization”. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-59
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.6 CPU CAUTION Whenever dismounting/remounting the CPU, be sure to wear a wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to static electricity discharged from the human body.
Mounting procedure NOTES When a floppy disk used for BIOS upgrading is attached to the CPU for replacement, upgrade BIOS accordingly after the CPU has been replaced. Exercise care not to mount the CPU in an incorrect direction.
Dismounting procedure
1. 2.
Dismount the CPU fan. For how to dismount the CPU fan, see “5.2.3 CPU Fan”.
Raise the CPU socket levers to remove the CPU.
NOTE Carefully handle the CPU as it can be damaged easily.
CPU MT000056.EPS
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the CPU. After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for initialization. For details of error messages appearing during diagnosis for initialization and actions to take, see “5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-60
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.7 Housing Fan
5.2.8 Power Supply Unit
Dismounting procedure
Dismounting procedure
1. 2. 3.
Dismount the CPU fan. For the CPU fan dismounting procedure, see “5.2.3 CPU Fan”.
Disconnect the housing fan connector from the motherboard. While holding the housing fan with a hand, remove the two screws to dismount it.
Mounting procedure NOTE
1.
For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
2.
Remove screws from the CD-ROM drive to slide it to the front.
3.
While holding the CL-PC with both hands, tilt the CL-PC gently so that its left side faces up.
4.
Remove the hard disk bay.
5.
Disconnect cables from the power supply unit.
6.
While holding the power supply unit with a hand, remove the four screws to dismount it.
Pay attention to the housing fan mounting direction. Cable
Label face Rear of the CL MT000052.EPS
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the housing fan.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover.
For how to remove the hard disk bay, see “5.2.4 Hard Disk”.
For motherboard (main power supply/CPU power supply) For hard disk For CD-ROM drive For FD drive
Mounting procedure Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the power supply unit. After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for initialization. For details of error messages appearing during diagnosis for initialization and actions to take, see “5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-61
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
5.2.9 Memory
Mounting procedure
1.
CAUTION Whenever dismounting/remounting memory, be sure to wear a wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to static electricity discharged from the human body.
➔ When the memory is pushed in the socket, levers located on both the right-and-left sides will close automatically.
NOTE Pay due attention to the memory mounting direction. A notch is provided on the terminal side of the memory to prevent it from being pushed in the socket mistakenly.
NOTE Use only NEC-specified memories. If a memory of a third party is used, an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main unit. Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third party’s memory will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
Dismounting procedure
1. 2.
Remove the hard disk bay. For how to remove the hard disk bay, see “5.2.4 Hard Disk”.
Open levers on both the right-and-left sides of the memory socket to remove the memory.
Set the memory in an upright position and push it in the socket.
2.
Remount the hard disk bay.
3.
After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for initialization.
For how to remount the hard disk bay, see “5.2.4 Hard Disk”.
NOTE If an error message is displayed, perform “■ Error cancel procedure”. “■ Error cancel procedure”
Lever
MT000057.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-62
5.2 Service Parts Replacement
Error cancel procedure
1. 2.
Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON. ➔ The PC will start running.
CAUTION
When “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper left corner of the window, press the key.
Whenever dismounting/remounting a motherboard, be sure to wear a wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held by the human body, otherwise, the motherboard may be damaged due to static electricity discharged from the human body.
NOTE
NOTE
The setup window will not open unless the key is pressed with the timeliness. In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2. ➔ The setup window (PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility) then opens.
3.
5.2.10 Motherboard
Select the “Advanced” tab.
User’s equipment-specific information or setup information is stored in the memory (CMOS) on the motherboard. Prior to replacing a motherboard, be sure to jot down such stored data properly.
Dismounting procedure
1.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover.
2.
Remove the hard disk bay.
3.
Dismount devices, such as memory and PCI board, from the motherboard.
4.
Disconnect all connectors from the motherboard.
5.
Remove the seven screws to dismount the motherboard.
4. Perform the following.
Select “Advanced Chipset Control” and then press the key. S elect “Memory Reconfiguration” and then press the key. Select “Clear DIMM Errors:[Enter]” and then press the key.
5.
Press the key. ➔ The Main Menu will open.
6.
Press the key.
7.
Make sure that “Exit Saving Changes” has been selected and press the key.
➔ The Exit menu will open.
➔ The “Setup Confirmation” window opens.
8.
Make sure that “Yes” has been selected and press the key. ➔ The PC restarts. Check to see then that the error has been canceled properly.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover, see “5.2.2 Covers”.
For how to remove the hard disk bay, see “5.2.4 Hard Disk”.
Power cable (for main power supply/CPU power supply) Speaker cable Power switch cable IDE cable (for CD-ROM drive/hard disk) Sleep switch cable FD drive cable Housing fan cable CD audio cable
Mounting procedure Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the motherboard.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-63
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization No. Error Message 1 Diskette drive A error
Error Drive A FDD error
Causes FDD failure, FDD cable failure
2
Extended RAM Failed at address line:
Abnormal extended memory Extended DIMM error
3
System RAM Failed at offset:
Abnormal base memory
DIMM error
4
Shadow Ram Failed at offset:
Abnormal memory
DIMM error
5
Failure Fixed Disk
Abnormal disk
1. Setup failure 2. IDE device failure 3. Motherboard failure
6
Keyboard Controller Failed
Keyboard controller error
7
Keyboard error
Abnormal keyboard controller Abnormal keyboard
8
Real time clock error
Abnormal RTC
9
System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP
Dead battery
10
System CMOS checksum bad - Default Configuration CMOS checksum error used
11 12 13
System cache error - Cache disabled System timer error SMBIOS-SROM data checksumbad
Abnormal cache Abnormal timer SROM checksum error
14
SMBIOS-SROM data read error
SROM read error
15
Check date and time settings
Illegal date/time
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Actions to Take * After cable connection 1. Replace FDD. 2. Replace FDD cable. * For an error occurring after confirming status of the mounted memory Replace DIMM. * For an error occurring after confirming status of the mounted memory Replace DIMM. * For an error occurring after confirming status of the mounted memory Replace DIMM. * After cable connection 1. Check setup. 2. Replace IDE device. 3. Replace IDE device cable. Replace motherboard.
Keyboard error
* For an error occurring after confirming connection to the keyboard Replace keyboard. RTC error * For an error occurring after redetermining the setup Replace motherboard. End of battery lifespan, RTC Replace battery. error * For an error occurring after redetermining CMOS checksum error the setup Replace motherboard. CPU cache error Replace CPU. Timer error Replace motherboard. Flash ROM write error * For an error occurring after redetermining the setup Replace motherboard. Flash ROM error * For an error occurring after redetermining the setup Replace motherboard. RTC error * For an error occurring after redetermining the setup Replace motherboard.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-64
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
No. Error Message 16 Fan Alarm occurred.
Error Abnormal fan
Causes Housing fan error
17
CPU Fan Alarm occurred.
Abnormal CPU fan
CPU fan error
18
System Temperature out of the range.
Abnormal temperature
Temperature error, MB failure
19
System Voltage out of the range
Abnormal voltage
Power supply error, MB failure
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Actions to Take * For an error occurring after confirming connection 1. Clean fan. 2. Replace fan. * For an error occurring after confirming connection and mounting 1. Clean fan. 2. Replace fan. For an error occurring at normal temperature 1. Setup 2. Replace motherboard. * For an error occurring after redetermining the setup 1. Replace power supply. 2. Replace motherboard.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-65
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup A series of beep sounds notify occurrence of an error, when display of the relevant error message or the problem indication is disabled on the monitor for the error thus detected during hardware initialization. Example: One beep + 3 consecutive beeps + 1 beep + 1 beep (beep pattern: 1-3-1-1) The beep sounds in this pattern indicate occurrence of a DRAM refresh test error. The beep sounds in different patterns depending on the detected error or problem, as shown in the table below. Beep pattern
Error
3-3 (repeated) ROM checksum error
Cause
Remedy
Flash Memory failure
Replace motherboard.
DRAM refresh error
DIMM or motherboard failure
Confirm DIMM attaching condition. If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller test error
Keyboard Controller failure
Re-connect the keyboard. If the failure still remains, replace keyboard or motherboard.
1-3-3-1
Error occurring during capacity check, with no memory
1-3-4-1
DRAM address error
DIMM or motherboard failure
1-3-4-3
DRAM test Low Byte error
Confirm DIMM attaching condition. If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
1-4-1-1
DRAM test High Byte error
2-1-2-3
BIOS ROM copyright test error
Flash Memory failure
Replace motherboard.
2-2-3-1
Illegal interrupt test error
Motherboard failure
Replace motherboard.
Option ROM initialization error
Confirm PCI board mounting condition if expansion of the option board is not Failure of Flash Memory, Graphic displayed for the additionally extended PCI board. Adapter or PCI Card If the failure still remains, replace additionally extended PCI board or motherboard.
1-2-2-3
ROM checksum error
1-3-1-1
1-2
Video initialization error Option ROM checksum error
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-66
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-67
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MT-68
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.1(B)) Event
Event Source
Description
10773 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv FFTagCharDataAdd Error
10774 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Error 10775 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Error 10776 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push Error %1 : Registry Value 10900 IIPInputEz Get/Set Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Connection 10901 IIPInputEz Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Data 10902 IIPInputEz Get/Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Dicom Data Object 10903 IIPInputEz Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Other Error%n 10904 IIPInputEz [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Definition of TagCharDataAdd.ini is invalid. Check the TagCharDataAdd.ini. Failed in setting Photometric Interpretation Restart. (0028, 0004). Failed in setting Pixel Intensity Relationship Restart. Sign (0028, 1041). Failed in setting Presentation LUT Shape (2050, 0020).
Restart.
The acquisition/setup key or registration information is abnormal.
Check the registry key.
This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name. character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect database file name, or a damaged database. This error is attributable to an abnormal database acquisition/setup key or database.
Check the database table/field name.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag is abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
Unknown error.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-1
Event
Event Source
11900 IIPInputEz
11900 IIPPortable
11901 IIPInputEz
11901 IIPPortable
11902 IIPInputEz
11902 IIPPortable
11903 IIPInputEz
11903 IIPPortable
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : Registry Value Get/Set Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Registry Value Get/ Set Error [Key] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Connection Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Connection Error [DB] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Data Get/ Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Database Data Get/ Set Error [DB] %2 [Table]%3 [Field]%4 [Exp]%5 %1 : Dicom Data Object Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : DDO Data Get/Set Error [Tag] %2 %3 %4 %5
Causes
Remedies
The acquisition/setup key or registration information is abnormal.
Check the registry key.
The registry was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system.
Remarks
This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name. character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect database file name, or a damaged database. Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
This error is attributable to an abnormal acquisition/setup key or database.
Check the database table/field name.
Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
The DDO acquisition/setup tag is abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
The DDO file was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-2
Event
Event Source
11904 IIPInputEz
11904 IIPPortable
12001 FF32
Description %1 : Other Error%n [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5 %1 : Other Error [Procedure] %2 [Error Code]%3 [Exp]%4 %5 [%1] It failed in CreateFile(%2). %3
Causes
Remedies
Unknown error.
Program error or unstable system status.
Failed in reading a bitmap file. It is conceivable that there was no such file, free disk space was not sufficient or the system was unstable.
Check POCKET id Console connection status and restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.) Check to see if the filename is correct or available hard disk space is sufficient. Proceed with processing.
12002 FF32
[%1] It failed in CreateFileMapping(%2). %3
Failed in creating a file map object. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Proceed with processing.
12003 FF32
[%1] It failed in MapViewOfFile(%2). %3
Failed in mapping a file. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Proceed with processing.
12004 FF32
[%1] It failed in CreateCompatibleDC. [%2] [%1] It failed in CreateDIBSection(%2). %3
Failed in creating a device context. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable. Failed in creating a DIB section. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Proceed with processing.
12006 FF32
[%1] It failed in OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2). %3
Failed in creating a bitmap picture object. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Proceed with processing.
12008 FF32
[%1] It failed in ExtractIon. %2
Failed in reading an icon file. It is conceivable that there was no such file, free disk space was not sufficient or the system was unstable.
Check to see if the filename is correct or available hard disk space is sufficient. Proceed with processing.
12005 FF32
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Proceed with processing.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Appx1 MT-3
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
12009 FF32
[%1] It failed in OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2). %3
Failed in creating an picture object for an icon. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Proceed with processing.
12011 FF32
The file path was illegal.
12012 FF32
[%1] It is a filepath error. %2 [%1] Memory allocation failed(%2). %3
Check to see if the filename is correct. Proceed with processing. Check to see if the filename is correct. Proceed with processing.
12014 FF32
[%1]
An invalid input value was specified.
Proceed with processing.
12015 FF32
[%1] %2
An invalid input value was specified.
Proceed with processing.
12016 FF32
[%1] %2 %3
An invalid input value was specified.
Proceed with processing.
12900 IIPInputEz
%1 : Registry Value Get/Set Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Registry Value Get/ Set Error [Key] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Connection Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5
The acquisition/setup key or registration information is abnormal.
Check the registry key.
A registry was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system.
12900 IIPPortable
12901 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Failed in acquiring memory. It is conceivable that available resources were insufficient or the system was unstable.
Remarks “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: Bitmap file name/Icon file name “%1”: Instance name (function name), occurred error, error code “%1”: Instance name (function name), occurred error, error code “%1”: Error details “%1”: Instance name (function name), occurred error, error code “%2”: Error details (1/2) “%3”: Error details (2/2)
This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name. character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect database file name, or a damaged database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-4
Event
Event Source
12901 IIPPortable
12902 IIPInputEz
12902 IIPPortable
12903 IIPInputEz
12903 IIPPortable
12904 IIPInputEz
12904 IIPPortable
13000 FFIdDepartSelect
13000 FFIdFilmMark
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : Database Connection Error [DB] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Data Get/Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Database Data Get/ Set Error [DB] %2 [Table]%3 [Field]%4 [Exp]%5 %1 : Dicom Data Object Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : DDO Data Get/Set Error [Tag] %2 %3 %4 %5 %1 : Unknown Error%n [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5 %1 : Other Error [Procedure] %2 [Error Code]%3 [Exp]%4 %5 It failed that [%1] connects departDB It failed that [%1] gets the FontName
Causes
Remedies
Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
This error is attributable to an abnormal acquisition/setup key or database.
Check the database table/field name.
Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
The DDO acquisition/setup tag is abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
The DDO file was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system and perform “Initialization of image database”. (Image data will be fully deleted.)
Unknown error.
Check the POCKET id Console connection status.
A general-purpose information event log.
Check the POCKET id Console connection status.
Remarks
The requesting department database was Reinstall. not found in the path indicated by the connection character string. The requesting department table did not exist. The “Font” key was not found in the Reinstall the IIP because the displayed registry. characters can be corrupted.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-5
Event
Event Source
13000 FFIdMenuChange 13000 FFIdMenuItem 13000 FFIdParamedicSelect
Description
Causes
Remedies
It failed that [%1] gets the FontName It failed that [%1] gets the FontName It failed that [%1] connects paramedicDB
The “Font” key was not found in the registry. The “Font” key was not found in the registry. The technician’s database was not found in the pass indicated by the connection character string or the technician's table did not exist. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30700” was not registered in the character string database. The image database was not successfully accessed (ADO error).
13000 FFIdPatInfoInput
It failed that [%1] gets the ID# caption
13001 FF32LIB
Image Database Access Failure. ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2 SQLState:%3 Source:%4 Description:%5 MessageBox DataBase The message database was not Connection Error. successfully connected. It is conceivable that the database did not exist or that the specified data source name was invalid. MessageBox DataBase The connection to the message database Connection Error. was not successfully established. [%1] The database did not exist or the specified data source name was invalid. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in DepartLabel caption Directory.ini or the ID “30800” was not registered in the character string database. It failed that [%1] gets the The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ FontSize “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. It failed that [%1] gets the The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ FontSize “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. It failed that [%1] gets the The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ FontSize “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in ParamedicLabel caption Directory.ini or the ID “30800” was not registered in the character string database. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in EXAM# caption Directory.ini or the ID “30701” was not registered in the character string database. It failed that [%1] gets the The “Font” key was not found in the FontName registry.
13001 FFCustomMsgBox
13001 FFCustomMsgBox
13001 FFIdDepartSelect 13001 FFIdFilmMark 13001 FFIdMenuChange 13001 FFIdMenuItem 13001 FFIdParamedicSelect 13001 FFIdPatInfoInput 13001 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall.
Reinstall. Restart.
Reinstall or check whether the message database exists and the contents of Directory.ini are correct. Perform a reinstallation or check whether the message database exists and the contents of Directory.ini are correct. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-6
Event
Event Source
13001 FFImageDBCTL
13001 FFImageDBCTL
13001 FFIpcInf
Description Image Database Access Error. ErroNo:%1 Source:%2 Description:%3 Image Database Access Failure. ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2 SQLState:%3 Source:%4 Description:%5 [%1] It failed in CoInitialize(%2).
Causes
Remedies
The image database was not successfully Restart. accessed (ADO error).
The image database was not successfully Restart. accessed (ADO error).
Initialization was unsuccessful. Restart. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. Log file creation was unsuccessful. Check for a free disk space or restart. The problem might have been caused, for instance, by an invalid filename selection, inadequate disk space, or system instability. Failed in accessing the database. Restart.
13001 FFLogFile
[%1] It failed in CreateFile(%2).
13001 FF32LIB
FF32lib Database Access Failure.%nFunction:%1 Command:%2%nErrNo:%3 NativeErrNo:%4 SQLState:%5%n Source:%6%n Description:%7 MessageBox Data Get The specified message was not databased. Error. It is conceivable that the message was not registered in the message database or that the specified ID was incorrect (program defect). It failed that [%1] gets the The “Font” key was not found in the FontName registry. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Clear Caption Directory.ini or the ID “34800” was not registered in the character string database. Driver initialize error[%1] The magnetic card was not connected.
13002 FFCustomMsgBox
13002 FFIdDepartSelect 13002 FFIdFilmMark 13002 FFIdMcrControl 13002 FFIdMenuChange 13002 FFIdMenuItem 13002 FFIdParamedicSelect 13002 FFIdPatInfoInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
It failed that [%1] gets the multibyte flag It failed that [%1] gets the multibyte flag It failed that [%1] gets the FontName It failed that [%1] gets the PatNameSbcs caption
Remarks
The “Multibyte” key was not found in the registry. The “Multibyte” key was not found in the registry. The “Font” key was not found in the registry. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30702” was not registered in the character string database.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: File name/mutex name
Perform a reinstallation or replace the message database with the latest one.
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall. Connect the magnetic card reader. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-7
Event
Event Source
Description
13002 FFIdRuMainControl
Driver initialize error[%1]
13002 FFIipInput
It failed that [%1] gets the FontSize
13002 FFImageDBCTL
[%1] %2 Image Database Access Failure. InstanceName[%1]%2 [%1] It failed in CoCreateInstance(%2). LogFileCom create failure. [%1] It failed in CreateFileMapping(%2). FF32lib Database Access Failure. InstanceName[%1] %n%2%nFunction:%3 Command:%4 Image Database Access Failure. InstanceName[%1]%2 %3 Same MessageBox Existed. [%1] It failed that [%1] gets the FontSize
13002 FFImageDBCTL 13002 FFIpcInf
13002 FFLogFile 13002 FF32LIB
13003 FF32LIB
13003 FFCustomMsgBox 13003 FFIdDepartSelect 13003 FFIdFilmMark 13003 FFIdMenuChange
13003 FFIdMenuItem 13003 FFIdParamedicSelect 13003 FFIdPatInfoInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
It failed that [%1] gets the connection string of strDB [%1] failed in the initialization for the display group data acquisition Image Folder Path Get Error It failed that [%1] gets the FontSize It failed that [%1] gets the PatNameDbcs caption
Causes
Remedies
The magnetic card reader was not connected. The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. The image database was not successfully accessed. The image database was not successfully accessed. A log save control was not successfully created. The problem is attributable to system instability or unregistered control.
Remarks
There are no operational problems. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Restart. Restart. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
File map object creation was unsuccessful. Restart. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability. Failed in accessing the database. Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
The image database was not successfully Restart. accessed. The specified message box is already open.
Close the message box.
The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini. The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the connection character string was not properly registered in the display group table. The “Bitmap” key was not found in Directory.ini. The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30703” was not registered in the character string database.
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall. Reinstall.
Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-8
Event
Event Source
13003 FFIipInput 13003 FFImageDBCTL 13003 FFImageDBCTL 13003 FFIpcInf
13003 FFLogFile 13003 FF32LIB
13004 FFCustomMsgBox 13004 FFIdDepartSelect 13004 FFIdFilmMark 13004 FFIdMcrControl 13004 FFIdMenuChange
Description It failed that [%1] gets the multibyte flag [%1] %2 %3 Image Database Access Failure. InstanceName[%1]%2%3 [%1] Memory allocation failed. [%1] It failed in MapViewOfFile(%2). FF32lib Database Access Failure. InstanceName[%1]%n%2 %n%3 MessageBox Dialog Create Error. [%1] It failed that [%1] gets the depart field list It failed that [%1] connects to strDB Magnetic card data acquisition error[%1] [%1] failed in the display group data acquisition
13004 FFIdMenuItem
[Miss]Image Get Error
13004 FFIdParamedicSelect
It failed that [%1] gets the paramedic field list It failed that [%1] gets the Sex caption
13004 FFIdPatInfoInput 13004 FFIdRuMainControl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Magnetic card data acquisition error[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The “Multibyte” key was not found in the Reinstall. registry. The image database was not successfully Restart. accessed. The image database was not successfully Restart. accessed. Memory allocation was not successfully achieved for main thread creation. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability. File mapping was unsuccessful. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability. Failed in accessing the database.
Restart.
“%1”: Instance name
Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
The message box could not be created. This error occurred due to insufficient resources or system instability. The “FieldDepartList” key was not found in the system setup database. The connection character string was not properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. The magnetic card was found damaged.
Restart.
The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the connection character string was not properly registered in the display group table. Id_MissExposure_I.bmp was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The “FieldParamedicList” key was not found in the system setup database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30704” was not registered in the character string database. The magnetic card is damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall. Reinstall. Have a normal magnetic card be read.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall. Reinstall. Have a normal magnetic card be read.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-9
Event
Event Source
13004 FFIipInput 13004 FFIpcInf 13004 FFLogFile
13005 FFCustomMsgBox 13005 FFIdConnectionWatch EX
13005 FFIdFilmMark 13005 FFldMcrControl 13005 FFIdMenuChange 13005 FFIdPatInfoInput 13005 FFIdRuMainControl 13005 FFIdRuMainControl
Description
13005 FFIpcInf 13006 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies
It failed that [%1] gets the connection string of STR DB [%1] A pipe has already been made(%2). [%1] It failed in CreateMutex(%2). %3
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
An attempt was made to duplicate a pipe.
There are no operational problems.
Mutex creation was unsuccessful. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability.
Restart.
MessageBox Dialog Show Error. [%1] Recv Error Message [%1] Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] gets the connection string of FilmMarkDB Magnetic card variation error[%1] [%1] failed in the liberating processing of the display group data acquisition It failed that [%1] gets the SexMale caption
The message box could not be opened. Restart. This error occurred due to insufficient resources or system instability. The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal. connection error occurred.
Magnetic card variation error[%1] Recv error[%1]
13005 FFIdRUMainControlEx Recv Error 13005 FFIipInput
Causes
The “FilmMarkDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The magnetic card was not of the specified type. The connection to the display group table was not successfully closed.
Have the specified type of magnetic card be read. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall.
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30705” was not registered in the character string database. The employed magnetic card type was different than specified. The connection to the RU was closed or an error occurred in the connection. The connection to the RU was closed or a connection error occurred.
Reinstall.
Remarks
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code “%3”: file name/mutex name
Have the specified type of magnetic card be read. Check the connection to the RU. Restore the RU connection to normal.
Message [%1] Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not Reinstall. to STR DB properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. [%1] Main thread creation was not successful. Restart. It failed in The problem is attributable to resource _beginthread(%2). inadequacy or system instability. List For Modeless The modeless message box management Restart. MessageBox Management table was not successfully created. New Error. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Appx1 MT-10
Event
Event Source
13006 FFCustomMsgBox
13006 FFIdFilmMark
Description
Causes
List For Modeless MessageBox Management New Error. [%1] It failed that [%1] connects to FilmMarkDB
The modeless message box management table was not successfully created. This error occurred due to insufficient resources or system instability. The connection character string was not properly registered for the “FilmMarkDB” key in Directory.ini. The card format was incorrect or an attempt was made to read an unspecified hospital card. The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
13006 FFIdMcrControl
Magnetic card variation check error[%1]
13006 FFIdMenuChange
[%1] Failed in the initialization for the display menu data acquisition It failed that [%1] gets the SexFemale caption
13006 FFIdPatInfoInput 13006 FFIdRuMainControl
Magnetic card variation check error[%1]
13006 FFIipInput
It failed that [%1] gets the connection string of SYS DB [%1] It failed in WaitNamedPipe(%2).
13006 FFIpcInf
13007 FFIdDepartSelect 13007 FFIdMcrControl 13007 FFIdMenuChange 13007 FFIdParamedicSelect 13007 FFIdPatInfoInput 13007 FFIdRuMainControl 13007 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.
Reinstall. Have the specified hospital card be read. Reinstall.
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini or the ID “30706” was not registered in the character string database. The card format was wrong or an attempt Have the specified hospital card be read. was made to cause an unspecified hospital card to be read. The “SysConfigDB“ key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini.
The specified pipe was not successfully connected. It is conceivable that the pipe was not created or was unconnectable or that the system was unstable. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in connection string of strDB Directory.ini. DataFormatDB access “McrDataFormatDB” key was not found in error[%1] Directory.ini or McrDataFormat.mdb did not exist in the specified path. [%1] failed in the acquisition The connection character string was not of number of records of properly registered in the display group display menu data table. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in connection string of strDB Directory.ini. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in SexOther caption Directory.ini or the ID “30707” was not registered in the character string database. DataFormatDB access The “McrDataFormatDB” key was not error[%1] found in Directory.ini or McrDataFormat. mdb did not exist in the path. It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to SYS DB properly registered for the “SysConfigDB“ key in Directory.ini.
Make a change so as to let the program initiate a retransmission, or restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-11
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13007 FFIpcInf
[%1] It failed in CreateFile(%2).
13007 FFIpcInf
[%1] It failed in CreateFile(%2). [Send Msg:%3]
13008 FFCustomMsgBox
An exception error occurred. [%1] %2 Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred. Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to strDB properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. It failed that [%1] get the The “Bitmap” key was not found in folder path to Bitmap Directory.ini. [%1] failed in the display Not properly registered to the display group menu data acquisition table. It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to strDB properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. It failed that [%1] gets the The “LangStrDB” key was not found in DateOfBirth caption Directory.ini or the ID “30708” was not registered in the character string database. DataFormatDB close The database was faulty. error[%1] Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred. WSAGetLastError = [%2] It failed that [%1] calls the The message database did not exist or the CUSTOM MESSAGE BOX program was faulty. (%2) [%1] A message was not successfully It failed in WriteFile(%2). transmitted. It is conceivable that the pipe was closed or that the system was unstable. [%1] The message transmission was not It failed in WriteFile(%2). successfully completed. This error [Send Msg:%3] occurred due to a closed pipe or system instability.
13008 FFIdConnectionWatch Ex 13008 FFIdDepartSelect
13008 FFIdFilmMark 13008 FFIdMenuChange 13008 FFIdParamedicSelect 13008 FFIdPatInfoInput 13008 FFIdRuMainControl 13008 FFIdRUMainControlEx 13008 FFIipInput 13008 FFIpcInf
13008 FFIpcInf
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
The specified pipe was not successfully connected. It is conceivable that the pipe was closed or that the system was unstable. The connection to the specified pipe was not established. This error occurred because the pipe was closed or the system was unstable. An exception occurred (the system was unstable).
Remarks
The problem is attributable to the program. “%1”: Instance name Check the program or restart. “%2”: Error code The problem is attributable to the program. Check the program or restart. Restart.
Restore the RU connection to normal. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Restore the RU connection to normal. Reinstall. The problem is attributable to the program. “%1”: Instance name Check the program or restart. “%2”: Error code It is conceivable that the program may be faulty. Check the program or restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-12
Event
Event Source
Description
13009 FFCustomMsgBox
Common function error occurred. [%1] %2 13009 FFIdConnectionWatch LogFile Name Make error(%1).%n[%2] 13009 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Log File Name Make Error[%1] Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] gets the 13009 FFIdDepartSelect connection string of sysDB It failed that [%1] get the 13009 FFIdFilmMark bitmap to Previous Page
13009 FFIdMcrControl 13009 FFIdMenuChange 13009 FFIdParamedicSelect 13009 FFIdPatInfoInput 13009 FFIdRuMainControl 13009 FFIdRUMainControlEx 13009 FFIpcInf
DataFormatDB close error[%1] [%1] Failed in the liberating processing of the display menu data acquisition Is failed that [%1] gets the connection string of sysDB It failed that [%1] gets the FontName LogFile Name Make error[%1] Log File Name Make Error[%1] Error Code [%2] [%1] Memory allocation failed.
Causes
Remedies
The common function returned an error.
Restart.
The “Log” key was not found in Directory. ini. The “Log” key was not found in Directory. ini.
Reinstall.
The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in Directory.ini. Id_UpScroll_U.bmp/“Id_UpScroll_D.bmp”/ “Id_UpScroll_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The database was faulty.
Reinstall.
The connection to the display menu table was not successfully closed.
Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database.
The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in Directory.ini. The “Font” key was not found in the registry. The “Log” key was not found in Directory. ini. The “Log” key was not found in Directory. ini.
Reinstall.
Memory allocation was not successfully achieved for reception thread creation. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability. The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in 13010 FFIdConnectionWatch DB Connect error(%1).%n[%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist in the path. “SysConfigDB” key was not found in 13010 FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Connect Error [%1] Error Code [%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist in the specified path. It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not 13010 FFIdDepartSelect to sysDB properly registered for the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Register the “Log” key in Directory.ini.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall.
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall. Register the “Log” key in Directory.ini. Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Reinstall. Properly register the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-13
Event
Event Source
13010 FFIdFilmMark
13010 FFIdMcrControl 13010 13010 13010 13010 13010 13010 13010 13010 13011
13011
13011 13011
Description It failed that [%1] get the bitmap to Next Page
Causes
Remedies
Id_DownScroll_U.bmp/“Id_DownScroll_D. bmp”/“Id_DownScroll_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The patient information contained in the magnetic card was incorrect. The connection to the display menu table was not successfully closed.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Patient info data error[%1] %n(%2) FFIdMenuChange [%1] Failed in the termination of the display menu data acquisition FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to sysDB properly registered for the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. FFIdPatInfoInput It failed that [%1] gets the The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ FontSize “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. FFIdRuMainControl DB Connect error[%1] The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist in the path. FFIdRuMainControl Patient info data error[%1] The patient information carried by the magnetic card was incorrect. FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Connect Error “SysConfigDB” key was not found in [%1] Error Code [%2] Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist in the specified path. FFIpcInf [%1] Pipe creation was not successful. It failed in It is conceivable that the system was CreateNamedPipe(%2). unstable. FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in The pipe was not successfully created. CreateNamedPipe(%2). The system was unstable. [Pipe:%3] FFIdConnectionWatch DB Read The “EchoInterval”, “ComBreakTimeout1” error(%1).%n[%2] “PartFrupStatus”, or “EnableLog FrupConnect” key was not found in SysConfig.mdb. FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Read error[%1] The “EchoInterval”, “ComBreakTimeout1” Error Code [%2] “PortFrupStatus”, or “EnableLogFrupConnect” key was not found in SysConfig.mdb. FFIdDepartSelect It's failed that [%1] gets the DepartDB did not exist in Directory.ini. connection string of departDB FFIdFilmMark It failed that [%1] get the Id_Clear_U.bmp/“Id_Clear_D.bmp”/ bitmap to Clear “Id_Clear_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check the data contained in the magnetic card. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall. Check the data stored in the magnetic card. Properly register the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Restart. Reinstall.
Ensure that the “EchoInterval”, “ComBreakTimeout1”, “PortFrupStatus”, and “EnableLogFrupConnect” keys are all registered in SysConfig.mdb. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-14
Event
Event Source
13011 FFIdParamedicSelect 13011 FFIdPatInfoInput 13011 FFIdRuMainControl
Description It failed that [%1] gets the connection string of paramedicDB It failed that [%1] gets the max length of ID# DB Read error[%1]
13011 FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Read error[%1] Error Code [%2]
13011 FFIipInput 13011 FFIpcInf 13011 FFIpcInf
13011 FFCustomMsgBox
13012 FFIdPatInfoInput 13012 FFIpcInf 13012 FFIpcInf
13013 FFIdMenuChange 13013 FFIdPatInfoInput 13013 FFIdRUMainControlEx 13013 FFIpcInf
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
It failed that [%1] gets the window size [%1] It failed in ConnectNamedPipe(%2). [%1] It failed in ConnectNamedPipe(%2). [Pipe:%3] ActiveX Data Objects(ADO) Error. ErrorNo:%1 Source:%2 Description:%3 It failed that [%1] gets the max length of EXAM# [%1] It failed in _beginthread(%2). [%1] It failed in _beginthread(%2). [Pipe:%3] It failed that [%1] get the folder path to Bitmap It failed that [%1] gets the padding type of ID# Configration error[%1] WSAGetLastError = [%2] [%1] It failed in ReadFile(%2).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
ParamedicDB did not exist in Directory.ini. Reinstall. The “IdLength” key was not found in the system setup database. The “PortFrupMain”, “AckTimeout”, or “EnableLogFrupMain” key was not found in SysConfig.mdb. The “PortFrupMain”, “AckTimeout”, or “EnableLogFrupMain” key was not found in SysConfig.mdb. The “ScallHight”/“ScallWidth” key was not registered in the registry. Pipe connection was not successfully awaited. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. The pipe connection request was not successfully enqueued. The system was unstable. An ADO error was detected.
Reinstall. Reinstall. Ensure that the “PortFrupMain”, “AckTimeout”, and “EnableLogFrupMain” keys are all registered in SysConfig.mdb. Reinstall. Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Restart.
Restart.
The “ExaminationNoLength” key was not Reinstall. found in the system setup database. Reception thread creation was not Restart. successful. The problem is attributable to resource inadequacy or system instability. The reception thread was not successfully Restart. created. This error occurred due to insufficient resources or system instability. The “Bitmap” key was not found in Directory.ini. The “IdPadding” key was not found in the system setup database. SysConfig.mdb was abnormal.
Reinstall.
Message reception was not successful. It is conceivable that the system was unstable.
Restart.
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
“%1”: Instance name “%2”: Error code
Appx1 MT-15
Event
Event Source
Description
13013 FFIpcInf
[%1] It failed in ReadFile(%2). [Pipe:%3] 13014 FFIdConnectionWatch Ack Messeage Time Out(%1).%n[%2] 13014 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Ack Message Time Out[%1] Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] get the 13014 FFIdMenuChange bitmap to Previous Page
13014 FFIdPatInfoInput 13014 FFIdRuMainControl 13014 FFIdRUMainControlEx 13014 FFIipInput
13014 FFIpcInf 13015 FFIdMenuChange
13015 FFIdPatInfoInput
It failed that [%1] gets the padding type of EXAM# Ack Messeage Time Out[%1] Ack Message Time Out[%1] WSAGetLastError = [%2] [%1] No RU Used
[%1] It is a parameter error. It failed that [%1] get the bitmap to Next Page
It failed that [%1] gets the multibyte flag [%1] 13015 FFIpcInf Exception Information. %2 It failed that [%1] gets the 13016 FFIdPatInfoInput date format type 13017 FFIdConnectionWatchEx RU Host Unknown Error[%1] Error Code [%2] It failed that [%1] gets the 13017 FFIdPatInfoInput connection string of strDB 13017 FFIdRUMainControlEx RU Host Unknown Error[%1] Error Code [%2] 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The message reception was not Restart. successfully completed. The system was unstable. The connection to the RU was closed or Check the connection to the RU. an error occurred in the connection. The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal. connection error occurred. Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/“Id_PrevPage_ D.bmp”/“Id _PrevPage_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The “ExaminationNoPadding” key was not found in the system setup database. The connection to the RU was closed or an error occurred in the connection. The connection to the RU was closed or a connection error occurred.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Although the FRUP option was selected, NetConfig did not have any RU connection setting. There was a conflict between the option setup and Config setup. An illegal parameter was encountered (program defect). Id_NextPage_U.bmp/“Id_NextPage_ D.bmp”/“Id _NextPage_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The “Multibyte” key was not found in the registry. An exception occurred (the system was unstable).
Check the settings.
Reinstall. Check the connection to the RU. Restore the RU connection to normal.
“%1”: Instance name Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall. Restart.
The “DateFormat” key was not found in the Reinstall. system setup database. The RU was not properly set for the IIP. Check the setup. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini. The RU was not properly set for the IIP.
Reinstall. Check the setup.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-16
Event
Event Source
13018 FFIdPatInfoInput 13019 FFIdPatInfoInput 13020 FFIdPatInfoInput 13020 FFIipInput
13021 FFIipInput 13022 FFIdPatInfoInput 13022 FFIipInput 13023 FFIdPatInfoInput
13023 FFIipInput
13024 FFIdPatInfoInput
13024 FFIipInput 13025 FFIdPatInfoInput
13026 FFIdPatInfoInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to strDB properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. It failed that [%1] gets the The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in connection string of sysDB Directory.ini. It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not to sysDB properly registered for the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. RU Error DB Connect Error The connection character string was not in [%1] properly registered for the “RuErrorDataDB” key in Directory.ini or the RU error information database did not exist. RU Error Data Get Error in The window number sent from the RU was [%1] not found in the RU error information database. It failed that [%1] gets The system setup database was damaged. System ID RU Status DB Connection The connection character string was not String Get Error in [%1] properly registered for the “RuStatusDataDB” key in Directory.ini. %1 (%2) : Patient The patient information contained illegal Information Check Error%n information. Item [%3]%n Error [%4] RU Status DB Connect The connection character string was not Error in [%1] properly registered for the “RuErrorDataDB” key in Directory.ini or the RU error information database did not exist. %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image “Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp”, Get Error%n “Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp”, or BMP File [%3] “Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp” was not found in the path to the folder in which images were positioned. RU Status Data Get Error The window number sent from the RU was in [%1] not found in the RU error information database. %1 (%2) : Patient Info Get The patient information database was Error%n damaged. Error [%3]%n RetCode [%4] %1 (%2) : Patient Info Set The patient information to be registered Error%n contained illegal information or the patient Error [%3]%n information database was damaged. RetCode [%4]
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
Ensure that the RU version agrees with the RU error information database version. Reinstall. Reinstall. Correct the patient information setup.
Reinstall.
Place “Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp”, “Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp”, and “Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp” in the path to the folder in which images are positioned. Ensure that the RU version agrees with the RU error information database version. Repair the patient information database.
Enter correct patient information or repair the patient information database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-17
Event
Event Source
13027 FFIdPatInfoInput 13027 FFIipInput 13030 FFIipInput 13031 FFIipInput 13032 FFIipInput 13033 FFIipInput 13034 FFIipInput 13035 FFIipInput 13036 FFIipInput 13037 FFIipInput 13038 FFIipInput 13039 FFIipInput 13040 FFIipInput 13041 FFIipInput 13042 FFIipInput 13043 FFIipInput 13044 FFIipInput 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 (%2) : Patient Info Not Correspond%n RetCode [%3]%n %1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n %5%n%6%n%7%0 %1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n %5%n%6%n%7%0
Causes
Remedies
No matching patient information was found. Control information
No particular remedy needs be taken.
The connection character string was not Reinstall. properly registered for the “RuStatusDataDB” key in Directory.ini. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
[%s] %s (%s): Log Output Directory Get Error [%s] %s (%s): MCR Control The card reader unit was not connected. Initialize Error [%s] %s (%s): LR button cannot be concave set [%s] %s (%s): TB button cannot be concave set [%s] %s (%s): TBLR button cannot be concave set [%s] %s (%s): Rotation button cannot be concave set [%s] %s (%s): Message Table Name Get Error [%s] %s (%s): StrDB Connection String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): StrDB Connect Error [%s] %s (%s): SysDB Connection String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): SysDB Connect Error [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB Connection Character String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed ImageDB Connection
Remarks
The range was changed by the Service Utility. The range was changed by the Service Utility. The range was changed by the Service Utility. The range was changed by the Service Utility.
There are no particular problems except that the magnetic card reader is not available. No particular remedy needs be taken. No particular remedy needs be taken. No particular remedy needs be taken. No particular remedy needs be taken.
The “MsgTableName” key was not found in Reinstall. the system setup database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini. The connection character string was not Reinstall. properly registered for the “LangStrDB” key in Directory.ini. The “SysConfigDB” key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini. The connection character string was not properly registered for the “SysConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. The “ImageDB“ key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall. Reinstall.
The connection character string was not Reinstall. properly registered for the “ImageDB” key in Directory.ini. [%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Reinstall. ImageDB Open Recordset accessed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-18
Event
Event Source
13045 FFIipInput
13046 FFIipInput
13047 FFIipInput
13048 FFIipInput
13049 FFIipInput
13050 FFIipInput
13051 FFIipInput
13052 FFIipInput 13053 FFIipInput 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager ImageDB Close Recordset accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager Data Get Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager Data Set Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): ImageDB The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager Data Delete Error accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager ImageDBFlag Connection accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): Failed The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager ImageDBFlag Close accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager ImageDBFlag Data Set accessed. is normally operating. If the same symptom Error occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [%s] %s (%s): Failed The initialization process for menu Reinstall. MenuDB Initialize database access was not successfully performed. [%s] %s (%s): Menu Data Menu information was not successfully Reinstall. in ImageDB Get Error acquired from the menu database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-19
Event
Event Source
13054 FFIipInput 13055 FFIipInput 13056 FFIipInput 13057 FFIipInput 13058 FFIipInput 13059 FFIipInput 13060 FFIipInput 13061 FFIipInput 13062 FFIipInput 13063 FFIipInput 13064 FFIipInput 13065 FFIipInput 13066 FFIipInput 13067 FFIipInput 13068 FFIipInput 13069 FFIipInput
13070 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Menu Parameter Data in ImageDB Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed MenuDB Termination [%s] %s (%s): NetDB Connection Character String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed NetDB Connection
Causes
Remedies
Menu parameter information was not successfully acquired from the menu database. The termination process for menu database access was not successfully performed. The “NetConfigDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
The connection character string was not Reinstall. properly registered for the “NetConfigDB” key in Directory.ini. [%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The network setup database was damaged. Reinstall. Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed New DICOM data was not successfully Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Create New DICOM Data created. initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Get Error acquired. initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully set up. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Set Error initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully deleted. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Delete Error initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully loaded. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Load Error initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully saved. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Save Error initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully freed. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, Free Error initialize the image database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “IdPadding” key was not found in the Reinstall. Padding Acquisition[Id#] system setup database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “ExaminationNoPadding” key was not Reinstall. Padding found in the system setup database. Acquisition[Exam#] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “DateFormat” key was not found in the Reinstall. Format Acquisition[Date Of system setup database. Birth] [%s] %s (%s): Cannot The requesting department database was Reinstall. Access Data not found in the path indicated by the Base[Departmdb] connection character string. The requesting department table did not exist. [%s] %s (%s): Displayed The “FieldDepartList” key was not found in Reinstall. Item Is Not the system setup database. Understood[Depart List]
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-20
Event
Event Source
13072 FFIipInput 13073 FFIipInput
13074 FFIipInput 13076 FFIipInput 13077 FFIipInput 13078 FFIipInput 13079 FFIipInput 13080 FFIipInput
13081 FFIipInput 13082 FFIipInput 13083 FFIipInput 13084 FFIipInput 13085 FFIipInput 13086 FFIipInput 13087 FFIipInput 13088 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Connected String Acquisition[Depart] [%s] %s (%s): Cannot Access Data Base[Paramedicmdb] [%s] %s (%s): Displayed Item Is Not Understood[Paramedic List] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Connected String Acquisition[Paramedic] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Window Size Acquisition [%s] %s (%s): Failed in ExposureList Erase [%s] %s (%s): Config Directory Character String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): ImageDBFlag Data Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): StrDB Message String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): IPAddress(RU) Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Initialize Timeout [%s] %s (%s): Terminate Error [%s] %s (%s): Terminate Timeout [%s] %s (%s): Input Method Error [%s] %s (%s): Original Image Input Failure [%s] %s (%s): Image Processing Trouble
Causes
Remedies
The “DepartDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Remarks
Reinstall.
The technician’s database was not found Reinstall. in the path indicated by the connection character string. The technician’s table did not exist. The “FieldParamedicList” key was not Reinstall. found in the system setup database. The “ParamedicDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The “ExposureListErase” key was not found in the system setup database. The “Config” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The image database was damaged.
Reinstall. Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged. The network setup database was damaged. Restart. The system was unstable.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-21
Event
Event Source
13089 FFIipInput 13090 FFIdDepartSelect 13090 FFIdParamedicSelect 13090 FFIdIndividualSelect 13091 FFIdDepartSelect 13091 FFIdParamedicSelect
13091 FFIdIndividualSelect
13094 FFIipInput 13096 FFIipInput 13098 FF32LIB 13098 FFIipInput 13098 FFIdPatInfoInput
13098 FFNetDB 13099 FFIipInput 13099 FF32LIB
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Menu Read Error %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart Code%n Code [%3] %1 (%2) : Invalid Paramedic Code%n Code [%3] %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart/Paramedic Code%n Code [%3] %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart Name (SBCS)%n Name (SBCS) [%3] %1 (%2) : Invalid Paramedic Name (SBCS)%n Name (SBCS) [%3] %1 (%2) : Invalid Depart/Paramedic Name (SBCS)%n Name (SBCS) [%3] [%s] %s (%s): Message Send Error [%s] %s (%s): Request Command Not Executed FF32lib A WIN32 system library error occurred. [%1]%n%2 [%s] %s (%s): Reconnect Error %1 (%2) : %n [%3]%n %4%n %5 FFNetDB A WIN32 system library error occurred. [%1]%n%2 [%s] %s (%s): Disconnect Error FF32lib An unknown error occurred. [%1]%n%2
Causes
Remedies
The image database/information file was damaged. Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Repair Directory.ini.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Repair the database.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
Remarks
Reinstall.
It is conceivable that there was a problem Check the RU status. on the RU side. (Although a command was requested, it was not executed.) An error occurred when calling up the Restart. WIN32 API. The line was abnormal.
Check the line.
A general-use message for the input of patient information (serves as an error message and also as information).
If it is referring to an error, follow the custom message box that opens.
An error occurred when calling up the WIN32 API.
Restart.
The line was abnormal.
Check the line.
An exception error occurred.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-22
Event
Event Source
13099 FFNetDB
Description
13100 FFIipInput
FFNetDB An unknown error occurred. [%1]%n%2 [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Display Group Acquisition[Initialize]
13101 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Display Group Acquisition
13101 IdMassOrder
[%s] %s (%s) : Failed in Display Group Acquisition
13103 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Display Menu Acquisition[Initialize] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Display Menu Acquisition[Record] [%s] %s (%s) : Failed in Display Menu Acquisition[Record] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Exposure Menu Acquisition [%s] %s (%s): Next Set Number Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Next Set Number Data Set Error [%s] %s (%s): System ID Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Auto Distribution Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Enable Selector Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Auto Menu Select Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Next Set Number Min Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Next Set Number Max Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Getting ID-Online Port#
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig
13104 FFIipInput 13104 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig 13108 FFIipInput
13109 FFIipInput 13110 FFIipInput 13111 FFIipInput 13112 FFIipInput 13113 FFIipInput 13114 FFIipInput 13115 FFIipInput 13116 FFIipInput 13120 FFIipInput 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
An exception error occurred.
Restart.
The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the connection character string was not properly registered in the display group table. The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the connection character string was not properly registered in the display group table. The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the connection character string was not properly registered in the display group table. The “DisplayDataDB” key was not found in Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The menu database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The menu database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The menu database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The database was not found or the associated key did not exist.
Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-23
Event
Event Source
13121 FFIipInput 13122 FFIipInput 13123 FFIipInput 13124 FFIipInput 13125 FFIipInput 13126 FFIipInput 13128 FFIipInput 13131 FFIipInput 13132 FFIipInput 13134 FFIipInput 13135 FFIipInput
13136 FFIipInput 13137 FFIipInput 13138 FFIipInput 13157 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in IDOnline Device Name [%s] %s (%s): RU Status DB Connection String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in selectable direction
Causes The database was not found or the associated key did not exist. Directory.ini was damaged.
Remedies
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall.
The “SelectableDirection” key was not Reinstall. found in the system setup database or its value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “SelectableFormat” key was not found Reinstall. Selectable Image Format in the system setup database or its value Acquisition was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The “FilmMarkDB“ key was not found in Reinstall. Connection String Get Directory.ini. Error [%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The connection character string was not Reinstall. Connect Error properly registered for the “FilmMarkDB“ key in Directory.ini. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LimitFilmCopy” key was not found in Reinstall. Limit Film Copy Acquisition the system setup database or its value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “SelectableEdrMode” key was not Reinstall. Selectable EDR Mode found in the system setup database or its Acquisition value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “SelectableFunction” key was not Reinstall. Selectable Function found in the system setup database or its Acquisition value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “SelectableFilingMode” key was not Reinstall. Selectable EDR Mode found in the system setup database or its Acquisition value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The connection character string for the Reinstall. Get Error network setup database was not successfully acquired or the network setup database did not exist. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “EnableDistributionCode” key was not Reinstall. Enable DistributionCode found in the system setup database or its Acquisition value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “EnableFileString” key was not found Reinstall. Enable FileString in the system setup database or its value Acquisition was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “EnableFunction” key was not found in Reinstall. Enable Function Acquisition the system setup database or its value was incorrect. [%s] %s (%s): Finish Mode The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. Get Error
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-24
Event
Event Source
13158 FFIipInput 13159 FFIipInput 13160 FFIipInput 13161 FFIipInput 13162 FFIipInput 13165 FFIipInput 13166 FFIipInput 13167 FFIipInput 13168 FFIipInput 13177 FFIipInput 13178 FFIipInput 13179 FFIipInput 13180 FFIipInput 13181 FFIipInput 13182 FFIipInput 13183 FFIipInput 13184 FFIipInput 13185 FFIipInput 13186 FFIipInput 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB Connection String Get Error [%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB Table Name Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Call Error [RU Error CUSTOM MESSAGE BOX] [%s] %s (%s): Failed Display Thumbnail Image [%s] %s (%s): Ip Size Unit (Inch/Metric) Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Image Size Code Specify Error [%s] %s (%s): Pantomo Setting Get Error [%s] %s (%s): RU Error Info Get Error [%s] %s (%s): RU Status Info Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Default Menu Code Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Next Multi Frame Pair Code Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Next Multi Frame Pair Code Data Set Error [%s] %s (%s): Series Generation Type Data Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Multi Frame UID Information Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Getting XCON Port# [%s] %s (%s): Failed in XCON Device Name [%s] %s (%s): MCR Type Get Error [%s] %s (%s): MCR Variation Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Custom Card Use Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The “RuErrorDataDB” key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini. The “MsgTableName” key was not found in the system setup database. The specified ID was not registered in “RuErrorDataDB“ or the custom message box was not successfully called. The program was faulty or the image file was damaged. The system setup database was damaged.
Reinstall.
RU-dependent symptom.
Check the RU status.
Reinstall. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Reinstall.
The system setup database was damaged. Repair the system setup database. The RU error database was damaged.
Reinstall the RU software.
The RU status information database was Reinstall the RU software. damaged. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The database did not exist or the Reinstall. associated key was not found. The database did not exist or the Reinstall. associated key was not found. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall. The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-25
Event
Event Source
13187 FFIipInput 13188 FFIipInput 13189 FFIipInput 13190 FFIipInput
Description [%s] %s (%s): Font Name Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Font Size Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Multibyte Flag Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Id#]
13191 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Exam#]
13192 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[SBCS Patient Name] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[DBCS Patient Name] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Sex]
13193 FFIipInput 13194 FFIipInput 13195 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Sex M]
13196 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Sex F]
13197 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Sex O]
13198 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Date Of Birth] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Limitation No Acquisition[Id#] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Limitation No Acquisition[Exam#] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Depart]
13199 FFIipInput 13200 FFIipInput 13201 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The “Font” key was not found in the registry. The “FontSizeSS”/“FontSizeS”/ “FontSizeM”/“FontSizeL”/“FontSizeLL” key was not found in the registry. The “Multibyte” key was not found in the registry. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30700” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30701” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30702” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30703” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30704” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30705” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30706” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30707” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30708” was not registered in the character string database. The “IdLength” key was not found in the system setup database. The “ExaminationNoLength” key was not found in the system setup database.
Remarks
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP as necessary. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Reinstall. Directory.ini or the ID “30800” was not registered in the character string database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-26
Event
Event Source
13202 FFIipInput 13203 FFIipInput 13204 FFIipInput
13205 FFIipInput
13206 FFIipInput
13207 FFIipInput
13208 FFIipInput
13209 FFIipInput
13210 FFIipInput
13211 FFIipInput 13212 FFIipInput 13213 FFIipInput 13214 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Paramedic] [%s] %s (%s): Image Folder Path Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Clear]Button Image Get Error
Causes
Remedies
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30800” was not registered in the character string database. The “Bitmap” key was not found in Directory.ini. Id_Clear_U.bmp/“Id_Clear_D.bmp”/ “Id_Clear_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Ok_U.bmp/“Id_Ok_D.bmp”/“Id_Ok_X. [Ok]Button Image Get Error bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Cancel_U.bmp/“Id_Cancel_D.bmp”/ [Cancel]Button Image Get “Id_Cancel_X.bmp” was not found in the Error path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Plus_U.bmp/“Id_Plus_D.bmp”/“Id_Plus_ [Plus]Button Image Get X.bmp” was not found in the path to an Error image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Minus_U.bmp/“Id_Minus_D.bmp”/ [Minus]Button Image Get “Id_Minus_ X.bmp” was not found in the Error path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_NextPage_U.bmp/“Id_NextPage_ [Next Page]Button Image D.bmp”/“Id _NextPage_X.bmp” was not Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/“Id_PrevPage_ [Previous Page]Button D.bmp”/“Id _PrevPage_X.bmp” was not Image Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): RU Watch The line was abnormal. Connection Disconnected [%s] %s (%s): No ACK The line was abnormal. Returned in RU Watch Connection [%s] %s (%s): RU Control The line was abnormal. Connection Disconnected [%s] %s (%s): No ACK The line was abnormal. Returned in RU Control Connection
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. The program was faulty. The program was faulty. The program was faulty. The program was faulty.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-27
Event
Event Source
13217 FFIipInput 13218 FFIipInput 13219 FFIipInput 13220 FFIipInput 13221 FFIipInput 13222 FFIipInput 13223 FFIipInput 13224 FFIipInput 13225 FFIipInput 13226 FFIipInput 13227 FFIipInput 13228 FFIipInput 13229 FFIipInput 13230 FFIipInput 13231 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Complete] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[QA Unfinished] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Interrupt] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Cancel]
Causes
Remedies
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30202” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30201” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30200” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “30203” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[New Directory.ini or the ID “30500” was not Study] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Directory.ini or the ID “30501” was not Acquisition[Registered] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[QA Directory.ini or the ID “30502” was not Waiting] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[Output Directory.ini or the ID “30503” was not Waiting] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Directory.ini or the ID “30504” was not Acquisition[Outputted] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[All] Directory.ini or the ID “30505” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[Today] Directory.ini or the ID “30506” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Image Acquisition[System] Directory.ini or the ID “30507” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Directory.ini or the ID “30600” was not Acquisition[StudyReseve] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Directory.ini or the ID “30601” was not Acquisition[StudyStart] registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal. Image Acquisition[Priority]
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-28
Event
Event Source
13232 FFIipInput 13233 FFIipInput 13234 FFIipInput 13235 FFIipInput 13236 FFIipInput 13237 FFIipInput 13238 FFIipInput 13239 FFIipInput 13240 FFIipInput 13241 FFIipInput 13242 FFIipInput 13243 FFIipInput 13244 FFIipInput 13245 FFIipInput 13246 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Image Acquisition[End] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Image Acquisition[Change] [%s] %s (%s): [New]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Repeat]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Again]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Add]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Delete]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Prev]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Next]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Monitor Mode]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [QA]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Change]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [AP/PA]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [EDR Mode]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Film Format]Button Image Get Error
Causes
Remedies
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Appx1 MT-29
Event
Event Source
13247 FFIipInput 13248 FFIipInput 13249 FFIipInput 13250 FFIipInput 13251 FFIipInput 13252 FFIipInput 13253 FFIipInput 13254 FFIipInput 13255 FFIipInput 13256 FFIipInput 13257 FFIipInput 13258 FFIipInput 13259 FFIipInput 13260 FFIipInput 13261 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): [Detail]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [New]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Repeat]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Again]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Add]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Delete]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Prev]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Next]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Monitor Mode]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [QA]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Change]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [AP/PA]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [EDR Mode]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Film Format]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Detail]Button ToolTipText Get Error
Causes
Remedies
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Appx1 MT-30
Event
Event Source
13262 FFIipInput 13263 FFIipInput
13264 FFIipInput
13265 FFIipInput
13266 FFIipInput
13267 FFIipInput
13268 FFIipInput
13269 FFIipInput
13270 FFIipInput 13271 FFIipInput 13272 FFIipInput 13273 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Image Acquisition[New] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Image Acquisition[Normal]
Causes
Remedies
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Id_NormalImage_U.bmp/ “Id_NormalImage_ D.bmp”/ “Id_NormalImage_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_LR_Reverse_U.bmp/“Id_LR_Reverse_ Image Acquisition[LR] D.bmp”/“Id_LR_Reverse_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_TB_Reverse_U.bmp/“Id_TB_Reverse_ Image Acquisition[TB] D.bmp”/“Id_TB_Reverse_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Rotation180_U.bmp/ Image Acquisition[TB LR] “Id_Rotation180_D.bmp”/ “Id_Rotation180_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Rotation90_U.bmp/“Id_Rotation90_D. Image Acquisition[Rotation] bmp”/ “Id_Rotation90_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Single_U.bmp/“Id_Single_D.bmp”/“Id_ Image Acquisition[Single] Single_X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Id_Twin_U.bmp/“Id_Twin_D.bmp”/ Image Acquisition[Twin] “Id_Twin_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): An Illegal The film mark database was damaged. Film Mark Character Was Detected [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[FIX] Directory.ini or the ID “33502” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[Skfix] Directory.ini or the ID “33503” was not registered in the character string database. [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Caption Acquisition[SEMI- Directory.ini or the ID “33504” was not X] registered in the character string database.
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-31
Event
Event Source
13274 FFIipInput 13275 FFIipInput
13276 FFIipInput 13277 FFIipInput 13278 FFIipInput 13279 FFIipInput 13280 FFIipInput 13281 FFIipInput 13282 FFIipInput 13283 FFIipInput 13284 FFIipInput 13285 FFIipInput 13286 FFIipInput 13287 FFIipInput 13288 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition [DensityAverage] [%s] %s (%s): [Utility]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Alarm Stop] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Exit] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[User Utility] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[List Setting] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[Version] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[CANCEL] [%s] %s (%s): [Clear]Button Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Clear]Button ToolTipText Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[CANCEL] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[DUST]
Causes
Remedies
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “33505” was not registered in the character string database. Id_Utility_U.bmp/“Id_Utility_D.bmp”/ “Id_Utility_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “32700” was not registered in the character string database. The character string database was damaged. The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed nor mally. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “35000” was not registered in the character string database. The “LangStrDB” key was not found in Directory.ini or the ID “35001” was not registered in the character string database. The character string database was damaged. The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
[%s] %s (%s): Tooltip Text Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Caption Acquisition[TitleBar] [%s] %s (%s): Failed in The character string database was Caption Acquisition[Option] damaged.
Remarks
Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall. Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-32
Event
Event Source
13289 FFIipInput 13290 FFIipInput 13291 FFIipInput 13292 FFIipInput 13293 FFIipInput 13294 FFIipInput
13295 FFIipInput
13296 FFIipInput
13297 FFIipInput
13298 FFIipInput
13299 FFIipInput
13300 FFIipInput
13301 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [%s] %s (%s): Version Info Get Error [%s] %s (%s): Option List Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Cassette Acceptable] Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Cassette Unacceptable] Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Miss]Image Get Error [%s] %s (%s): [Image Style]Button Image Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
Id_RuProcess_I.bmp was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. Id_RuProcessN_I.bmp was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Id_ApPa_U.bmp/“Id_ApPa_D.bmp”/ “Id_ ApPa_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Edr_U.bmp/“Id_Edr_D.bmp”/ [EDR]Button Image Get “Id_Edr_ X.bmp” was not found in the path Error to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_Edr_U.bmp/“Id_Edr_D.bmp”/“Id_Edr_X. [Function]Button Image Get bmp” was not found in the path to an Error image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmCount_U.bmp/“Id_FilmCount_ [Film Count]Button Image D.bmp”/“Id_FilmCount_X.bmp” was not Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_IpSize_U.bmp/“Id_IpSize_D.bmp”/ [Ip Size]Button Image Get “Id_ IpSize_X.bmp” was not found in the Error path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmFormat_U.bmp/“Id_FilmFormat_ [Image Format]Button D.bmp”/“Id_FilmFormat_X.bmp” was not Image Get Error found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilingMode_U.bmp/“Id_FilingMode_ [Filing]Button Image Get D.bmp”/“Id_FilingMode_X.bmp” was not Error found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. [%s] %s (%s): Id_FilmMark_U.bmp/“Id_FilmMark_D.bmp” [Film Mark]Button Image /“Id_ FilmMark_X.bmp” was not found in Get Error the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-33
Event
Event Source
Description
13302 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): [Distribution Code]Button Image Get Error
13303 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): [CSSS]Button Image Get Error
13304 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Image Data Connection Disconnected [%s] %s (%s): Failed in Patient Information %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] IdMcrControl (threadMcrRead) : Database Data Get Error %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5]
13309 FFIipInput 13345 FFIdDepartSelect
13345 FFIdFilmMark
13345 FFIdMcrControl 13345 FFIdParamedicSelect
13345 FFIdPatInfoInput
13345 FFIipInput
13345 FFIdIndividualSelect
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Id_DistributionCode_U.bmp/ “Id_DistributionCode_D.bmp”/ “Id_DistributionCode_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. Id_CsCs_U.bmp/“Id_CsCs_D.bmp”/ “Id_CsCs_ X.bmp” was not found in the path to an image folder or the image format was illegal. The line was abnormal.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot be displayed normally. Check the line.
The patient information contained an illegal Ensure that the patient information does character string. not contain any illegal character string. The database was damaged. Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was faulty.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Repair the database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-34
Event
Event Source
13345 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig
13346 FFIipInput
13346 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig
13347 FFIipInput 13347 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig 13348 FFIdDepartSelect
13348 FFIdFilmMark 13348 FFIdMenuChange 13348 FFIdParamedicSelect 13348 FFIdPatInfoInput 13348 FFIipInput 13348 FFIdIndividualSelect 13348 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig 13349 FFIdDepartSelect
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 (%2) : Database Data Get Error%n Database [%3]%n Table [%4]%n Key [%5] %1 (%2) : Patient Information Check Error%n Item [%3]%n Error [%4] %1 (%2) : Patient Information Check Error%n Item [%3]%n Error [%4] %1 (%2) : Caption Get Error%n CaptionId [%3] %1 (%2) : Caption Get Error%n CaptionId [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n %1 (%2) : Registry Data Get Error%n Value [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3]
Causes
Remedies
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The patient information contained illegal information.
Correct the patient information setup.
The patient information contained illegal information.
Correct the patient information setup.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The character string database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
The registry was damaged.
Repair the registry.
The registry was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Appx1 MT-35
Event
Event Source
13349 FFIdFilmMark 13349 FFIdMenuChange 13349 FFIdParamedicSelect 13349 FFIdPatInfoInput 13349 FFIipInput 13349 FFIdIndividualSelect 13349 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig 13350 FFIdFilmMark
13350 FFIdMenuChange 13350 FFIipInput 13350 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder frmMassOrderConfig 13352 FFIipInput
13353 FFIipInput 13362 FFIipInput 13370 FFIipInput 13371 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : INI File Data Get Error%n Key [%3] %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image Get Error%n BMP File [%3] %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image Get Error%n BMP File [%3] %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image Get Error%n BMP File [%3] %1 (%2) : Bitmap Image Get Error%n BMP File [%3] %1 (%2) : Dicom MWM & PPS Option Not Install %1 (%2) : Dicom MWM Option Not Install %1 (%2) : Not Entry Host Name %1 (%2) : PPS Request Failure [IN PROGRESS] %1 (%2) : PPS Request Failure [COMPLETED]
Causes
Remedies
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Repair Directory.ini.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path or bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path or bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path or bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path or bmp file was abnormal.
Reinstall.
Remarks
The DICOM MWM & PPS option was not Install the DICOM MWM & PPS option. installed. The DICOM MWM option was not installed. Install the DICOM MWM option. The host name for the local enclosure was not successfully acquired. The equipment connection was faulty or the remote equipment power was OFF. The equipment connection was faulty or the remote equipment power was OFF.
With the service utility, register the host information about the PPS local enclosure. Retry. Retry.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-36
Event
Event Source
13372 FFIipInput 13382 FFIipInput 13386 FFIipInput 13389 FFIdDepartSelect 13389 FFIdFilmMark 13389 FFIdParamedicSelect 13389 FFIdPatInfoInput 13389 FFIipInput 13389 FFIdIndividualSelect 13392 FFIipInput 13420 FFIipInput 13421 FFIipInput 13423 FFIipInput 13424 FFIipInput 13425 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 (%2) : PPS Request Failure [DISCONTINUED] %1 (%2) : Study List Refresh Exception%nError [%3] %1 (%2) : Failed in data reception%n[Online Time Out] %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]%n %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]%n %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]%n %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]%n %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]% %1 (%2) : Database Connection Error%n Database [%3]%n %1 (%2) : BCR Control Initialize Error %1 (%2) : Failed in Menu Clear.%nInternal Error in Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Menu Clear Command Time out [%3]
Causes
Remedies
The equipment connection was faulty or the remote equipment power was OFF.
Remarks
Retry. Retry.
The serial cable was broken or the connected equipment did not respond.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
The database was damaged.
Repair the database.
The barcode reader was not connected.
Connect the barcode reader.
A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit. a cleared menu was reported.
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit did not respond to a report about a cleared menu. %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Shelter.%nFatal Error [%3] the IP evacuation sequence. %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Shelter.%nIntervention the IP evacuation sequence. Error in Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Shelter.%nInternal Error in the IP evacuation sequence. Builtin [%3]
Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.). Check the 550X unit. Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem with a UTL or the like. Check the 550X unit.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-37
Event
Event Source
Description
13426 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : Ip Shelter Command Time out [%3]
13428 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : Failed in Menu Fixed.%nConnection Error to Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Failed in Menu Fixed.%nInternal Error in Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Menu Fixed Command Time out [%3]
13429 FFIipInput 13430 FFIipInput 13432 FFIipInput 13435 FFIipInput 13436 FFIipInput 13438 FFIipInput 13439 FFIipInput 13440 FFIipInput 13441 FFIipInput 13442 FFIipInput 13443 FFIipInput
13444 FFIipInput 13447 FFIipInput 13448 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
%1 (%2) : Failed in Ip Size%nConnection Error to Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip Size.%nInternal Error in Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Ip Size Command Time out [%3]
Causes
Remedies
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, did not respond to an IP evacuation etc.). request. A line abnormality was encountered. Check the line. A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit. a finalized menu was reported. A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, did not respond to a report about a etc.). finalized menu. A line abnormality was encountered. Check the line. A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit. a size notification request was issued.
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit did not respond to a size notification request. %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Set.%nFatal Error [%3] the IP setup sequence. %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Set.%nIntervention Error in the IP setup sequence. Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Failed in Ip A problem occurred in the 550X unit during Set.%nInternal Error in the IP setup sequence. Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Ip Set Command A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Time out [%3] did not respond to an IP setup request. %1 (%2) : Ip Delete A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Command Time out [%3] did not issue an IP deletion request. %1 (%2) : Cannot Change An attempt was made to change the Patient Info patient information during an image input EditMode [%3] sequence (patient information change button: inactive). %1 (%2) : Cannot End An attempt was made to terminate a study Examination during an image input sequence (study ExamEndMode [%3] end button: inactive). %1 : IipInput.exe [Starts] IipInput.exe is started (information). %1 : IipInput.exe [Normal Termination]
Remarks
Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.). Check the 550X unit. Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem with a UTL or the like. Check the 550X unit. Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.). Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.). Change the information after completion of image input. Terminate the study after completion of image input.
IipInput.exe is terminated (information).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-38
Event
Event Source
13449 FFIipInput 13451 FFIipInput
13452 FFIipInput 13457 FFIipInput 13458 FFIipInput
13459 FFIipInput 13462 FFIipInput 13470 FFIipInput 13471 FFIipInput 13472 FFIipInput
13473 FFIipInput
13474 FFIipInput 13475 FFIipInput 13477 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : IipInput.exe [Forced Termination] %1 (%2) : Failed in Get Ip Information Response.%nConnection Error to Builtin [%3] %1 (%2) : Get Ip Information Response Time out [%3] %1 (%2) : Image Processing Information %1 (%2) : Failed in Connection Between Reader and Console.%nIIP[%3]%nRU [-%4] %1 (%2) : Wait Timeout for X-Cont Shot Result %1 (%2) : Ordering Exposure Menu Not Entry [%3] %1 (%2) : Exposure Menu Register Error. %1 (%2) : All Exposure Menu Register Error. %1 (%2) : Selected Menu is Done. XCON Result Information is annulled. [%3] %1 (%2) : Menu is not Selected. XCON Result Information is annulled. [%3] %1 (%2) : Exceeded the Limitation Value of XCON Exposure Data. [%3 = %4] %1 (%2) : Failed in Ordering Data.[RIS] %1 (%2) : Exposure Menu Register Error.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
IipInput.exe is terminated (information). Line error.
Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.).
A timeout occurred when an attempt was made to respond to an ID information request from the 550X unit. This error occurs if the image processing parameter file does not exist.
Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable, etc.).
Setup error.
Change IIP's SysConfig setup or RU's connection style.
The XCON shot result reception timeout value for built-in type exposures was found improper. The exposure menu received as the ordering information was not registered.
Review the XCON shot result reception timeout value for built-in type exposures.
The exposure menu received as the ordering information was not registered. The exposure menu received as the ordering information was not registered. The exposure process for the selected exposure menu was already performed. The result data received from the XCON will be discarded. No exposure menu was selected. The result data received from the XCON will be discarded.
Register the exposure menu with the user utility. Register the exposure menu with the user utility. Select a menu for which an exposure process has not been performed.
Register the exposure menu with the user utility.
Select a menu for which an exposure process has not been performed.
The XCON parameter was improperly set. Reregister the XCON parameter with the user utility. The patient exposure order information sent from the RIS was abnormal. The exposure menu specified by the received ordering information was not registered.
Register the exposure menu with the user utility.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-39
Event
Event Source
Description
13478 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : All Exposure Menu Register Error.
13479 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : Failed in Examination End Command.[Ris] %1 (%2) : Failed in Communication with RIS. [%3]%n[%4] %1 (%2) : Menu is not Selected. Failed in Getting ID Information %1 (%2) : Failed in the System Start. [Error: OpDcmStandardDx or MenuData.mdb] %1 (%2) : Patient Info Set Error%n Error [%3]%n RetCode [%4] %1 (%2) : UserName Check Error%n Item [%3]%n Error [%4] User Login [UserName:%1]
13480 FFIipInput 13483 FFIipInput
13484 FFIipInput
13489 FFIipInput
13490 FFIipInput
13491 FFIipInput 13492 FFIipInput 13493 FFIipInput 13494 FFIipInput 13495 FFIipInput 13496 FFIipInput 13497 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The exposure menu specified by the received ordering information was not registered. The order exposure study termination signal was received from the RIS although an order exposure was not received. The problem is attributable to a disconnected line or invalid parameter.
Register the exposure menu with the user utility.
An ID acquisition request was received from built-in type equipment although no exposure menu was selected.
Make a menu selection and then press the OK button on the built-in type Console.
Inappropriate installation.
Reinstall the system to secure matching between DX option and menu database.
Remarks
Check the RIS settings. Check the equipment and cables.
Patient information to be registered Enter correct patient information or repair included illegal information items or patient patient information database. information database was damaged. Illegal information was input as the username.
Call upon the user to input a correct username.
The user logged in the system.
User Logout The user logged off the system. [UserName:%1 %1 (%2) : MCR-Data Send Failed in transferring magnetic card Error.[RIS] information to the FRIS.
Repeat the same operation. If the symptom remains uncorrected, check the barcode information. %1 (%2) : BCR-Data Send Failed in transferring barcode information Repeat the same operation. If the symptom Error.[RIS] to the FRIS. remains uncorrected, check the barcode information. [%1] Failed in setting MCR Failed in setting magnetic card information. Repeat the same operation. If the symptom data [%2] remains uncorrected, check the magnetic card information. [%1] Failed in setting BCR Failed in setting barcode information. Repeat the same operation. If the symptom data [%2] remains uncorrected, check the barcode information. %1 (%2) : Failed in deleting Program error. multibyte data
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-40
Event
Event Source
13901 IIPInputEz
13902 IIPInputEz
13903 IIPInputEz
13903 IIPInputEz
13904 IIPInputEz
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : Registry Value Get/Set Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Connection Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Data Get/Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Dicom Data Object Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Other Error%n [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5 %1 (%2) : [%3] SendToCommPort, COMM Port Send Error m_hQUEMutex, Create Mutex Error CommOpen, COMM Port Open Error CommOpen, COMM Port Param Set Error tControlMain, _beginthreadex Create Error End_ControlProc, COMM Port Close Error
Causes
Remedies
The acquisition/setup key or registration information was abnormal.
Remarks
Check the registry key.
This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name. character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect database file name, or a damaged database. The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name. abnormal.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag was abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
Unknown error.
General information event log. The data transmission port is defective.
Check connection and settings of the port.
An exclusive processing error occurred.
Restart.
A failure resulted in an attempt to establish Check connection and settings of the port. connection to the data transmission port. Settings of the data transmission port are Check settings for connection to the port. defective. A failure occurred in an attempt to start the Restart. main thread. A failure occurred in an attempt to close the port.
No particular remedial measures need to be taken as the CR Console is in process of shutdown.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-41
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description MakeSendMessage, Message Code Convert Error lFocus, DicomDataFormatError lTubeVoltage, DicomDataFormatError lExposureTime, DicomDataFormatError lmAs, DicomDataFormatError csGrid, DicomDataFormatError lGlandulardose, DicomDataFormatError csFilterMaterial, DicomDataFormatError BodyPartThickness, DicomDataFormatError csActualStereoAngle, DicomDataFormatError csTubeHeadAngle, DicomDataFormatError lmAsActualValue, DicomDataFormatError SetAllMammoXcon, DicomDataCreateError SaveResExpParamData, DicomFile Save Error SaveResExpParamData, Not Use Dicom Directory
Causes
Remedies
The received data is defective.
Remarks
Check the connected cable and device.
The “Focus” data received is defective.
Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. The “Tube Voltage” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “Exposure Time” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “mAs” data received is defective. Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. The “Grid” data received is defective. Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. The “Glandular Dose” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “Filter Material” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “Body Part Thickness” data received Check the equipment targeted for is defective. connection or restart it. The “Actual Stereo Angle” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “Tube Head Angle” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. The “Actual Value” data received is Check the equipment targeted for defective. connection or restart it. An attempt to generate a DICOM file Restart the CR Console. resulted in a failure. An attempt to store a DICOM file resulted Restart. in a failure. An attempt to obtain information on the Restart. folder targeted for storing a DICOM file resulted in a failure. tComRecvMain, Sub Tread A attempt to create a data reception thread Restart. Create Error resulted in a failure. MainTH_MainPrc, An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a Restart. Received from Port [Alloc failure. Error] MainTH_MainPrc, The received data is defective. Check the equipment targeted for Received Buffer Claer connection or restart it. RespOperation, QUE Break The received data is defective. Check the equipment targeted for by Interrupt Data from connection or restart it. XCON
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-42
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description RespOperation, response data Format error RespOperation, response data Checksum error RespOperation, Alloc Error for Dicom Data RespOperation, Alloc Error for XConError RespOperation, XConError data Iregular Format ACKOperation, No Target [ACK] Receive SendToCommPort, Send Error RetryOperation, Retry Send Error RetryOperation, Comm Send Retry Over RetryOperation, Response Timeout RespOperation, Compression Force data Format error RespOperation, Compression Force data Checksum error RespOperation, Delete Dicom File Error RetryOperation, Delete Dicom File Error RespOperation, Send AskParam Error FFGetPASSecurityFuncIDList Error nCount=%1 ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPDataBit] DAPDataBit Nothing ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPStopBit] DAPStopBit Nothing
Causes
Remedies
The received data is defective. A checksum error was found in the received data. An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a failure. An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a failure. The received data is defective. Illegal ACK data was received.
Remarks
Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. Restart. Restart. Restart. Nothing particular.
Data transmission resulted in a failure.
Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. Data retransmission processing resulted in Check the equipment targeted for a failure. connection or restart it. An attempt to retransmit data resulted in a Check the equipment targeted for failure. connection or restart it. A timeout error occurred while in wait of Check the equipment targeted for data reception. connection or restart it. The compression force data was abnormal. Nothing particular. A compression force data checksum error occurred.
Nothing particular.
Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in a failure. Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in a failure. AskParam command transmission failed.
Restart. Restart.
The PAS security function ID list is empty.
Check the equipment targeted for connection or restart it. Restart
Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPDataBit value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPDataBit value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPStopBit value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPStopBit value.
Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or 1:8bit. Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or 1:8bit. Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or 1:1.5bit or 2:2bit. Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or 1:1.5bit or 2:2bit.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-43
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
Description ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPParity] DAPParity Nothing ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPBaudrate] DAPBaudrate Nothing ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPWaitTime] DAPWaitTime Nothing ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPTrialCount] DAPTrialCount Nothing
Causes
Remedies
Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPParity value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPParity value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPBaudrate value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPBaudrate value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPWaitTime value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPWaitTime value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and DAPTrialCount value. Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and undetermined DAPTrialCount value. A communication port transmission error.
Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd or 2:even. Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd or 2:even. Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or 1:2400 or 2:4800. Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or 1:2400 or 2:4800. Set 1=30.
Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
COMM Port Send Error
13998 FFIipInput
Not Found INI Key
13998 FFIipInput
DAPComPort Nothing
13998 FFIipInput
Not Fonud INI Key
13998 FFIipInput
Bad DSN
13998 FFIipInput
ComPortNo Error
13998 FFIipInput
DAPAddress Nothing
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
ConfigData Is Illegal [DAPAddress] Not Read MDB Data
13998 FFIipInput
Create Mutex Error
Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the reason said at left. A mutex error occurred.
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
COMM Port Open Error
Failure to open a communication port.
COMM Port Param Set Error _beginthreadex Create Failed
Failure to set up communication port parameters. Failure to create a thread.
13998 FFIipInput 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Bad Directory
Remarks
Set 1=30. Set 1=255. Set 1=255. Check status of connected devices.
Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check ConfigDB. Check to see if the system is up and running double. Check status of connected devices. Check status of connected devices. Check the machine load.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-44
Event 13998 13998 13998 13998
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
FFIipInput
COMM Port Close Error
Failure to close a communication port.
Check status of connected devices.
FFIipInput
Sub Thead Create Failed
Failure to create a sub-thread.
Check the machine load.
FFIipInput
Memory Alloc Error
Memory allocation failure.
Check the memory condition.
FFIipInput
Read Buffer Over Flow
A read buffer overflow error.
13998 FFIipInput
Received UnKnown Code from CommPort
An unknown code was received from the communication port.
13998 FFIipInput 13998 FFIipInput
Response Timeout
A response timeout.
Restart. If the same error recurs even after restarting the system, check the PC’s specification. Restart. If the same error recurs even after restarting the system, check the PC’s specification. Check status of connected devices.
CreateError
Failure to create a timer.
13998 FFIipInput
Database Data Get Error Failed in acquiring the system setup. Database [%1] Table [%2] Key [%3] TemporaryFolderPath error The folder for created files containing information of the actual result as well as for operating them did not exist.
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart. If the same error recurs even after restarting the system, check the PC’s specification. Restart.
Check the system setup. “SYSCONFIG” “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” “No100 ReceptComputer Info” “File Temporal Folder” Restart.
GetSharedFolderPath error Failed in acquiring the folder for created mis-exposure images. "GetString() : %1 %2 Failed in acquiring the character strings to Restart. connect to the database. ImageDBCOM.Connect() : Failed in accessing the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently %1 %2 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. FFFlagDBConnect() : %1 Failed in accessing the image database Restart. If the same symptom frequently %2 flag table. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. ConnectRisConnectDb() : Failed in accessing the ReceptConnectDB. Restart. %1 OpenXMLTagInfo() : %1 Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo Restart. table. GetCompName() : %1 Failed in acquiring a host name of the PC. Restart. GetNowTime() : %1
Failed in acquiring the time setting of a PC. Check the PC setup and then restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-45
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13998 FFIipInput
ExposureResultConvert() : Failed in acquiring the information of the %1 actual result to be sent to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput
Nothing StudyInstanceUID The information necessary to send to the RIS was not found. SetCandelResult() error : Failed in acquiring the information of the RetCode = %1 actual result to be sent to the RIS. Nothing ProcUID The information necessary to send to the RIS was not found. GetExposureResult error Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result to be sent to the RIS. MoveResultFile() : %1 Failed in outputting the information of the actual result to the RIS.
IdSRISConvert
13998 13998 13998 13998
IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
MoveResultFile() : Not Move Files CheckPatientData error
13998 FFIipInput
CreateResultXmlFile error
13998 FFIipInput
GetInfoFileURL() Error : %1 FcDicomOperation. LoadDicomObject() Error : %1 GetExposureData() Error : %1
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
The information of the actual result output to the RIS did not exist. An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created. An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created. Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result to be sent to the RIS. Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result to be sent to the RIS.
Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result (exposure information) to be sent to the RIS. GetSeriesData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result (image information) to be sent to the RIS. GetStudyData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result (study information) to be sent to the RIS. GetPatientData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result (patient information) to be sent to the RIS.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Check the information of the actual result. Check the information of the actual result and then restart. Check the information of the actual result and then restart. Check the information of the actual result and then restart. Check the system setup and then restart. “SYSCONFIG” “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” “No100 ReceptComputer Info” “File Temporal Folder” “No.307 Simplified Ordeing Report Share Folder” Check the information of the actual result and then restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-46
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13998 FFIipInput
ImageDBCOM. Failed in accessing the image database. OpenRecordset() Error :%1 sql=%2
13998 FFIipInput
ImageDBCOM. Failed in accessing the image database. CloseRecordset() Error :%1
13998 FFIipInput
GetRadiationData() Error : Failed in acquiring the information of the %1 actual result (information of the actual exposure result) to be sent to the RIS. FcDicomOperation.%1 The DDO file was damaged. Error :%2 GetImageData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the actual result (image information) to be sent to the RIS. CheckData Error: %1 An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created. Check Error[%1] Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo GetXMLTagInfo Error table. Check Error[%1] : [%2] The information of the actual result contained information that cannot be sent to the RIS. CreateResultDOMTree An error occurred while the information of error the actual result to be output to the RIS is created. CreateNodePatient() Error An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeStudy() Error
An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNode() Error
An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Restart. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Restart. Restart. Check the information of the actual result. Check the information of the actual result. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-47
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput
Description
Causes
Remedies
XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu CreateNodeMenu() Error
The information necessary to send to the RIS was not found. An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeImage() Error
An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeRadiation() Error
An error occurred while the information of the actual result to be output to the RIS is created.
13998 FFIipInput
FFNetDBConnect() :%1
13998
FFNetDBClose() :%1 Not FileExists : %1
Unable to connect to the database for network setup. Unable to connect to the database for network setup. The file did not exist.
Not FolderExists : %1
The folder did not exist.
Check the system setup and then restart.
GetAccessionNumberErr
Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart and perform a new study.
IdSRISConvert 13998 FFIipInput IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
13998 13998 13998 13998
IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert FFIipInput IdSRISConvert IdExposerList GetAccesionNumber() IdOrderingReserve
13998 IdOrderingReserve
CreateOneStudyInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve
SortStudyNumber()
13998 IdOrderingReserve
SortMenuNumber()
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Check the information of the actual result. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting. Restart. * If “XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt Valu” is recorded in the event log, check the information of the actual result without restarting. Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart. Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart. Check the system setup and then restart.
CheckStudyCount.%4
The number of ordered studies which are received exceeded the upper limit. SortStudyAndMenuNumber Failed in arranging the study sequence or error exposure sequence. Sort Study Number Error. nLoopCountA:%1 nLooppCountB:%2 Sort Menu Number Error. nLoopCountA:%1 nLoopCountB:%2 FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&H20000D) Error : %1 FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&H7F158) Error : %1
Remarks
Failed in arranging the study sequence in A and B order.
Reduce the number of studies to be started at once. Check the setting for study/exposure sequence on the ordering equipment (RIS) side. Check the setting for study sequence in study A and B.
Failed in arranging the menu sequence in A and B order.
Check the setting for menu sequence in menu A and B.
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-48
Event
Event Source
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve SetOrderInfo()
13998 IdOrderingReserve 13998 13998 13998 13998 13998 13998 13999 14000 14001 14002 14003 14004
SortStudyAndMenu Number() IdOrderingReserve AddInsert() IdOrderingReserve AddInsert() IdOrderingReserve CheckStudyCount() IdOrderingReserve CheckStudyCount() IIPInput.exe m_ctlHome_ OnSelectedTab IIPInput.exe m_ctlIdInputRecept_ OnErrorOccurred() FFIipInput
Description
Causes
Remedies
FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&H181401) Error : %1 FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&H7F222) Error : %1 FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&201110A0) Error : %1 FcDicomOperation. SetStrData(&H20100050) Error : %1 SortStudyAndMenu Number_Unknown_Error
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
Failed in setting the order information to the database.
Check the system setup and then restart.
An unknown error has occurred.
Restart.
UnKnown_Error
An unknown error has occurred.
Restart.
wrong value is specified
The order information was invalid.
Check the system setup and then restart.
Study Count Max Over : Study Count = %1 Study Count Max Over : Not Multiple Study m_ctlTRISControl. SendMessage_M08_RQ() error%1 Study Count Over Error
The number of ordered studies which are received exceeded the upper limit. The number of ordered studies which are received exceeded the upper limit. Failed in communicating with the Toshiba RIS.
Reduce the number of studies to be started at once. Reduce the number of studies to be started at once. Check the system setup and then restart.
The number of ordered studies which are received exceeded the upper limit.
Reduce the number of studies to be started at once.
SetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to set up a value to DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
GetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
SetCasetteThickness-010
Failure to set up a value to DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
GetCasetteThickness-010
Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
ProcImageCombine-600
Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
Initialize-22-04
Failure to initialize the authentication dialog. Failure to close the authentication dialog.
Restart.
14006 FFIipInput 14900 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
UserControl_Terminate-1
%1 : Registry Value Get/Set An acquisition/setup key error. A registry information error. Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5
Restart. Check the registry key.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-49
Event
Event Source
14900 IIPPortable
14901 IIPInputEz
14901 IIPPortable
14902 IIPInputEz
14902 IIPPortable
14903 IIPInputEz
14903 IIPPortable
14904 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : Registry Value Get/ Set Error [Key] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Connection Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Connection Error [DB] %2 [Exp] %3 %4 %5 %1 : Database Data Get/Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Database Data Get/ Set Error [DB] %2 [Table]%3 [Field]%4 [Exp]%5 %1 : DDO Data Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : DDO Data Get/Set Error [Tag] %2 %3 %4 %5 %1 : Other Error%n [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5
Causes
Remedies
A registry was damaged.
Remarks
There is no particular problem with operations.
Incorrect Directory.ini file character strings. Check the Directory.ini file. Also check the An incorrect database filename. Damaged database filename. database.
Failed in accessing the image database.
There is no particular problem with operations.
An acquisition/setup key error. A database Check the database table/filed name. error.
Failed in accessing the image database.
There is no particular problem with operations.
A DDO acquisition/setup tag error.
Check the DDO tag.
The DDO file was damaged.
There is no particular problem with operations.
Other error.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-50
Event
Event Source
14904 IIPPortable
19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU 19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU 19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU 19001 FFDICOMEchoSCU 19001 FFDICOMEchoSCU 19001 FFDICOMMPPSSCU 19001 FFDICOMMPPSSCU 19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU 19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU 19001 FFDICOMPrintSCU 19001 FFDICOMPrintSCU 19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19001 FFDICOMStoreSCU 19001 FFDICOMStoreSCU 19002 FFDICOMCommit SCU
Description %1: Other Error [Procedure] %2 [Error Code]%3 [Exp]%4 %5 Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [DPC Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [DPC Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Initialization failed. [DPM Invoke fail] Initialization failed. [Insufficient memory] Method Invoke failed. [PushPrc]
19002 FFDICOMCommit SCU Method Invoke failed. [DiscontinueRequest]
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
A general-purpose information event log.
There is no particular problem with operations.
DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPC thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPC thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. DPM thread generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. Instance generation was unsuccessful. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable.
Restart.
Remarks
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-51
Event
Event Source
Description
19002 FFDICOMEchoSCU
Method Invoke failed. [EchoPrc]
19002 FFDICOMMPPSSCU
Method Invoke failed. [CreatePrc]
19002 FFDICOMMPPSSCU
Method Invoke failed. [SetPrc]
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU
Method Invoke failed. [FindPrc]
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU
Method Invoke failed. [CancelPrc]
19002 FFDICOMPrintSCU
Method Invoke failed. [PrintPrc]
19002 FFDICOMPrintSCU
Method Invoke failed. [GetPrc]
19002 FFDICOMPrintSCU
Method Invoke failed. [DiscontinueRequest]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU
Method lnvoke failed. [FindPrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU
Method lnvoke failed. [MovePrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU
Method lnvoke failed. [CancelPrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU
Method lnvoke failed. [FreePrc]
19002 FFDICOMStoreSCU
Method Invoke failed. [StorePrc]
19003 FFDICOMCommit SCU File I/O failed. 19003 FFDICOMEchoSCU
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
[Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name]
Causes
Remedies
A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A message was not successfully transmitted. The system was unstable. A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Restart.
A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
Remarks
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-52
Event
Event Source
19003 FFDICOMMPPSSCU 19003 FFDICOMMWLSCU 19003 FFDICOMPrintSCU 19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19003 FFDICOMStoreSCP 19003 FFDICOMStoreSCU 19900 IIPInputEz
19901 IIPInputEz
19902 IIPInputEz
19903 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] File I/O failed. [Communication log file name] %1 : Registry Value Get/Set Error%n [Key] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Connection Error%n [DB] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5 %1 : Database Data Get/Set Error%n [DB] %2%n [Table] %3%n [Field] %4%n [Exp] %5 %1 : Dicom Data Object Get/Set Error%n [Tag] %2%n [Exp] %3%n %4%n %5
Causes
Remedies
A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
Remarks
An adequate disk space was not available. Check the available disk space. An image-related file was not successfully accessed. The problem is attributable to a disk. A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, replace the disk.
A communication log file was not successfully opened.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
The acquisition/setup key or registration information was abnormal.
Check the registry key.
Although the communication log cannot be obtained, execution is possible.
This error is attributable to an abnormal Check Directory.ini or database file name. character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect database file name, or a damaged database. The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name. abnormal.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag was abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-53
Event
Event Source
19904 IIPInputEz
20001 FFCtrlProc
20002 FFCtrlProc
20003 FFCtrlProc
20004 FFCtrlProc
20005 FFCtrlProc
20006 FFCtrlProc
20007 FFCtrlProc
20102 FFCustomMsgBox 20104 FFCustomMsgBox 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description %1 : Other Error%n [Procedure] %2%n [ErrorCode] %3%n [Exp] %4%n %5 It failed in CreateProcess. It has the possibility that an executive file doesn’t exist. The start treatment can’t be continued. /CtrlProc: RunProc() %1 Process start information is unusual. The start treatment can’t be continued. /CtrlProc: RunProc() It failed in the completion message preparation treatment. The treatment can’t be continued. / CtrlProc:EndProc() It failed in the completion message transmitting treatment. The treatment can’t be continued. / CtrlProc:EndProc() It failed in the switching message preparation treatment. The treatment can’t be continued. / CtrlProc:ChangeProc() It failed in the switching message transmitting treatment. The treatment can’t be continued. / CtrlProc:ChangeProc() It failed in CreateProcess. It has the possibility that an executive file doesn’t exist. The start treatment can’t be continued. /CtrlProc:SetInitProcEnd() [20102] Setup not completed. [20104] Failed in securing system settings.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Unknown error.
A subprocess was not successfully started Restart. If the same symptom occurs after A subsystem name is up. The system was unstable or a a restart, reinstall. placed in the “%1” necessary executable file was not found. position.
An illegal parameter was used for process Restart. If the same symptom occurs after startup. It is conceivable that the contents a restart, reinstall. of the process information database were wrong. A process end request message was not Restart. successfully created. It is conceivable that the available resource was not adequate or that the system was unstable. A process end request message was not Restart. successfully transmitted. It is conceivable that the transmission destination process was down or that the transmission destination was wrong. A window show/hide message was not Restart. successfully created. It is conceivable that the available resource was not adequate or that the system was unstable. A window show/hide message was not successfully transmitted. It is conceivable that the transmission destination process was down or that the transmission destination was wrong. A window show/hide message was not successfully transmitted. It is conceivable that the transmission destination process was down or that the transmission destination was wrong.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
It is conceivable that the application key Install the application key. Main was not installed. It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main or deleted. a restart, reinstall.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-54
Event
Event Source
20104 FFIIPMAIN
20105 FFCustomMsgBox 20105 FFIIPMAIN
20106 FFCustomMsgBox 20106 FFIIPMAIN
20108 FFCustomMsgBox 20108 FFIIPMAIN
20110 FFCustomMsgBox
20110 FFIIPMAIN
20111 —
20118 FFCustomMsgBox 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
It failed in the acquisition of the configuration information. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. / MainProcess:Main() [20105] Failed in accessing the process control database. It failed in the acquisition of the process information data base. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. /MainProcess: Main() [20106] Failed in accessing the message distribution control database. It failed in opening of the message data base. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. / MainProcess:Main() [20108] Failed in process activation. It failed in the start of the sub-process. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. / MainProcess:Main() [20110] Failed in initialization processing.
The configuration information was not successfully acquired. This error occurred due to an improper installation or system instability.
It failed in the start of the sub-process. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. /MainProcess: m_ProcessControl_ OnRunProcComplete() —
[20118] Failed in process termination.
Remedies
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main or deleted. a restart, reinstall. Data was not successfully acquired from the process information database. This error occurred due to an improper installation or system instability.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main or deleted. a restart, reinstall. The message database was not successfully opened. This error occurred due to an improper installation or system instability.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
A subprocess was not successfully started up for some reason. The subprocess was not successfully started. This error occurred due to an improper installation or system instability.
View the event logs around to examine the Main cause. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The subprocess was not successfully started. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. This error may also occur as a consequence of the occurrence of another error. The subprocess was not successfully started. This error occurred due to an improper installation or system instability.
Check for error messages and warnings issued before the occurrence of this error and then take a remedial action. Or, restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The MAC address could not be acquired.
Reinstall the network driver (delete it and then reinstall). Or, manually acquire the MAC address with the Service Utility’s MAC address acquisition function. No particular remedy needs be taken.
An error occurred for some reason during subprocess end processing.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Main
Main
Appx1 MT-55
Event
Event Source
20118 FFIIPMAIN
20124 FFCustomMsgBox 20124 FFIIPMAIN
Description It failed in the completion of the sub-process. /MainProcess: ProcessEndRequirement() [20124] Failed in process switchover. It failed in switching of the process. /MainProcess: xxxxx
Causes
Remedies
The subprocess was not successfully terminated. The system was unstable.
Restart.
A subprocess was not successfully controlled for some reason. A subprocess changeover was not successfully effected. The target subprocess was not active or the system was unstable. The problem is attributable, for instance, to an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
View the event logs around to examine the Main cause. Restart.
21001 FFCustomMsgBox
[21001] Failed in connecting to the image database.
21002 FFCustomMsgBox
[21002] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to the image database. an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
21003 FFCustomMsgBox
[21003] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to information from the image an inactive SQL service manager or database. uninitialized image database.
21004 FFCustomMsgBox
[21004] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to the image database. an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
21005 FFCustomMsgBox
[21005] Failed in setting information to the image database.
The problem is attributable, for instance, to an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
21006 FFCustomMsgBox
[21006] Failed in deleting the study information.
The problem is attributable, for instance, to an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
List
List
List
List
List
List
Appx1 MT-56
Event
Event Source
21007 FFCustomMsgBox 21008 FFCustomMsgBox 21009 FFCustomMsgBox 21010 FFCustomMsgBox 21011 FFCustomMsgBox 21012 FFCustomMsgBox 21013 FFCustomMsgBox 21014 FFCustomMsgBox 21015 FFCustomMsgBox 21016 FFCustomMsgBox 21017 FFCustomMsgBox 21018 FFCustomMsgBox 21019 FFCustomMsgBox 21020 FFCustomMsgBox 21021 FFCustomMsgBox 21022 FFCustomMsgBox 21023 FFCustomMsgBox 21024 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [21007] Failed in connecting to the system setting database. [21008] Failed in accessing the system setting database. [21009] Failed in obtaining information from the system setting database. [21010] Failed in connecting to the character database. [21011] Failed in accessing the character database. [21012] Failed in obtaining information from the character database. [21013] Failed in accessing the definition file. [21014] Failed in opening the registry information. [21015] Failed in retrieving the registry information. [21016] Failed in writing the registry information. [21017] Failed in closing the registry information. [21018] Failed in receiving message. [21019] Failed in canceling the output processing. [21020] Failed in output. [21021] Failed in receiving the message. [21022] Failed in initializing process for message communication. [21023] Failed in terminating process for message communication. [21024] Failed in obtaining information from the host setting database.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. No particular response is required.
List
No particular response is required.
List
No particular response is required.
List
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
List
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
The selected image was being output or already deleted. The selected image was being output or already deleted. The system was unstable.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
List
List List List List List List
Appx1 MT-57
Event
Event Source
21025 FFCustomMsgBox 21030 FFCustomMsgBox
Description [21025] Failed in editing the host setting database. [21030] Failed in study start. [21031] Failed in QA start.
Causes
Remedies
The system was unstable.
21052 FFMWMHelper
Connection equipment was not operative or the network was unstable. Connection equipment was not operative or the network was unstable. [21032] Failed in study Connection equipment was not operative re-start. or the network was unstable. [21033] Failed in obtaining Connection equipment was not operative study information from host or the network was unstable. %s. [21034] Failed in locking Connection equipment was not operative the study. or the network was unstable. [21035] Failed in study Connection equipment was not operative completion processing. or the network was unstable. [21036] The target study Connection equipment was not operative exists but is not displayed or the network was unstable. on the list. [21037] The target study The specified study may have been could not be found. deleted. [21038] The input format The input format was incorrect. for date is wrong. [21039] The input format The input format was incorrect. for time is wrong. [21040] Searched word is The input word was incorrect. illegal. [21041] Multiple target Two or more relevant studies existed. studies exist. The study cannot be started. [21051] An unknown study - Software version A06 or earlier was used was received from the RIS. for MWM connection. - Illegal data was contained in the study information received from the RIS. [MWMHelper]%1 This is an information log.
21053 FFMWMHelper
[MWMHelper]%1
21054 FFMWMHelper
[MWMHelper]%1
21031 FFCustomMsgBox 21032 FFCustomMsgBox 21033 FFCustomMsgBox 21034 FFCustomMsgBox 21035 FFCustomMsgBox 21036 FFCustomMsgBox 21037 FFCustomMsgBox 21038 FFCustomMsgBox 21039 FFCustomMsgBox 21040 FFCustomMsgBox 21041 FFCustomMsgBox 21051 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
A warning condition is encountered. For details, refer to the contents of the event log. An error occurred.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check the connected equipment or network. Check the connected equipment or network. Check the connected equipment or network. Check the connected equipment or network.
List List List List List
Check the connected equipment or network. Check the connected equipment or network. Check the connected equipment or network.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
List List
- Upgrade the software to version A07 or later. - Check the RIS side setup information and the like. There is no particular problem with operations. There is no particular problem with operations. Restart. A study received by means of MWM didn’t include StudyInstanceUID (0020,000D). Request the MWM Server to send StudyInstanceUID.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-58
Event
Event Source
21101 FFCustomMsgBox 21102 FFCustomMsgBox 21103 FFCustomMsgBox 21104 FFCustomMsgBox 21105 FFCustomMsgBox 21106 FFCustomMsgBox 21129 FFCustomMsgBox
21201 FFCustomMsgBox 21202 FFCustomMsgBox 21203 FFCustomMsgBox 21204 FFCustomMsgBox 21205 FFCustomMsgBox 21206 FFCustomMsgBox 21207 FFCustomMsgBox 21208 FFCustomMsgBox 21209 FFCustomMsgBox 21210 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [21101] An error of unknown cause occurred. [21102] Failed in obtaining study information. [21103] Unable to specify a target destination for move. [21104] Unable to specify a target destination for move. [21105] Unable to move an image. [21106] A study information display error occurred. [21129] The hard disk was full.
[21201] An error of unknown cause occurred. [21202] Initialization has not been completed. [21203] Radiographer information database is abnormal. [21204] Failed in obtaining the registry information. [21205] Failed in setting registry values. [21206] Failed in clearing a displayed image. [21207] Failed in connecting to the database. [21208] Failed in connecting to the database. [21209] Failed in setting the study information sharing host. [21210] Failed in obtaining the study information from the database.
Causes
Remedies
The system was unstable. A specified study has already been deleted. Destination for move was specified incorrectly. Destination for move was specified incorrectly. Destination for move was specified incorrectly. The study information included illegal data.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. No particular response is required.
List
No particular response is required.
List
No particular response is required.
List
No particular response is required.
List
Check study data setting.
List
List
- The free hard disk space was insufficient. - Delete unnecessary images. If any - The shuttering process was used with images are left without being output, software version A07 or earlier. Or, a output them. forced termination procedure was - Upgrade the software to version A08 or performed during a startup or freeze later and then initialize the image (when version A07 or earlier was used). database. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
Main
The system was unstable.
List
The system was unstable. The system was unstable. Connection equipment was not operative or the network was unstable. Connection equipment was not operative or the network was unstable. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check other connected equipment or network. Check other connected equipment or network. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
List List List
List List List List List List
Appx1 MT-59
Event
Event Source
21211 FFCustomMsgBox
21212 FFCustomMsgBox 21213 FFCustomMsgBox
21214 FFCustomMsgBox 22100 FFIIPListMoveImage 22103 FFIIPMAIN
22128 FFIIPMAIN 22200 FFIIPListMoveImage
22201 FFIIPListMoveImage 22201 FFPDIWizardCom 22202 FFIIPListMoveImage 22202 FFPDIWizardCom
22203 FFIIPListMoveImage 22203 FFPDIWizardCom 22204 FFIIPListMoveImage 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [21211] An error of unknown cause occurred in obtaining radiographer information. [21212] An error of unknown cause occurred. [21213] An error of unknown cause occurred. Study information cannot be obtained. [21214] Failed in starting remote search/acquisition processing. Warning. %1 It failed in the acquisition of the configuration information. The initialization treatment can’t be continued. / MainProcess:Main() An error occurred in logfile backup treatment. / MainProcess:xxxxx Error. %1 Initialize Error. %1 %1%n%2%n Failed in obtaining the registry information. FFGetString Error. %1 %1%n%2%n Failed in reading of the configuration file (Directory. ini). DB Connect Error. %1 %1%n%2%n Failed in accessing the system setting database. DB Get Error. %
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
List
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
List
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
List
A warning was issued. For details, see the contents of the event log. The version information was not successfully acquired. It is conceivable that the Version.env file did not exist in the specified directory or that the contents of the file were damaged. A log file backup was not successfully made. It is conceivable that the specified pathname was incorrect. An error occurred. For details, see the contents of the event log.
There is no particular problem with operations. Reinstall.
The system was unstable.
The initialization process failed.
List
Reinstall. (Although there are no operational problems, various communication logs cannot be saved.) Since the process was aborted due to an error occurrence, it is conceivable that a data inconsistency may exist. Verify the data consistency. Restart.
An attempt to obtain the registry information failed.
Restart.
The FFGetString function returned an error. An attempt to read the Directory.ini file failed.
Restart.
The database connection was not successfully established. The SysConfig.mdb file may have been damaged.
Restart.
Data could not be acquired from the database.
Restart.
Make sure that the Directory.ini file is correct and restart.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-60
Event
Event Source
22204 FFPDIWizardCom 22205 FFIIPListMoveImage 22205 FFPDIWizardCom 22206 FFIIPListMoveImage 22206 FFPDIWizardCom 22207 FFIIPListMoveImage 22207 FFPDIWizardCom 22208 FFIIPListMoveImage 22208 FFPDIWizardCom 22209 FFPDIWizardCom 22211 FFPDIWizardCom 23000 FFMWMStudyList 23000 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
Description %1%n%2%n Failed in accessing the character database. SetDB Error. %1 %1%n%2%n Failed in accessing the image database. Dicom Data Object Get Error. %1 %1%n%2%n An error occurred in an imageprocessing server. Dicom Data Object Set Error. %1 %1%n%2%n An error occurred in a PDIcontrol library. Dicom Data Object Set Error. %1 %1%n%2%n An error occurred in the DicomDataObject. %1%n%2%n An error occurred in the called function. %1%n An exception error occurred. RegCreatekey() returned with Error at %1. [%2] RegCreatekey() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23000 FFIIPListCustomize
RegCreatekey() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23000 FFIIPListSearch
RegCreatekey() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2]
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The LangStr.mdb file may have been damaged.
Remarks
Check the LangStr.mdb file.
Data could not be set up for the database. Restart. The SQL server service manager has not Make sure that the SQL server has been been started, because, for example, a started. necessary file was not installed. Data could not be acquired from the Dicom Restart. Data Object. An error occurred in the image processing Restart. server. Data could not be set up for the Dicom Data Object.
Restart.
An error occurred in the PDI control library. Restart. An exception error occurred.
Restart.
A error occurred in the DICOM object.
Restart.
An error occurred in a function that was called up.
Restart.
An exceptional error occurred.
Restart.
The RegCreateKey function returned an error.
Restart.
The user authority may not have been granted or installation may have been ended abnormally. The user authority may not have been granted or installation may have been ended abnormally. The user authority may not have been granted or installation may have been ended abnormally.
Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation. Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation. Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-61
Event
Event Source
23000 FFIIPListMoveImage 23000 FFMWMStudyList 23001 FFMWMStudyList 23001 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23001 FFIIPListCustomize 23001 FFIIPListSearch 23001 FFMWMStudyList 23001 FFMediaList 23002 FFMWMStudyList 23002 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23002 FFIIPListCustomize
23002 FFIIPListSearch 23002 FFMWMStudyList 23002 FFMediaList 23003 FFMWMStudyList 23003 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Information. %1 Study couldn’t be started automatically. %1. [%2] RegOpenkey() returned with Error at %1. [%2] RegOpenkey() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2]
Causes
Remedies
Information log.
There are no operational problems.
Failed in starting a study automatically for any reason.
There are no operational problems.
The RegOpenKey function returned an error.
Restart.
The user authority may not have been granted or installation may have been ended abnormally. RegOpenkey() returned The user authority may not have been with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted or installation may have been ended abnormally. RegOpenkey() returned The user authority may not have been with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted or installation may have been ended abnormally. RegOpenkey() returned Failed in opening the registry (an error with Error at %1. occurred with the program or the system [%2] was unstable). RegOpenKey()returnedwith The RegOpenKey function returned an Error at %1. error. [%2] RegClosekey() returned The RegOpenKey function returned an with Error at %1. error. [%2] RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted. RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted. RegClosekey() returned The user authority may not have been with Error at %1.%n[%2] granted. RegClosekey() returned Failed in closing the registry (an error with Error at %1. occurred with the program or the system [%2] was unstable). RegCloseKey() returned The RegCloseKey function returned an withError at %1. error. [%2] RegQueryNumericValue() The RegOpenKey function returned an returned with Error at %1. error. [%2] RegQueryNumericValue() The user authority may not have been returned with Error at granted. %1.%n[%2]
Remarks
Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation. Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation. Use the normal startup procedure or perform reinstallation. Restart. Restart. Restart. Use the normal startup procedure. Use the normal startup procedure. Use the normal startup procedure. Restart. Restart. Restart. Use the normal startup procedure.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-62
Event
Event Source
23003 FFIIPListCustomize 23003 FFIIPListSearch 23003 FFMWMStudyList 23003 FFMediaList 23004 FFMWMStudyList 23004 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23004 FFIIPListCustomize 23004 FFIIPListSearch 23004 FFMWMStudyList 23004 FFMediaList 23005 FFIIPListCustomize 23005 FFIIPListSearch 23005 FFMWMStudyList 23005 FFMWMStudyList 23005 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23005 FFMediaList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description RegQueryNumericValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] RegQueryNumericValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] RegQueryNumericValue() returned with Error at %1. [%2] RegQueryNumericValue()r eturned with Error at %1. [%2] RegSetNumericValue() returned with Error at %1. [%2] RegSetNumericValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] RegSetNumericValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] RegSetNumericValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] RegSetNumericValue() returned with Error at %1. [%2] RegSetNumericValue()retu rned with Error at %1. [%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFGetString() returned with Error at %1. [%2]
Causes
Remedies
The user authority may not have been granted.
Use the normal startup procedure.
The user authority may not have been granted.
Use the normal startup procedure.
Remarks
Failed in acquiring data from the registry or Restart. the program may not have been installed properly. The RegQueryNumericValue function Restart. returned an error. The RegOpenKey function returned an error.
Restart.
The user authority may not have been granted.
Use the normal startup procedure.
The user authority may not have been granted.
Use the normal startup procedure.
The user authority may not have been granted.
Use the normal startup procedure.
Failed in writing data in the registry (an error occurred with the program or the system was unstable). The RegSetNumericValue function returned an error.
Restart.
The problem is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file. The problem is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file. The FFGetString function returned an error. The FFGetString function failed. This problem is attributable to an improper installation. The problem is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file. The FFGetString function returned an error.
Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Restart.
Restart.
Perform a reinstallation or restart. Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-63
Event
Event Source
23006 FFIIPListCustomize 23006 FFIIPListSearch 23006 FFMWMStudyList 23006 FFMWMStudyList 23006 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23006 FFMediaList 23007 FFIIPListCustomize 23007 FFIIPListSearch 23007 FFMWMStudyList 23007 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23007 FFMediaList
23008 FFIIPListCustomize 23008 FFIIPListSearch 23008 FFMWMStudyList 23008 FFMWMStudyList 23008 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb file. FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb file. FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function failed. with Error at %1. [%2] The problem is due to an improper installation or system instability. FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an with Error at %1. error. [%2] FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged with Error at %1.%n[%2] Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb file. FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an with Error at %1. error. [%2] FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFStrDBClose() returned The FFStrDBClose function failed. with Error at %1. [%2] FFStrDBClose() returned The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFStrDBClose() returned The FFStrDBClose function returned an with Error at %1. error. [%2] FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFStrDBReadString() The FFStrDBReadString function returned returned with Error at %1. an error. [%2] FFStrDBReadString() The FFStrDBReadString function failed. returned with Error at %1. The problem is attributable to an improper [%2] installation. FFStrDBReadString() The LangStr.mdb file was damaged. returned with Error at %1.%n[%2]
Remarks
Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Or, check the LangStr. mdb file. Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Or, check the LangStr. mdb file. Perform a reinstallation or restart. Restart. Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Or, check the LangStr. mdb file. Restart. Check the LangStr.mdb file. Check the LangStr.mdb file. Restart. Check the LangStr.mdb file. Restart. Check the LangStr.mdb file. Check the LangStr.mdb file. Restart. Perform a reinstall or restart. Check the LangStr.mdb file.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-64
Event
Event Source
23008 FFMediaList 23009 FFIIPListCustomize 23009 FFIIPListSearch 23009 FFMWMStudyList 23009 FFMWMStudyList 23009 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23009 FFMediaList
2300A FFMWMStudyList 23010 FFIIPListCustomize 23010 FFIIPListSearch 23010 FFMWMStudyList 23010 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23010 FFMediaList 23011 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23011 FFIIPListCustomize 23011 FFMWMStudyList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description FFStrDBReadString() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeySZ() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFRegGetKeyDWORD() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFSysDBConnect() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBInitialize() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBInitialize() returned with Error at %1. [%2]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The FFStrDBReadString function returned Restart. an error. The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure. unprivileged user. The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure. unprivileged user. The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart. error. The FFRegGetKeySZ function failed. Perform a reinstall or restart. This error is attributable to an improper installation. The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure. unprivileged user. The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart. error. The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function failed. Perform a reinstallation or restart. This error is attributable to an improper IIP installation. The problem is attributable to an Use the normal startup procedure. unprivileged user. The problem is attributable to an unprivileged user.
Use the normal startup procedure.
The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function returned an error.
Restart.
The problem is attributable to an unprivileged user.
Use the normal startup procedure.
The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function returned an error.
Restart.
It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not exist. It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not exist. FFHostDBInitialize() sent back an error.
Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal, and then restart. Or, check the SysConfig. mdb file. Ensure that the Directory.ini file is correct, and then restart the system or check the SysConfig.mdb file. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-65
Event
Event Source
23011 FFMediaList 23012 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23012 FFIIPListCustomize
23012 FFMWMStudyList 23012 FFMediaList 23013 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23013 FFIIPListCustomize 23013 FFMWMStudyList 23013 FFMediaList 23014 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23014 FFMediaList
23014 FFMWMStudyList 23015 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23015 FFMediaList
23015 FFMWMStudyList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description FFHostDBInitialize() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFSysDBClose() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFSysDBReadszValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned with Error at %1. [%2] FFSysDBReadnValue() returned with Error at %1.%n[%2] FFSysDBReadnValue() returned with Error at %1.%n [%2] Failed WorkListDB Open Recordset at %1.%n [%2] Failed ImageDB Connection at %1.%n[%2] Failed ImageDB Connection at %1.%n [%2] Failed WorkListDB Close Recordset at %1.%n [%2]
Causes
Remedies
FFHostDBInitialize() returned an error.
Restart.
This error is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file. It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file was damaged.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
FFHostDBGetQueryHost() sent back an error.
Restart the system.
FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned an error.
Restart.
This error is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file was damaged.
Check the Hosts.mdb file.
FFHostDBSetQueryHost() sent back an error.
Restart the system.
FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned an error.
Restart.
This error is attributable to a damaged Directory.ini file.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
It is conceivable that the SysConfig.mdb file was damaged.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
It is conceivable that the SQL Server Service Manager is not running or necessary files are not installed. The SQL Server Service Manager starts running or necessary files are not installed. It is conceivable that the SQL Server Service Manager is not running or necessary files are not installed. It is conceivable that the SQL Server Service Manager is not running or necessary files are not installed.
Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
Remarks
Check the Hosts.mdb file.
Ensure that the SQL Server is running. Ensure that the SQL Server is running. Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-66
Event
Event Source
23016 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23016 FFMWMStudyList 23017 FFStudyList,
Description Failed ImageDB Disconnection at %1.%n[%2] Failed ReleasePossession at %1.%n [%2] Failed ImageDB Open Recordset at %1.%n[%2] Failed ImageDB Update Recordset at %1.%n[%2] Failed ImageDB Close Recordset at %1.%n[%2] Failed Get HostName as %1.%n[%2]
Causes
Remedies
The SQL Server Service Manager starts Ensure that the SQL Server is running. running or necessary files are not installed. Release of the possessive right failed.
Ensure that the SQL Sever is running. Ensure that the SQL Server is running.
23022 FFStudyList
Failed GetPossession at %1.%n [%2]
23023 FFMediaList 23023 FFStudyList
Error Occurred.%n
The SQL Server Service Manager starts running or necessary files are not installed. The SQL Server Service Manager starts running or necessary files are not installed. The SQL Server Service Manager starts running or necessary files are not installed. Failed in acquiring a host name. The network may have been set up incorrectly. Failed in acquiring a host name. The network may have been set up incorrectly. Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts. mdb file. The database may have been damaged. Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts. mdb file. The database may have been damaged. Failed in acquiring property. It is conceivable that any other equipment has already acquired property, network disconnected or power not turned ON. Failed in acquiring property. It is conceivable that any other equipment has already acquired property, network disconnected or power not turned ON. An error occurred for any reason.
Failed DDOChangeOrDelivery at %1.%n[%2] Failed DicomQ/R at %1.%n[%2] FFNetDBConnect() returned with Error at %1.%n [%2] Failed DicomQ/R Initialize at %1.%n[%2]
A failure occurred in file change or delivery processing at film division/extension (12on1) output. A failure occurred when performing DICOM Q/R processing. An attempt to establish connection to the network setup database resulted in a failure. A failure occurred in initialization of DICOM Q/R processing.
FFOutputList 23018 FFStudyList, FFOutputList 23019 FFStudyList, FFOutputList 23020 FFStudyList
23020 FFMediaList
Failed Get HostName as %1.%n[%2]
23021 FFStudyList
Failed HostDB Data at %1.%n[%2]
23021 FFMediaList
Failed HostDB Data at %1.%n [%2] Failed GetPossession at %1.%n[%2]
23022 FFStudyList
23024 FFStudyList 23025 FFStudyList 23026 FFStudyList
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Ensure that the SQL Server is running. Ensure that the SQL Server is running. Check the network/network settings. Check the network/network settings. Check the Hosts.mdb file. Check the Hosts.mdb file. Check the network/equipment.
Check the network/equipment.
Restart. Restart the system. Check the network/network settings, and then restart the system as necessary. Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the system. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-67
Event
Event Source
23027 FFStudyList 23028 FFStudyList 23029 FFStudyList 23031 FFStudyList 23099 FFIIPListCustomize 23099 FFIIPListSearch 23099 FFMWMStudyList 23099 FFMWMStudyList 23099 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList 23099 FFMediaList
23108 FFIIPMAIN
23118 FFIIPMAIN
23124 FFIIPMAIN
24001 FFCustomMsgBox 24002 FFCustomMsgBox 24003 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Failed MultiPrintDDOUpdate at %1.%n[%2] Failed MultiPrintDelivery %1.%n[%2] Failed FFNetDBGet %1.%n[%2]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
A failure occurred in file change processing Restart the system. at film division/extension (12on1) output.
A failure occurred in delivery processing at film division/extension (12on1) output. An attempt to acquire data from the network setup database resulted in a failure. ctl_ListPatient_ExecutePDI A PDI processing error occurred. ()() returned with Error at %1.%n An unknown error An unknown error occurred. occurred.%n[%1] An unknown error An unknown error occurred. occurred.%n[%1] An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred. [%1] An unknown error occurred. An unknown error occurred. This error is [%1] attributable to system instability. An unknown error An unknown error occurred. occurred.%n[%1] An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred. [%1] It failed in the start of the A subprocess was not successfully started sub-process. up. It is conceivable that installation was The initialization treatment not properly completed or that the system can’t be continued. / was unstable. MainProcess:Main() It failed in the completion of A subprocess was not successfully ended. the sub-process. It is conceivable that the system was /MainProcess: unstable. ProcessEndRequirement() It failed in switching of the Subprocess switching was not successfully process. /MainProcess: performed. It is conceivable that the target xxxxx subprocess was not running or that the system was unstable. [24001] Selected study This dialog box opens for confirmation information will be fully only. deleted. [24002] No items displayed. There were no items to be displayed in the list. [24003] The item width is The maximum display width was exceeded too large. by the specified value.
Restart the system. Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the system. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
Restart.
Restart.
No particular response is required.
List
Select at least one display item.
List
Enter a smaller value.
List
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-68
Event
Event Source
24004 FFCustomMsgBox 24005 FFCustomMsgBox 24057 FFCustomMsgBox 24062 FFCustomMsgBox 25001 FFCustomMsgBox
Description [24004] Cancels the selected output request. [24005] The search target string “%S” was not found. [24057 ] Unable to receive information from the RIS trigger transmitter. [24062] Failed in changing the host setting. [25001] Failed in connecting to the media database.
Causes
Remedies
This dialog box opens for confirmation only. No data matched the entered search criteria. The system was unstable.
Worklist
The database file is possible to be defective or has been deleted. The database file is possible to be defective or has been deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, reinstall the software because the database is highly possible to be defective. Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, reinstall the software because the database is highly possible to be defective. Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, reinstall the software because the database is highly possible to be defective. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall.
The database file is possible to be defective or has been deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall.
Media list
Registry information is possible to be defective or has been deleted. Registry information is possible to be defective or has been deleted. Registry information is possible to be defective or has been deleted. The file is possible to be defective or has been deleted. Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL server service manager has not yet been started or the image database not initialized appropriately.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall. Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, initialize the image database (in such cases, image data will be fully deleted.)
Media list
The system was unstable. Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL server service manager has not yet been started.
25003 FFCustomMsgBox
[25003] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL information from media. server service manager has not yet been started.
25004 FFCustomMsgBox
[25004] Failed in accessing the system setup database. [25005] Failed in accessing the network setup database. [25006] Failed in accessing the character string database. [25007] Failed in reading registry information. [25008] Failed in writing registry information. [25009] Failed in closing registry information. [25010] Failed in accessing the definition file. [25011] Failed in connecting to the image database.
25007 FFCustomMsgBox 25008 FFCustomMsgBox 25009 FFCustomMsgBox 25010 FFCustomMsgBox 25011 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
List List
[25002] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL the media database. server service manager has not yet been started.
25006 FFCustomMsgBox
List
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
25002 FFCustomMsgBox
25005 FFCustomMsgBox
Remarks
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list Media list
Media list Media list Media list Media list
Appx1 MT-69
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
25012 FFCustomMsgBox
[25012] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL the image database. server service manager has not yet been started or the image database not initialized appropriately.
25013 FFCustomMsgBox
[25013] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL information from the image server service manager has not yet been database. started or the image database not initialized appropriately.
25014 FFCustomMsgBox
[25014] Failed in setting information on the image database.
25015 FFCustomMsgBox 25016 25017 25018 25019 25020 25021 25022 25026 29001 29002 29010 29011
[25015] Failed in mounting media. FFCustomMsgBox [25016] Failed in unmounting media. FFCustomMsgBox [25017] Failed in formatting media. FFCustomMsgBox [25018] Failed in performing QA processing. FFCustomMsgBox [25019] Failed in obtaining a study from media. FFCustomMsgBox [25020] Failed in image delivery processing. FFCustomMsgBox [25021] Some of the studies cannot be performed. FFCustomMsgBox [25022] Failed in obtaining a study from media. FFCustomMsgBox [25026] Output of some studies was disabled. FFCustomMsgBox [30507] A communication error with Ascent View occurred. FFCustomMsgBox [40002] A communication error with Ascent View occurred. FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54625] Power interruption was detected. FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54626] No media management files exist.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL server service manager has not yet been started or the image database not initialized appropriately. Due to the fact, for example, that the media is not ready. Due to the fact, for example, that the media is not ready. Due to the fact, for example, that the media is not ready. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. Due to the fact, for example, that the media data is damaged. It is highly probable that the program was faulty.
Remarks
Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, initialize the image database (in such cases, image data will be fully deleted.) Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, initialize the image database (in such cases, image data will be fully deleted.) Check to see if the SQL service manager is running properly. If this symptom occurs although it is running properly, initialize the image database (in such cases, image data will be fully deleted.) Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged.
Media list
Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged. Check to see if the media is inserted or undamaged.
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list Media list Media list Media list Media list Media list Media list
Media list List
It is highly probable that the program was faulty.
List
The Win32 API function returned an error.
Restart.
An exception error occurred.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Worklist
Appx1 MT-70
Event
Event Source
29107 FFIIPMAIN
29112 FFIIPMAIN
29114 FFIIPMAIN
29115 FFIIPMAIN
29116 FFIIPMAIN
29117 FFIIPMAIN
29119 FFIIPMAIN
29122 FFIIPMAIN
29123 FFIIPMAIN 29125 FFIIPMAIN
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
It failed in the preparation of the pipe. The treatment can’t be continued. / MainProcess:Main() It failed in the indication of the routine mode transition. /MainProcess: m_ProcessControl _OnRunProcComplete() An unusual message was received. This message is ignored. /MainProcess: m_ProcessComControl _OnRecvNotification() An unusual send cause was received. This send cause is ignored. /MainProcess: m_ProcessComControl _OnRecvNotification() The form of the place of the transmission isn’t right. /MainProcess: SendMessage()
The pipe for inter-process communication was not successfully created. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. The routine transition instruction message was not successfully issued. It is conceivable that the subprocess was not running or that the pipe was not created. The received message was unusual. It is conceivable that the message was not registered in the message information database or that the system was unstable.
It failed in the message delivery. /MainProcess: SendMessage() It failed in the process completion notice. /MainProcess:ProcessEndAnswerMessage() It failed in the unusual occurrence notice. /MainProcess: ErrorNoticeMessage() It failed in the pipe close. /MainProcess: EndMainProcess() It failed in close of the message data base. / MainProcess:xxxxx
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
A message was received from an unknown Restart. If the same symptom occurs after source. It is conceivable that the a restart, reinstall. transmission source was not registered in the message information database or that a wrong transmission source was selected. An unknown transmission destination was specified for the received message. It is conceivable that the transmission destination was not registered in the message information database or that a wrong transmission destination was selected. A message delivery was not successful. It is conceivable that the subprocess at the transmission destination was not running.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
An end notice was not successfully sent to the subprocess. It is conceivable that the subprocess was not running or that the system was unstable. An error notice was not successfully sent to the subprocess. It is conceivable that the subprocess was not running or that the system was unstable. An inter-process communication pipe was not successfully closed. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. The message database was not successfully closed. It is conceivable that the system was unstable.
Restart.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, reinstall.
Restart.
Restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-71
Event
Event Source
29126 FFIIPMAIN 29127 FFIIPMAIN 29128 FFIIPMAIN 29129 FFIIPMAIN 29130 FFCustomMsgBox 30001 FFCustomMsgBox 30002 FFCustomMsgBox 30003 FFCustomMsgBox
30004 FFCustomMsgBox 30005 FFCustomMsgBox 30013 FFCustomMsgBox 30019 FFCustomMsgBox
30027
FFCustomMsgBox
30045 FFCustomMsgBox 30057 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description It failed in reading of the registry information. / MainProcess:xxxxx It failed in writing of the registry information. / MainProcess:xxxxx Trash Folder is not found. Tempolary file(s) could not delete. [29130] The system is now starting up.
Causes Data was not successfully acquired from the registry. It is conceivable that installation was not properly completed. Data was not successfully written into the registry. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. %IipApplication%\Trash cannot be found.
Remedies
Remarks
Restart. If the same error recurs even after restarting the system, reinstall it. Restart. If the same error recurs even after restarting the system, reinstall it.
The Trash folder could not be found. The Trash folder could not be deleted.
Reinstall. Restart.
Folder file included in %IipApplication%\ Trash cannot be deleted. This dialog box opens for confirmation only. It appears when the system returns from a user utility to an application. [30001] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the connection characters or deleted. perform a reinstallation. to the character database. [30002] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, connecting to the character damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. database. [30003] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the connection characters or deleted. perform a reinstallation. to the system setting database. [30004] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, connecting to the system damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. setting database. [30005] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the connection characters or deleted. perform a reinstallation. to the image database. [30013] Failed in saving It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, listed (worklist) display or deleted. perform a reinstallation. settings. [30019] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the connection characters damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. to the network setting database. [30027] Failed in initializing It is conceivable that the registry Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the list (worklist). information was damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. obtained. [30045] IP address on the It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, Image Reader not obtained. damaged or improperly set. perform a reinstallation. [30057] Failed in receiving The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the message. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-72
Event
Event Source
30085 FFCustomMsgBox
30105 FFCustomMsgBox 30106 FFCustomMsgBox 30107 FFCustomMsgBox 30108 FFCustomMsgBox 30109 FFCustomMsgBox 30110 FFCustomMsgBox 30117 FFCustomMsgBox 30121 FFCustomMsgBox
30122 FFCustomMsgBox 30125 FFCustomMsgBox 30129 FFCustomMsgBox
30147 FFCustomMsgBox
30148 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [30085] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the Image Reader status information database. [30105] Failed in list initialization (waiting for study). [30106] Failed in list initialization (waiting for QA). [30107] Failed in list initialization (waiting for output). [30108] Failed in list initialization (already output). [30109] Failed in list initialization (all). [30110] Failed in list initialization (today). [30117] Failed in updating list (worklist) display. [30121] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the Image Reader information database. [30122] Failed in accessing the Image Reader information database. [30125] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (IP size series). [30129] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Pantomography processing). [30147] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Magnetic card type). [30148] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Magnetic card type).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-73
Event
Event Source
30149 FFCustomMsgBox
30150 FFCustomMsgBox 30151 FFCustomMsgBox
30152 FFCustomMsgBox 30153
FFCustomMsgBox
30155 FFCustomMsgBox 30157 FFCustomMsgBox
Description [30149] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Hospital card used). [30150] Failed in accessing the system setting database. [30151] Failed in initialization processing.
Causes
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
- The connection to the network was not established. - Node setup was not completed for “THIS HOST (IIP)” under “Network Config”. - The system was unstable. [30152] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged the pass information (image or deleted. data folder). [30153] The shutdown The system was unstable. process resulted in a failure. [30155] Failed in list It is conceivable that the file was damaged initialization (waiting for or deleted. study). [30157] Database access The problem is attributable, for instance, to was unsuccessful. an inactive SQL service manager or uninitialized image database.
[30200] Failed in RIS activation.
There may be a problem with the RIS module or RIS setup.
30201 FFCustomMsgBox
[30201] A communication error with RIS occurred.
There may be a problem with the RIS module or RIS setup.
30202 FFCustomMsgBox
[30202] A communication error with RIS occurred.
There may be a problem with the RIS module or RIS setup.
30204 FFCustomMsgBox
[30204] Because of Failed in installation. improperly performed installation processing, the system cannot be started. [30205] Failed in search The system was unstable. processing. [30206] Failed in initializing The system was unstable. patient-incidental information.
30206 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
30200 FFCustomMsgBox
30205 FFCustomMsgBox
Remedies
- Connect to the network. - Set a dummy node for “THIS HOST (IIP)” (e.g., DICOM Print). - Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Verify the settings and then restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Verify the settings and then restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Verify the settings and then restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Reinstall.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-74
Event
Event Source
30213 FFCustomMsgBox 30507 FFCustomMsgBox 31001 FFCustomMsgBox 31002 FFCustomMsgBox 31003 FFCustomMsgBox
31004 FFCustomMsgBox 31005 FFCustomMsgBox 31006 FFCustomMsgBox 31007 FFCustomMsgBox
31008 FFCustomMsgBox 31010 FFCustomMsgBox
31011 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [30213] Failed in displaying the preview screen. [30507] A communication error with Ascent View occurred. [31001] Failed in obtaining the registry information (font name). [31002] Failed in obtaining the registry information (font size). [31003] Failed in obtaining the registry information (multi-byte language information). [31004] Failed in obtaining the used language in system setting. [31005] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the character database. [31006] Failed in connecting to the character database. [31007] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the system setting database. [31008] Failed in connecting to the system setting database. [31010] Failed in connecting to the image database.
Causes
Remedies
The system was unstable. An error occurred in the communication with Ascent View.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
ID input section Communication error with the linkage application
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31011] Failed in acquiring - The problem is attributable, for instance, - Check whether the SQL service manager information from the image to an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is - Software version A07 or earlier was used. normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). - Upgrade the software to version A08 or later.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-75
Event
Event Source
31012 FFCustomMsgBox
31013 FFCustomMsgBox
31014 FFCustomMsgBox
31015 FFCustomMsgBox
31016 FFCustomMsgBox
31017 FFCustomMsgBox
31018 FFCustomMsgBox
31019 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[31012] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager the image database. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31013] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager the information from the an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom image database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31014] Failed in setting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager information to the image an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31015] Failed in deleting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager the information from the an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom image database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31016] Failed in The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager connecting to the flag an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31017] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager the flag database. an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31018] Failed in setting The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager information to the flag an inactive SQL service manager or is normally operating. If the symptom database. uninitialized image database. occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). [31019] Failed in It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, initialization process for damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. menu setting database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-76
Event
Event Source
31020 FFCustomMsgBox 31021 FFCustomMsgBox
31022 FFCustomMsgBox 31023 FFCustomMsgBox
31024 FFCustomMsgBox 31025 FFCustomMsgBox 31026 FFCustomMsgBox 31027 FFCustomMsgBox
31028 FFCustomMsgBox 31029 FFCustomMsgBox 31030 FFCustomMsgBox
Description [31020] Failed in obtaining the menu information from the menu setting database. [31021] Failed in obtaining the menu parameter information from the menu setting database. [31022] Failed in terminating the menu setting database. [31023] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the network setting database. [31024] Failed in connecting to the network setting database. [31025] Failed in obtaining the information from the network setting database. [31026] Failed in issuing the image information. [31027] Failed in obtaining the image information.
[31028] Failed in setting the image information. [31029] Failed in deleting the image information. [31030] Failed in reading the image information file.
31031 FFCustomMsgBox
[31031] Failed in writing the image information file.
31032 FFCustomMsgBox
[31032] Failed in releasing the image information. [31033] Failed in obtaining the caption information (ID#).
31033 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Use the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting of CL Service Utility to see if Distribution Code (ID:141) is checked or not. If checked, uncheck it. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk. disk. An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk. disk. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-77
Event
Event Source
31034 FFCustomMsgBox 31035 FFCustomMsgBox 31036 FFCustomMsgBox 31037 FFCustomMsgBox 31038 FFCustomMsgBox 31039 FFCustomMsgBox 31040 FFCustomMsgBox 31041 FFCustomMsgBox 31042 FFCustomMsgBox
31043 FFCustomMsgBox
31044 FFCustomMsgBox
31045 FFCustomMsgBox
31047 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31034] Failed in obtaining the caption information (study#). [31035] Failed in obtaining the caption information (patient name). [31036] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Kanji-patient name). [31037] Failed in obtaining the caption information (sex). [31038] Failed in obtaining the caption information (sex: M). [31039] Failed in obtaining the caption information (sex: F). [31040] Failed in obtaining the caption information (sex: O). [31041] Failed in obtaining the caption information (data of birth). [31042] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (ID# input character limitation). [31043] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Study # input character limitation). [31044] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (ID # padding format). [31045] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Study # padding format). [31047] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (date of birth format).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-78
Event
Event Source
31051 FFCustomMsgBox 31052 FFCustomMsgBox 31053 FFCustomMsgBox 31054 FFCustomMsgBox 31055 FFCustomMsgBox 31056 FFCustomMsgBox 31057 FFCustomMsgBox 31058 FFCustomMsgBox 31059 FFCustomMsgBox
31060 FFCustomMsgBox 31061 FFCustomMsgBox
31062 FFCustomMsgBox 31063 FFCustomMsgBox 31064 FFCustomMsgBox
31065 FFCustomMsgBox 31066 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[31051] Invalid character is input in ID #. [31052] Invalid character is input in Study #. [31053] Invalid character is input in patient name. [31054] Invalid character is input in kanji-patient name. [31055] Invalid character is input in sex. [31056] Invalid format for date of birth is input. [31057] Failed in accessing the requesting department database. [31058] Failed in obtaining the caption information (requesting dep.). [31059] Failed in obtaining the item information for displaying in the requesting dep. Selection list. [31060] Failed in obtaining the requesting department information. [31061] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the requesting department database. [31062] Failed in accessing the technician information database. [31063] Failed in caption information (technician). [31064] Failed in obtaining the item information for displaying in the technician selection list. [31065] Failed in obtaining the technician information. [31066] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the technician database.
A 2-byte character, @, or other unacceptable character was contained. A 2-byte character, @, or other unacceptable character was contained. A 2-byte character, @, or other unacceptable character was contained. A 1-byte character or other unacceptable character was contained. A character other than “M”, “F”, and “O” was contained. The entry did not agree with a preselected birth date format. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Remarks
Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-79
Event
Event Source
31067 FFCustomMsgBox 31068 FFCustomMsgBox 31069 FFCustomMsgBox
31070 FFCustomMsgBox
31071 FFCustomMsgBox 31072 FFCustomMsgBox 31074 FFCustomMsgBox
31076 FFCustomMsgBox 31077 FFCustomMsgBox 31078 FFCustomMsgBox 31079 FFCustomMsgBox 31080 FFCustomMsgBox 31081 FFCustomMsgBox 31082 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31067] Failed in obtaining the registry information (window size). [31068] No patient information is input. [31069] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (succeeded from exposure menu reservation list). [31070] Multiple studies cannot be executed.
Causes
Remedies
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
Nothing was entered in the patient Enter at least the patient’s sex. information input field. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
An attempt was made to start an examination process with more than one examination item selected from an examination waiting list. [31071] No list is selected. An attempt was made to start execution with no examination item selected. [31072] Invalid character is An unacceptable character was contained. input for film annotation. [31074] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to the information from the an inactive SQL service manager or flag database. uninitialized image database.
[31076] Failed in obtaining the button image (Clear button). [31077] Failed in obtaining the button image (OK button). [31078] Failed in obtaining the button image (Cancel button). [31079] Failed in obtaining the button image (increment button). [31080] Failed in obtaining the button image (decrement button). [31081] Failed in obtaining the button image (Next page button). [31082] Failed in obtaining the button image (previous page button).
Remarks
Start an examination process with one examination item selected. Select at least one examination item. Make a proper entry.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-80
Event
Event Source
31097 FFCustomMsgBox 31099 FFCustomMsgBox 31100 FFCustomMsgBox
31101 FFCustomMsgBox 31103 FFCustomMsgBox 31105 FFCustomMsgBox 31106 FFCustomMsgBox 31107 FFCustomMsgBox 31108 FFCustomMsgBox 31109 FFCustomMsgBox 31110 FFCustomMsgBox 31111 FFCustomMsgBox 31112 FFCustomMsgBox 31113 FFCustomMsgBox
31114 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31097] Failed in obtaining the information from the character database. [31099] An error of unknown cause occurred. [31100] The image display process resulted in a failure while operating in the image input subsystem. [31101] Failed in obtaining the pass information (log saving folder). [31103] Failed in calling up the patient information. [31105] Failed in terminating the image input subsystem. [31106] Failed in terminating the image input subsystem. [31107] Failed in image inputting process in the image input sub-system. [31108] Failed in image inputting process in the image input sub-system. [31109] Failed in image inputting process in the image input sub-system. [31110] Failed in calling up the exposure menu. [31111] Failed in study terminating process. [31112] Failed in image inputting process. [31113] Failed in image inputting process.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is highly probable that the program was faulty. It is conceivable that the image data or image information file was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. - Software version A07 or earlier was used. - Upgrade the software to version A08 or - The system was unstable. later. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. [31114] Failed in specifying The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the urgent processing. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-81
Event
Event Source
31116 FFCustomMsgBox
31117 FFCustomMsgBox 31118 FFCustomMsgBox 31119 FFCustomMsgBox 31120 FFCustomMsgBox 31121 FFCustomMsgBox
31122 FFCustomMsgBox 31123 FFCustomMsgBox
31124 FFCustomMsgBox
31125 FFCustomMsgBox 31126 FFCustomMsgBox 31127 FFCustomMsgBox 31128 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31116] Communication line for monitoring the connection status with the Image Reader(%s) has broken. [31117] No connection monitoring response from the Image Reader(%s). [31118] Control line with the Image Reader(%s) has broken. [31119] No command response from the Image Reader(%s). [31120] Failed in Image Reader status control. [31121] Command requested to the Image Reader has not been executed. [31122] Failed in obtaining the information (status) from the Image Reader. [31123] Failed in obtaining the information (machine code) from the Image Reader. [31124] Failed in obtaining the information (FRUP version) from the Image Reader. [31125] Failed in reconnecting with the Image Reader. [31126] Failed in breaking connection with the Image Reader. [31127] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study with QA completed). [31128] Failed in obtaining the caption (only exposure competed).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty.
It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line. faulty. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-82
Event
Event Source
31129 FFCustomMsgBox 31130 FFCustomMsgBox 31131 FFCustomMsgBox 31132 FFCustomMsgBox 31133 FFCustomMsgBox 31134 FFCustomMsgBox 31135 FFCustomMsgBox 31136 FFCustomMsgBox 31137 FFCustomMsgBox 31138 FFCustomMsgBox 31139 FFCustomMsgBox 31140 FFCustomMsgBox 31141 FFCustomMsgBox 31142 FFCustomMsgBox 31143 FFCustomMsgBox 31144 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31129] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study interrupt button). [31130] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Cancel button). [31131] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study reception tab). [31132] Failed in obtaining the caption information (waiting for study tab). [31133] Failed in obtaining the caption information (waiting for QA tab). [31134] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Waiting for output tab). [31135] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Already output tab). [31136] Failed in obtaining the caption information (All tab). [31137] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Today tab). [31138] Failed in obtaining the button image (System button). [31139] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study reservation button). [31140] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study start button). [31141] Patient information is illegal. [31142] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31143] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31144] Failed in obtaining the display group data.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-83
Event
Event Source
31145 FFCustomMsgBox 31146 FFCustomMsgBox 31147 FFCustomMsgBox 31148 FFCustomMsgBox 31149 FFCustomMsgBox 31152 FFCustomMsgBox 31153 FFCustomMsgBox 31154 FFCustomMsgBox 31155 FFCustomMsgBox 31158 FFCustomMsgBox 31159 FFCustomMsgBox 31160 FFCustomMsgBox 31161 FFCustomMsgBox 31162 FFCustomMsgBox 31163 FFCustomMsgBox 31164 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[31145] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31146] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31147] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31148] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31149] Failed in obtaining the display group data. [31152] Failed in obtaining the exposure menu information. [31153] Failed in obtaining the button image (Urgent button). [31154] Failed in obtaining the button image (Study completed button). [31155] Failed in obtaining the button image (Update button). [31158] Failed in obtaining the button image (New button). [31159] Failed in obtaining the button image (Repeat button). [31160] Failed in obtaining the button image (Re-shoot button). [31161] Failed in obtaining the button image (Add button). [31162] Failed in obtaining the button image (Delete button). [31163] Failed in obtaining the button image (Before scroll button). [31164] Failed in obtaining the button image (After Scroll button).
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Appx1 MT-84
Event
Event Source
31165 FFCustomMsgBox 31166 FFCustomMsgBox 31167 FFCustomMsgBox 31168 FFCustomMsgBox 31169 FFCustomMsgBox 31170 FFCustomMsgBox 31171 FFCustomMsgBox 31172 FFCustomMsgBox 31173 FFCustomMsgBox 31174 FFCustomMsgBox 31175 FFCustomMsgBox 31176 FFCustomMsgBox 31177 FFCustomMsgBox 31178 FFCustomMsgBox 31179 FFCustomMsgBox 31180 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31165] Failed in obtaining the button image (Monitor mode button). [31166] Failed in obtaining the button image (QA button). [31167] Failed in obtaining the button image (Change button). [31168] Failed in obtaining the button image (Rotation/ Inversion button). [31169] Failed in obtaining the button image (EDR mode button). [31170] Failed in obtaining the button image (Image format button). [31171] Failed in obtaining the button image (Change menu parameter button). [31172] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (New button). [31173] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Repeat button). [31174] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Re-shoot button). [31175] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Add button). [31176] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Delete button). [31177] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Before scroll button). [31178] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (After scroll button). [31179] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Monitor mode button). [31180] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (QA button ).
Causes
Remedies
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-85
Event
Event Source
31181 FFCustomMsgBox 31182 FFCustomMsgBox 31183 FFCustomMsgBox 31184 FFCustomMsgBox 31185 FFCustomMsgBox 31186 FFCustomMsgBox 31187 FFCustomMsgBox 31188 FFCustomMsgBox 31189 FFCustomMsgBox
31191 FFCustomMsgBox
31192 FFCustomMsgBox
31193 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[31181] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Change button). [31182] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Rotation/ Inversion button). [31183] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (EDR mode button). [31184] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Image format button). [31185] Failed in obtaining the tool tip (Change menu parameter button). [31186] Failed in obtaining the registry information (Set No.). [31187] Failed in setting the tool tip (Before scroll button). [31188] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (System ID). [31189] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Autodistribution instruction information). [31191] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Selector auto-switchover information). [31192] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Menu auto-sequence information). [31193] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Set No. minimum value information).
It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-86
Event
Event Source
31194 FFCustomMsgBox
31196 FFCustomMsgBox
31197 FFCustomMsgBox 31198 FFCustomMsgBox 31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Description [31194] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Set No. maximum value information). [31196] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Series information issuing method). [31197] No matching work ID exists. [31198] Failed in distribution process. Data error. [Detailed error information 31201 2 items]
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image sizecode error.
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl
InImgReadProc method parameter error.
31201 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 31202 FFCustomMsgBox
Data error.%n[%1]
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
[31202] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Patient information online serial port No.). Initialize error. [Detailed error information 31202 14 items]
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Create Instance error.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Directory path get error.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
The contents of the image file did not agree with those of the image database. The system was unstable.
Initialize the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Abnormal data was entered from the RU or Check the RU and the 5000 Series the 5000 Series equipment. equipment. Perform an image input process again or restart. Illegal image size code when a request Check the RU and the 5000 Series was issued for image input. equipment. Perform an image input process again or restart. Illegal image input request method Check the RU and the 5000 Series parameters. equipment. Perform an image input process again or restart. Input data was incorrect. Restart the system. It is conceivable that the database file was Check the RU and the 5000 Series damaged or deleted. equipment. Perform an image input process again or restart. An abnormality occurred in the initialization Restart the system. If the same symptom process. The common probable causes occurs after a restart, perform a are as follows: reinstallation and initialize the image database. • Installation was not normally ended. • The parameter file was incorrect. Failed in creating Control Instance. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Failed in acquiring each directory path Restart the system. If the same symptom name. occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-87
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Thread make error.(Read)
Failed in creating image input thread.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Thread make error.(Disp)
Failed in creating image display thread.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDR parameter file load error.
Failed in memory loading of the EDR processing parameter file.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image parameter file load error.
Failed in memory loading of the image processing parameter file.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
GetMessage(THREAD_ END) error.
Failed in acquiring the image input/display thread startup completion event.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
DICOM SCP control run error.
Failed in DICOM SCP control startup.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
GetMessage(DICOM_ RUN_COMPLETE) error.
Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control startup completion event.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
PostThreadMessage(IMG_ Failed in requesting for terminating image END_REQ) error. input thread.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
PostThreadMessage(DISP Failed in requesting for terminating image _END_REQ) error. display thread.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
GetMessage(THREAD_ COMPLETE) error.
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
GetMessage(DICOM_END Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control _COMPLETE) error. termination completion event.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Failed in acquiring the image input/display thread termination completion event.
Remarks
Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Restart the system. If the same symptom occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-88
Event
Event Source
Description
31202 FFIIPInImgCtrl
DICOM SCP control (EndPrc method) error.
31202 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 31203 FFCustomMsgBox
Initialize error.%n[%1]
[31203] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Patient information online device name.). 31203 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Method process error.%n [%1] 31204 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Windows API access error. %n[%1] 31205 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Parameter error.%n[%1]
31206 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Memory access error.
%n[%1] 31207 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Function error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Failed in requesting for terminating DICOM Restart the system. If the same symptom SCP control. occurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation and initialize the image database. Failed in initialization processing. Restart the system. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
An error was detected during method processing. The system was unstable.
Restart the system. Restart the system.
An abnormal parameter was detected.
Restart the system.
System memory was insufficient.
Restart the system.
An error was detected during internal processing. [31207] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. 31207 FFCustomMsgBox Image Reader machine code. [31208] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the bitmap file was 31208 FFCustomMsgBox the button image (New damaged or deleted. button). 31208 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl File access error.%n[%1] The system was unstable.
31210 FFCustomMsgBox
31211 FFCustomMsgBox 31212 FFCustomMsgBox 31213 FFCustomMsgBox 31214 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
[31210] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Image rotation/ inversion selectable range). [31211] Failed in obtaining the button image (frontal image button). [31212] Failed in obtaining the button image (Left-right invert button). [31213] Failed in obtaining the button image (Up-sidedown invert button). [31214] Failed in obtaining the button image (180 degree rotation button).
Remarks
Restart the system. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-89
Event
Event Source
31215 FFCustomMsgBox 31218 FFCustomMsgBox
31219 FFCustomMsgBox 31220 FFCustomMsgBox 31225 FFCustomMsgBox
31226 FFCustomMsgBox
31227 FFCustomMsgBox 31232 FFCustomMsgBox
31235 FFCustomMsgBox 31236 FFCustomMsgBox 31241 FFCustomMsgBox
31242 FFCustomMsgBox 31243 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31215] Failed in obtaining the button image (90 degree rotation button). [31218] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Image format selectable range). [31219] Failed in obtaining the button image (SINGLE button). [31220] Failed in obtaining the button image (TWIN button). [31225] Failed in obtaining the connection characters to the film annotation database. [31226] Failed in connecting characters to the film annotation database. [31227] Failed in obtaining the information from the film annotation database. [31232] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (upper limit of No. of output film). [31235] Failed in obtaining the caption information (CS). [31236] Failed in obtaining the caption information (SS). [31241] Failed in creating thumbnail images with the image input subsystem. [31242] Failed in processing in image input subsystem. [31243] Image format information is illegal.
Causes
Remedies
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. - Software version A06 or earlier was used - Upgrade the software to version A07 or to enter an image from the 5000 plus later. Series. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs, - The system was unstable. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-90
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
31244 FFCustomMsgBox
[31244] Annotation information is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31245 FFCustomMsgBox
[31245] No. of output film information is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31246 FFCustomMsgBox
[31246] Distribution code information is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31247 FFCustomMsgBox
[31247] Image reading sensitivity is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31248 FFCustomMsgBox
[31248] Average output density is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31249 FFCustomMsgBox
[31249] EDR mode is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31250 FFCustomMsgBox
[31250] Image filing mode is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31251 FFCustomMsgBox
[31251] Function mode is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31252 FFCustomMsgBox
[31252] IP logical size information is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31253 FFCustomMsgBox
[31253] Contrast shift is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31254 FFCustomMsgBox
[31254] Sensitivity shift information is illegal.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31255 FFCustomMsgBox
[31255] There is a discrepancy between system setting and image information. [31256] There is a discrepancy between system setting and image information. [31257] There is a discrepancy between system setting and image information.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
31256 FFCustomMsgBox
31257 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required.
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-91
Event
Event Source
31258 FFCustomMsgBox
31259 FFCustomMsgBox 31260 FFCustomMsgBox 31261 FFCustomMsgBox 31262 FFCustomMsgBox 31265 FFCustomMsgBox 31266 FFCustomMsgBox 31267 FFCustomMsgBox 31268 FFCustomMsgBox 31269 FFCustomMsgBox 31270 FFCustomMsgBox 31272 FFCustomMsgBox
31273 FFCustomMsgBox 31274 FFCustomMsgBox 31277 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31258] There is a discrepancy between system setting and image information. [31259] Failed in obtaining the image invert/rotate information. [31260] Failed in setting the image format information.
Causes
Remedies
A value in the image file conflicted with a system setting.
Remarks
Since a standard setting will be used as a substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required.
It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination. was damaged. If the same symptom frequently recurs, perform a reinstallation. A value in the image file conflicted with a Since a standard setting will be used as a system setting. substitute to continue with the process, no particular response is required. [31261]Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination. the image format was damaged. If the same symptom frequently recurs, information. perform a reinstallation. [31262] Film annotation is The registered film mark contained an Correct the film mark setup with a user illegal. unacceptable character. utility. [31265] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (FIX). [31266] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (S value). [31267] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (SEMI-X). [31268] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (Density Ave) [31269] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the caption information damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (Density Average). [31270] Input value is The entered value contained an Make a proper entry. illegal. unacceptable character or was out of range or otherwise abnormal. [31272] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, the system setting damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. information (Function selectable range). [31273] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, function information. perform a reinstallation. [31274] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, No. of output film. perform a reinstallation. [31277] Failed in setting the The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, contrast shift. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-92
Event
Event Source
31278 FFCustomMsgBox 31279 FFCustomMsgBox 31280 FFCustomMsgBox 31281 FFCustomMsgBox 31282 FFCustomMsgBox 31284 FFCustomMsgBox
31285 FFCustomMsgBox 31288 FFCustomMsgBox 31290 FFCustomMsgBox 31291 FFCustomMsgBox
31292 FFCustomMsgBox
31293 FFCustomMsgBox
31294 FFCustomMsgBox 31295 FFCustomMsgBox 31296 FFCustomMsgBox 31303 FFCustomMsgBox 31304 FFCustomMsgBox 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31278] Failed in setting the sensitivity shift. [31279] Failed in setting the EDR mode information. [31280] Failed in setting the FIX mode S value. [31281] Failed in setting the SEMI-X mode average output density. [31282] Failed in QA starting process. [31284] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Filing mode selectable range). [31285] Failed in setting the image filing information. [31288] Failed in obtaining the distribution destination information. [31290] Failed in obtaining IP logical size information. [31291] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Distribution code change). [31292] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Film annotation change). [31293] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Function change). [31294] Failed in terminating process. [31295] Failed in terminating process. [31296] Failed in updating the list display. [31303] No list (Waiting for study) is selected. [31304] No list (Waiting for QA) is selected.
Causes
Remedies
The system was unstable.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable. The system was unstable. The system was unstable. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable. The system was unstable. It is highly probable that the program was faulty. It is highly probable that the program was faulty.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-93
Event
Event Source
31305 FFCustomMsgBox 31306 FFCustomMsgBox 31307 FFCustomMsgBox 31308 FFCustomMsgBox 31309 FFCustomMsgBox 31310 FFCustomMsgBox 31311 FFCustomMsgBox 31312 FFCustomMsgBox 31313 FFCustomMsgBox 31314 FFCustomMsgBox 31315 FFCustomMsgBox 31316 FFCustomMsgBox 31317 FFCustomMsgBox 31318 FFCustomMsgBox 31319 FFCustomMsgBox 31320 FFCustomMsgBox
31321 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31305] No list (Waiting for output) is selected. [31306] No list (Already output) is selected. [31307] No list (All) is selected. [31308] No list (Today) is selected. [31309] Failed in updating the list (Waiting for study) display. [31310] Failed in updating the list (Waiting for QA) display. [31311] Failed in updating the list (Waiting for output) display. [31312] Failed in updating the list (Already output) display. [31313] Failed in updating the list (All) display. [31314] Failed in updating the list (Today) display. [31315] No. of selected study is illegal. Study cannot be started. [31316] Failed in study starting process. [31317] No. of selected studies is illegal. QA cannot be started. [31318] Failed in QA starting process. [31319] Failed in QA starting process. [31320] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Operational mode after studying). [31321] Failed in obtaining the button image (Utility button).
Causes
Remedies
It is highly probable that the program was faulty. It is highly probable that the program was faulty. It is highly probable that the program was faulty. It is highly probable that the program was faulty. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Remarks
It is highly probable that the program was faulty. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is highly probable that the program was faulty. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-94
Event
Event Source
31322 FFCustomMsgBox 31323 FFCustomMsgBox 31324 FFCustomMsgBox 31329 FFCustomMsgBox
31330 FFCustomMsgBox
31331 FFCustomMsgBox 31332 FFCustomMsgBox 31333 FFCustomMsgBox 31334 FFCustomMsgBox 31335 FFCustomMsgBox 31336 FFCustomMsgBox 31337 FFCustomMsgBox
31339 FFCustomMsgBox
31340 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31322] Failed in obtaining the patient information. [31323] Date of birth could not be converted to the displaying format. [31324] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Stop alarm button). [31329] Message from the Image Reader could not be displayed. [31330] Failed in the obtaining the caption information (System Terminating button). [31331] Failed in obtaining the caption information (User Utility button). [31332] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Study list setting button). [31333] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Version displaying button). [31334] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Cancel button). [31335] Failed in obtaining the button image (Clear button). [31336] Failed in obtaining the tool tip information (Clear button). [31337] Failed in displaying the thumbnail images. [31339] Failed in executing the dust removing process starting method of the Image Reader. [31340] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Cancel button).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Illegal birth date information was set. Delete the associated examination. If the same symptom recurs after deletion, perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The RU software version conflicted with the message file version on the IIP side or the RU message file was damaged or otherwise abnormal. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Confirm software version and setups on the RU side. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The thumbnail image file was damaged, deleted, or otherwise abnormal. The RU is not ready for performing the method.
There are no processing problems except for the inability to display thumbnail images. If the same symptom frequently occurs, initialize the image database. Check the RU.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-95
Event
Event Source
31341 FFCustomMsgBox 31343 FFCustomMsgBox 31344 FFCustomMsgBox 31346 FFCustomMsgBox
31347 FFCustomMsgBox
31348 FFCustomMsgBox
31349 FFCustomMsgBox 31350 FFCustomMsgBox 31351 FFCustomMsgBox 31352 FFCustomMsgBox 31353 FFCustomMsgBox 31354 FFCustomMsgBox 31355 FFCustomMsgBox 31356 FFCustomMsgBox
31358 FFCustomMsgBox 31359 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31341] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Cancel button). [31343] Failed in inputting images. [31344] Image size could not be detected. [31346] Failed in obtaining the Image Reader error information.
Causes
Remedies
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that there was a problem with the RU or line. It is conceivable that there was a problem with the RU. The RU software version conflicted with the message file version on the IIP side or the RU message file was damaged or otherwise abnormal. [31347] Failed in obtaining The RU software version conflicted with the Image Reader status the message file version on the IIP side or information. the RU message file was damaged or otherwise abnormal. [31348] Failed in thumbnail The thumbnail image file was damaged, image creation process. deleted, or otherwise abnormal. [31349] Failed in displaying the list (Waiting for study). [31350] Failed in displaying the list (Waiting for QA). [31351] Failed in displaying the list (Waiting for output). [31352] Failed in displaying the list (Already output). [31353] Failed in displaying the list (All). [31354] Failed in displaying the list (Today). [31355] Failed in customizing the list display. [31356] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Default menu code). [31358] Failed in obtaining the tool tip text. [31359] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Title bar).
Remarks
Check the RU and line. Check the RU. Check the software version and setup on the RU side. Check the software version and setup on the RU side.
There are no processing problems except for the inability to display thumbnail images. If the same symptom frequently occurs, initialize the image database. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the system was If the same symptom recurs after a restart, unstable or that the program was faulty. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-96
Event
Event Source
31360 FFCustomMsgBox 31361 FFCustomMsgBox 31362 FFCustomMsgBox 31363 FFCustomMsgBox
31364 FFCustomMsgBox 31365 FFCustomMsgBox
31366 FFCustomMsgBox 31367 FFCustomMsgBox 31368 FFCustomMsgBox 31369 FFCustomMsgBox 31370 FFCustomMsgBox 31371 FFCustomMsgBox 31372 FFCustomMsgBox 31373 FFCustomMsgBox 31374 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31360] Failed in obtaining the caption information (Option label). [31361] Failed in obtaining the version information. [31362] Option list could not be obtained. [31363] Failed in obtaining the registry information (Next multiple frame set No.). [31364] Failed in setting the registry information (Next multi-frame set No.). [31365] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Series issuing type). [31366] Failed in obtaining the multi-frame UID information. [31367] Failed in obtaining the cassette insertion enabled image. [31368] Failed in obtaining the cassette insertion disabled image. [31369] Failed in obtaining the image icon (Misexposure). [31370] Failed in obtaining the button image (Image style button). [31371] Failed in obtaining the button image (EDR button). [31372] Failed in obtaining the button image (Function button). [31373] Failed in obtaining the button image (No. of output film button). [31374] Failed in obtaining the button image (IP size button).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-97
Event
Event Source
31375 FFCustomMsgBox 31376 FFCustomMsgBox 31377 FFCustomMsgBox 31378 FFCustomMsgBox 31379 FFCustomMsgBox 31380 FFCustomMsgBox
31381 FFCustomMsgBox 31382 FFCustomMsgBox 31386 FFCustomMsgBox 31387 FFCustomMsgBox 31388 FFCustomMsgBox 31390 FFCustomMsgBox 31391 FFCustomMsgBox 31392 FFCustomMsgBox 31393 FFCustomMsgBox 31394 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31375] Failed in obtaining the button image (Film format button). [31376] Failed in obtaining the button image (Filing button). [31377] Failed in obtaining the button image (Film annotation button). [31378] Failed in obtaining the button image (Distribution code button). [31379] Failed in obtaining the button image (CS/SS button). [31380] Failed in obtaining the system setting information (Serial port No. for connecting to XCON). [31381] Failed in obtaining the XCON device name. [31382] Image data line to the Image Reader(%s) has broken. [31386] Failed in obtaining the caption information. [31387] Failed in reading the bit-map file. [31388] Failed in obtaining the font information. [31390] The information about a requesting department was illegal. [31391] The information about a paramedic was illegal. [31392] A patient information search was unsuccessful. [31393] Failed in setting up connection status with the RIS. [31394] The line connected to the RIS was faulty.
Causes
Remedies
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The line was abnormal. Check the line. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the registry information was damaged or deleted. The entered information or its format was in error.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The entered information or its format was in error. Nothing matched the entered patient information.
Check the patient information.
This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check RIS-side status or RIS setup. or RIS setup problem. This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup. or RIS setup problem.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-98
Event
Event Source
31400 FFCustomMsgBox 31401 FFCustomMsgBox
31402 FFCustomMsgBox 31403 FFCustomMsgBox 31404 FFCustomMsgBox 31405 FFCustomMsgBox 31406 FFCustomMsgBox 31407 FFCustomMsgBox 31408 FFCustomMsgBox 31409 FFCustomMsgBox 31410 FFCustomMsgBox 31411 FFCustomMsgBox
31412 FFCustomMsgBox 31413 FFCustomMsgBox
31414 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31400]The selected menu did not exist. [31401] Path information (image data folder) acquisition was not successful. [31402] Parameter icon image acquisition was not successful. [31403] Caption information acquisition was not successful. [31404] Failed in communicating with other connected device. [31405] Failed in evacuating the IP. [31406] Failed in setting the IP. [31407] Failed in setting the exposure size. [31408] Failed in setting the reference position for exposure. [31409] No response comes from other connected device. [31410] There is no answer from the device that ID information is shared. [31411] A Study can’t register because the exposure menu registerd in IDT isn't registered in IIP. [31412] An image data line with the reader is cut off. [31413] There are some inconsistency in the IIP-RU connection setting of the system configuration. [31414] Failed in obtaining the caption information (RIS tab).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup. or RIS setup problem. It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the bitmap file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. This error is attributable to a problem with the connected equipment or connection setup. The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment, connection setup, and others.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
This error is attributable to an improperly registered menu.
Check the menu registration information.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The connection setup may be improper.
Check the connection setup.
The database file may be damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
Check the connected equipment.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-99
Event
Event Source
31415 FFCustomMsgBox 31416 FFCustomMsgBox 31417 FFCustomMsgBox 31418 FFCustomMsgBox 31419 FFCustomMsgBox
31420 FFCustomMsgBox 31422 FFCustomMsgBox 31423 FFCustomMsgBox
Description [31415] A communication error with RIS occurred. [31416] Some exposure menus couldn’t be registered. [31417] An exposure menu couldn’t be registered. [31418] Failed in the reference of the reader device. [31419] The exposure condition values to be sent to the X-ray apparatus was over the limit. [31420] A failure occurred in the communication with the RIS. [31422] Failed in registering the study to the patient information database. [31423] Failed in image stitching processing.
Causes
Remedies
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Remarks
Check the connected equipment.
This error is attributable to an improperly Check the settings. set menu parameter or other setup failure. This error is attributable to an improperly Check the settings. set menu parameter or other setup failure. The connection setup may be faulty. Check the connection setup. The XCON settings (limit values) were inconsistent with the exposure condition preset values for the menus.
There is no practical problem because the limit values are transferred to the XCON.
It is conceivable that the connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment.
The patient information database operation Restart. If the same symptom recurs, was wrong. perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Ensure that only period is used as a symbol representing a decimal point for values to be set in “OS Settings - Regional Options”. If any symbol other than a period is used, correct it appropriately. For details of how to perform settings, see the section concerned in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”. For Windows 2000 “ Defining the character to be used as a decimal point” in “2.1.3 Setting the OS” For Windows XP “ Defining the character to be used as a decimal point” in “2.2.3 Setting the OS”
31424 FFCustomMsgBox 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
[31424] Failed in saving the The system was unstable. exposure result information.
For Windows Vista “ Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol (other than Japanese)” in “2.3.4 Setting the OS”. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-100
Event
Event Source
31425 FFCustomMsgBox
31426 FFCustomMsgBox 31427 FFCustomMsgBox 31428 FFCustomMsgBox 31429 FFCustomMsgBox 31430 FFCustomMsgBox 31431 FFCustomMsgBox 31441 FFCustomMsgBox
31444 FFCustomMsgBox
31445 FFCustomMsgBox
31446 FFCustomMsgBox
31456 FFCustomMsgBox
31457 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31425] Failed in setting actual exposure result value.
Causes
Remedies
Invalid characters were used for the performed procedure step description, protocol name, or filter type. The radiation source-to-detector distance or radiation time did not consist of numerals only. The film output count or film size ID was out of range. [31426] Failed in acquiring Settings may have been corrupted. coloring information. [31427] Failed in image The system was unstable. distribution processing. [31428] Failed in displaying The system was unstable. the study information list. [31429] Failed in setting The system was unstable. patient information. [31430] Failed in acquiring The system was unstable. patient information. [31431] Failed in acquiring The bitmap file may have been damaged image (background). or deleted. [31441] Failed in acquiring It is conceivable that the file was damaged parameters used for or deleted. It is also conceivable that the displaying mammography database file was damaged or deleted. images. [31444] Illegal information Polling to the shared folder with the receipt received from the outside. computer resulted in a failure.
Remarks
No remedial action is needed because the process will be continuously performed with the invalid settings replaced with the standard ones.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the content of the study received from the receipt computer does not match the CR Console setting. Check the connection setting and the system setting. [31445] Illegal information The patient cannot be registered because Check to see that characters prohibited to received from the outside. of a format error that occurred with the text use on the CR Console are not included in received from the Fujitsu receipt computer. the transmitted information. Retransmit then the study from the receipt computer, as necessary. [31446] An error occurred A study transmitted from the receipt Check to see that characters prohibited to for connection with the computer cannot be registered. use on the CR Console are not included in equipment. the transmitted information. Retransmit then the study from the receipt computer, as necessary. [31456] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section the caption information or deleted. perform a reinstallation. (Preview confirmation message). [31457] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs, ID input section the first page of the or deleted. perform a reinstallation. exposure guidance.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-101
Event
Event Source
31458 FFCustomMsgBox 31459 FFCustomMsgBox 31460 FFCustomMsgBox 31461 FFCustomMsgBox 31462 FFCustomMsgBox 31850 FFCustomMsgBox 31851 FFCustomMsgBox 31852 FFCustomMsgBox 31853 FFCustomMsgBox 31854 FFCustomMsgBox 31855 FFCustomMsgBox 31856 FFCustomMsgBox 32001 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [31458] Failed in starting up the exposure guidance. [31459] Failed in initializing the exposure guidance. [31460] Failed in initialization of dose-area product meter. [31461] Failed in initialization of dose-area product meter. [31462] Failed in dose acquisition from dose-area product meter. [31850] Failed in communicating with X-ray equipment. [31851] Failed in registering a reserved study. [31852] Failed in starting a reserved study. [31853] An error occurred with connection to the equipment. [31854] Failed in searching a reserved study. [31855] Received illegal information from the outside. [31856] Received illegal information from the outside. [32001] The card type is not acceptable.
Causes
Remedies
The file may have been damaged or deleted. The system was unstable. A connected device may have a problem.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check status of the connected device.
ID input section ID input section ID input section
A connected device may have a problem.
Check status of the connected device, and ID input section press the “Retry” button as required.
A connected device may have a problem.
Check status of the connected device.
It is conceivable that the connected equipment may have a problem or the network may be unstable. The system is unstable.
Check status of the connected equipment.
ID input section
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system.
The system is unstable. The system is unstable. The system is unstable. It is conceivable that the connected equipment may have transmitted illegal information. It is conceivable that the connected equipment may have transmitted illegal information. The employed card type did not agree with the card type defined by the system setup data.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, reinstall the system. Check information transmitted from the connected equipment. Check information transmitted from the connected equipment. Check both the system settings and employed card type.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-102
Event
Event Source
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Initialize warning. [Detailed A warning-level error occurred in an image Check whether the SQL service manager error information 32001 35 database initialization process. The is normally operating. If the same symptom items] common probable causes are as follows: occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image • An abnormality occurred when the image database (the entire image data is then database was accessed. deleted). • An abnormality occurred when an information file was accessed. • An abnormality occurred when an image file was created or referenced for image file recovery. • The contents of the image database or information file were illegal. • An unrecoverable image file was encountered. DICOM SCP was Not found DICOM SCP is not defined in the Check whether the SQL service manager in NetConfigDB. NetConfigDB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). DICOM SCP control status Failed in starting the DICOM SCP control. Check whether the SQL service manager error. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). DDO file load error. Failed in reading the information file (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). DDO file save error. Failed in storing the information file. (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Size code was not found in There is no size code in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager DDO. (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-103
Event
Event Source
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
RecordID was not found in There is no record ID in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager DDO. (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). HQ file was not found in There is no HQ image file in the information Check whether the SQL service manager DDO. file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Std file was not found in There is no standard image file name in Check whether the SQL service manager DDO. the information file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Image size was not found There is no image size in the information Check whether the SQL service manager in DDO. file (DDO). is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Image sizecode error. Illegal image size cede. Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Std file make error. Standard image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager error. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Thumb file make error. Thumbnail image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager error. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). FoeEDR file make error. Reduced image generation processing Check whether the SQL service manager error. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-104
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Moire control error.
Standard image generation processing error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Thumb control error.
Thumbnail image generation processing error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ForEDR control error.
Reduced image generation processing error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDR process error.
EDR processing error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Jpeg control error.
JPEG processing error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
InfoFileURL was not found The InfoFileURL field cannot be found in in ImageDB. the image DB.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
InfoFile was “EMPTY” in ImageDB.
The InfoFileURL field in the image DB is “EMPTY”.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
StdImageFileURL was not found in ImageDB.
The StdImageFileURL field cannot be found in the image DB.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-105
Event
Event Source
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
ThmImageFileURL was not The ThmImageFileURL field cannot be found in ImageDB. found in the image DB.
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). MaskImageFileURL was The MaskImageFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager not found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). EDRBackupFileURL was The EDRBackupFileURL field cannot be Check whether the SQL service manager not found in ImageDB. found in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). StdImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the standard image Check whether the SQL service manager in ImageDB. file name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). ThmImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the thumbnail image Check whether the SQL service manager in ImageDB. file name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). MaskImageFileURL set Failed in registering the reduced image file Check whether the SQL service manager error in ImageDB. name in the image DB. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). ImageDB Image DB access error. Check whether the SQL service manager access(get_Fields) error. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). ImageDB access error. Image DB access error. Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-106
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
UpdateCloseRec error.
Image DB access error.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Create file error.
Failed in creating a file.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File open error.
Failed in opening a file.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File close error.
Failed in closing a file.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File read error.
Failed in reading a file.
32001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File write error.
Failed in writing a file.
32001 FFInImgMonitorCtrl
Initialize warning.%n[%1]
A warning-level error occurred during initialization processing. A warning-level error occurred during initialization processing. A simple read error occurred or the problem might have been caused by damaged contents of a card or a broken magnetic card reader. A warning-level error was found in information file data.
32001 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Initialize warning.%n[%1] 32002 FFCustomMsgBox
[32002] Failed in reading the card.
32002 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Data not found.(warning) [Detailed error information 32002 1 item]
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check whether the SQL service manager is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Nothing particular. (Processing was continued.) Nothing particular. (Processing was continued.) Read the card again. If the same symptom recurs, check the contents of the card and the magnetic card reader. Nothing in particular. (The data found abnormal was replaced by the default value to continue with the process.)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-107
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
32002 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Data not found.
There is no data in the information file (DDO).
32002 FFInImgMonitorCtrl
Data not found.(warning) %n[%1]
A warning-level error was detected in the information file data.
32002 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Data not found.(warning)
A warning-level error was detected in the information file data.
32003 FFInImgMonitorCtrl
A process request was issued while an initialization or termination process was being performed. Image display request method execution timing error after ID information was changed. A warning-level error occurred during method processing.
%n[%1]
32003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 32003 FFInImgMonitorCtrl
Status warning. [Detailed error information 32003 1 item] Status error.(IDInfoChange method) Status warning.%n[%1]
32003 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Status warning.%n[%1] 32012 FFCustomMsgBox 32015 FFCustomMsgBox 32040 FFCustomMsgBox
32041 FFCustomMsgBox
32042 FFCustomMsgBox 34001 FFCustomMsgBox 34002 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
[32012] Illegal information has been detected in the patient information. [32015] Failed in reading the IP#. [32040] The number of studies exceeds the maximum number of transmissions. Unable to transmit. [32041] Information in received study is invalid. Unable to receive the study result. [32042] Failed in calculating EI or DI.
Remarks
Nothing in particular. (The data found abnormal was replaced by the default value to continue with the process.) Nothing particular. (The error data was replaced by the default value and processing was continued.) Nothing particular. (The error data was replaced by the default value and processing was continued.) Nothing in particular. (The process request was rejected.) Nothing in particular. (Processing requested was rejected.)
Nothing particular. (The error data was replaced by the default value and processing was continued.) A warning-level error occurred during Nothing particular. (The error data was method processing. replaced by the default value and processing was continued.) The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the card. an invalid character contained in the contents of the card. The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the barcode. an incompatible barcode format. The number of studies to be sent to the Decrease the number of studies to be sent PDA exceeded the maximum limit. to the PDA.
Actual results of studies already subjected Check both the PDA and CL studies. to exposure were received from the PDA.
The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid. The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal (reading error or correction error). [34001] The same patient The card read was about the patient whose information has been input. examination was being conducted. [34002] A certain The last examination was ended abruptly examination finished before during an image read process (due, for the completion of an image instance, to a power failure). read.
Reperform exposure. Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file. This dialog box merely opens to attract the user’s attention. No particular response is required. Check information sent by the connected device.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-108
Event
Event Source
34084 FFCustomMsgBox
34085 FFCustomMsgBox 34091 FFCustomMsgBox 34092 FFCustomMsgBox 34094 FFCustomMsgBox 34095 FFCustomMsgBox 34096 FFCustomMsgBox
34097 FFCustomMsgBox 34098 FFCustomMsgBox 34107 FFCustomMsgBox
34109 FFCustomMsgBox 34112 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[34084] Illegal information was transmitted from the RIS.
Illegal information was received from the RIS. Information of the started study includes the one that is not allowed for the CR Console. [34085] Communication A connected device may have a problem with the RIS was disabled. or the network can be unstable. [34091] An unknown error An error of unknown cause occurred with occurred in an attempt to the connection to the Toshiba RIS. connect to the RIS. [34092] A failure occurred The system was unstable. when starting the ordered study. [34094] A failure occurred An attempt to inform the RIS of the when notifying the RIS of changed technologist resulted in a failure. the changed technologist. [34095] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at startup of in communication with the an ordered study resulted in a failure. RIS at startup of a study. [34096] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at the end of in communication with the an order study resulted in a failure. RIS when finishing a study.
[34097] A failure occurred when changing the RIS user. [34098] Failed in communicating with other connected device. [34107] Do you wish to delete markers and execute the operation?
The system was unstable. Display of RIS view screen was disabled. When rotating a marker-specified image, determine whether or not to delete the markers.
Remarks
Correct the information properly and then restart the study from the RIS.
Reconnect. If the same symptom recurs, check status of the connected device. Restart. Restart. Determine the same technologist both for the RIS and the CR Console. Stop the study exposure started via the Toshiba RIS and then restart it. Confirm the actual exposure result. If information of the actual exposure result is not reflected appropriately on the data, input it on the RIS screen. If the same symptom remains, restart the relevant system. Match technologist registration information of this equipment with that of the connected device. Restart the relevant system. If the same symptom remains, check settings for connection of the connected device. When the [Yes] button is pressed, the ID input section markers are deleted and the image with no markers is rotated. When the [No] button is pressed, the image is rotated without deleting the markers. Re-perform image stitching. ID input section
[34109] Images were input This error message is issued if the 3rd during the preview display. image is input while 2 stitched images are being previewed. [34112] One of the target Image stitching was performed while 1 of Re-perform image stitching after the ID input section menus for stitching is in the 2 menus targeted for stitching completion of image input in the menu that progress. processing was being processed. is in process.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-109
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
34310 FFCustomMsgBox
[34310] Patient information Patient information of the same patient ID of the same patient ID number has been changed. number has been changed.
34842 FFCustomMsgBox 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
[34842] Incorrect password. Input password data is incorrect.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Memory allocate error. [E1027] Socket recv buffer.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Pantomo work buffer.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImgReadProcess memory allocate error. Memory allocate error.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Memory Exception error.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Disp Qeue param.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Read qeue param.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ReadThread main param.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
JpegThread main param.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image Data area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image Time area.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
DICOMDataObj set data area. EDR data.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDR out data.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Disp image data.
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl
GammaTable(LUT) area.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
SkGp Image area.
Pressing the “YES” button will overwrite the patient information to continue necessary processing. Press the “NO” button to continue processing without overwriting the patient information. To suspend processing, press the “Cancel” button. Input a correct password.
Sufficient memory was not available to the system. Failed in acquiring the socket reception buffer. Failed in acquiring the pantomography reading buffer. Failed in memory acquisition.
Restart.
Failed in memory acquisition.
Restart.
An exception generated when acquiring memory. Failed in acquiring an image display queue. Failed in acquiring an image reading queue. Failed in acquiring image input thread parameters. Failed in acquiring JPEG compression thread parameters. Failed in acquiring image reading date area. Failed in acquiring image reading time area. Failed in acquiring information file (DDO) setup memory area. Failed in acquiring EDR image separation processing area. Failed in acquiring EDR image separation processing area. Image display area.
Restart.
Failed in acquiring image area after normalization processing. Failed in acquiring the γ processing table.
Restart.
Remarks ID input section
Restart. Restart. Restart.
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-110
Event
Event Source
39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39001 FFRUInpImgMgr 39001 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39002 FFRUInpImgMgr 39002 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Beta param area.
Causes
Remedies
Failed in acquiring the β processing parameter area. DRC param area. Failed in acquiring the DRC processing parameter area. MFP-DRC param area. Failed in acquiring the MFP-DRC processing parameter area. MFP-USM param area. Failed in acquiring the MFP-USM processing parameter area. Initialization failed. %n[%1] The initialization process was not successfully performed. Memory allocate error. System memory was insufficient. %n[%1] The system was unstable. Message post/get error. [Detailed error information 39002 5 items] PostThreadMessage (%s) Failed in (%s) message transmission while error. in image input processing. PostMessage error. Failed in message transmission while in image input processing. GetMessage (%s) error. Failed in (%s) message reception while in image input processing. GetMessage error. Failed in message reception while in image input processing. Post/Get Message error. Failed in message transmission/reception while in image input processing. Finalize Failed. %n[%1] The finalization process was not successfully performed. Message post/get error. The system was unstable. %n[%1] IIPInImg control error. An abnormality was found in the IIP input [Detailed error information image process. 39003 19 items ] Get DispatchID error. Failed in setting DICOM SCP control Property = %s properties (%s). Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in setting DICOM SCP control properties (%s). Get DispatchID error. Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control Property = %s properties (%s). Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control properties (%s). Get DispatchID error. Failed in performing the DICOM SCP Method = %s control method (%s).
Remarks
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-111
Event
Event Source
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Description
Remedies
Invoke error. Method = %s Failed in performing the DICOM SCP control method (%s). DispQeue was full. Failed in registering an image display queue. DispQeue status error. Failed in registering an image display queue (illegal status). Thumbnail image disp Failed in displaying a pre-reading image. error. EDR/ID image disp error. Failed in displaying a processed image. Data not found.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image File Path get error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File name set error.(%s)
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
JPEG Thread error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image process error(%s).
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Input image control error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
File type error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Img type error.
39003 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Exception error.
39003 FFRUInpImgMgr 39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Invalid Status. %n[%1]
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Disp control(%s Method) error. EDR control (%s) error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Causes
CR-Image control error. [Detailed error information 39004 13 items]
The relevant menu code cannot be found in the image processing parameters. Failed in acquiring the directory path name of the image file. Failed in setting the (%s) file name in the information file (DDO). Failed in creating a JPEG compression thread. Failed in starting the image processing control. Internal discrepancy found during input image processing. Internal discrepancy found during input image processing. Internal discrepancy found during input image processing. An exception found during input image processing. The status was invalid. An abnormal end was found in an image file creation process or image display process. The problem is attributable to a disk. Image display processing error (method name: %s). Error occurred during EDR processing (processing ID:%s). Error occurred during EDR processing.
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
Restart. Restart.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDR process error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
HQ file create error.(%s)
Error occurred during reduced image Restart. creation processing. Failed in creating an HQ image file (file ID). Restart.
Image Jpeg-compress error.
Error occurred during JPEG compression processing.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
ForEDR control error.
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-112
Event
Event Source
Description
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image process error.(%s)
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image sizecode error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB/DDO access error.(%s) Jpeg control (%s) error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Miore control error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
SkGp control (%s) error.
39004 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Thumbnail control error.
39004 FFRUInpImgMgr
Thread Invoke failed. %n[%1] CR-Image control error. %n[%1] Pipe error. [Detailed error information 39005 1 item ] Pipe create error.(%s)
39004 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39005 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39005 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39005 FFRUInpImgMgr 39005 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39006 39006 39006 39006
Socket Access Failed. %n[%1] Pipe error. %n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Failed in starting the image processing control. (Internal processing name: %s) Illegal image size code.
Restart.
Error occurred in access to the image DB or information file (DDO). Error occurred during JPEG processing (processing ID: %s). Error occurred during standard image creating processing. Error occurred during normalization processing. (Processing ID:%s) Error occurred during thumbnail image creating processing. Thread creation was not successfully completed. An error was detected during image processing. The system remains unstable.
Restart.
Restart.
Failed in creating a pipe. (Pipe type: %s)
Restart.
A socket communication error occurred.
Check the network status and then restart the system. Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart.
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
File error. [Detailed error The system remains unstable. information 39006 7 items] File error. Failed in accessing the file.
Restart.
File error(%s).
Restart.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
Create file error.
Failed in accessing the file. (Processing type.) Failed in file creation processing.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
CreateFileMapping error.
Failed in file mapping processing.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
MapViewOfFile error.
Failed in file mapping processing.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDRImageFile mapping error. File mapping error.
Failed in mapping the reduced image file before EDR processing. Failed in file mapping processing.
Restart.
System Function Call Failed. %n[%1] File error.%n[%1]
An error was returned by a system call (Win32 API, etc.). The system was unstable.
Restart.
Data not found.(error) [Detailed error information 39007 3 items]
The data in the image database or information file was abnormal.
39006 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39006 FFRUInpImgMgr 39006 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart. Make an exposure again. If the error recurs, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-113
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Data not found. / DDO Data The relevant VR cannot be found in the not found. information file (DDO).
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Data not found.(%s) / DDO The relevant data cannot be found in the Data not found.(%s) information file (DDO).
39007 FFIIPInImgCtrl
%s GetVR error.
Failed in acquiring VR shown by %s.
39007 FFRUInpImgMgr
Invalid data was received from the RU.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Invalid Receive Data. %n[%1] Data not found.(error) %n[%1] DB access error. [Detailed error information 39008 19 items] ImageDB key get error.
Image DB key name acquisition error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB connect error.
Image DB connection error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Image DB open error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB OpenRecordset error. ImageDB get_Fields error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB get_Item error.
Image DB viewing error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB get_Value error.
Image DB viewing error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB put_Value error. Data:%s ImageDB SetValue error.(%s) ImageDB (%s) set error.
Image DB setup error.
DICOM&ImageDB data set error. ImageDB UpdateRecordset error. ImageDB CloseRecordset error. ImageDB close error.
Image DB setup error.
39007 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Make an exposure again. If the error recurs, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Make an exposure again. If the error recurs, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Make an exposure again. If the error recurs, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Check the connection to the RU.
There is an error in the image database/ Restart. information file data. An abnormality occurred when a database Restart. If the same symptom frequently was accessed. occurs, perform a reinstallation.
Image DB viewing error.
Image DB setup error. Image DB setup error.
Image DB update error. Image DB close error. Image DB close error.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-114
Event
Event Source
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Description
Causes
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB: ReceiveFlag set ReceiveFlag setup error. error. ImageDB access error. Image DB access error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB access(%s) error. Image DB access error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
ImageDB access error.(%s) Image DB access error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
SysConfig DB access error. SysConfig DB access error.
39008 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Net Config DB access error. Insufficient memory. %n[%1] DB access error.%n[%1]
39008 FFIIPInImgMgr 39008 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39009 FFIIPInImgMgr 39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl 39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Socket access error. [Detailed error information 39009 5 items] Socket error.
Remedies
NetConfig DB access error. The available memory was insufficient.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
An error occurred with accessing to several Restart. databases. The problem is attributable to a Check the connection to the RU. disconnected RU or the like.
Error occurred during socket generation termination processing. Socket connect error. Error occurred during socket connection processing. Socket close error. Error occurred during socket disconnection processing. Socket recv error. Error occurred while receiving data from the socket. Socket recv time out. Timeout detected while receiving data from the socket. Create Dicom Data Object Data object creation was not successfully Failed. %n[%1] completed. DICOMDataObj data area. An exception occurred when accessing to the information file (DDO). Exception error. Exception handling was done. [Detailed error information 39010 5 items] Exception error. Property = An exception occurred when setting %s DICOM SCP control properties (%s). Exception error. Method = An exception occurred when performing %s the DICOM SCP control method (%s). Exception error. / Exception An exception occurred. (Processing type.) error.(%s)
Check the connection to the RU. Check the connection to the RU. Check the connection to the RU. Check the connection to the RU. Check the connection to the RU. Restart. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-115
Event
Event Source
Description
39010 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Memory Exception error.
39010 FFIIPInImgMgr
Input Image Operation is Busy. %n[%1]
Exception error.%n[%1] 39010 FFInImgMonitorCtrl 39010 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Exception error.%n[%1] [39035] Unable to obtain 39035 FFCustomMsgBox
39044 FFCustomMsgBox 39045 FFCustomMsgBox
39901 FFInitializingStudy 39902 FFInitializingStudy 40001 FFCustomMsgBox 40002 FFCustomMsgBox 40200 FFQAMsgBox
40201 FFQAMsgBox 40202 FFQAMsgBox
40203 FFQAMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
study UID from the list (worklist). [39044] No list has been selected. [39045] Failed in image input processing.
[%1] An exception error occurred(%2). [%1] %2. [40001] An error of unknown cause occurred. [40002] A communication error with Ascent View occurred. Process Communication Control Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Journal Proc Failure. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] CustomMessageCtrl Access Failure. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Image DB Access Control Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
An exception occurred while acquiring memory. The disk was full or the connection limit was exceeded by the input request (busy state). An exceptional error occurred.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. This is not an operating error. Wait a while and then input again.
An exceptional error occurred.
Restart.
Information coming from the RIS may not include study UID.
Include study UID in the information that comes from the RIS.
Restart.
There may be a problem on the connection Check the connection device status. device side. A failure occurred in an attempt to acquire Restart the system. If the same failure an image from the Image Reader. recurs, restart both the Image Reader and the system. Restarting the Image Reader disables image retransmission from it to the system. If the same error recurs even after restarting the Image Reader, contact our maintenance personnel. An exception error occurred. Restart. An error occurred.
Restart.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
An error occurred in the communication with Ascent View.
Communication error with the linkage application
Restart. The method return value for the interprocess communication control resulted in an error. The method return value for the log save control resulted in an error.
Restart.
The return value for the custom message box control resulted in an error.
Restart.
The method return value for the image database access control resulted in an error.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-116
Event
Event Source
40204 FFQAMsgBox
40205 FFQAMsgBox
40206 FFQAMsgBox
40207 FFQAMsgBox 40208 FFQAMsgBox
40209 FFQAMsgBox 40210 FFQAMsgBox
40211 FFQAMsgBox
41001 FFCustomMsgBox
Description Media DB Access Control Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Process Communication API Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] SysConfig DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] LangStr DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] LangMsgBox DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Flag DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Return value of a ImgDeliveryCom makes an error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] NetConfig DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code]
41106 FFCustomMsgBox
[41001] The device is not ready. [41002] Remaining capacity is insufficient. [41003] Destination for file copy is illegal. [41004] E-mail program cannot be started. [41005] No data cannot be written on the disk. [41106] Hard Disk Full.
41107 FFCustomMsgBo
[41107] Hard Disk Full.
41002 FFCustomMsgBox 41003 FFCustomMsgBox 41004 FFCustomMsgBox 41005 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The method return value for the media database access control resulted in an error.
Remarks
Restart.
The method return value for the interRestart. process communication API resulted in an error. An error occurred with connection/ disconnection/value acquisition/value setup for the system setup database access API. An error occurred with connection/ disconnection of the character string database access API. An error occurred with connection/ disconnection of the message box database access API.
Restart.
Restart. Restart.
An error occurred with connection/value Restart. acquisition/value setup/disconnection of the flag database access. The method return value for the image Restart. distribution instruction component resulted in an error. An error occurred with connection/ disconnection/value acquisition/value setup for the network setup database (irreplaceable). No media was set in position.
Restart.
The file to be copied was too large to fit onto the media at the receiving end. An invalid pathname was specified as the file copy destination. Outlook was not properly set up.
Set media that is appropriate for the device. Switch to larger-capacity media. Check the system setup. Exit IIP and then complete Outlook setup.
The disk was write-protected or damaged. Check the disk. The hard disk was full. The hard disk was full.
Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from the list, and retry the distribution. Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from the list, and retry the distribution.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-117
Event
Event Source
41108 FFCustomMsgBox 41109 FFCustomMsgBox 41110 FFCustomMsgBox 41111 FFCustomMsgBox 41112 FFCustomMsgBox 41113 FFCustomMsgBox 41114 FFCustomMsgBox 41115 FFCustomMsgBox 41116 FFCustomMsgBox 41117 FFCustomMsgBox 41118 FFCustomMsgBox 41119 FFCustomMsgBox 41120 FFCustomMsgBox 41130 FFCustomMsgBox 41131 FFCustomMsgBox 41140 FFCustomMsgBox 41141 FFCustomMsgBox 41150 FFCustomMsgBox 41151 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [41108] Failed in reading the LUT file for JPEG Image. [41109] A menu of a different modality has been selected. [41110] Failed in access to the image database. [41111] Failed in access to the image database. [41112] Failed in access to the image database. [41113] Failed in access to the image file. [41114] Failed in saving the information. [41115] Failed in access to the image file. [41116] Failed in saving the information. [41117] Failed in saving the information. [41118] Failed in image output processing. [41119] Failed in QA startup processing. [41120] Failed in access to the image file. [41130] Failed in replacing an image. [41131] Study information cannot be modified. [41140] The function cannot be implemented. [41141] An error occurred.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
No JPEG image gradation correction file is Check the correction file. available or the format is illegal. A menu of a different modality was selected.
Select a menu of the same modality.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check targets involved in the shared host.
It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that QA processing was performed on other equipment. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. The system was unstable.
Check other equipment or perform another study. Check targets involved in the shared host. Check targets involved in the shared host. Check targets involved in the shared host. Check targets involved in the shared host. Check targets involved in the shared host. Check targets involved in the shared host. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check targets involved in the shared host.
It is conceivable that the shared host has not been started. No extension menus have been registered. Check menu registration information.
It is conceivable that system settings for Check the settings. the study # and ID # have been changed. A function that was called up did not match Check the customized settings. the optional system settings. The system was unstable. Reinstall the program if the same symptom recurs after restarting the equipment. [41150] Failed in file output A failure occurred in accessing the Restart. If the same symptom recurs, processing. transmission file. The system may have perform a reinstallation. been unstable. [41151] There is no free The hard disk was full. Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary space on the hard disk. images from the list, and retry output processing.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-118
Event
Event Source
41152 FFCustomMsgBox 41200 FFQAMsgBox 41201 FFQAMsgBox
41202 FFQAMsgBox 41203 FFQAMsgBox
41210 FFQAMsgBox
42200 FFQAMsgBox
42201 FFQAMsgBox
42202 FFQAMsgBox
42203 FFQAMsgBox
42204 FFQAMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [41152] Free space is insufficient on the destination for output. HDD FULL. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] The specified path does not exist. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Media are not ready. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] The capacity of copy place media is insufficient. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Return value of a ImgDeliveryCom makes an error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Can’t Get Bitmap (Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] CustomMessageCtrl Access Failure(Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] SysConfig DB Access Failure(Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] LangStr DB Access Failure(Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] LangMsgBox DB Access Failure(Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code]
Causes
Remedies
The hard disk was full.
Remarks
Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary images from the list, and retry output processing. Increase the free hard disk space and then retry operation.
The hard disk was full. The specified path was not found.
Check path settings.
No media was ready.
Check the media status.
The capacity of the media targeted for copy was insufficient.
Replace the media for anyone of larger capacity.
The method return value for the image Check the destination for image distribution distribution instruction component resulted and then retry. in an error. (Processing other than image distribution can be continued.) Failed in acquiring a bitmap (replaceable). Reinstall the program.
The return value for the custom message box control resulted in an error.
Reinstall the program.
An error occurred when obtaining a system Reinstall the program. setup database access API value or the obtained value was illegal (replaceable). An error occurred when obtaining a character string database access API value (replaceable).
Reinstall the program.
The return value for the message box database access API resulted in an error.
Reinstall the program.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-119
Event
Event Source
42205 FFQAMsgBox
42206 FFQAMsgBox
42207 FFQAMsgBox
42209 FFQAMsgBox
42210 FFQAMsgBox
42211 FFQAMsgBox
42212 FFQAMsgBox 42214 FFQAMsgBox
42299 FFQAMsgBox 43000 FFQAManagerCom 43010 FFIIPInImgCtrl 43010 FFQAManagerCom
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
FF32 Access Failure The return value for the FF32 library (FF32. (Probably acquisition of dll) resulted in an error. Registry goes wrong.) [File Name] [Function Name] * When acquiring an optional key registry, [Error Code] no error will be registered even if no key is available. Tag Information Access No tag information was set up though it Failure(Processing must have been set up beforehand continuation). (replaceable). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] NetConfig DB Access An error occurred when obtaining a Failure(Processing network setup database value or obtained continuation). value was not correct (replaceable). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] FF32 Access Failure Failed in obtaining/setting an FF32 library (Processing continuation). value (replaceable). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Invalid function ID Number. An illegal function ID (disregard). (Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Data is not found in No custom setup database registered CustomScreenDB. (processing can be continued). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] LogFile Access Failure. Failed in accessing the log file. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] The amount of adjustments The amount of position adjustment is set to is 0. 0 (zero). [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Data resource access error. A clustering resource access error [File Name] [Function Name] (processing can be continued). [Error Code] %S Information for development personnel.
Reinstall the program.
Can’t Get FontSize Information. Can’t Get FontSize Information.
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted.
The font size was not registered in the registry. The font size was not registered in the registry.
Remarks
Use default information for processing. There is no operational problem.
Reinstall the program.
Reinstall the program.
There is no operational problem.
Register custom setup database using the customization setting displayed on the User Utility window. Reinstall the program. Manually adjust the positioning amount from the trimming dialog. Check network connection status. There are operational problems.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
A character string is placed in the “%S” position.
Appx1 MT-120
Event
Event Source
43020 FFIIPInImgCtrl 43060 FFQAManagerCom 43061 FFQAManagerCom 43062 FFQAManagerCom 43063 FFQAManagerCom 43064 FFQAManagerCom 43110 FFIIPInImgCtrl 43201 FFIIPQACtrl
43301 FFQAManagerCom 43310 FFQAManagerCom 44200 FFQAMsgBox 44201 FFQAMsgBox
44262 FFCustomMsgBox
44263 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Can’t Get Caption Information. [Control: %1, Function: %2 , Code: %3] [Control: %1, Function: %2 , Code: %3] [Control: %1, Function: %2 , Code: %3] [Control: %1, Function: %2 , Code: %3] [Control: %1, Function: %2 , Code: %3] Can’t Access Local Configuration Data. Focus Set Failure.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The character string database did not exist or was damaged. The language setup data was not obtained.
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed characters can be corrupted. The focus cannot be determined properly. There is no particular problem with operations. (The focus cannot be determined properly because the annotation character input dialog has been inactivated.) After shutting the magnification function, input of annotation characters becomes possible. [Control: %1, The screen size was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed Function: %2 , Code: %3] characters can be corrupted. [Control: %1, The language setup data was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed Function: %2 , Code: %3] characters can be corrupted. Journal Proc Failure. The method return value for the log Restart the system. [File Name] [Function Name] storage control resulted in an error. [Error Code] An unexpected Method An unexpected method call (called up at Restart the system. call. an impossible timing, being possible [File Name] [Function Name] though to continue processing). [Error Code] [44262] The maximum Automatic marker setting was attempted Delete unnecessary markers so that there QA section settable number of on an image where the number of are 4 or less, and reperform the setting. automatic markers automatic markers allowed for one exceeded. exposure menu was exceeded. [44263] Do you wish to The image was rotated/flipped with Press the [Yes] button to delete the QA section delete markers and execute markers determined on it. markers so that the image is rotated/flipped the operation? appropriately. Press the [No] button to rotate/flip the image without deleting the markers.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-121
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
44266 FFCustomMsgBox
[44266] Markers are not being selected.
44267 FFCustomMsgBox
Press the [Yes] button to determine image makers for the exposure menu as the automatic markers. Press the [No] button not to perform the setting of automatic markers. [44268] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was Press the [Yes] button to delete already will be registered. performed for an exposure menu for which registered automatic markers and automatic markers have already been determine image markers as the automatic determined. markers. Press the [No] button not to make any changes in the setting of the automatic markers. [44269] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed Perform automatic marker setting on cannot be set up. on an image retrieved from media. images input from the Image Reader. [44270] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed Perform automatic marker setting on cannot be set up. on an image retrieved from external images input from the Image Reader. device. [44354] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. has been input in ID #. instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. [44355] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. has been input in Study #. instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. [44356] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. has been input in patient instance, to the inclusion of an name. unacceptable character. [44357] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. has been input in kanjiinstance, to the inclusion of an patient name. unacceptable character. [44358] Invalid character The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. has been input in the sex instance, to the inclusion of an (gender). unacceptable character. [44359] Format of date of The entry did not agree with the date Make a proper entry. birth is not applicable. format defined by system setup. [44360] The same study An attempt was made to enter an Enter another number. No. already exists. examination number that was already used. [44361] Anatomical region An anatomical region name was not Make a proper entry. has not been input. entered.
44268 FFCustomMsgBox
44269 FFCustomMsgBox 44270 FFCustomMsgBox 44354 FFCustomMsgBox 44355 FFCustomMsgBox 44356 FFCustomMsgBox 44357 FFCustomMsgBox 44358 FFCustomMsgBox 44359 FFCustomMsgBox 44360 FFCustomMsgBox 44361 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
The setting of automatic markers was attempted on an image with an exposure menu where automatic markers are already-registered, though no markers have been determined on the same image. [44267] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was will be registered. performed for an exposure menu for which no automatic markers have been determined.
Press the [Yes] button to delete the already QA section registered automatic markers. Press the [No] button not to make any changes in the setting of the automatic markers.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
QA section
QA section
QA section QA section
Appx1 MT-122
Event
Event Source
44362 FFCustomMsgBox 44363 FFCustomMsgBox 44364 FFCustomMsgBox 44365 FFCustomMsgBox 44366 FFCustomMsgBox 44367 FFCustomMsgBox 44368 FFCustomMsgBox 44369 FFCustomMsgBox 44392 FFCustomMsgBox 44393 FFCustomMsgBox
44394 FFCustomMsgBox
44551 FFCustomMsgBox 44603 FFCustomMsgBox 44604 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [44362] Invalid character has been input in the anatomical region. [44363] Invalid character has been input in the kanjianatomical region. [44364] No menu name has been input. [44365] Invalid character has been input in the menu name. [44366] Invalid character has been input in the kanjimenu name. [44367] Invalid character has been input in the film annotation characters. [44368] No patient information has been input. [44369] The Study ID contained an invalid character. [44392]The maximum number of View Modifiers settable exceeded. [44393] View modifier code sequence items cannot be changed.
Causes
Remedies
The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. A menu name was not entered.
Make a proper entry.
The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The patient information was not entered.
Make a proper entry.
The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The 5th View Modifier was selected.
Make a proper entry.
Remarks
Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry.
Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry.
Select View Modifiers so that the total number is 4 or less.
It is not allowed to set up view code modifier for an image with no view code information.
QA section
Change system configuration of the exposure menu so that view code information can be set up appropriately and then re-input an image. [44394] Information that System configuration of the view code Press [OK] to cancel inconsistent contradicts with the system modifier set up for the image was changed. information and to display the view code configuration exists in the modifier change window. View Modifier Code Press [Cancel] not to change the view Sequences specified on code modifier. images. [44551] Film format will be This window opens for confirmation only. changed. [44603] Failed in automatic An error occurred while in automatic image Check order and orientation of images. linkage of stitching images. stitching processing. [44604] Automatic stitching The automatic image stitching button was Press [OK] to perform automatic image will be performed and the pressed. stitching processing. When doing so, data will be stored. results of fine adjustment processing will be discarded. Press [Cancel] to return to the current dialog box.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
QA section
QA section
QA section QA section
Appx1 MT-123
Event
Event Source
44732 FFCustomMsgBox 49200 FFQAMsgBox 49201 FFQAMsgBox 49202 FFQAMsgBox 49203 FFQAMsgBox
49204 FFQAMsgBox
49298 FFQAMsgBox
49299 FFQAMsgBox 50000 FFFinpSend 50000 FFOutImgPrc
Description
Causes
Remedies
[44732] Failed in calculating • The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid. EI or DI. • The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal (reading error or correction error). FF32 Error. The return value for the FF32 library (FF32. [File Name] [Function Name] dll) resulted in an error (irreplaceable). [Error Code] Method Argument Error. A method argument type error (for [File Name] [Function Name] instance, there were no objects). [Error Code] Can’t get Tag Information. No tag information was set up though it [File Name] [Function Name] must have been set up beforehand [Error Code] (irreplaceable). Memory or Resource Failed in acquiring memory/handle cannot be gained. resources. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Windows API error Windows API return value resulted in an occurred. error. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Secondary detection code An error occurred with the return value of Error. the secondary detection code. [File Name] [Function Name] [Error Code] Exception Error occurred. An exceptional error (an error detected [File Name] [Function Name] with Try/Catch, OnErrorGoto). [Error Code] Memory Error.%n%1 The system was abnormal (memory allocation was not accomplished). Initialize Error.%n%1 An abnormality was encountered during initialization.
50000 FFOutImgPrc2
Initialize Error.%n%1
An error occurred during initialization processing.
50001 FFCustomMsgBox
[50001] Failed in initialization process.
• Output option setup was not completed. • The system was unstable.
50001 FFFinpSend
Dicom Data Object Load Error.%n%1 Initialize Error.%n[%1]
The DicomDataObject file for output was not found. Initialization process error.
50001 FFIIPOUTPUT
• Output control was not exercised. • The error check method was not successfully called. • A certain other program error occurred. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
• Reperform exposure. • Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system. Restart. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • Perform output option setup. • Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-124
Event
Event Source
Description
50001 FFOutImgPrc
DB Connect Error.%n%1
50001 Spooler
Initialize Error.%n[%1]
50001 FFOutImgPrc2
DB Connect Error.%n%1
50002 FFCustomMsgBox
[50002] Failed in output process. File Open Error.%n%1
50002 FFFinpSend 50002 FFIIPOUTPUT
State Change Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager to a database. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). Initialization process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Output section occurs, perform a reinstallation. container. • No output control was exercised. • An error check method call was unsuccessful. • Other program error. An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager to a database. is normally operating. If the same symptom occurs while the SQL service manager is normally operating, initialize the image database (the entire image data is then deleted). The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation. There is no output raw data file. Reinstall. State transition notification process error.
50002 FFOutImgPrc
• The output destination was not successfully reregistered. • The state transition notification call was not successful. • An unknown program error occurred. DB Information Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal.
50002 Spooler
State Change Error.%n[%1] State change notification process error.
50002 FFOutImgPrc2 50003 FFCustomMsgBox 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart.
• An output destination was not successfully registered. • A state change notification call was not successful. • Other program error. • Line establishment message transmission error [not used]. • Line abnormality message transmission error [not used]. DB Infomation Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. [50003] Failed in output The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after process. a restart, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Output section container.
Appx1 MT-125
Event
Event Source
50003 FFFinpSend 50003 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
File Read Error.%n%1
The output raw data file is abnormal.
Reinstall.
Routine Change Error.%n[%1]
Routine change process error.
Restart.
50003 FFOutImgPrc
System Error.%n%1
50003 Spooler
Routine Change Error.%n[%1]
• The resumption request was not successfully made. The system was abnormal. Routine change process error. • A resumption request was not successfully made. The system was abnormal.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart.
50003 FFOutImgPrc2
System Error.%n%1
50004 FFCustomMsgBox
[50004] Failed in output process.
50004 FFFinpSend
FinpSend Error.%n%1
50004 FFIIPOUTPUT
Spool Error.%n[%1]
Spool process error.
I/F Timing Error.%n%1
• The spool request call was not successfully made. • The reoutput request was not successfully made. • The study termination notification was not successfully made. • The spool request response status was invalid. • An unknown program error occurred. An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
Spool Error.%n[%1]
Spool process error.
I/F Timing Error.%n%1
• A spool request call was not successfully made. • A reoutput request was not successfully made. • An examination end notification was not successful. • The spool request response state was illegal. • Other program error. An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
50004 FFOutImgPrc 50004 Spooler
50004 FFOutImgPrc2 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
- An exposure menu name with an apostrophe was used with software version A07 or earlier. - The system was unstable. An abnormality occurred in the output sequence.
Remarks
Output section container.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. - Upgrade the software to version A08 or later. - Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Output section container.
Appx1 MT-126
Event
Event Source
50005 FFCustomMsgBox 50005 FFIIPOUTPUT
50005 FFOutImgPrc 50005 Spooler
50005 FFOutImgPrc2 50006 FFCustomMsgBox 50006 FFIIPOUTPUT
50006 FFOutImgPrc 50006 FFOutImgPrc2 50007 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [50005] Failed in output process. ExeOutput Error.%n[%1]
CreateFileMapping Error.%n%1 ExeOutput Error.%n[%1]
CreateFileMapping Error.%n%1 [50006] Failed in output process. Image Proc Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
The system was unstable.
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
Forced-output process error.
• The spool forced output request call was not successfully made. • The queue forced output response message was not successfully transmitted. • An unknown program error occurred. File mapping was unachievable. Restart. Forced output process error.
Restart.
Output section container.
• A spool forced output request was not successfully called. • A queue forced output response message was not successfully transmitted. • Other program error. File mapping was unachievable. Restart. The system was unstable. Image processing error.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
File Open Error.%n%1
• The image processing request call was not successfully made. • The image processing setup completion call was not successfully made. • The image processing completion notification call was not successfully made. • The image processing job acquisition request was not successfully made. • An unknown program error occurred. The file could not be opened.
Check the file.
File Open Error.%n%1
The file could not be opened.
Check the file.
[50007] Failed in terminating process.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-127
Event
Event Source
50007 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
Output Proc Error.%n[%1]
Output processing error.
50007 FFOutImgPrc
File Read/Write Error.%n%1
• The output destination information was not successfully acquired. • The output request call was not successfully made. • The output completion notification was not successfully made. • An unknown program error occurred. A file write/read was unsuccessful. The problem is attributable to a disk.
50007 Spooler
Terminate Error.%n[%1]
Termination process error.
50007 FFOutImgPrc2
File Read/Write Error.%n%1
• Other program error. A file write/read was unsuccessful. The problem is attributable to a disk.
50008 FFCustomMsgBox
[50008] Failed in image The system was unstable. processing for output. Commit Proc Error.%n[%1] Commitment processing error.
50008 FFIIPOUTPUT
50008 FFOutImgPrc 50008 Spooler
50008 FFOutImgPrc2 50009 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CreateDispatch Error.%n%1 Image Proc Error.%n[%1]
CreateDispatch Error.%n%1 [50009] Failed in output process.
Remarks
Restart.
If the problem frequently occurs, replace the disk or take some other remedial action. Restart.
Output section container.
If the problem frequently occurs, replace the disk or take some other remedial action. Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
• The commitment destination information was not successfully acquired. • The commitment request call was not successfully made. • The commitment completion notification was not successfully made. • An unknown program error occurred. The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered. Image process error.
Restart.
Output section container.
• An image process request was not successfully called. • An image process setup completion call was not successfully made. • An image process completion notification was not successfully called. • An image process job acquisition request was not successfully issued. • Other program error. The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered. The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs after a restart, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-128
Event
Event Source
50009 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description Queue Resume Error.%n[%1]
50009 FFOutImgPrc
Memory Get Error.%n%1
50009 Spooler
Output Proc Error.%n[%1]
50009 FFOutImgPrc2
Memory Get Error.%n%1
50010 FFIIPOUTPUT
Queue Delete Error.%n[%1]
50010 FFOutImgPrc 50010 Spooler
50010 FFOutImgPrc2 50011 FFIIPOUTPUT
Memory(DDO) Get Error.%n%1 Queue Resume Error.%n[%1]
Memory(DDO) Get Error.%n%1 Unit Suspend Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Queue resumption process error.
Remarks
Restart.
• The queue resumption request call was not successfully made. • The queue resumption response message was not successfully transmitted. • An unknown program error occurred. The system was abnormal (memory allocation was not achieved). Output process error.
Restart. Restart.
• Output destination information was not successfully acquired. • An output request was not successfully called. • An output completion notification was not successful. • Other program error. The system was abnormal (memory Restart. allocation was not achieved). Queue deletion process error. Restart. • The queue deletion request was not successfully made. • The queue deletion response message was not successfully transmitted. • An unknown program error occurred. The system was abnormal (memory allocation was not achieved). Queue resumption process error. • A queue resumption request was not successfully called. • A queue resumption response message was not successfully transmitted. • Other program error. The system was abnormal (memory allocation was not achieved). Equipment output suspension process error.
Output section container.
Restart. Restart.
Output section container.
Restart. Restart.
• The equipment output suspension request call was not successfully made. • The equipment output suspension response message was not successfully transmitted. • An unknown program error occurred. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-129
Event
Event Source
50011 FFOutImgPrc 50011 Spooler
50011 FFOutImgPrc2 50012 FFIIPOUTPUT
50012 FFOutImgPrc 50012 Spooler
50012 FFOutImgPrc2 50013 FFOutImgPrc 50013 Spooler
50013 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Memory(VR) Get Error.%n%1 Queue Delete Error.%n[%1]
Causes The system was abnormal (memory allocation was not achieved). Queue deletion process error.
Remedies Restart. Restart.
• A queue deletion request was not successfully issued. • A queue deletion response message was not successfully transmitted. • Other program error. Memory(VR) Get The system was abnormal (memory Restart. Error.%n%1 allocation was not achieved). Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Equipment output resumption error. Restart. • The equipment output resumption request call was not successfully made. • The equipment output resumption response message was not successfully transmitted. • An unknown program error occurred. Dicom Data Object Dicom Data Object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Unit Suspend Error.%n[%1] Unit output suspension process error. Restart. • A unit output suspension request was not successfully called. • A unit output suspension response message was not successfully transmitted. • Other program error. Dicom Data Object Dicom Data Object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Dicom Data Object No Dicom Data Object did not contain any Restart. If the same symptom frequently Data.%n%1 data. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Unit output resumption process error. Restart.
Dicom Data Object No Data.%n%1
Remarks
• A unit output resumption request was not successfully called. • A unit output resumption response message was not successfully transmitted. • Other program error. Dicom Data Object did not contain any Restart. If the same symptom frequently data. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Output section container.
Output section container.
Output section container.
Appx1 MT-130
Event
Event Source
50015 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
Terminate Error.%n[%1]
Termination process error.
50020 FFOutImgPrc
Data Error.%n%1
• An unknown program error occurred. A data abnormality was encountered.
50020 FFOutImgPrc2
Data Error.%n%1
A data abnormality was encountered.
50021 FFOutImgPrc
Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal.
50021 FFOutImgPrc2
Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal.
50022 FFOutImgPrc
Memory Over.%n%1
50022 FFOutImgPrc2
Memory Over.%n%1
50030 FFOutImgPrc 50030 FFOutImgPrc2 50100 FFOutImgPrc
OutImgPrc Error.%n%1
A memory area abnormality was encountered. A memory area abnormality was encountered. An abnormality occurred.
OutImgPrc Error.%n%1
An abnormality occurred.
Restart.
IFormatCom Error.%n%1
The format calculation object was abnormal.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. Restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-131
Event
Event Source
50100 Spooler
Description Spooler Error.%n%1
Causes
Remedies
Common error message. • Queue information class related message. An output job file was not successfully accessed. Output job information was not successfully accessed. Film information was not successfully acquired. Information was not successfully acquired. The job status was not successfully acquired (program error). Job information was not successfully freed.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Remarks Spooler
• Unit information class related message. Unit information was not successfully freed. • Spooler class related message. The film count was not successfully checked. The image count/image information area was not successfully acquired. Unit information was not successfully acquired.
50100 FFOutImgPrc2
IFormatCom Error.%n%1
• Other program error The format calculation object was abnormal.
50101 FFOutImgPrc
IRawMakeCom Error.%n%1
The raw data creation object was abnormal.
50101 Spooler
RunProc Error.%n%1
Initialization process error.
50101 FFOutImgPrc2
IRawMakeCom Error.%n%1
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • A spool start process was in error. • A database connection was not successfully closed. • Other program error. The raw data creation object was abnormal.
50102 FFOutImgPrc
FFNetDB Error.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
An abnormality occurred at the time of network setup data acquisition. (It is conceivable that the network setup database was abnormal.)
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-132
Event
Event Source
50102 Spooler
Description OutputRegisterProc Error.%n%1
50102 FFOutImgPrc2
FFNetDB Error.%n%1
50103 FFOutImgPrc
IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1
50103 Spooler
StateChangeProc Error.%n%1
50103 FFOutImgPrc2
IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1
50104 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgSkGpCtrl Error.%n%1
50104 Spooler
ErrorCheckProc Error.%n%1
50104 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgSkGpCtrl Error.%n%1
50105 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgVRSCtrl Error.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Output destination registration process error.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • An output destination registration request message was not successfully issued. • An output destination was not successfully registered. • Other program error. An abnormality occurred at the time of Restart. If the same symptom frequently network setup data acquisition. occurs, perform a reinstallation. (It is conceivable that the network setup database was abnormal.) The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Local printer/Dicom printer state change Restart. If the same symptom frequently notification process error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A printer state change notification message was not successfully issued. • The unit status was not successfully acquired. • Other program error. The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. The normalization process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Data integrity check process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • A data integrity check request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. The normalization process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. The zoom object (VRS method) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-133
Event
Event Source
50105 Spooler
Description
Causes
Remedies
RestoreJob Error.%n%1
Job restoration error.
50105 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgVRSCtrl Error.%n%1
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • An unprocessed job restoration request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. The zoom object (VRS method) was abnormal.
50106 FFOutImgPrc
IRotateCom Error.%n%1
The rotation object was abnormal.
50106 Spooler
SpoolProc Error.%n%1
Spool process error.
50106 FFOutImgPrc2 50107 FFOutImgPrc 50107 Spooler
50107 FFOutImgPrc2 50108 FFOutImgPrc 50108 Spooler
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • A parameter error occurred. • A spool request message was not successfully issued. • DDO file information was not successfully acquired. • Other program error. IRotateCom Error.%n%1 The rotation object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. IFMImgParamCtrl The image process management Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 parameter object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. ReoutputProc Error.%n%1 Reoutput start process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A reoutput start message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. IFMImgParamCtrl The image process management Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 parameter object was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. IFMImgHandCtrl The CR image process object was Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. StudyReqEndProc Study termination request processing error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently Error.%n%1 occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • Spooler control status error. initialize the image database. • Illegal parameters. • Failed in issuing study termination request message. • Other program errors.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-134
Event
Event Source
Description
50108 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgHandCtrl Error.%n%1
50109 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgFCmpCtrl Error.%n%1
50109 Spooler
Causes
Remedies
The CR image process object was abnormal.
FCR compression (compression/ decompression (Fuji’s unique method)) was abnormal. ExeOutputJob Error.%n%1 Forced output request process error.
50109 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgFCmpCtrl Error.%n%1
50110 FFOutImgPrc
IDataToPrintCom Error.%n%1
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A forced output request message was not successfully issued. • The requested output image data did not exist. • Other program error. FCR compression (compression/ decompression (Fuji’s unique method)) was abnormal. Data conversion (for DICOM) was abnormal.
50110 Spooler
GetImageProcJob Error.%n%1
Image processing job acquisition process error.
50110 FFOutImgPrc2
IDataToPrintCom Error.%n%1
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • An image processing job acquisition request message was not successfully issued. • Data was not databased. • Other program error. Data conversion (for DICOM) was abnormal.
50111 FFOutImgPrc
IDataToStorageCom Error.%n%1
50111 Spooler
SetImageProcComplete Error.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Image processing completion notification Restart. If the same symptom frequently process error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • An image processing completion notification message was not successfully issued. • Other program error.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-135
Event
Event Source
Description
50111 FFOutImgPrc2
IDataToStorageCom Error.%n%1
50112 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgMoireCtrl Error.%n%1
50112 FFQCMsgBox
Custom DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [50112] GetOutputProcJob Error.%n%1
50112 Spooler
Causes
Remedies
Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Moire elimination was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Access error to ReaderQC.mdb. Restart.
Output job acquisition response process error. • The spooler control state was abnormal. • An output job acquisition response message was not successfully issued. • Data was not databased. • Other program error. Moire elimination was abnormal.
50112 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgMoireCtrl Error.%n%1
50113 FFOutImgPrc
IFilmCharMakeCom Error.%n%1
The film annotation character generation object was abnormal.
50113 Spooler
SetOutputProcComplete Error.%n%1
Output completion notification process error.
50113 FFOutImgPrc2
IFilmCharMakeCom Error.%n%1
• The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • An output completion notification message was not successfully issued. • Data was not databased. • Other program error. The film annotation character generation object was abnormal.
50114 FFOutImgPrc
MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal.
50114 Spooler
GetCommitProcJob Error.%n%1
Commitment job acquisition response process error. • The spooler control status was abnormal. • The commitment jog acquisition response message was not successfully issued. • The data was not found in the database. • An unknown program error occurred.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-136
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50114 FFOutImgPrc2
MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal.
50115 FFOutImgPrc
RecognizeProcExec Error.%n%1
50115 Spooler
QueueResume Error.%n%1
50115 Spooler
SetCommitProcComplete Error.%n%1
50115 FFOutImgPrc2
RecognizeProcExec Error.%n%1
50116 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker Error.%n%1
50116 Spooler
QueueDelete Error.%n%1
50116 FFOutImgPrc2
ExecMarker Error.%n%1
50117 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker Warning.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. The blackening automatic recognition Restart. If the same symptom frequently process was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control state was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A queue output resumption request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. Commitment completion notification Restart. If the same symptom frequently process error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control status was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • The commitment completion notification message was not successfully issued. • The queue was not found. • The data was not found in the database. • An unknown program error occurred. The blackening automatic recognition Restart. If the same symptom frequently process was abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. The marker imbedding process was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Queue deletion request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A queue deletion request message was not successfully issued. • Output job file information was not successfully accessed. • Queue deletion was not successful. • Database access was not successful. • Other program error. The marker imbedding process was Restart. If the same symptom frequently abnormal. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Information for software development There is no problem with operations. personnel.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks Output image process control
Spooler
Output image process control
Spooler
Appx1 MT-137
Event
Event Source
Description
50117 FFOutImgPrc
LUTProcExec Error.%n%
50117 Spooler
QueueResume Error.%n%1
50117 Spooler
UnitSuspend Error.%n%1
50117 FFOutImgPrc2
LUTProcExec Error.%n%
50118 FFOutImgPrc 50118 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker Information.%n%1 MPMCode Error.%n%1
50118 Spooler
QueueDelete Error.%n%1
50118 Spooler
UnitResume Error.%n%1
50118 FFOutImgPrc2
MPMCode Error.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control status was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • The queue output resumption request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. Unit suspension request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A unit suspension request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. An error occurred in a display gradation Restart. If the same symptom frequently correction process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Information for software development There is no problem with operations. personnel. An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently conversion process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Queue deletion request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • Failed in issuing a queue deletion request message. • Failed in accessing the output job file information. • Failed in deleting the queue. • Failed in accessing the database. • An unknown program error occurred. Unit resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • A unit resumption request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently conversion process. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Remarks
An error occurred in a display gradation correction process.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-138
Event
Event Source
50119 Spooler
50119 Spooler
Description SuspendProc Error.%n%1
UnitSuspend Error.%n%1
50119 FFOutlmgPrc
Trimming Error.%n%1
50119 FFOutlmgPrc2
Trimming Error.%n%1
50120 Spooler
ResumeProc Error.%n%1
50120 Spooler
UnitResume Error.%n%1
50120 FFOutlmgPrc
AnnotationProc Error.%n%1
50120 FFOutlmgPrc2
AnnotationProc Error.%n%1
50121 Spooler
EndProc Error.%n%1
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Suspension request process error. • The spooler control state was abnormal. • A suspension request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. Equipment suspension request process error.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Remarks Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
• The spooler control status was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • The equipment suspension request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. An error occurred while in trimming Restart. If the same symptom frequently processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. An error occurred while in trimming Restart. If the same symptom frequently processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • A resumption request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error. Equipment resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently error. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The spooler control status was abnormal. • An illegal parameter was encountered. • The equipment resumption request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. An error occurred while in annotation Restart. If the same symptom frequently information embedding processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then intialize the image database. An error occurred while in annotation Restart. If the same symptom frequently information embedding processing. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then intialize the image database. End request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database. • An end request message was not successfully issued. • Other program error.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-139
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50121 Spooler
SuspendProc Error.%n%1
50121 FFOutlmgPrc
FNCProc Error.%n%1
50121 FFOutlmgPrc2
FNCProc Error.%n%1
50122 Spooler
ResumeProc Error.%n%1
50122 FFOutlmgPrc
50123 Spooler
MaskProcExec Warning.%n%1 MaskProcExec Warning.%n%1 EndProc Error.%n%1
50123 FFOutlmgPrc
IIPHand Error.%n%1
50123 FFOutlmgPrc2
IIPHand Error.%n%1
50400 FFQCAutoCalcCom
FFIipMedia
File %1, Spot %2, Code %3. File %1, Spot %2, Fatal Error (exceptional error) Code %3. Logical Program Error. %n Program error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Catch Exception Error. %n An unexpected exception error occurred.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Out Of Memory Error. %n
Failed in securing necessary memory.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Data Base Error. %n
An error occurred in the database.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Not Initialize. %n
Initialization not performed.
Restart.
50122 FFOutlmgPrc2
50500 FFQCAutoCalcCom 50600 50601 50602 50603 50604
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Suspension request process error.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database. • The suspension request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform reinstallation and initialize the image database. An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform reinstallation and initialize the image database. Resumption request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database. • The resumption request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto Although there is no problem with blackening process. operations, check the data appropriately. Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto Although there is no problem with blackening process. operations, check the data appropriately. Termination request process error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database. • The termination request message was not successfully issued. • An unknown program error occurred. Processing of output image failed. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Processing of output image failed. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. Fatal Error (exceptional error)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-140
Event
Event Source
Description
50605 FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
50606 FFIipMedia
Create Instance Error. %n
50607 FFIipMedia 50608 FFIipMedia 50609 FFIipMedia 50610 FFIipMedia 50611 FFIipMedia 50612 FFIipMedia 50613 FFIipMedia 50614 FFIipMedia 50615 FFIipMedia 50616 FFIipMedia 50617 FFIipMedia 50618 FFIipMedia 50619 FFIipMedia 50620 FFIipMedia 50621 FFIipMedia 50622 FFIipMedia 50623 FFIipMedia 50624 FFIipMedia 50625 FFIipMedia 50626 FFIipMedia 50627 FFIipMedia 50628 FFIipMedia 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies Restart.
Pipe Create Error. %n
An error occurred while in file read processing. Failed in creating COM component instance. Failed in creating a pipe.
Pipe Create Error. %n
Failed in closing a pipe.
Restart.
Remarks
Check to see if the image file is correct.
Restart.
The Demand Is Already Performing. %n
The relevant request cannot be accepted because it is now being implemented or other request is now being implemented. Send Message Error. %n Failed in transmitting a message (Send message failure). Unjust Event Reception. An illegal event, such as inconsistency in %n AE name, was received. Not FCR Image. %n The selected study couldn’t be acquired because it didn’t include FCR images. AEMedia no entry. %n No media that is for the determined AE is registered. Resource Access Error. %n A resource access error.
Wait for a while and then re-implement as there is a process that is being now implemented. Restart.
Media Process End. %n
The media control process ended.
Nothing particular.
UPSEvent Pipe Create Failure. %n Attribute Error. %n
Failed in creating a named pipe for detection of power rupture. The attribute caused an error to occur.
Restart.
Picture storage demand start failure. %n Picture get demand start failure. %n Send Message Error. %n
Failed in starting a request for image storage. Failed in starting a request for image acquisition. Message transmission error.
Get Host Name Error. %n
An error occurred when acquiring a host name. Failed in operating a registry.
Resistry Error. %n
Make sure that the network setting is correct. Make sure that the image file is correct. Make sure that the network setting is correct. Restart.
Make sure that the network setting is correct. Make sure that the image file is correct. Make sure that the image file is correct. Restart. Restart. Restart.
DVDform.exe not exist. %n The DVDForm.exe file did not exist.
Check the format function system setting.
DVDform.exe Start Error. %n DVDform.exe. Operation Error. %n Format end Error. %n
Failed in starting the DVDForm.exe file.
Check the format function system setting.
An error occurred while operating the DVDForm.exe file. A format end detection error.
Check the format function system setting.
Media Format Error. %n
A media format failure.
Nothing particular.
Media Drive Type Error. %n The media drive type was not correct.
Check the format function system setting. Make sure that the network setting is correct.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-141
Event
Event Source
50629 FFIipMedia 50630 FFIipMedia
Description
Causes
Remedies
BatFile not exist. %n
The bat file did not exist.
Restart.
50632 FFIipMedia
Message Box Error. %n
50633 FFIipMedia 50634 FFIipMedia
File Format Error. %n
An error occurred while in bat restore processing. An error occurred while in bat store processing. An error occurred in the custom message box. The file format is not correct.
Restart.
50631 FFIipMedia
MediaDB Restore Error. %n MediaDB Store Error. %n
50637 50638 50639 50640 50641 50642
Restart. Nothing particular. Nothing particular.
Can’t Terminate by Storrtrv The Terminate process was disabled busy. %n because the thread was in operation or in process of finishing. DDOFile Invalid. %n An illegal image information file.
Wait for a while and then re-implement because there is a process in operation.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Reconstruction is Error. %n An error occurred during data reconstruction processing. Program Error. %n Program error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
File I/O error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Memory not allocated. %n
Memory securing error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Other Error. %n
Other errors.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
ddo error. %n
Failed in image information processing.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Drive not Exist. %n
The specified drive did not exist.
50635 FFIipMedia 50636 FFIipMedia
Nothing particular.
50643 FFIipMedia
Disk not Exist. %n
50644 FFIipMedia
Not Removable. %n
50645 50646 50647 50648 50649 50650 50651 50652
FFIipMedia
Eject FALSE. %n
Make sure that the network setting is correct. There was no disk in the specified drive. Make sure that the network setting is correct. The specified drive was not for removable Make sure that the network setting is media. correct. Media ejection failed. Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Lock FALSE. %n
Media lock failed.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Unlock FALSE. %n
Media unlock failed.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Cannot get Freespace. %n Failed in securing free space.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
SaveDCMFile FALSE. %n
Failed in creating a DICOM format file.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
SaveDDOFile FALSE. %n
Failed in creating an image information file. Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Set invalid value. %n
No parameter values have been set up.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Cannot make DICOMDIR. %n Cannot create file. %n
Failed in creating DICOMDIR.
Replace the media.
CreateFile method error.
Restart.
Cannot mapping file. %n
CreateFileMapping method error.
Restart.
50653 FFIipMedia 50654 FFIipMedia 50655 FFIipMedia 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Cannot mapview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error.
Remarks
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-142
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50656 FFIipMedia 50657 FFIipMedia
Cannot flushview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error.
Restart.
Not Found consistflag. %n
Make sure that the image file is correct.
50658 FFIipMedia 50659 FFIipMedia 50660 FFIipMedia
Drive not Ready. %n
The file consistency flag was not found in DICOMDIR. The drive was not ready for use.
File not Found. %n
The file did not exist.
Nothing particular.
Failed in reading the media management file. Failed in initialization processing.
Make sure that the image file is correct.
FFIipMedia
Load DICOMDIR no use. %n Initialize failed. %n
FFIipMedia
Data not found. %n
No data available.
Make sure that the image file is correct.
FFIipMedia
DeleteFile failed. %n
Failed in deleting the file.
Make sure that the image file is correct.
FFIipMedia
Memory not allocated. %n
Failed in securing memory.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
Restart.
Buffer Error. %n
A failure occurred in file reading processing. Failed in securing buffer.
Get filesize failed. %n
Failed in acquiring the file size.
Restart.
Not set path. %n
No paths have been set.
Make sure that the network setting is correct. Make sure that the image file is correct.
50661 50662 50663 50664 50665
50666 FFIipMedia 50667 FFIipMedia 50668 FFIipMedia 50669 FFIipMedia 50670 FFIipMedia 50671 FFIipMedia 50672 FFIipMedia 50673 FFIipMedia 50674 FFIipMedia 50675 FFIipMedia 50676 FFIipMedia 50677 FFIipMedia 50678 FFIipMedia 50679 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Nothing particular.
Restart.
Restart.
Incorrect image information. Image information was not correct. %n FFGetString failed. %n A failure occurred with the FFGetString function. DB COM create failed. % A failure occurred in creation of a database instance. DB COM connect failed. A failure occurred in connection of the %n database. DB COM close failed. %n A failure occurred when releasing the database. ADO queryinterface failed. A failure occurred in acquisition of the ADO %n interface. DB COM openrecordset Failed in acquiring a record set. failed. %n DB COM updaterecordset Failed in updating the record. failed. %n DB COM closerecordset Failed in releasing the record set. failed. %n DB COM deleterecordset Failed in deleting the record. failed. %n ADO setrecord failed. %n Failed in setting up the ADO interface record.
Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart. Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-143
Event
Event Source
50680 FFIipMedia 50681 FFIipMedia 50700 FFIIPDicomQR
50700 FFCustomMsgBox 50701 FFIIPDicomQR
50701 FFCustomMsgBox 50702 FFIIPDicomQR
50703 FFIIPDicomQR
50704 FFIIPDicomQR
50705 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description FFDicom2Internal failed. %n FFInternal2Output failed. %n Unknown Error. %n[Module] %1%n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode]%3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description]%5 [50700] An unknown error occurred. Logical Program Error. Exception has Occurred. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [50701] Failed in initialization processing. Logical Program Error. Not Supported Case. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Initialization Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 UnInitialization Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 System Configuration Information Acquisition Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5
Causes
Remedies
A failure occurred with the FFDicom2Internal function. A failure occurred with the FFInternal2Output function. An error of unknown cause occurred.
Remarks
Restart. Restart. Restart the system.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. An exceptional error occurred. It is difficult Restart the system. to continue processing because it is a serious error.
The system was unstable. The error that occurred is unsupported though it is within the supposed range. Processing cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system.
An initialization processing error.
Restart the system.
A shutdown processing error.
Restart the system.
A system setup acquisition error.
Shut down the system to make sure that system settings are correct.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-144
Event
Event Source
50706 FFIIPDicomQR
50707 FFIIPDicomQR
50708 FFIIPDicomQR
50709 FFIIPDicomQR
50710 FFIIPDicomQR
50711 FFIIPDicomQR
50720 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Network Configuration Information Acquisition Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Resource (Message/String/ Bitmap etc.) Acquisition Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Registry Information Acquisition Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 InterProcess Message Communication Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Database Access Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 DDO Access Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Query Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5
Causes
Remedies
A network setting acquisition error.
Shut down the system to make sure that system settings are correct.
A resource (message, character string, BMP, etc.) acquisition error.
Restart the system.
A registry setting acquisition error.
Restart the system.
An error occurred during an inter-process message communication.
Restart the system.
A database access error.
Restart the system.
A DDO file access error.
Restart the system.
Remarks
A search processing error occurred. Restart the system. Processing cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-145
Event
Event Source
50721 FFIIPDicomQR
Description
50900 FFIIPImgProcServer
Queried Information Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieve Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Output Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [50809] An unknown anomaly was encountered. Error.%n%1
51001 FFIIPOUTPUT
Initialize Warning.%n[%1]
50740 FFIIPDicomQR
50741 FFIIPDicomQR
50742 FFIIPDicomQR
50809 FFCustomMsgBox
51001 Spooler
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Initialize Warning.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
A search result display error occurred. Restart the system. Processing cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
An acquisition processing error. Processing Restart the system. cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
An acquired image display error occurred. Restart the system. Processing cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
An image delivery processing error Restart the system. occurred. Processing cannot be continued because it is a serious error.
The system was unstable. An error occurred while creating a PDI image. Initialization process warning.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart.
Image processing server
Check the network settings. If any setting is incorrect, perform a reinstallation.
• The output equipment execution was not successfully started. • The output equipment name (AE name/ host name) was not successfully acquired (there was an inconsistency between the option and network settings). • The FFNET database was not successfully accessed. Initialization process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation. • An output device execution was not successfully started. • An output device name (AE name/host name) was not successfully acquired. • FFNETDB access was unsuccessful.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Output section container.
Appx1 MT-146
Event
Event Source
51002 FFIIPOUTPUT
51002 Spooler
51007 Spooler
51010 FFCustomMsgBox 51011 FFCustomMsgBox 51012 FFCustomMsgBox 51013 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description State Change Warning.%n[%1]
State Change Warning.%n[%1]
Causes State transition notification process warning.
Remedies Restart.
• The response to an acquisition request was not successfully made. State change notification process warning. Restart.
• An acquisition request was not successfully answered. Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning.
Remarks
Restart.
• A process status flag was not successfully set. • A process termination response message was not successfully transmitted. • An abnormality occurrence notification message was not successfully transmitted. • A message box was not successfully displayed. • A spooler termination request was not successfully called. • A spooler control end request was not successfully called. • The spooler control end response state was abnormal. • An image process control end request was not successfully issued. • An output device control end request was not successfully issued. • The output device control end response state was abnormal. [51010] Specified device The setup data was incorrect or the Reset the data or check the equipment. does not exist. equipment not started. [51011] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings. the configuration file file could not be read. (TagLookup.ini). [51012] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings. the gray level correction file could not be read. file. [51013] Failed in output The system was unstable. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, process. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Output section container. Output section container.
Appx1 MT-147
Event
Event Source
51015 FFIIPOUTPUT
51300 FFCustomMsgBox 51301 FFCustomMsgBox 51302 FFCustomMsgBox 51303 FFCustomMsgBox
51304 FFCustomMsgBox 51305 FFCustomMsgBox 51306 FFCustomMsgBox 51307 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning.
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.
• The process status flag was not successfully set. • The process termination response message was not successfully transmitted. • The abnormality occurrence notification message was not successfully transmitted. • The message box was not successfully opened. • The spooler termination request call was not successfully made. • The spooler control termination request call was not successfully made. • The spooler control termination response status was abnormal. • The image processing control termination request was not successfully made. • The output equipment control termination request was not successfully made. • The output equipment control termination response status was abnormal. [51300] The measurement The measurement process could not be Make sure that the images are entered. process cannot be performed because there was no image. performed. [51301] The hard disk is The remaining free space is insufficient. Increase the free space and then perform full. the output process again. [51302] Failed in the image The image output process could not be Start up the host at the output destination output process. performed because the host at the output and then perform the output process again. destination was not running. [51303] The measurement The measurement process could not be To perform the measurement process, use process cannot be performed because images derived from images that are derived from the same performed. different image readers are contained in a image reader. single study. [51304] The measurement All the images necessary for measurement Make sure that the images are entered. process cannot be process execution were not entered. performed. [51305] The measurement The measurement process can be Check the 1-Shot Phantom image size and process cannot be performed only when the 1-Shot Phantom make an exposure again. performed. image size is 2430cm or larger. [51306] The entered value The entered monitor dosage value was out Enter another value. is illegal. of range. [51307] The entered value The artifact setting was out of range. Enter another value. is illegal.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-148
Event
Event Source
51308 FFCustomMsgBox 51309 FFCustomMsgBox 51310 FFCustomMsgBox 51311 FFCustomMsgBox 51312 FFCustomMsgBox 51313 FFCustomMsgBox 51314 FFCustomMsgBox 51315 FFCustomMsgBox 51316 FFCustomMsgBox 51317 FFCustomMsgBox 51318 FFCustomMsgBox 51319 FFCustomMsgBox 51320 FFCustomMsgBox 51321 FFCustomMsgBox 51322 FFCustomMsgBox 51323 FFCustomMsgBox 51324 FFCustomMsgBox 51325 FFCustomMsgBox 51326 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [51308] The entered value is illegal. [51309] The entered value is illegal. [51310] The data save process cannot be performed. [51311] The measurement process cannot be performed. [51312] Failed in the image output process. [51313] The entered value is illegal. [51314] The entered value is illegal. [51315] The entered value is illegal. [51316] The entered value is illegal. [51317] The entered value is illegal. [51318] The entered value is illegal. [51319] The entered value is illegal. [51320] Failed in accessing the image file. [51321] Failed in accessing the database. [ReaderQC] [51322] Failed in the data save process. [51323] An error of unknown cause occurred. [51324] The measurement process cannot be performed. [51325] The image is illegal.
Causes
Remedies
The burger phantom setting was out of range. The wire mesh setting was out of range.
Remarks
Enter another value. Enter another value.
The save process could not be performed because there was no image.
Make sure that the images are entered.
The phantom position was invalid. The selected image was not found.
Ensure that the phantom is properly positioned for the IP, and then make an exposure again. Select an image that can be output.
The S-value setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
The shading setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
The image noise setting was out of range. Enter another value. The sharpness setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
The jitter setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
The linearity setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
The setting for accuracy of measurement was out of range. The image file was not found.
Enter another value.
The database could not be accessed.
Restart.
The output file was not successfully created.
Perform the log output process again.
Make sure that the images are entered.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The measurement process could not be Check the menu for a mixture of high- and performed because images differing in standard-pixel density images, and then reading pixel density coexisted. make an exposure again. The 1-Shot Phantom image was invalid. Ensure that the phantom is properly positioned for the IP, and then make an exposure again. [51326] The measurement The image reader name was not set for the Ensure that the name is properly set. process cannot be image file. performed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-149
Event
Event Source
51501 FFCustomMsgBox 51502 FFCustomMsgBox 51701 FFIIPDicomQR
51702 FFCustomMsgBox 51710 FFCustomMsgBox 51711 FFCustomMsgBox 51712 FFCustomMsgBox
51713 FFCustomMsgBox 51714 FFCustomMsgBox 51715 FFCustomMsgBox
51717 FFCustomMsgBox
51718 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[51501] Failed in initialization processing. [51502] Descrepancy in settings. Failed in Query Processing. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [51702] Failed in displaying the study information list. [51710] Input information includes illegal characters. [51711] Input information exceeds the limit number of characters. [51712] The hit rate of searching for studies exceeded the limit value. Search processing is suspended. [51713] Failed in searching study information. [51714] A network error occurred while in search of study information. [51715] A timeout error occurred while in search of study information. No responses come from equipment targeted for search. [51717] Information of equipment targeted for search cannot be found. Network settings may not be correct. [51718] A communication error occurred while in search of study information.
An abnormality occurred during the initialization of the FINP input subsystem. The PRINT attribute output destination was not specified. Necessary processing failed.
Processes other than FINP input can be performed. Specify the PRINT attribute output destination. Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing occurs, restart the system. log
The search result includes illegal data. Input information includes illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal information. Input correct data.
Input information includes illegal data.
Input correct data.
The number of hit studies is many.
Narrow down the search conditions accordingly.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
The network settings were inappropriate. The network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
The network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
The network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Remarks
Appx1 MT-150
Event
Event Source
51720 FFIIPDicomQR
51721 FFIIPDicomQR
51721 FFCustomMsgBox 51722 FFCustomMsgBox
51722 FFIIPDicomQR
51723 FFCustomMsgBox
51725 FFCustomMsgBox
51726 FFCustomMsgBox 51727 FFCustomMsgBox
51729 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Query Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Queried Information Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [51721] Failed in processing to acquire studies. [51722] Failed in processing to acquire studies. Free hard disk space is not sufficient. Failed in Query Processing. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [51723] Failed in processing to acquire studies. Studies include images that cannot be displayed. [51725] Information of equipment targeted for image acquisition cannot be found. Network settings may not be correct. [51726] A communication error occurred in an attempt to acquire studies. [51727] A timeout error occurred while in process of study acquisition. No responses come from the equipment targeted for study acquisition. [51729] Input information is not correct.
Causes
Remedies
A search processing error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A search result display error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
The system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
Remarks
Free space on the hard disk is insufficient. Increase free space on the hard disk appropriately. A query processing error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing recurs, restart the system. log
An acquired study includes illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal information.
Network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
Network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
Network settings were inappropriate.
Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
Input information includes illegal data.
Input correct information.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-151
Event
Event Source
51730 FFCustomMsgBox
51731 FFCustomMsgBox 51732 FFCustomMsgBox
51740 FFIIPDicomQR
51741 FFIIPDicomQR
51742 FFIIPDicomQR
51743 FFIIPDicomQR
51805 FFCustomMsgBox
51806 FFCustomMsgBox 51810 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [51730] An attempt is made to acquire a study generated by an unknown modality. [51731] A study generated by an unknown modality was acquired. [51732] The hit rate of searching for studies exceeded the listed limit value. Retrieve Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Output Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Failed in Retrieve Processing. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 [51805] Failed in image display processing. Some images cannot be displayed. [51806] Failed in image distribution processing. [51810] Information on the device targeted for image printout was not found. Network settings may possibly be incorrect.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Acquired study information includes illegal Stop acquiring studies that include illegal data. information. Acquired information includes illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal information.
The number of hit studies is many.
Narrow down the search conditions accordingly.
A study acquisition error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
An error occurred when displaying acquired images. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A delivery processing error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
An acquisition error occurred. Processing can be continued after the error is notified to the user as it is insignificant.
Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing recurs, restart the system. log
Acquired studies include illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal information.
Acquired studies include illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal information. Check settings of network and other connected equipment.
Network settings were inappropriate.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-152
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
52000 FFFinpSend 52000 FFOutImgPrc 52002 FFEifPrinter
Warning.%n%1
Information for development personnel.
There is no problem with operations.
Warning.%n%1
Information for development personnel.
There is no problem with operations.
SMCU Driver error. [%1]
Restart.
52003 FFEifPrinter
EIFIMG Driver error. [%1] Received unexpected command. [%1] File Error. [%1] Custom DB Access Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [50112] Spooler Warning.%n%1
An error occurred in the SMCU driver. The problem might have been caused, for instance, by data incompleteness or system instability. An error occurred in the EIFIMG driver. It is conceivable that the system was unstable. An unknown command was received from the printer.
52004 FFEifPrinter 52006 FFEifPrinter 52100 FFQCMsgBox 52100 Spooler
52101 Spooler
52102 FFQCMsgBox
52103 FFQCMsgBox
52103 Spooler
RunProc Warning.%n%1
SysConfig DB Access Failure (Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [52102] LangStr DB Access Failure (Processing continuation). [File Name] [Function Name] [52103] StateChangeProc Warning.%n%1
Restart. Check the log of communications with the connected printer or restart the printer/IIP.
The raw data file for output was not found. Since the problem is attributable to a program error, try performing a reinstall. The bitmap was not successfully acquired. Check that the bitmap file is installed. Common warning message. • Queue information class related message. Image information (SOPInstanceUID) was not successfully acquired. The job status was not successfully acquired. • Spooler class related message. A database connection was not successfully closed. • Illegal image display format data. Initialization process warning. • A character string database connection was not successfully opened. An error/invalid value was encountered when an attempt was made to acquire a system setup database access API value.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Restart.
An error occurred when an attempt was made to acquire a character string database access API value.
Restart.
Local printer/Dicom printer state change notification process warning.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
• A unit state character string was not successfully acquired. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Spooler
Appx1 MT-153
Event
Event Source
52105 FFQCMsgBox
Description
Causes
Remedies
52105 Spooler
FF32 Access Failure (Probably acquisition of Registry goes wrong) [File Name] [Function Name] [52105] RestoreJob Warning.%n%1
52106 Spooler
• An output job file was not successfully accessed. SpoolProc Warning.%n%1 Spool process warning.
52108 FFQCMsgBox
52108 Spooler
52109 FFQCMsgBox
52109 Spooler
52110 FFQCMsgBox
52110 Spooler
The FF32 library (FF32dll) return value was in error. * For option key registry acquisition, no error occurs even if the key is missing. Job restoration warning.
• Unit information acquisition was not successful. • File deletion was not successful. • Queue cancellation was not successful. • Data was not successfully written into a log file. Custom DB Access Failure An attempt to set/acquire a value from (Processing continuation) ReaderQC.mdb failed. [File Name] [Function Name] [52108] StudyReqEndProc Examination end request process warning. Warning.%n%1 • A database was not successfully accessed. • DDO file information was not successfully acquired. FF32 DB Access Failure Registry setup/acquisition failed (Processing continuation) (replaceable). [File Name] [Function Name] [52109] ExeOutputJob Forced output request process warning. Warning.%n%1 • DDO file information was not successfully acquired. FF32 DB Access Failure An image file access error occurred. (Processing continuation) [File Name] [Function Name] [52110] GetImageProcJob Image processing job acquisition process Warning.%n%1 warning. • An output unit type parameter error occurred.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
It is probable that the installation was not properly completed. Perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Restart.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
It is probable that the registry information was not properly installed. Perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Spooler
Since the image is valid, make an exposure again. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Spooler
Appx1 MT-154
Event
Event Source
52112 Spooler
52114 Spooler
Description
Remedies
GetOutputProcJob Warning.%n%1
Output job acquisition response process warning.
GetCommitProcJob Warning.%n%1
• An output unit type parameter error was encountered. Commitment job acquisition response process warning.
52116 Spooler
QueueDelete Warning.%n%1
52117 Spooler
UnitSuspend Warning.%n%1
52118 Spooler
QueueDelete Warning.%n%1
52118 Spooler
UnitResume Warning.%n%1
52119 Spooler
UnitSuspend Warning.%n%1
52120 Spooler
UnitResume Warning.%n%1
52400 FFQCAAutocalccom
File %1, Spot %2, Code %3.
52500 FFQCAAutocalccom
File %1, Spot %2, Code %3.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
Remarks Spooler
Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
• A commitment equipment type parameter error occurred. Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • An image database flag was not initialize the image database. successfully set. • The DDO file was not successfully deleted. Unit suspension request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • A unit status character string was not initialize the image database. successfully acquired. Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • The image database flag was not initialize the image database. successfully set. • The DDO file was not successfully deleted. Unit resumption request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then • A unit status acquisition error occurred. initialize the image database. Equipment suspension request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently warning. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • The equipment status character string was not successfully acquired. Equipment resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently warning. occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database. • An equipment status acquisition error occurred. Warning information. Perform reexposure and then measurement processing because the image is illegal. Fatal error (exceptional error).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1 MT-155
Event
Event Source
52720 FFIIPDicomQR
52721 FFIIPDicomQR
52740 FFIIPDicomQR
52741 FFIIPDicomQR
52742 FFIIPDicomQR
52750 FFIIPDicomQR
52751 FFIIPDicomQR 52760 FFTsSearchCondition 52761 FFTsSearchCondition 52770 FFMaSearchCOM 52771 FFMaSearchCOM 52772 FFMaSearchCOM
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Query Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Queried Information Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieve Processing Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Display Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Retrieved Image Output Error. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Logical Program Error. %nNetwork Warning (Timeout). %n%1 %n %2
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
A search processing error occurred. Processing can be continued as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A search result display error occurred. Processing can be continued as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A study acquisition error occurred. Processing can be continued as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
An error occurred when displaying an acquired study. Processing can be continued as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A delivery processing error occurred. Processing can be continued as it is insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the system.
A timeout error occurred.
Shut down the system to ensure that network settings are correct. Make sure that other connected equipment is operating properly. Suspend search processing. Narrow down the search conditions to retry search processing. Restart the system.
Network Warning(Over The number for hit results exceeded the Number Of Result). %n%1 upper limit. %n %2 Disk Full Error. %n The hard disk is full. DB Operation Status Warning. %n Disk Full Error. %n
A warning given when the database operation result status is illegal. The hard disk is full.
Restart the system.
Network Error. %n
A network error occurred.
Restart the system.
Network Error. %n
The number for hit results exceeded the upper limit.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-156
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
52800 FFIIPDicomQR
Network Warning(Timeout). A timeout error occurred. %n%1 %n %2
52801 FFIIPDicomQR
Network Warning(DiskFull). The hard disk is full. %n%1 %n %2
52802 FFIIPDicomQR FFTsImgRetInd
Warning(Retrieve Image Nothing). %n%1 %n %2 Disk Full Error. %n
The acquired study does not include images. The hard disk is full.
Shut down the system to ensure that network settings are correct. Make sure that other connected equipment is operating properly. Suspend acquisition of studies. Increase free space on the hard disk and then retry acquisition. Make sure that other connected equipment retains correct study information. Restart the system.
FFMaRetrieve
Disk Full Error. %n
The hard disk is full.
Restart the system.
FFMaRetrieve
Storage SCP not found. %n No Storage SCP is set up.
FFMaRetrieve
Cannot Get NetWork Setting. %n Integration Warning in DataBase. %n DICOM Data Waring. %n
Necessary network settings cannot be Restart the system. acquired. There is a problem with consistency of the Restart the system. database. A DICOM data-related warning. Restart the system.
Local Retrieve Warning. %n Input Image Warning (DensityCode = SH). %n Disk Full Error. %n
A warning given when images cannot be acquired locally. A warning given when an SH image is input. The hard disk is full.
Debug Log OutPut. %n
Restart the system.
52810 52820 52821 52822
52823 FFMaRetrieve 52824 FFMaRetrieve 52825 FFMaRetrieve 52826 FFMaRetrieve 52850 FFMaCommon 52851 FFMaCommon
Restart the system.
Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system.
FFMaCommon
Disk Full Error. %n
Event log output number for debugging purposes. The hard disk is full.
FFMaCommonImage
Disk Full Error. %n
The hard disk is full.
Restart the system.
FFTsCommon
Disk Full Error. %n
The hard disk is full.
Restart the system.
FFTsCommon
Catch DB exception. %n
An exceptional access to the database.
Restart the system.
FFIIPImgProcServer
Warning.%n%1
There is a defect in the specified data.
52902 FFIIPImgProcServer
Dicom Data Object Error.%n%1 JOB Error.%n%1
52903 FFIIPImgProcServer
I/F Error.%n%1
53106 Spooler
SpoolProc Infomation.%n%1
Image information processing failed while creating a PDI image. An attempt to create JOB information resulted in a failure while creating a PDI image. An error occurred when a request was issued to create a PDI image. Information in a spool process.
Check to see that the system configuration Image processing is correct. server Restart. Image processing server Restart. Image processing server
52852 52860 52870 52871 52900
52901 FFIIPImgProcServer
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
• Unit type mismatch notification.
Restart the system.
Restart. Restart. If the same symptom frequently occurs, perform a reinstallation and then initialize the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Image processing server Spooler
Appx1 MT-157
Event
Event Source
53820 FFMaRetrieve 53821 FFMaRetrieve 53823 FFMaRetrieve
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Retrieve Process Start. %n Process startup.
Restart the system.
Retrieve Process End. %n
Process shutdown.
Restart the system.
Image is Already Exists in ImageDB. %n 12Bits Image Cannot Retrieve. This Image Is Deleted. Retry is success. %n
Information given when the same image is Restart the system. input. Discard the retrieved image as no 12-bit There is no problem with operations. image can be acquired. Select another image that is not 12-bit. Database retry information.
Restart the system.
Writing error.
Check to see the media has not been prohibited for writing.
54600 FFIipMedia
Journal Proc Failure. [File Name] [Function Name] [54100] HDD Disk Full Error. %n
54601 FFIipMedia
Network Error. %n
54602 FFIipMedia
Not Mount. %n
54603 FFIipMedia
Media Ctrl(Format or Mount or Unmount)Run. %n Media Read Only. %n
Secure sufficient HDD space by, for example, deleting unnecessary images. An error occurred on the network. Make sure that the network setting is correct. No destination has been mounted for data Mount the drive. storage. Media control (either of formatting, Retry after a while because either of mounting and unmounting) was in process. formatting, mounting and unmounting is in process. The media was for read only. Nothing particular.
Media Unformat. %n
The media was not formatted.
Media Storage Is Operating. %n Message reception from other cases. %n ReceptionMessage is Abnormal. %n Next Transaction by Timeout. %n Media Is Already Mount. %n Set Default by acquisition failure. %n Media White Protect. %n
Media storage was in process.
53827 FFMaRetrieve 53870 FFTsCommon 54100 FFQCMsgBox
54604 FFIipMedia 54605 FFIipMedia 54606 FFIipMedia 54607 FFIipMedia 54608 FFIipMedia 54609 FFIipMedia 54610 FFIipMedia 54611 FFIipMedia 54612 FFIipMedia 54613 FFIipMedia 54614 FFIipMedia 54615 FFIipMedia 54616 FFIipMedia 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
The HDD disk was full.
Nothing particular.
Retry after a while because there is a process in operation. A message received from other equipment Nothing particular. units. The received message was not normal. Restart. The next processing started as a timeout occurred. The media has already been mounted.
Nothing particular. Nothing particular.
Default was set because a failure occurred Nothing particular. during data acquisition from Directory.ini. The media was write-protected. Nothing particular.
DICOMDIR Read Only. %n The DICOMDIR file was for read only.
Nothing particular.
Can’t Format by Formatting was not possible because there Nothing particular. DICOMDIRfile. %n was the DICOMDIR file. Not Browseable Media. %n It was not browseable media. Nothing particular. Not Writeable Media. %n
It was not writable media.
Nothing particular.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-158
Event
Event Source
54617 FFIipMedia 54618 FFIipMedia 54619 FFIipMedia 54620 FFIipMedia 54621 FFIipMedia 54622 FFIipMedia 54623 FFIipMedia 54624 FFIipMedia 54625 FFIipMedia 54625 FFCustomMsgBox 54626 FFIipMedia 54626 FFCustomMsgBox 54627 FFIipMedia 54628 FFIipMedia 54629 FFIipMedia 54630 FFIipMedia
Causes
Remedies
No DICOMDIR Other Exist. %n DICOMDIR is mismatching. %n Media no exist. %n
There was no DICOMDIR file but were other files. The DICOM DIR file was mismatching.
Nothing particular.
No media existed.
Nothing particular.
Mount User Cancel. %n
The user canceled mounting processing.
Nothing particular.
Version is Different. %n
Nothing particular.
Media Diskfull. %n
The database version was different from that of the version file. The media disk was full.
Image not exist in media. %n Image can’t get Exist by Error. %n Allcancel by Electric Power Stop. %n [54625] Power interruption was detected. DICOMDIR not Exist. %n
Images for the requested study did not exist in the media. Images that couldn’t be acquired due to an error existed in the acquired study. Processing discontinued due to power rupture. Processing discontinued due to power rupture. The DICOMDIR file did not exist.
Nothing particular.
Restart.
[54626] No media management files exist. DICOMDIR is protected. %n Unsuitable right format. %n
The DICOMDIR file did not exist.
Make sure that the image file is correct.
Cancellation demand. %n
Replace the media.
Nothing particular.
Check the power cable and then restart. Make sure that the image file is correct.
The management file was for read only or Nothing particular. write-protected. The media was unformatted or improperly Nothing particular. formatted. Processing canceled as it was requested. Nothing particular. Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia FFIipMedia
Auto Mount Finished. %n
Auto mounting finished.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Other Information. %n,
Other information.
Nothing particular.
FFEifPrinter
System call has failed. [%1] An error returned upon a WIN32 API function call. It is conceivable that the system was unstable.
54632 FFIipMedia 54633 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Reconstruct the media.
Reconstruction is not need. The management file needs not to be %n reconstructed. Disk Limit. %n The free disk space available was not sufficient. Other File Exists (May I Files other than DICOMDIR existed. (Are format?). %n you sure to format?) Push the O.K. button after Insert the media and press the OK button. inserting media. %n Finish Reconstruct. %n Reconstruction finished.
54631 FFIipMedia
54634 54635 54640 59001
Description
Secure sufficient HDD space by, for example, deleting unnecessary images. Nothing particular. Nothing particular. Nothing particular.
Restart.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-159
Event
Event Source
59005 FFEifPrinter 59100 FFQCMsgBox 59102 FFQCMshBox 59103 FFQCMsgBox
59198 FFQCMsgBox
59701 FFIIPDicomQR
59702 FFIIPDicomQR
59751 FFIIPDicomQR 59761 FFTsSearchCondition 59762 FFTsSearchCondition 59763 FFTsSearchCondition 59771 FFMaSearchCOM 59772 FFMaSearchCOM 59773 FFMaSearchCOM
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description Unable to setup timers. [%1] FF32 Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [59100] Cant get Tag Information. [File Name] [Function Name] [59102] Memory or Resource cannot be gained. [File Name] [Function Name] [59103] Secondary detection code Error. [File Name] [Function Name] [59198] Logical Program Error. Exception has Occurred. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Logical Program Error. Not Supported Case. %n[Module] %1 %n[Function] %2 %n[SpotCode] %3 %n[Ret]%4 %n[Description] %5 Catch Exception Error. %n%1 %n %2 Catch Exception Error. %n
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
An unknown timer event occurred. It is Restart. conceivable that the system was unstable. An FF32 library (FF32.dll) return value It is possible that the registry information error (irreplaceable). has not been installed correctly. Perform a reinstallation. No value is set up for the tag information Perform reexposure because the image is even though it must have been set up illegal. accordingly (irreplaceable). Failed in obtaining memory/handle Increase available resources and then resource. retry. A secondary detection code return value error. An exceptional error occurred. Processing If the same error still recurs, restart the can be continued because it is insignificant. system.
The error that occurred is unsupported If the same error still recurs, restart the though it is within the supposed range. system. Processing cannot be continued because it is insignificant.
An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Catch Exception Error. %n An unexceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately.
Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-160
Event
Event Source
Description
59774 FFMaSearchCOM
Data Base Error. %n
59801 FFIIPDicomQR
Catch Exception Error. %n%1 %n %2 Invalid Propaty Error. %n%1 %n %2 Catch Exception Error. %n
59802 FFIIPDicomQR 59811 FFTsImgRetInd 59812 FFTsImgRetInd 59813 FFTsImgRetInd 59821 FFMaRetrieve 59822 FFMaRetrieve 59823 FFMaRetrieve 59824 FFMaRetrieve 59825 FFMaRetrieve 59826 FFMaRetrieve 59827 FFMaRetrieve 59828 FFMaRetrieve 59829 FFMaRetrieve 59830 FFMaRetrieve 59831 FFMaRetrieve 59832 FFMaRetrieve 59851 FFMaCommon 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
A database error occurred.
An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Illegal properties (AddIndicationMethod only). An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Process Communication An error occurred in the communication Error. %n control. Retrieve Process Exists. A process was started double. %n Image is Already Exists in Image input is disabled because the same ImageDB. %n image already exists in the image database. File Error. %n A file error occurred. NetWork Error. %n
The association was disconnected due to a network error. Cannot Get NetWork Necessary network settings cannot be Setting. %n acquired. DICOM Retrieve Timeout. A timeout error occurred in an attempt to %n acquire a study. DICOM Retrieve is Not DICOM acquisition processing is not Able to Use Now. %n available at present. Processing Image is Processing is disabled because the image Deleted. %n was deleted. Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly.
Remarks
Restart the system if the relevant processing has been completed. If the relevant processing remains unprocessed, there may be an illegal study in the server targeted for search of data. In this case, no particular remedial measures need to be taken. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-161
Event
Event Source
59852 FFMaCommon 59853 FFMaCommon 59855 FFMaCommon 59856 FFMaCommon 59857 FFMaCommon 59861 FFMaCommonImage 59862 FFMaCommonImage 59863 FFMaCommonImage 59871 FFTsCommon 59872 FFTsCommon 59873 FFTsCommon 59900 FFIIPImgProcServer 60000 FFCustomMsgBox
60002 FFCustomMsgBox 60050 FFCustomMsgBox 60051 FFCustomMsgBox 60052 FFCustomMsgBox 60053 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Out Of Memory Error. %n
An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred unexpectedly. Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be secured appropriately. Free Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the memory to be released appropriately. Exception Error.%n%1 An exceptional error occurred.
Remarks
Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Reinstall the system.
[60000] Failed in accessing An apostrophe was used for exposure the database. menu name setup with the user utility when the employed software version was A07 or earlier. It is conceivable that the database file is damaged or deleted. [60002] User Utility will be There is no alternative but to exit the terminated. program due to the occurrence of an abnormality. [60050] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was the character string damaged or deleted. database. [60051] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was the system setting damaged or deleted. database. [60052] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the registry the registry information. information was damaged or deleted. [60053] Value of registry It is conceivable that the registry information is abnormal. information was damaged or deleted.
Image processing server
Upgrade the software to version A08 or later. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-162
Event
Event Source
60054 FFCustomMsgBox 60055 FFCustomMsgBox 60056 FFCustomMsgBox 60057 FFCustomMsgBox 60080 FFCustomMsgBox 60081 FFCustomMsgBox 60100 FFCustomMsgBox 60114 FFCustomMsgBox 60183 FFCustomMsgBox 60184 FFCustomMsgBox 60185 FFCustomMsgBox 60203 FFCustomMsgBox 60204 FFCustomMsgBox 60205 FFCustomMsgBox 60215 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [60054] Failed in obtaining the information from the character string database. [60055] Failed in obtaining the information from the system setting database. [60056] Failed in obtaining the information from the system setting file. [60057] Failed in setting information to the system setting file. [60080] Failed in obtaining the display group information. [60081] Failed in obtaining the menu information. [60100] Failed in obtaining the MPM code. [60114] Failed in obtaining the XCON parameter. [60183] Failed in accessing the technician information database. [60184] Failed in accessing the technician information database. [60185] Failed in obtaining the information from the system setting database. [60203] Failed in accessing the requesting department information database. [60204] Failed in accessing the requesting department information database. [60205] Failed in obtaining the information from the system setting database. [60215] Failed in accessing the film annotation database.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The setup file format was incorrect or the file could not be read.
Check settings.
The setup file format was incorrect or the file could not be read.
Check settings.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted. It is conceivable that the database file was damaged or deleted.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-163
Event
Event Source
60216 FFCustomMsgBox 60251 FFCustomMsgBox 60260 FFCustomMsgBox 60300 FFCustomMsgBox 60301 FFCustomMsgBox 60302 FFCustomMsgBox 61060 FFCustomMsgBox 61082 FFCustomMsgBox 61083 FFCustomMsgBox 61084 FFCustomMsgBox 61085 FFCustomMsgBox 61090 FFCustomMsgBox 61093 FFCustomMsgBox 61094 FFCustomMsgBox 61103 FFCustomMsgBox 61106 FFCustomMsgBox 61109 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [60216] Failed in accessing the film annotation database. [60251] Image processing parameter data is abnormal. [60260] System has not been rebooted. [60300] The option and the database do not agree with each other. [60301] Data storage resulted in a failure. [60302] Failed in deleting image data. [61060] Wrong password has been input. [61082] No menu has been selected. [61083] Already registered for displaying and cannot be deleted. [61084] Already registered to the study menu and cannot be deleted. [61085] No menu was registered for a certain display group. [61090] Invalid character has been input in the display group name. [61093] Display group will be deleted. [61094] Display group name is illegal. [61103] Same extension menu code already exists. [61106] Same ANK exposure menu name already exists. [61109] Same kanjiexposure menu name already exists.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs, damaged or deleted. perform a reinstallation. The image processing parameter data is abnormal.
Check the image processing parameters.
It is conceivable that the IIP executable file Reinstall. was damaged or deleted. The menu data and the option do not Install a menu that is suited to the option. agree with each other. The database file may have been damaged or deleted. The database file may have been damaged or deleted. An incorrect password was entered.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Reinstall. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The password is fixed at “1111”.
An attempt was made to start an editing or like operation without selecting any menu. The menu could not be deleted because it was registered for display.
Complete a menu selection before initiating an editing or like operation. Clear the registration for display and then delete the menu.
The menu could not be deleted because it Remove the target menu from the was registered for the examination menu. examination menu in advance. A certain display group was empty because No empty display group is allowed to exist. no menu was registered for it. Register one or more menus for the display group or delete the display group. The entered data was abnormal due, for Make a proper entry. instance, to the inclusion of an unacceptable character. This window opens for confirmation only. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
Make a proper entry.
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
Enter another value.
Enter another value. Enter another value.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-164
Event
Event Source
Description
61110 FFCustomMsgBox
[61110] Extension menu code is illegal.
61111 FFCustomMsgBox
[61111] ANK exposure menu name is illegal.
61112 FFCustomMsgBox
[61112] Kanji-exposure menu name is illegal.
61122 FFCustomMsgBox
[61122] MPM code is illegal.
61125 FFCustomMsgBox
[61125] Same film annotation already exists. [61130] Device code is illegal.
61130 FFCustomMsgBox
Causes
Remedies
The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. An attempt was made to start an editing or like operation without selecting any menu. The maximum permissible number of menu registrations was exceeded. The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
61131 FFCustomMsgBox
[61131] Film-related code is illegal.
61132 FFCustomMsgBox
[61132] Auto-exposure mechanism is illegal.
61142 FFCustomMsgBox
[61142] Same study menu code already exists. [61145] Same ANK study menu name already exists. [61148] Same kanji-study menu name already exists. [61149] No exposure menu has been selected. [61151] Exposure menu cannot be registered. [61152] Same exposure menu has already been registered. [61153] Study menu code The entered data was abnormal due, for is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. [61154] ANK study menu The entered data was abnormal due, for code is illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character.
61145 FFCustomMsgBox 61148 FFCustomMsgBox 61149 FFCustomMsgBox 61151 FFCustomMsgBox 61152 FFCustomMsgBox 61153 FFCustomMsgBox 61154 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Enter another value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Enter another value. Enter another value. Enter another value. Complete a menu selection before initiating an editing or like operation. Delete any unnecessary menu. Enter another value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-165
Event
Event Source
61155 FFCustomMsgBox 61171 FFCustomMsgBox 61172 FFCustomMsgBox 61173 FFCustomMsgBox 61174 FFCustomMsgBox 61175 FFCustomMsgBox 61176 FFCustomMsgBox 61177 FFCustomMsgBox 61178 FFCustomMsgBox 61179 FFCustomMsgBox 61180 FFCustomMsgBox 61181 FFCustomMsgBox 61182 FFCustomMsgBox 61191 FFCustomMsgBox 61192 FFCustomMsgBox 61193 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [61155] Kanji-study menu code is illegal.
Causes
Remedies
The entered data was abnormal due, for instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. [61171] No technician code An attempt was made to register data with has been input. an input field left blank. [61172] Technician code is The entered data was abnormal due, for illegal. instance, to its excessive length or the inclusion of an unacceptable character. [61173] Invalid character An unacceptable character was contained. has been input in the technician code. [61174] Same technician The entered data value was already code already exists. registered or otherwise unacceptable. [61175] No ANK technician An attempt was made to register data with name has been input. an input field left blank. [61176] ANK technician The entered data was too long. name is too long. [61177] Invalid character An unacceptable character was contained. has been input in the ANK technician name. [61178] Same ANK The entered data value was already technician name already registered or otherwise unacceptable. exists. [61179] No kanji-technician An attempt was made to register data with name has been input. an input field left blank. [61180] Kanji-technician The entered data was too long. name is too long. [61181] Invalid character An unacceptable character was contained. has been input in the kanjitechnician name. [61182] Same kanjiThe entered data value was already technician name already registered or otherwise unacceptable. exists. [61191] No requesting An attempt was made to register data with department code has been an input field left blank. input. [61192] Requesting The entered data was too long. department code is too long. [61193] Invalid character An unacceptable character was contained. has been input in the requesting department code.
Remarks
Make a proper entry. Enter a value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Enter another value. Enter a value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Enter another value. Enter a value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry. Enter another value. Enter a value. Make a proper entry. Make a proper entry.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-166
Event
Event Source
61194 FFCustomMsgBox
Causes
Remedies
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable. No media was inserted into the drive.
Enter another value.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61194] Same requesting department code already exists. [61195] No ANK requesting department name has been input. [61196] ANK requesting department name is too long. [61197] Invalid character has been input in the ANK requesting department name. [61198] Same ANK requesting department name already exists. [61199] No kanji-requesting department name has been input. [61200] Kanji-requesting department name is too long. [61201] Invalid character has been input in the Kanjirequesting department name. [61202] Same kanjirequesting department name already exists. [61211] No film annotation characters have been input. [61212] Film annotation characters are too long. [61213] Invalid character has been input in the film annotation characters. [61214] Same film annotation already exists. [61224] Drive is not ready.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61234] Drive is not ready.
No media was inserted into the drive.
Insert media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61235] Wrong disk
A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61236] Wrong disk
A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
61195 FFCustomMsgBox 61196 FFCustomMsgBox 61197 FFCustomMsgBox
61198 FFCustomMsgBox 61199 FFCustomMsgBox 61200 FFCustomMsgBox 61201 FFCustomMsgBox
61202 FFCustomMsgBox 61211 FFCustomMsgBox 61212 FFCustomMsgBox 61213 FFCustomMsgBox 61214 FFCustomMsgBox 61224 61234 61235 61236
Description
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Enter another value.
An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value. an input field left blank. The entered data was too long.
Make a proper entry.
An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
Enter another value.
An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value. an input field left blank. The entered data was too long.
Make a proper entry.
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
Make a proper entry.
The entered data value was already registered or otherwise unacceptable.
Enter another value.
An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value. an input field left blank. The entered data was too long. Make a proper entry. An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
Insert media.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-167
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
[61300] Backup processing resulted in a failure. [61301] Restore processing resulted in a failure. [61302] An error of unknown cause occurred. [61303] Failed in importing the consumables database. [61340] A file backed up with another application cannot be restored.
The database file may have been damaged or deleted. The database file may have been damaged or deleted. The system was unstable.
This window opens for confirmation only.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64230] Restoring is interrupted. [64231] Restoring is completed. [64232] Being restored.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64233] Insert FD.
This window opens for confirmation only.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64237] Insert FD.
This window opens for confirmation only.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64250] Parameter Batch Updating [64313] Unable to obtain system configuration of the target destination for image data transfer. [64314] Unable to obtain system configuration.
This window opens for confirmation only.
61300 FFCustomMsgBox 61301 FFCustomMsgBox 61302 FFCustomMsgBox 61303 FFCustomMsgBox 61340 FFCustomMsgBox
61341 FFCustomMsgBox 61342 FFCustomMsgBox 64220 FFCustomMsgBox 64221 FFCustomMsgBox 64222 FFCustomMsgBox 64223 FFCustomMsgBox 64230 FFCustomMsgBox 64231 FFCustomMsgBox 64232 64233 64237 64250
64313 FFCustomMsgBox
64314 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies
Remarks
Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. The problem is attributable, for instance, to Prepare a consumables database again. a damaged file. An attempt was made to restore a backup To restore to the IIP, use a backup file made by the Viewer for use with the IIP or generated by the IIP. To restore to the to restore a backup made by the IIP for Viewer, use a backup file generated by the use with the Viewer. Viewer. [61341] This is not a A file other than Supply.mdb was selected Select a Supply.mdb file. contrast medium database for an import. file. [61342] No backup files Specified drive or folder can be incorrect. Specify a correct destination for data exist. backup. [64220] Backup is This window opens for confirmation only. interrupted. [64221] Backup is This window opens for confirmation only. completed. [64222] Backup is being This window opens for confirmation only. prepared. [64223] Insert FD. This window opens for confirmation only.
This window opens for confirmation only. This window opens for confirmation only.
The setup file format is not correct or cannot be read.
Check settings.
The setup file format is not correct or cannot be read.
Check settings.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-168
Event
Event Source
64460 FFCustomMsgBox
64595 FFCustomMsgBox 70000 FFCustomMsgBox 70001 FFCustomMsgBox 70002 FFCustomMsgBox 70005 FFCustomMsgBox 70006 FFCustomMsgBox 70007 FFCustomMsgBox 70008 FFCustomMsgBox 70009 FFCustomMsgBox 70010 FFCustomMsgBox 70011 FFCustomMsgBox 70012 FFCustomMsgBox 70013 FFCustomMsgBox 70014 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[64460] File extension is not possible because the MPM code has reached its limit for extension. [64595] Failed in launching Ascent View setting window. [70000] Failed in conversion of mis-exposure image log information. [70001] Failed in deletion of log files.
The MPM code has reached its limit.
Allot existing MPM code or use extended MPM code.
The linking application is not installed correctly.
Reinstall the linking application.
It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData. mdb file is write-protected.
[70002] Failed in accessing the definition file. [70005] Connection to the system setting database resulted unsuccessful. [70006] Failed in acquiring information from the system setting database. [70007] Connection to the character string database resulted unsuccessful. [70008] Failed in acquiring information from the character string database. [70009] Failed in acquiring registry information. [70010] Failed in writing registry information. [70011] Failed in acquiring technologist information. [70012] Failed in acquiring classifications of misexposure images. [70013] Failed in acquiring comments on mis-exposure images. [70014] Connection to the log information database resulted unsuccessful.
It is possible that the file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file properties to check to see if it is writeprotected. Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file properties to check to see if it is writeprotected. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the registry information is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the registry information is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData. mdb file is write-protected.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-169
Event
Event Source
70015 FFCustomMsgBox
70016 FFCustomMsgBox 70017 FFCustomMsgBox 70019 FFCustomMsgBox 70020 FFCustomMsgBox 70021 FFCustomMsgBox 70022 FFCustomMsgBox 70023 FFCustomMsgBox 70024 FFCustomMsgBox
70025 FFCustomMsgBox
70026 FFCustomMsgBox 70027 FFCustomMsgBox 70028 FFCustomMsgBox 70029 FFCustomMsgBox 70030 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [70015] Failed in acquiring information for setup of mis-exposure image analysis. [70016] Failed in reading image files. [70017] Failed in displaying images. [70019] Failed in conversion of date format. [70020] Failed in storage of the mis-exposure image log list. [70021] Failed in storage of the calculation result. [70022] An error occurred while an image is being displayed. [70023] An unknown error occurred. [70024] Connection to the database of regions to be exposed resulted unsuccessful. [70025] Connection to the database of causes of mis-exposure images resulted unsuccessful. [70026] Failed in calculation of the mis-exposure image log. [70027] Failed in displaying calculation result of the mis-exposure image log. [70028] Connection to the network setting database resulted unsuccessful. [70029] Failed in acquiring necessary data from the network setting database. [70030] Failed in displaying the list.
Causes It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Remedies
Remarks
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the image file is damaged Although the image file in question is not or deleted. displayed, there are no problems with other operations. An error occurred while in image Restart the system. If the same symptom processing. recurs, perform a reinstallation. The date display format may have been Input in a correct format. input incorrectly. This error is displayed when a failure Retry data store. If the same symptom occurred in data storage. recurs, change the destination for storage accordingly. This error is displayed when a failure Retry data storage. If the same symptom occurred in data storage. recurs, change the destination for storage accordingly. It is possible that the image display control Restart the system. If the same symptom or image file has a problem. recurs, perform a reinstallation. The system was unstable. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-170
Event
Event Source
70031 FFCustomMsgBox 70032 FFCustomMsgBox 70033 FFCustomMsgBox 70034 FFCustomMsgBox 70035 FFCustomMsgBox 70036 FFCustomMsgBox 70037 FFCustomMsgBox 70038 FFCustomMsgBox 70039 FFCustomMsgBox 70040 FFCustomMsgBox 70041 FFCustomMsgBox 70042 FFCustomMsgBox 70043 FFCustomMsgBox 94001 FFCustomMsgBox 94002 FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Description [70031] Free hard disk space for writing data is insufficient. [70032] Failed in deleting the mis-exposure image log. [70033] Failed in deleting the exposure result log. [70034] Failed in deleting an image file. [70035] Failed in writing image data in the system setting database. [70036] Failed in writing image data in the display setting database. [70037] Failed in relocating the tree structure. [70038] Failed in reducing the tree structure. [70039] Transition to the main window resulted unsuccessful. [70040] Failed in accessing the menu database. [70041] Failed in accessing the log information database. [70042] Failed in accessing the system setup database. [70043] Failed in storage of image data.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The size of the file copied is too large to be Replace for media of large capacity, if accommodated in the media. available. It is possible that the file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
The system was unstable. The system was unstable. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is possible that the database file is damaged or deleted. It is possible that the file is damaged or deleted. It is also possible that the target media for file storage has problems. This window opens for confirmation only.
Restart the system. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation. Retry file storage. If the same symptom recurs, perform a reinstallation.
[94001] The scanner cleaning process was completed. [94002] The scanner Dust removal was unaccomplished due to Check the RU status. cleaning process could not a problem on the RU side. be performed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-171
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx1 MT-172
Appendix 2 Cooper Application Error Message Table ID
Message
00005
Cooper application’s ID is not specified.
00005
Application configuration error.
00005 00005
Application configuration error. Create WCF client failed. Initialize WCF communication failed.
00015
Application configuration error. Start service failed.
00240
Initialize WCF failed.
00240
Send message failed.
00345 10000
Given file ‘[Path]’ contains data that not valid/suitable for binding into application. Another application instance is running.
10005
Create WCF client failed.
10005
10010
No service is running on specified endpoint. Create WCF client failed. No service is running on specified endpoint. Create WCF channel failed. Communication error.
10015
Start service failed.
10015
A communication error occurs. Start service failed.
10035
A communication error occurs. Send message failed.
10050
Invalid operation. Create WCF client failed.
10050
No service is running on specified endpoint. Create WCF client failed. DDO file path is null or empty Image file is not found
10010
10070 10071
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Another CooperManager instance is running. (The Restart the system. system can only perform one instance at one time.) The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The config file does not exist or is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. The DDO file does not exist. Restart the system. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-1
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10071 10071 10071 10071 10071 10072 10075 10180
Image file path is empty Cannot get image width Cannot get image height Cannot get image depth DDO object of DDO file {0} is null Load image’s buffer fail Don’t enough free memory Start CooperManager failed.
The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file is damaged. Not enough memory to be used. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10205
Create proces for ‘{0}’ application failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10205
Color code in appconfig is incorrected
The config file is damaged.
10210 10210 10215
Input string was not in a correct format. Value was either too large or too small for an Int32. Start Cooper application’s process failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10220
Can not load autolayout file.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10221
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10225
Can not start hook key for application switching function. Can not unset hook key for application switching function. Invalid number of screen.
10230
Config TargetView is invalid.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10230
Can not create switch listener form.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10230
Send command active app false.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10230
Send command deactive current app false.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10230
Send command failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10235
Create named pipe object failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10235
Send message failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10235
Close named pipe object failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10221
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-2
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10240
Initialize IPCHandler failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10240
Initialize WMHandler failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10240
Initialize WCF failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10240
Value of timeout start Cooper application (in SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value of timeout start Cooper application (in SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value cannot be null. Value of timeout start Cooper application (in SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Input string was not in a correct format. Value of timeout start Cooper application (in SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value was either too large or too small for an Int32. Start CooperApp failed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10295
The config for Config folder is not found in the file DirectoryDef.xml Unauthorized Access to the folder:[Folder Name]
10295
Path of this folder is too long: [Path]
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10295
The Config folder: [Folder name] is not found.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10295 10301
File: [Config file]: The Config element with Key=[Key] is The config file does not exist or is damaged. invalid. Error in load multi language. The config file is damaged.
10302
Error in load multi language.
The config file is damaged.
10302
Error when apply auto layout
The config file is damaged.
10302
Error when get size of config folder.
The config file does not exist.
10302
Error when delete temporary folder.
The Temp file does not exist or the authority may not have been granted.
10302
Not permission in destination folder.
No access authority to the destination folder.
10302
Unknow error while copying file.
The config file is damaged.
10240 10240 10240 10240 10295
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. • Confrim the authority to the folder “C:\Program Files\ Fujifilm\Cooper\Data\Temp”. • If the problem continues to occur, restart the system. • Allot authority to the storage folder for backup files. • If failed again, restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-3
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10302
Unknow error occured.
The config file is damaged.
10302
The config file does not exist.
10302
Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef. xml Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml
10302 10302
Config folder has not any files Version file in system folder not found.
10302
Error occur when create temporary folder.
The config file does not exist. The version.xml file does not exist in the Cooper/ System folder. No access authority to the temporary folder.
10302
Time out when extract or compress config folder.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Error when apply auto layout
The config file is damaged.
10303
Not permission in destination folder.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Unknow error while copying file.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Unknow error occured.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Version file in system folder not found.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Version file not found.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Load version file in backup folder error
The config file is damaged.
10303
Load version file in system folder error.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Error in read value in config file.
The config file is damaged.
10303
The config file is damaged.
10303
Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef. xml Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml.
10303
Error occur when create temporary folder.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Time out when extract or compress config folder.
The config file is damaged.
10303
Error in load multi language.
The config file is damaged.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The config file is damaged.
The config file is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall the application. Reinstall the application. • Allot authority of the Cooper/Data folder. • Restart the application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-4
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10304
Error when show message dialog.
The config file is damaged.
10320
Error occurred. Message: {0}. StackTrace: {1}.
The config file is damaged.
10320
The config file is damaged.
10320
The directory {0} is not found. Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from {NetSetting file} Cannot locate specified file: {Path}. Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. Can’t load xml node into entity
10320
Can’t load file {0} to XmlDocument
The config file is damaged.
10320
Can’t load protocol info from xml node
The config file is damaged.
10320
Error occurred while trying to operate with specified File/Folder ‘{NetSetting.xml}’ (probably invalid location or permission error). Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. Cannot operate with file ‘{NetSettingPath}’ due to permission problem occurred. Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. Can’t save an object to xml node
The config file is damaged.
Cannot open XML file {0}. Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. Cannot open XML file {NetSetting.xml}. Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}. The AdjustLayout function of AutoLayout class: Control input is null Config TargetView is invalid.
The config file is damaged.
Given key ‘AppScreenFolderKey’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Config file’. Directory definition not found for key : ‘AppScreenFolderKey’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from [Auto layout file name] Given key ‘[Mode type]’ does not exist for lookup from Collection. Cannot locate specified file: [Image file].
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10320 10320
10320 10320 10320 10320 10345 10345 10345 10345 10345 10345 10345
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged.
The config file is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-5
ID 10345
Message
Causes
Remedies
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10365
Given file ‘[screen layout file]’ contains data that not valid/suitable for binding into application. Not enough argument to format a text string
10365
Format of input string is invalid format
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10365
Content of exception
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10375
“Given key [Message id] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. [MessageBoxDef.xml file].” Parameter is null The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10380 10385 10385 10385 10385 10385 10385 10410 10410 10410 10410 10410 10410 10410 10410
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Given key ‘AppScreenFolderKey’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Config file’. The directory [Directory key] is not found.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Cannot operate with directory ‘[Directory path]’ due to permission problem occurred. The directory [Directory path] is not found.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Error occurred while trying to operate with specified File/Folder ‘[File path]’ (probably invalid location or permission error). Error occurred while try saving data to specified file.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Cannot operate with directory ‘[Directory path]’ due to permission problem occurred. The directory [Directory path] is not found.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Required parameter ‘LoadXMLConfigFile’ is null or empty Error occurred while trying to perform: Failed while trying to load XML Config file to entities Required parameter ‘xmlFile’ is null or empty
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Given key ‘[Config file name]’ does not exist for lookup The config file does not exist or is damaged. from ‘ConfigData (ConfigAccessor)’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve The config file does not exist or is damaged. data from ConfigData (ConfigAccessor) Given key ‘[Keyword]’ does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged. ‘ConfigData (ConfigAccessor)’.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-6
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10430
Required parameter ‘itemKey’ is null or empty
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10430
Given key ‘[Keyword]’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Directories (DirectoryAccessor)’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from ‘Directories (DirectoryAccessor)’ Given key ‘AppName’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Config file’. Another item has the same key with ‘[message id]’ is already existed. Given key ‘TargetView’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Config file’. Given key ‘monitorType’ does not exist for lookup from ‘Monitors (MonitorAccesor)’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from ‘’Monitors (MonitorAccesor)’ Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from ‘AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor>GetNoteInfoEntity)’. Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from ‘AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor>GetNoteInfoEntity)’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor)’. Given key ‘Corner’ does not exist for lookup from ‘ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor>GetListItemAtCorner)’. Given key ‘Corner’ does not exist for lookup from ‘CornerItemSetting (NoteInfoAccessor->Save)’. Given key ‘Corner’ does not exist for lookup from ‘NoteItemList (NoteInfoAccessor>BindPrivateProperty)’. Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve data from dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor). Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from ‘dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor)’ Error occurred while trying to operate with specified File/Folder [Path] (probably invalid location or permission error). Another item has the same key with [AttributeName] is already existed. Fail to validate XML structure for specified file: [Path].
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10430 10435 10435 10450 10450 10450 10465 10465 10465 10465 10465 10465 10465 10465 10565 10565 10565
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-7
ID 10565
Message
Causes
Remedies
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10565
Method [Method name]: Required parameter [List parameters] is null or empty” Error occurred while try saving data to specified file: [Path]. The directory [Path] is not found.
10565
Cannot locate specified file: [Path].
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10565
Cannot open XML file [Path].
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10565
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
10605
Cannot operate with file [Path] due to permission problem occurred. Value of Pixel pitch space must be greater than 0
10605
Value of Pixel pitch monitor must be greater than 0
The config file is damaged.
10605
Error code + Error message
The config file is damaged.
10605 10615 10615 10615 10615 10615 10615
Number of images is invalid Can’t get image width. Can’t get image height Can’t get image bitstored. Can’t get image depth Can’t get image density Don’t support this output type.
The DDO file is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The config file is damaged.
10615
Can’t get SQ for image processing parameters.
The config file is damaged.
10615
Image’s depth is invalid.
The config file is damaged.
10615
Error in ProcRun method of IPHandle object.
10565
10615 10615 10615 10635
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
The config file is damaged.
The image processing parameter file of the CL application is damaged. Error in Initialize method of IPHandle object. The image processing parameter file of the CL application is damaged. Can’t get Param path. The image processing parameter file of the CL application is damaged. Error in ConvertParamToXML method of FMImgParam The image processing parameter file of the CL object. application is damaged. Note config file reading error The NoteInfoDef.xml file does not exist or is damaged.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-8
ID 10640
Message
Causes
Remedies
10640 10640
“Item \”[Item name]” don’t have DDO tag in Note config The config file is damaged. file” “[Value]” is not appropriate number format. The DDO file is damaged. “[Value]” is not appropriate hexadecimal format.” The config file is damaged.
10640 10640
Value’[Tag value]’ is overflow double type “[Tag value]” is not appropriate date time format.
10640
Number of DDO tag differ from value of “Num” attribute The config file is damaged.
10640
“[Tag value 1]”, “[Tag value 2]” are not appropriate number format. “[String tag]” is not appropriate tag format.
The DDO file is damaged.
The config file is damaged.
10680 10680
“[Tag’s value 1]” or “[Tag’s value 2]” is not appropriate date time format. Given key ‘TargetView’ does not exist for lookup from Config file Given key ‘AppShortName’ does not exist for lookup from Config file Can’t make {0} ({1:X8}) tag. Call FFCutMultibyte method is fail.
10680
Call FFConvertCNStoUTF8 method is fail.
10680
Call FFConvertGB2312toGB18030 method is fail.
10680
Wrong characterset.
The DDO file is damaged. The necessary component for image display is damaged. The necessary component for image display is damaged. The necessary component for image display is damaged. The config file is damaged.
10685
Exception content.
The config file is damaged.
10685
Can not process searching while key search is empty.
The config file is damaged.
10685
Search process is failed.
The config file is damaged.
10685
Get PACS infor error.
The config file is damaged.
10685
Can not create DDO key search.
The config file is damaged.
10685
Search process can only perform when DicomQuery’s status is Idle. Not enough memory to start retrieve
The config file is damaged.
10640 10640 10675 10675
10715
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system.
The DDO file is damaged. The config file is damaged.
The config file is damaged.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Not enough memory to be used.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-9
ID 10715 10715 10715 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10720 10725 10725 10725 10730 10730 10730 10740 10740 10740 10740 10740
Message Retrieve data time out
Causes
Remedies
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Can’t delete old images file at folder: {0}. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, restart the system. Can’t get AE: [AEName] in DicomQRNetSetting.xml file Incorrect settings of PACS server. Confirm the PACS settings of S-UTL. After setting normally, restart the system. Can’t append ddo tag: {0:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Can’t append ddo tag: {0:x} or {1:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. index: ‘{0}’ of pixel spacing is out of range The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Get value of tag: {0:x} failure. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Invalid direction scan {0} The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Can’t copy value of tag: {0:x} to tag: {1:x}. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Can’t delete ddo tag: {0:x} The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Read density is empty. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Read density is not double type. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Cannot set value for Kanji Patient name tag. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Cannot set value for Patient name tag. Retrieved image folder: ‘{0}’ don’t exist. The config file is damaged. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Can’t load DDO file: The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. Can’t rename retrieved file. The DDO file is damaged. Restart the system. • ImgProcCtrl.dll does not exist. • Restart the system. Process image failure • Incorrect image information of DDO file. • Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is supported. DLL for processing image not found. ImgProcCtrl.dl does not exist. • Restart the system. • Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is supported. Access COM component fail. An error occurs when accessing to the function of • Restart the system. “ImgProcCtrl.dll”. • Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is supported. Can’t load DDO file: {0} • The DDO file does not exist. Restart the system. • The DDO file format is not the standard format of DICOM. Can’t read image file path at tag {0} The tag which specifies path to the DDO file does Restart the system. not exist. Image file: ‘{0}’ don’t exist The image file does not exist. • Confirm the file path again. • If the error continues to occur, restart the system. Not enough memory to read image file {0} Not enough memory to be used. Restart the system. Open Image file: ‘{0}’ error • The image file does not exist. • Confirm the file path again. • The path of the image file is too long. • If the error continues to occur, restart the system.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The config file is damaged.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-10
ID
Message
10740 10740 10740
Allocate memory for image buffer failure Not enough memory to save image file {0} Can’t save buffer to image with path: ‘{0}’
10740 10740 10740 10745
Not enough memory to retrieve image to client Not enough memory to process image during retrieval period Can’t delete original image that retrieved from server. Store image thead has unknow error
20005
Causes
Remedies
Not enough memory to be used. Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve images. • Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve image. • The file path is too long. • The storage folder of file does not exist. • No authority to write in files. Not enough memory to be used. Not enough memory to be used.
Restart the system. Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application. • Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application. • Confirm the authority to write in files and the existance of storage folder.
Confirm the authority to delete files in the folder. Reinstall the CL application.
Application configuration error.
No authority to delete files. The necessary component for image display is damaged. The config file is damaged.
20005
The operation is timeout. Create WCF channel failed.
The config file is damaged.
20005
The operation is timeout. Stop service failed.
The config file is damaged.
20010
The operation is timeout. Send message failed.
The config file is damaged.
20050
Start service [Service name] failed.
The config file is damaged.
20175
Create process for [AppName]’ application failed.
The config file is damaged.
20205
Start Cooper applications failed. Time out occurs.
The config file is damaged.
20205 20205
The file on path [Path] is not exist or maybe it is already The config file is damaged. running. Create process for ‘{0}’ application failed. The config file is damaged.
20215 20235
(EventHandler) handler is null This TypeCode [TypeCode] is not supported.
Retrieve an event without the delegate function. The config file is damaged.
20350
Application ID [AppID] is duplicated.
The config file is damaged.
20350
The message string appended with the string representation of the invalid argument value. Can’t get tag number. DDO file is not found. Load DDO file is error. Can’t get TypeCode of tag [Tag]
The DDO file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system.
The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged.
Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system. Restart the system.
20350 20350 20350 20350
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Restart the system. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-11
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
20350 20350 20350
Can’t get Length of tag [Tag]. Length of tag [Tag] equal 0. [DLL] specified in a DLL import cannot be found
The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The Dll file does not exist or is damaged.
20615
Close SysConfigDB error.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is damaged.
20615
Can’t connect to SysConfigDB.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is damaged.
20615
Can’t get SysConfigDB path.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is damaged.
20615
Can’t get GA offset from DB.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is damaged.
20615
Can’t get GS offset from DB.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is damaged.
20715
Port: ‘[PortNo]’ is not available.
The config file is damaged.
20720
Cannot get value of Patient name tag.
The DDO file is damaged.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Restart the system. Restart the system. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx2 MT-12
Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function Error Message Table NOTE “ECHO” represents “Precise Enlargement Function”.
ID 01001 01005 01010 01010 01015
Message
01145
Unknown error Not found config file: Echo.Config.exe Saving data error Content of exception UserUtility: The config with Key={0} is not found in the config file of application VersionInformation: The Application element with ID={0} in the version file can’t be load. Unknown error
01145 01145
Can’t Load ImageError file : Can’t get PEM value
01145
Can’t connect to database
01145
Not found Monitor LUT file
01165
The string with Id=[LanguageID] is not found in the language file Not found AppName key Another application instance is running. DDO file is not found Save Font information to application config file error. Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio is invalid Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio must be greater than 0 Image buffer’s size is invalid Error occurred by ImgProcCtrl::Execute(Path=”[DDO file path]”,ProcFlag=[pem process],ProcImgType= [Image type],FuncID=[Function ID],ErrID=[Error id], ErrDetailID=[Error detail]) Image file is not found [ArgumentException] Not found resource file
01025
01390 10000 11005 11010 11155 11155 11375 11380
11380 21175 21390
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies
An unknown error has occurred. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Restart the system or reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO.
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall the CL application.
The necessary component for image display is damaged. The resource file does not exist or is damaged. The image processing parameter file of the CL application is damaged or the PEM value itself does not exist. The database of the CL application does not exist or is damaged. The monitor LUT file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall ECHO. Verify the setting of the CL application. ConfigQA->“PEM Processing in the case of Magnify Display” Reinstall the CL application. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall ECHO.
The config file does not exist or is damaged. There is a running ECHO process. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file is damaged. Not enough memory. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Or the image processing parameter file of the CL application is damaged.
Reinstall ECHO. Restart the system. Exposure again. Reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO. Reinstall ECHO. Restart the system. Exposure again. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL application.
Failure in generation of image data by Console.
Restart the system.
The resource file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall ECHO.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx3 MT-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx3 MT-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx3 MT-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx3 MT-4
Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement Error Message Table NOTE “ROI” represents “QA ROI Measurement”.
ID
Message
01001 01010
Unknown Error! Not found config file: {0}
01045
01390
VersionInformation: The string with Id={0} in the language file can’t be load. VersionInformation: The Application element with ID={0} in the version file can’t be load. Unknown Error!
10000 11005
Another application instance is running. Cannot get information about monitor.
11005
Monitor LUT file not exist.
11015 11015 11015 11020 11025 11025
Could not found DDO file! Get image type failed! Load image information failed! Bad input parameters! Can not load DDO file! High quality image file does not exist!
11025
Standard image file does not exist!
11025 11025 11025 11025 11025 11025 11025 11025 11025
Can not get high quality image’s URL! Can not get standard image’s URL! Can not get image’s depth! Can not get image’s height! Can not get image’s width! Can not get image’s pixel spacing X! Can not get image’s pixel spacing Y! Can not get image’s density! Can not get device processing description!
01045
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies
An unknown error has occurred. The ROI.exe.config file does not exist. Or the file is deleted or renamed by user mistakenly. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. An unknown error has occurred when error message dialog box appears. There is a running ROI process. The monitor information file is damaged. The monitor LUT file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The config file is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The high resolution image file does not exist. The standard-pixel density image file does not exist. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged.
Restart the system or reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Restart the system or reinstall ROI. Restart the system. Set the 1st monitor again at the “Change Monitor” from ROI installer. Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which have been installed. Open the QA window again. Reinstall ROI. Open the QA window again. Reinstall ROI. Open the QA window again. • After storing the high resolution images to the console, press the ROI measurement button again. • If the problem continues to occur, restart the system. Open the QA window again or exposure again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx4 MT-1
ID 11025 11025 11030 11035 11040 21005 21005 21030 31010 31010 31010
Message Can not get image’s sensitivity! Can not get image’s rotate/invert state! Read configuration information failed! Bad parameters! Bad parameters! Can not apply layout for screen. Can not set string definition for screen items. Invalid XML file format! Roi started OK! Receive command: {0} Receive message: {0}
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies
The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. The config file does not exist or is damaged. The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged. The config file is damaged. -
Open the QA window again. Open the QA window again. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. Reinstall ROI. -
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx4 MT-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx4 MT-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx4 MT-4
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
RI: Reinstalling the Software
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-I
RI: Reinstalling the Software
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000 12/10/2000
00 00
New release (FM2862) Revision (FM2950)
04/10/2001
01
05/30/2001
02
Previous Chapter D “Reinstalling the Software” modified (FM2951) Revision for software version A02
08/30/2001
03
Revision for software version A04 (FM3125)
08/30/2001
03
Changes in pagination (FM3125)
03/20/2002
04
Revision for software version A07 (FM3297)
03/20/2002 07/20/2002
04 05
Changes in pagination (FM3297) Revision for software version A08 (FM3428)
07/20/2002
05
Changes in pagination (FM3428)
11/30/2002
06
Revision for software version A09 (FM3499)
11/30/2002 03/01/2003
06 07
Changes in pagination (FM3499) Revision for software version A10 (FM3634)
03/01/2003 08/20/2003
07 08
Changes in pagination (FM3634) Revision for software version A11 (FM4009)
12/10/2003
09
Revision for software version B00 (FM4158)
12/10/2003
09
Changes in pagination (FM4158)
02/20/2004
10
A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220)
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected All pages I, II, 5, 7, 8, 9, 13–15, 22, 23, 27, 28, 33, 35, 39, 40 All pages I, II, 1, 3–5, 8, 9, 11, 13-16, 18–42, Appx A-1–8, Appx B-1–4, Appx C-1, 2, Appx D-1–6, I, II, 1, 3, 4, 7, 12–17, 21, 22, 24–29,31, 32, 34, 35, 37, 38, 41 Appx A-1, 4, 7, Appx C-3, 4, Appx D-1, 3, 4, 6-8 18–20, 23, 30, 33, 36, 39, 40, 42–46 I, II, 15, 34, 41, Appx A-7, Appx B-1–3, Appx D-1, 4 Appx D-2, 3, 5, 6-8 I, II, 13-16, 19–24, 26, 28, 29, 31, 32, 38, 39, 41, 45–48, 54, Appx A-1, 7, Appx D-1, 2, 4–7, Appx E-1–4, Appx F-1–4 12, 17, 18, 25, 27, 30, 33–37, 40, 42–44, 49–53, Appx D-8–10 I, II, 3, 4, 9, 22, 24, 26, 28, 31–33, 38, Appx D-1, 2, 4–9, 11, Appx F-5, 6 Appx D-10, 12 I, II, 20, 22, 26, 32–34, 39, Appx C-2–4, Appx D-1, 7 40-54 I, II, 1, 3, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, 26–28, 31–45, 48–58, Appx C-2, Appx D-1 I–IV, 22, 25, 29, 38, 41, Appx A-7, Appx C-2, Appx D-1, Appx D-2 26–28, 30–37, 39, 40, 42–58, Appx D-3–14 All pages
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-II
RI: Reinstalling the Software
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
07/30/2004
11
07/30/2004
11
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005 11/30/2005
14 15
11/30/2005 07/30/2006
15 16
07/30/2006
16
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007 05/09/2008
17 18
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
Revision for software version B00 (FM4254)
I, III, 1, 3–40, 46–48, 52, 57, 58, 60, 62, 63, 66, 67, 75, 76, 78, Appx A-1–6, 8–16, Appx B-1, 2, Appx D-1, 2, 5–8, 10, 14, Appx E-1, 2, Appx F-1 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 41–45, 49–51, 53–56, 59, 61, 64, 65, 68–74, 77, 79, 80, Appx A-7, Appx B-3, 4, Appx D-11–13 Revision for software version V1.0(C), support I, III, 1, 3, 41, 43, 45, 46, 50, 55, 57, provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) 59, 60, 62–64, 67, 75, 78, Appx C-1–4, Appx G-1–12 Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, III, 1, 3, 4, 43, 47, 57, 58, 61, 64, 65, 67, 75, 81–86, Appx A-2, Appx D-2, 10, Appex G-1, 2, 12 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 44 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I, III, 1, 45, 47, 53, 55, 57, 64, 66, 74, 83, Appx G-1, 11, 12, Appx H-1–4 Changes in pagination (FM4760) 46 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, III, 5, 23, 44, 46, 49-53, 66, 73, Appx RI A-13–17, Appx RI D-2, 3, 7, 11, 14, Appx RI G-10–12, 16 Appex RI I-1–6 Changes in pagination (FM4952) 6–13, 24–43, 45, 47, 48, 54–65, 67–72, 74–90, Appx RI A-18, Appx RI G-13–15 Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) I, III, 1–3, 10, 11, 26, 42–48, 51, 53, 56–58, 60–63, 65–67, 69, 71, 77, 78, 81, 84, Appx RI A-10, Appx RI C-2–4, 6–8, Appx RI D-2, 9, 15–18, Appx RI G-1, 2, 13–16, Appx RI H-1, Appx RI I-7, 8 Changes in pagination (FM5201) Appx RI C-5, Appx RI D-10–14 Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) I, III, 1, 3, 42, 44, 46, 53, 56–58, 60–63, 65, 66, 67–69, 71, 77, 78, 81, 84, Appx RI C-4, Appx RI D-2, 17, Appx RI G-1, 2, 13, 14, 16, Appx RI H-1
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-III
RI: Reinstalling the Software
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
10/31/2008
19
Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460)
10/31/2008
19
Changes in pagination (FM5460)
11/30/2009
20
Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622)
11/30/2009
20
Changes in pagination (FM5622)
03/31/2010
21
Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670)
03/31/2010
21
Changes in pagination (FM5670)
12/10/2010
22
Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817)
12/10/2010
22
Changes in pagination (FM5817)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected I, IV, 1, 3, 42, 44, 46–49, 51, 54, 57–59, 61, 63, 64, 66–68, 70, 72, 78, 79, 82, 85, 92, Appx RI A-2, 8, 10, 20, D-2, 3, 9–11, 16, 17, G-1, 2, 13, 14, 16, H-1, J-1–4 50, 52, 53, 55, 56, 60, 62, 65, 69, 71, 73–77, 80, 81, 83, 84, 86–91, Appx RI A-11–19 I, IV, 1–4, 22, 42–81, 83, 85–96, 98–101, 103, 105–109, 111, 114, 115, 123, 126–129, 136–144, Appx A-1–5, 10–13, 21–24, B-1–3, 6, C-4, D-1–5, 10, 12–14, 17, 18, E-1, 4–6, G-1, 2, 14, 17, 18, I-7–12 82, 84, 97, 102, 104, 110, 112, 113, 116–122, 124, 125, 130–135, Appx A-6–9, 14–20, B-4, 5, D-6–9, 11, 15, 16, 19, 20, E-2, G-3–13, 15, 16 I, IV, 24, 43, 45, 61, 62, 84, 85, 87, 90, 93, 94, 96, 97, 99, 100, 102–104, 107, 108, 112–116, 121, 131, 143, 144, 147, 148, Appx A-1, 2, 7, 8, 23–25, 27, 28, D-1–3, 9–11, 14, 15, 18, 19, 21–24, D-1, H-1, I-4, 7, 8 63–83, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 95, 98, 101, 105, 106, 109–111, 117–120, 122–130, 132–142, 145, 146, Appx A-26, D-12, 13, 16, 17, 20 I, IV, 45, 84, 107, 111, 112, 133, 145, Appx D-2, 14, 22, Appx I-13–16 Appx B-7, 8, Appx C-7, 8, Appx E-7, 8, Appx G-19, 20
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-IV
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC) Presented below is the procedure used for installing the CL-AP from the OS. Follow the flowchart on the next page to install the CL-AP. For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an NEC PC, see “Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)”. For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an HP PC, see “Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC)”.
NOTES To facilitate you to understand installation workflow in this edition, the following icons are shown to the right of the title in each chapter. XG-1 RU 5000plus 9000 355RU 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
XG-1 RU FCR5000, etc. 9000 series CR-IR 355RU CR-IR 356 CR-IR 357 CR-IR 359 CR-IR 362 CR-IR 363 CR-IR 364 CR-IR 366 CR-IR 367 CR-IR 368 CR-IR 370 CR-IR 371 CR-IR 372
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-1
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)
Installation workflow CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup 2.
Installing and Setting Up the OS
See Chapter 5 under MU: Maintenance Utility.
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only) 16. CR-IR346RU Settings
For RU-CL 1:1 connection: Essential For RU-CL N:N connection: Only for RU master IIP
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings 3. 4.
Setting Up the Monitor 18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack
Only when remote maintenance mode is used.
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size 6.
Installing the Screen Saver 22. Setting the Event Log
7. 8.
9.
Installing the CL Components Installing the Standard Key
****BLANK****
10. Option Key Installation
When one XG-1 RU or multiple XG-1 RUs or 356/357/359/36X/ 37X are connected. When one XG-1 RU or one 35X or multiple XG-1 RUs or 5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/ 37X are connected.
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only) 24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only) *1 For the 5000 plus series or CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual Service Manual to save Config backup. For details of the RU master IIP see “6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview” under “MD: Machine Description”.
11. AP Key Installation 12. Initializing the Image Database 13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings) 14. Restoring the CL-Config
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-2
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS Monitor settings XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
NOTES Before installing the OS, note down the CL host name, IP address, subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of information will be called for during OS installation. The “5000 plus” is abbreviated hereinafter simply “IR”.
OS installation drive Partition/format Name Organization
Product key
Computer name and password
Computer name
Password Protocol used IP address Network settings
OS installation and setting procedures are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista. Follow the procedures specific to the used OS. For Windows 2000 See “2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000”.
For Windows XP See “2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP”.
u Property sheet
Regional settings
Display color True Color (24 or 32bits) Display area 1024×768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT) MS-IME setting (Japanese version The toolbar is stored in the task bar. only)
Subnet mask Domain or work group
C:\ C drive only (no other partitions will be created.) /NTFS FUJIFILM Corporation FUJIFILM Corporation Indicated on the right-hand side of the PC main unit cover. The default settings when shipped from factory CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXX : manufacture No.) Take notes accordingly if changed. fcr-iip TCP/IP “172.16.1.20” when shipped from factory. * Take notes accordingly if changed. “255.255.0.0” when shipped from factory. * Take notes accordingly if changed. Used by the work group. (The group name remains the default.)
For Windows Vista See “2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista”.
This computer’s Automatically logged Administrator on user name user settings (auto logon settings) Password fcr-iip 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-3
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000 2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000 This section explains about the Windows 2000 installation procedure. The OS is to be installed in the following situations: After HDD replacement After an error occurrence in the OS Items to be readied for OS installation: Windows 2000 installation CD (Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows 2000) contained in the PC box.) Dell Resource CD (A CD that stores various drivers.) Product key (Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.)
NOTES OS installation procedures are described herein using a DELL OptiPlex GX110 PC and a GX150 PC models. If other PC models are used, see the user manual that comes with the PC. If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To establish network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection to the RU) before installation work. When the HDD has been replaced, check setup details ahead of time because the HDD cannot be operated unless the PC’s BIOS settings are changed accordingly. Driver software installation can be required while Windows 2000 is being installed. In such a case, install it using the Dell Resource CD.
Removing the board and peripheral devices
1.
IMPORTANT Before formatting the HDD, back up necessary data other than image data as required by the user. Back up config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores various CL and RU settings, ahead of time. Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items (check all the items).
Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI slots. For board removal procedures, see “Appendix C Removing/ Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)”.
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as the barcode reader and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports.
NOTES When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the PCI slots, be sure to delete the file from the Device Manager upon completion of OS installation. “ Checking the PEI01A board device driver” in “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”. If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be installed as is the case with the PEI and PSI boards.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-4
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR Unless the PC is connected properly via the network, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending on the Windows 2000 installer specifications.
1.
Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network connection via the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the RU/IR. For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left turned OFF.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RAID-related settings When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as appropriate. For details of RAID-related settings, see “Appendix I RAID-related Settings”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-5
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Collecting the computer-related information
1.
6.
After a while, the message “Press any key to boot from CD..” appears at the upper left corner of the window.
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. The PC starts up.
2.
Save the setup data and restart the PC.
Press the key when the message “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right of the window.
NOTE If the key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open. In such a case, restart the PC to perform step 2. again.
00000346.EPS
7.
NOTE
The setup window opens.
3.
If you do not press the key within a period of about 3 seconds after the message “Press any key to boot from CD..” appears at the upper left corner of the screen, the installation CD cannot be recognized.
Select “Boot Sequence” and press the key. The startup drive selection dialog opens.
4.
If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 7. again.
Deselect both “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:” (uncheck the “ ” mark.)
The “Windows 2000 Professional Setup” window opens in about two minutes.
8.
Uncheck both “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:”. Leave “IDE CD-ROM Device” as is.
5.
Press the key within a 3-second period.
Press the key.
00000325.EPS
Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive of the PC. 00000302.EPS
The “Windows 2000 License Agreement” window opens.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-6
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
9.
Deleting/formatting a partition
Press the key.
1.
Select “C: NTFS” (or make sure that “C: NTFS” is selected) and then press the key.
NOTE Before deleting a partition, back up important image data and other necessary data that are stored on the HDD. If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition is lost.
00000303.EPS
A screen about Windows 2000 repairs opens in several seconds.
00000307.EPS
NOTE
10. Press the key.
If “Unknown” partition exists on the window above, press the and then keys to delete the partition. The partition deletion confirmation screen opens.
00000304.EPS
A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-7
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
2.
4.
Press the key.
NOTE
Select “Unpartitioned space” (or make sure that “Unpartitioned space” is selected) and then press the key.
This screen does not open when an attempt is made to format a partition in which no OS is installed.
NOTE The key needs not be pressed because only the C drive will be used on the CL. Note, however, that creation of partition is not required for software version A10 or later.
00000308.EPS
The partition deletion confirmation screen opens again.
3.
00000310.EPS
Press the key.
The format selection screen opens.
00000309.EPS
After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation screen opens.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-8
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
5.
Verify that the “Format the partition using the NTFS file system” option is selected, and then press the key.
8.
Check ( C:”.
) both “1. Diskette Drive” and “2. Hard-Disk Drive
Check ( ) both 1. and 2.
00000311.EPS
After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CDROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes). The PC restarts.
6.
Save the setup data and start the PC.
10. After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this when takes about three minutes), click Windows 2000 setup wizard startup window opens.
When the message “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right corner of the window, press the key.
REFERENCE
NOTE
switches to the “Regional Settings” window.
If you fail to press the key, restart the PC, wait until the message “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right corner of the screen, and press the key. The setup window opens.
7.
9.
00000511.EPS
If you do not click
, the system automatically
Device driver setup processing starts, which takes about four minutes. After the completion of device driver setup processing, the “Regional Settings” window opens.
Select “Boot Sequence” and press the key. The startup drive selection dialog opens. 00000315.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-9
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard
1.
From the “Regional Settings” window, click
.
5.
Enter the following settings: Enter a computer name (host name) in the field.
The “Software Personal Setup” window opens.
2.
Enter the following settings:
The default settings are as follows.
Enter “FUJIFILM Corporation” in the
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX (use upper-case characters to enter the “CL”. XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)
field. (“ ” represents a space.) Enter “FUJIFILM Corporation” in the
CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite) (use upper-case characters to enter the “CR”. XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
field. (“ ” represents a space.)
3.
Click
.
CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus) (use upper-case characters to enter the “CP”. XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
The product key input window opens.
NOTES Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS installation. Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case 00000318.EPS
4.
Enter the product key in the click
equivalents appear in the
field and then
field.
Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be internally handled as lower-case character data.
.
REFERENCE The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit. A window opens to prompt for computer name and password input.
Enter “fcr-iip” in the
field.
Enter “fcr-iip” in the
field.
REFERENCE The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and [Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
00000319.EPS
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-10
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
6. 7.
Click
Setting the network information
.
The date/time setup window opens.
NOTE
Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click
If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window does not open.
.
If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click
1.
. Verify the date.
Verify the time.
When a network setup option selection window appears, prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom, (by changing to ), and then choose click
.
The “Network Component Setup” window opens.
Verify the time zone.
2.
Make sure that is checked. If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing to ).
3.
Select then click
00000320.EPS
(by highlighting it), and .
The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
The “Network Setup” window opens in several minutes.
4.
Choose
(so that
changes to
).
“IP Address” and “Subnet Mask” then appear.
REFERENCE The “IP Address” and “Subnet Mask” fields are now ready to accept your numerical value input.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-11
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
5.
8.
Enter the following settings:
Verify that the
radio
Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the
button is selected (set to
field.
), and then click
.
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the field.
NOTE Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down before the start of OS installation.
6.
Click
.
The system returns then to the “Network Component Setup” window.
7.
Click
00000345.EPS
REFERENCE
. It takes a few seconds to display the
Do not let the CL become a domain member.
following window (computer domain setup window). After a while, the computer domain setup window opens.
The “Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard” window opens in about five minutes.
9.
Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
10. Click
.
The PC restarts and the “Network Identification Wizard Start” window opens.
00000314.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-12
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Setting the user to be logged on automatically
1.
5.
From the “Network Identification Wizard Start” window, click
Click
.
After a while, the “Getting Started with Windows 2000 window opens.
. A computer user setup window opens.
00000336.EPS
2.
Make sure that the button is turned ON.
3.
Enter the following settings:
radio
Click the downward arrow mark
within the field to change to
. Enter “fcr-iip” in the Enter “fcr-iip” in the
00000323.EPS
6.
Deselect to
field. field.
7.
(so that
changes
).
Click the
mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The system returns to the desktop screen. OS installation is now completed.
REFERENCE The character string entries in the [Password:] and [Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
4.
Click
.
The “Network Identification Wizard” ends and the desktop screen appears on the display. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-13
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is started.
For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the PC for the CL.
REFERENCE To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps: 1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon from the [Start] menu. From the pop-up menu that opens, choose [Properties]. The [System Properties] window opens.
00000366.EPS
3.
Click
.
2. Click the [Hardware] tab.
The installation processing starts.
3. Click [Device Manager]. Device Manager opens.
The software for items marked “?” in Device Manager is not installed. Install the driver software for such items.
4.
After a while, a window opens to indicate that setup is completed.
Verify that then click
is chosen, and .
The PC restarts.
Installing the Dell ResourceCD utility software
1.
Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
When the following window automatically opens, click .
REFERENCE Depending on the version of the Dell ResourceCD utility software, the PC needs not to be restarted.
00000365.EPS
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-14
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
3.
Installing the driver software
“WinZip Self-Extractor” appears.
For the GX150, install the following driver software. : Intel815 Video driver : Intel CHIP SET System driver Audio driver : ADI1885 IDE ATA/ATAPI controller : Intel ATA Storage
4.
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
Click
Click
to decompress files.
“Dell Computer Self-Extracting Driver Installation” appears.
NOTE
1.
In the “Video” area, click “INTEL 815”.
5.
Click
.
, point to “Programs” and “Dell Accessories”,
and then click “Dell ResourceCD”. The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts up.
2.
When the following window opens, perform setup for the “Search Criteria” area under the following conditions. System Model = OptiPlex GX150 Operating System = Windows 2000
Device Type = All Topic = My Drivers RI000064.EPS
A window opens to indicate that unzipping is completed.
6.
Click
.
Internet Explorer starts up.
RI000063.EPS
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-15
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
7.
Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and then click .
8.
Choose “Run this program from its current location” and then click .
The “Security Warning” window opens.
9.
Click
RI000066.EPS
.
The driver software installer starts running.
10. Follow the installer’s on-screen instructions to install the driver software.
11. Install the other driver software (Intel CHIP SET, ADI1885
and Intel ATA Storage) by performing the same procedure as indicated in steps 3. through 10.
The “File Download” window opens.
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI000065.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-16
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
2.1.3 Setting the OS
4.
Perform the following OS-related settings.
.
The confirmation window opens.
The number of colors (“Colors”) and monitor resolution (“Screen area“) Refresh frequency Modification of the OS selection menu Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the suspend mode (as necessary) Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Setting the monitor
1.
Click
Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu.
5.
Click
.
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
6.
Click
.
NOTE Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window returns to the previous status.
The “Display Properties” window opens.
00000108.EPS
2.
Click the “Settings” tab.
3.
Complete monitor setup as directed below.
I
II
00000109.EPS
I. “Colors” : Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit). II. “Screen area” : Choose 1024 × 768 pixels.
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-17
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
5.
Setting the refresh frequency
1.
.
The “Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties” window opens.
2.
Click the “Monitor” tab.
3.
From the “Refresh Frequency” pull-down menu, choose “75 Hertz”.
6.
Click
.
NOTE If you do not click within 15 seconds, the system reverts the previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
7.
NOTE
.
The screen area changes and the “Monitor Setup” window opens.
In the “Settings” tab of the “Display Properties” window, click
Click
Click
to close the “Display Properties” window.
If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz. If the screen becomes disordered even when set to 70 Hertz, change it to 60 Hertz.
RI000041.EPS
4.
Click
.
The confirmation window opens.
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-18
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
4.
Hiding the OS selection menu
Uncheck
.
When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS selection menu does not open:
1.
Click
, point to “Settings”, and click “Control
Panel”. The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click
00000125.EPS
.
5.
The “System Properties” window opens.
3.
Click
.
You are returned to the “System Properties” window.
Click the “Advanced” tab and then click .
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
00000124.EPS
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-19
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the suspend mode By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the following procedure as needed.
1.
From the
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point Select “.” (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point. If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you select an image distribution destination with the QA function.
1.
The Control Panel opens.
“Control Panel”.
2.
Double-click
2.
.
Double-click
.
The “Regional Options” window opens.
3.
The “Power Options Properties” window opens.
3.
menu, point to “Settings“, and then click
“Control Panel”.
menu, point to “Settings“, and then click
The Control Panel opens.
From the
Click the “Advanced” tab.
Click the “Numbers” tab and then select “.” (period) for the “Decimal symbol” field. If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for the “Digit grouping symbol” field and “Decimal symbol” field, change the symbol for the “Digit grouping symbol” field.
RI000084.EPS
4.
Uncheck (
).
RI000083.EPS
5.
Click
and then close the Control Panel.
The system returns to the desktop screen. 010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI000101.EPS
4.
Click
and then close the Control Panel.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-20
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000
Setting the taskbar Change the setting so that the Windows taskbar is hidden automatically.
1.
Right-click the mouse on the taskbar to select “Properties”. The “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window opens.
2.
Place a checkmark to
(
).
RI0000362.EPS
3.
Click and close the “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window.
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-21
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP 2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP This section describes how to install Windows XP. The OS is to be installed in the following situations: After HDD replacement After an error occurrence in the OS Items to be readied for OS installation Windows XP installation CD (Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows XP) contained in the PC box.) Dell Resource CD (A CD that stores various drivers.) Product key (Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.)
IMPORTANT Before formatting the HDD, make backup copy of data other than image data, if any, as required by the user.
NOTES OS installation procedures are described herein using a Dell Optiplex GX60 PC model. If other PC models are actually used, see the User Manual that comes with the PC. If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection to the RU) accordingly before installation work. When HDD of a recommended PC model is replaced, check setup details ahead of time because the HDD may not be operated unless the PC’s BIOS settings are changed accordingly. Driver software installation may be required while Windows XP is being installed. In such an instance, use the Dell Resource CD to install it.
Removing the boards and peripheral devices
1.
For how to remove the board, see “Appendix C Removing/ Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)”.
Make backup copy of config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores various CL and RU settings, ahead of time. Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items (place checkmarks to all items).
Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI slots.
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports.
NOTES When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the PCI slots, make sure to delete the file using Device Manager upon completion of OS installation. “ Checking the PEI01A board device driver” in “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting” If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be installed as is the case with the PEI or PSI board. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-22
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending on the Windows XP installer specifications.
1.
Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network connection via the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the RU/IR. For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left turned OFF.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RAID-related settings When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as appropriate. For details of RAID-related settings, see “Appendix I RAID-related Settings”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-23
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
6.
Collecting the computer-related information
1.
After a while, the “Press any key to boot from CD” message appears at the upper left corner of the window.
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. The PC starts running.
2.
Save the setup data and restart the PC.
press any key to boot from CD
Press the key when “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right corner of the window.
NOTE
RI000211.EPS
If the key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
7.
NOTE
The setup window opens.
3.
If you do not press the key within about three seconds after the “Press any key to boot from the CD” message appears at the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD will not be recognized accordingly. If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 7. again.
Select “Boot Sequence” and press the key. A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive.
4.
Remove checkmarks from “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:”. (Uncheck the “ ” marks.)
1. Diskette Drive 2. Hard-Disk Drive C: 3. IDE CD-ROM Device SPACE to enable/disable
In about two minutes, the “Window XP Professional Setup “ window opens.
8.
Press the key. The “Windows XP License Agreement” window opens.
+,- to move down/up
Remove checkmarks from “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:”. Leave “IDE CD-ROM Device” checked as is.
5.
Press the key within three seconds.
9.
Press the key. A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
RI000210.EPS
Insert the installation CD into the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-24
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
5.
Deleting/formatting a partition
1.
Select “C: NTFS” (or make sure that “C: NTFS” is selected) and then press the key.
After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CDROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes).
NOTE Before deleting a partition, make backup copy of necessary image data stored on the HDD. If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition will be lost. XXXX MB Disk 0 Id 0 on bus 0 atapi [MBR] C: partition1: NTFS D: partition2: NTFS
The PC restarts.
6.
If you fail to press the key, restart the PC, wait until the message “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right corner of the window, and the press the key.
RI000212.EPS
NOTE
The setup window opens.
7.
Press the key.
8.
NOTE
The partition deletion confirmation window opens again.
4.
SPACE to enable/disable
Press the key. After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation window opens.
Select “Unpartitioned space” (or make sure that “Unpartitioned space” is selected) and then press the key.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Place checkmarks to both “Diskette Drive” and “Hard-Disk Drive C:”.
1. Diskette Drive 2. Hard-Disk Drive C: 3. IDE CD-ROM Device
This window does not open when an attempt is made to format a partition in which no OS is installed.
3.
Select “Boot Sequence” and press the key. A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive.
The partition deletion confirmation window opens.
2.
Press the key when “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper right corner of the window.
NOTE
xxxx MB(xxxx MB free) xxxx MB(xxxx MB free)
If “Unknown” partition exists on the window above, press the and then keys to delete the partition as well.
Verify that the “Format the partition using the NTFS file system” option is selected, and then press the key.
Check (
9.
+,- to move down/up
) both 1. and 2.
RI000213.EPS
Save the setup data and restart the PC. After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this takes about five minutes), “Regional and Language Options” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-25
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard
1.
From the “Regional and Language Options” window, click
5.
Enter the following settings: Enter a computer name (host name) in the field.
.
2.
The “Software Personal Setup” window opens.
The default settings are as follows.
Make entries as follows.
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX (use upper-case characters to enter the “CL”. XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)
Enter “FUJIFILM Corporation” in the field. (“ ” represents a space.)
CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite) (use upper-case characters to enter the “CR”. XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
Enter “FUJIFILM Corporation” in the field. (“ ” represents a space.)
3.
Click
CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus) (use upper-case characters to enter the “CP”. XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
.
The product key input window opens.
4.
Enter the product key in the click
NOTES field and then
.
REFERENCE The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit. A window opens to prompt for computer name and password input.
Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS installation. Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case equivalents appear in the
field.
Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be internally handled as lower-case character data. Enter “fcr-iip” in the
field.
Enter “fcr-iip” in the
field.
REFERENCE The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and [Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-26
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
6. 7.
Click
Setting the network information
.
The date/time setup window opens.
NOTES
Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click
If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window does not open. If the network driver is not installed properly, the network setup window will not be displayed. In such a case, install the network driver and then perform network settings accordingly.
. If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click . Verify the date.
1. Verify the time.
When a network setup option selection window appears, prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom, (by changing to ), and then choose click
.
The “Network Component Setup” window opens.
Verify the time zone.
00000320.EPS
2.
Make sure that is checked. If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing to ).
3.
Select then click
The “Network Setup” window opens in several minutes.
(by highlighting it), and .
The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
4.
Choose
(so that
changes to
).
“IP Address” and “Subnet Mask” then appear.
REFERENCE The “IP Address” and “Subnet Mask” fields are now ready to accept your numerical value input.
5.
Enter the following settings: Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the field.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-27
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
Setting the user account
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the field.
1.
A window opens where how to establish connection to the internet is to be specified.
NOTE Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down before the start of OS installation.
6.
Click
2.
Click
.
3. 4.
. It takes a few seconds to display the
5.
Verify that the
Click [Finish]. After a while, the Windows desktop opens.
radio ), and then click
Enter any user name other than “Administrator” (“iip”, for instance), and click [Next]. A window opens to indicate completion of setup processing.
After a while, the computer domain setup window opens.
button is selected (set to
Select “No” and click [Next]. A window opens where the computer user is to be determined.
following window (computer domain setup window).
8.
Click “Skip”. A window opens where user registration to Microsoft is to be made.
The system returns then to the “Network Component Setup” window.
7.
Click [Next] on the “Welcome to Windows” screen that opens.
.
6.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
7.
Select
.
The “User Accounts” window opens.
8.
Select
.
A window opens where the logon or logoff option is to be selected.
9.
Remove the checkmark from ) and click .
(
00000345.EPS
REFERENCE Do not let the CL become a domain member. The “Welcome to Windows” window opens in about 15 minutes.
RI0000381.EPS
The system returns to the “User Accounts” window. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-28
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
10. Select “iip” from the user account names. The user account setup change window opens.
11.
Select “Create Password”. The password creation window opens.
12. Perform the following entries:
: Enter “fcr-iip”. : Enter “fcr-iip”.
REFERENCE The character string entries in the [Type a new password:] and [Type the new password again to confirm:] fields appear as “”.
13. Click
.
A window for file and/or folder settings will open.
14. Click
.
The system returns to the “User Accounts” window.
15. Close both the “User Accounts” and “Control Panel” windows.
16. Select “Logoff” from the
menu and then click
“Logoff” on the window that will open. The “iip” account logs off, showing then the logon window.
17. Enter “Administrator” as the user name and “fcr-iip” as the password. Click then
.
The Window desktop opens.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-29
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
2.2.2 Installing the Driver Software For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the PC for the CL.
REFERENCE
Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software
1.
Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into the CD-ROM drive.
2.
When the following window automatically opens, click .
To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps: 1. Right-click “My Computer” from the menu and select “Properties” from the pull-down menu that opens. The [System Properties] window opens. 2. Click the [Hardware] tab. 3. Click [Device Manager]. Device Manager opens. The software for items marked “?” in Device Manager is not installed. Install the driver software for such items.
RI000214.EPS
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is started.
R 000215.EPS
3.
Click
.
The installation processing starts. After a while, the “InstallShield Wizard Complete” window opens..
4.
Click
.
A utility program starts to display the initial screen.
5.
Place checkmark to “Click here to prevent this information from being displayed again” ( ) and close the window.
REFERENCE Depending on the version of the Dell Resource CD utility software, the PC needs not to be restarted. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-30
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
2.
Installing the driver software Install software for the following drivers. However, do not install the network driver during this procedure and do it during “ Installing the network driver software”. Video driver System driver Network driver Audio driver
“WinZip Self-Extractor” appears.
3.
Scroll the display and click
.
A driver-related window opens.
4.
NOTE Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
1.
In the “Video” area, click name of a driver to be used.
Click
.
A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted for decompressing the video driver.
5.
Click
.
From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD]. The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting automatically “System Model”, “Operating System” and then “Topic”. RI000217.EPS
A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file is to be decompressed.
6.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is completed.
7.
Click
.
The Readme file opens. RI000216.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-31
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
8.
Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and then click .
14. Enter “Administrator” as the user name and “fcr-iip” as the password. Click then
.
The Window desktop opens.
15. Install other driver software programs using the same procedure described in steps 1. through 14.
RI000218.EPS
The “File Download” window opens.
9.
Click
.
The “Setup” window opens.
10. Click
.
The “Software License Agreement” window opens.
11. Click
.
The Readme information window opens.
12. Click
.
The installation wizard completion window opens.
13. Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click . The PC restarts.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-32
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
Installing the network driver software Install the network driver as follows. Described herein is the procedure used to install “Intel 10/100 LOM” in the network driver.
4.
Click
.
NOTE Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
1.
From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD].
RI0000372.EPS
A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file is to be decompressed.
5.
The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting automatically “System Model”, “Operating System” and then “Topic”.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is completed.
6.
Click
.
The Readme file opens.
7.
Close the Readme file.
8.
Right-click “My Computer” from the
menu to
select “Properties”. The “System Properties” window opens.
RI000216.EPS
2.
In the “Network (NIC) Drivers” area, click name of a driver to be used. A driver-related window opens.
3.
Click
.
A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted for decompressing the network driver. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-33
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
9.
11. Click the “Driver” tab and then
Click the “Hardware” tab and then the tab.
.
RI0000375.EPS RI0000373.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens.
10. Right-click “Ethernet Controller” from “Other devices” to select “Properties”
The “Hardware Update Wizard” window opens.
12. Select “Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]” and click
.
RI0000376.EPS
A window opens where search and installation options are to be selected. RI0000374.EPS
The “Network Adapters Properties” window opens. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-34
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
13. Select “Don’t search. I wil choose the driver to install.” and click
.
16. Click “Browse” and select “C:\DELL\drivers\R56484\WinXP”.
RI0000379.EPS
17. Click
.
The network adapter selection window opens.
18. Click
RI0000377.EPS
A hardware type selection window opens.
14. Select “Network adapters” and click
.
A window opens to indicate completion of the “Hardware Update Wizard”.
.
19. Click
.
The “Intel(R) PRO/100 M Network Connection Properties” window opens.
20. Click
.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
21. Make sure that the network driver has been installed properly and close the “Device Manager” window.
RI0000378.EPS
The network adapter selection window opens.
15. Click
.
The “Install From Disk” window opens.
RI0000380.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-35
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
2.2.3 Setting the OS
Setting the refresh frequency
1.
Perform the following OS-related settings. The number of colors (“Colors”) and monitor resolution (“Screen area“) Refresh frequency Modification of the OS selection menu Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the suspend mode (as necessary) Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Setting the monitor
1.
Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu. The “Display Properties” window opens.
2.
Click the “Settings” tab.
In the “Settings” tab of the “Display Properties” window, click
.
The “Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties” window opens.
2.
Click the “Monitor” tab.
3.
From the “Screen refresh rate” pull-down menu, choose “75 Hertz”.
NOTE If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz. If the screen becomes disordered even when set to 70 Hertz, change it to 60 Hertz.
RI0000354.EPS
3.
Complete monitor setup as directed below.
I.
II.
RI0000355.EPS
I. “Screen area” : Choose 1024 × 768 pixels. II. “Colors” : Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit).
4.
Click
RI000221.EPS
.
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
5.
Click
.
NOTE Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window returns to the previous status. 010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-36
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
4.
Click
Hiding the OS selection menu
.
The screen area changes and the “Monitor Settings” window opens.
5.
Click
.
1.
NOTE Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window returns to the previous status.
6.
Click
When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS selection menu does not open:
to close the “Display Properties” window.
Click
to select “Control Panel”.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Select
3.
Doubl-click
.
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
4.
Click the “Advanced” tab and then click
.
RI0000357.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-37
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
5.
Uncheck
(
).
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the suspend mode By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the following procedure as needed.
RI000223.EPS
6.
Click
Click
.
2.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
8.
Close control panel. The system returns to the desktop.
From the
menu, click “Control Panel” to select it.
The Control Panel opens.
.
The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
7.
1.
Double-click
.
The “Power Options Properties” window opens.
3.
Select “Never” for “System standby”.
RI0000363.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-38
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
4. 5.
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Click the “Advanced” tab. Uncheck
(
).
Select “.” (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point. If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you select an image distribution destination with the QA function.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click the
icon.
R 000225.EPS
6.
Click
The system returns to the Control Panel.
7.
The “Regional and Language Options” window opens.
.
Close the Control Panel.
3.
Make sure that the “Regional and Language Options” tab is selected and click .
The system returns to the desktop.
RI000228.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-39
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
4.
Click the “Numbers” tab and change the number appearing in the “Decimal symbol” field to the “.” (period). If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for the “Digit grouping symbol” and “Decimal symbol” fields, change the symbol for the “Digit grouping symbol” field.
Canceling settings for automatic OS update Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows XP) update as follows.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
3.
Click “Automatic Updates” tab.
4.
Remove checkmark from [Keep my computer up to date.] ( ).
RI000226.EPS
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
6.
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
R 0000365.EPS
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
6.
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-40
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP
Setting display properties Use the procedure below to change display properties from “Windows XP” to “Windows Classic”.
1.
Right-click a menu on the desktop to select “Properties”. The “Display Properties” window opens.
2.
Select “Windows Classic” from the “Themes” pull-down menu.
Setting the taskbar Change the Windows taskbar display setting as follows.
1.
Right-click a position on the taskbar to select “Properties”. The “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window opens.
2.
Perform the following taskbar-related settings. Place a checkmark to
(
).
(
RI00000356.EPS R 0000361.EPS
3.
Click
.
Remove the checkmark from
).
The display properties change to Classic.
4.
Click window.
and close the “Display Properties”
RI0000364.EPS
3.
Click
and close the “Taskbar and Start Menu
Properties” window.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-41
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista 2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Removing the peripheral devices
1.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader, magnetic card reader and touch panel, from the USB ports.
This section describes how to install Windows Vista. The OS is to be installed in the following situations: After HDD replacement After an error occurrence in the OS Items to be readied for OS installation OPERATING SYSTEM Disk DRIVERS AND UTILITIES Disk
➤ IMPORTANT Before formatting the HDD, make backup copy of data other than image data, if any, using Explorer or the like. Make backup copy of config data that stores various CL and RU settings, ahead of time. Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items (place checkmarks to all items).
NOTE If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (HUB) accordingly before installation work.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-42
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Network connection to the CL Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending on the Windows Vista installer specifications.
1.
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the HUB.
■ RAID-related settings When a RAID-type PC is used, RAID-related settings must be performed accordingly. For details of the RAID-related settings, see “Appendix I RAIDrelated Setting”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
■ Changing boot sequence of the computer (for DELL PCs) In here Boot Sequence is changed so that PC starts from CD by the BIOS menu of a PC.
1.
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches. The PC starts running.
2.
Press the key when the DELL logo appears at the center of the window.
NOTE If the key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open. In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again. The setup window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-43
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
Select “System Configuration” – “USB Controller” and select “Enable”.
5.
Select “Performance” – “Multi Core Support” and place a checkmark to “Enable Multi Core Support”.
AWV32124A.ai AWV32126.ai
4.
Select “Security” – “CPU XD Support” and remove the checkmark from “Enable CPU XD Support”.
6.
Select “Intel® SpeedStep™” and remove the checkmark from “Enable Intel® SpeedStep™”.
AWV32127.ai
7. AWV32125.ai
Select “General” in the “Boot Sequence” area and set so that “Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive” comes to the very top.
AWV32149.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-44
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
8.
Select “Remote Wake Up” in the “Power Management” area and then select “Disable”.
■ Re-installing the OS
1.
Select “My language is English”.
DCL32001.ai AWV32002.ai
9.
The language sellection window opens.
Insert the “OPERATING SYSTEM” disk into the PC.
10. Click
at the lower right corner of the window.
2.
Make the following settings.
A confirmation window opens.
11. Click [Yes]. A while after restarting, the message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD..” appears at the upper left corner of the window.
12. Press the key within three seconds. After a while, the Windows Vista setup window opens.
NOTE If you do not press the key within about three seconds after the “Press any key to boot from the CD or DVD” message appears at the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD will not be recognized accordingly. If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 12. again.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
AWV32003.ai
Language to install : English Time and currency format : English (United States) Keyboard or input method : US
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-45
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
6.
Click [Next].
Select “Custom (advanced)”.
The following window opens.
AWV32006.ai AWV32004.ai
4.
Click “Install now”. The “Please read the license terms” window opens.
5.
The “Where do you want to install Windows?” window opens.
7.
Select “Drive options (advanced)”.
Place a checkmark to “I accept the license terms” and click [Next].
AWV32007.ai
AWV32005.ai
The “Which type of installation do you want?” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-46
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
8.
10. Select “New”.
Select “Delete”.
AWV32008.ai
A confirmation window opens.
9.
AWV32010.ai
11. Click [Apply].
Click [OK].
AWV32009.ai
The system returns to the “Where do you want to install Windows?” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
AWV32011.ai
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-47
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
12. Select “Format”.
■ Windows setup
1.
Make the following settings.
AWV32012.ai AWV32014.ai
A confirmation window opens.
Type a user name (for example, John) : iip Type a password (recommended) : fcr-iip Retype your password : fcr-iip Type a password hint : Enter a one-byte space
13. Click [OK].
NOTES The character string entries in the “Type a password (recommended):” and “Retype your password:” fields appear as “ ●”. When a character has been entered into the column “Type a password hint”, it becomes possible to click .
AWV32013.ai
The system returns to the “Where do you want to install Windows?” window.
14. Click [Next].
2.
Click
.
A window opens to prompt for computer name.
The OS installation processing starts. Upon completion of installation, the “Choose a user name and picture” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-48
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
Enter a computer name (host name) in the field provided for such purpose. The defaults are as follws.
• CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX (“CL” represents capitals and “XXXXXXXX”, a product name.) • CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite) (“CR” represents capitals and “XXXXXXXX”, a product name.) • CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus) (“CP” represents capitals and “XXXXXXXX”, a product name.)
6.
Verify the “Date”, “Time”, and “Time zone” and click . If the date time and time zone are incorrect, correct then . accordinary and then click
AWV32017.ai AWV32145.ai
4.
Click
NOTE
.
The “Help protect Windows automatically” window opens.
5.
If a dialog box like that shown below opens, select “Public location”.
Select “Ask me later”.
AWV32018.ai
AWV32016.ai
The “Review your time and date settings” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-49
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Setting the user account
The following window opens.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32019.ai
7.
Click
.
After a while, a login window opens.
8. 9.
Remove the “OPERATING SYSTEM” disk from the PC. Enter “fcr-iip” and click
AWV32021.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
.
2.
Select “System and Maintenance”.
AWV32020.ai
NOTE The entered password is displayed as “ ●”. The desktop screen opens.
➥ REFERENCE
AWV32028.ai
The “System and Maintenance” window opens.
If the “Welcome Center” window has been displayed, close the “Welcome Center” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-50
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
5.
Select “Administrative Tools”.
Click
.
AWV32031.ai
The “Computer Management” window opens.
6.
Select “Local Users and Groups” – “Users”.
AWV32029.ai
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
4.
Double-click “Computer Management”. AWV32032.ai
7.
Right-click “Administrator” and select “Properties”.
AWV32030.ai
The “User Account Control” window opens.
AWV32033.ai
The “Administrator Propeties” window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-51
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
8.
Remove the checkmark from “Account is disabled” and click
11. Make the following settings and click
.
.
AWV32036.ai
New password : fcr-iip Confirm password : fcr-iip
NOTE
AWV32034.ai
The system returns to the “Computer Management” window.
9.
Right-click “Administrator” and select “Set Password...”.
The entered password is displayed as “ ●”. A confirmation window opens.
AWV32037.ai
12. Click AWV32035.ai
The “Set Password for Administrator” window opens.
10. Click
.
The system returns to the “Computer Management” window.
.
AWV32148.ai
The “Set password for Administrator” window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-52
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
13. Right-click “iip” and select “Properties”.
■ Setting the User Account Control Turn off and disable “User Account Control” from prompting for credentials to install applications, and changing the elevation prompt behavior.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32038.ai
The “iip Properties” window opens.
14. Place a checkmark to “Account is disabled” and click . AWV32021.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Select “User Accounts”.
AWV32040.ai
AWV32039.ai
The system returns to the “Computer Management” window.
The “User Accounts” window opens.
15. Close the “Computer Management” window. The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
16. Close the “Administrative Tools” window. The system returns to the “System and Maintenance” window.
17. Close the “System and Maintenance” window. The system returns to the desktop. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-53
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
5.
Select “User Accounts”.
Click
.
AWV32041.ai
AWV32043.ai
The “Make changes to your user account” window opens.
4.
Select “Turn User Account Control on or off”.
The “Turn User Account Control On or Off” window opens.
6.
Remove the checkmark from “Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer” and click
.
AWV32044.ai
The “Microsoft Windows” window opens. AWV32042.ai
The “User Account Control” window opens.
AWV32045.ai
7.
Click
.
After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-54
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
8.
Enter “fcr-iip” and click
2.3.2 Installing the Driver Software
.
■ Installing the driver software Use the “DRIVERS AND UTILITIES” disk supplied with the PC to install the following driver software items.
➥ REFERENCE
AWV32020.ai
NOTE The entered password is displayed as “ ●”. The desktop screen opens.
➥ REFERENCE If the “Welcome Center” window has been displayed, close the “Welcome Center” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps: I. Right-click “My Computer” from the menu and select “Properties” from the pull-down menu that opens. ➔ The [System Properties] window opens. II. Click [Device Manager]. ➔ Device Manager opens. The software for items marked “ ! ” in Device Manager is not installed. Install the driver software for such items.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-55
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
■ Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software
1.
Click
.
The “Ready to Install the Program” window opens.
Insert the “DRIVERS AND UTILITIES” disk into the PC. The “AutoPlay” window opens.
2.
Select “Run autoRcd.exe”.
AWV32050.ai
5.
Click
.
The installation processing starts. After a while, the “InstallShield Wizard Completed” window opens.
AWV32128.ai
The “ResourceCD Installation” window opens.
3.
Cliclk
.
AWV32051.ai
6.
Click
.
The utility program starts and the initial window is displayed.
7.
Checkmark “Click here to prevent this infomation from being displayed again.” and close the window.
AWV32048.ai
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is started.
AWV32049.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-56
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Installing the Driver Software Installing the software for the following drivers.
1.
For example, installation procedure of video device driver is described as follows.
Controller Drivers Intel Chipset Software Installation Utility Rev:Axx
2.
➥ REFERENCE
1.
Video Drivers
The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts and “System model”, “Operating system”, and “Topic” are selected automatically.
Intel Q43/Q45/G43/G45 (Eaglelake) Graphics Controller Rev:Axx
3.
Reinsert the “DRIVER AND UTILITIES...” disk to have AutoPlay mode be activated.
Audio Drivers Analog Device ADI 198X Integrated HD Audio Rev:Axx
4.
Network (NIC) Drivers Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device Rev:Axx
5.
OS Tools Dell OS Tools Rev:Axx Dell System Software:Rev:Axx
NOTE Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
AWV32054.ai
2.
In the “Video” area, click name of a driver to be used. The following window opens.
AWV32139.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-57
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
Scroll the display and click
.
4.
Click
.
The following window opens.
AWV32057.ai
5.
Click
.
The following window opens.
AWV32055.ai
The following window opens. AWV32058.ai
6.
Click
.
The following window opens. AWV32056.ai
AWV32059.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-58
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
7.
Click
11. Click [Next].
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
The following window opens.
12. Select “No, I will restart this computer later.” and click [Finish].
The system returns to the driver extraction window. AWV32060.ai
8.
13. Click
.
Click [Next]. The following window opens.
AWV32065.ai
AWV32061.ai
9.
Click [Yes].
The system returns to the driver selection window. Refer to Device Manager and install the corresponding driver. Installation has been completed when the Device Manager window shows no more exclamation marks “ ! ”.
The following window opens.
AWV32062.ai
10. Click [Next]. Upon completion of installtion, the following winidow opens.
AWV32063.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-59
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Restarting and Setting the PC
6.
1.
Restart the PC.
2.
Press the key when the DELL logo appears at the center of the window.
Enter “fcr-iip” and click
.
NOTE If the key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window will not open.In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again. The setup window opens.
3.
AWV32020.ai
7.
Remove the checkmark from “Run at startup” and close the “Welcome Center” window.
Select “System Configuration” – “USB Controller” and select “No Boot”.
AWV32124.ai
4.
Click
at the lower right corner of the window.
A confirmation window opens. AWV32144.ai
5.
Click [Yes]. After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-60
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2
1.
Insert “Vista SP2 OS Update DVD V1.0” (114Y5085053A00) into the PC. The “Welcome to Windows Vista Service Pack 2” window opens.
2.
Click [Next]. The “Please read the license terms” window opens.
3.
Checkmark “I accept the license terms” and click [Next]. The “Install Windows Vista Service Pack 2” window opens.
4.
Ensure that “Automatically restart the computer” is checkmarked and then click [Install]. Installation processing will start. After the PC has restarted, the login window opens.
5.
Type in “fcr-iip” on the window that opens and click
.
The “Windows Vista Service Pack 2 is now installed” window opens.
6.
Click [Close].
7.
Remove the DVD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-61
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
2.3.4 Setting the OS Perform the following OS-related settings. Setting the Control Panel Setting the IP address Setting the taskbar Setting the Security Center Setting the automatic OS update Setting the monitor size Setting the visual effects Setting the screen properties Setting the Power Options Setting the Internet Time Canceling settings for simplified file sharing Addition of components Setting the Service Setting the Windows Sidebar Setting the Windows Defender Setting the Defragmentation Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol (other than Japanese)
■ Setting the Control Panel Change display of the Control Panel to the classic view.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32021.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Select “Classic View”.
AWV32067.ai
The Control Panel changes to classic view.
3.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-62
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
■ Setting the IP address
Double-click “Local Area Connection”.
Setting the IP address.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32146.ai
The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens.
5.
Click
.
AWV32021.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
3.
Select “Manage network connection”.
AWV32073.ai
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
AWV32147.ai
The “Network Connection” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-63
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
6.
Select “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” and click .
8.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
9.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Local Area Connection Status” window.
10. Click
.
The system returns to the “Network Connection” window.
11. Close both the “Network Connection” and “Network and
AWV32074.ai
The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
7.
Sharing Center” windows.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Select “Use the following IP address” and make the following settings.
I II
AWV32077.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 172.16.1.20) II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
NOTE Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted downbefore the start of OS installation.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-64
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
■ Setting the taskbar Change the windows taskbar display setting as follows.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Select “Notification Area” tab and remove the checkmark from “Hide inactive icons”.
menu.
AWV32082.ai
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Control Panel” window. AWV32021.ai
6.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Taskbar and Start Menu Properties” window opens.
3.
Make the following settings. Place a checkmark to “Auto-hide the taskbar”. Remove the checkmark from “Show Quick Launch”.
AWV32081.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-65
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
■ Setting the Security Center Hiding security alarm notifications as follows.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Select “Don’t notify me and don’t display the icon (not recommended)”.
menu.
AWV32085.ai
The system returns to the “Windows Security Center” window.
5.
AWV32021.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
Close the “Windows Security Center” window. The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
6.
.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
The “Windows Security Center” window opens.
3.
Select “Change the way Security Center alerts me”.
AWV32084.ai
A notification window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-66
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Setting the automatic OS update
4.
Select “Never check for update” and click
.
Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows Vista) update as follows.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32088.ai
The system returns to the “Windows Update” window. AWV32021.ai
Double-click
Close the “Windows Update” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
5.
.
The “Windows Update” window opens.
3.
Select “View advanced options”.
AWV32087.ai
The “Change settings” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-67
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
■ Setting the Monitor Size
Select “Advanced Settings...”.
Change the monitor size to “1280×1024” as follows.
1.
Select “Personalization” from the right-click menu on the desktop. The “Personalization” window opens.
2.
Select “Display Settings”.
AWV32091.ai
The monitor properties window opens.
4.
Select “List All Modes...”.
AWV32090.ai
The “Display Settings” window opens.
AWV32092.ai
The “List All Modes” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-68
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
5.
Select “1280 by 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz” and click
■ Setting the Visual Effects Hiding the windows contents while dragging.
.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32093.ai
The system returns to the monitor properties window.
6.
AWV32021.ai
Click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
The system returns to the “Display Settings” window.
NOTE If a window like that shown below opens, click seconds.
in 15
2.
Double-click
.
The “Performance Infomation and Tools” window opens.
3.
Select “Adjust visual effects”.
AWV32094.ai
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Personalization” window.
8.
AWV32098.ai
The “Performance Options” window opens.
Close the “Personalization” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-69
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
Remove the checkmark from “Show window contents while dragging” and click
■ Setting the Screen Properties Change the properties settings screen from “Windows Vista” to “Windows Classic”.
.
1.
Select “Personalization” from the right-click menu on the desktop. The “Personalization” window opens.
2.
Select “Theme”.
AWV32099.ai
The system returns to the “Performance Infomation and Tools” window.
5.
Close the “Performance Infomation and Tools” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
AWV32153.ai
The “Theme Settings” window opens.
3.
Select “Windows Classic” from the pull-down menu offered by the “Theme” option.
AWV32152.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-70
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4. 5.
Click
.
■ Setting the Power Options
The properties settings screen changes to classic view.
Changing the power options for PC and HD drives.
Click
1.
.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The system returns to the “Personalization” window.
6.
Close the “Personalization” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Power Options” window opens.
3.
Select “High performance” and click “Change plan settings”.
AWV32101.ai
The “Edit Plan Settings” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-71
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
6.
Select “Change advanced power settings”.
Select “Power buttons and lid” and “Power button action”, and then select “Shut down”.
AWV32136.ai
The advanced setting window opens.
5.
Select “Hard disk” - “Turn off hard disk after” and select “Never”. AWV32154.ai
7.
Select “Power buttons and lid” and “Start menu power button”, and then select “Shut down”.
AWV32137.ai
AWV32155.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-72
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
8. 9.
Click
.
■ Setting the Internet Time
The system returns to the “Change plan settings” window.
Disabling synchronization with an Internet time server.
Close the “Change plan settings” window.
1.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Date and Time” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-73
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
3.
■ Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
Select the “Internet Time” tab and click
Disabling use of the sharing wizard.
.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens. AWV32103.ai
The “Internet Time Settings” window opens.
4.
2.
Remove checkmark from “Synchronize with an Internet time server” and click
Double-click
.
The “Folder Options” window opens.
.
3.
Select the “View” tab.
AWV32104.ai
The system returns to the “Date and Time” window.
5.
Click
.
AWV32106.ai
The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
6.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-74
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
Remove the checkmark from “Use Sharing Wizard” and click
.
■ Addition of components Installing additional Windows components.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
AWV32107.ai
The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
5.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
The “Uninstall or change a program” window opens.
3.
Select “Turn Windows features on or off”.
AWV32109.ai
The “Windows Features” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-75
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
Place a checkmark to the following items. FTP Publishing Service IIS 6 Management Comptibility Telnet Client
■ Setting the Service
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
3.
Double-click “Services”.
AWV32110.ai
➥ REFERENCE “ ” indicates an item to be installed. “ ” indicates installation of some items of the lower level. When a check box is checked, all items in lower levels are selected at the same time.
5.
Click
.
The installation processing starts. Upon completion of installation, the sysytem returns to the “Windows Features” window.
6.
AWV32130.ai
The “Services” window opens.
Close the “Uninstall or change a program” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-76
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
Right-click “FTP Publishing Service” and select “Properties”. The “FTP Publishing Service Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.
5.
Select “Automatic” from the “Startup type” pull-down menu and click
■ Setting the Windows Sidebar Hiding the Windows sidebar.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens. AWV32131.ai
The system returns to the “Services” window.
6.
Close the “Services” window.
2.
Double-click
.
The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
7.
Close the “Administrative Tools” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
The “Windows Sidebar Properties” window opens.
3.
Remove the checkmark from “Start Sidebar when Windows starts” and select
.
AWV32112.ai
The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
4.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-77
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
4.
■ Setting the Windows Defender Changing the settings for Windows Defender.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Remove the checkmark from “Use Windows Defender” and click
.
menu.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
. AWV32115.ai
The “Windows Defender” window opens.
3.
A window like that shown below opens.
Select “Tools” and select “Options”.
AWV32151.ai
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Windows Defender” window. AWV32114.ai
The “Options” window opens.
6.
Close the “Windows Defender” window.
7.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-78
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Setting the Defragmentation
3.
Select the “Tools” tab and select
.
Disabling the setting for automatic defragmentation.
1.
Select “Computer” from the
menu.
AWV32121.ai
The “Disk Defragmenter” window opens.
4.
AWV32119.ai
(recommended)” and click
The “Computer” window opens.
2.
Remove the checkmark from “Run on a schedule .
Right-click “Local Disk (C:)” and select “Properties”.
AWV32122.ai
The system returns to the “Local Disk (C:) / Properties” window.
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Computer” window. AWV32120.ai
The “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6.
Close the “Computer” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-79
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
■ Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol (other than Japanese)
3.
Confirm that a language other than “Japanese” has been selected and click “Customize this format”.
If the “Current format” has been changed to a language other than “Japanese” in Regional and Language Options, confirm the decimal symbol and the digit grouping symbol. : “ . ” ( period ) Decimal Symbol Digit grouping Symbo : “ , ” ( comma )
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
AWV32141.ai
The “Customize Regional Options” window opens.
AWV32150.ai
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
4.
Confirm the following settings. : “ . ” (period) Decimal Symbol Digit grouping Symbol : “ , ” (comma)
The “Regional and Language Options” window opens.
AWV32143.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-80
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Regional and Language Options” window.
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
7.
Close the “Computer” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-81
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel
3. Setting Up the Monitor XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
Adjusting the contrast and brightness Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows: 371
372
The setup procedure varies with the connected monitor.
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel Perform the following procedures to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel and monitor.
Installing the touch panel driver and adjusting the touch panel For details on the procedures for setting up a touch-panelattached monitor, see “Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver” in “Appx IN: Appendix to Installation”.
Adjusting the monitor Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance characteristics. Width Horizontal position Height Vertical position Pincushion distortion Screen rotation For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the documentation supplied with the monitor.
Model 9416TD15/H2
Contrast : 127 (Press the “Menu” switch on the right-hand side of the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.) Brightness : 255 (Press the or button on the right-hand side of the monitor while the “Main Menu” is not displayed on the screen.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65% (Press the “Menu” switch on the right-hand side of the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.) Brightness : 100% (Press the or button on the right-hand side of the monitor while the “Main Menu” is not displayed on the screen.)
Model L350P-TS
Contrast : 80% Brightness : 80% (Press the “Enter” switch on the front of the monitor to adjust the brightness by selecting , then .)
Model L351P-TS
Contrast : 90% Brightness : 90% (Press the “Enter” switch on the front of the monitor to adjust the brightness by selecting , then .)
Model L362T
Contrast : Default (not determined) Brightness : 90%
Model L560T-C
Contrast : Default (not determined) Brightness : 100%
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-82
3.2 17" CRT Monitor
3.2 17" CRT Monitor Adjust the monitor as needed. No other setup procedures need be performed.
Adjusting the monitor
3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor Install the video board driver and perform setups for adjustments of width and height on the monitor. For the procedure of video board driver installation, see “Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver” of this chapter.
Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance characteristics. Width Horizontal position Height Vertical position Pincushion distortion Screen rotation Brightness Contrast For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the documentation supplied with the monitor.
3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups. For detailed setup procedure of the Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200 Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups. For detailed setup procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200, see manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-83
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP
4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC. The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
372
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP CAUTION When Windows XP SP2 was installed in “2. Installing and Setting Up the OS”, make sure to create the FTP server before you install MSDE and its service pack. For how to create the FTP server, see “15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)”.
RI0000470.ai
REFERENCE
Perform the following procedure to install MSDE (SQL7) and MSDE (SQL7SP*) and its service pack.
“IIP Setup Tool” is a utility tool that performs CL-AP installation and other tasks. This tool is stored on the CD (product name: Application software; Part No. 114Y5342001A) that is supplied with the CL as a standard accessory.
MSDE is a database that manages the images and patient information handled by the CL. If MSDE is not installed, the CL does not operate.
REFERENCE The service pack is a modification program that corrects various problems with MSDE. For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the programs. Therefore, read “CL-AP CD (1 of 2)” or “CL-AP CD (2 of 2)” for “CL-AP CD” as necessary.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
2.
Enter “1” and then press the key. The installation menu for MSDE and its service pack opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-84
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP
3.
To install the Japanese version, enter “1”. To install the Korean version, enter “2” and “5” for the English version. Finalize your number entry by pressing the key.
4.
When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the key. The system returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu window.
5.
Restart the CL to activate MSDE. After the CL has been started up, MSDE will be activated automatically. (The icon appears in the task tray at the lower right.)
R 000098.EPS
6.
If you wish to proceed to CL-AP installation processing, skip over the following steps 7. and 8. to go to the next page.
7.
Enter “0” and then press the key. The system exits “IIP Setup Tool” and returns to the desktop screen.
As indicated in the following window illustration, the MSDE/service pack installation process progresses.
MSDE and service pack installations end in about ten minutes in total.
8.
Remove the CD from the PC.
RI000099.EPS
REFERENCE When you choose “6) Version Check”, you can view the version information about MSDE and service pack.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-85
4.2 For Windows Vista
3.
4.2 For Windows Vista Install the Database Management System (SQL Server). SQL Server is a database that manages the images and patient information handled by the CL. If SQL Server is not installed, the CL does not operate.
1.
To install the Japanese version, enter “1”. To install the English version, enter “5”. Finalize your number entry by pressing the key.
Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC. RI000098.ai
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
As indicated in the following window illustration, the SQL Server installation process progresses. SQL Server installation processing completes in about ten minutes.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
RI000099.ai
➥ REFERENCE Choosing “6) Version Check” enables you to view the version information about SQL Server and service pack.
RI0000470.ai
2.
Enter “1” and then press the key. The installation menu opens.
4.
When the “Press any key to continue...” message appears, press the key. The command prompt will close.
5. Enter “0” and then press the key. The system exits “IIP Setup Tool” and returns to the desktop screen.
6. Remove the CD from the PC. 7. Restart the CL to activate SQL Server. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-86
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
5. Installing the CL-AP XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
5.1 Installing the CL-AP 359 370
1. 371
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
372
NOTE
Install the CL-AP and replace the menu database. Installing the CL-AP will automatically set up the wallpaper.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
NOTE To use the Synapse server’s Web Query function with software version V7.1(B) or earlier, perform the procedure below. I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it. “12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation)” in “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software” II. Install the Synapse Client software. “CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)” in “OE19: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment” RI000097.EPS
REFERENCE For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the programs. Therefore, read “CL-AP CD (1 of 2)” or “CL-AP CD (2 of 2)” for “CL-AP CD” as necessary.
2.
Enter “2” and then press the key. The installer starts running and opens the “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Welcome to the ...” window.
00000178.EPS
3.
Click
.
The “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Setup Type” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-87
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
4.
5.
Select the monitor type to be used, and then click .
Click
.
In a few minutes, a window like that shown below opens.
When the 15" monitor with the touch panel or the 17" CRT monitor is to be used, choose “Color (1024 × 768)”. When the 17” monitor with the touch panel is to be used, choose “Color (1280 × 1024)”. When the color Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is to be used, select “Color (2048 × 1536)”.
RI000026.EPS
When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select “Black/ White (1600 × 1200)”.
u NOTE u Although a message saying that “Image Database does not exist.” can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP installation processing will not be affected.
When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is used, select “Black/White (2048 × 1536)”. When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, select “Black/White (1600 × 1200)”.
RI000032.EPS
6.
Press the key. In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
Select the monitor type to be used.
RI000027.EPS
RI000100.EPS
The “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program” window opens.
u NOTE u Although a message saying that “Patient Database does not exist.” can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP installation processing will not be affected.
00000180.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-88
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
7.
9.
Press the key. In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
Press the key.
u NOTE u For the software of version V2.0 (B) or later or V1.0 (C), the following two windows will be displayed. Press the key. Make sure that installation processing has ended, and then proceed to step 10.
RI000227.EPS
RI0000468.AI
RI000105.EPS
Upon completion of installation, the “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / InstallShield Wizard Completed” window opens.
RI0000469.AI
8.
00000181.EPS
Press the key. In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
RI000028.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-89
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
10. Click
12. Select the “SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat” file that is located
.
in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (“2 of 2” when V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click .
The system returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu.
NOTES
D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat
For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from 11 through 16. For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to perform steps 11 through 14.
NOTE Specify for the underlined section a name of the drive where the CL-AP CD has been installed.
11. Perform the following settings. ● For Windows 2000/XP Select “Run...” from the
menu and click
. RI0000489.ai
● For Windows Vista
The “DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool” window opens.
Select “All Programs” - “Accessories” - “Run...” from the menu and click
.
RI0000490.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-90
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
13. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter “1” and press “2” when Windows Vista is used for the OS. Press “3” when a RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then the key to determine the entry.
NOTE For software version V7.0(B), the “2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for 60GB” option does not appear. A window like that shown below opens.
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database Exposure menus that can be installed will differ depending on the language of the OS on which the CL-AP is installed. To change an exposure menu or image processing parameter, the menu database must be changed following individual procedures.
u NOTE u Note that exposure menu settings will revert to the default if a menu database is replaced.
● For the Japanese OS: “5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)”
RI0000476.ai
14. Press the key.
● For an OS other than Japanese: “5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other than Japanese)”
15. Turn the PC power OFF and mount the PEI or PSI board on the PC.
“Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)”
u NOTE u If the OS was being installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the PCI slots, use Device Manager to delete the file at this step. “ ■ Checking the PEI01A board device driver” in “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)
■ For V7.0 or earlier
1.
Enter “3” on the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
16. Re-connect the USB peripheral devices (barcode reader, magnetic card reader, etc.) that have been disconnected before OS installation.
00000301.EPS
u NOTE u For Windows XP, you must perform driver software settings after USB peripheral devices are connected. For the driver software setup procedure, see “4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-91
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
2.
When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography option), enter “2”. If not, enter “1”. Finalize your selection entry by pressing the key. A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
4.
Enter “1” when you wish to use hospital menus, enter “2” for general practitioner menus, and “3” for veterinary menus. Press then the key.
NOTE When you have selected hospital menus, a window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified. Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the institution and then press the key.
RI0000382.EPS
3.
Enter “1” and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
RI0000384.EPS
The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is completed.
RI0000383.EPS
NOTE When you have selected “For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option)” at step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified. Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the institution and then press the key.
R 0000384.EPS
➔ The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is completed. Skip step 4 and proceed to step 5.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-92
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
5.
Set up the following, as necessary. ● Addition of descriptive characters to icons To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the descriptive characters appropriately.
■ For V7.1 or later
1.
Enter “3” on the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
For details of the descriptive character installation procedure, see “FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
● Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons appropriately.
00000301.EPS
2.
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation procedure, see “FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]” under “FR: Functionspecific Reference”.
When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography option), enter “2”. If not, enter “1”. Finalize your selection entry by pressing the key. A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
● Addition of date and time display To display the current date and time on the main window of the CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the date and time display function. For details of the procedure used to perform date and time display settings, see “FR18 Setup of Date and Time Display” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
6.
RI0000382.EPS
3.
Enter “1” and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
If you wish to continue to install various components, skip subsequent steps 7 and 8, and proceed to “7. Installing the CL Components”. “7. Installing the CL Components”.
7. 8.
RI0000471.ai
Enter “0” and press the key.
NOTE
The system returns to the desktop.
When you have selected “For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option)” at step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-93
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
4.
7.
Enter “1” and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
● Addition of descriptive characters to icons To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the descriptive characters appropriately. For details of the descriptive character installation procedure, see “FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
RI0000472.ai
5.
Set up the following, as necessary.
Enter the item number for a desired image processing parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the key.
● Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons appropriately.
A window like that shown below opens.
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation procedure, see “FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]” under “FR: Functionspecific Reference”.
● Addition of date and time display To display the current date and time on the main window of the CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the date and time display function.
R 0000384.EPS
6.
Enter the item number for the FNC parameter (Flexible Noise Control processing) that is to be used in the hospital and press the key. The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is completed.
For details of the procedure used to perform date and time display settings, see “FR18 Setup of Date and Time Display” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
8.
If you wish to continue to install various components, skip subsequent steps 9 and 10, and proceed to “7. Installing the CL Components”. “7. Installing the CL Components”.
9.
Enter “0” and press the key. The system returns to the desktop.
10. Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-94
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other than Japanese)
Enter the item number of the language you wish to install and press the key. A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to be selected.
■ For V7.0 or earlier
1.
3.
Enter “3” on the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE 00000301.EPS
2.
When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography option), enter “2”. If not, enter “1”. Finalize you r selection entry by pressing the key. A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
When you have selected “For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option)” at step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified. Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the institution and then press the key. ● When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
RI0000386.EPS
● When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
RI0000384.EPS RI0000427.EPS
NOTE Do not select “20) Slovene” because software version V7.0 (B) does not provide support to it. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
➔ The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is completed. Skip steps 4 and 5, and proceed to step 6.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-95
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
4.
Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment and press the key. A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is selected.
■ For V7.1 or later
1.
Enter “3” on the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
● When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
00000301.EPS
RI0000386.EPS
● When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
2.
When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography option), enter “2”. If not, enter “1”. Finalize you r selection entry by pressing the key. A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
RI0000384.EPS
5.
Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and press the key. The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that menu database replacement is completed.
6.
If you wish to continue to install various components, skip subsequent steps 7 and 8 and then proceed as directed on the next page.
7.
Enter “0” and press the key.
RI0000427.EPS
The system returns to the desktop.
8.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-96
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
3.
Enter the item number of the language you wish to install and press the key.
5.
A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to be selected.
Enter the item number for a desired image processing parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the key. A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameter is selected.
● When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE
RI0000386.EPS
● When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
When you have selected “For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option)” at step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
4.
Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment and press the key. A window opens where an image processing parameter is to be selected (for film/for monitor).
RI0000384.EPS
6.
Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and press the key. The message saying “Menu Database Installation Completed” will be displayed to indicate that menu database change is completed.
RI0000472.ai
7.
If you wish to continue to install various components, skip subsequent steps 8 and 9 and then proceed as directed on the next page.
8.
Enter “0” and press the key. The system returns to the desktop.
9.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-97
6. Installing the Screen Saver
6. Installing the Screen Saver
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-98
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)
7. Installing the CL Components XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
3.
Click
4. Click
. .
Install as follows the components (files) that are necessary for activating the CL.
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later) For installing the console software Built_inConsole, use the “IIP Setup Tool” on the CL-AP installation CD (2 of 2).
u NOTE u Built_inConsole must be installed even when only the RU or 5000 cassette-type Image Reader is installed. If it is not installed, an error occurs when the CL-AP starts running.
1.
RI000031.EPS
When the installation process ends, a message appears to indicate the completion of installation.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
NOTE
RI000029.EPS
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
5.
Click
.
A dialog box appears, prompting you to restart the PC.
6.
Click
.
RI000030.EPS
The PC restarts. RI000097.EPS
2.
Type in the number “4” and then press the key. The “Built_inConsole Setup” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.
Click
when the “20102” error code window is
displayed after the PC has been restarted.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-99
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
3.
For the FRIS Modules, use “IIP Setup Tool” on the CL-AP installation CD (2 of 2).
Click
.
A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
u NOTE u Even if the F-RIS function is not used, install the FRIS Modules. If they are not installed, an error occurs when the CL-AP starts. RI000043.EPS
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
4.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
NOTE
Click
.
The “Risiip - Choose Program Group” window opens.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
RI000044.EPS
5.
Click
.
The following warning window opens. RI0000473.ai
2.
Enter “10” and press the key. The “Risiip Setup” window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-100
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
6.
Click
9.
.
Click
.
A message appears to indicate that the installation is completed.
The following window opens.
RI000049.EPS R 000046.EPS
7.
Click
10. Click
.
.
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
The following window opens.
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
RI000047.EPS
8.
Click
.
The following window opens.
RI000048.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-101
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key
8. Installing the Standard Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
REFERENCE
372
2.
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
This error screen opens when the AP key is not installed. This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP key will be installed later in “11. AP Key Installation”.
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
3. 371
Click
372
Insert the XG-1 Standard Key CD into the PC. The RU connection key installation start window automatically opens. This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
Install the XG-1 Standard Key that is supplied with the CL, as directed below. If the CD supplied with the CL is the Standard Key, proceed to “8.3 Installing the Standard Key”.
REFERENCE
00000337.EPS
When the XG-1 Standard Key (A01) is installed, the following functions are available.
4.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
RU connection (FRUP) HQ image transfer (image transfer from the RU only) DRC image processing TAS image processing Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACS
These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
REFERENCE
00000338.EPS
The XG-1 Standard Key will be supplied only for a shipment when a single RU is to be connected. When two or more RUs or a single 5000 plus are to be connected, install the 5000 Standard Key as well.
5.
1.
6.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above, consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, DRC image processing key, TAS image processing key, image magnification or full screen display key on the QA window, and other competing PACS connection key.
7.
Remove the CD from the PC.
Turn ON the PC power. An error screen like that shown below opens immediately after CLAP startup.
00000332.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
.
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-102
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key
3.
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
Insert the 5000 Standard Key CD into the PC. The installation start window for the 5000 series key automatically opens.
372
These on-screen portions vary with the key to be installed.
When a single 5000 plus are connected, install the 5000 Standard Key. The 5000 Standard Key is stored on the CD that is supplied with the CL.
REFERENCE When the 5000 Standard Key is installed, the following functions are available. 5000 plus connection DRC image processing TAS image processing Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs
1.
RI000002.EPS
4.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
5.
Click
. These on-screen portions vary with the key to be installed.
Turn ON the PC. The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP startup.
00000332.EPS
REFERENCE
RI000003.EPS
The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed. This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP key will be installed later in “11. AP Key Installation”.
2.
Click
The installation start window for the DRC image transfer key opens.
6.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above, consecutively install the DRC image processing key, TAS image processing key, image magnification or full screen display on the QA window key and other competing PACS connection key.
7.
Remove the CD from the PC.
.
You are returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-103
8.3 Installing the Standard Key
8.3 Installing the Standard Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
2. 371
372
3.
Install the Standard Key supplied with the CL, as directed below. The Standard Key released after A09 includes the two types, Lite and Plus, and their available functions are different with each other.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Insert the Standard Key CD into the PC.
The installation start window for the RU connection key automatically opens.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
When the Standard Key is installed, the following functions are available.
1.
.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
RU connection (FRUP) HQ image transfer (only images from RUs) 5000 plus connection DRC image processing TAS image processing FNC processing (A01 or later for Lite and A02 or later for Plus) Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window [not available for Lite.] LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs [not available for Lite.] Film annotation characters [not available for Lite.] Delux QA [not available for Lite.]
Click
This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
00000337.EPS
4.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
Turn ON the PC. The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP startup.
00000332.EPS
00000338.EPS
5. 6.
REFERENCE The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed. This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP key will be installed later in “11. AP Key Installation”.
7. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
.
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically opens.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above, consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, 5000 plus connection key, DRC image processing key, TAS image processing key, FNC image processing key, image magnification or full screen display on the QA window key (not available for Lite), other competing PACS connection key (not available for Lite) and Delux QA key (not available for Lite). Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-104
9. ****BLANK****
9. ****BLANK****
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-105
10. Option Key Installation
10. Option Key Installation XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
Function
371
Product Code CL DICOM MAMMO S
CR Digital Mammography function. Image processing parameters will not be provided.
CL DICOM MAMMO P
CR Digital Mammography function. Image processing parameters will be provided.*1
372
Install the same option keys that were used immediately before OS reinstallation. Unless the option keys have been deleted by newly installing the OS or deleting the option key registry, option key reinstallation is not required.
Description
Image input/ output (cont’d) CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B
Removable media image storage function
u NOTE u
CL DICOM QR
After option key installation, be sure to install the AP key. The reason is that installing the option keys disables the AP key that has been enabled.
Function for study query/image retrieval to/from filing devices.
CL DICOM PDI STORAGE
Function that writes exposed images onto a CD-R.
CL DICOM COMMITMENT
Function assuring that an image has surely been stored in the archiver unit.*2
IR 346 DELUX-QA
QA function addition*3
Function Print output
Product Code IR346 LOCAL PRINT
LP (local printer) connection
IR346 DICOM PRINT
DICOM Print function
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
DICOM-based image transmission functions available (Also include a function to transmit unstandardized images to the QA-WS.) Options installed are as follows. CR Storage SCU (Standard) CR Storage SCU (Private) (“Private Unstandardized CR Storage” is included in “Private”.)
Image input/ output IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED
IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Description
Functions available for processed-image transmission with DICOM Options installed are as follows. CR Storage SCU (Standard) Processed image generation Function for image transfer (input/ output) with FINP Options installed are as follows. FINP output FINP input (Supports only the reprint function.)
Image storage assurance QA function
CL TILE-IM QA FOR PLUS QA batch processing IR 346 MFP IR 348 MFP
Image processing
MFP image processing
CL SHUTTER-PROC
Shuttering processing
CL PEM
PEM image processing
CL IM COMPOSITION
Image composition
CL IM-MAGNIFY FOR LITE
Image magnification (for Lite Standard Key)
CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT FOR LITE
LUT adjustment for connection to other competing PACS (for Lite Standard Key)
CL ANNOTATION FOR LITE
Annotation function (for Lite Standard Key)
*1 To use this option, the “CL DICOM MAMMO S” option key must have
been installed. *2 To use this option, the “IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE” option key must have been installed. *3 When “IR346 DELUX-QA” is installed, all the QA functions are made available. If it is not installed, only a limited number of QA functions available.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-106
10. Option Key Installation
Function Image processing (cont’d)
Product Code
Description
CL GPR
Grid Pattern Removal (GPR) function
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD for each product.
FCR QC TEST SOFT
Image Reader QC function
FCR QC TEST SOFT M
Mammo QC function
The installation procedure is described below. The same installation procedure applies to all the option keys.
CL ID ONLINE
ID Online function
CL DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM worklist function CL DICOM ID MWM
DICOM worklist function (acquiring only patient information)
CL DICOM MPPS
DICOM PPS function*1 Basically, installed together with MWM.
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT
Ordering function (Synapse RIS)
Energy subtraction processing
CL ES
Energy subtraction function Make sure to install this function when XU-D1 is connected.
X-ray controller
CL X ONLINE
X-CON control function
P-Console
CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL*2
Study reception information transfer/reception function
Acquisition of patient information
Display of CR PRECISE precise enlargement ENLARGEMENT images
Function to present displayed images and their additional information on the 2nd monitor.
QA ROI CR QA ROI measurement MEASUREMENT
Function to determine an ROI on an image and display its width and height, as well as the mean pixel value, median pixel value, standard deviation and area.
Other
u NOTE u
CL RETAKE ANALYSIS
1.
The installation start window automatically opens in several seconds.
u NOTE u In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
The indication varies with the option key for installation.
00000455.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Function for storage/calculation of exposure/mis-exposure image information.
u NOTE u Depending on the option for installation, the installation start window will be displayed some times.
*1 Use this option together with the “CL DICOM ORDER MWM” or “CL DICOM ID MWM” option. *2 Install ActiveSync (Windows Mobile device center when the OS used is Windows Vista) prior to installation of the POCKET id Console option key.
Perform steps 2. and 3. as well.
4. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Insert an option key CD into the PC.
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-107
11. AP Key Installation
11. AP Key Installation XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
Install the AP key as follows:
359 370
1. 371
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
372
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
Before AP key installation, be sure to install a standard key and option keys.
2.
REFERENCE The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry information is generated to define the encryption key. The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is installed.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Version A software 00000456.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen. RI000007.EPS
Version B software
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
RI0000104.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-108
12. Initializing the Image Database
12. Initializing the Image Database XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
3.
Click [Data Base Utility]. The “ImageDB Initialization” window opens.
372
u NOTES u After initial installation of the OS, be sure to initialize the image database. Starting up the CL-AP without initializing the image database will cause errors to be indicated (error codes: 50001, 20001, 30107, 30151, 20110, etc). [For Windows 2000/XP] Database can be initialized only when MSDE has been running. If MSDE is running, the icon will be displayed in the task tray at the lower right corner of the window. If it is not displayed, restart the PC.
00000130.EPS
4.
Click
.
A confirmation window opens.
[For Windows Vista] Database can be initialized only when SQL Server has been running. If the SQL Server has not been running, restart the PC. If images are accumulated on the image output queue, database cannot be initialized. It is thus necessary to delete images accumulated on the image output queue. For the procedure to be used to delete images accumulated on the image output queue, see “8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
1.
DCL44011.ai
5.
Click
.
The command prompt window opens. After several seconds, the following message appears.
Turn ON the CL-PC power. Windows starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
2.
00000184.EPS
Start the Service Utility. For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The main menu opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-109
12. Initializing the Image Database
6.
Press the key. After about 20 seconds, the system completes image database initialization.
u NOTES u If the following message appears, images included in the image database have not been initialized accordingly. It failed in initialized DB. Make sure that MSDE has been running and images are not accumulated on the image output queue. [For Windows 2000/XP] To start up MSDE Restart the PC and make sure that the the task tray.
icon is displayed in
[For Windows Vista] To start up SQL Server I. Restart the PC. II. Select “Control Panel” from the menu and double-click “Administrative Tools”. III. Double-click “Computer Management”. IV. Select “Computer Management” – “Service and Application” – “SQL Server configuration Manager” – “SQL Server 2005 Service”. V. Confirm that SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) is running. When images are accumulated on the image output queue Delete images accumulated on the output queue. “8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”
7.
The same message as that appears in step 4. above (“Press any key to continue...”) will reappear here. Press the key. The system returns to the “ImageDB Initialization” window.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-110
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings) XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
nanao L362T
359 370
371
372
With [LUT] of the Service Utility, install an LUT file that matches the display characteristics.
: EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L362T) : Linear (straight line) LUT Linear LUT nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (monochrome monitor) : LCD monitor SL-IC300 nanao Radiforce R31 (color monitor) : 17" color LCD monitor (model L568) nanao L568M : EIZO 17" LCD monitor with a touch nanao L560T-C panel (model L560T-C) nanao Radiforce G22-CL
: LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor) : LCD monitor nanao Radiforce GS220 (2M monochrome monitor) nanao Radiforce GS310-ECN : LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor) : LCD monitor nanao Radiforce RX320 (3M color monitor) For details, see “4. Display Optimization - LUT” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
RI000106.EPS
TPS 9415 TD15 TPS 9416 TD15 TPS 9416TD15_2 PRESTO! (B/W) PRESTO! (Color) ikegami MDM2130 nanao L350P nanao L351P nanao SL-IC200
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
: 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS9415TD15/G2) : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS9416TD15/H2) : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 (monochrome) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC500 (color) : Ikegami monitor (1k landscape type) : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L350P-TS) : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L351P-TS) : LCD Monitor SL-IC200
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-111
14. Restoring the CL-Config
14. Restoring the CL-Config XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
The following 24 data files are to be restored in the CL:
● Configuration Restore/Backup (IV. on the Service Utility main menu window) Backs up or restores CL’s setup data. Files to be backed up or restored are as follows. ❍ SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) System settings Local printer settings CSL settings FINP settings FRUP settings QA process settings ❍ NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) Connected equipment information table Connection destination setup table DicomPrint sort destination setup table FINP compression ratio setting Distribution code setting ❍ PN.mdb file (A00 or later) PN (Person Name) settings ❍ McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later) Magnetic card format setting ❍ TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later) Setup for DICOM tag replacement ❍ QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B)) Setup of display items on the QA window ❍ Selector.mdb file (A02 or later) Selector setup ❍ TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later) DICOM tag editing (for Siemens) ❍ FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later) Film character definition ❍ BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later) Barcode format setting 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
372
❍ ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later) Setup for exposure result log output items ❍ MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later) DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup information ❍ PConsoleSer.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later) Settings for PDA connection ❍ RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later) Setting for comments on mis-exposed images ❍ CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later) Setting a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series equipment ❍ UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm, UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later) Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR364 (type U/type T), CR-IR366 and CR-IR367. ❍ UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later) Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371. ❍ TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later) Setup for output of truncated data ❍ IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later) Patient ID history ❍ MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later) Setup of order issuance function for screening examination ❍ UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later) Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader (reserved) ❍ ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later) Setup of ExposureIndex function ❍ TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later) Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag ❍ IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later) Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders
IMPORTANT Data files to be restored must be of the same software versions. Restoring data files of different software versions will disable the software to be operated correctly. Note, however, that the following can be restored correctly. Restoring the A02 version data to A03 Restoring the A04 or A05 version data to A06
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-112
14. Restoring the CL-Config
u NOTES u If no backup data is available, restore the configuration settings as follows. Restoring the RU (one RU connection) configuration (“NETWORK CONFIG” “ALL OTHER NODES” and CONNECTING EUIPMENT) Host name : ru0 (default) IP address : 172.16.1.10 (default) Add Node : FRUP Attribute : CASSETTE Function : READER Device#1 : ru0 (default)
Restoring configuration for connection to other equipment (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/ 9000series)
“2. Software Setup” in “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”
Restoring the barcode reader and magnetic card reader configuration (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/ CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X/9000 series)
“Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option]” and “Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]” in “Appx IN: Installation – Appendix
Setting dummy nodes (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/ CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
1.
Insert media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) that stores a CL-Config backup into the PC.
2.
Start the Service Utility mode.
00000512.EPS
Restoring configuration for connection to the XG-1 RU (two or more RUs connected)
“4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection” under “IN-B: Installation – Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/ 359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372”
3.
Click
.
The “Configuration Restore/Backup” window opens.
Restoring configuration for connection to the 5000 plus
“4.6 Configuration Setting for IR (5000plus series) Connection” under “IN-B: Installation – Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372”
For details on the Service Utility mode startup procedure, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”. The main menu appears.
4.
Click
in the Configuration Restore area.
Restoring configuration for connection to the CR-IR356/357/ 359/36X/37X
“4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection” under “IN-B: Installation - Connection to Tow or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372”
Restoring the CL system configuration (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
“5.3 Setup with Service Utility” in “IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR 355RU/356/357/359”
00000349.EPS
The “Specified Directory” window opens.
“4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility” under “IN-B: Connection to Two of More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/ 357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372” 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000350.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-113
14. Restoring the CL-Config
5.
Click the downward arrow mark
within , and then choose the
media drive.
6.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “Configuration Restore/Backup” window.
7.
Click
.
u NOTES u Even when the restore process ends, no message appears to indicate it. While the restore process is being performed, the mouse cursor is replaced by the “ ” mark. When the “ ” mark changes back to the mouse cursor, it means that the restore process is ended. Note, however, that the “
” mark appears only when the mouse
cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup window. When there are three backup FDs, change first the 1st FD to the 2nd FD. Perform then steps 3 through 7 to restore data of the 2nd FD and change it to the 3rd FD. Follow steps 3 through 7 to restore data of the 3rd FD in a similar manner. Before removing the media (FD, USB memory stick or the like), check to see that the drive access lamp is distinguished.
8.
Remove the media from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-114
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only) XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
1.
Insert the Windows 2000/XP reinstallation CD into the PC.
REFERENCE When the Dell OptiPlex GX110 is employed as the PC, use the “Dell Product Recovery CD”. 371
372
Perform the following procedures to prepare on the CL’s HDD the FTP server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR35X/36X.
The “Microsoft Windows 2000/XP CD” window opens.
Windows 2000
The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS manager.
u NOTES u When the OS used is Windows Vista, the work operation directed herein needs not be done. For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected), create the FTP server only for the CL that will serve as the RU masterIIP.
REFERENCE The IIS manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and comes with the OS (Windows 2000/XP).
00000140.EPS
Windows XP
RI0000358.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-115
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)
2.
For Windows XP
Perform the following settings.
Place a checkmark to
For Windows 2000 Click
(
.
) and click
.
The “Internet Information Service (IIS)” window opens.
For Windows XP Click
Place a checkmark to
.
(
The “Windows Components Wizard” window opens.
) and click
.
The system returns to the “Windows Components Wizard” window.
Click
.
Installation processing will start. After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that installation processing has been completed.
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Microsoft Windows 2000 CD/XP” window. 00000141.EPS
3.
5.
Perform the following settings.
6.
Place a checkmark to
) and click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
For Windows 2000 (
Click
.
Installation processing will start. After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that installation processing has been completed.
Remove the CD from the PC.
CAUTION When the FTP server was created following the procedure described in this chapter before performing “4. Installing MSDE/ Database Management System and Its Service Pack”, with Windows XP SP2 installed as directed in “2. Installing and Setting Up the OS”, return to “4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack” to reinstall the software. Return to “4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-116
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility
16. CR-IR346RU Settings XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility 371
372
To perform CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) software settings, be sure to observe the procedures shown in the flow below.
u NOTE u
The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that exercises RU-AP installation, RU-Config setup, data backup, and other functions. For the operations of the CL and RU, it is necessary that the RU M-Utility be installed in the CL. For the RU M-Utility installation procedure, see “5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility” in “IN-A: Installation – One RU Connection”.
For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected), perform CR-IR346RU-related settings only for the CL that will serve as the XG-1 RU master-IIP. 16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility 16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server 16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-117
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server
4.
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server
From the “Action” menu, choose “Properties”.
To set up the FTP server, use the IIS manager to specify the location (directory) where the RU saves configuration and other data. Communications between the CL and the RU will not be enabled if the location for saving the data is not specified on the directory.
1.
In the “Control Panel” window, double-click
.
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
2.
Double-click
. 00000460.EPS
The “Internet Information Services” window opens.
3.
Click the select
sign to the left of the CL’s host name and then .
The “Default FTP Site Properties” window opens.
5.
Click the “Home Directory” tab.
00000152.EPS
00000151.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-118
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server
6.
9.
Enter settings as directed below:
Type in “ftp 127.0.0.1” and then press the key. A message appears to prompt for user name input. --------------------------------------------------Connected to 127.0.0.1. 220 iip-1 microsoft FTP Service (Version 5.0). User(127.0.0.1:(none)):_ ---------------------------------------------------
10. Type in “cr-ir346” and then press the key. A message appears to prompt for password input.
II
I 00000153.EPS
I.
Click
11. Type in “cr-ir346” and then press the key.
to select directory of
“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR346”. II. Check
7.
Click
(so that
changes to
and then click
u NOTE u Even when you enter the password, nothing appears on the display.
).
.
The system returns to the “Internet Information Services” window.
8.
The next step is to check whether the FTP server is operating normally. From the “Start” menu, choose “Programs”, “Accessories”, and then “Command Prompt”. The “Command Prompt” window opens.
--------------------------------------------------331 Password required for cr-ir346. Password:_ ---------------------------------------------------
The following message appears when you successfully log into the FTP server: --------------------------------------------------230 User cr-ir346 logged in. ftp>_ ---------------------------------------------------
u NOTE u If the above message does not appear, it means that the FTP server is not properly set up. In such an instance, perform steps 12. and 13. and then repeat the whole FTP server setup procedure beginning with step 1.
12. Type in “bye” and then press the key.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-119
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
13.
Close the “Command Prompt” window.
REFERENCE [registration of the FTP user (user name: cr-ir346)] For the RU to access the FTP, both the login name and the password are required. For the CL operation, no such settings are required because both the login name and the password are set up automatically. Use the procedure below to check the setup data. 1. Click the “Users and Passwords” icon in the Control Panel. The “Users and Passwords” window opens. 2. Make sure that the “cr-ir346” user name has been registered to the Administrators group.
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config First, install the RU-AP in the CL, and then restore the RU-Config. To do this, use the RU M-Utility and perform the procedures set forth in this section.
IMPORTANT If the CL’s IP address written in the RU-Config backup is other than 172.16.1.20, you must pay due attention to the procedure that you perform immediately after RU-AP installation. Be sure to restore the RU-Config immediately after RU-AP installation. Before restoring it, never restart the CL-AP or PC. The FTP server’s RU-Config data reverts to the default values when the RU-AP is installed. Since the RU-Config in the RU’s FLASH ROM is updated to the default data if the CL-AP is started up with the FTP server RU-Config reverted to the default, the RU will result in losing track of the CL.
Confirm.
u NOTE u Before installing the RU-AP, turn ON the RU power.
00000461.EPS
Installing the RU-AP (procedure applicable to RU-AP version A07 or later) For the RU-AP installation procedure, see “5.2.2 Installing the RUAP” in “IN-A: Installation – One RU Connection”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-120
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
Restoring the RU-Config
l Main menu window
Perform the procedure set forth below to restore the RU configuration file.
REFERENCE The scanner data, which was backed up at the time of installation, need not be restored unless the FLASH ROM of the RU main unit becomes defective.
1.
Have on hand media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) on which the RU-Config was backed up. Insert this media into the PC.
2.
Start the RU M-Utility as directed below. III. Specify the file. 00000215.EPS
3.
In the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” area, click the host name of the RU to be restored. RU host name
IV. Click.
00000434.EPS
The pull-down menu for the field and the
II. Click.
“EXECUTE” button change their color from gray to black.
I. Click.
00000219.EPS
The RU M-Utility main menu opens. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-121
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
4.
Note the
field to
verify that
7. 8.
.
mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
is
selected, and then click
Click the
From the
menu, select sequentially “Programs”,
“FujiFilm” and “FCR”.
A confirmation window opens.
The CL-AP starts up. The RU fetches the RU-Config in the FTP server to overwrite the RU-Config in the FLASH ROM.
REFERENCE 00000351.EPS
5.
Click
.
The RU-Config is then restored in the FTP server. A window opens to indicate the end of the restore process.
No problem arises even when the RU-Config in the FLASH ROM is overwritten in the above manner. As far as the FTP server data is the same as the data in the RU’s FLASH ROM, the latter data is not overwritten. However, when the RU-Config is restored, its date is updated. That is why the contents of the FLASH ROM are updated. The RU-Config setup data used to overwrite the FLASH ROM is identical with the data that was backed up.
00000352.EPS
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the RU M-Utility main menu.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-122
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
This section describes the software setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/ 36X/37X.
u NOTE u When two or more CLs are connected, perform the following procedures for only the CL unit that serves as the RU master IIP.
Installing the RU PC-TOOL Install the CR-IR35X/36X/37X’s RU PC-TOOL on the CL PC. For the installation procedure, see “IN: Installation” in the Service Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
Setting the RU PC-TOOL With the RU PC-TOOL, perform the application installation and configuration setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/36X/37X. For the installation and configuration setup procedures, see “IN: Installation” in the Service Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
REFERENCE You do not have to perform an FTP server setup procedure for the CR-IR35X/36X, because FTP server setup is automatically completed when you install the RU PC-TOOL. (However, the FTP server setup procedure must be performed for the XG-1 RU.)
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-123
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference] XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
3.
Enter settings as directed below.
372
I II
To perform a remote maintenance of the CL, set up NetMeeting by performing the procedures set forth below. A client who is using the Synpase Web Query function on the CL with Windows XP must not install NetMeeting. (This is because multiple images appear being overlapped with each other in the viewing dialog.)
III
NOTE
00000356.EPS
I.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the work operation directed herein needs not be done.
Installing NetMeeting
1.
Enter “FCR” in the
field.
II. Enter “CSL” in the
field.
III. Enter “FCR-CSL” in the
Perform the following settings.
4.
For Windows 2000 From the [Start] menu, sequentially select “Programs”, “Accessories”, “Communication” and then “NetMeeting”. The “NetMeeting” window opens.
Click
field.
.
A window opens to prompt for director server setup.
5.
Enter settings as directed below.
For Windows XP From the [Start] menu, select “Run...”. The “Run...” window opens. Enter “conf.exe” in
and click
I
.
II
The “NetMeeting” window opens.
00000357.EPS
00000355.EPS
2.
Click
I. Deselect (so that changes to ). II. Check (so that changes to ).
.
A window opens, prompting you to enter user information. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-124
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
6.
Click
13. Click
.
A window opens, prompting you to specify the network connection speed.
7.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate that audio setup is completed.
.
A window opens for shortcut creation.
8.
Enter settings as directed below. 00000360.EPS
14. Click I II
.
NetMeeting starts up in about 15 seconds.
For Windows 2000
00000358.EPS
I. Deselect (so that II. Deselect (so that
9.
Click
changes to changes to
). ).
.
The “Audio Tuning Wizard” window opens.
00000361.EPS
For Windows XP 00000359.EPS
10. Click
.
A volume setup window opens.
11. Click
.
A microphone setup window opens.
12. Click
.
RI0000353.EPS
A message appears to indicate that no microphone is connected. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-125
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
Setting remote desktop sharing
1.
From the “Tools” menu, choose “Remote Desktop Sharing”. The “Remote Desktop Sharing Wizard” window opens.
00000362.EPS
2.
Click
.
A window opens to explain about the access rights to Remote Desktop Sharing.
3.
Click
.
A screen saver setup window opens.
4.
Turn ON the
(so that
and then click
changes to
),
.
A window opens to indicate the end of setup.
00000363.EPS
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “NetMeeting” window.
6.
From the “Call” menu, choose “Exit and Activate Remote Desktop Sharing”. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-126
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
19. IIS Network Virus Protection XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
3.
Double-click the service listing named “World Wide Web Publishing Service”.
372
To provide network virus protection, complete the following setup procedures for IIS. Suspending the Web service and SMTP server Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the FTP service
Suspending the Web service and SMTP server (only Windows 2000/XP)
1.
Click
, point to “Settings”, and then click “Control
Panel”.
RI000068.EPS
(For Windows XP, select “Control Panel” from the
The “World Wide Web Publishing Service Properties (Local Computer)” window opens.
menu.)
2.
Double-click
and then
.
4.
From the “Startup type” pull-down menu, choose “Disabled”.
The “Services” window opens.
Choose "Disabled".
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI000069.EPS
RI-127
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
5.
Click
.
The selection for the “Startup type” field changes from “Automatic” to “Disabled”.
Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the FTP service ● For Windows 2000/XP
1.
In the “Control Panel” window, double-click then
and
.
The “Internet Information Services” window opens.
2.
Click on the host name in the left-hand pane and then click on “Default FTP Site” in the right-hand pane.
RI000070.EPS
6.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 3. through 5, disable “Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP)” as well.
RI000072.EPS
3.
From the “Action” menu, choose “Properties”. The “Default FTP Site Properties” window opens.
4.
Disable this service.
Choose the “Security Accounts” tab and then uncheck “Allow Anonymous Connections” ( ).
R 000071.EPS
RI000073.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-128
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
5.
When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose
.
● For Windows Vista
1.
In the “Control Panel” window, double-click
then
and
.
The “Internet Information Services” window opens.
2.
In the left-hand side pane, click on the “Host Name” - “FTP Site” - “Default FTP Site”.
RI000074.EPS
6.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “Internet Information Services” window.
7.
Close the “Internet Information Services” window and “Control Panel” window.
8.
Restart the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI0000478.ai
3.
From the “Action” menu, choose “Properties”. The “Default FTP Site Properties” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-129
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
4.
Choose the “Security Accounts” tab and then uncheck “Allow anonymous connections” ( ).
7.
Close the “Internet Information Service” window and the “Control Panel” window.
8.
Restart the PC.
RI0000479.ai
5.
When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose
.
RI0000480.ai
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Internet Information Services” window. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-130
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
■ Windows XP SP2 installation
1.
➔ The “Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard” window opens.
2. 371
CL-AP shutdown Windows XP SP2 installation Firewall settings
3.
4.
Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner of the window. The Service Utility starts and then the “Service Utility” window opens.
3.
➔
) and click
Click
.
➔ Installation of Windows XP SP2 starts. The “Completing the Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard” window opens in about 22 minutes.
5.
Click
.
➔ The computer restarts and then the “Help protect your PC” window opens.
6.
➔ Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
2.
Place a checkmark to [I agree] (
➔ The “Select Options” window opens.
■ CL-AP shutdown Turn ON the PC power.
.
.
NOTE Installation of Windows XP SP2 is performed provided that the CL has already been installed appropriately. If Windows XP SP2 was reinstalled for reason of a CL failure, for example, be sure to reinstall the CL and then install Windows XP SP2.
Click
The software license agreement window opens.
372
To protect the CL from the threat of network viruses and illegal access, Windows XP Service Pack 2 (hereinafter referred to as “SP2”) should be installed. Follow the steps below to perform settings necessary for installation of Windows XP SP2.
1.
Insert the Windows XP SP2 CD into the PC.
Place a checkmark to [Not rigth now] (
➔
) and click
. ➔ The CL-AP starts.
7.
Shut down the CL-AP. For how to shut down the CL-AP, see steps 2 and 3 of “■ CL-AP shutdown”.
Click [Exit Service Utility] at the lower right of the window. ➔ The Service Utility will then shut down.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-131
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
■ Firewall settings The two types of settings, exceptional settings and communication protocol ICMP settings, are performed on the Firewall window.
3.
Click
.
➔ The “Add a Program” window opens.
● Exceptional settings
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu, and double-
click “Windows Firewall”. ➔ The Windows Firewall window opens.
200000001.EPS
2.
Select the “Exceptions” tab.
20000003.EPS
4.
Click
.
➔ The “Browse” window opens.
200000002.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
20000004.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-132
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
5.
➔ The “Add a Program” window then opens again.
If the “Browse” window includes any of the execution files (programs) listed below, select one of them and click . Table Execution file list
Execution file name C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ML_UPSEvent.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPUserUtility.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\ BmpServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\ InfoHostServer.exe C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\wcescomm.exe
Remarks
20000005.EPS
6. For installing the RU PC-TOOL. For installing the FCR-TOOL. When the POCKET id Console is used.
Click with the program to be added being selected appropriately. ➔ The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
7.
Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the added execution file displayed in the Programs and Services field.
C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe
For installing the client RU PC-TOOL. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe When WakeOnLAN is used. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe When WakeOnLAN is used. C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe For version V3.0 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\ For version V3.0 or later IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe For version V3.1 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe For version V3.1 or later C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ For version V8.1 or later IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe 20000006.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-133
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the number for programs to be added.
9.
Click
12. Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the
added port name displayed in the Programs and Services filed.
.
➔ The “Add a Port” window opens.
10. Add ports as instructed below.
I II III 20000008.EPS
20000007.EPS
I.
Enter a port name in
.
II. Enter a port number in III.
.
➔
Table Port setup information list Port name FTP_port SQLServer_port SQLMonitor_port
11. Click
Port number 21 1433 1434
Protocol type TCP TCP UDP
.
➔ The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-134
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
● ICMP settings
1.
Select the “Advanced” tab on the Windows Firewall window and click of ICMP. ➔ The “ICMP Settings” window opens.
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
4.
Click
on the Windows Firewall window.
➔ The Windows Firewall window will then close.
20000009.EPS
2.
Place a checkmark to the “Allow incoming echo request” setup item ( ➔ ).
20000010.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-135
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
● Balloon Tips display settings The Windows Security Center may display an alert, or “Balloon Tips,” in the notification area (to the right of the taskbar). To suppress such an alert, follow the procedure below.
1. 2.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
4.
On the “Alert Settings” window that opens, remove checkmarks from “Firewall”, “Automatic Updates” and “Virus Protection” ( ➔ ).
5.
Click
.
➔ The “Control Panel” window opens.
NOTE
Double-click “Security Center”.
Following the procedure shown below, you can ensure that Windows XP SP2 has been installed successfully.
➔ A window like that shown below opens.
1. Right-click “My Computer” from the
menu.
➔ The My Computer pop-up menu window opens. 2. Select “Properties”. ➔ The “System Properties” window opens. 3. Select the “General” tab. ➔ Windows XP SP2 has been installed successfully if “Service Pack 2” is displayed in the “System”.
20000011.EPS
3.
Click “Change the way Security Center alerts me” that is on the left-side pane. ➔ A window like that shown below opens.
20000012.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-136
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
1.
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
2.
Select “Advanced” tab and click
in
“Performance”.
372
Perform the following settings. For Windows 2000/XP Select “Control Panel” from the
menu, and doubleclick
.
AWS35012.ai
The “Performance Options” window opens. The “System” window opens.
3.
For Windows Vista Select “Control Panel” from the doubleclick
Select “Advanced” tab and click
in “Virtual
memory”.
menu, and
.
The “System” window opens.
Click “Advanced system settings”.
AWS35013.ai
AWS35040.ai
The “Virtual Memory” window opens.
The “System Properties” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-137
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size
4.
Confirm the following settings. : 1536 MB Initial size Maximum size : 2048 MB
AWS35014.ai
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Performance Options” window.
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
7.
Close the “System Properties” window. The system returns to the “System” window.
8.
Close the “System” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-138
22. Setting the Event Log
22. Setting the Event Log XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
4.
357 368
359 370
371
Make the following settings.
372
■ For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu, and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools]. The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
2.
I
Double-click “Event Viewer”.
II
The “Event Viewer” window opens.
3.
Right-click a “Application” and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu. RI0000482.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is “512”KB.
NOTE If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one shown above, change it to “512” KB. II. Select “Overwrite event as needed”.
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.
6.
Right-click a “System” and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu. The the “System Properties” window opens.
RI0000481.ai
The “Application Properties” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7. 8. 9.
Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5. Close the “Event Viewer” window.
The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
Close the “Administrative Tools” window.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-139
22. Setting the Event Log
4.
■ For Windows Vista
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Make the following settings.
menu, and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools]. The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
2.
Double-click “Event Viewer”. The “Event Viewer” window opens.
3.
Right-click “Application” and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu.
I II
AWS35011.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is “20480”KB.
NOTE AWS35039.ai
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one shown above, change it to “20480” KB.
The “Log Properties - Application” window opens.
II. Select “Overwrite events as needed”.
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6.
Right-click a “System” and then choose “Properties” from the pop-up menu.
7.
Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-140
22. Setting the Event Log
8.
Select “Customize...” from the “View” menu.
20000012.ai
The “Customize View” window opens.
9.
Remove the checkmark from the “Action pane”.
AWS35011.ai
10. Click
.
The system returns to the “Event Viewer” window.
11. Close the “Event Viewer” window. The system returns to the “Administrative Tools” window.
12. Close the “Administrative Tools” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-141
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only)
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only) XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
1.
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
Select “Control Panel” from the
359 370
371
372
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “AutoPlay” window opens.
3.
Remove the checkmark from “Use AutoPlay for all media and devices”.
AWS35021.ai
4.
Click [Save].
5.
Close the “Control Panel” window. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-142
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only) XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
NOTE Firewall settings are performed provided that the CL has already been installed appropriately.
■ AP shutdown
1.
Turn ON the PC power. Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
2.
Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner of the window. The “Enter Password” window opens.
DXL41001.ai
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-143
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)
■ Setting the Firewall / ICMP
● When the AP-CD is used
● When the FD is used
1.
Insert the “114Y5085953A00” FD into the FD drive.
2.
Select “All Programs” – “Accessories” – “Run...” from the menu.
Insert the CL-AP CD into the PC.
2.
Select “All Programs” – “Accessories” – “Run...” from the menu. The “Run...” window opens.
3.
The “Run...” window opens.
3.
1.
Enter “D:\Tools\FirewallSetting.bat” and click [OK]. The command prompt window opens. After a while, the following window opens.
Enter “A:\FirewallSetting.bat” and click [OK]. The command prompt window opens. After a while, the following window opens.
20000011.ai
4.
Press the key. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI0000496.ai
4.
Press the key. The system returns to the desktop screen.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-144
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)
■ Checking the Firewall Settings
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the doubleclick
2.
➥ REFERENCE Execution file list
menu and
.
The “Windows Firewall” window opens.
Click “Allow a program through Windows Firewall”.
AWS35015.ai
3.
The “Windows Firewall Settings” window opens.
Select the “Exceptions” tab and check to see that the following items are checkmarked appropriately.
BmpServer.exe DicomStoreSCP.exe FF-WakeOnLAN.exe IdLoginExe.exe IipInput.exe IipMain.exe IipOutput.exe IIPServiceUtility.exe IIPTRISScreen.exe inetinfo.exe ML_UPSEvent.exe Retrieve.exe SSFinp.exe SSXfer.exe
conf.exe FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe FTP.exe IipFinp.exe IipInputEz.exe IipMedia.exe IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe IIPUserUtility.exe InfoHostServer.exe mnmsrvc.exe SSDecision.exe SSIpServer.exe
Execution file name C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ML_UPSEvent.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPUserUtility.exe C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\ BmpServer.exe C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\ InfoHostServer.exe C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe
Remarks
RU PC-TOOL installed FCR-TOOL installed
Client PC tool installed C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe WakeOnLAN C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe WakeOnLAN C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe For V3.0 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe For V3.0 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe For V3.1 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe For V3.1 or later C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe For V8.1 or later
Port setup information list Port name FTP_port SQLServer_port SQLMonitor_port
Port number 21 1433 1434
Protocol type TCP TCP UDP
RI240001.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-145
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)
3.
■ Checking the ICMP Settings
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools] .
The “Adoministrator Tools” window opens.
2.
Select “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer” – “Monitoring” – “Firewall” and confirm that the following items have been added.
Double-click “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security”.
Networking - Address Mask Request (ICMPv4-In) Networking - Destination Unreachable (ICMPv4-Out) Networking - Echo Request (ICMPv4-In) Networking - Parameter Problem (ICMPv4-Out) Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-In) Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-Out) Networking - Router Solicitation (ICMPv4-In) Networking - Source Quench (ICMPv4-Out) Networking - Time Exceeded (ICMPv4-Out) Networking - Timestamp Request (ICMPv4-In)
AWS35021.ai
The “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security” window opens.
RI0000483.ai
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Close both the “Windows Firewall with Advanced Security” and “Administrative Tools” windows.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-146
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-147
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
RI-148
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs This appendix describes the procedures for uninstalling the following APs: CL-AP MSDE (SQL SP included) / SQL Server RU-AP RU M-UTILITY Option keys Touch panel driver Console software (Built_inConsole) FRIS Modules Synapse Client (Synapse Workstation) *1 Precise enlargement software QA ROI measurement software
CAUTION *1: Uninstall this software only when reinstalling or upgrading a linking application. No support is provided to only uninstallation of any linking application.
u NOTE u Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-1
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
1. CL-AP
5.
Click
.
Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
The message “Prepare Installation” appears here. Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the installation process as the message indicates.
When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task manager (by calling up at the press of the ++ keys).
1.
In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
6.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window. You are then returned to the “IIP Setup Tool” menu.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
u NOTE u
NOTES
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
When the Synapse Client software is installed on the CL, uninstall first the CL-AP and then the Synapse Client software. For how to uninstall the Synapse Client software, see “12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation)” in “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
RI000097.EPS
2.
Type in the number “5” and then press the key. The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window). The selected item is then highlighted.
4.
Click
.
A confirmation window opens. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-2
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server
4.
For Windows 2000
2.1 For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Perform the following settings.
Double-click
Right-click in the task tray at the lower right corner of the desktop, and then click “MS SQL Server-Stop”.
on the desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
00000473.EPS
The “SQL Server Service Manager” window opens.
2.
Click
3.
Right-click
5.
.
Double-click
.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
in the task tray again, and then click “Exit”.
6.
Select “MSDE” and then click
.
The “Confirm File Deletion” window opens.
00000474.EPS
The
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
icon disappears from the task tray.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-3
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
7.
Click
2.2 For Windows Vista
.
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE uninstallation. After a while, the “Remove Shared File?” window opens.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-Click
.
The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
3.
Double-Click
.
The “Computer Management” window opens.
4.
.
00000475.EPS
8.
Click
5.
.
A confirmation window opens.
9.
Click
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, select ─ ─
Within the tree in the right-hand area of the window, rightclick , select “Stop”.
.
Uninstallation ends in 10 seconds.
10. Click
.
The system returns to the “Add/Remove Programs” window.
11. Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window and Control Panel.
00000485.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-4
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
6.
Close the “Computer Management” window. The “Administrative Tools” window opens.
7.
Click
10. Select “MSSQLSERVER: Database Engine” and then click .
in the upper left-hand area of the “Administrative
Tools” window. The “Control Panel” window opens.
8.
Double-Click
.
The “Programs and Features” window opens.
9.
Select “Microsoft SQL Server 2005” and then click . The “Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Uninstall” window opens. 00000486.ai
A confirmation window opens.
11. Click “Finish”. The installation shield starts running to initiate an SQL Server uninstallation. After a while,Uninstallation ends. The system then returns to the “Programs and Features” window.
12. Close the “Programs and Features” window and then the “Control Panel” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-5
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
2.
3. RU-AP
Click [UNINSTALL].
To uninstall the RU-AP, use the RU M-Utility.
u NOTE u
1.
All the RU-APs displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” area are uninstalled.
Start the RU M-Utility as directed below: III. Specify the file.
IV. Click.
II. Click.
00000477.EPS
A confirmation window (the message “Completed”) appears on the display.
I. Click. The RU M-Utility main menu opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000476.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system then returns to the main menu.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-6
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
4. RU M-Utility
u NOTES u Although the window says “Welcome to the FCR TOOL Setup Wizard”, the setup process does not start.
u NOTE u Use the RU-CD to uninstall the RU M-Utility. Do not uninstall the RU M-Utility from “Add/Remove Programs” in Control Panel because an improper uninstallation results.
1.
“FCR TOOL” is another name for “RU M-Utility”.
3.
Click
.
The “FCR TOOL Setup/Remove the Program” window opens.
Insert the RU-CD into the PC. After a while, the “CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS” window opens.
00000479.EPS
4.
Click
.
The “FCR TOOL Setup/Completing the FCR TOOL Setup Wizard” window opens. Uninstallation is now completed.
5.
Click
.
The system then returns to the initial window (which automatically opened when the CD was set in position).
00000214.EPS
2.
Click
.
After a while, the “FCR TOOL Setup” window opens. 00000480.EPS
6.
Click [EXIT].
7.
Remove the CD from the PC.
00000478.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-7
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
4.
5. Option Keys The option key CD is required for uninstalling an option key.
D:\option key’s executable file name (xxxxxx.exe)/u
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
When uninstalling an option key, be sure to perform the following procedure. If, for instance, you directly remove an option key with Registry Editor or the like, the option name may remain in a user window although the option function is removed.
1. 2. 3.
Enter the media drive name for the underlined portion.
REFERENCE To confirm the executable file name of an option key, you should directly view the contents of the CD from Explorer or the like.
Insert into the PC the CD for the option key you wish to uninstall.
Example: Executable file names for IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option
The installation window opens. Press the button to close this window. Select “Run...” box from the
Enter the uninstallation command in the “Open (O)” box and click .
OptionDcmStandardCR.exe OptionDcmPrivateCR.exe button to select the executable file You can click the for the option key to be uninstalled.
menu.
The “Run...” box opens.
A window opens to indicate that uninstallation is completed.
5.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-8
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
6. Touch Panel Driver
4.
Click
.
The uninstallation start window opens.
The touch panel driver uninstallation procedure differs whether it is L362T, L560T-C or other than those models. Uninstall the driver accordingly following the proper procedure.
Monitor other than L362T and L560T-C
1.
Perform the following settings.
RI000008.EPS
For Windows 2000 Double-click
5.
on the desktop.
Click
.
When uninstallation process ends, the PC restarts.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select the touch panel driver (MonitorMouse for Windows 2000) and click . The confirmation window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-9
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
L362T monitor
4.
u NOTE u
.
The “Reminder” window opens.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the procedure to be performed is different. See “ ■ L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista”. For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista, see “ ■ L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista”.
1.
Click
5. 6.
When uninstallation process ends, click
.
The confirmation window opens.
For Windows 2000 on the desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
Uninstallation process starts.
Perform the following settings.
Double-click
Click
7.
Click
8.
Close the “Control Panel” window.
9.
Restart the PC.
.
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select “TouchWare 5.64 SR1”, and click
.
The confirmation window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-10
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
L560T-C monitor
4.
u NOTE u When the OS used is Windows Vista, the procedure to be performed is different. See “ ■ L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista”. For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista, see “ ■ L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista”.
1.
Click
.
Uninstallation process starts, and the “USB Driver Removal” window opens within a few seconds.
5.
Click
.
The “Reminder” window opens.
Perform the following settings. For Windows 2000 Double-click
on the desktop.
RI0000466.AI
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
6.
Click
.
The “Reminder” window opens.
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP Select
from the
menu. RI0000467.AI
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
7.
Click
8.
When uninstallation process ends, click
. .
The confirmation window opens. The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select “TouchWare 5.64 SR1”, and click The confirmation window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
9. .
Close the “Control Panel” window.
10. Restart the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-11
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Programs and Features” window opens.
3.
Right-click “MT 7.12(build) for Windows” and select “Uninstall/Change” from the menu that opens. The confirmation window opens.
4.
Click
.
Uninstallation processing starts.
5. 6.
At the completion of uninstallation processing, click .
7.
Close the “Control Panel” window. Restart the PC.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-12
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole)
3.
For Windows 2000/XP
u NOTE u
Select “Built_inConsole” and click
After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall the console software. The CL-AP does not start running when the console software is uninstalled.
1.
Perform the following settings. .
The “Application Removal” window opens.
For Windows Vista Select “Built_inConsole” and click
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
.
The “Application Removal” window opens.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu opens automatically.
4.
NOTE
Click
.
The install shield starts running and begins to uninstall the MSDE. After a while, the “Shared Component” window opens.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
RI000009.EPS
5.
Click
.
NOTE When
below may open. In such cases, click the next step.
RI000097.EPS
2.
is clicked, a window like that shown to proceed to
Enter “5” and press the key. The “Add/Remove Programs” window or the “Programs and Features” window opens. RI0000428.EPS
The uninstallation process ends and the confirmation window opens.
6.
Click
.
The system then returns to the “Add/Remove Programs” window.
7. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window and then the main menu.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-13
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
8. FRIS Modules [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-14
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
9. DVD-RAM Driver [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-15
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
10. POCKET id Console-AP 1.
2.
From the
menu on the POCKET id Console,
select “Settings” and then tap on the
Soft-reset the PDA terminal (POCKET id Console).
tab.
The “System” window opens.
REFERENCE While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function key at the same time, and then release these keys. Scan trigger Function key ( button)
Enter key ( button) Scan trigger
RI000102E.EPS
RI0000366.EPS
The screen is reset, and the desktop opens in a few seconds.
3.
Double-click
.
The “Remove Programs” window opens.
RI000101E.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-16
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
4.
Select “FujiFilm POCKET id Console” and tap on .
5.
Tap
.
When the uninstallation completes, the system returns to the “Remove Programs” window.
RI000103E.EPS
The “Remove Program” window opens.
RI000105E.EPS
6.
Close the “Remove Programs” window.
NOTES If the following window opens, perform steps 7 and onward to remove specific files. Until you have performed step 7, be careful not to touch the PDA screen. Touching the screen will cause the current screen to disappear.
RI000104E.EPS
RI000106E.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-17
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
7.
Take a note of the folders or file paths that are listed on the screen as shown below.
11. Press and hold with the stylus pen one of the folders or files that you have noted down at step 7, and then tap “Delete” from the menu that appears.
RI000109E.EPS
A dialog opens asking you to confirm deletion of the folder or file. RI000107E.EPS
8.
12. Tap on
.
Tap on anywhere on the screen. The system returns to the “System” window.
9.
Tap on the
mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The system returns to the desktop.
10. From the
menu on the POCKET id Console,
select “Programs” and then “File Explorer”.
RI000110E.EPS
The specified folder or file is deleted, and then the system returns to the “File Explorer” screen.
13. If there are two or more folders/files to delete, repeat steps 11 and 12 until all of them are deleted.
RI000108E.EPS
The “File Explorer” window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-18
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
14. If there are any “Study information file(s)” and/or “Screen customization setting file(s)”, repeat steps 11 and 12 to delete all of them.
NOTE “Study information file(s)” and “Screen customization setting file(s)” are stored under the folders that are set for the following paths, respectively. Study information file(s) No.3, “StudyFilePath” under “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “CONFIG PDA” Screen customization setting file(s) No.4, “CustomFilePath” under “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “CONFIG PDA”
15. Tap on the
mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.
➔ The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-19
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
11. ActiveSync
6.
.
➔ The desktop opens.
NOTE When ActiveSync has been removed, the POCKET id Console option key needs to be reinstalled for reinstallation of the ActiveSync function.
1.
Click
7.
Restart the PC.
Perform the following settings. ● For Windows 2000 on the desktop.
Double-click
➔ The “My Computer” window opens.
.
Double-click
➔ The Control Panel” window opens.
● For Windows XP Select
from the
menu.
➔ The Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
➔ The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select “Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7” and click
.
➔ A window opens prompting for confirmation of file removal.
4.
Click
.
➔ The uninstallation window opens.
5.
Click
.
➔ Uninstallation processing will start. After a while, a window opens to indicate that uninstallation processing has been completed. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-20
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation) 1.
For Windows 2000 on the desktop.
9.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
Click the symbol at the upper right-corner of the window to close the “Downloaded Program Files” window. The system returns to the desktop.
7. 8.
Perform the following settings.
Double-click
6.
Restart the PC. If the CL-AP starts up after the PC restart, click the upperright and -left corners of the window once each to have the Service Utility be displayed. Then shut down the Service Utility. Open the following folders. Windows 2000 : C:\WINNT\Download Program Files Windows XP : C:\WINDOWS\Download Program Files
.
10. Right-click “Synapse Medical Imaging Workstation” and select “Remove”.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP/Vista Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
in “Control Panel”.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
3.
Select “Synapse” and click
.
The “WARNING” window opens.
4.
Click
RI000229.EPS
The confirmation window opens.
11. Click
.
.
The same window opens again.
5.
Click
.
After a while, the “Downloaded Program Files” window opens automatically. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI000230.EPS
12. Close the “Downloaded Program Files”. CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-21
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
13. Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-22
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
14. Precise Enlargement Software This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the Precise Enlargement software.
CAUTION Uninstall the Precise Enlargement software only when reinstalling or upgrading this application software. Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of the same version of software that has already been installed. Described below are the procedure on how to confirm the Precise Enlargement software version and the CDs that are for the available version. I. Click “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml”. II. Confirm shown in . III. Depending on the version confirmed of the Precise Enlargement software, use either of the following CDs. For 1.0: Precise Enlargement software installation CD (Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00)) For 2.1: Precise Enlargement software installation CD (Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01))
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-23
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
■ For the V1.0 Precise Enlargment software
4.
1.
Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD (Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00)) into the PC.
2.
Use Explorer to double-click “Setup.exe”.
Select “Remove Echo” and click
.
The “Install Echo application screen” window opens.
3.
Click
.
AWS807003.ai
The “Installation Complete” window opens.
AWS807004.ai AWS807002.ai
The “Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard” window opens.
5.
Click
6.
Uninstall the option key.
.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see “5. Option Keys”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-24
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
■ For the V2.1 Precise Enlargment software
4.
1.
Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD (Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01)) into the PC.
2.
Use Explorer to double-click “Setup.exe”.
Click
.
The “Install Precise enlargement function screen” window opens. AWS807009.ai
3.
Click
The “Uninstallation Complete” window opens.
.
AWS807010.ai
AWS807008.ai
The “Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
Click
6.
Uninstall the option key.
.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see “5. Option Keys”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-25
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
15. Windows Mobile Device Center [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-26
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
16. QA ROI Measurement Software
4.
Click
.
This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the QA ROI Measurement software.
CAUTION Uninstall the QA ROI Measurement software only when reinstalling or upgrading this application software.
AWS807012.ai
Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of the same version of software that has already been installed.
The “Uninstallation Complete” window opens.
■ For the V2.0 QA ROI Measurement software
1.
Insert the QA ROI measurement software installation CD (QA ROI measurement (114Y5342319A00)) into the PC.
2.
Use Explorer to double-click “Setup.exe”.
3.
AWS807013.ai
The “Install QA ROI Measurement screen” window opens.
5.
Click
Click
6.
Uninstall the option key.
.
.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see “5. Option Keys”.
AWS807011.ai
The “Welcome to QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI A-28
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name u NOTE u When changing the CL’s host name, be sure to follow the sequence indicated below. If you do not use the correct procedure to change the host name, the CL-AP may become inoperative.
Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server For the procedure for uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server, see “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs”.
Changing the CL-PC host name
1.
Perform the following settings. For Windows 2000 Double-click
Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server Changing the CL-PC host name Installing the MSDE/SQL Server Rebuilding the image database Setting the Service Utility
on the desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
For Windows XP Initializing the image database ... Use this procedure only when you wish to remove images from the HDD. * If you wish to retain images, do not perform this procedure.
u NOTE u Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-1
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
For Windows Vista Select “Control Panel” from the
For Windows XP/Vista Click the “Computer Name” tab.
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
Double-click
.
R 0000359.EPS
Click
The “Computer Name Changes” window opens.
The “System Properties” window opens.
Click
.
Change the host name of the “Computer name” field.
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
2.
Perform the following settings.
Change.
For Windows 2000 Click the “Network Identification” tab.
RI0000360.EPS
3. 00000482.EPS
Click
.
The “Identification Changes” window opens.
Change the host name entry in the “Computer name” field.
Click
.
For Windows 2000/XP The “Network Identification” window opens. (Although a message appears prompting you to restart the PC, you must restart it in step 6.) For Windows Vista A window like that shown below opens.
Change. 00000483.EPS
RI0000361.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-2
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
4.
Click
Installing the MSDE/SQL Server
.
The system then returns to the “System Properties” window.
5.
Click
. (For Windows Vista, click
For the MSDE/SQL Server installation procedure, see “4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
.)
u NOTE u
A windows opens to prompt for a restart.
6.
Click
. (For Windows Vista, click
.)
The PC restarts.
7.
When a certain period of time elapses after PC startup, error windows open. Close all such windows.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
When MSDE/SQL Server and service pack are installed, the PC is forced to restart. After a restart, the CL-AP automatically starts up; however, an error occurs because the image database is not rebuilt. In this instance, just click [OK] to close the error window. The system recovers from this error when you rebuild the image database.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-3
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
Rebuilding the image database
1.
Select
from the
Setting the Service Utility menu. Use then the
key to select necessary files located in the directories below: A00 version:
When you change the CL’s host name, the Service Utility’s network setup for this equipment changes to that for other connected equipment. Therefore, you have to restore the original network setup as directed below:
1. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\ ImageDB\SQL\Attach.bat
A02 version or later: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\ AttachAll.bat
Start the Service Utility and then click [Setup Configuration Item]. The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
2.
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click the mark to the left of , and then click the mark to the left of .
Do not execute the above command from the MS-DOS prompt.
3.
Choose
The MS-DOS prompt window then opens, displaying the message “Press any key to continue ...”.
4.
Change the
u NOTE u
(CL’s previous host name). entry in the upper right
corner of the window to a new host name.
5.
Click
6.
From the “Config” menu, choose “Save”. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
00000484.EPS
2.
Press the key. The MS-DOS prompt window closes. The image database is thus completely rebuilt.
This makes it possible to use again HDD images that have been available before CL host name change.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
7.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
The original network setup is then restored.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-4
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
Initializing the image database [as required] u NOTE u If you wish to retain images stored in the HDD, do not initialize the image database. Initializing the image database deletes all images from the HDD.
1.
Initialize the image database with the Service Utility. For the image database initialization procedure, see “12. Initializing the Image Database” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
The CL host name change procedure is now completed.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI B-8
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI) Removing the board (for GX110)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3.
Remove the CL-PC cover.
4.
When the card cage is mounted, its PC board interferes with a cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the disk unit on the front of the CL-PC before mounting the card cage. #1 [Push]
5.
Raise the lever in the direction of the arrow.
6.
Remove the card cage from the CL-PC.
7.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slot in the card cage. 5. Lever
7. PEI or PSI board PCI slot 6. Card cage T
ON
FR
Disk unit
CL-PC
#2 [Pull] O
FR
00000353.EPS
NT
#1 [Push] Hard disk rear cable CL-PC 00000202.EPS
8.
Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
9.
Return the lever to its original position.
10. Restore the disk unit. 11. Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source. 12. Mount the CL-PC cover.
010-054-12 11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-1
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
Removing the board (for GX150, 50, 60, 280 SDT)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
■ Removing the board (for GX260, 270, 280 SMT, 620 and Precision WS340, 330, 360, 370)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3.
Open the CL-PC cover.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
4.
Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
3.
Dismount the CL-PC cover.
5.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot within the card cage.
4.
Remove the support arm (GX260, 270, 280 SMT, WS340, 360, 370) or screw (WS330, 620) that fastens the PEI or PSI board bracket.
Handle
u NOTE u
4. Card cage
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later steps.
5. PEI or PSI board
AGP slot
PEI or PSI board slot connector
T
ON
FR
CL-PC RI000022.EPS
6.
Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
7.
Close the CL-PC cover.
8.
Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-2
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
5.
6.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot. Bracket
Support arm
Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty expansion card slot.) Feeler bracket
PEI or PSI board GX260,270,280 SMT WS340,360,370
PEI or PSI board slot
R 000202.EPS
PCI slot Bracket
Screw
PEI or PSI board
PEI or PSI board slot
7.
Use a support arm or screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC cover.
9.
Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
WS330
PCI slot Screw
PEI or PSI board slot
PCI slot
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Bracket PEI or PSI board WS620
RI000430.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-3
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
Removing the board (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT, 760, Precision WS380, 390, T3400)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3.
Dismount the CL-PC cover.
4.
Unlatch the fixing latch (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT, 760, 780) or open the fixing door (for WS380, 390, T3400) that secures the PEI or PSI board bracket.
5.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot. Bracket
Fixing latch or fixing door
6.
Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty expansion card slot). Feeler bracket
RI000432.EPS
7.
With a fixing latch or fixing door, fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC cover.
9.
Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
PEI or PSI board PEI or PSI board slot
WS380, 390, T3400 745 MT, 755 MT, 760
PCI slot Bracket PEI or PSI board slot
Fixing latch PEI or PSI board 745 DT, 755 DT
PCI slot RI000431.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-4
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
Removing the board (for NEC PC)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3.
Open the CL-PC left-side cover.
4.
Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
u NOTE u
7.
Use a screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC left-side cover.
9.
Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
Reinstalling the board (common to all models) Reinstall the board by reversing the removal procedure.
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later steps.
5.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot. Screw
PEI or PSI board
Bracket PEI or PSI board slot
PCI slot
6.
00000513.EPS
Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty expansion card slot.) Feeler bracket
RI000202.EPS
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI C-8
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Appendix D Upgrading the AP This appendix describes the CL-AP upgrade procedures.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Before upgrading the AP, verify that there are no patients reserved for exposure (no patients are registered in the examination queue window). Also, check that no image is left in the QA queue or output queue.
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
Procedures (version upgrade to A11) Upgrade the CL-AP to version A11 by performing the following steps: Description Step (correlating to the subsequent titles prefixed by the mark)
Upgrade type A00/01A11
A02/03 A11
A04 to A08 A11
A09 A11
A10 A11
1
Uninstalling the CL-AP
2
Uninstalling the old PEI board (Only when the LP is used) driver
3
Uninstalling the Built_in Console software
4
Uninstalling FRIS Modules
5
Upgrading the MSDE Service Pack (SQL7SP3) software version
6
Installing the CL-AP
7
Installing the Built_in Console software *1, *3
8
Installing FRIS Modules
9
Installing the new PEI board driver
10
Setting dummy nodes
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
(Only when the LP is used)
*2
*2
*1 Pay due attention to the versions of the Built_in Console software and built-in type machine (550xplus) software. Built_in Console software version A07 is stored on the CD for CL version A02/A03, and Built_in Console software version A08 is stored on the CD for CL version A04 to A08. A09 is stored on the CD for CL version A09 and A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL version A11. The built-in type machine software versions compatible with Built_in Console version A10 are indicated below. If necessary, upgrade the built-in type main unit software. 5501: A13 5502D: A09 5501D: A09 XU-D1: A07 *2 When version A04 is used, an error (error code: 30151 or 20110) occurs at CL startup if no node is set for [NETWORK CONFIG] - [THIS HOST (IIP)]. If no node is set, be sure to set a dummy node. If at least one node is already set, there is no need to perform step 10. *3 To use the CL with its software version A07 or later, the Built_in Console software of version A08 or later is required. Otherwise, an automation error will occur.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-1
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Procedures (version upgrade to V8.1(B)) NOTE
WARNING
When upgrading version A00–10 to V8.1(B), follow “ ■ Procedures (version upgrade to A11)” to upgrade the software version to A11–18 and upgrade now the version to V4.0(B) or later. Then upgrade it finally to V8.1(B).
Never change the software version from A or V.(B) to V1.0(C). A new installation from the OS is also prohibited.
“ ■ Procedures (version upgrade to A11)”
Upgrade the CL-AP to version V8.1(B) by performing the following steps: Upgrade type Description Step (correlating to the subsequent V1.0(B), V2.0(B) A11-18, V3.0(B), V5.0(B) V5.0(B), V6.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V8.0(B) titles prefixed by the mark) V4.0(B)V5.0(B)*2 V6.0(B) V3.0(B)*2 V7.0(B) V7.1(B)*2 V8.0(B)*2 V8.1(B)*2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Uninstalling the CL-AP Uninstalling the old PEI board driver Uninstalling the Built_in Console software
*1
Uninstalling FRIS Modules Upgrading the MSDE Service Pack (SQL7SP4) software version Installing the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup Installing the CL-AP Installing the Built_in Console software
*7
*7
*1
Adding Mammo QC menus Setting 16bitLUT files Uninstalling the linking application Installing the linking application Resetting the USB device (BCR)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
*2 The AP version is upgraded sequentially as follows: A00 - A11 V1.0(B) V2.0(B) V3.0(B) V4.0(B) V5.0(B) V6.0(B) V7.0(B) V7.1(B) V8.0(B) V8.1(B) *3 Make sure to upgrade the AP version only for the equipment actually in use. *4 Add Mammo QC menus to equipment units where such menus are used. *5 Use the DICOM Query/Retrieve function to perform necessary settings on a location where the reverse-conversion LUT is applied.
Installing FRIS Modules Installing the new PEI board driver Setting dummy nodes Upgrading the POCKET id Console-AP version
*1 Pay due attention to the versions of the Built_in Console software and built-in type machine (550xplus) software. Built_in Console software version A08 is stored on the CD for CL version A08. A09 is stored on the CD for CL version A09 and A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL version A11, V1.0(B) - V8.1(B). The built-in type machine software versions compatible with Built_in Console version A10 are indicated below. If necessary, upgrade the built-in type main unit software. 5501:A13 5501D:A09, 5502D:A09 XU-D1:A07
*3 *4
*5
*4, *6 *5
*4 *5
*4 *5
*8
*8
*8
*8
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
*6 For an institution where Mammo QC menus are newly added at the time when the software version is upgraded to V7.1(B), if the institution wishes to use the existing menus continuously as they are, install first the Mammo QC menus under V7.0(B) environment and then upgrade it to V7.1(B). (Upgrade the software version to V7.1(B) and then add the Mammo QC menus again with the use of the V7.1(B) CL-AP CD.) *7 For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed under the Windows 2000 environment, this procedure must always be performed before installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later. *8 Be sure to perform this procedure when the “Precise Enlargement software” has been installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP.
Appx RI D-2
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
1.
Uninstalling the CL-AP
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task manager (by calling up at the press of the ++ keys).
NOTE When installing the FSTD2009 Parameters, initialize the image database from Service Utility mode and delete past study information completely. Installing the FSTD2009 Parameters will cancel the existing menu information, causing then an inconsistency (in MPM codes or in menu codes) to result with regard to the past study menu information accumulated on the hard disk. This may disable the past studies to be opened. RI000097.EPS
NOTE
2.
For an institution where the actual exposure result data file output function and/or mis-exposure comment input function is used, complete the following steps and then perform uninstallation processing.
3.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window). The selected item is then highlighted.
1. Start up the CL-AP. 2. Select “User Utility” from the
Type in the number “5” and then press the key.
menu.
➔ User Utility mode starts running. 3. Use the exposure result log storage function to save mis-exposure log or exposure result log. 4. Shut down User Utility mode while holding down the key.
4.
Click
.
A confirmation window opens.
5.
➔ The system returns to the desktop.
Click
.
u NOTE u The message “Prepare Installation” appears here. Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the installation process as the message indicates. In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
6.
Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window. You are then returned to the “IIP Setup Tool” menu.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-3
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Uninstalling the old PEI board driver
3.
Complete the following steps only when the LP is used:
1.
Choose
From the “IIP Setup Tool” menu window, type in the number “6” and then press the key.
and then click .
RI000097.EPS
RI000013.EPS
The “Add/Remove Hardware Wizard” window opens.
The “Choose a Removal Task” window opens.
4. RI000012.EPS
2.
Click
Verify that click
is chosen, and then .
.
The “Choose a Hardware Task” window opens.
RI000014.EPS
The “Installed Devices on Your Computer” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-4
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
5.
Choose
and then click
.
7.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “IIP Setup Tool” menu.
RI000015.EPS
The “Uninstall a Device” window opens.
6.
Choose
and then click .
RI000016.EPS
The “Completing the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard” window opens.
RI000017.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-5
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Uninstalling FRIS Modules
Uninstalling the Built_in Console software
1.
u NOTE u After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall it. If it is left uninstalled, the CL-AP does not start up.
1.
The “Add/Remove Application” window opens.
Enter “5” from the “IIP Setup Tool” menu and then press the key. The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
2.
2.
Select “Risiip”. “Risiip” will be displayed in reverse video.
3.
Select “Built_inConsole” and click
Use the “IIP Setup Tool” menu to input “5” and press the key.
.
Click
.
The “Application Removal” window opens.
The “Application Removal” window opens.
3.
Click
.
InstallShield then opens to start uninstalling MSDE.
After a while, the “Shared Component” window opens.
RI000075.EPS
4.
Click
.
After about one minute, a window opens asking you to confirm completion of removal processing. RI000009.EPS
4.
Click
u NOTE u If the “Shared Component” window (that asks if you wish to delete the Shared File) is displayed during the uninstallation process, click
.
The uninstallation process ends and then a confirmation window opens.
5.
Click
on the confirmation
window.
.
The system returns to the “Add/Remove Programs” window.
6.
, and then
Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window and then Control Panel.
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Add/Remove Application” window.
6.
Exit the “Add/Remove Application” window. The system then returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” menu.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-6
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Upgrading the MSDE service pack (SQL7SP4) software version
1.
4.
Perform the following settings. For Windows 2000
Right-click in the task tray at the lower right corner of the desktop, and then click “MS SQL Server-Stop”.
Double-click
on the desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP Select
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
00000473.EPS
The “SQL Server Service Manager” window opens.
2.
Click
3.
Right-click
5.
. in the task tray again, and then click “Exit”.
Double-click
.
The “Add/Remove Programs” window opens.
6.
Select “MSDE” and then click
.
The “Confirm File Deletion” window opens.
00000474.EPS
The
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
icon disappears from the task tray.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-7
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
7.
Click
12. From the “IIP Setup Tool” menu window, type in “1” and
.
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE uninstallation. After a while, the “Remove Shared File?” window opens.
then press the key.
RI000097.EPS
The MSDE and service pack installation window opens.
00000475.EPS
8.
Click
.
A confirmation window opens.
9.
Click
.
Uninstallation ends in ten seconds.
10. Click
.
The system then returns to the “Add/Remove Programs” window.
11. Close the “Add/Remove Programs” window and Control Panel.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-8
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
14. Press the key.
13. Enter “5” and press the key.
The “IIP Setup Tool” menu ends.
15. Remove the CL-AP CD from the PC. 16. Restart the CL to implement the upgraded MSDE. 17. The username and login window will appear while the CL is
being restarted. Enter the password in one-byte characters.
R 000098.EPS
The service pack installation process will start. The MSDE installation process will end in about ten minutes. (It takes 20 to 30 minutes depending on the number of images stored on the HD.)
Username : Administrator Password : fcr-iip
RI000200.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-9
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Installing the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC.
2.
Select [Run…] from the
menu.
The “Run” window opens.
3.
Depending on the desired OS language, enter an execution file name of the table below and then click . OS languages Japanese English Chinese Simplified Korean
Execution file names D:\RollupKB\Japanese\KB891861-v2-x86-JPN.EXE D:\RollupKB\English\KB891861-v2-x86-ENU.EXE D:\RollupKB\ChineseSimplified\KB891861-v2-x86-CHS.EXE D:\RollupKB\Korean\KB891861-v2-x86-KOR.EXE
Chinese D:\RollupKB\ChineseTraditional\KB891861-v2-x86-CHT.EXE Traditional
NOTE Specify the media drive name for the underlined portion. The installation window opens.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Select [I Agree] and click [Next]. Installation processing starts and will complete in a few minutes.
6.
Restart the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-10
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Installing the CL-AP
NOTE
NOTE For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed under the Windows 2000 environment, be sure to perform the procedure set forth in “ ■ Installing the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup” and then install the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later.
1.
When upgrading a software version, choose the currently used monitor resolution, otherwise a display error may result.
From the IIP Setup Tool main menu, type in “2” and then press the key. The installer starts running and the “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Welcome to the ...” window opens.
00000178.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “IIP Setup/Setup Type” window opens.
3.
Select the monitor type to be used. RI000100.EPS
The “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program” window opens.
Select the monitor type to be used, and then click . When a 15" monitor with a touch panel or a 17" CRT monitor is used, choose “Color (1024 × 768)”. When a 17” monitor with a touch panel is used, choose “Color (1280 × 1024)”. When the color Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used, choose “Color (2048 × 1536)”. When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select “Black/ White (1600 × 1200)”. When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC 300 is used, choose “Black/White (2048 × 1536)”. When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC 200 is used, choose “Black/ White (1600 × 1200)”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000180.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-11
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
4.
Click
6.
.
Press . The following window opens in several seconds.
The following window opens in several minutes (five to 30 minutes).
RI000026.EPS
u NOTE u Although a message saying that “Image Database does not exist.” can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP installation processing will not be affected. RI0000468.AI
RI000032.EPS
5.
Press . The following window opens in several seconds.
RI0000469.AI
RI000027.EPS
u NOTE u
7.
Press . The following window opens in several seconds.
Although a message saying that “Patient Database does not exist.” can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP installation processing will not be affected. RI000028.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-12
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
8.
Press the key.
NOTES
u NOTE u
For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from 10 through 17. For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to perform steps 10 through 13. Proceed to step 14.
When the software version used is V2.0 (B) or later, the two windows like those shown below open. Press the key and ensure that installation processing has ended. Proceed then to step 9.
10. Perform the following settings. For Windows 2000/XP Select “Run...” from the
menu and click
For Windows Vista Select “All Programs” - “Accessories” - “Run...” from the
RI000227.EPS
menu and click
.
RI000105.EPS
Installation processing completes showing then the “IIP - InstallShield Wizard / InstallShield Wizard Completed” window.
00000181.EPS
9.
Click
.
The system then returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” menu.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-13
.
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
11. Select the “SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat” file that is located in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (“2 of 2” when V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click . D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat
13. Press the key. 14. To use the Synapse server’s Web Query function, perform the procedure below.
NOTES
NOTE Specify the media drive name for the underlined section.
RI0000489.ai
The “DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool” window opens.
• When the CL-AP was installed after the Synapse Client software had been installed, skip steps I. and II. below. • Skip steps I. and II. below when installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later. I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it. “12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation)” in “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software” II. Install the Synapse Client software. “CL + Synapse Server (Web Query)” in “OE19: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”
15. To use the standard markers (applicable only in Japan), perform the procedure below.
For how to install the standard markers (applicable only in Japan), see “Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]” under “FR17: Function-specific Reference”.
RI0000490.ai
12. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter “1” and press “2” when Windows Vista is used for the OS. Press “3” when a RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then the key to determine the entry.
NOTE For software version V7.0(B), the “2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for 60GB” option does not appear. A window like that shown below opens.
16. To install the FSTD2009 Parameters, perform the procedure below.
For how to install the FSTD2009 Parameters, see “5.2 Replacing the Menu Database” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
17. When the PDI option is already installed, change the version of the “Application Used to Create This Disk” (included in the README.TXT file stored on the CD-R) to “8.01.0000”. For how to edit the README.TXT file, see “2.7 Editing the Institution Information” in “CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)” under “OE22: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
RI0000476.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-14
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Installing the Built_in Console software
1.
When the installation procedure ends, a message appears to indicate the completion of installation.
From the “IIP Setup Tool” menu, type in “4 and then press the key. RI000029.EPS
4.
Click
.
A dialog box opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
5.
Remove the CD from the PC.
6.
Click
.
RI000097.EPS
The “Built_in Console Setup” window opens.
2.
Click
. RI000030.EPS
3.
Click
The PC restarts.
.
RI000031.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-15
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Installing FRIS Modules
1.
4.
Click
.
The following warning window opens:
Start “IIP Setup Tool” and then choose “10) Install FRIS Modules”. The [Risiip Setup] window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
2.
5.
Click
.
The following window opens.
Click
.
A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
RI000046.EPS
RI000043.EPS
3.
6.
Click
.
The following window opens.
Click
.
The [Risiip - Choose Program Group] window opens.
RI000047.EPS
RI000044.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-16
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
7.
Click
.
The following window opens.
RI000048.EPS
8.
Click
9.
If the “Version Conflict” window opens again, click
.
. If the same window still opens again, click
repeatedly
until a message appears to indicate the installation is completed.
10. Click
on the window that opens at step 9.
above.
RI000049.EPS
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-17
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
Upgrading the POCKET id Console-AP
Installing the new PEI board driver The new PEI board driver is automatically installed after the PC is restarted.
1.
The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes after a PC restart. While the CL-AP startup process in progress, verify that the new PEI board driver is installed (the following window opens and remain displayed for several seconds during the startup process).
The POCKET id Console-AP can be upgraded by uninstalling the POCKET id Console-AP and then installing it again.
1.
Uninstall the POCKET id Console-AP. For the procedure for uninstalling the POCKET id ConsoleAP, see “10. POCKET id Console-AP” in “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
2.
Install the POCKET id Console-AP. For the procedure for installing the POCKET id Console-AP, see “2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application” under “OE18: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
Adding a Mammo QC menu RI000025.EPS
2.
Deliver a film output signal to the LP and verify that the LP generates a proper film output. If the LP does not generate a film output, see “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
Setting dummy nodes If no nodes have been set up for “Setup Configuration Item” – “NETWORK CONFIG” – “THIS HOST(IIP)” in the Service Utility mode, the DICOM Print SCU needs to be set up as the dummy node. It is not necessary to install the DICOM Print option key. For the setup procedure, see “2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM Print Function” under “OE5: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
When the software version was upgraded to V5.0(B) or V7.1(B) or later, use the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to add a Mammo QC menu properly to a device where the Mammo QC menus are to be used.
NOTE To newly apply the Mammo QC function based on the existing menus after the software version was upgraded to V7.1(B) or later, add the Mammo QC menus with the use of the V7.0(B) CL-AP CD and then follow the steps below.
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu opens automatically.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
RI0000429.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-18
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
2.
4.
Type in “7” and press the key. A window like that shown below opens.
Input the item number of a language you want to install and press the key.
u NOTE u A dialog box like that shown below may appear. In such cases, click [OK] to proceed to the subsequent step.
00000301.EPS
3.
To use DICOM MG Storage (digital mammography option), type in “2” and “1” for other cases. Press then the key. ➔ The menu of languages that can be installed appears.
RI0000475.ai
Scrolling up on the installation main menu, appearing after the above dialog box was closed, will display the “Installation Failed.” message. This poses no problem and you can proceed to the next step. ➔ A window opens prompting you to select whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameter.
u NOTE u When new Mammo QC menus are to be added from V7.1(B) or later at an institution where the FSTD2009 Parameters were adopted, installation processing completes without displaying the FNC parameter selection window. (FNC parameter installation processing is not performed.)
RI0000427.EPS
u NOTE u Do not select “20) Slovene” because software version V7.0 (B) does not provide support to it.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-19
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
● When “English (U.S.)” was selected for the language to be installed
■ Setting up a 16bitLUT file A 10bitLUT file became now unavailable with software version V5.0 (B) or later. For this reason, you have to set up a 16bitLUT file using either of the following procedures.
● When using a file to be installed with V5.0 (B) or later
RI0000386.EPS
● When a language other than “English (U.S.)” was selected
Newly installing V5.0 (B) or later or upgrading a previous version to V5.0 (B) or later will cause the following files to be installed on the CL. Folder location : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder Files : mono_PL300_LL_16.lut (for 300 candelas of maximum monitor luminace) mono_PL400_LL_16.lut (for 400 candelas of maximum monitor luminace Rename the installed files as follows. Filename
: “SCP AE name” + .lut
R 0000384.EPS
5.
Input the item number for an FNC parameter you want to use and press the key. ➔ The system returns then to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu. This completes addition of a Mammo QC exposure menu.
● When converting a previously used LUT file to a 16bit file To convert a previously used 10bitLUT file to a 16bitLUT file, use the “LUT bit conversion tool”. For details of the “LUT bit conversion tool”, see “1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool” in “Display Gradation Correction Setup” under “FR5: Function-specific Reference”.
● When a reverse-conversion LUT is used for the DICOM Query/Retrieve function With software version V7.0 (B) or later, the previously used 10bitLUT file cannot be used for ReverseLUT. For this reason, use CreateLUT. exe to create a 16bitLUT file so that it is set up for ReverseLUT. For details of creation of a 16bitLUT file, see “Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing” under “FR14: Function-specific Reference”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-20
Appendix D Upgrading the AP
■ Uninstalling the linking application u NOTE u • When the “Precise Enlargement application software” has been installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP, make sure to upgrade the software version as follows. Precise Enlargement application software: From V1.0 to V2.1
■ Installing the linking application Perform version upgrade installation processing for the targeted linking application.
● Precise Enlargement application software For details of the installation procedure, see “Precise Enlargement Function” under “OE24: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
• Uninstall the linking application only when reinstalling or upgrading this application software. No support is provided to only uninstallation of any linking application. For details of the uninstallation procedure, see “14. Precise Enlargement Software” in “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-21
■ Resetting the USB device (BCR) When upgrading the CL from V8.0(B) or before to V8.1(B) or later, the driver settings for the barcode reader needs to be configured again. For the detailed resetting porocedures, see “4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI D-24
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
Replacing the default password with a new password
1.
The “Windows Security” window opens.
To provide CL security enhancement, complete the following three setup procedures.
Windows security
Microsoft
Windows 2000
Replacing the default password with a new password Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for password input at logon Defining the minimum character count for the password
Professional
Logon Information You are logged on as xxxxx\xxxxxxxx. Logon Date: xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
1. For Windows 2000/XP
Use the Task Manager to close an application that is not responding.
NOTE Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings. Settings performed for password change and prompt for password input at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password on the Windows initial screen.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
Lock Computer
Log Off...
Shut Down
Change Password...
Task Manager
Cancel RI000078.EPS
2.
Click the [Change Password...] button. The “Change Password” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-1
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
3.
From the “Change Password” window, perform the following setup steps. Change Password
Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for password input at logon
1.
Microsoft
Windows 2000
For Windows 2000
Professional
User name:
Administrator
Log on to:
clxxxxxxxx
Click
, point to “Settings”, and then click “Control
Panel”. The “Control Panel” window opens.
I
Old Password:
For Windows XP
II
New Password:
Select
III
Confirm New Password:
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens. OK
Cancel RI000079.EPS
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default). II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven characters. III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
4.
Perform the following settings.
Click
.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Users and Passwords” window opens.
3.
Check “Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer.” ( ).
A window opens for password change confirmation.
5.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “Windows Security” window.
6.
Click
.
RI000080.EPS
4.
Click
.
The system then returns to the Control Panel.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-2
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
Defining the minimum character count for the password
1.
4.
Set the number of password characters to “7”.
Open “Control Panel”. Double-click
and then
.
The “Local Security Settings” window opens.
RI000082.EPS
5. Click the
mark for .
and then click
The right-hand pane shows the password policy settings.
3.
Double-click
.
You are then returned to the “Local Security Settings” window.
RI000081.EPS
2.
Click
6.
Close the “Local Security Settings” window.
7.
Close the “Administrative Tools” window.
.
The “Local Security Policy Setting” window opens.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-3
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
2. For Windows Vista
3.
NOTE
From the “Change Password” window that opens, perform the following setup steps.
Settings performed for password change and prompt for password input at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password on the Windows initial screen.
I II III
■ Replacing the default password with a new password
1.
Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
2.
Click the [Change Password...] button.
DCL8A005.ai
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default). II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven characters. III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
4.
Click
.
“Your password has been changed.” is displayed.
5. DCL8A008.ai
Click [OK]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
The “Change Password” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-4
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
■ Prompting the user for password input at logon
1.
From the
menu, input “control userpasswords2” in
the search box and press the key.
DCL8A006.ai
The “User Accounts” window opens.
2.
Checkmark “User must enter a user name and password to use this computer”. ( ) ➔
DCL8A007.ai
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-5
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
■ Limiting the length of input password to be more than a certain number of characters
1.
Sequentially double-click “Control Panel”,
then
4.
Set the number of characters used for password input to “7”.
and
.
The “Local Security Policy” window opens.
DCL8A004.ai
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Local Security Policy” window.
6.
Close the “Local Security Policy” window.
7.
Close the “Administrative Tools” window.
DCL8A003.ai
2.
Click
mark to the left of .
and then
Several setup items related to the password policy appear in the right-hand side pane of the window.
3.
Double-click
.
The “Minimum password length Properties” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI E-8
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver The installation steps for the Matrox Millennium G450 video board driver (hereinafter abbreviated to the G450 video driver) are described below: Connecting the jig monitor
Installing the video driver
1.
Insert the “Matrox Millennium G450 CD-ROM” into the CDROM drive.
2.
Double-click
,
,
, and
in
order named. The setup program starts running.
Installing the video driver
3.
Select a language and then click
.
Setting the resolution
u NOTES u The G450 video driver can be installed only when the PC for the employed CR CL MA (mammography CL) accepts the G450 video board. Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP.
Connecting the jig monitor Since the Ikegami MDM2130 monitor does not support the VGA mode, no screen indication can be obtained during video driver installation. Therefore, the multiscan VGA monitor (having a display resolution of 1600 × 1200 or 1280 × 1024 and a refresh frequency provided by a horizontal frequency of 75 Hz and a vertical frequency of 93 kHz) is furnished as a jig. Connect this jig to the video board connector to which the Ikegami monitor is currently connected.
RI000085.EPS
A window opens to display the information about a supported device.
RI000093.EPS
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI F-1
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
4.
Click
Setting the resolution
twice.
The installation process starts. Upon completion of installation, a window opens to indicate the end of installation.
1.
Right-click the desktop. When the right-clicked menu opens, choose “Properties”. The “Display Properties” window opens.
2.
Choose the “Settings” tab and then click
.
RI000094.EPS
5.
Click
.
A window opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
6.
Remove the video board driver CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
7.
Click
.
The PC restarts. When the PC is restarted, the “Log On to Windows” window opens.
8.
Enter “fcr-iip” in the password field and then click .
u NOTE u The “User name” field reads “Administrator” by default. Leave this user name entry unchanged because you have to log onto Windows 2000 as Administrator. The desktop screen opens.
RI000095.EPS
The Matrox G450 monitor setup window (main window) opens.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI F-2
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
3.
Choose the “Monitor Settings” tab and then click
.
7.
Click
.
You are then returned to the previous window.
8.
Click
.
The “Matrox Monitor Wizard - Save Changes” window opens.
9.
Turn ON the
radio button (
and then click
),
.
RI000087.EPS
The “Matrox Monitor Wizard - Monitor List” window opens.
4.
Click the
5.
Choose
6.
Choose “1600 1200 32-bit 75 Hz” and then click .
mark for
. and then click
The “Matrox Power Desk” window opens. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
RI000096.EPS
.
You are then returned to the main window.
10. Click
.
You are then returned to the “Display Properties” window.
RI000089.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI F-3
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
11. Perform the following monitor setup steps and then click .
15. If the Ikegami monitor is not connected, disconnect the jig monitor and then connect the Ikegami monitor.
16. If the screen area setting is not 1600 1200, open the
“Display Properties” window and change the setting to 1600 1200.
u NOTE u (Colors: True Color (32-bit))
If a screen area setting of 1280 × 1024 pixels is selected in an earlier step in accordance with the jig monitor specifications, be sure to change the setting to 1600 × 1200 pixels after Ikegami monitor connection. The Ikegami monitor is capable of displaying 1280 × 1024 pixels; however, it is presumed that the application software displays 1600 × 1200 pixels.
(Screen area: 1280 × 1024 or 1600 × 1200 pixels)
u NOTE u As the screen area, choose either 1280 × 1024 pixels or 1600 × 1200 pixels depending on the maximum resolution of the jig monitor. If the screen area setting exceeds the maximum resolution of the jig monitor, the jig monitor displays nothing. If such a situation occurs, disconnect the jig monitor and connect a monitor that supports the selected screen area setting. You are returned to the “Display Properties” window.
12. Click
.
The “Monitor Settings” window opens.
13. Click
.
You are returned to the “Display Properties” window.
14. Click
.
You are then returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI F-4
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC) 1. Installation Flow Described herein are the procedures used to install the CL-AP from the OS. When doing so, observe the installation flow shown at the right.
NOTE To facilitate you to understand installation workflow in this edition, the following icons are shown to the right of the title in each chapter. XG-1 RU 5000plus 356 357 359 362 363 364 366 367 368 370 371 372
: : : : : : : : : : : : : :
XG-1 RU FCR5000, etc. CR-IR 356 CR-IR 357 CR-IR 359 CR-IR 362 CR-IR 363 CR-IR 364 CR-IR 366 CR-IR 367 CR-IR 368 CR-IR 370 CR-IR 371 CR-IR 372
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-1
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Installation flow CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup 2.
Installing and Setting Up the OS
3.
Setting Up the Monitor
4.
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference] See Chapter 5 under MU: Maintenance Utility.
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
7.
Installing the CL Components
8.
Installing the Standard Key
9.
****BLANK****
10. Installing the Option Key
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
22. Setting the Event Log
5.1 Installing the CL-AP
Installing the Screen Saver
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size
Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack
6.
Only when remote maintenance mode is used.
*1 For the 5000 plus series and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual Service Manual to save Config backup. For details of the RU master IIP, see “6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview” under “MD: Machine Description”.
When multiple XG-1 RUs or 5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/ 37X are connected.
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the User Interface 12. Initializing the Image Database 13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting the LUT file) 14. Restoring the CL-Config 15. Creating the FTP Server 16. CR-IR346RU Settings 17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For RU-CL 1:1 connection: Essential For RU-CL N:N connection: Only for RU master IIP
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-2
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
The Windows XP installation procedure is explained as follows.
372
NOTES Before installing the OS, jot down the CL host name, IP address, subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of information will be called for during OS installation. The “5000 plus” is abbreviated hereinafter simply “IR”. u Property sheet OS installation drive Partition/format Regional settings
Name Organization
Product key
Computer name and password
Computer name
Password Protocol used IP address Network settings
Subnet mask Domain or workgroup
This computer’s Automatically logged user settings (auto on user name logon settings) Password Display color Display area Monitor settings MS-IME setting (Japanese version only) 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
C:\ C drive only (no other partitions will be created)/NTFS FUJIFILM Corporation FUJIFILM Corporation Indicated on the right-hand side of the PC main unit cover. The default settings when shipped from factory. CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXX: Manufacture No.) *Take notes accordingly if changed. fcr-iip TCP/IP “172.16.1.20” when shipped from factory. *Take notes accordingly if changed. “255.255.0.0” when shipped from factory. *Take notes accordingly if changed. Used by the workgroup. (The group name remains the default.) Administrator fcr-iip True Color (24 or 32bits) 1024×768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT)
Install the OS in the following cases: When the HDD is replaced. When an error occurs with the OS. Have the following ready for use when installing the OS. NEC Recovery CD-ROM (WinXP Professional Reinstalling DISK#1–#3 (3 CDs) included in the PC package)
IMPORTANT Before formatting the HDD, make backup copies of image data, if there are any, as required by the user. Make backup copies of the config data (CL-Config and RU-Config) that store various settings of the CL and RU, ahead of time. User the User Utility function to make backup copies of user setting information (by placing checkmarks to all items).
Removing the board and peripheral devices
1.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slots, if it is mounted. For the board removal procedure, see “Appendix C Removing/ Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)”.
2.
Remove all peripheral devices, such as Barcode Reader, Magnetic Card Reader and others, from the USB port.
NOTES If OS installation processing is performed with the PEI or PSI board left mounted on the PCI slots, use the Device Manager to delete the “Other Devices” file after the OS has been installed accordingly. “■ Checking the PEI01 board device driver” in “3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting” If OS installation processing is performed with the peripheral devices left connected to the USB port, a different driver will be installed, same as the case with the PEI or PSI board.
The toolbar is stored in the taskbar.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-3
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
8.
Installing the OS
1.
Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON.
The PC restarts. DISK#1 installation processing will then start and a window like that shown below will open after about five minutes.
The PC will start running.
2.
Make sure that “Yes” has been selected and press the key.
When “F2 SETUP” appears at the upper left corner of the window, press the key.
Span Volume [1] Done Insert next media and press enter to continue...
NOTE The setup window will not open unless the key is pressed with the timeliness. In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2. The setup window (PhenixBIOS Setup Utility) opens.
3.
Select the “Boot” tab.
4.
Move “CD-ROM Drive” to the top.
CD-ROM Drive +Removable Devices +Hard Drive IBA 4.1.06 Slot 0200
OK
9.
Insert Recovery CD DISK#2 into the CD-ROM drive and press the key. DISK#2 installation processing will then start and a window like that shown below will open after about five minutes. Span Volume [2] Done Insert next media and press enter to continue...
5.
Insert the Recovery CD DISK#1 into the CD-ROM drive.
6.
Press the key.
OK
Cancel
FileName? RI000235.EPS
10. Insert Recovery CD DISK#3 into the CD-ROM drive and press the key.
The Exit menu will open.
Check to see that “Exit Saving Changes” has been selected and press the key. The “Setup Confirmation” window opens. Setup Confirmation
DISK#3 installation processing will then start and a window like that shown below will open after about two minutes.
finish to load MCF.GHO . D:\> RI000236.EPS
Save configuration changes and exit now? [Yes]
FileName? RI000234.EPS
RI000231.EPS
7.
Cancel
[No]
11. Remove Recovery CD DISK#3 and turn the PC power switch OFF.
RI000232.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-4
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
12. Turn then the PC power switch ON.
The “Windows XP Professional Setup” window will open.
13. Select “I accept this agreement” (
) and click
Uninstalling the launcher
1.
.
Click
at the upper right corner of the desktop.
The “Launcher Maintenance Screen” window opens.
OS installation processing will finish, starting then Windows XP.
RI000237.EPS
2.
Click
.
An uninstallation confirmation window opens.
RI000238.EPS
3.
Click
.
Launcher uninstallation processing will finish and the system then returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-5
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
5.
Setting the computer name
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Enter a computer name (host name).
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Click
3. Double-click
.
.
The “System Proterties” window opens.
4.
RI000242.EPS
Click the “Computer Name” tab and then
Default settings are as follows.
.
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX (“CL” is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the product number.) CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite) (“CR” is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the product number.) CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus) (“CP” is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the product number.)
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop. RI000249.EPS
The “Computer Name Changes” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-6
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
6.
Setting the IP address
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
Select following settings.
(
) and perform the
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Network Connections” window opens.
3.
I
Double-click
.
II
The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens. RI000243.EPS
4.
Click
.
I. Enter an IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.20). II. Enter a subnet mask (e.g.: 255.255.0.0).
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
5.
Select
, and click
.
7.
Click
.
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
8.
Click
.
The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens.
9.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-7
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Setting the network speed
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Setting the date and time menu.
1.
Click
2.
.
3.
Click the “Speed” tab and select (
Double-click
.
The “Date and Time Properties” window opens.
The “Intel PROSet” window opens.
3.
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Confirm the date and time. Confirm the date.
).
NOTE The CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) supports only “100Mbps half duplex”. Be sure to “100Mbps half duplex”.
Confirm the time.
4.
RI000244.EPS
Select the “Time Zone” tab and confirm the time zone.
RI000239.EPS
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
Confirm the time zone.
RI000245.EPS
5.
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
5.
Click
to close the Control Panel.
The system returns to the desktop. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-8
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Avoiding a password input prompt when exiting from the suspend mode
5.
(
By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the following procedure as required.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Uncheck
).
menu.
The Control Panel opens. RI000250.EPS
2.
Double-click
.
6. 7.
Set “System Standby” to “Never”.
.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
The “Power Option Properties” window opens.
3.
Click
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
RI000246.EPS
4.
Click the “Advanced” tab.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-9
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Determining a character to be used as a decimal point
4.
Specify “.” (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point. If anything other than a period is specified for that, an error occurs when you select an image distribution destination with the QA operation.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
Change what is entered in the “Decimal symbol” field to a period. If, as a result of the above change, what is entered in the “Digit grouping symbol” field is the same as that in the “Digital symbol” field, change it in the “Digit grouping symbol” field accordingly.
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Regional and Language Options” window opens.
3.
Make sure that the “Regional Options” tab has been selected and click .
RI000248.EPS
RI000247.EPS
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
6.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-10
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Settings for automatic synchronization (to be made on RAID PC only)
3.
Make the following settings.
Settings may be made so that synchronization is automatically performed on a regular basis.
1.
From the
I II
menu, select “Promise Array
RI000397.EPS
Management” and then “Local PAM”.
I. Enter “administrator”. II. Enter “fcr-iip”.
The “Promise Array Management” window opens.
4.
Click
.
You are logged in to “Promise Array Management”.
5.
Drag the scroll bar on the right side of the window down to the bottom.
RI000395.EPS
2.
Right-click “CLXXXXXXXX” (XXXXXXXX represents a product number), and select “Login”.
RI000396.EPS
The login dialog opens.
RI000398.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-11
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
6.
Performing synchronization (on RAID PC only)
Make the following settings. I
II
III
When you have reinstalled the OS, it is necessary to perform synchronization manually for the first time only.
1.
On the menu tree, double-click “CRXXXXXXXX” “FASTTRAK” - “Controller” in this order, and then select “Ary1.”
RI000399.EPS
I. Checkmark “Enabled”. II. Set the time at which automatic synchronization should take place, according to the demand of the hospital. III. If you have changed the set time at which automatic synchronization is to be performed from the default value to some other value, click “Change”.
RI000400.EPS
2.
Click the [Start] button under “Synchronization”.
RI000401.EPS
A confirmation dialog opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-12
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
3.
Click
.
Synchronization starts.
REFERENCES • During the synchronization process, the progress status of synchronization is displayed on the tree menu.
RI000402.EPS
• If the PC shuts down while synchronization is in progress, the synchronization will resume once the PC has restarted. • A synchronization process will take 1 to 2 hours if the PC is not being used, and 5 to 6 hours if the PC is in use.
4.
When the synchronization process completes, click close the “Promise Array Management” window.
to
➔ The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-13
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
3. Setting Up the Monitor XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
7. Installing the CL Components 359 370
371
372
For details of monitor settings, see “3. Setting Up the Monitor” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For how to install MSDE and its Service Pack, see “4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For how to install various CL components, see “7. Installing the CL Components” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
8. Installing the Standard Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For how to install Standard Key, see “8. Installing the Standard Key” under “RI:Reinstalling the Software”.
9. ****BLANK****
5. Installing the CL-AP XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
357 368
359 370
371
372
5.1 Installing the CL-AP For the CL-AP installation procedure, see “5.1 Installing the CL-AP” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
10. Installing the Option Key XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For the Option Key installation procedure, see “10. Option Key Installation” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database For how to replace the menu database, see “5.2 Replacing the Menu Database” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
6. Installing the Screen Saver
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the User Interface XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For details of AP Key installation and user interface settings, see “11. AP Key Installation” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-14
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
12. Initializing the Image Database XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
15. Creating the FTP Server 371
372
For initialization of the image database, see “12. Initializing the Image Database” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting the LUT file) XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For optimization of the screen display (setting the LUT file), see “13. Display Optimization (LUT file setting)” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
14. Restoring the CL-Config XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
For how to restore the CL-Config, see “14. Restoring the CL-Config” under “RI: Restoring the Software”.
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
Perform the following procedure to prepare on the CL’s HDD the FTP server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X. The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS Manager.
u NOTE u For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected), perform necessary settings here only for the CL that will serve as the RU Master IIP.
REFERENCE The IIS Manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and comes with the OS (Window XP).
1. 371
9000 364
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The Control Panel opens.
372
2.
Double-click
.
The “Add or Remove Program” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-15
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
3.
7.
Click “Add/Remove Windows Components”.
Click
.
The screen returns to the Control Panel.
8.
Close the Control Panel. The system returns to the desktop.
RI000240.EPS
The “Windows Components Wizard” window opens.
RI000241 .EPS
4.
Check
(
) and click
. The “Internet Information Service (IIS)” window opens.
5.
Check
(
) and click
. The system returns to the “Windows Components Wizard” window.
6.
Click
.
IIS Manager installation processing will start. After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that installation processing has been completed.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-16
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
16. CR-IR346RU Settings XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 371
372
For CR-IR346RU settings, see “16. CR-IR346RU Settings” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X settings, see “17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For details of settings necessary for installation of Windows XP Service Pack2, see “20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack2” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size For how to set up the virtual memory size, see “21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
22. Setting the Event Log
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference] XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
For how to set up the event log, see “22. Setting the Event Log” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”. 371
372
For details of NetMeeting, see “18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
19. IIS Network Virus Protection XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
371
372
For details of IIS network virus protection, see “19. IIS Network Virus Protection” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-17
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI G-20
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1 XG-1 RU 5000plus 362 363
9000 364
355RU 366
356 367
357 368
359 370
■ Service pack installation
1.
Insert the V3.1 CD into the PC. ➔ The Main/Option Menu window opens.
371
372
NOTE Install CL-AP software version V3SP1 (hereinafter referred to as “V3.1”) as a service pack for version V3.0. Installing V3.1 will make it possible for you to use on the CL additional functions, such as supports provided to Portuguese, GPR processing in RU 1:1 configuration and others. Described herein is the V3.1 installation procedure.
■ Preparations for installation (exiting the CL-AP)
21000001.EPS
Prior to installing V3.1, exit the CL-AP by following the steps below.
1.
2.
Turn ON the power to the PC.
➔ After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/ Option Menu window.
➔ Windows will be up and running. The CL-AP will also be up and running in about one minute, and the CL’s initial window opens.
2.
After the CL’s initial window has opened, check that no study is left in WL, QA and Queue tabs. If there is any study remaining unprocessed, perform the following. Finish or delete a study in the Local WL tab. Finish a study in the QA tab. Output or delete a study in the Queue tab.
3.
When the exit window opens at the click of click
Type in “1” and press the key.
3.
To install various functions offered by V3.1, see “■ Installation of functions” described on the next page. To quit, type in “0” and press the key. ➔ The system returns to the desktop.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
,
while holding down the key.
➔ The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop.
➥ REFERENCE If you click [OK] without holding down the key, both the CL-AP and Windows exit.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI H-1
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1
4.
■ Installation of functions For functions such as support provided to Portuguese, install only necessary functions to suit installation sites, after V3.1 has been installed accordingly.
Type in a number for the Imager Reader to be used and press the key. ➔ The “Select Image Processing Parameter Type” window opens.
● For installation of environment settings for Portuguese
1.
Type in “10” on the Main/Option Menu window and click the key. ➔ The “Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Variation)” window opens.
21000002.EPS
2.
Type in “1” and press the key. ➔ The “Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Locale)” window opens.
21000003.EPS
3.
Type in “15” and press the key. ➔ The “Image Reader Type Menu” window opens.
21000005.EPS
5.
When FNC parameters (for optionally available Flexible Noise Control processing) are not to be used, type in “1”, and “2” when they are to be used. Press then the key. ➔ After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/ Option Menu window.
● When using the Toshiba RIS connection function (applicable only in Japan) For details of the Toshiba RIS connection function, see “OE21 CL+T-RIS (Ordering)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
● When using the function to display information specific to veterinary clinics (applicable only in Japan) NOTE Whenever an optionally available function has been installed as above, restart your PC.
21000004.EPS
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI H-2
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1
■ Verification necessary after completion of installation processing After completion of installation processing, perform the following procedure to make sure that CL-AP V3.1 has been installed appropriately. Select “Programs” from the “Start” menu to make sure that the CL version is V3.1. Restart your PC to make sure that the software version displayed at the lower right corner of the CL’s initial window is V3.1.
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI H-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI H-4
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
Appendix I
RAID-related Settings
1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode
1.
Turn ON the monitor display and the PC.
2.
When the “F2 SETUP” indication appears in the upper-right corner of the window, press the key.
➔ The PC starts up.
5.
Select “RAID On” and press the key.
ystem rives skette Drive rive 0 SATA-0 rive 1 SATA-1 rive 2 SATA-2 rive 3 SATA-3 rive 4 SATA-4 rive 5 SATA-5 ATA Operation
SATA Operation RAID Autodetect / AHCI
RAID Autodetect / ATA
NOTE
6.
Press the key.
If the key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open. In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 2 again.
7.
Select “Save/Exit” and press the key.
Select “Drives” and press the key. System Drives Onboard Devices Video Performance
Combination
RI0000405.EPS
Exit
➔ The setup window opens.
3.
RAID On
Remain in Setup
Save/Exit
Discard/Exit
RI0000406.EPS
➔ The PC restarts.
RI0000403.EPS
4.
Select “SATA Operation” and press the key. System Drives Diskette Drive Drive 0 SATA-0 Drive 1 SATA-1 Drive 2 SATA-2 Drive 3 SATA-3 Drive 4 SATA-4 Drive 5 SATA-5 SATA Operation SMART Beporting RI0000404.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-1
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration
1.
4.
Select “RAID1 (Mirror)” and press the key. [ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
When the following message appears, press the + key combination.
Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity:
Press to enter Configuration Utility...
RAID_Volume0 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 149.0 GB
RI0000407.EPS
2.
Create Volume
Select “Create RAID Volume” and press the key. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. 2. 3. 4.
RI0000410.EPS
5.
Create RAID Volume Delete RAID Volume Reset Disks to Non-RAID Exit
[ CREATE VOLUME MENU ] Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity:
RI0000408.EPS
3.
Make sure that the capacity is set to the default value (maximum allowable size), and press the key.
Make sure that “RAID_Volume0” is being selected, and press the key.
Create Volume
[ CREATE VOLUME MENU ] Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity:
RAID_Volume0 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 149.0 GB
RI0000411.EPS
RAID_Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 298.0 GB
6.
Make sure that “Create Volume” is selected, and press the key. [ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
Create Volume RI0000409.EPS
Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity:
RAID_Volume0 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 149.0 GB Create Volume RI0000412.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-2
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
7.
When the following message appears, press the key. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST.
Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N) ; RI0000413.EPS
8.
Select “Exit” and press the key. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. 2. 3. 4.
Create RAID Volume Delete RAID Volume Reset Disks to Non-RAID Exit RI0000426.EPS
9.
When the following message appears, press the key. [ CONFIRM EXIT ] Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N) ; RI0000414.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-3
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and Installing the RAID Driver
5.
Microsoft Windows 98 CD-ROM Startup Menu
CAUTION
1. Boot from Main Disk 2. Boot from CD-ROM
If the reinstallation CD that came with the PC contains Windows XPSP1 or earlier, create an FD of SATA driver and perform installation of the RAD driver by following the procedure below.
1.
Insert the Dell Resource CD that came with the PC into the PC.
2.
Restart the PC.
3.
When “F12=Boot Menu” appears in the upper-right corner of the window, press the key.
NOTE If the key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open. In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 3 again. ➔ The setup window opens.
4.
When the following window opens, enter “2”.
Enter your choice: _ RI0000419.EPS
6.
Enter “5”. Dell Precision Workstation Resource CD Please select an option from the list below. 1.) 2.) 3.) 4.) 5.) 6.)
Run MIC Diagnostics/Configuration Run Dell Diagnostics Go to Video Diagnostics Menu Run SCSI Mard Drive Diagnostics Copy Hard Drive Controller Drivers to Diskette Exit to DOS
Select “* Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive” and press the key.
RI0000416.EPS
Boot Device Menu * Onboard or USB Floppy Drive * Intel RAID_Volume0 * Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive * System Setup * Hard Drive Diagnostics * Boot to Utility Partition Please Up/Down arrows to highlight desired item. Please Enter to select highlighted item. RI0000415.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-4
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
7.
Make sure of the PC model name, interface type (SATA), and driver type (RAID), and select the driver number of the appropriate machine model.
➥ REFERENCE The following screen shows an example where the drive for the Precision 370 is selected. • Model name : Precision 370 • Interface : SATA • Driver type : RAID
When the following message appears, press the key. The Driver Files have been Copied. Do you need to copy another driver to Diskette ? Y/N RI0000420.EPS
10. When the following message appears, remove the FD from the FDD, and affix a label bearing the title “Intel SATA Drivers” to the disk.
Please Select the Drive you wish to transfer to Floppy. * Latest drivers can be downloaded at Dell .com *
You can now reboot to your Operatiog System CD to start the install. *Don't forget to hit F6, when the system is inspecting your computer Conf iguration if you need to install SCSI or Raid drivers* C:\>
1.) Precision 670/470/370 Adaptec U320 SCSI RAID onboard or add-in controller drivers for Windows XP and 2000 2.) Precision 670/470 Adaptec SATA HostRAID controller Drivers for Windows XP and Windows 2000 3.) Precision 370 SATA AHCI/RAID storage drivers for Windows XP and 2000 4.) Precision 650/450 LSI Onboard SCSI or LSI Add in Controller drivers for Windows 2000
RI0000421.EPS
11. Shut down the PC. 12. Turn ON the PC.
RI0000417.EPS
8.
9.
➔ The PC starts up.
When the following message appears, insert an FD into the FDD, and press the key.
Insert a floppy into the Floppy disk drive, and data on the Disk WILL BE ERASED. . Continue? Y/N RI0000418.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-5
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
13. When the following message appears, press the key. NOTE The following message appears for 5 seconds on the screen after the PC has been turned ON. Press the key immediately after the screen turns blue.
15. When the following window opens, insert the FD labeled
“Intel SATA Drivers” into the FDD, and press the key. Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk into Drive A:
Windows Setup =============
* Press ENTER when ready. RI0000424.EPS
16. Select “Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller” and press the key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...
Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH6R) Intel(R) 82801FR SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH6R)
RI0000422.EPS
➔ You will see no change on the screen immediately after the press of the key. After a while as the setup process proceeds as usual, the “Specify Additional Device” window opens.
14. When the following message appears, press the key.
RI0000425.EPS
17. When the following window opens, remove the FD from the FDD and press the key. Windows Setup =============
Windows Setup =============
S=Specify Additional Device S=Specify Additional Device
ENTER=Continue
F3=Exit RI0000423.EPS
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
ENTER=Continue
F3=Exit RI0000423.EPS
➔ The system returns to the setup window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-6
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
4. RAID Structure Confirmation (only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)
1.
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
2.
Press the key when logotype of DELL appears at the center of the window.
4.
Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] ― [Level] has been set for the [RAID1(Mirror)] in the [DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION].
➔ The PC starts running.
NOTE If the key is not pressed with the timeliness, the “Interl(R) Matrix Storage Manager” window will not open. In that case, restart the PC to perform Step 2. again.
RI0000486.ai
5.
➔ The “Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager” window opens.
Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] ― [Status] has been set for the [Normal] in the [DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION].
RI0000487.ai
NOTE If the “Status” is other than “Normal”, HDD may be defective, so replace the HDD.
RI0000484.ai
3.
Press + immediately. NOTE If the + key is not pressed with the timeliness, the main menu window will not open. In that case, press + + key and perform Step 2. and Step 3. again. ➔ The main menu window opens.
For details about replacement procedure of HDD, see “5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged RAID Configuration HDD (only for Dell OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)” below.
6.
Press the key. ➔ A confirmation window opens.
RI0000488.ai
RI0000485.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.
Press the key.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-7
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged RAID Configuration HDD (only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)
3.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Replacement procedure in case one of two RAID configuration HDDs is damaged.
5.1 Confirmimg which HDD is damaged
1.
Turn On the PC power. MU000031.EPS
➔ The following window opens, and startup process is suspended.
NOTE When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
AWS301001.ai
2.
MU000035.EPS
➔ The Service Utility starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
Enter the key. ➔ Windows starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
.
4.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ The desktop screen opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-8
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
5.
Select “All Programs” – “Intel® Matrix Storage Manager” menu. – “Intel® Matrix Storage Console” from the
7.
Confirm on the screen which of the HDDs is damaged.
AWS301002.ai
➥ REFERENCE AWS301008.ai
®
➔ The “Intel Matrix Storage Console” window opens.
6.
The HDD marked with some troubles.
under the “RAID Hard Drives” has
Select “Advanced Mode” from the “View” menu.
AWS301007.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-9
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
5.2 Replacing HDD
1.
Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable.
2.
Open the cover of the PC main unit, and replace the damaged HDD with a new HDD.
NOTE
5.3 Rebuilding RAID
1.
Turn ON the PC power.
2.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
For the new HDD, use the one with same capacity as the damaged HDD.
3.
➔ Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Close the cover of the PC main unit, and reconnect the power cable. MU000031.EPS
NOTE When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
.
MU000035.EPS
➔ The Service Utility starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
3.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ The desktop screen opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-10
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
4.
Select “All Programs” – “Intel® Matrix Storage Manager” menu. – “Intel® Matrix Storage Console” from the
6.
Click
.
a
AWS301008.ai
® ➔ The “Intel Matrix Storage Console” window opens.
5.
Right-click the HDD under “Non-RAID Hard Drives”, and then choose “Rebuild to this Hard Drive”.
AWS301004.ai
➔ The “Select Hard Drive” window opens.
7.
Confirm that the newly added HDD is registered in the “Selected” column, and then click .
AWS301003.ai
➔ The “Welcome to the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard” window opens.
AWS301005.ai
➔ The “Completing the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard” window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-11
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
8.
Click
5.4 Verification
.
1.
Select “All Programs” – “Intel® Matrix Storage Manager” menu. – “Intel® Matrix Storage Console” from the
AWS301009.ai
AWS301008.ai
➔ Rebuilding of RAID starts.
® ➔ The “Intel Matrix Storage Console” window opens.
➥ REFERENCE In the “Intel® Matrix Storage Console” window, selecting “basic mode” from the “View” menu to change the display mode will enable you to check the progress of RAID reconstruction.
2.
Confirm that the RAID Hard Drive construction is working properly.
AWS301010.ai
AWS301006.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-12
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool (Windows XP / Vista only)
Enter “D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe” and click . ➔ The “Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard” window opens.
6.1 Installing the RAID Status Display Tool
1.
● For Windows Vista Click
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
.
➔ The start menu opens.
➔ The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
Enter “D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe” in and press the key.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, proceed to step 3.
➔ The “Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard” window opens.
4.
Click
.
➔ The “Select Installation Folder” window opens.
FR0J0002.ai
2.
Enter “0” and then press the key.
3.
Make the following settings.
➔ The system exits “IIP Setup Tool” and returns to the desktop screen. RI0000502.ai
● For Windows XP Select “Run…” from the
menu.
➔ The “Run...” window opens.
RI0I0001.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-13
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
5.
Click
.
➔ The “Confirm Installation” window opens.
RI0000503.ai
6.
Click
.
➔ The “Installation Complete” window opens.
RI0000504.ai
7.
Click
8.
Remove the CD from the PC.
9.
Restart the PC.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-14
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
6.2 Setting the operation of RAID Status Display Tool Operation of the RAID status display tool are controlled by the values of registry. Operation can be changed by changing the values of the registry. The registry value of icon display position is updated along with the position where icon is dragged. If the registry does not exist when the RAID status display tool is started, system operates in the default setting.
NOTE If the monitor is changed to a smaller one, icons may not be displayed properly. In that case, directly delete “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\ SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus” and restart the PC.
● Registry Key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
● Value of Registry Key The following items can be set. Items Icon display position
Icon size Display/hide the text
Name of Value REG_DWORD DisplayPositionX REG_DWORD DisplayPositionY REG_DWORD IconWidth REG_DWORD IconHeight REG_DWORD DisplayText
Default ―
32 1
REG_DWORD TextColorR Font color for texts
REG_DWORD TextColorG
Contents Set up the icon display position coordinate (pixel coordinate on the upper left corner of icon area) of the RAID status display tool. * If the setup value does not exist, the icon displays on the lower right corner of the 1st monitor and the position will be recorded. Set up the icon display size of the RAID status display tool. Specify the width and height by pixel. * The minimum setting value is 16. The value under 16 is recognized as 16. Set up to display/hide the text with "0: Hide" and "1: Display". Set up the font color for texts. Specify each of the RGB color space from 0 to 255.
255
REG_DWORD TextColorB
* Black (0, 0, 0) is used for transparent color so it cannot be specified. * The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font. Set up the font size (height of character cell) for texts by pixel.
Font size for texts
Module name list
REG_DWORD TextFontSize REG_SZ Module1
IAAnotif.exe
REG_SZ Module2
IAStorIcon.exe
REG_SZ Gui1
C:\Program Files\Intel\ Intel Matrix Storage Manager\Shell.exe
REG_SZ Gui2
C:\Program Files\Intel\ Intel(R) Rapid Storage Technology\IAStorUI.exe
GUI program list
Updating cycle
REG_DWORD RefreshTime
Minimum travel distance
REG_DWORD MoveMinDistance
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
―
1000 5
* If the setup value does not exist, the size of the system font is used. (The value will not be saved) * The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font. [For internal processing] * Modules can be registered up to Module8. [For internal processing] * GUI can be registered up to Gui8. * To prevent GUI for management (Matrix Storage Console) from starting up when the icon is clicked, create the registry of Gui1 and Gui2, and then delete the value (make the columns empty).
The updating cycle of the display . Set up by 1/1000 seconds (ms). The minimum travel distance of icon. Set up by pixel equivalent value.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-15
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
6.3 Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370 (Intel® Application Accelerator)
6.4 Disabling RAID Status Display Tool
1.
Right-click the taskbar, and select “Task Manager”.
2.
Select “IIPDispRaidStatus (Main)” from the “Applications” tab, and then click [End Task].
Target registry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
3.
Added character strings “REG_SZ Gui3” = “C:\Program Files\Intel\ Intel Application Accelerator\Shell.exe”
Select “All Programs” – “Accessories” from the menu.
4.
Right-click “IIPDispRaidStatus” and select “Delete”.
5.
Restart the PC.
On the PC to which Intel® Application Accelerator is installed, the following settings may be necessary.
● When GUI for management does not start Add the following descriptions to the registries below.
● When the irrelevant character string is displayed on the text area of the tool
➔ The “Windows Task Manager” window opens.
Add the following descriptions to the registries below. Target registry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator Added character strings “RAIDNotificationIcon” = dword:00000003
● When RAID management software does not start up properly even if management GUI icon is clicked Open the property window for “IIPDispRaidStatus” in the startup folder and specify “C:\Program Files\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator” for “Start in”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI I-16
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC) [Applicable only in Japan]
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC) [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI J-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI J-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI J-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
Appx RI J-4
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
MU: Maintenance Utility
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-I
MU: Maintenance Utility
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
05/30/2001 08/30/2001
01 03
New release (FM3027) Revision for software version A04 (FM3125)
08/30/2001 03/20/2002
03 04
Changes in pagination (FM3125) Revision for software version A07 (FM3297)
03/20/2002 07/20/2002
04 05
Changes in pagination (FM3297) Revision for software version A08 (FM3428)
07/20/2002
05
Changes in pagination (FM3428)
11/30/2002 11/30/2002 03/01/2003 03/01/2003 08/20/2003
06 06 07 07 08
Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) Changes in pagination (FM3499) Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) Changes in pagination (FM3634) Revision for software version A11 (FM4009)
08/20/2003 12/10/2003
08 09
Changes in pagination (FM4009) Revision for software version B00 (FM4158)
12/10/2003
09
Changes in pagination (FM4158)
02/20/2004
10
07/30/2004
11
A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220) Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254)
07/30/2004
11
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005 11/30/2005 11/30/2005 07/30/2006
14 15 15 16
07/30/2006
16
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected All pages I, II, III, IV, 3, 5-7, 13, 14, 16–24, 28-30, 35, 36, 39, 44 15, 25–27, 31–34, 37, 38, 40–43 I, II, 6, 7, 12-14, 1, 23, 25, 26, 30, 31,35, 44 24, 27–29, 32–34, 36–42 I, II, 1, 15, 17, 22, 25–28, 30, 31, 33, 34, 46, 48 16, 18–21, 23, 24, 29, 32, 35–45, 47 I, II, 2–5, 10–16, 18–30, 33–35, 38 17, 31, 32, 36, 37, 39–52 I, II, 1–9, 17, 19, 31, 33–40, 50–56 10–16, 18, 20–30, 32, 41–49 I, II, 3, 4, 6–9, 15, 17, 18, 20, 30–33, 35–43, 59, 60 19, 21–29, 34, 44–58 I, II, 1, 3, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 30, 35, 37, 45, 51–54 , 62 22–29, 31–34, 36, 38–44, 46–50, 55–61 All pages
I, II, III, IV, 3, 4, 6–9, 15, 17–19, 22, 23, 27, 30, 32, 33, 37–40, 42–50, 68 Changes in pagination (FM4254) 20, 21, 24–26, 28, 29, 31, 34–36, 41, 51–67 Revision for software V1.0(C) and corrections I, II, 3, 4, 6–9, 24, 67 (FM4450) Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) I, II, 4-8, 13, 16-19, 23, 33, 39–42, 44, 45, 47–54, 56, 66, 74 Changes in pagination (FM4543) 43, 46, 55, 57–65, 67–73 Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) I–IV, 12, 37, 43–45 Changes in pagination (FM4760) 46–76 Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) I, II, 4, 14, 15, 20, 35–46, 49, 74, 75, 77–80 Changes in pagination (FM4952) 21–34, 47, 48, 50–73, 76
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-II
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
07/20/2007
17
Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201)
07/20/2007 05/09/2008
17 18
Changes in pagination (FM5201) Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356)
05/09/2008
18
Changes in pagination (FM5356)
10/13/2008
19
Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460)
10/13/2008 11/30/2009
19 20
Changes in pagination (FM5460) Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622)
11/30/2009
20
Changes in pagination (FM5622)
03/31/2010 12/10/2010
21 22
Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817)
12/10/2010
22
Changes in pagination (FM5817)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected I, III, 1, 4, 11–16, 19, 20, 22–29, 35–46, 48–50, 74, 75 51–73, 76–80 I, III, 1, 2, 5, 13, 15, 25, 47, 61, 77–80 3, 4, 6–12, 14, 16–24, 26–46, 48–60, 62–76, 81–84 I, III, 1, 2, 13–21, 25–48, 52, 68, 87, 88 50, 51, 53–67, 69–86 I, III, 5, 13, 15, 16, 19, 21, 22, 24, 27, 31, 50, 52, 55, 56, 66, 73, 74, 86 23, 25, 26, 28–30, 32–49, 51, 53, 54, 57–65, 67–72, 75–85, 87–92 I, III, 5–7, 22, 24, 38, 56, 68, 83 I, III, 5, 31, 33, 42, 43, 53, 58, 68, 88 54–57, 59–67, 69–87, 89–91
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-IV
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL installation and servicing.
2.
Perform the procedure described below. ● Version A software
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Starting the Service Utility The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF. MU000032.EPS
When the PC power is OFF
1.
The Service Utility starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
Turn ON the PC power. Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts.
NOTE A window like that shown below opens in case the date and time displayed on the PC are older than those when it was started last time. Click [OK] on the window that opens, and set correct date and time on the “Date/Time Properties” window.
● Version B software When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens. CLP401002.EPS
If this window opens, the PC battery is possible to be dead. Use the procedure below to check. 1. Set the current date/time. 2. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable from the outlet. 3. After a few minutes, re-connect the power cable and turn the power to the PC ON again. 4. Check to see that the set date/time are correct. If the date/time values revert back to those before settings, have the battery be changed.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU000035.EPS
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
The Service Utility mode starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-1
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
3.
When the PC power is ON
1.
Clicking “Shut Down” in the
(or
)
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit window. Click
while holding down the
Perform the procedure described below. ● Version A software
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
key. The system returns to the desktop screen.
2.
From the
menu, sequentially choose “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
MU000032.EPS
The Service Utility starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
● Version B software When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens.
MU000035.EPS
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
The Service Utility mode starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-2
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
Exiting the Service Utility
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the “IIP Service Utility” window.
00000056.EPS
The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-3
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions When the Service Utility starts running, the following window (hereinafter referred to as the main menu) opens. I II
XI ( Not displayed for the B version)
XII III XIII IV XIV V XV VI XVI (Displayed only when the relevant option key is installed. VII Applicable only in Japan.) XVII (Displayed for only V1.0(C) version: for Japanese VIII version only)
IX X XVIII 00000061.EPS
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-4
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
I. Setup Study Sharing This menu item is used for setup of study information sharing.
For details of the setup procedure, see “CL+CL (Cluster Connection)” under “OE15: CL + CL (Cluster Connection)”.
II. Setup Configuration Item This menu item is used for CL system information setup, network setup, LP setup, FINP/DICOM setup, automatic distribution code setup, and other setup purposes. This is the most frequently used menu item for installation. For details of this window, see “3. Various Configuration Settings - Setup Configuration Item”.
REFERENCE
Automatic distribution code setup is performed with the Service Utility. However, attribute distribution setup is performed with a user utility. Attribute distribution setup is basically performed by the user. III. LUT This menu item is used for setup of LUT file information (a file that optimizes the window display) for the display that the CL supports. “4. Display Optimization — LUT”
IV. Configuration Restore/Backup This menu item is used to back up or restore CL setup data. The following files are backed up or restored. m SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) System setup item PRINTER setup item CSL setup item FINP setup item QA process setup item m NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later) Connection device information table Connection destination setup table DicomPrint sorting destination setup table FINP compression ratio setup Distribution code setup m PN.mdb file (A00 or later) PN setup item m McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later) Magnetic card format setup m TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later) Setup for DICOM tag replacement m QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B)) Setup of display items on the QA window 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
m Selector.mdb file (A02 or later) Selector setup m TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later) DICOM tag editing (for Siemens) m FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later) Definition of film annotation characters m BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later) Barcode format setup m ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later) Setup for exposure result log output items m MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later) DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup information m PConsole Ser.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later) Setup of PDA connection m RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later) Setup of comment on mis-exposed images m CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later) Setup of a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series equipment m UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm, UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later) Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR 364 (type U/type T), CR-IR 366 and CR-IR 367. m UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later) Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371. m TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later) Setup for output of truncated DICOM tag data m IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later) Patient ID history m MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later) Setup of order issuance function for screening examination m UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later) Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader (reserved) m ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later) Setup of ExposureIndex function m TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later) Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag m IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later) Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders For the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup”. For the restore procedure, see “14. Restoring the CL-Config” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-5
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
V. Retrieve EDR Backup Data This menu item is used to retrieve EDR image data stored in the CL and save it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like. For the EDR data retrieval procedure, see “6. Retrieving EDR Data – Retrieve EDR Backup Data”.
REFERENCE The EDR data refers to data halfway through a calculation task while EDR processing is being performed. This data is used to analyze later how EDR processing was performed actually. VI. Verify Connection This menu item is used to verify the connection to the RU or other connected equipment. The CL offers the following connection verification functions: Using the PING (connected equipment host name or IP address input required) to verify the network connection to other connected equipment. Using connected equipment’s AE name (Application Entity Name) to verify the connection to DICOM connected equipment For details of the procedure for verifying connection to other equipment, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection”.
VII. Edit/View Film String This menu item is used to directly edit the file named “FilmStrFmt. env” file, which defines the film annotation character format. The tool named “View Film String” can also be used to confirm on-screen film annotation characters.
u NOTE u The contents of the FilmStrFmt.env file are written in Unicode. Therefore, use NotePad or other Unicode-compliant text editor for editing purposes.
VIII. DataBase Utility This menu item is used to initialize image database, delete (clearing off the image output queue) accumulated images from output queue and initialize patient database. For details of the operation procedure, see “8. Management of Various Databases — DataBase Utility”.
IX. Magnetic Card Setting This menu item is used to set the data format for magnetic cards (hospital cards) and define ISO card read character code. For details of the data format, see “Appendix 4. Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]” under “Appx IN: Installation – Appendix”. For details of the ISO card definition, see “9. Setting the Magnetic Card — Magnetic Card Setting”.
X. Barcode Setting This menu item is used for barcode setup. For details of the format, see “10. Setting the Barcode — Barcode Setting”.
XI. Customized QA Item (Not displayed for the B version) This menu item is used to customize information, such as kanji patient name, patient ID, date of birth, etc., relevant to patient image displayed on the QA window. For details of the setup procedure, see “11. Customizing the QA Items — Customized QA Item”.
XII. Selector Setting This menu item is used for selector setup necessary when connecting a built-in IR. This function is same as that of IDT-IV selector setup. For details of the setup procedure, see “12. Setting the Selectors — Selector Setting”.
For details of FilmStrFmt.env file editing and View Film String usage, see “3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt)” in “Print Output Function” under “FR1: Function-specific Reference”. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-6
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
XIII. View Event Log This menu item is used to launch the Event Viewer of Windos 2000. The Event Viewer allows you to confirm errors occurring in the OS or CL-AP. For details of how to use the Event Viewer, see “2. Using the Event Viewer” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
XIV. Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool This menu item is used to compress CL log files or several setup files at a time and back them up on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like. This function is useful for looking into causes of errors that occur. For details of how to collect log files or various setup files, see “13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files — Log/ Configuration Files Acquisition Tool”.
XV. DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting This menu item is used to perform internal data mapping for the tags to be set up for the information about the CL’s inquiries addressed to the RIS (C-FIND-RQ) and the tags received in the form of a response from the RIS to the CL (C-FIND-RSP). For details on tag mapping, see “14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags — DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting”.
XVI. P-Console Setting (Applicable only in Japan.) This menu item is used to transfer configuration data to the POCKET id Console or register device id of the POCKET id Console to be handled on the CL. For details of how to use the POCKET id Console, see “15. Setting the POCKET id Console — P-Console Setting”.
XVII. Distribution Code for FCR9000 Series Connection (Displayed for only V1.0(C) version: for Japanese version only) This menu item is used to describe distribution code for E-i/fconnected 9000 series IR. XVIII. Exit Service Utility This menu item is used for exiting the Service Utility mode.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-7
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items
3. Various Configuration Settings — Setup Configuration Item When you click [Setup Configuration Item] on the main menu, the following window opens. Various items are listed in a tree form (these items are hereinafter referred to as tree items) under “CONFIG”. When you click these items, you can open windows to set detailed information for specific tree items.
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items In the individual tree items, the following items can be set up. SYSTEM CONFIG This tree item is used to set the basic information about the CL. Clicking the “+” sign to the left of “SYSTEM CONFIG” displays the SYSTEM CONFIG tree items. The displayed items allow you to set the CL system information (I in the window illustration below), FINP basic information (II), QA functionality (III), Printout functionality (IV), IDT or Console functionality (V), trimming functionality (VI), Image Reader QC functionality (VII), POCKET id Console functionality (VIII), 9000 connection functionality (IX), and DICOM Query/Retrieve functionality (X). I II III
Items listed in a tree form (tree items)
IV V VI VII
00000060.EPS
VIII(*1) IX(*2) X(*3) 00000062.EPS
The individual tree items are detailed in the following subsection.
(*1) “9.CONFIG PDA” is displayed only when the option key for the POCKET id Console is installed. (Applicable only in Japan.) (*2) “10. CONFIG 9000” is displayed only for V1.0 (C). (*3) “10. CONFIG QR” is displayed only for V3.0 (B) or later. For details of “1. IMAGE MODALITY”, see “3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY”. For details of “3. QA FUNCTION”, see “3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION”. For details of “4. PRINTER”, see “2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format” under “FR1: Function-specific Reference”. For details of “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION”, see “3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION”. For details of “7. CONFIG OPTION”, see “3.7 Configuration Details — 7. CONFIG OPTION”. 010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-8
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items
For details of “8. CONFIG QC”, see “3.8 Configuration Details — 8. CONFIG QC”. For details of “9. CONFIG PDA” (*1), see “3.9 Configuration Details — 9. CONFIG PDA”. For details of “10. CONFIG9000” (*2), see “IN-C: Installation – Connection of 9000 Series Equipment”. For details of “10. CONFIG QR” (*3), see “3.10 Configuration Details — 10. CONFIG QR”.
PERSON NAME This tree item is used to define the sequence of patient name elements and characters that delimit names. Clicking the “+” sign to the left of “PERSON NAME” displays the items for defining the details of PERSON NAME. For details on the PERSON NAME, see “3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection”.
NETWORK CONFIG This tree item is used to set the CL/connected equipment network information and perform FINP/DICOM setup. Clicking the “+” sign to the left of “NETWORK CONFIG” displays the NETWORK CONFIG tree items. The displayed items allow you to set the CL main unit information (I in the window illustration below) and connected equipment information (II). I II 00000063.EPS
FILM SORTING This tree item is used to define the film sorting conditions for DICOM prints. For details of the FILM SORTING tree item, see “3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function”.
FINP COMPRESSION TYPE This tree item is used to formulate an image compression definition of each MPM code for use in image output generation with the FINP. Before the use of this feature, however, the image compression setting for each MPM code needs to be turned ON from “NETWORK CONFIG”. IDT CONNECTING This tree item is used to make patient information available being shared with the CR Console (CL) and IDT-IV that are on the same network. See “3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup”.
MAC ADDRESS This tree item is used to prevent error occurrence that disables Mac Address to be acquired at CL-AP startup. See “3.14 Mac Address Manual Input”.
LOG SHARE This tree item is used to register the target CL’s host name and IP address when using the Retake Analysis function and the IP use count calculation function. See “3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup”.
DISTRIBUTION CODE This tree item is used to perform automatic distribution code setup so that images can be distributed automatically to a device of HD_ FILE attribute. CONNECTING EQUIPMENT This tree item is used to define the connected equipment that is connected to the CL.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-9
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items
1.
When you click a tree item in the left-hand area of the Setup Configuration Item window, a list of setup items appears in the righthand area of the window (this list is hereinafter referred to as a configuration list).
Double-click the Value column to the right of a configuration item name.
This section explains about the procedure for editing the setup items in a configuration list.
REFERENCE
Value column
A configuration list appears when you click the following tree items: A maximum of nine tree items under “SYSTEM CONFIG” (Display items are different depending on the used software version and options.) PERSON NAME
2.
00000065.EPS
Edit a configuration item. When the column you double-clicked changes to a direct input field (e.g.,
)
I. With the mouse, select the text to be edited, and then key in new text. When the column you double-clicked changes to a pull-down menu (e.g.,
)
I. Click the downward arrow mark ( (e.g.,
) for the pull-down menu
), and then choose a target item
from the pull-down menu. When the column you double-clicked changes to a field with upward and downward arrow marks (e.g., 00000064.EPS
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
)
I. Click the upward arrow mark ( ) or downward arrow mark ) to change the value as desired. (
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-10
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data To save the configuration data, perform either of the following procedures with the mouse or keyboard: Saving with the mouse
1.
From the “Config (F)” menu, click “Save (V)”. A confirmation window opens.
2.
Click [YES]. The system saves the edited configuration data.
Saving with the keyboard
1.
Hold down the “Alt” key and press the “F” key. A pull-down menu opens.
2.
Press the “V” key. A confirmation window opens.
3.
Press the “Return” key. The system saves the edited configuration data.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-11
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY IMAGE MODALITY setup items (1 to 5) No. 1
Name System Common Date Format
Selection 0 : Japanese date (S62.10.07) 1 : ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07) 2 : ANSI short date (1987.10.07) 3 : American long date (OCT.07.1987) 4 : American short date (0.07.1987) 5 : European long date (07.OCT.1987) 6 : European short date (07.10.1987)
2
Alert MSG Display Yes When Deleting Image After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage deletion will be displayed. Pressing [OK] willdelete the specified item. No After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage deletion will not be displayed and the specifieditem deleted immediately.
3
4
5
Meaning Specifying the date format to be used in medica linstitutions. * The date format is applicable in common to entry ofthe date of birth, monitor display, film output, and allother date-related representations. * The default English setting at shipment from factory is “2:ANSI short date (1987.10.07)”.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
Specifying whether or not to display the confirmation screen for image deletion before actually deleting animage.
Agreement required.
Activate Error Recovery Retrial
Specifying whether or not to activate retrial processing after Yes The system continues retrial processing until the connected the error occurrence. devices are recovered. Once recovered, itautomatically continues output (including printout) of image accumulated on the output queue. No The system does not output (print) images in “standby” status unless it manually outputs (includingprintout) such images.
Agreement required.
Institute/Site Name Strings
A maximum of 60 one-byte character. ( FUJIFILM HOSPITAL)
Agreement required.
IP Size by inch or Metric
Specifying the IP size. Agreement 0:Inch Displays 14"×14" and 14"×17" images in the inch system. required. * Specify the IP size considering the cassette size available on 1:Metric Displays 14"×14" and 14"×17" images in the metric system. the RU side.
Setting the medical institution name (in 1-byte characters). * For language setup of one-byte characters, a hospital name specified here will be printed on film. * Be sure to use 1-byte characters for entering medical institution name as they are used in the DMS system. * Make sure to enter 1-byte characters on the keyboard. * The default number of characters printed on film is 20 at a maximum.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-12
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (6 to 10) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
6
Two independent Yes Mask Sizes Sets independent RN for the right and left images. Applicable to Left and (Hipmnrl.prm is used.) Right images No Sets the same RN for the right and left images. (Hipmenu.prm is used.)
Specifying whether or not to set up frequency processing RN independently for the right and left images on the doubleimage output.
Agreement required.
7
Language Setup for Screen Message
Specifying the language used.
Agreement required.
8
9
0 : Japanese 1 : English 2 : German 3 : French 4 : Spanish 5 : Italian 6 : Swedish 7 : Finnish 8 : Danish 9 : Norwegian
10 : Korean 11 : ChineseSimplified 12 : ChineseTraditional 13 : Portuguese 14 : Polish 15 : Hungarian 16 : Czech 17 : Russian 18 : Slovene 19 : Turkish
* There is no need to change in the Japanese version. Change the setting as necessary for the languages other than Japanese. * The default setting on the CL-AP CD is “1:English”. * The default English setting at shipment from factory is “1:English”. * Software version V7.0 (B) does not provide support to “18: Slovene”.
Insitute/Site Name in A maximum of 15 two-byte characters. Two-Byte Characters ( )
Specifying the kanji medical institution name.
UID Issuance after Modifying ID Information
Specifying whether or not to issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID when modifying the patient, study, series or image information.
Yes Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. No Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
10 UID Issuance after Yes Modifying Normalized Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. Parameter No Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
* Be sure to enter two-byte characters on the keyboard. / (Using the +< > keys, the character entry mode can be made available for entering two byte characters.) * The default number of characters printed on film is 15 at a maximum. * For language setup of two-byte characters, a hospital name specified here will be printed on film.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
* Select “Yes” if you wish to identify images for each modification. Specifying whether or not to issue new image UID and SOP Agreement Instance UID when modifying the conditions for normalization. required. * Select “Yes” if you wish to identify images for each modification.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-13
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (11 to 15) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
11 UID Issuance after Modifying Image Processing Parameter
Yes Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. No Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
Specifying whether or not to issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID when modifying image processing parameters.
12 UID Issuance Before Sending Processed Data
Yes Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID. No Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
Specifying whether or not to output SOP Instance UID as a processed CR image UID when outputting processed images.
13 DICOM Series Generation Logic
Specifying the series generation logic. 0 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - 1 image Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study “ Detailed explanations” and only one image for one series. 1 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - M image Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study and multiple images for one series. 2 : 1 Study - 1 series and 1 Series - N image Issues a number so that it has only one series for one study and multiple images for one series.
Agreement required.
14 System Recognition ID (A to Z)
A_Z ( A)
Be sure to assign a unique ID for each CL.
15 User Utility Password 0 : No Password Required Required or Not Password entry is not required. 1 : Default Password As the default, 1111 is entered for the password. Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update menu of exposure menu parameters (for services). 2 : Password Required Hides the default password (1111). Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update menu of exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
* Select “Yes” if you wish to identify images for each modification.
Setting the system ID. * Reflected on the image attributes and used for automatic study number generation. * Assign a unique ID individually for each equipment unit. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * The system ID set up on the RU configuration (referred to as the image ID on the RU) will be printed on film. Specifying if password entry is required when entering the user utility mode.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “1: Default Password”.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-14
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (16 to 21) No.
Name
16 SOP Class UID for PPS When No FILE Attribute Output
Selection 1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.1 1.2.392.200036.9125.1.1.2
Meaning Specifying an SOP Class UID that is sent back to PPS when no other connected hosts are set up as the destinations for FILE attribute image output (for example, when a QA-WS is connected as a connected host).
For cluster connection Agreement required.
* Use the same UID as that used by the HI-C655 for FILE attribute output. 17 Protocol Name for PPS
0 : Function Code Sets up a Code (function codes such as RT, TS, ES, etc). 1 : ANK Menu Name Sets up a Menu Name (exposure menu) in alphanumerics.
Specifying a value used for setup of the “Protocol Name” for PPS.
Agreement required.
18 Display Performed Procedure on Worklist Tab
Yes No
Specifying whether or not to display an already performed study in the CL work list. For a study already performed, specifying NO will hide it even if its related information is sent from MWM. Basically, specify NO when the PPS function is not available.
Agreement required.
19 Kind of Output Image 0 : L, H, B, S (Energy Subtraction) 1 : L, B, S 2 : L, S 3 : L, B 4 : L, H 20 Send 3 on 1 Format to External Device
21 Connection Between Reader and Console
L : Low-energy image H : High-energy image B : Bone image S : Soft tissue image
Specifying the combination of kinds of images to be transferred Agreement to other connected host. required.
0 : Yes Transmits Images. 1 : No Does not transmit images.
Specifying whether or not to transfer 3on1-format images to an Agreement externally connected image storage device. required.
0 : 1-1 1-to-1 connection 1: N-N N-to-N connection 2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) N-to-N connection (IP barcode is not to be used.)
Specifying whether the 1-to-1 or N-to-N connection is to be established for the CL and RU.
* Specify “Yes” only when the target storage device can receive ES 3on1-format images. * This setup item is not for film output. Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is “1:N-N” for the CR Console Lite/Plus. * The default setting at shipment from factory is “2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode)” for the CR Console MINI. * If “2:N-N (Not Use IP Barcode)” is specified here, “No” must be specified for No. 80 “Enable Auto Menu Creation” in ■ CSL/IDT FUNCTION.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-15
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (22 to 27) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
22 Long Type Character Yes Format Decreases the font sizes to increase the number of displayable characters. No Does not increase the number of displayable characters.
Specifying the font sizes of the ID number and other items for CRT display and film annotation character printing.
23 Tag Mapped on 0040, 0100>0040, 0007 Study Menu at MWM Use
DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped onto a study menu Agreement for MWM use. required.
24 Perform Mapping to Exposure Menu at MWM Use
Specifying whether or not to perform mapping for study and Agreement exposure menus during MWM use. If “No” is selected, only the required. patient information will be used to initiate a study process (the exposure menu or other data will not be transmitted).
Yes Performs mapping. No Does not perform mapping.
Agreement required.
* Note that the item to be specified for actually increasing the number of characters is separately available.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
25 Display Dialog When Yes Failed in Mapping to Opens a warning window. Menu at MWM Use No Does not open a warning window.
Specifying whether or not to open a warning window when Agreement mapping is not successfully performed for a CL study menu or required. exposure menu during MWM use.
26 Use Study InstanceUID from RIS
Yes Uses the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS. No Does not use the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS.
Specifying whether or not to use the Study Instance UID that is transmitted from the F-RIS.
27 StudyInstanceUID Generation Logic
Type1 .2.1. Type2 .2.2. Type3 .2.3.. Type4 .2.4... Type5 .2.5. Type6 .2.6.. Type7 .2...
Study Instance UID number issue type for CL internal number issuance.
Agreement required.
* To enable the MWM Order function, the StudyInstanceUID must be received unfailingly from the RIS. Unless otherwise, no studies can be started. Agreement required.
* If the order number does not exist or the Study Instance UID is longer than specified, the system automatically uses Type7. * Do not specify anything other than Type7 unless otherwise requested by the user. When anything other than Type7 was specified at the request of the user, have the user understand that “the same components determined double will make the StudyInstanceUID to be determined double as well, resulting then in causing a problem to occur on the DICOM Server side”.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-16
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (28 to 30) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
28 Dicom Storage Output Connection Number
1 to 4 ( 3)
29 Image Number Generation Logic
0 : System ID+Serial Number Attaches a machine shipment control number. 1 : Serial Number Does not attach a machine shipment control number.
Specifying whether or not to attach a machine shipment control number to the beginning of the Image Number. This number is printed on film as well.
30 Display Pixel Size
264
Monitor pixel size. To be changed in accordance with the monitor type.
Number of connections simultaneously available for Dicom Storage output generation.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
* Item to be specified for the LF-C2. Agreement required.
15" touch panel LCD monitor : 297 17" CRT monitor : 316 (recommended value : resolution 1024 × 768) 17" touch panel LCD monitor : 264 (V7.0 or later) SL-IC300 : 207 Ikegami CRT monitor : 255 (recommended value) (1k landscape-type) SL-IC200 : 255 * This setting represents a constant for 100%-size image display by the QA function. * Since the CRT monitor can vary its pixel size through screen size adjustments, calculate the pixel size value as indicated below and use it as the setting. Screen width (mm) ÷ number of pixels × 1000 = pixel size Example : 360 mm ÷ 1600 pixels × 1000 = 225
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-17
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (32 to 35) No.
Name
32 Kind of Print Image (Image Combining Process)
Selection 0 : Original Original image only. 1 : Original+Combined Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 × 43cm image). 2 : Combined Combined image only (reduced to 35 × 43cm image). 3 : Combined (Lifesize) Combined image (life size) 4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to 35 × 43cm image).
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying image type of the film output that is generated upon Agreement image combination. required. When you are specifying 3 or 4 (life-size image output) for the setup value, also confirm setup values for Nos. 75 and 76 of PRINTER setup items. * This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest setting takes effect no matter which utility is used.
33 Kind of Transfer Image (Image Combining Process)
Specifying image type of the network output that is generated Agreement 0 : Original Original image only. upon image combination. required. 1 : Original+Combined Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 × 43cm * This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest image). setting takes effect no matter which utility is used. 2 : Combined Combined image only (reduced to 35 × 43cm image). 3 : Combined (Lifesize) Combined image (life size) 4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to 35 × 43cm image).
34 Enable Statistical Info. Output
Yes Enables the exposure result data file output function. No Disables the exposure result data file output function.
Specifying whether or not to output an exposure result data file.
Agreement required.
Exposure result data : Patient ID, patient name, study date, study time, anatomical region, exposure menu, etc. * Select “Yes” when using the Retake Analysis function. * The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “Yes”.
35 Modality of Mammography Image
MG Handles as MG. DX Handles as DX.
Specifying whether MG or DX is to be used for mammogram DICOM output.
Agreement required.
* Version A09 provides MG support only. * It is necessary that option key installation be completed.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-18
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (36 to 41) No.
Name
36 Administrator Password
Selection Up to 20 one-byte characters. ( fcr-iip)
For cluster connection
Meaning Specifying administrator privilege password for the user authentication function. * Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.
37 Enable Security Function
Yes Uses the user authentication function. No Does not use the user authentication function.
Specifying whether or not to use the user authentication function.
38 Link User Account to Operator’s Name
Specifying whether the technologist name field should display Yes Displays the login user name in the technologist name field. the name of a user who logs in with the user authentication function. No Does not display the login user name in the technologist name field.
39 UID Issuance about a Yes function (except Issues a new image UID/SOP Instance UID number. Image Processing) to No change to the image Does not issue a new image UID/SOP Instance UID themselves number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/ SOPInstance UID number when an image data editing process (other than image processing) was performed.
40 Rotate the 2nd Stitching Image
Specifying whether or not to rotate the second image 180 degrees for long-view menu (function: WS) automatic generation.
Yes Rotates the second image 180 degrees. No Does not rotate.
* When an image obtained after editing is to be differentiated from the original one, choose “Yes”. * This image data editing process involves shuttening processing, marker processing, annotation, ES processing and image composition.
* When a Fuji Film’s long-view cassette is used, it is necessary to rotate the second image 180 degrees. 41 Rotate the 3rd Stitching Image
Yes Rotates the third image 180 degrees. No Does not rotate.
Specifying whether or not to rotate the third image 180 degrees for long-view menu (function: WS) automatic generation.
At an institution where double and triple longview cassettes are used mixed, set both of 40. and 41. to “Yes”. For a double cassette, rotate the second image by 180° and for a triple cassette, rotate the third image by 180°.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-19
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup items (42 to 49) No.
Name
42 Enable Stitching Edge Adjustment
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
Yes Enables the stitching edge adjustment function. No Disables the stitching edge adjustment function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the stitching edge adjustment function for images generated with the long-view menu (function: WS).
Yes Cuts the IP edge. No Does not cut the IP edge.
Specifying whether or not to cut the IP edge when combining images that are generated with the long-view menu (function: WS).
44 Use Series Identification From F-RIS
Yes Uses series ID number. No Does not use series ID number.
Specifying whether or not to use an ID number (new tag) when Agreement the F-RIS is connected. required.
45 UID Issuance after Modifying Trimming Parameter
Yes Issues a new number. No Does not issue new number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID as trimming information is modified.
Agreement required.
46 UID Issuance after Modifying FNC Parameter
Yes Issues a new number. No Does not issue a new number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/ SOPInstance UID number when FNC parameters are changed.
Agreement required.
47 Quantity which paints 0-200 (0) inside the recognition Specifies a quantity that is variable in 0.01 mm increments result of the chest from 0.00 to 2.00 mm. wall [ × 0.01mm] * In actual processing, values smaller than pixel size of the standard-pixel density will be discarded.
Specifying the paint area for the mammographic chest wall shuttering process.
Agreement required.
48 Apply GS Filter To 8 × 10 / 1824 Image
Yes Perform GS conversion. No Does not perform GS conversion.
Specifying whether or not to subject 8" × 10"/18 × 24 cm standard-pixel density images to GS conversion.
0 : Thm image file Uses half the standard-pixel density image size. 1 : Std image file Uses the standard-pixel density image size.
Specifying the image type to be used for image display.
43 Cut IP Edge for Stitching
49 Kind of the image used for the displaying
* You should basically choose “Yes”
* You should basically choose “No”.
* To set “Yes”, make sure ahead of time that the F-RIS server version is compatible with this option.
* The chest wall shuttering process exercises a blackening function to automatically paint out the chest wall’s transparent portion that may result from a bend or other inadequacy during IP reading. Agreement required.
* If “No” is chosen, a moire pattern may appear in a film output and the like. Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-20
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (50 to 53 and 55 to 57) No.
Name
Selection
50 Portable Finish Mode 0 : Finish Study
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying how to finish a study whose IP has been registered on the POCKET id Console. * This setting can be determined also by the User Utility function and the setting determined later will be enabled.
51 Use Reject Comment Yes Enables the entry. No Disables the entry.
Specifying whether to enable or disable entry of comment on mis-exposed images.
52 Time Until Auto Log Off
Specifying the time (represented in minutes) until when auto logoff takes place.
0-60 (0)
* Select “Yes” when using the Retake Analysis function.
* Note that if 0 is set, no auto logoff will take place. 53 Horizontal UMB Processing for VELOCITY & PRELIO
0 : ALL OFF No image unevenness removal processing is applied. 1 : ON Table Type Only Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and CR-IR 370) equipment. 2 : ON Upright Type Only Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to the upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366) equipment. 3 : ALL ON Image unevenness removal processing is applied to all equipment models.
0-1000 (13) 55 Gradients(x10) of LUT used for Preview Image
Specifying whether or not to apply image unevenness removal processing to the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and CR-IR 370) and upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366) Image Readers. * Specify “ON” only for newly installed mobile models or equipment on which an image unevenness problem arose as it was subjected to undue vibrations. Specify “OFF” for newly installed equipment or already-installed equipment at a hospital. Specifying a gradient of the linear gradation LUT used for display of a quick-view image. (Specify a x10 value.)
Agreement required.
* Do not change the preset default value because this is a reserve item. 56 Use Password Security
Yes Enables the PAS security function. No Disables the PAS security function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the PAS security function.
Agreement required.
57 Password for PAS Security
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters are allowed to use. ( 19750225)
Specifying a password for authentication of the PAS security function.
Agreement required.
* Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-21
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (67 and 72) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
67 Use Service Utility Password
Yes Enables the Service Utility password function. No Disables the Service Utility password function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Service Utility password function.
Agreement required.
72 Enable Exposure Index Function
Yes Enables the Exposure Index function. No Disables the Exposure Index function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Exposure Index function.
Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-22
3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY
Detailed explanations “13. DICOM Series Generation Logic” In relation to the DICOM Series Generation Logic, the following supplements explain the logic of series numbering subsequent to image a cquisition from the RU.
2: 1 Study-1 series and 1 series-N Image Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has only one series and that each series has two or more images. 1 Study
1 : 1
1 series
1 : N
0: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-1 Image Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more than one series and that each series has only one image. 1 Study
1 : N
1 series 1 series N series
1 : 1 1 : 1 1 : 1
1 Image 1 Image N Image
1 Image
00000466.EPS
1 Image 1 Image 00000464.EPS
1: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-M Image Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more than one series and that each series has two or more images. 1 Study
1 : N
1 series
1 : M
1 Image 1 Image M Image
1 series N series
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000465.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-23
3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION
3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION QA FUNCTION setup items (1 to 7) No.
Name
1
Enable Image Proc. Pram Update Flag
2
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
Enabling updated image processing parameter flag.
Agreement required.
Enable E-mail Button Yes Used. No Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the image transfer function via E-mail and the simplified image storage function.
Agreement required.
3
Use Dialog for Choosing Folder to Save Jpeg Image
No Does not open. Yes Opens.
Specifying whether or not to open a dialog box for specifying the destination directory when you save an image with the simplified image storage function.
4
Destination Path of JPEG File
E : \
Specifying the simplified image storage destination.
Filename Format of JPEG Information
0 : Image Number “Image number”+“serial number”.txt 1 : Type 1 “Host name”+“date”+“serial number”.txt 2 : Type 2 “Paitent ID No”+“_”+“dominical year”+“_”+“study anatomical region”+“_”+“serial number”+“_”+“host name”.txt
5
Yes Reflects updated image processing parameters upon flag. No Does not reflect updated image processing parameters upon flag.
* Specify “No”.
* Be sure to enter 1-byte characters via the keyboard. * The default value for V7.1(B) or earlier is “A:\”. Filename generation rule applied to simplified image storage. * Patient ID number
: A maximum of 16 characters, Tag (0010, 0020). Dominical year : Fixed at six characters. Study anatomical region : A maximum of 16 characters, Tag (0018, 0015). Serial number : Fixed at four characters (starting from 0000). Host name : A maximum of ten characters. Delimitation : “_” (underscore).
Agreement required.
6
JPEG Image Processing Use CrtLut
None (Example) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\CrtLut1.env
Specifying whether or not to provide perceptual linear gradation correction at the time of JPEG image storage. This selection takes effect when you specify the names of the directory and file in which the setup file is stored.
Agreement required.
7
Alert MSG Display When Output
Yes Opens. No Does not open.
Specifying whether or not display the confirmation dialog when Agreement the reprint button/study distributino button is pressed. required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-24
3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION
QA FUNCTION setup items (8 to 14) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
8
Display Save Button
No Not displayed. Yes Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save button.
9
Alert MSG Display When Save
No Not displayed. Yes Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation dialog when shifting from the previous study or image or at the completion of QA processing.
10 Alert MSG Display When Image Changed
No Not displayed. Yes Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation dialog when energy subtraction or shuttering processing is performed, or menu or image is changed, or images are composed together.
11 Enable Dicom File Storage
Yes Used. No Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the DICOM file storage function.
12 Tranfer Syntax Used When Using Dicom File Storage
0 : Implicit VR Little Endian 1 : Explicit VR Little Endian 2 : Jpeg Lossless
Specifying the DICOM file storage transfer syntax.
13 Save Multibyte Code When Using Dicom File Storage
Yes Multi-byte characters are saved. No Multi-byte characters are not saved.
Specifying whether or not to save multi-byte characters at DICOM file storage.
14 Save Annotation Information When Using Dicom File Storage
Yes Annotation information is saved. No Annotation information is not saved.
Specifying whether or not to save annotation information at DICOM file storage.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-25
3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION
QA FUNCTION setup items (15 to 19) No.
Name
15 DCM File Image Processing Use CrtLut
Selection None (Example) Storage-scp (Software version V5.1 (B) or earlier) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut (Software version V6.0 (B) or later)
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying an LUT file when performing LUT processing for DICOM file storage. Do not describe “.lut” (extension) for software version V5.1(B) or earlier. The folder used is fixed to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ CrtLut” and include specified LUT files in this folder. For software version V6.0 (B) or later, use an absolute path (including extension) to describe necessary settings. Ex. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * A maximum of 64 alphanumerics can be used to specify necessary data. * If no data is specified, CrtLut processing will not be performed. * If no specified file exists, an error will occur.
16 Change Modality When Using Dicom File Storage (MG CR)
Yes MG is saved as CR. No MG is not saved as CR.
Specifying whether or not to save MG as CR at the DICOM file storage.
17 Enable Change ImageDate and ImageTime
No Disabled. Yes Enabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable to edit the date and time of image generation.
18 Image File Type For Magnify Display
0 : Std image file 1 : Hq image file
Specifying whether to use a standard image or high-density image to display a magnified image.
* Select “No” in Japan.
* Also confirm the setup value of No. 19. * For setup of the type of an image displayed when no image magnification processing is applied, confirm setup value for No. 49 of IMAGE MODALITY setup items. 19 PEM Processing in the case of Magnify Display
Yes PEM processing is performed. No No PEM processing is performed.
Specifying whether or not to perform PEM processing on an ultra-high density image when it is magnified and displayed.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-26
3.5 Configuration Details — 3. QA FUNCTION
QA FUNCTION setup items (20) No.
Name
20 Alert MSG Type When Patient Information will be Modified
Selection 0 : Connect with RIS RIS connection (hospital layer) 1 : Without RIS Non-RIS connection (general practitioner layer) 2 : Non-Display Not displayed.
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying a message type to be displayed when changing the patient information.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-27
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (1 to 6) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
1
AutoMenuSelect
Specifying whether or not to automatically move onto the next No From exposure list menus of unread images, manually exposure menu item (at the bottom on the screen) when selects exposure menus of the image to be read the next. multiple exposure menus are registered. Yes When an image is received from the RU, automatically moves onto the next exposure menu item (at the bottom on the screen).
2
Default Menu Code for Unregistered Image
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters. ( FCR0908-0000)
Enable Distribution Code
No The distribution code is not used. Yes The distribution code is used.
Specifying if the distribution code is used when changing exposure menu parameters.
3
For cluster connection
Setting the extension menu code of the exposure menu to be used as the default when it is unregistered. * This item can also be set up using the User Utility function. The item set up the last will be valid. * Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * The default setting on the CL-AP CD is “FCR0909-0000”. Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “Yes”.
4
Enable Film String
No The film mark is not used. Yes The film mark is used.
Specifying if the film annotation characters are used when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
5
Enable Function Setup
No The function setup is not used. Yes The function setup is used.
Specifying if the function setup is used when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
No The pantomography is not used. Yes Image isolation processing is performed if the target image is a pantomography menu (MPMcode20 × 4) in 10" × 12" size.
Specifying whether or not to use the pantomography (to isolate Agreement a 15 × 30cm image from a 10" × 12" size image). required.
6
Enable Pantomography Processing
* The default setting at shipment from factory is “Yes” for the CR Console Lite/Plus.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-28
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (7 to 11) Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
No.
Name
7
Enable Performance Data (RIS)
No The performance data is disabled. Yes The performance data is enabled.
Specifying whether the result information (film size and split exposure count) can be defined from the CL menu parameter edit dialog box at the time of ordering from the RIS.
8
Enable Automatic Selector Switching
No Not used. Yes Used.
Specifying if the automatic selector changeover function is used.
9
Enable Requesting Dept. Name Field
No The requesting department name field is not displayed. Yes The requesting department name field is displayed.
Specifying if the requesting department name field is displayed Agreement on the patient information entry screen. required.
10 Enable Technologist Name Field
No The technologist name field is not displayed. Yes The technologist name field is displayed.
Specifying if the technologist name field is displayed on the patient information entry screen.
Agreement required.
11 Image Rotation/ Reversal Range
0 : L-R reversal 1 : T-B reversal 2 : L-R,T-B reversal 3 : L-R reversal / 90-deg,Rotation 4 : L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg,Rotation
Specifying the range available for selection of image rotation and reversal when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “4: L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg, Rotation”.
Selects a combination of L-R, T-B, 90-deg or Rotation L-R : Right and left rotation, T-B : Top and bottom rotation, 90-deg, Rotation : 90º reversal
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-29
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (12 to 14) No.
Name
12 EDR Mode Setup
Selection 0 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX 1 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X 2 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/MANUAL 3 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X/MANUAL
Meaning Specifying the range available for selection of EDR mode when changing exposure menu parameters.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
* The default setting on the CL-AP CD is “0:AUTO/SEMI/FIX”.
Selects a combination of AUTO, SEMI, FIX, SEMI-X or MANUAL from 0 to 3. AUTO
: Automatically calculates both the S and L values based on the image. SEMI : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S value as per determined process. FIX : The L value is fixed. The S value is the default or manually entered. SEMI-X : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S value as per determined process. Manually enters area for calculation and output density. MANUAL : For manual entry of both the S and L values. 13 Image Data Filing Mode Setup
Specifying the range available for selection of filing mode when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
RT,TS,ES,WS,PS,TM ( RT,PS,TM,WS)
Specifying functions that can be selected when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement required.
RT : Routine processing (routine exposure) TS : Temporal subtraction processing ES : Energy subtraction processing WS : Whole spine processing PS : IVP processing TM : Tomographic processing
* Enumerate functions demarcating them using one-byte * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
0 : OFF/ON 1 : OFF/ON/ON* Selects a combination of OFF, ON or ON* from 0 and 1. OFF : Not to filing to the OD device. ON : Filing to the OD device. ON* : Filing of an HQ image to the OD device after converting it to a normal density image.
14 Function Setup
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-30
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (15 to 18) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
15 Examination No. Length
1 to 16 ( 10)
16 Examination No. Padding Method
0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Right-padded with spaces to the head. 1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) Right-padded with zeros to the head. 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ) Left-padded with spaces to the tail. 3 : Pad with zero to the tail (1234567000) Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
Specifying the Accession No. padding method.
17 Patient ID Length
1 to 64 ( 10)
Setting the patient ID length.
Setting the Accession No. length (1 to 16). * Set 6 or larger when 1 is set for “29. Study Number Issuance Logic Setup” and 14 or larger when 2 is set * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * This function also specifies the number of characters printed on film. * If using the Accession Number character string adding function, input the character string as “(Number to be set up) ≤ 16 - (Number of characters to be added)”.
* This function also specifies right/left justification of character strings printed on film. * If using Synapse RIS, select either “0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567)” or “2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 )”.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * This function also specifies the number of characters printed on film. To specify the number of characters that exceeds 11, set “Yes” for No. 22 Long Type Character Format of IMAGE MODALITY. * To include the institution identification code in the patient ID to be issued automatically, specify “64” for the maximum patient ID length. * If using the Accession Number character string adding function, input the character string as “(Number to be set up) ≤ 64 - (Number of characters to be added)”. 18 Patient ID Padding Method
0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Right-padded with spaces to the head. 1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) Right-padded with zeros to the head. 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ) Left-padded with spaces to the tail. 3 : Pad with zero to the tail (1234567000) Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
Specifying the patient ID padding method. * This function also specifies right/left justification of character strings printed on film. * If using Synapse RIS, select either “0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567)” or “2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 )”.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-31
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (19 to 24) No.
Name
Selection
19 Reception No. Length 1 to 16 ( 5)
Meaning Setting the reception No. length. * Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
20 Reception No. Padding Method
0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567) Right-padded with spaces to the head. 1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567) Right-padded with zeros to the head. 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ) Left-padded with spaces to the tail. 3 : Pad with zero to the tail (1234567000) Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
Specifying the reception No. padding method.
21 Exposure List Erasure Setup
No Does not erase. Yes Erases.
Specifying whether or not to erase the preset exposure list Agreement when entering new patient information on the examination and required. examination reservation screens.
* Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection.
Agreement required.
* This item can also be set up using the User Utility function. The item set up the last will be valid. * The default setting at shipment from factory is “Yes” for the CR Console Lite/Plus.
22 Requesting Dept. Name Field Setup
Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the 0 : Code Displays the requesting department code. requesting department name field. 1 : NameSbcs Displays the requesting department name in alphanumerics. 2 : NameDbcs Displays the requesting department name in kanji.
Agreement required.
23 Technician’s Name Field Setup
0 : Code Displays the technician’s code. 1: NameSbcs Displays the technician’s name in alphanumerics. 2 : NameDbcs Displays the technician’s name in kanji.
Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the technician’s name field.
Agreement required.
24 Min.Set Number
1 to ZZ ( 1)
Setting the minimum value for the function processing setup No. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * Enter a value smaller than that specified in “25. Max. Set Number” below.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-32
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (25 to 30) No.
Name
25 Max.Set Number
Selection 1 to ZZ ( 9Z)
Meaning
For cluster connection
Setting the maximum value for the function processing setup No. * Enter a value larger than that specified in “24. Min. Set Number”above. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
26 MCR Customized Card
No The hospital card is not used. Yes The hospital card is used.
Specifying whether or not to use the hospital card.
27 MCR Card Type (JIS/ISO)
0 : JIS 1 : ISO
Specifying the magnetic card type.
28 MCR Card Format Setup
0 : FUJI (JIS type, ISO type) 1 : FJ01 (JIS type) 2 : FJ02 (JIS type) 3 : FJ03 (JIS type) 4 : FJ04 (JIS type) 5 : FJ05 (JIS type) 6 : FJ51 (ISO type)
Specifying the magnetic card format setup type.
29 Study Number 0 : OFF Issuance Logic Setup 1 : 2 :
* The default English setting at shipment from factory is “1:ISO”. For details of setup, see Installation “Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]” under “Appx IN: Appendix to Installation”. For details of setup, see Installation “Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]” under “Appx IN: Appendix to Installation”.
Agreement required.
Agreement required.
Specifying the logic available for automatic Accession number Agreement (0008, 0050) issuance mode. required.
System ID Date
* Verify the setting made in “15. Examination No. length.” Make sure that 6 or larger is set when “1” has been selected and 14 or larger, when “2” has been selected. * (0008, 0050) are the Accession number tag.
1 to 2 ( 2)
Setting the technician’s code length.
: Converts A to 1, ........ and Z to 26. : Converts in the form of yyyymmdd (year, month, day). Auto Increment : Starts with the initial value counted to be 0001 and the count is reset to the initial value if it extends over the two consecutive years. 30 Technician's Code Length
For details of setup, see Installation “Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]” under “Appx IN: Appendix to Installation”.
Agreement required.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-33
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (31 to 39) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
31 ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup
0 : CP850 (DOS Latin 1) 1 : CP1252 (Win Latin 1)
Specifying the code set for use in ID Online connection.
32 ID Online Serial Port No.
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board channel. (If you do not use the ID online serial port, enter “0”.) ( 0)
Specifying the ID Online serial port.
33 ID Online Interface Format
Specifying the ID Online interface format. 0 : Short 1 : Long (to be selected when an extended format is in use)
34 ID Online/Offline Switching Timeout
Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal conditions). (10)
For detailed code set descriptions, see “ Detailed explanations”.
Specifying the online/offline switching timeout value.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
Agreement required. Agreement required. Agreement required.
35 ID Online Requesting Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal Timeout conditions). (30)
Specifying the timeout value for information inquiry at the RIS. Agreement required.
36 ID Online Search Key 0 : ID# 1 : ID#&RECEPT# 2 : ID#&EXAM# 3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#
Specifying the type of ID Online search key.
Agreement required.
A combination of patient ID number, reception number, and examination number is to be used as a search key. ID# : Patient ID number RECEPT# : Reception number EXAM# : Examination number 37 ID Online Type
0 : Type-A The RIS transmits information. 1 : Type-B 2 : Type-IDC4 The CL uses a search key to make inquiries at the RIS for the purpose of acquiring patient information.
Specifying the ID Online interface type.
Agreement required.
38 Host Name of RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
One-byte character ( idc4)
IDC4 host name when using the ID Online function for IDC4.
Agreement required.
39 IP Address of RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
172.16.1.1
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * Use a maximum of 16 alphanumerics to specify the host name. IDC4 IP address when using the ID Online function for IDC4. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-34
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (40 to 48) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
40 Port Number for RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS port number. (13001)
IDC4 port number when using the ID Online function for IDC4. Agreement required. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
41 RIS Type Setup
1 : S1 (NEC-Type1) NEC (for TYPE-I) 2 : S2 (NEC-Type2) NEC (for TYPE II) 3 : S3 (Fujitsu/Hitachi) For Fujitsu/Hitachi
RIS type when ordering (serial connection only) is intended.
42 Wait Time for Performed Exposure Info. from Xcon
1 to 30 (Basically not changed.) ( 3)
Specifying the wait time (in seconds) between the instant at which the ID information acquisition request is received from the built-in type machine and the instant at which the XCON exposure result information is received in situations where exposures are made by the built-in type machine with the XCON connection established.
43 Xcon Status Display Strings
XCON
Image display caption when the XCON is connected.
44 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board channel. (Enter the value 0 if the control port is not used.) ( 0)
* Serially connected ordering is available only for version A04 or later. * Version A07 supports only “2: S2 (NEC-Type2)”.
Agreement required.
* Use a maximum of five alphanumerics to specify the caption. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. Performing XCON control serial port setup.
45 Xcon Performed Info. No Reception Does not receive operating conditions. Yes Receives operating conditions.
Specifying whether or not to receive operating condition data.
46 Xcon Exposure Info. Transfer
No Does not transfer exposure conditions. Yes Transfers exposure conditions.
Specifying whether or not to transfer exposure condition data.
47 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum KVP [kv])
28
Minimum tube voltage.
48 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum KVP [kv])
110
Maximum tube voltage.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-35
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (49 to 57) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
49 Xcon Exposure Info. 9 Limit Value (Minimum X-ray Tube Current [mA])
Minimum tube current.
50 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum X-ray Tube Current [mA])
400
Maximum tube current.
51 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum Exposure Time [msec])
10
Minimum irradiation time.
52 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum Exposure Time [msec])
5400
Maximum irradiation time.
53 Xcon Exposure Info. 0 to 9999 ( 0) Limit Value (Minimum Reserve 1)
For cluster connection
Minimum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.
54 Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum Reserve 1)
0 to 9999 ( 8000)
Maximum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.
55 Distribution Code for FCR5000 Series Connection
5000-IIP
Distribution code used for receiving images from the FCR5000 series.
56 Enable Patient Info. DB Function
No Does not use the patient database function. Yes Uses the patient database function.
Specifying whether or not to use the patient database function. Agreement required.
57 Max. Number of Patient Info.
0 to 300000 ( 5000)
Maximum number of patients that can be recorded to the patient database.
* Be sure to enter a maximum of eight one-byte characters on the keyboard.
Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “300000”.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-36
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (58 to 66) No.
Name
58 Patient’s Name Format
Selection 0: Sbcs (one-byte code) 1: Dbcs (two-byte code) 2: Sbcs+Dbcs (both one- and two-byte codes are used.)
Meaning
For cluster connection
Patient name format available for Japanese domestic market only.
59 Enable Customize No Function of Study List Yes and Patient Info. ListDB Function
Performing setup concerning the specifications for industrialAgreement use materials. required. Selecting “No” disables the study list customization and patient database list customization functions.
60 IP Info. Request Timeout (Reader:CSL=N:N)
1 to 60 (basically not changed.) ( 60)
Timeout value that prevails in the CL when the RU conducts an IP information search while the RU-CL N:N connections established.
61 Replace ALL IP Size When Receive Size Change Request from Builtin
No Does not change. Yes Changes.
Specifying whether the CL applies a specified image size Agreement change to unexposed menu items in the study list upon receipt required. of an exposure image size change notification from the built-in type machine in situations where the RIS is connected.
62 RIS Status Display String
RIS
Window display caption when the RIS is connected.
Agreement required.
* Specify by entering a maximum of five alphanumerics. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
63 RIS Serial-TX Control Enter figures in accordance with the PSI board CH. Port (Enter 0 if this function is not used.) ( 0)
Specifying the RIS control serial port.
64 MWM RIS Trigger Port
5001 (Basically not changed.)
RIS trigger reception port number for MWM use. Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS trigger reception port.
65 MWM RIS Trigger Timeout
1 to 1000. (Basically not changed.) (10)
RIS trigger reception timeout value (sec) for MWM use.
Agreement required.
Specifying the study start method for MWM use. Select an appropriate method in accordance with the RIS specifications and actual hospital operations.
Agreement required.
66 MWM Execute Study 0 : Manual Type Manual start. 1 : Trigger Trigger-driven start. 2 : Auto Automatic execution upon study reception.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-37
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (67 to 74) No.
Name
67 MWM Request Exposure Dose Status
Selection Yes Makes an inquiry. No Makes no inquiry
Meaning The configuration function for this inquiry item is disabled. This inquiry item will be validated when you add it as one of the inquiries to be addressed to the RIS by exercising the “DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup” function.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
“14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags — DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”. 68 MWM Exposure Menu Code Treatment
0 : Normal 1 : JJ1017 2 : JJ1017(Ver3)
Exposure menu code system for MWM use. Make an appropriate selection in accordance with the RIS specifications.
69 Recept Computer Hostname
ReceptComp
Receptor computer host name for receptor computer use.
70 Recept Computer IP Address
172.16.1.50
71 Recept Computer Port Number
6000
Receptor computer port number for receptor computer use. Enter a numerical value in accordance with the receptor computer port number.
72 Recept Computer Patient Info. Format
0 : A01 1 : A51
Patient information format to be acquired from the receptor computer. Select a setting in accordance with the receptor computer.
73 Recept Computer Request Timeout
1 to 60. (Basically not changed.) (15)
Timeout value (sec) for the response from the receptor computer.
74 Search Order of Patient Info.
0 : Recept Comp. Local DB Receptor computer local patient database 1 : Local DB Recept Comp. Local patient database receptor computer 2 : Recept Comp. Only Receptor computer only 3 : Local DB Only Local patient database only
Patient information search sequence during receptor computer use. The setting can also be changed with the user utility.
Agreement required.
* Enter a name of consisting of no more than 16 alphanumeric characters. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard. Receptor computer IP address for receptor computer use. * Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-38
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (75 to 77) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
75 Patient ID# is Unique Yes Patient ID numbers must be unique. No Duplicate patient ID numbers can be used.
Specifying whether the patient ID numbers to be registered in the local patient database should be unique. When you register the information about a patient ID number in the patient database with “Yes” chosen, it overwrites the information having the same patient ID number.
76 PPS Exposure Status 0 : No Sequence Does not output. 1 : Status Only Outputs only exposure status. 2 : Status + Other Results Outputs exposure status along with other actual results.
Specifying whether the PPS should return the exposure status Agreement (such as repeat/reject of exposures) with a Private tag. required.
77 IME Mode for Kana Patient’s Name
IME mode setup upon startup (kana patient name).
0 : None No IME control 1 : ON IME ON 2 : OFF IME OFF 3 : OFF-Fix IME OFF 4 : Dbcs-Hiragana 2-byte hiragana characters 5 : Dbcs-Katakana 2-byte katakana characters 6 : Sbcs-Katakana 1-byte katakana characters 7 : Dbcs-A& 2-byte alphanumeric characters 8 : Sbcs-A&N 1-byte alphanumeric characters
* Specify “0: Output Default Condition” for “120 Xcon No-Data Default Output”.
* If “3: OFF-Fix” is selected, IME cannot be started.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-39
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (78 to 81) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
78 IME Mode for Kanji Patient’s
0 : None No IME control 1 : ON IME ON 2 : OFF IME OFF 3 : OFF-Fix IME OFF 4 : Dbcs-Hiragana 2-byte hiragana characters 5 : Dbcs-Katakana 2-byte katakana characters 6 : Sbcs-Katakana 1-byte katakana characters 7 : Dbcs-A&N 2-byte alphanumeric characters 8 : Sbcs-A&N 1-byte alphanumeric characters
IME mode setup upon startup (kanji patient name).
79 RIS Type Setup (NEC)
0 : NEC-Type2-Normal
Specifying whether or not to use the expansion format when serial ordering connection is established with NEC Type2.
80 Enable Auto Menu Creation
1 : NEC-Type2-Expand Yes Enables the automatic creation function. No Shows a warning.
For cluster connection
* If “3: OFF-Fix” is selected, IME cannot be started.
* Select “2” for “41 RIS Type Setup”. This setting relates to a situation where the cassette is set in position without registering an exposure menu. Specify whether you want to automatically complete default exposure menu registration or display a warning for prompting the user to register an exposure menu. * Select “No” here when “2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode)” is specified for IMAGE MODALITY No. 21. * The default setting at shipment from factory is “No” for the CR Console MINI (for software version V7.0 (B) or later).
81 Enable Continuous Barcode Read
Yes Enables the continuous barcode read function. No Disables the continuous barcode read function.
Specifying whether or not to permit the same barcode to be continuously registered.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-40
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (82 to 89) No.
Name
82 Selection Type of Requesting Service
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
0 : Linked Links. 1 : Separated Does not link.
Specifying whether or not to establish a link between one-byte Agreement requesting department names and kanji requesting department required. names.
83 Default Requesting Service
Requesting department code consisting of up to 16 one-byte characters. No options.
Requesting department name to be displayed by default.
84 Barcode Type for Search on List
0 : Accession Number Accession number 1 : Patient ID Patient ID.
Search key used for barcode-based searches.
85 Default Value for Underfined Pixel Density
0 : ST Standard pixel density 1 : HQ High pixel density
Image reading pixel density to be used for processing at CL Agreement side when the image reading pixel density setting registered at required. the IDT741 is outside the acceptable range.
86 Image Adjust Mode
0 : Type 1 (GP) Only γ processing is displayed. 1 : Type 2 (All) Full screen display.
Image adjustment mode with the general practitioner’s specifications.
87 PPS Edit Billing Supplies
Yes Edits consumables. No Does not edit consumables.
Specifying whether or not to edit the information about Agreement requested consumables in the exposure result editing process. required.
Yes Edits the exposure results. No Does not edit the exposure results.
Specifying whether or not to edit the exposure results at the end of study.
Yes Handles as an exposure menu name. No Does not handle as an exposure menu name.
Specifying whether the Code Meaning (0040,0100>0040,0008>0008,0104) acquired as the information about a response from the RIS should be handled as an exposure menu name.
88 PPS Edit Exposure Result
89 MWM Menu Name Mapping
* If “1: Separated” is chosen, you can key in a requesting department name from the study reception window. * The default setting at shipment from factory is “1:Separated” for the CR Console Lite/Plus (for Japanese users).
* Be sure to key in a one-byte character string. * Be sure to enter a requesting department code. Agreement required.
* This selection takes effect only when “Yes” is chosen for item No. 88. Agreement required.
* This selection takes effect only when the DICOM PPS connection is established. Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-41
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (90 to 95) No.
Name
Selection
90 PPS Exposure Status 0040, 0260 > 0080, 0104 Mapping Tag Tag for exposure information mapping.
Meaning Specifying the tag for exposure information mapping at the PPS.
For cluster connection Agreement required.
* If this field is left blank, exposure information mapping does not take place. The tag VR may be limited depending on the setting for item No. 91. Specifying the information to be set for exposure information 91 PPS Exposure Status 0 : None Mapping Kind Performs no mapping. mapping for the standard tag at the PPS. 1 : Div + Status + Kind Divided exposure count/exposure status/exposure kind (all). * The VR values that can be set for the tag indicated under item No. 90 are 2 : Div Divided exposure count only. LT, ST, UT, and LO for 1; LT, ST, UT, LO, and SH for 2; 3 : Status + Kind Exposure status/exposure kind only. LT, ST, UT, and LO for 3.
Agreement required.
92 PPS N-SET Timing
Specifying the time at which the PPS study termination notice 0 : Complete When the study is terminated after receipt of all images. (N-SET) should be transmitted to the RIS. 1 : Subscribe When a study termination process is performed after all menu IPs are registered or when a study termination process is performed in situations where setup is completed so as to delete unregistered menus. 2 : DownloadPDA At the completion of transfer of a study to the POCKET id Console.
Agreement required.
93 Use Distribution Code Depart Name
0 : Yes Handles as a distribution code. 1 : No Does not handle as a distribution code.
Specifying whether or not to handle a requesting department name as a distribution code.
Agreement required.
94 Film Size Setup
1100000000
Selecting a film size.
Agreement required.
* The selectable film sizes are 14" × 17", 26 × 36 cm, 14" × 14", 10" × 12" and 8" × 10". 95 Recept Computer Type
0 : Standard FujiFilm Standard 1 : SANYO Sanyo 2 : TOSHIBA Toshiba 3 : FUJITSU Fujitsu
Computer type for connection of a receipt computer. * To use Synapse RIS, select “0: Standard”.
Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-42
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (96 to 102 and 105) No.
Name
Selection
96 Kanji Patient’s Name No Auto Convert Not used. Yes Used.
Meaning Selecting whether or not to use a function for automatically converting to a kana patient name when a kanji patient name is input on the hospital-specified patient information input window. (Applicable only in Japan.)
For cluster connection Agreement required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR Console MINI is “Yes”. 97 Recept Computer C:\User\IIP\ReceptShare\ Info File Share Folder
Specifying a folder in which the shared information file is to be Agreement saved when a receipt computer is connected. required.
98 Recept Computer Info File Polling Interval ([sec])
1 to 300 (5)
Specifying a time interval at which the polling process is to be performed to the shared information file.
99 Recept Computer Info File Type
0 : XMLOnly Only XML is used. 1 : CSVOnly Only CSV is used. 2 : Both Both XML and CSV are used.
Specifying a file type to be handled as an information file when Agreement a receipt computer is connected. required.
100 Recept Computer Info File Temporal Folder
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Data\Reserved
Specifying a folder in which an information file where an error occurred is to be backed up when a receipt computer is connected.
101 Enable Study Reservation (Easy Operation Only)
No Not used. Yes Used.
Specifying whether or not to use the study reservation function Agreement for general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.) required.
102 Use Space Padding ID (Easy Operation Only)
No Not used. Yes Used.
Specifying whether or not to use a space-padded patient ID for Agreement general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.) required.
105 Do Next Study At Study Scren With End Button Click
Yes Used. No Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use a function that enables to start the next study with the study window displayed, when the study end button is clicked on the study window.
Agreement required.
* Interval from 1 through 4 can be set when Synapse RIS is connected. Set the interval longer than 5 when a recept computer is connected.
* To use Synapse RIS, select “0: XMLOnly”. Agreement required.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-43
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (106 to 109 and 111 to 114) No.
Name
106 Automatic Issuance patient ID
Selection Yes Issued automatically. No Not issued automatically.
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying whether or not to issue a patient ID automatically. * What is defined by the “IssuanceIdPreset.dat” file in the “C:\ Progam Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” folder applies for the automatic patient ID issuance logic. See “Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance” in “FR11: Function-specific Reference”.
107 Enable mAs Value Recalculation
Yes Recalculated. No Not recalculated.
Specifying whether or not to recalculate the mAs value using the actual PPS result edit function.
108 Xcon Format Type
0 : Old Conventional X-CON other than for mammography. 1 : Old-Expand Expanded Shimadzu X-CON format 4 : Mammo1 X-CON-1 for mammography use. 5 : Mammo2 X-CON-2 for mammography use. 6 : Mammo3 X-CON-3 for mammography use (Not used)
Specifying the X-CON type.
109 Xcon Interlock Command Transfer
Yes Transmitted. No Not transmitted.
Specifying whether or not to transmit the interlock command.
111 Xcon Serial_TX Baudrate
0 : 1200 1 : 2400 2 : 4800 3 : 9600
Specifying the X-CON serial transfer rate (unit: bit).
112 Xcon No-Response Timeout
0-255 (20)
Specifying the timeout value for response coming from the X-CON (unit: 100msec).
1 : Old-Expand is applicable to Shimadzu UD150B-40/L-40/ L-40E/L-40F models.
113 Xcon Data Reception 0-255 (20) Timeout
Specifying the timeout value for reception of data coming from the X-CON (unit: 100msec).
114 Media Auto Mount
Specifying whether or not to automatically mount the media (DVD) at CL startup.
Yes Automatically mounted. No Not mounted automatically.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-44
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (115 to 120) No.
Name
115 Synapse Host for Web Query
Selection Synapse
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying name of the Synapse server that offers the Web Query function. * Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard. * A maximum of 255 alphanumerics can be used to specify the server name.
116 Web Query Root Path
/All%20Patients
Specifying a root folder of the Synapse server to be searched for with the Web Query function. * A maximum of 128 two-bytes characters and 256 alphanumerics can be used to specify the root folder.
117 Xcon DoseValue1
0 : Average Organ Dose Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 1. 1 : Entrance Dose Assigns the exposure dose to Value 1. 2 : Dose Product Assigns the area dose to Value 1.
Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose, exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 1.
118 Xcon DoseValue2
0 : Average Organ Dose Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 2. 1 : Entrance Dose Assigns the exposure dose to Value 2. 2 : Dose Product Assigns the area dose to Value 2.
Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose, exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 2.
119 Enable Velocity Sensitivity Button
0 : No Hides all. 1 : Yes (Velocity_T Only) Displays only on the VELOCITY T. 2 : Yes (Velocity_U Only) Displays only on the VELOCITY U. 3 : Yes (Both) Displays on both the VELOCITY T and U.
Specifying whether to display or hide the high-sensitivity selection button for high-speed erasure of data on the VELOCITY.
120 Xcon No-Data Default 0 : Output Default Condition Output Outputs the default database value by setting it up to the tag. 1 : Doesn’t Output Anything Does not set up exposure-related information to the tag.
Specifying the setting for output of actual result value when it couldn’t be received from the X-CON.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-45
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (122 to 130) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
122 External Character Conversion
0 : Replace asterisk Replaces an external character with the asterisk. 1 : DataCut Cut off the kanji patient name.
Specifying how to convert unspecified external characters, used to represent a kanji patient name, that have been input from the outside, such as RIS.
123 MWM Not Received Condition Delete Study
No Study information is not deleted. Yes Study information is deleted.
Specifying whether or not to delete the study information when C-FIND-RES is notified even though the Network WL tab has not been selected.
124 Enable Clear View for Yes Mammography Enabled. No Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable mammography images to be displayed on the high-luminance view box.
125 Clear View Mode: Offset GS (100)
-288 to 288 ( -11)
Specifying an offset value ( × 100 times) to be “added” to the GS value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box.
126 Clear View Mode: Offset GA (10)
-80 to 80 ( 1)
Specifying an offset value ( × 10 times) to be “added” to the GA value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box.
127 Clear View Mode: Offset DRE (10)
-20 to 20 ( 4)
Specifying an offset value ( × 10 times) to be “added” to the DRE value when displaying a mammography image on a high-luminance view box.
For cluster connection
* To enable this option, also confirm setup values for Nos. 125 to 130.
* Specify “2” when the SL-IC300 is connected. 128 Clear View Mode: Fix DRT
A to T ( E)
Specifying a fixed value (“A” to “T”) for DRT when displaying a mammography image on a high-luminance view box. * This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is displayed on a high-luminance view box.
129 Clear View Mode: Offset MDE (10)
-20 to 20 ( 4)
Specifying an offset value ( × 10 times) to be “added” to the MDE value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box. * Specify “2” when the SL-IC300 is connected.
130 Clear View Mode: Fix A to T ( E) MDT
Specifying a fixed value (“A” to “T”) for MDT when displaying a mammography image on a high-luminance view box. * This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is displayed on a high-luminance view box.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-46
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (131 to 139) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
131 Enable MultipleStudy Yes Permitted. No Not permitted.
Specifying whether or not to permit multiple studies to start at the same time.
132 Enable SpecialPrint
Specifying whether or not to enable the special print function.
Yes Enabled. No Disabled.
For cluster connection
* Also confirm the setup value for No. 77 of PRINTER setup items.
133 Use 12on1 Film Print Yes in MediaList Used. No Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use 12on1 format output from the media list.
134 MWM StudyInstanceUID Regeneration
Yes Permitted. No Not permitted.
Specifying whether or not to permit regeneration of StudyInstanceUID for the MWM study.
135 Enable Swap Image In Order
Yes Enabled. No Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to allow study image swapping/ menu change when an order is received.
136 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2
0 to 32 ( 0) (Type in “0” if this number is not used.)
Serial port number used for the X-CON control. For Siemens mammography X-CON
137 Exposure Guidance URL
http://localhost : 8080
Top-page URL of the exposure guidance (Pico positioning guidance).
* If “Yes” is selected, normal print is disabled.
* Applicable only in Japan.
* Applicable only in Japan. 138 FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Port Number
1 to 65535 ( 5011)
139 FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Timeout
1 to 1000 ( 1000)
Port number for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive data. * Applicable only in Japan. Timeout value for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive continuous text. (Unit = msec) * Applicable only in Japan.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-47
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (140 to 148) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
140 Enable IP Use Count Yes List Enabled. No Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable list-form display of information of how many times the IP was used.
141 Enable IP Use Count Yes Reset Enabled. No Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable reset of the IP use count.
142 Xcon Serial_TX Parity
Specifying the X-CON serial transfer parity.
143 TOSHIBA-RIS IpAddress
0 : none 1 : odd 2 : even 172.16.1.20
For cluster connection
* Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of IP use count information. * Leave the setting to its default value of “No”.
[Toshiba RIS] IP address of RIS client device. 15 characters at the maximum. * Applicable only in Japan.
144 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForRIS
0 to 65535 ( 6001)
145 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForIIP
0 to 65535 ( 6000)
146 TOSHIBA-RIS RisDefaultURL
http://172.16.1.30/e-ris/java/fcr-ris.htm?logincode=tosrim
[Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (RIS side). * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (CL side). * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Default URL of RIS. 256 characters at the maximum. * Applicable only in Japan.
147 TOSHIBA-RIS TemporaryFolder
\\172.16.1.20\RisShare
[Toshiba RIS] Folder shared between RIS and CL. 256 characters at the maximum. * Applicable only in Japan.
148 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsg TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure start message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-48
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (149 to 157) No.
Name
Selection
149 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsg RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
150 TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsg TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
151 TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsg RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
152 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsg TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
153 TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsg RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
154 TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsg TimeOu
0 to 60 ( 2)
155 TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsg RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
156 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatch MsgTimeOut
0 to 60 ( 2)
157 TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsg TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 2)
Meaning
For cluster connection
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure start message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a patient list display request message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Number of retires made for sending a patient list display request message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure completion notification message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure completion notification message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a RIS termination request message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a RIS termination request message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a connection monitor message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an external input information notification message till receiving a reply from RIS. * Applicable only in Japan.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-49
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (158 to 163, 165 and 167) No.
Name
Selection
158 TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsg RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
159 TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatch MsgRetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
160 TOSHIBA-RIS IFFilesPreservation Period
0 to 365 ( 10)
161 TOSHIBA-RIS ResultType
0 : With series With series information set 1 : With no series Without series information set
Meaning [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an external input information notification message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a connection monitor message. * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Retention period for shared folder information file (days). * Applicable only in Japan. [Toshiba RIS] Type of exposure result information file. With or without series information set. * Applicable only in Japan.
0 to 120 ( 60) 162 TOSHIBA-RIS RISInitializeStartMsg TimeOut
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from initiating RIS screen till receiving a RIS initialization completion notification message.
163 Enable Auto IP Shelter for 550x
Yes Enabled. No Disabled.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Auto IP Shelter function.
165 Enable Auto Marker
Yes Used. No Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the function to automatically embed markers (lead characters) in an exposed image.
167 PDI Drive Letter
For cluster connection
* Applicable only in Japan.
Specifying an alphabetical letter assigned to the drive on the CD-R drive targeted for output by using the PDI function. * Use an alphabetical letter in capital.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-50
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (168 to 171 and 177 to 182) No.
Name
168 PDI Use CrtLut
Selection A maximum of 64 one-byte characters. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\PDI.lut
Meaning
For cluster connection
Specifying SoftcopyLUT applied to a processed image by using the PDI function. * Use the absolute path to specify the LUT filename (including extension). If it is left empty, no CrtLut processing is performed. * No extension is included in the default setting determined by software version V6.0 (B). To use the default setting from software version V6.0 (B), add extension “.lut” to the end of the filename.
169 PDI Image Density
0 : ST 1 : HQ
Specifying pixel density of a stored image by using the PDI function.
170 PDI Use Multibyte
Yes Included. No Not included.
Specifying whether or not to include multi-byte information in the DICOM contents by using the PDI function.
171 PDI Transfer Syntax
0 : Explicit VR Little Endian 1 : Jpeg Lossless
Specifying a DICOM contents transfer syntax by using the PDI function. * Select “0:Explicit VR Little Endian” if complied with IHE.
177 DAP Serial_TX Parity 0:none 1:odd 2:even 178 DAP Serial_TX 0-32 ( 0) Control port
Specifying a DAP serial transfer parity.
179 DAP Message Trial Count
1-255 ( 3)
Specifying a DAP message transfer trial count.
180 DAP Address
A
Specifying a DAP address character while a DAP is connected. (Specify a capital alphabet.)
181 Wait Time for Response. From DAP
1-30 ( 1)
Specifying a time to wait (in seconds) until a response is received after a related command was transferred to the DAP.
182 DAP Status Display Strings
A maximum of 5 one-byte characters. ( DAP)
Specifying a caption used to indicate a related status while a DAP is connected.
Specifying a DAP serial transfer control port number. (0: Not used.)
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-51
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (185 to 188) No.
Name
185 Enable Display Reverse Marker
186 Reverse Marker Position [%] (X\Y)
Selection
Meaning
Yes Enables the function to automatically display the right-andleft reverse marker. No Disables the function to automatically display the right-andleft reverse marker.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the function to automatically display the right-and-left reverse marker.
A maximum of 7 one-byte characters. ( 12\5)
Specifying relative positions of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate at the center, in relation to the width of the rightand-left reverse marker.
For cluster connection
* Determine the right-and-left reverse marker to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ReverseMarker.bmp”.
* Determining the top left as the original point, delimit the numbers from 0 to 100 with “\”. The fist figure is set to represent relative position of the X coordinate and the other that follows is to represent relative position of the Y coordinate. 187 Reverse Marker Color (Fore ColorBack Color)
0 : White-Black While - Black 1 : White-Clear White - Clear 2 : Black-White Black - White 3 : Black-Clear Black - Clear
Specifying foreground and background colors of the right-andleft reverse marker.
188 Mass Order Site Code Mapping Tag
A maximum of 49 one-byte characters. (Blank)
Specifying to which tag the site identification code, entered using the screening examination ordering function, is to be mapped.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-52
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (197 to 199, 307 and 308) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
197 Alert MSG When Patient Information will be Modified SynapseRIS
Yes Displays the message when the patient information is changed. No Dose not display the message when the patient information is changed.
Specifying whether or not to display the message when the patient information is changed at the time of connecting to Synapse RIS.
198 Grid Data Sort Order
0:String 1:Number 0:Not Overwrite 1:Overwrite
A condition for sorting records in the list window.
307 Simplified Ordering Report Share Folder
C:\Usr\IIP\OrderingReportShare\
Specifying the directory to share files of the actual result information when connecting to Synapse RIS.
308 Synapse RIS URL
http://localhost:8080
Specifying the URL to access the Synapse RIS.
199 Overwrite of the Patient Info
For cluster connection
Specifying whether or not to overwrite patient data in the local drive with the one acquired from receipt computer. (Applicable only in Japan.)
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-53
3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
Detailed explanations “31. ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup” CP850 : DOS Latin1
00000504.EPS
CP1252 : Win Latin1
00000503.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-54
3.7 Configuration Details — 7. CONFIG OPTION
3.7 Configuration Details — 7. CONFIG OPTION CONFIG OPTION setup items (2 to 7) No. 2
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
Enable Trimming Function
Yes Enables the trimming function. No Disables the trimming function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the trimming function.
3
Enable Reader QC Function
Yes Enables the Image Reader QC function. No Disables the Image Reader QC function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the Image Reader QC function.
Agreement required.
4
Enable Display Previous Study Function
Yes Enables the Scroll View function. No Disables the Scroll View function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Scroll View function (previous study monitoring function).
Agreement required.
5
Enable Synapse WebQuery
Yes Enables the Synapse Web Query function. No Disables the Synapse Web Query function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Synapse Web Query function.
6
Enable S/L Value Restriction Function
Yes Performs setting and warning. No Not to perform setting and warning.
Specifying whether or not to perform setting and warning for the allowable range of S and L values.
7
Enable RetakeAnalysis Function
Yes Enables the Retake Analysis function. No Disables the Retake Analysis function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the Retake Analysis function.
* Settings for whether the trimming function is enabled or disabled must be the same in a hospital. * Select “Yes” when “8. Enable MammoImage Alignment Function” is enabled. * The default setting at shipment from factory is “Yes” for the CR Console Lite/Plus.
Agreement required.
* Note that if the Scroll View function is enabled, you can select only delayed delivery for image delivery setting.
* To enable this option, use the log storage function offered by the User Utility to collect necessary logs beforehand. * To enable this option, specify “Yes” also for Nos. 34 and 51 of IMAGE MODALITY setup items. * Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of Retake Analysis.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-55
3.7 Configuration Details — 7. CONFIG OPTION
CONFIG OPTION setup items (8 to 10, 12 and 13) No. 8
Name
Meaning
Yes Enables the positioning function (button displayed). No Disables the positioning function (button not displayed).
Specifying whether to enable the mammography image positioning function (function button displayed accordingly) or disable it (function button not displayed).
Yes Enables 12on1 format output. No Disables 12on1 format output.
Specifying whether or not to enable 12on1 format output.
Yes Enables the exposure guidance function. No Disables the exposure guidance function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the exposure guidance function for general practitioners.
12 Enable MammoQC Function
Yes Displays the button. No Does not display the button.
Specifying whether or not to display the button to call up the Mammo QC function.
13 Enable Connecting DAP Directly
Yes Connect directly to a DAP. No Not to connect directly to a DAP.
Specifying whether or not to connect CL directly to a DAP.
9
Enable MammoImage Alignment Function
Selection
Enable 12on1 Film Print Function
10 Enable Exposure Guidance
For cluster connection
* To enable this option, also specify “Yes” for No. 2. * When “Yes” is specified for this item, set up a used MPM code using the User Utility.
* To enable this option, also confirm setup value for No. 133 of CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items and setup values for Nos. 78, 79 and 80 of PRINTER setup items.
* Applicable only in Japan.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-56
3.8 Configuration Details — 8. CONFIG QC
3.8 Configuration Details — 8. CONFIG QC CONFIG QC setup items (1 to 6) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster connection
1
Visible QC Record Delete Button
Yes Displays the button. No Does not display the button.
Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the Image Reader QC history information display window.
Agreement required.
2
Destination Path of QC Record File
E: \
Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the Image Reader QC history information display window.
Agreement required.
* The default value for V7.1(B) or earlier is “A:\”. 3
Country
0:Japanese
Shows the country (area) where this equipment is used currently.
4
Visible QCRecord Delete Button
Yes Shows the button. No Does not show the button.
Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the Mammo QC history information display window.
5
Destination Path of QC Record File
E: \
Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the Mammo QC history information display window. * The default value for V7.1(B) or earlier is “A:\”.
6
Select CSV Output Folder
1: UseQCTransferPath 2: Last Folder
Specifying how to determine an equipment unit where history information is to be stored on the Mammo QC history information display window.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-57
3.9 Configuration Details — 9. CONFIG PDA
3.9 Configuration Details — 9. CONFIG PDA
CONFIG PDA setup items (1 to 6) (Applicable only in Japan) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
1
BatteryWarning1
0 to 100 ( 30)
Specifying the timing when the first warning is given to indicate the remaining battery power. This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully charged battery to be 100.
2
BatteryWarning2
0 to 100 ( 20)
Specifying the timing when the second warning is given to indicate the remaining battery power. This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully charged battery to be 100.
For cluster connection
* When the remaining battery power is lower than the specified value, the POCKET id Console becomes inoperative. In such an instance, charge the POCKET id Console main unit properly. * Determine values for “1. BatteryWarning1” and “2. BatteryWarning2” so that “1. BatteryWarning1” > “2. BatteryWarning2”. 3
StudyFilePath
\Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job
Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the study information file is to be stored. * Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path exclusively for the POCKET id Console. * Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in “4. CustomFilePath” below.
4
CustomFilePath
\Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Custom
Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the screen customize setting file and display item setting file are to be stored. * Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path exclusively for the POCKET id Console. * Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in “3. StudyFilePath” above.
5
LoginFlag
0 : OFF Not to display the login window at startup. 1 : ON Displays the login window at startup.
Specifying whether login entry is essential or not at startup. When ON is specified, entry of technologist name and password is required every time logging onto the POCKET id Console. * Entered technologist name and password are transferred using the CR Console’s User Utility function.
6
PDAShare Interval
30 to 300 ( 60)
File sharing polling interval (sec) in PDA connection of LAN connection mode. (reserved)
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-58
3.10 Configuration Details — 10. CONFIG QR
3.10 Configuration Details — 10. CONFIG QR CONFIG QR setup items (1 to 3) No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
1
Retrieved Image Viewer Finish Mode
0 : Normal Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button) 1 : Finish After Reprint Finishes after generating reprint.
2
Reverse LUT For Processed Image
Specifying whether or not to perform LUT reverse-conversion 0 : None No Console reverse-conversion processing is performed. processing when a processed image is retrieved. 1 : SendConfigurationInformation Console reverse-conversion processing is performed on the printer side after LUT type information is sent to the printer. 2 : ApplyReverseLUT Console reverse-conversion processing is performed at the output process of the console.
3
The Patient Format : (1) family * For Search Condition *^* : (2) family, given : (3) family, given, middle *^*^* : (4) family, given, middle, prefix *^*^*^* : (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix *^*^*^*^* : (1) Multi-byte support to (1) above. *=* : (2) Multi-byte support to (2) above. *^*=*^* : (3) Multi-byte support to (3) above. *^*^*=*^*^* : (4) Multi-byte support to (4) above. *^*^*^*=*^*^*^* *^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above.
For cluster connection
Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
Specifying which element(s) of a patient name is to be matched with the search conditions. * A patient name consists of the following five elements. This setup item is to determine which of those five elements are to be matched with the search conditions. family, given, middle, prefix, suffix * “*” appearing in the selective alternatives at left represents one of the patient name elements. “^”shows delimitation between the elements, and “=”shows that multi-byte characters can be typed in.
: Default setting, *: Note
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-59
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
5.
Perform the setup steps indicated below:
This appendix explains about the procedure for changing the name element sequence and delimiter.
I
At some institutions, a patient name is displayed on the monitor by changing the sequence of its elements. For example, the name “Fuji Taro” may be displayed as “Taro Fuji” (with the given name and family name positions interchanged).
II
The DICOM protocol stipulates only one sequence of name elements. Therefore, it is necessary to define the relationship between the name element sequence stipulated by standards (or conditions) other than DICOM and the name element sequence stipulated by DICOM.
1.
Start the Service Utility of the CL.
2.
Click
3.
Click the
4.
Select a standard (condition) (e.g., FINP).
00000424.EPS
I. To validate this standard (condition) change, check it ( ). II. Enter a one-byte character delimiter between name elements.
u NOTES u Any one-byte characters can be used as a delimiter. However, a one-byte space ( ), hyphen (-), comma (,) or period (.) should normally be used.
. sign within
III
One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used as a delimiter). For instance, enter “-,” if you wish to define both of hyphen and comma. Input example: Element3=given, middle-family
.
III. Enter a multi-byte character delimiter between name elements.
u NOTES u Any one- or two-byte characters can be used as a delimiter. However, a two-byte space ( ) or hyphen (–) should normally be used. Standard (or condition)
One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used as a delimiter). For instance, enter “–” if you wish to define both of two-byte space and hyphen. Input example: Element3=given – middle family
00000423.EPS
IMPORTANT Do not change the settings for “DICOM_MWM_PPS”, “DICOM_IN”, or “DICOM_OUT”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-60
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function
6.
Set up name elements for one-byte characters. Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 4. above. One name element (family (name)) Two name elements (family given) Three name elements (family given middle) Four name elements (family given middle prefix)
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function When a printer targeted for DIOCM printout has a multiple number of BIN (sorter), film output is possible to different BINs accordingly depending on the requirement. In the procedure described herein, the printer targeted for DICOM printout is the “FM-DP L” and the requirement (recognition key) for film output to each BIN is the equipment identification code (DEV_CODE), as illustrated below. u Setup example
Five name elements (family given middle prefix suffix)
BIN1
MU000010.EPS
7.
BIN2 FM-DPL
Set up name elements for multi-byte characters. Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 5. above. One name element (family (name)) Two name elements (family given) Three name elements (family given middle) Four name elements (family given middle prefix) Five name elements (family given middle prefix suffix)
RU-1
Equipment identification code : A BIN setting : 1
Use the “Configuration (F)” menu to save the setup data.
RU-3
B 2
C 2
CL 00000400.EPS
Described below is the setup procedure.
1.
Start up CL Service Utility mode.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
3.
Select and from the tree on the left-hand side of the window. Select then the DICOM print AE name (“fujiprinter” - “DICOM” “FM-DP L”). The AE setup window for the FM-DP L opens on the right-hand side of the window.
MU000011.EPS
8.
RU-2
4.
Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-61
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function
5.
7.
Make the following selections and entry.
Select
.
I
II III
00000055.EPS
I. Select “BIN_I”. II. Select a recognition key (e.g.: DEV_CODE). (Indent for REQ_SRV, MPM and BODY_PART.) III. Enter a BIN number (e.g.: 1).
REFERENCE In the Default Bin Number box, specify the default BIN number to which the film is to be output when an input number verification is not possible.
6.
Click
00000054.EPS
The right-hand side of the window changes to the film sorting setup list.
8.
Click
.
The “Film Sorting” window opens.
.
You are returned to the previous window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-62
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function
9.
The window below shows the results of setup example presented at the beginning of this section.
Make the following selections and entries.
I
II
III 00000053.EPS 00000052.EPS
I. Select the AE name. II. Enter a verification data item. When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is “DEV_ CODE”, enter an equipment identification code (e.g.: A, B or C). When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is “REQ_ SRV*”, enter a requesting department name (e.g.: Radio). When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is “MPM*”, enter an MPM code (e.g.: 0200). When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is “BODY_ PART*”, enter an anatomical region (e.g.: CHEST). (Note that “*” indicates an indent.) III. Enter a BIN number.
10. Click
.
You are returned to the previous window.
11. To set up other verification data items continuously, repeat steps 8. to 10 . above.
12. Use the “Configuration” menu to save the setup data.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-63
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
5.
Enter settings as directed below:
The patient information sharing function is exercised to share the patient information between two or more CLs and IDT-IV units existing in the same network.
I
In compliance with an ID inquiry (IP barcode) coming from the Image Reader, the relevant CL will acquire requested ID information from any IDT-IV or CL even when that CL has no such information.
II
When the IDT-IV and CLs are interconnected as shown below, the patient information sharing function is set up to enable the units (e.g., idt4-a and cl-a) to share the patient information.
III IV
u Connection example group-A idt4-a
group-B 172.16.1.101
172.16.1.201
idt4-b GateWay
cl-a
V 172.16.1.102
172.16.1.202
00000555.EPS
I. II. III. IV.
cl-b 00000549.EPS
Enter the host name. Enter the IP address. Select a machine attribute. Specify the group name.
u NOTE u
The setup procedure is described below:
1.
Start the CL’s Service Utility.
When you specify the group name for the first time, the GroupName field contains no entry. Therefore, enter a group name from the keyboard.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
V. When you define the machine as a gateway, check
3.
Click
u NOTE u
.
When the patient information is to be shared by groups, it is necessary to define one unit of each group as the gateway (check ).
The right-hand area of the window changes to the “CONFIG\IDT CONNECTING” window.
4.
Click
.
The “IDT Connection” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
.
6.
Click
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-64
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input
7.
To set up another machine, repeat steps 4. through 6.
8.
With the “Config (F)” menu, save the setup data.
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input When the MAC address cannot automatically be acquired, this utility is used to make a manual entry and let the CL recognize it.
The window shown below indicates the results that are obtained when the equipment is set up as indicated in the connection example at the beginning of this section.
u NOTE u If the MAC address is not acquired, the CL-AP does not start up (Error 20110 or 20111 occurs). When the following window opens and indicates that the values in the MAC address fields are all 0s, it means that the MAC address is not automatically acquired. In such an instance, enter a 12-digit value (00:50:DA:C4:D5:8D when only one CL is used). The next time the CL starts up, it recognizes the entered value as the MAC address so that the CL-AP starts running. If two or more CLs are used, make the following entries. For each CL addition, increment the last two-digit value by one (in hexadecimal notation).
00000556.EPS
2nd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8E 3rd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8F 4th unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 90
MU000008.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-65
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup Setup of the log information sharing function enables you to use the Retake Analysis function and IP use count calculation function.
u NOTE u
6.
Click
7.
To register other CLs successively, repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the setup data.
.
To make use of the Retake Analysis function, the “OpRetakeAnalysis” option key must be installed.
■ New setup Described below is the procedure used to newly set up host name and IP address of the CL with which the log information is to be shared.
1.
Start up the CL Service Utility.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
3.
Click
4.
Click
. .
The “Log Share” window opens.
5.
Enter settings as directed below.
I II
I. Enter the host name. II. Enter the IP address. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
00000565.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-66
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
■ Deleting unnecessary settings
■ Changing settings
1.
Start up the CL Service Utility.
Described below is the procedure used to change host names and IP addresses of other CLs with which the log information is to be shared.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
NOTE
3.
Click
Host name and IP address of this equipment are only to be displayed and cannot be changed.
4.
On the right-hand side pane of the window, select a CL name to be deleted and then click [Delete].
.
1.
Start up the CL Service Utility.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
3.
Click
4.
Select host name and IP address of the CL targeted for change.
5.
Click
.
.
The “Log Share” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
6.
Change host name and IP address appropriately.
7.
Click
8.
To change settings of other CLs successively, repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the setup data.
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-67
4. Display Optimization — LUT
4. Display Optimization — LUT
TPS 9415 TD15 TPS 9416 TD15
Install an LUT file that matches the display characteristics.
TPS 9416TD15_2
REFERENCE
PRESTO! (B/W)
The LUT file is used to adjust luminance values measured on an image displayed on the monitor.
PRESTO! (Color)
1.
Start the CL’s Service Utility.
ikegami MDM2130 nanao L350P
2.
Click [LUT].
nanao L351P
The “Monitor List” window opens.
3.
Select the connected display and then click
.
Select the connected display monitor type.
nanao SL-IC200 nanao L362T Linear LUT nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG nanao Radiforce R31 nanao L568M nanao L560T-C
: 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS9415TD15/G2) : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS9416TD15/H2) : 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 (monochrome) : Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 (color) : Ikegami 1k landscape monitor : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L350P-TS) : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L351P-TS) : LCD SL-IC200 : EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L362T) : Linear (straight line gradation) LUT : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (monochrome monitor)
: LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor) : 17" color LCD monitor (model L568) : EIZO 17" LCD monitor with a touch panel (model L560T-C) nanao Radiforce G22-CL: LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor) nanao Radiforce GS220 : LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor) : LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor) nanao Radiforce GS310-ECN nanao Radiforce RX320 : LCD monitor (3M color monitor)
Settings are thus completed, and the system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window. IN000129.EPS
u NOTE u To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08 or earlier, install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD monitor. [Installation procedures] Copy the lut.txt and nanao_L351P.env files on the FD to the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\lut” folder (overwrite the lut.txt file).
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-68
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup For details of procedures used for restoring the configuration file, see “14. Restoring the CL-Config” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
1.
4.
The system returns to the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
5.
Click
.
u NOTES u • Even when the save process ends, no message appears to indicate it. While the save process is being performed, the mouse cursor is replaced by the “ ” mark. When the “ ” mark changes back to the mouse cursor, it means that the save process is ended. Note, however, that the “ ” mark appears only when the mouse cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
Click [Configuration Restore/Backup] on the main menu. The configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
2.
Select a save destination directory and then click .
Click [...] for the Configuration Backup area.
• If, on the PC where an FD is used, a message appears prompting you to change the FD, insert a new FD into the PC.
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the main menu. 00000417.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
3.
Click the downward arrow mark (
) within in the “Drive:” box to
select the drive onto which the configuration file is to be saved. The “Directory:” box shows the directory structure of the selected drive.
REFERENCE If drive “a” is selected, a message appears to prompt for the insertion of an FD. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-69
6. Retrieving EDR Data — Retrieve EDR Backup Data
6. Retrieving EDR Data — Retrieve EDR Backup Data 1.
2.
Select one or more EDR data. When selecting only one piece of EDR data I. Select an EDR data item by clicking it. The selected item becomes highlighted.
Click [Retrieve EDR Backup Data] on the main menu.
When selecting two or more contiguous EDR data (selecting all data between “A” and “B” in the window illustration below)
A list of EDR data appears.
A B EDR data list
00000068.EPS
00000067.EPS
REFERENCE No EDR data appears immediately after installation. EDR data listings do not appear until images are transferred to the CL.
I.
Click the first item of a set of contiguous data (“A002” in the above window illustration). The selected item becomes highlighted.
II. Hold down the “Shift” key and click the last item (“A006” in the above window illustration) of the contiguous data set. All the items from the first to the last become highlighted.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-70
6. Retrieving EDR Data — Retrieve EDR Backup Data
4.
When selecting two or more noncontiguous EDR data
Click the downward arrow mark (
) within
in the “Drive” box to select the drive onto which the EDR data is to be saved. The left-hand area of the window shows the directory structure of the selected drive.
A B
5.
Select the save destination directory and then click .
C
REFERENCE If drive “a” is selected, a message appears to prompt for the insertion of an FD.
00000069.EPS
I.
Click the first item to be selected (“A002” in the above window illustration).
When the save process ends, the system returns to the Retrieve EDR Backup Data window.
The selected item becomes highlighted. II. Hold down the “Ctrl” key and click the second item to be selected (“A004” in the above window illustration). The second item becomes highlighted as well. III. Hold down the “Ctrl” key and click the third item to be selected (“A006” in the above window illustration).
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the main menu.
The third item becomes highlighted as well. IV. To select any additional item, repeat step III.
REFERENCE Even if highlighted items are hidden when the window scrolls, they are retained as selected items.
3.
Click
.
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
MU-71
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection 1.
2.
Verify the Ping or DICOM connection as directed below: Verifying the connection with the Ping I.
Click [Verify Connection] on the main menu.
In the
field, enter the host
name or IP address of the equipment to be subjected to connection verification.
The “Verify Connection” window opens.
REFERENCE Clicking the downward arrow mark
within
lists the host names of equipment registered in the Service Utility. II. Click
.
The command prompt window opens. III. Verify the connection. The connection is normal when the following message is displayed four times within the command prompt window. 00000070.EPS
Reply from 172.16.1.20: bytes=32 time 0x01 Result (0x00) 2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R TransferSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.1.2"
V. VI.
2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R (0040,0007) 14(0xe) LO 2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R
I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII.
-> "CHEST, PA/LAT"
Date and time of a data transmission by CL or other connected equipment CL association Information about the transmitter (broker S = CL, broker R = other connected equipment) Detailed information (transmitted by CL) Connected equipment association Detailed information (transmitted by connected equipment) Tag information
VII.
FR000014.EPS
REFERENCE The data to be recorded varies with selected log mode. Mode 1 records the logged data about associations only (only the second and fifth lines in the above figure). Mode 2 records the entire logged data. Mode 0 records nothing. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR4-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR4-4
Display Gradation Correction Setup
Display Gradation Correction Setup The display gradation correction setup procedure is performed to optimize the appearance of images displayed on other manufacturer’s viewer when they are transmitted from the CL.
Setup procedure With the Service Utility, perform gradation correction setup as directed below.
1.
This section explains about the LUT file handling and Service Utility setup procedures to be performed for gradation correction purposes.
Start the Service Utility mode and open the gradation correction setup window (LUT Operation). For the procedure for opening the setup window, see “2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function” under “CL + Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)” in “OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
u NOTE u For image display optimization, it is necessary to use a LUT file that is created with Fuji’s CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use with other manufacturer’s viewer. Create such a LUT file beforehand. For how to create a LUT file, see “FCR Diagnostic Image Display Gradation Correction Procedure” in the MONITOR QC Service Manual.
2.
In the setup window (LUT Operation on the DICOM Setup screen), select a LUT transmission type. I. II.
To use the LUT Operation function from software version V5.0(B) or later, a 16bitLUT file is required.
III. IV. V.
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see “1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool”.
Handling the LUT file Create a LUT file with Fuji’s CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use with other manufacturer’s viewer. Copy this file to the CL’s specified folder and change its name. Copy destination : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder Filename : “SCP AE name”+.lut (e.g., ViewerA.lut)
u NOTE u For Siemens’ viewer, use the LUT file (siemens.lut) that is stored in the following folder on the CL. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\siemens.lut Be sure to change the filename (to “SCP AE name”+.lut).
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
VI. FR050001.EPS
I.
Choose this option when outgoing images are not to be subjected to gradation correction. II. Choose this option when outgoing images are corrected on the CL for gradation and then transmitted as DICOM-processed images.
u NOTE u Option II. is selectable only when the processed image transmission option key is installed in the CL and DICOM CR Storage setup is completed for processed image transmission. III. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (Modality LUT module/0028,3000) is to be added to outgoing images so that they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected equipment (Kodak, etc.).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-1
Display Gradation Correction Setup
IV. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT module/0028,3010) is to be added to outgoing images so that they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected equipment. V. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT module/0028,3010) is to be added to outgoing images so that they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected equipment. The sending LUT used for this purpose is the one that includes gradation processing data. This option can be selected only for handling of 12bit processed images.
V. Enter “1” in the “Value data” field.
NOTE
VI. Click
FR000057.EPS
The screen goes back to the “Registry Editor” window.
When using the V. option, above, a 16bitLUT file is required. Save a 16bitLUT file in “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut”.
VII. Close Registry Editor (Regedit). VIII. Start the Service Utility mode and open the aforementioned setup window (LUT Operation of the DICOM Setup screen).
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see “1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool”.
IX. Locate
VI. Choose this option when the connected equipment used is manufactured by Siemens. By default, this option is hidden. To show this option, perform the procedure indicated in the next step.
3.
X. Check this option (
(
).
This option is hidden by default. To check this option, you must first set the system to show it. The procedure is described below.
i n the window.
).
u NOTE u Do not check this option when the 12bit image output setting is used.
If the connected equipment used is manufactured by Siemens, check
.
4.
Save the setup data and then exit the Service Utility mode.
I. Exit the Service Utility mode. II. Open Registry Editor (Regedit). III. In the “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\FujiFilm\IIP” folder, create a DWORD value named “ModlutDisplay”. IV. Double-click
.
The “Edit DWORD Value” dialog box opens.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-2
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool This section explains the “LUT Bit Conversion Tool” commands and operations. This tool uses “PowerTools Olectra Ver6.0” runtime module. Olectra Chart Copyright © 2000 ComponentOneLLC
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion Tool ■ Operation environment Use a PC that meets the following requirements. OS
Windows XP SP2 Windows 2000 SP4
■ Functions and overview The “LUT Bit Conversion Tool” converts a 10bitLUT file to a 10 – 16bitLUT file. Activating this tool displays the following window (“main menu” hereinafter).
I II V III
VII VI
IV VI FR050002.EPS
■ Required program The “LUT Bit Conversion Tool” consists of the following files. Conv10bitLUT.exe (LUT conversion program) ConvLUTGraph.exe (Program to show graph of an LUT file after conversion.) Olch2x32.ocx
I
II
Input File
Specifies a 10bitLUT file targeted for conversion. (Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\*.lut)
Output File
Specifies location of storage and filename of a converted LUT file. The folder where the file specified in I, above, is located, plus Result.txt are displayed as the default path. (Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Result.txt)
(Component necessary for executing the LUT conversion program.) III Algorithm
IV
Bit number after Enters a bit number (10 – 16) after data conversion the converting processing.
V
Start of data conversion
Starts data conversion processing.
VI
Graphical representation
Shows a graph of a converted LUT file.
VII Exit
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Selects an algorithm used for data conversion. cubic spline interpolation : Bit processing implemented using the cubic spline. B spline interpolation : Bit conversion implemented using the B spline.
Exits the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-3
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool ■ Starting the tool
1.
Execute “Conv10bitLUT.exe”.
■ Exiting the tool
1.
Select “Exit” on the main menu window.
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File Described herein is the procedure for converting a 10bitLUT file to an LUT file of the specified bit number.
1.
Start the “LUT Bit Conversion Tool”.
2.
Make the following settings. I II III IV FR050003.EPS
I. II. III. IV.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Specify a 10bitLUT file targeted for data conversion. Specify location of storage and filename of a converted LUT file. Select an algorithm used for data conversion. Enter a bit number after data conversion processing. (Enter 16 for an LUT used with V5.0(B) or later).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-4
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File
3.
Click
.
➔ When data conversion processing is complete, a window like that shown below opens.
6.
Verify the graph.
7.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the main menu window.
8.
Exit the “LUT Bit Conversion Tool”.
FR050004.EPS
4.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the main menu window.
5.
Click
.
➔ Data of an LUT file subjected to bit conversion processing is represented by a graph.
FR050005.EPS
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR5-8
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens)
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens) NOTE For the CR Console Lite, the CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT FOR LITE option key needs to be installed. A character string can be embedded in a tag in accordance with an input image MPM code. To do this, open the setup file (TagLookup.ini) and describe an MPM code for character string embedding and the tag into which a character string is to be embedded. The procedure is described below.
1.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Configuration” folder.
2.
With Notepad (Notepad), open the TagLookup.ini file.
REFERENCE
TagLookup.ini file format I. Comment ; DICOM-Tag editing function setup ; [DICOM] [00181401,00081030]
“0301”=“TEST1” “0302”=“TEST2” I. II. III.
3.
Write the settings in the file in compliance with the format explained later.
IV.
4.
Save the TagLookup.ini file in text format and then close Notepad (Notepad).
V.
The TagLookup.ini file uses “Unicode” characters. Therefore, be sure to use Notepad as an editor and save the edited file in Unicode format. The backup function of Service Utility version A08 does not back up the TagLookup.ini file. Perform a manual backup/restore procedure by, for instance, selecting the TagLookup.ini file directly and saving it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
III. MPM code tag and character string embedding tag IV. MPM code V. Character string FR000015.EPS
By default, nothing is written in the TagLookup.ini file.
u NOTES u
II. Protocol type
Comment Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) is handled as a comment. Protocol type The name of the protocol to be edited must be written within square brackets ([ ]). Only DICOM is supported. MPM code tag and character string embedding tag Describe an MPM code tag (fixed at 00181401) on the left-hand side. Describe a character string embedding tag on the righthand side. Separate these two entries with a comma (,). III. and IV. can be combined to set up two or more III. and IV. items using different tags. MPM code Describe an MPM code for character string embedding. You can describe one or more MPM codes. Character string Describe the character string to be embedded in the tag. Be sure to enclose the character string in double-quotation marks (“”).
When an image having MPM code “0301” is entered in situations where the settings indicated in the above example are used, an output will be generated with the character string “TEST1” embedded in the 00081030 tag (Study Description).
u NOTES u • For the detailed information about Fuji Private tags, see “DICOM Conformance Statement”. • Because the TagLookup.ini file is applied after the TagReplace.ini file, settings performed by the TagLookup.ini file take effect if values have been set up for the same tag.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR6-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR6-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR6-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR6-4
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function
4.
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function To change data items to be stored in a log, edit on Microsoft Access 2000 the “ExposureResultLog.mdb” setup file backed up using the Service Utility function. You can change log items in the check boxes of the “EntryFlag” column on the “ExposureResult” table. The necessary procedure is described as follows. Edit the “ExposureResultLog.mdb” setup file on a different PC.
1.
Use Microsoft Access to open the “ExposureResultLog. mdb” file.
2.
Open the “Exposure Result” table.
3.
Turn on/off check boxes in the “EntryFlag” column accordingly.
Use either of the following procedures to revert the modified “ExposureResultLog.mdb” file to the CL-PC’s previous directory. Restore the setup file. Copy the modified “ExposureResultLog.mdb” file to the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param” folder.
u NOTE u Note that if there are a lot of log items, the number of data items that can be stored in the log will be smaller.
To add a log item, check the relevant check box. To delete a log item, uncheck the relevant check box.
FR000059.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR7-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR7-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR7-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR7-4
Wake-on-LAN Setup
2.
Wake-on-LAN Setup
Enter “11” and press the key. The installer starts running and the “FF-WakeOnLAN Setup” window opens.
This section describes the setup procedure for the “Wake on LAN” function, which automatically starts the Image Reader upon CL startup.
u NOTES u • Only the CR-IR364 can be automatically started by the “Wake on LAN” function. • Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
3.
Click
.
The “FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Choose Destination Location” window opens.
Installing the Wake-on-LAN Utility
1.
FR000060.EPS
4.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
Click
.
The “FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Start Copying Files” window opens.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
5.
Click
.
The installation process starts. Upon completion of installation, the “Setup complete” window opens.
6.
Click
.
FR000061.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR8-1
Wake-on-LAN Setup
Registering other connected equipment
REFERENCE As regards the CR-IR364, the MAC address can be obtained with the maintenance utility.
Perform the following procedure to register other connected equipment to be started automatically:
1.
From the
menu, choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”,
and “FF-WakeOnLAN Utility”.
4.
Click
.
The system returns you to the previous window.
The Wake-on-LAN Utility starts up.
FR000063.EPS
2.
FR000065.EPS
From the “Edit” menu, choose “Register”. The other connected equipment registration window opens.
3.
Perform the following setup steps:
5.
To register another connected equipment, repeat steps 2. through 4.
6.
Perform the following steps to verify the automatic startup process: I. Put other connected equipment on standby. II. Select other connected equipment from the list, and then click
I
. III. Click II
IV
7.
III
.
After verifying startup process for other connected equipment, click to exit the Wake-on-LAN utility.
FR000062.EPS
I.
Enter MAC address (e.g., 11-AB-CD-EF-AB-CD) of other connected equipment. II. Enter IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.10) of other connected equipment. III. Enter host name (e.g., ru0) of other connected equipment. IV. Make sure that “Enable” is checked. (If you intend to register other connected equipment but do not want it to automatically start up, uncheck “Enable”.) 010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Verifying the automatic startup process
1.
Put other connected equipment on standby and then restart the CL.
2.
Verify other connected equipment starts up the moment the CL starts up.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR8-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR8-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR8-4
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. The main menu of the “IIP Setup Tool” opens automatically.
NOTE
When the software is upgraded from version A10 or earlier to version A11, all the GPR processing parameters for existing exposure menus are disabled. Whether a grid is used or not is automatically checked for so that the GPR process is performed only when it is needed. Therefore, the GPR function should be disabled for menus that will never use the grid for making exposures, and enabled for the other menus. Software version A11 additionally incorporates a function for performing the above setup procedure (enabling/disabling the GPR process). When the GPR option is newly added for use with software version A11 or later, perform the setup procedure. To change the GPR process setup, use a menu provided by the “IIP Setup Tool”, which is supplied on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2). The procedure is described below:
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
FR000077.EPS
2.
Enter “40” and press the key. The “GPR Default Parameter Setup Menu” opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR9-1
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup
3.
Enter “1” (for the Japanese version) or “2” (for a nonJapanese version), and then press the key. The system sets the GPR processing parameters.
When you perform the above procedure, the following MPM code menus are disabled (turned OFF) and the other menus are enabled (turned ON). If the resulting setup does not meet the operating conditions for a specific institution, manually adjust it accordingly. Japan
U.S.
Other countries
Breast menu
?3??
?3??
?3??
Test menu
?9??
?9??
?9??
Treatment menu
7 ? 0B, 7 ? 1B
–
–
Pneumoconiosis menu
0210
–
–
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR9-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR9-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR9-4
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR10-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR10-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR10-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR10-4
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance Rules applied when automatically issuing patient ID can be set up as follows. Open the setup file (IssuanceIdPreset.dat) to describe elements (such as study date, auto increment function, etc.) to be included in the automatically issued patient ID.
NOTE To use the screening examination order issuance function for version V7.1(B) or later, the “IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat” setup file is used. Perform necessary operations reading the description presented herein for it accordingly.
u NOTES u The IssuancePreset.dat file uses “Unicode” characters. Therefore, be sure to use NotePad as an a editor and save the edited file in the Unicode format. The backup function of Service Utility does not back up the IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat files. Perform a manual backup/restore procedure by, for instance, selecting the IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file directly and saving them on media, such as FD, USB memory stick. However in V8.1(B) or later, IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file is backed up in Service Utility.
IssuanceIdPreset.dat file format Elements
1.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” folder.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file.
REFERENCE The default IssuanceIdPreset.dat file includes the following description. “System ID (alphanumerics)” + “study date (year, month, day)” + “a five-digit serial number” are issued following the automatic issuance rules. For IssuanceIdPreset.dat %SystemID(0)%%Date(“YYMMDD”)%%AutoInc(“A”,5,0,99999,1,1)% For IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat %SystemID(0)%%Date(“YYMMDD”)%%AutoInc(“AutoIncID”,5,1,99999,1,1)%
3.
Describe the settings in the file in compliance with the format explained below.
4.
Save the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file in the text format and close NotePad.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Elements
Elements
%SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("A",5,0,99999,1,1)%
A
B
A
B
A
B
A : Character string component B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule)
FR110001.eps
IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file format Elements
Elements
Elements
%SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("AutoIncID",5,1,99999,1,1)%
A
B
A
B
A
A : Character string component B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule)
B
FR190001.ai
NOTE If format of the ID issuance setup file is invalid (when the applicable restrictions are not observed appropriately), a relevant message appears at CL-AP startup. In such cases, correct the setup file format as necessary. Note however that even if the format is invalid, it is converted into fixed values internally and the CL-AP, as a result, starts up.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR11-1
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdPreset.dat) Display item
Component
How to set up the identifier
Setup example
System ID
%SystemID(Type)%
Type (numerical value) 0 : Alphabet (A to Z) 1 : Numerics (1 to 26) The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will be used.
%SystemID(0)%
Date
%Date(Format)%
Format (character string) “YY” : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004) “yy” : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04) “GG” : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16) “MM” : A two-digit number representing the month. “DD” : A two-digit number representing the day.
%Date(“YYMMDD”)%
Time
%Time(Format)%
Format (character string) %Time(“HHMM”)% “HH” : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation) “MM” : A two-digit number representing the minute. “SS” : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)% string
String (character string) Enter single-byte characters. Do not use multi-byte characters, “*” (one-byte character) and “@” (one-byte character).
User-defined %UFix(ID, Max)% character string
%UFix(“B”,4)% ID (character string) Enter an identifier for user-defined character strings. Set a value different from the auto increment identifier. If an identifier same as to the auto increment identifier is set, the two same values will be set up. Max (numerical value) Enter the maximum character string length.
%Fix(“FUJI”)%
* Elements for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script. : Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string) Order (numerical value) : (serial numbers) Count, Reset)% Min (numerical value) : Max (numerical value) :
Auto increment identifier %AutoInc(“A”,4,0,9999,1,1)% The number of digits. (≤6) Minimum value. (≥0) Maximum value. (≤999999) [When reaching the maximum value, it will be reset to the minimum value.] Count (numerical value) : Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value) Reset (select one of the following) : Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP startup. 0 : Not to reset. 1 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup. 2 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup only when the specified date is different from that of the last issuance. * Set the value so that Max > Min. * Components for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR11-2
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat) Display item
Component
How to set up the identifier
Setup example
System ID
%SystemID(Type)%
Type (numerical value) 0 : Alphabet (A to Z) 1 : Numerics (1 to 26) The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will be used.
%SystemID(0)%
Date
%Date(Format)%
Format (character string) “YY” : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004) “yy” : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04) “GG” : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16) “MM” : A two-digit number representing the month. “DD” : A two-digit number representing the day.
%Date(“YYMMDD”)%
Time
%Time(Format)%
Format (character string) %Time(“HHMM”)% “HH” : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation) “MM” : A two-digit number representing the minute. “SS” : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)% string
String (character string) Enter single-byte characters. Do not use multi-byte characters, “*” (one-byte character) and “@” (one-byte character).
%Fix(“FUJI”)%
User-defined %UFix(ID, Max)% character string
ID (character string) Make sure to specify “SiteCode”. It should not be the same as the registry key name determined based on the conventional automatic ID issuance function. Max (numerical value) Always specify “64”.
%UFix(“SiteCode”,64)%
* Elements for a maximum of one user-defined character string can be set up in one script. : Auto increment identifier Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string) * Always specify “AutoIncID”. (Fixed value) (serial numbers) Count, Reset)% Order (numerical value) : The number of digits. (≤6) * Do not determine “0” (=variable). Min (1) : Minimum value * Always determine “1”. (Fixed value) Max (99···9) : Maximum value (99···9) * Always determine “99···9”. The displayed number of digits should be in accordance with the value determined for Order above. (Fixed value) Count (1) : Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value) * Always determine “1”. (Fixed value) Reset (1) : Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP startup. * Always determine “0” (=Not to reset). (Fixed value)
%AutoInc(“AutoIncID”,5,1,99 999,1,1)%
* Only one auto increment character string component can be set up in one script. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR11-3
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
■ Invalidated Service Utility settings
u NOTE u The configuration setting for character string of a patient ID must be longer than a character string issued automatically according to “17. Patient ID Length” of “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “Setup Configuration Item” - “SYSTEM CONFIG”.
■ Service Utility settings
In case the auto ID issuance function was determined to be activated, the following items that can be determined using the Service Utility will become invalidated. For details of the setting items, see “3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
Table Invalidated CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting items
The “site identification code” included in the order information can be stored additionally in any of the DICOM tags. The setting item is as follows.
No. 18
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting item
21 29
No. 188
Name Selection Mass Order Site A maximum of 49 one-byte Code Mapping characters. Tag (Blank)
Meaning Specifying to which tag the site identification code, entered using the screening examination order function, is to be mapped. (Description example) 0038,0500
NOTES If format of the determined value is invalid, a relevant message appears at CL startup, causing thus the startup to be unsuccessful. In such cases, correct the setup file format appropriately.
56
80 83 93 106
Name Patient ID Padding Method
Remarks Changing to any desired setting is disabled. ExposureListErase Preset exposure menus must be used. StudyNumberType No accession numbers are issued automatically. EnablePatientDB If this function is activated, the patient database is managed by newly added automatically issued patient ID history database. Enable Auto Menu Creation If this function is activated, no studies are started with exposure menus remaining unregistered. DefaultReqService UseDistributionCodeDepartName IssuanceIdNumber User Utility settings must be observed.
If it is not determined (initial setting), the site identification code will not be stored in the DICOM tag.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR11-4
Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR12-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR12-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR12-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR12-4
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing Exposure menus applicable to auto shuttering processing have been added with software version V3.0(B). To use the auto shuttering processing with version V3.0(B) or later, enable the processing for those exposure menus by using an automatic setup tool provided with software version V3.0(B). To use the automatic setup tool, open first “IIP Setup Tool” menus incorporated in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and then follow the steps below.
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. ➔ The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu will open automatically.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
2.
Type in “41” and press the key. ➔ “Mask Processing Default Parameter Setup Menu” opens.
FR130002.EPS
3.
Type in “1” and press the key. ➔ Shuttering processing parameters will then be set up.
Performing the above steps will inactivate (OFF) the auto shuttering processing for the following MPM code menus and activate (ON) the same processing for other menus. Manually set up shuttering processing appropriately if the automatic setup will result in settings unsuitable to your customers. Table List of MPM codes that turn auto shuttering processing OFF Menu TEST Menu RMI156 (only in Japan) Treatment Menu (only in Japan) BREAST, SPOT PARANASAL SINUS EAR PARANASAL SINUS: C PARANASAL SINUS: T EAR: T EAR-2DIV (only in Japan)
MPM Code ?9?? 73?9 7??B 03?1 00?1 00?B 10?2 20?0 20?1 60?A
FR130001.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR13-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR13-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR13-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR13-4
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
1.
Perform the following settings.
For Windows 2000/XP • Select [Run...] from the
menu.
➔ The “Run...” window opens.
LUT reverse-conversion processing needs to be set up if images to be queried/retrieved from the DICOM server may go through FCR image processing and LUT processing on the server side. LUT reverse-conversion processing can be implemented by either of the following: Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the CL so that reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on the CL side. Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the DICOM printer so that reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on the printer side, based on the LUT type information transferred to the printer. Shown below are the two separately described setup procedures.
FR140002.EPS
For Windows Vista menu sequentially select “All • From the Programs”, “Accessories” and “Run…”.
NOTE
➔ The “Run...” window opens.
To select a desired procedure, see “3.10 Configuration Details — 10. CONFIG QR” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
■ LUT reverse-conversion processing on the CL ● Creation of the LUT reverse-conversion file Reverse-conversion processing requires the LUT reverse-conversion file. Shown below is the procedure used to create it.
NOTE When the CL is up and running, shut the CL down while holding down the button to have the system being at ordinary Windows status.
F140005.ai
2.
Type in “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\CreateLUT. exe” for the execution filename and click . ➔ A window like that shown below opens.
F140001.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)]
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR14-1
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
3.
● Settings required on the CL
Perform the following steps. I
II F140003.EPS
I.
Use the absolute path to specify an input file in the [Input File] box. Click of [LUT used in outputting processed image:], and then select an output LUT file (“receiver AE name” + .lut). II. Enter “10” for software version V6.0 (B) or earlier. Enter “16” for software version V7.0 (B) or earlier.
NOTE Do not change [Output File] and [InBit (10-16)].
4.
After the LUT file is created for reverse-conversion processing, perform necessary settings on the CL. Start the Service Utility, select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverse LUT For Processed Image, and select “2: ApplyReverse LUT”. For the CL setup procedure, see “CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)” under “OE20: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
■ LUT reverse-conversion processing on the DICOM printer Reverse-conversion processing on the printer requires setting on both the printer and CL sides
● Settings required on the printer side Have an LUT reverse-conversion table be ready on the DICOM printer side. Necessary settings are to be performed on the reverse-conversion table thus created.
NOTE Click
.
➔ The LUT reverse-conversion file is created. ➔ A dialog opens to show that the file has been created successfully.
For how to set up/format the table file, see the manual provided for each printer.
● Settings required on the CL side Start the Service Utility and set up the items below appropriately. FR140004.EPS
5.
Click
to close the dialog, and click [Exit].
➔ The tool shuts down, closing then the “Create LUT for Processed Images” window.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverser LUT For Processed Image and select “1: SendConfigurationInformation”. Use Network setting to specify printer LUT type information for the AE that serves as the StudyRootRetriever service class Provider. For details of the CL setup procedure, see “CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)” under “OE20: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR14-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR14-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR14-4
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR15-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR15-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR15-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR15-4
Accession Number Data Truncation Function
Accession Number Data Truncation Function When generating image output using the DICOM Storage function, it is possible to partially truncate tag information of an Accession Number and patient ID. To edit tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataCut.ini). Following is the setup procedure to perform.
➤ IMPORTANT When you are using this function, always obtain user’s agreement by fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked.
■ “TagCharDataCut.ini” file format ; TagCharDataCut ; [AE] ; Tag=Position, Length ; ******************* [AEName1] 00080050=1,3 00100020=TAIL,1 00080050=1,3 [AEName2] 00080050=3,3
I. II. III.
“TagReplace.ini” > “TagLookup.ini” > “TagCharDataCut.ini” > “TagCharDataAdd.ini” When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority are applied. See “■ Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other” under “Accession Number Character String Adding Function”.
1.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” folder.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the “TagCharDataCut.ini” file.
3.
According to the format shown below, edit the file.
4.
Save the “TagCharDataCut.ini” file in the text format and close NotePad.exe.
NOTE Be sure to use NotePad to edit the “TagCharDataCut.ini” file and save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based on the “Unicode” characters. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
II. AE name III. Tag IV. Position to start
truncation V. Number of characters to be truncated FR160001.EPS
NOTE Tag settings are applied in order of priority:
I. Comment
IV.
V.
Comment Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment. AE name Describe an AE name targeted for data truncation by putting it between brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed. Tag Describe a tag targeted for data truncation. Only “Accession Number” and “patient ID” are the tags targeted for data truncation. Position to start truncation Describe a position to start data truncation. Describe a decimal number for any desired position. To truncate data of a tag starting from the tail end, enter “TAIL”. Number of characters to be truncated Use a decimal number to describe the number of characters to be truncated.
NOTE The number of characters specified in V., above, must not be larger than that of the tag targeted for data truncation. It is neither allowed to truncate all characters of the tag nor the number of characters larger than that of the tag. If such is specified, it is regarded as an error and disregarded. The setup example above will result in the following: “Accession Number” in AEName1 : Three characters are truncated starting from the first character. : One character is truncated “Patient ID” in AEName1 starting from the tail end. “Accession Number” in AEName2 : Three characters are truncated starting from the third character.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR16-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR16-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR16-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR16-4
Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR17-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR17-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR17-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR17-4
Setup of Date and Time Display
Described below is the procedure used for performing necessary settings.
Setup of Date and Time Display At CL-AP startup, perform settings necessary for displaying the current date and time, as follows.
NOTE
1.
Start Explorer to open “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Tools”.
2.
Right-click “IIPDispDateTime.exe” to select “Create Shortcut”.
Perform settings for date and time display after completing CL-AP installation processing.
➥ REFERENCE The date and time are displayed as shown below. With the mouse operation, the display position can be moved as desired.
FR180002.EPS
➔ “Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe” is created.
3.
Move “Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe” to “C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\ Start Menu \Programs\Startup”.
NOTE If startup user of the CL-AP is other than the Administrator, move the shortcut to the startup folder of that user.
FR180001.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-1
Setup of Date and Time Display
4.
Change filename of “Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe” to “DateTimeDisplayAPL.exe”.
7.
Make sure that the displayed date and time are correct.
NOTE Follow the procedure below to correct the displayed date and time.
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
➔ The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
➔ The “Date and Time Properties” window opens. FR180003.EPS
5.
Restart the PC.
3.
Correct the date and time appropriately, and click .
➔ Within about one minute, the CL-AP starts up and the CL initial window opens.
6.
Check to see that the current date and time appear on the window.
FR180008.EPS
FR180004.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-2
Setup of Date and Time Display
8.
Change the date and time display format as necessary.
IV. Select the “Time” tab to change the “Time format”.
I.
REFERENCE
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
“ss” will not be reflected on the actually displayed time.
➔ The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
.
➔ The “Regional and Language Options” window opens. III. Click
.
FR180006.EPS
V. Select then the “Date” tab to change the “Short date”.
FR180005.EPS
FR180007.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-3
Setup of Date and Time Display
9. Change the date and time display font as necessary. I.
Select “Control Panel” from the
IV. Select “Menu” in
and a desired font in
.
menu.
➔ The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
.
➔ The “Display Properties” window opens. III. Select the “Appearance” tab and click
.
FR180009.ai
FR180010.ai
➔ The “Advanced Appearance” window opens.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-4
Setup of Date and Time Display
10. Change sizes of the date and time display font as necessary. I.
Select “Run...” from the
In case there is no registry that is for sizes of the installed monitor, determine the registry name and the date and time display font size, based on the values shown in the table below.
menu.
➔ The “Run...” window opens. II. Enter “regedit” and click
➥ REFERENCE
Monitor size (M)
.
Monitor Monitor width (pixel) height (pixel)
Default font size
0.7
1024
768
FontSize 1024×768
10
1
1280
1024
FontSize 1280×1024
11
2
1600
1200
FontSize 1600×1200
12
3
2048
1536
FontSize 2048×1536
14
DCL70428.EPS
➔ The “Registry Editor” window opens.
Registry name
III. Move to “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\ IIPDispDateTime”.
FR180011.ai
IV. Change the “FontSizeWWWWxHHHH” registry values to desired font sizes (WWWW: width of the monitor at installation of the CL-AP and HHHH: height of the monitor at installation of the CL-AP).
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR18-8
Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows Vista Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows Vista Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR19-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR19-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR19-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR19-4
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector The procedure to be observed when adding a serial connector will differ depending on the software version and the OS used. For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used is Windows 2000 For software version V7.1(B) or later
➥ REFERENCE The following 6 CL functions require serial connectors to be set up appropriately. • X-CON • ID Online • DAP • 15” touch panel • Pocket id Console • UPS
1. Adding a Serial Connector ■ For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used is Windows 2000 To make use of the following functions, the PSI04A board must be mounted. • X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.) • ID Online
■ For software version V7.1(B) or later The procedure to be observed for adding a serial connector differs depending on the number of used ports of the serial connector.
● When 1 port is used Use the PC-standard serial port. There is no need to add a serial connector.
● When 2 ports are used Add a serial connector from the mother board. For how to add a serial connector, see “1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board”.
● When 3 to 5 ports are used Mount the MOXA board. For how to mount the MOXA board, see “1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board”.
NOTE When the OS used is Windows XP, the PSI04A board can be used as well.
● When 6 ports are used Add a serial connector from the mother board and mount the MOXA board. For how to add a serial connector, see “1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board”. For how to mount the MOXA board, see “1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board”.
For how to mount the PSI04A board, see “1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board”.
For functions other than the above, use PC-standard serial connectors. When a 2-port connector is to be used, add a serial connector from the mother board. For how to add a serial connector, see “1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-1
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board This section describes the procedure used to mount the PSI04A board.
NOTES • When the OS used is Windows Vista, the PSI04A board can not be used. • Make sure that the CL-AP has been installed and then mount the PSI board. The PSI serial i/f board driver will not be recognized correctly unless the CL-AP has been installed.
1.
Shut down the CL and turn OFF the power to the CL-PC.
2.
Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC.
3.
Make sure that the PSI04A board is set up as illustrated below. Use CH0, CH1 or CH2 to select RS-422 or RS-232C. CH0, CH1 and CH2 may be used for the following connectors. First board CH0: CH-A CH1: CH-B CH2: CH-C Second board CH0: CH-D CH1: CH-E CH2: CH-F When setting CH0, CH1 and CH2, confirm the interface (RS-422 or RS-232C) between connected devices. RS-232C RS-422
CH0
RS-232C
RS-422
CH1
SW6
SW5
SW8
SW7
SW10
SW9
RS-232C
RS-422
CH2
PSI04A
1 2 SW4
SW5~10
SW4 HARD
First board
SOFT
Second board 00000488.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-2
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
Function
Settings
Selection whether to output CH0 remote power control signal (at SW5 master status) as is as a contact signal or to control with the register. Selection whether to output CH1 remote power control signal (at SW7 master status) as is as a contact signal or to control with the register.
This function is enabled regardless of whether CH0, CH1 and CH2 are set for RS422 or RS232C Setup for output of contact signal as is : Hardware Register control : Software
Selection whether to output CH2 remote power control signal (at SW9 master status) as is as a contact signal or to control with the register. Function
Settings
Remarks This function is enabled only when CH0, CH1 and CH2 are set for RS422. When set for RS232C, there will be no output to CN4.
Output to CN4 : Hardware Interruption : Software
Selection whether to transmit remote power control signal (at slave SW10 status) from CH2 to CN4 or to handle it as an interruption.
4.
Setup for output of contact signal as is: Outputs power supply status to the no. 8 pin of CN1 as a contact signal (same as for CN2 and CN3). Register control setting: Contact signal that is output to the no. 8 pin of CN1 can be changed by changing register setting values (same as for CN2 and CN3).
Selection whether to transmit remote power control signal (at slave SW6 status) from CH0 to CN4 or to handle it as an interruption. Selection whether to transmit remote power control signal (at slave SW8 status) from CH1 to CN4 or to handle it as an interruption.
Remarks
Setup for output to CN4: Outputs contact signals from outside to the CN4 no. 1 pin. Only the IDT-IV uses CN4.
For GX110 I. Remove the CL-PC cover. II. When the card cage is removed, its PSI board interferes with a cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the disk unit on the front of the CL-PC toward you before removing the card cage. #1 [Push]
Disk unit #2 [Pull]
#1 [Push] Cables behind the hard disk CL-PC (OptiPlex GX110) OE000006.EPS
III. Raise the lever as illustrated by the arrow. IV. Remove the card cage. V. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
V. PSI board III. Lever PCI slot IV. Card cage
Setup for interruption: As contact signals changes, interruptions will result in the hosts. The register makes it possible to check which CH is ON or OFF. No. 1 pin of CN4 is Open for interruption settings.
T
ON
FR
Mount a PSI board in the PCI slot.
CL-PC
When the PC used is a model other than GX110 or GX150, see “Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)” under “RI : Reinstalling the Software”. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
T
ON
FR
OE000013.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-3
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
5.
VI. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC. VII. Restore the disk unit. VIII. Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
For GX150 I. Open the CL-PC cover. II. Holding the card cage handle, remove the card cage. III. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the PSI board driver installation window opens.
6.
Click [Cancel].
NOTES • Install the AP key and then install the PSI board driver. • For Windows 2000, the PSI board driver is set up automatically after the CL-AP has started up.
Handle II. Card cage III. PSI board
Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC.
7.
While holding down the key, select “Shut Down” in the
(or
) menu.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
AGP slot
Extension card slot connector
NT
O FR
CL-PC (GX150 small desktop)
OE000014.EPS
IV. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC. V. Close the CL-PC cover.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-4
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board This section describes the procedure on how to add a serial connector from the mother board. Add-in serial connector cable
1.
Open the PC cover.
2.
Connect the serial connector cable.
For how to open the PC cover, read the Operation Manual that comes with the PC.
#1 [Connect] Add-in serial connector
#2 [Mount] Add-in serial connector cable
OE180001.EPS
OE180002.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX60
Serial connector 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180003.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-5
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
Location of the serial connector: GX260
Serial connector
OE180004.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX270
Serial connector
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180005.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX280
Serial connector
OE180111.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX620
Serial connector
OE180112.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-6
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 745
Serial connector
OE180113.EPS
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 755
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 760
Serial connector
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 780
Serial connector Serial connector
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180115.ai
OE180122.ai
OE180114.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-7
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board Described herein are the procedures used to mount the MOXA board and install the driver.
■ Cautions for connection ● CL requirements Software version required: V7.1 or later The computer OS used is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows Vista. The computer has the PCI Express x 1 slot.
NOTE A Windows 2000-installed computer cannot be used because it is not provided with the “PCI Express x 1” slot that provides interface with the MOXA board.
● Connected ports There are 4 serial ports on a MOXA board, of which the 2 ports are for connection to a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit. (Note however that 3 ports are made available for troubleshooting purposes.) When connecting a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit (such as X-CON or RIS) to the MOXA board, make sure to connect it to port 1 through 3.
NOTE To connect a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit, do not use port 4.
● PSI board-used environment The PSI board and the MOXA board cannot be used mixed. For this reason, be sure to dismount the PSI board, uninstall the driver, and install a MOXA board class driver. Establish then a connection appropriately.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-8
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
1.3.1 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver (for Windows XP only)
3.
➔ The command prompt window opens.
Installing the CL-AP under Windows XP environment will install the PSI board class driver as well. Even if the MOXA board is connected with both the CL-AP and the PSI board class driver installed together, serial communications established using the MOXA board will not be activated. To connect a MOXA board under Windows XP environment, a MOXA board class driver needs to be installed. The procedure to be performed is as described herein.
NOTES It is not necessary to perform this procedure under the Windows Vista environment, because a MOXA board class driver has been installed at the time of CL-AP installation.
Double-click “D:\Tools\ClassDriverToolForSERIAL-PORTBOARD\SetClassDriver.bat” in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2).
FR200030.ai
4.
Enter “1” and press the key. ➔ A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
The CL-AP CD (2 of 2) used in installation must be the one in V8.1 or later. When using the PSI board, uninstall the driver of PSI board first.
➥ REFERENCE The MOXA board class driver (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ DsmpuUserModeDll.dll (2010/08/18)) uses the same filename as that used for the PSI board class driver. (The file date is different with each other.)
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. ➔ The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu automatically opens.
NOTE
FR200031.ai
5.
Press the key. ➔ The command prompt window closes.
6. 7.
Remove the CD from the PC. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, proceed to step 3.
2.
Enter “0” and press the key. ➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-9
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
6.
1.3.2 Mounting the MOXA Board
1.
Shut down the CL and then turn OFF the power to the CL-PC.
2.
Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC.
3.
Remove the CL-PC cover.
4.
Mount the MOXA board in the PCI Express x 1 slot.
Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC. Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the MOXA board driver installation window opens.
7.
Click [Cancel].
➥ REFERENCE
MOXA board
Install the AP key and then install the MOXA board driver.
8.
While holding down the key, select “Shut Down” in the
menu.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
PCI Express ✕ 1 slot OE070001.ai
NOTE If a PSI board is mounted on the CL-PC, remove it and then mount the MOXA board.
➥ REFERENCE The illustration presented above is for “Dell OptiPlex 760”. The same procedure is used for mounting “Dell OptiPlex 960”.
5.
Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-10
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
2. Installing the Driver
3.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ Service Utility mode exits and the “Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard” window opens.
When the PSI04A board and the MOXA board are mounted, the relevant drivers must be installed accordingly. For how to install the PSI04A board driver, see “2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver”. For how to install the MOXA board driver, see “2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver”.
FR200001.ai
2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver 1.
4.
Turn ON the power to the PC.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
and click .
➔ Windows goes up and running. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts up.
2.
Select The installation finish window opens.
5.
Click
.
The desktop window opens.
6.
Right-click “My Computer” from the
menu to
select “Properties”. The “System Properties” window opens.
7.
Click the “Hardware” tab and then The “Device Manager” window opens.
MU000031.EPS
8.
NOTE If the password entry window opens, enter the login password (“fieldengineer”) to Service Utility mode and click
Ensure that the PSI board driver has been installed appropriately and close both the “Device Manager” and “System Properties” windows.
.
MU000035.EPS
➔ Service Utility mode starts up displaying then the “IIP Service Utility” window. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
OE000PSI2.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-11
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
3.
2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
➔ Service Utility mode exits and the “Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard” window opens.
2.2.1 Installing the MOXA Board Driver (For Windows XP)
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility].
Turn ON the power to the PC. ➔ Windows goes up and running. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts up.
2.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window within a period of 3 seconds.
FR200001.ai
4.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Select “Don’t search. I wil choose the driver to install.” and click . ➔ A window where how to install the necessary software is to be selected will open.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
FR200002.ai
If the password entry window opens, enter the login password (“fieldengineer”) to Service Utility mode and click
.
MU000035.EPS
5.
Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
6.
Select “Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]” and click . ➔ The “Please choose your search and installation options.” window then opens.
➔ Service Utility mode starts up displaying then the “IIP Service Utility” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-12
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
7.
Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and then checkmark “Removable media” ( ). ➔
9.
Select product names and a driver that is for the OS used, and then click .
FR200025.ai
8.
Click
Product names
.
OS FR200004.ai
➥ REFFRENCE
➔ A driver selection window opens.
In case the “Hardware Installation” window opens, click to proceed to the next step.
FR200005.ai
FR200003.ai
➔ Software installation processing will start. After a while, “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” window opens.
FR200006.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-13
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
10. Click
12. Select “Install the software automatically [Recommended]”
.
and click
NOTE Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each port.
.
The port number is displayed.
➔ Port 0 will be detected as the new hardware and the “Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard” window opens.
FR200001.ai
11. Select “Don’t search. I wil choose the driver to install.” and click
.
➔ A window where how to install the necessary software is to be selected will open.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
FR200007.ai
➔ A driver selection window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-14
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
13. Select the product name and a driver that is for the OS used, and then click
.
14. Click
.
➥ REFFRENCE When setups are requested for ports 1, 2 and 3, repeat steps 11 through 14 as necessary.
15. Remove the CD from the PC.
Product name
OS FR200008.ai
➥ REFFRENCE In case the “Hardware Installation” window opens, click to proceed to the next step.
FR200005.ai
➔ Hardware installation processing will start. After a while, the “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard” window opens.
FR200010.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-15
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
3.
2.2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver (For Windows VIsta)
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ Service Utility mode exits and the “Found New Hardware” window opens.
Turn ON the power to the PC. ➔ Windows goes up and running. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts up.
2.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window within a period of 3 seconds.
FR200011.ai
4.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. ➥ REFFRENCE In case the “Found New Hardware” window opens, click “Don’t search online” to proceed to the next step.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE If the password entry window opens, enter the login password (“fieldengineer”) to Service Utility mode and click
.
FR200012.ai
➔ A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
MU000035.EPS
➔ Service Utility mode starts up displaying then the “IIP Service Utility” window.
FR200013.ai
5.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-16
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
6.
Click
7.
.
➥ REFFRENCE In case the “Windows Security” window opens, click “Install this driver software anyway” to proceed to the next step.
Click
.
NOTE Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each port.
➥ REFFRENCE In case the “Found New Hardware” window opens, click “Don’t search online” to proceed to the next step.
FR200014.ai
➔ Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully. FR200016.ai
➔ A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
FR200015.ai FR200017.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-17
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
8.
Click
.
➥ REFFRENCE In case the “Windows Security” window opens, click “Install this driver software anyway” to proceed to the next step.
FR200014.ai
➔ Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully.
FR200018.ai
9.
Click
.
10. Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-18
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
2.2.3 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver
1.
For Windows Vista I. Select “Control Panel” from the
Perform the following settings.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP I. Select “Control Panel” from the
menu. II. Double-click
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
menu.
.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
.
2.
The “System Properties” window opens.
III. Select the “Hardware” tab and click
.
Confirm the following. “MOXA Communication Port 1 to 4” are displayed below “Port (COM and LPT)”. “MOXA CP-104EL Series” or “”MOXA CP-114EL Series” is displayed below “Multi Port Serial Adapters”.
MT000047.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens.
FR200019.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-19
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
3. Port and Service Utility Settings To make use of the following functions with software version V7.1(B) or later, port and Service Utility settings must be performed properly after adding a serial connector. X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.) ID Online The setting procedures are different with each other between the case where the PC-standard serial connector and an add-in serial connector are used and the case where the MOXA board is used.
2.
Perform the following settings.
For Windows XP I. Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard Serial Connector and an Add-in Serial Connector are Used 1.
III. Select the “Hardware” tab and click
.
Use the Service Utility capability to set up the port number to be used. For details of the individual setup items, see “3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”. Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items No.
Name
32
ID Online Serial Port No.
44
Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
MT000047.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-20
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
5.
For Windows Vista I. Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
Click
.
The “Advance Settings for COM1” window opens.
6.
.
Select a port number value, which is the one that is added by “32” to the value set up in the Service Utility. Example: Select “COM33” for “44:Xcon Serial_TX Control Port”=”1”.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
3.
On the “Device Manager” window that opens, click the symbol to the left of “Ports (COM & LPT)”.
DXL819008.ai
4.
Right-click the COM port the serial cable is connected to, and select “Properties”. The “Communications Port (COM1) Properties” window opens.
DXL819010.ai
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Communications Port (COM1) Properties” window.
8.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
9.
Close the “Device Manager” window. The system returns to the “Control Panel” window.
10. Close the “Control Panel” window.
DXL819009.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-21
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used NOTES Presented herein are the procedure and windows applicable to the “MOXA CP-104EL board”, which are the same as to the “MOXA CP114EL board”. COM33 through COM35 port numbers are assigned on the MOXA board. In case any of the COM33 through COM35 port number is used for some other device, such COM port number needs to be changed as required beforehand, and necessary settings must be performed appropriately so that a COM port number same as that assigned on the MOXA board is not used double.
1.
Perform the following settings.
For Windows XP I. Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
III. Select the “Hardware” tab and click
.
MT000047.EPS
The “Device Manager” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-22
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
3.
For Windows Vista I. Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
Select the “Ports Configuration” tab. Select then the row for Port 1 and click the
key.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
II. Double-click
.
The “Device Manager” window opens.
2.
On the “Device Manager” window, right-click “MOXA CP104EL Series (PCI Express Bus)” to select “Properties”.
FR200021.ai
The “Port 1” window where the Port Number is to be set up will open.
FR200020.ai
The “MOXA CP-104EL Series (PCI Express Bus) Properties” window opens.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-23
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
4.
Perform the following settings. I. Select “COM33” from the “Port Number” pull-down menu. II. Check to see that “Auto Enumerating COM Number” is checkmarked.
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “MOXA CP-104EL Series (PCI Express Bus) Properties” window.
I. II.
FR200023.ai
FR200022.ai
➥ REFERENCE
6.
Select the row for Port 4 and repeat steps 2 through 4 above to determine “COM32” or smaller value for the “Port Number”.
Checkmarking “Auto Enumerating COM Number” will assign serially numbered COM port numbers to Port 2 and thereafter. COM port number for Port 4 does not have to be serially numbered. Because a maximum of 32 connection port numbers are assigned to DAP or Siemens mammography X-CON, it is desirable that 32 or smaller COM port number is assigned to Port 4 so that such equipment can be connected to the CL.
FR200027.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-24
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
7.
Click
9.
.
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
8.
Make sure that the board port numbers and the COM port numbers are determined as shown in the table below. Port number MOXA Communication Port 1 MOXA Communication Port 2 MOXA Communication Port 3 MOXA Communication Port 4
Use the Service Utility capability to set up a port number to be used. For details of the individual setting items, see “3.6 Configuration Details — 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”. Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items
COM port number
No.
Name
COM33 COM34 COM35 Arbitrary (COM32 or smaller value is recommended.)
32
ID Online Serial Port No.
44
Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
FR200024.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-25
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-26
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR20-28
Setting the Exposure Index Function
Setting the Exposure Index Function When an image derived from the Image Reader is received, an index value, Deviation Index (DI), that represents the degree of deviation between the Exposure Index (EI) that is proportionate to the X-ray dose and the ideal EI value (EIt) is calculated and then displayed. The EI value and the DI value are displayed as floating windows on the study screen and the QA screen. This chapter presents the description on how to display the EI and DI values.
CAUTION • The used Image Reader must regularly be subjected to complete calibration processing using the Image Reader QC tool, so that the EI and DI values can be applied for the purpose of control of actual image quality. • Any changes in exposure menus and/or exchange of images made with regard to a menu already subjected to exposure do not affect the functionality to display the EI and DI values (the EI and DI values will be displayed as commanded according to the functionality of the originally determined exposure menu). Note, however, that the EI and DI values will not be displayed even if an energy subtraction menu that has already been subjected to exposure is changed to an RT menu. To check the EI and DI values after changing an exposure menu or exchanging images, select a correct exposure menu and then perform study. • A long-view exposure menu terminated without undergoing any image composition processing does not cause the EI and DI values to be displayed, because it is considered to have been determined a long-view exposure menu (WS) in terms of the functionality.
NOTES • Software version V8.0 or later enables the EI and DI values to be displayed. • The EI value accuracy is ±20%. • The Exposure Index function does not support the Mammography exposure menus. As a result, the EI and DI values will not be calculated leaving the relevant display boxes to be blank. • The EI and DI values will be displayed only when the determined functionality is “RT”. • With respect to a study image that has already been subjected to the study, the EI and the DI values will not be recalculated even if the ideal EI value (EIt) that is to be used as a guidepost for the exposure menu is changed.
➥ REFERENCE The Exposure Index is displayed on the Study screen and the QA Processing screen as shown below. Its display position can be moved as desired with mouse manipulation.
FR210001.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR21-1
Setting the Exposure Index Function
■ Service Utility settings
■ Correction coefficient parameter file
With the use of the Service Utility capability, it is possible to enable or disable the Exposure Index function. Table IMAGE MODALITY setup item No.
Name
72
Enable Exposure Index Function
Selection
Meaning
Specifying whether to enable Yes Enables the Exposure or disable the Exposure Index function. Index function. No Disables the Exposure Index function.
Correction coefficient specific to each of the Image Readers (cassette type: IP VN/VI, dual-side cassette type: ST-BD, built-in type) are stored in the “ExposureIndex.prm” file that is located under the following folder. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ExposureIndex.prm Do not change unless it is absolutely necessary to do so.
➥ REFERENCE The Backup/Restore function that the Service Utility capability offers is available for the “ExposureIndex.prm” file.
■ Saving and Outputting Exposure Index ● For Software V8.0 The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags (Private). • EI value : (0007,F330) VR name : IS • DI value : (0007,F331) VR name : DS • EIt value : (0007,F332) VR name : IS The EI value, DI value, and EIt value cannot be output externally.
● For Software V8.1 or later The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags (Standard). • EI value : (0018,1411)
VR name : DS
• DI value : (0018,1413)
VR name : DS
• EIt value : (0018,1412)
VR name : DS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value can be output in the following service classes (including media storage). • DICOM Standard CR Storage (image processed) • DICOM Private CR Storage (standardized) • DICOM Unstandarlized CR Storage (before standardized)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR21-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR21-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR21-4
Accession Number Character String Adding Function
Accession Number Character String Adding Function When the image is output from DICOM STORAGE, an optional character string (hospital ID etc.) can be added before or after the tag information of Accession Number and patient ID. To edit the tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataAdd.ini). Following is the setup procedure.
➤ IMPORTANT When you are using this function, always obtain user’s agreement by fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked.
NOTE Tag settings are applied in order of priority: “TagReplace.ini” > “TagLookup.ini” > “TagCharDataCut.ini” > “TagCharDataAdd.ini” When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority are applied. See “■ Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other”.
1.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config” folder.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the “TagCharDataAdd.ini” file.
3.
According to the format shown below, edit the file.
4.
Save the “TagCharDataAdd.ini” file in the text format and close NotePad.exe.
NOTE Be sure to use NotePad to edit the “TagCharDataAdd.ini” file and save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based on the “Unicode” characters. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR22-1
Accession Number Character String Adding Function
■ “TagCharDataAdd.ini” file format
NOTE The maximum length in each tag is fixed.
; TagCharDataAdd ; [AE] ; Tag=Position, Length
Accession Number : 16 characters : 64 characters Patient ID
I. Comment
; ******************* [AEName1]
II. AE name
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital1 00080050=TAIL,FujiH1 [AEName2] 00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital2
III. Tag IV. Adding position V. Character string to be added
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital2
If the number of characters for each tag after adding a character string is greater than the maximum number of characters, the character string will not be added. Therefore, configure the number of characters in each tag so that the numbers are less than the maximum values. Also, the number of characters for Accession Number and patient ID (section 15 and 17 of CSL/IDT FUNCTION) must be set within the values with the number of added characters subtracted from the maximum number of characters. When Accession Number is 9876543210 and patient ID is 0123456789, the following results will be as follows with this setting example. “Accession Number” of AEName1 : 9876543210FujiH1 : FujiHospital10123456789 “Patient ID” of AEName1 “Patient ID” of AEName2
: FujiHospital20123456789
FR220003.ai
I. II. III.
IV.
V.
Comment Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment. AE name Describe an AE name to which a character string is to be added by putting it between square brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed. Tag Describe the tags to which a character string is to be added. The only tags to which a character string can be added are “Accession Number” and “patient ID”. Adding position Describe the position where a character string is to be added. To add a character string at the beginning, input “FRONT”, and then input “TAIL” to add a character string at the end. Character string to be added Describe by single-byte characters except “@” and “*”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR22-2
Accession Number Character String Adding Function
■ Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other Indicates the example of setting when the following files are applied to a tag. TagReplace.ini file (DICOM Tag Mapping Function) TagCharDataCut.ini file (Accession Number Data Truncation Function)
● Result The “.ini” files will be applied as follows according to the priority sequence of “TagReplace.ini” > “TagLookup.ini” > “TagCharDataCut.ini” > “TagCharDataAdd.ini”. (xxxx, yyyy) = (01234567)
TagCharDataAdd.ini file (Accession Number Adding Character String Function)
TagReplace.ini
● Configuration Copy (xxxx, yyyy) to (aaaa, bbbb) by DICOM Tag Mapping Function (TagReplace.ini).
Replacing tags (aaaa, bbbb) = (01234567)
Delete the first four characters of (aaaa, bbbb) by Data Truncation Function (TagCharDataCut.ini).
TagCharDataCut.ini
Add “FUJI” at the end of (aaaa, bbbb) by Character String Adding Function (TagCharDataAdd.ini). Set (xxxx, yyyy) to (01234567).
Deleting character strings (aaaa, bbbb) = (4567) TagCharDataAdd.ini Adding character strings (aaaa, bbbb) = (4567FUJI) FR220004.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR22-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
FR22-4
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
SP: Service Parts
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-I
SP: Service Parts
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
Reason
10/20/2000 12/10/2000 04/10/2001
00 00 01
05/30/2001 08/30/2001 03/20/2002 11/30/2002 03/01/2003 02/20/2004
02 03 04 06 07 10
07/30/2004 11/12/2004
11 12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2006 07/20/2007 07/20/2007 05/09/2008 10/31/2008 11/30/52009 11/30/52009 03/31/2010 03/31/2010 12/10/2010
16 17 17 18 19 20 20 21 21 22
New release (FM2862) Revision (FM2950) Previous Chapter C “Error Information/Service Parts” divided and modified (FM2951) Revision (FM3027) Revision for software version A04 (FM3125) Revision for software version A07 (FM3297) Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) Revision for software version A10 (FM3634) A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220) Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) Support provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) Support provided to NEC PC (RAID specifications) and corrections (FM4543) Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952) Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201) Changes in pagination (FM5201) Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460) Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622) Changes in pagination (FM5622) Revision for software V8.0(B) (FM5670) Changes in pagination (FM5670) Revision for software V8.1(B) (FM5817)
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Pages affected All pages Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16 All pages I, II, 3, 4 I, II, 3, 4 I, II, 4 I, II, 4-6 I, II, 4 All pages I, II, 1, 3–5 I–IV, 6–8 I, II, 3–7 I, II, 3, 4, 5, 7 I, II, 2, 3, 5, 6 7, 8 I, II, 3–6 I, II, 3–6, 9–12 I, II, 3, 4, 6 5 I, II, 4, 5, 7 6, 8–11 I, II, 7
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12 11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12 11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-IV
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List
1. Service Parts List 1.1 How to Use Service Parts List RANK Parts handling ID symbols used to identify the parts requiring special operation The ID symbols are assigned to applicable parts. Parts without the R mark are replaced and handled in a regular manner. Symbol R Q, T
Description Repairable parts Symbol for use other than in Japan
Export regulation mark This + mark is assigned to the parts subject to Export regulations. Parts without the + mark are not subject to Export regulations. Symbol +
Description
A number for indicating each part in the Service Parts Exploded Views.
PART NUMBER
A code number that is unique to each part. The rightmost letter of the code number has the following meaning.
For hardware The letter denotes the version number of a part. If parts have different version numbers, they are upward-compatible. For software The letter denotes the software specifications.
PART NAME
This represents the general name of a part.
QTY.
QTY. represents the quantity of parts used in a unit or assembly.
Parts subject to Export regulations
Fault rankings used for estimating the recommended stock quality All parts are assigned a symbol letter from A to E. Symbol
REF. NO.
REMARKS
Unique name of a part or its relevant information or note is described in this column.
Description
A
Consumable parts or parts that will be replaced at short intervals
B
Parts that may become faulty accidentally and have a relatively high failure rate
C
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to have a high failure rate
D
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to become faulty
E
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis or parts that may be needed in case of faults such as man-induced damage
SERIAL NUMBER
The units may contain different parts depending on their shipment control number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control number to which the parts are applicable. If this column is blank, the parts are applicable to all the relevant units.
RANK column description The symbols for Fault Ranking, Parts Handling, and Export regulation are assigned in order named. Thus, one to three letters are put in the RANK column. 010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-1
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List
Recommended quantities of spare parts It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in stock a specified quantity of parts according to the rank (A to E) assigned to the parts. Parts to be replaced at periodic intervals must be held in stock separately. Adjust the quantity of parts stock depending on the number of working units (N) as prescribed below. Q: Quantity used in a single system N = 1 Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3 Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05 Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02 2 ≤ N ≤ 10 Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3 Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05 Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02 11 ≤ N ≤ 300 Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3 Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05 Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-2
1.2 Service Parts List
1.2 Service Parts List 39
7 41
8
40
15
E 17~23
BorE
NT
O FR
LP
58
24 16
61 4 2 RIS, etc
34 5
B 5
10
1
6
54~57
5
C B SIEMENS X-CON
3 D
44~51,60
Isolator
2
39
A (USB)
25~32
CL-PC
A (USB) 12
5
33
42
35 A (USB)
A (USB)
62 36
C 59
D
11,13,52,53
9
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
A (USB)
14 38
A (USB) 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
37
43
00000055.EPS
SP-3
1.2 Service Parts List
64 63 65, 66
68, 69
67 DXL51001.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-4
1.2 Service Parts List
RANK REF. E
1
E
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
SERIAL NUMBER
114Y5342001A Software
1
Main unit software
2.1
340N0205
Knob
2
For LCD stand
E
2.2
340N0227
Knob
2
For LCD stand (black)
E
3.1
357N1405
Table
1
For LCD stand
E
3.2
357N1455
Table
1
For LCD stand (black)
E
4.1
357N1406
Table
1
For LCD stand
E
4.2
357N1456
Table
1
For LCD stand (black)
D
5
367N0021
Rubber foot
4
For LCD stand
E
6
401N0811
Retaining plate
1
For LCD stand
E
7
357N1428A
Table
1
For wall-mounting LCD
E
8
357N1429A
Table
1
For wall-mounting LCD
D
9.1
813Y0142A/B
Power supply
1
CR-IR346CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
D
9.2
813Y0145C
Power supply
1
CR-IR348CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
CR
10.1
849N0067A
Monitor display
1
LCD (9415TD15/G2)
Function repair
CR
10.2
849Y0094/B
Monitor display
1
LCD (9415TD15/H2 or 9416 TD15/H2-1)
Function repair
CR
10.3
849Y0095
Monitor display
1
LCD (L350P-TS (black))
Function repair
CR
10.4
849Y0099
Monitor display
1
LCD (L351P-TS (black))
Function repair
CR
10.5
849Y0103
Monitor display
1
LCD (L362T)
Function repair
CR
10.6
849Y100027
Monitor display
1
LCD (L560T-C)
Function repair
CR
10.7
849Y100004
Monitor display
1
LCD (3M monochrome)
Function repair
CR
10.8
849Y100057
Monitor display
1
LCD (3M color)
Function repair
CR
10.9
849Y100048
Monitor display
1
LCD (2M color)
Function repair
CR
10.10 849Y100066
Monitor display
1
LCD (2M monochrome)
Function repair
852Y0082
Reading unit
1
MCR-JIS
D
11
D
12.1
852N0023A
Reading unit
1
BCR
DENSO HC36TU-K
D
12.2
852N0026A
Reading unit
1
BCR
Optoelectronics OPT-6125-USB
D
12.3
852N0032
Reading unit
1
BCR
Symbol LS1908T
D
12.4
852N100003
Reading unit
1
BCR
Metrologic MS3780
D
13
852Y0083
Reading unit
1
MCR-ISO
E
14
357N1408
Table
1
For wall-mounting MCR
CR
15
113Y1405B
PEI01A
1
E-i/f serial board
CR
16
113Y1502A/B
PSI04A
1
Serial i/f board
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-5
1.2 Service Parts List
RANK REF.
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
E
17
136Y5869A
FCR i/f cable
1
5m
E
18
136Y5870A
FCR i/f cable
1
15m
E
19
136Y5871A
FCR i/f cable
1
30m
E
20
136Y5872A
FCR i/f cable
1
45m
E
21
136Y5873A
FCR i/f cable
1
60m
E
22
136Y5874A
FCR i/f cable
1
100m
E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E D E D C
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41.1
136Y5875A 136Y5868A 136Y5757 136Y5758 136Y5759 136Y5760 136Y5761 136Y5522 136Y5523 136Y5524 357S0024 347N1785 136Y8551 136Y8546 357N1528 898Y1008 405N3111 125N0299 136S1245
FCR i/f cable Conversion cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable Rack Bracket Cable Cable Rack Ferrite kit Name plate Battery Cable
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
150m 1.2m CL - RIS OP-09/VH-05 RIS terminal 3m (D-sub 9pin) CL - RIS OP-09/VH-06 RIS terminal 5m (D-sub 9pin) CL - RIS OP-09/VH-07 RIS terminal 10m (D-sub 9pin) CL - RIS OP-09/VH-08 RIS terminal 15m (D-sub 9pin) CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-01 3m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin) CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-02 5m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin) CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-03 10m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin) CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-04 15m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin) For the BCR Spacer (exclusively for 9416TD15/H2-F) Hospital-grade (only for units used in Japan), 136Y8550+fastener Hospital-grade option (only for units used in Japan) For the BCR (exclusively for Symbol LS1908T)
C
41.2
136Y9400
Cable
1
C
41.3
136Y101344
Cable
1
D E D D D
42 43 44 45 46
852N0036C 357N1611 113Y1873 113Y1876 113Y1878
Reading unit Rack Memory board Memory board Memory board
1 1 1 1 1
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
For the Japanese version only PDA lithium battery (only for units used in Japan) Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan) Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan) For Dell OptiPlex GX280 SMT/SDT Extension serial connector cable + decorative laminate (only for units used in Japan) For Dell OptiPlex GX620 MT, 745 MT, 755 MT BCR (model: BH2104-FF1) For the BCR (exclusively for BH2104-FF) For GX60/260 For GX270 (SDT/SMT) For GX280 (SDT/SMT)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SERIAL NUMBER
Symbol LS2208T
TS256MDL2075 TS256MDL5075/5076
SP-6
1.2 Service Parts List
RANK REF. D D D D D D D E E E E E
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
DR
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
113Y1882A 113Y1881 113Y1935 113Y1943 113Y1944 852N0039/A 852N0040/A 136Y100276A 136Y100278A 136Y100280A 136Y100282A 138S0460
Memory board Memory board Memory board Memory board Memory board Reading unit Reading unit Cable Cable Cable Cable Ferrite core
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
For WS370 For WS360 For WS330/340 For GX270 (SDT/SMT) For GX280 (SDT/SMT) MCR-JIS MCR-ISO Isolator to X-CON 3m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348 Isolator to X-CON 5m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348 Isolator to X-CON 10m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348 Isolator to X-CON 15m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348 For USB mouse
59.1
850Y0132
Memory
1
DVD-RAM drive (Panasonic’s LF-M766JD external type)
DR
59.2
850Y0145
Memory
1
DVD-RAM drive (Panasonic’s LF-M860JD external type)
D
59.3
850Y100026A
Memory
1
DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALO’s DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
D
59.4
850Y100039
Memory
1
DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALO’s DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
D
60
113Y100249
Memory board
1
Used in common to 755/745/GX620/GX280
D
61
888S0002A
Cradle
1
(Only for units used in Japan)
E
62
136N100049
Cable
1
C CR C C D D D
63 64 65 66 67 68 69
113Y1971E 113Y100435/A 113Y100464 113Y100465 136Y102172 136Y102171 136Y102364
Video board Video board PC board PC board Cable Cable Cable
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Analog video cable for touch panel (FlexScan Moniter Cable V55) (only for units used in Japan) Video board for DUAL monitor / 3M monochrome (RealVisionSMD5-PCI) Video board for DUAL monitor / 2M/3M color/monochrome (ATI FireGL V3600) Serial port add-in board (RS232C) Serial port add-in board (RS232C/RS422) (For Shimadzu HLZ100 X-CON ) Relay adapter Serial conversion cable (RS232C) Serial conversion cable (RS422)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SERIAL NUMBER
TS512MDL2076 TS512MDL5073 KT-900U-IR-2004 KT-960U-IR-2001
CR-IR 348 (for units used in Japan) CR-IR 348 (for units used in Japan) CR-IR 348 (for units used in Japan) CR-IR 348 (for units used in Japan) T8512MOL380 Symbol CRD8800-100SIMR
MOXA CP-104EL MOXA CP-114EL
SP-7
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
2 9 12
A 11
8
13
3
17
C
C
B
5,6
16
7
B 1
14
10
19 4
15
18
A
20
00000056.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-8
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
RANK REF.
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
DQ
1
850N0013
HDD
1
CQ
2
125N0137
Power supply
1
CQ
3
113Y1838
PC board
1
Motherboard
DQ
4.1
102N0085
IC
1
DIMM-DDR-512-NECC
DQ
4.2
102N0097
IC
1
512MB memory extension
DQ
5
102N0087
IC
1
Pentium4 2.8GHz
DQ
6
102N0086
IC
1
Celeron 2GHz
D
7
119N0011
Fan
1
CPU fan
D
8
119N0012
Fan
1
Housing fan
D
9
852N0035
CD-ROM drive
1
D
10
850N0014
FDD
1
E
11
128N0078
Mouse
1
PS/2 mouse
E
12
128N0077
Keyboard
1
Model 104 keyboard
D
13.1
128N0080
Power supply SW
1
Power supply SW assembly
D
13.2
128N0081
LED/SW cable
1
(RAID specification)
E
14
136N0455
Cable
1
HDD signal cable * This is a special cable, which cannot be substituted by any other cable.
E
15
136N0456
Cable
1
CD-ROM unit signal cable
E
16
136N0457
Cable
1
FDD unit signal cable
E
17
136N0458
Cable
1
Speaker cable
E
18
350N3135
Cover
1
Front bezel
CQ
19
113Y1856
PC board
1
RAID board (RAID specification)
DQ
20
850N0015
HDD
1
(RAID specification)
SERIAL NUMBER
NOTE When you are asking for replacing a part free of charge, use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log of a part that caused an error to occur. For details of the device test procedures, see “5.1.2 Device Test Procedures” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”. For details of the error log save procedures, see “5.1.3 Log Save Procedure” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-9
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)
H B
24
A
3
D
C
15
15
11 6 7 A G
2
16
12
1 E
5 H 9
F
20
G
14
19
B C
10
F 18
21
4
13 22
8
E
17
D
23 00000057.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-10
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)
RANK REF. PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
C
1
113Y100405
Board assembly
1
437793-001 board assembly (M/B)
D
2
102N100020
IC
1
457656-001 IC (CPU
D
3
102N100021
IC
2
418951-001 IC (1GB memory)
D
4
850N100009
Memory
1
449978-001 memory (HDD)
C
5
125N100039
Power supply
1
437797-001 power supply
D
6
119N100032
Electric fan
1
453053-001 electric fan (CPU fan)
E
7
379N100043
Radiator
1
453318-001 radiator (heat sink)
D
8
119N100033
Electric fan
1
451144-001 electric fan (housing fan)
D
9
850N100010
Memory
1
431452-001 memory (FDD)
D
10
850N100011
Memory
1
419496-001 memory (DVD-ROM)
E
11
128N100040
Switch
1
390937-001 switch (PS/2 mouse)
E
12
128N100041
Keyboard
1
435302-291 keyboard (PS/2)
E
13
136N100052
Cable
1
451143-001 cable (front I/O)
E
14
136N100053
Cable
1
453052-001 cable (serial port)
E
15
136N100054
Cable
1
453317-001 cable (SATA for HDD and DVD)
E
16
136N100055
Cable
1
454246-001 cable (FDD)
E
17
136N100056
Cable
1
292657-191 cable (AC)
E
18
369N100112
Duct
1
451145-001 duct (fan duct)
E
19
350N101276
Cover
1
451140-001 cover (housing rear cover)
E
20
107N100003
Solenoid
1
451149-001 solenoid
E
21
121N100002
Speaker
1
394779-001 speaker
D
22
128N100042
Switch
1
451141-001 switch (power switch assembly)
E
23
350N101277
Cover
1
451148-001 cover (front bezel)
E
24
357N100471
Table
1
451150-001 table
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SERIAL NUMBER
SP-11
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
SP-12
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
PM: Preventive Maintenance
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-I
PM: Preventive Maintenance
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
03/31/2010
21
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reason New release (FM5670)
Pages affected All pages
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-II
1. Preventive Maintenance Items
1. Preventive Maintenance Items While the CL is being used, maintenance of the items listed in the table on the right should be performed periodically, observing the Warnings and Cautions shown below.
WARNING To avoid electrical shock, turn off the power to the equipment, before performing maintenance work.
■ Table of preventive maintenance items (Recommended cycle of preventive maintenance: Annual) Work items
Required Replacement Remarks time part
2. Checking for a Fatal Error 2.1 Confirming the Event Log 3. Safety 3.1 Service Voltage 3.2 Power Plug 4. Hardware Cleaning
WARNING/CAUTION Observe Warnings/Cautions described in the “Safety Precautions” section.
CAUTION When performing maintenance work of the inside of the PC, the user is required to wear a wrist strap unfailingly to secure proper grounding. Otherwise, electronic parts mounted on the boards may be damaged due to static electricity discharged by the user.
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning 4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning 4.3 LCD Cleaning 4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning 5. Executing the Error Analysis 5.1
Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
6. Functional Checks 6.1
Confirmation of Image Input to Storage onto HDD
6.2 Image Output to Film
[option]
6.3 Image Transfer 7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of Date and Time 7.1
Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
7.2 Verification of Date and Time
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-1
2.1 Confirming the Event Log
2. Checking for a Fatal Error
3. Safety
2.1 Confirming the Event Log
3.1 Service Voltage
View the OS event log (application) to check for any fatal error recording. For the procedure for viewing the event log, see “2. Using the Event Viewer” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
Verify the service voltage that is available within the institution.
3.2 Power Plug WARNING When making resistance measurements, be sure that the power plug is disconnected from an outlet. Measure the resistance values of the power cable. Terminals
Between L and N
Resistance value
100 kΩ or higher
E L N
Between L and M Between N and E ∞
∞
E E L N
E N
L
N L DCL61002.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-2
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning
4. Hardware Cleaning 4.1 PC Internal Cleaning Cooling fans (power supply fan, CPU fan, etc.) are mounted in the PC to dissipate generated heat through air convection. If dust is heavily accumulated in the neighborhood of a cooling fan or a vent in the PC housing, the effect of the cooling fan may decrease, thereby adversely affecting the operation of the PC. It is therefore necessary to clean the inside of the PC on a periodic basis.
■ Preparations Disconnect all cables from the PC main body.
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning 1.
With a vacuum cleaner, remove dust that is accumulated between keyboard keys.
2.
Rotate the ring on the bottom of the mouse counterclockwise, and then take the ball out.
3.
With a soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the ball clean.
4.
With an air blower, carefully blow dust away from the mouse case into which the ball is to be placed.
5.
Place the ball back in the mouse case.
■ Cleaning
1.
With a brush attached to a vacuum cleaner, carefully vacuum-clean the slots and other openings in the rear of the PC.
2.
Open the PC cover.
3.
With an air blower, clean the heat sink and circuit board section.
4.
Close the PC cover.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-3
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning
1.
With a “Cleaner Torch”, remove dust from the LCD.
1.
Reconnect all disconnected cables.
2.
If there is any stubborn dirt on the LCD panel surface, wipe it clean with a cloth (e.g., gauze) well wrung out in water.
2.
Turn ON the power to both monitor and PC.
CAUTION
3.
If you vigorously scrub the LCD panel surface, the liquid crystal surface may become damaged. Therefore, do not apply any undue force to the LCD panel surface when you wipe it clean. If the LCD panel surface is heavily soiled and cannot be cleaned with a moistened cloth, clean it with the monitor cleaner kit. The monitor cleaner kit is of a chemical type. Therefore, if the monitor cleaner kit is repeatedly used for cleaning purposes, the LCD panel surface will be adversely affected. When using the monitor cleaner kit, read its operation manual and exercise utmost care.
➔ Windows starts up. In about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
➔ The “Enter Password” window opens.
4.
Click “Cancel” to close the window.
5.
Open the optical drive (CD, DVD/CD-RW drive) tray.
6.
Clean the optical drive with a dedicated lens cleaner.
NOTE Do not use dehydrated ethanol for cleaning purposes because it adversely affects the LCD’s surface film.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Within three seconds after the initial window opens, click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner of the window.
➔ For details of the procedure, see manuals supplied with the dedicated lens cleaner kit.
7.
Close the optical drive.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-4
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
5. Executing the Error Analysis
6. Functional Checks
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to Storage onto HDD
See the below to check the memory and hard disk. “4.1 Checking the Memory” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting” “4.2 Checking the Hard Disk” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”
1.
Read an image and check to see that it is stored without fail.
6.2 Image Output to Film See the following to perform the specified procedure. “3. Verifying the Connection” in “CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)” under “OE5: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”
6.3 Image Transfer See the following to perform the specified procedure. “3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment” in “CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)” under “OE3: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-5
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of Date and Time 7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files See one of the following to perform the specified procedure. “4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup” under “IN-B: Installation — Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372” “4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files” under “IN-B: Installation — Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372” “4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup” under “IN-B: Installation — Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372”
7.2 Verification of Date and Time See the following to verify date and time of the PC and Pocket id Console. “4.1.2 OS Setups” under “IN-B: Installation — Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/ 368/370/371/372” “2.4.1 Setting Date and Time” in “CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)” under “OE18: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
PM-6
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-AI
IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000 12/10/2000
00 00
New release (FM2862) Revision (FM2950)
12/10/2000
00
Changes in pagination (FM2950)
04/10/2001
01
05/30/2001
02
Previous Chapter A “Installation” modified (FM2951) Revision for software version A02
08/30/2001
03
Revision for software version A04 (FM3125)
08/30/2001 03/20/2002
03 04
Changes in pagination (FM3125) Revision for software version A07 (FM3297)
03/20/2002
04
Changes in pagination (FM3297)
07/20/2002
05
Revision for software version A08 (FM3428)
07/20/2002 11/30/2002 03/01/2003
05 06 07
Changes in pagination (FM3428) Revision for software version A09 (FM3499) Revision for software version A10 (FM3634)
08/20/2003 12/10/2003 02/20/2004
08 09 10
07/30/2004 07/30/2005 11/30/2005 07/30/2006
11 14 15 16
Revision for software version A11 (FM4009) Revision for software version B00 (FM4158) A new production tool adopted and layout design changed (FM4220) Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254) Revision for software V3.0(B) (FM4543) Revision for software V3.1(B) (FM4760) Revision for software V4.0(B) (FM4952)
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected All pages Pages I, II, i, ii, 2–5, 8–10, 12, 13, 15, 17–24, 26–28, 30–35, 37–42, 46–50, 52–54, A1-1–4, A2-1, A3-1, A3-3, A4-1, A4-2, A4-7, A5-2–4, A6-1–3, A7-1, A7-3, A7-4, A8-1–8, A9-1–4, A10-1–4 Pages 6–7, 11, 14, 16, 25, 29, 36, 43–45, 51, 55, 56 All pages I, II, IN-A1–50, Appx IN2-3, Appx IN3-1–Appx IN7-4 I, II, 1, 3, 6, 12-16, 18-20, 22, 24, 28, 29, 31, 35, 36, 43, 45, App IN1-1, App IN2-2, App IN3-1, App IN4-2, 3, 6, App IN5-3, 4, 6, App IN6-1–4, App IN7-1–6, App IN8-1–4, App IN9-1, 2 23, App IN1-2, 3 I, II, III, IV, 2, 4, 7, 19, 22–30, 35, 36, 41, 42, App IN1-1, App IN2-1–3, App IN3-1, App IN4-2, App IN5-1–3, 6, App IN8-1–6, App IN9-3, 4 20, 31–34, 37–40, 43–48, App IN1-2 I, II, 2, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16–19, 21–24, 30, 34, 48 13–15, 20, 25–29, 31–33, 35–47 I, II, 2, 3, 16, 17, 28, 30, 34, 35, 47 I, II, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 21, 29, 31, 32, 34–37 I, II, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 22, 30–33, 35 I, II, 2, 18, 21, 35 All pages I, II, 6, 16–18, 21, 24, 26, 28, 35, 43 I, II, 18, 22, 27, 43, 44 I, II, 7, 11, 22, 29, 31 I, II, 22–24
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-AII
IN-A: Installation – Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet Issue date
Revision number
07/20/2007
17
Revision for software V5.0(B) (FM5201)
07/20/2007 05/09/2008 10/31/2008
17 18 19
Changes in pagination (FM5201) Revision for software V6.0(B) (FM5356) Revision for software V7.0(B) (FM5460)
10/31/2008
19
Changes in pagination (FM5460)
11/30/2009
20
Revision for software V7.1(B) (FM5622)
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected I, III, 2, 6, 12, 29, 31, 32, 36–38, 44, 51, 52 39–43, 45–50 I, III, 1, 14, 32, 35 I, III, 2, 3, 16, 19, 30, 31, 33, 37, 40, 43 4–15, 17, 18, 20–29, 32, 34–36, 38, 39, 41, 42, 44–52 I, III, 25, 27
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-AIII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-AIV
1.1 Dimensions and Weight
1. CL Installation Conditions This section states the PC (controller: DELL OptiPlex GX150) installation conditions.
u NOTE u Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter. : Application : Local printer : CR-IR346CL : CR-IR346RU CL configuration data : RU configuration data :
AP LP CL RU CL-Config RU-Config
For the dimensions and weights of the monitor and peripherals, see the respective manuals that are supplied with them.
1.1 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions (width × height × depth) 390 × 108 × 431 (mm) Weight Approx. 9.5 kg
1.2 Temperature and Humidity Condition Operating Non-operating
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Temperature 10°C to 35°C -40°C to 65°C
Humidity 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing) 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
1.3 Places of Installation Environmental conditions Avoid installing the machine at the following places: Places where the temperature changes drastically Places near heaters or other heat sources Places where the machine is likely to be wet or submerged Places where the machine is likely to come into contact with any corrosive gas Dusty or dirty places Places where the machine is subjected to constant vibration or shock Places where the machine is subjected to excessive vibration or shock Places exposed to direct sunlight Also, be sure that the monitor is not installed at the following places: Places where the monitor is surrounded, such as in a rack case Places whether the display surface is exposed to direct sunlight Places near a transformer, another monitor, a power line, or a 0.02 Gauss or more of AC magnetic field
1.4 Power Requirements Power voltage/capacity 100 VAC / approx. 0.11 kVA
Remarks Supplied from a 100 VAC wall outlet
Phase : Single phase Power frequency : 50/60 Hz Grounding : Ground resistance: 100Ω or less
1.5 Network Cable Use an IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A1
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL installation.
REFERENCE
Startup procedure
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility.
The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF.
1. To exit the AP, choose “Shut Down”.
When the PC power is OFF
1.
2. Click
Turn ON the PC power.
3. From the menu, sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
u NOTE u Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC, otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly.
2.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a few seconds.
while holding down the key.
3.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
The Service Utility starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
00000404.EPS
MU000032.EPS
The password entry window opens.
MU000035.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A2
When the PC power is ON
REFERENCE
1.
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility.
Clicking “Shut Down” in the
(or
)
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit window. Click
1. To exit the AP, choose “Shut Down”.
while holding down the
2. Click
key.
2.
From the
3. From the menu, sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
menu, sequentially choose “Programs”,
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
“Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
3.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a few seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
while holding down the key.
4.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
The Service Utility starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
MU000032.EPS
00000404.EPS
The password entry window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A3
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility
Exit procedure
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the “IIP Service Utility” window.
IN000117.EPS
The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A4
3. Installation Procedure Overview
3. Installation Procedure Overview IMPORTANT Be sure that the following equipment is completely installed and set up. CR-IR346RU See Chapters 1 to 8 of “Installation” of the RU Service Manual. Other equipment (LP, FN-PS551, HI-C655, RIS, etc.) See the installation instructions set forth in the respective service manuals.
IMPORTANT Have on hand a CD-R disk that stores the CL’s AP key (114Y5342002A), which is distributed for use in servicing. Use the AP key of version A00 or later.
1. Check the supplied component items, install the CL accessories, and make cable connections to the RU and LP.
“4. CL Hardware Setup”
2. Set up the software related to the CL and RU. The major procedures are indicated below: • Make preparations for CL-AP startup (e.g., driver, option key, and AP key installation). • Set up the software for RU operations (e.g., RU-AP installation). • Set up the CL system information (e.g., hospital name). • Perform CL-Config setup that is needed for the connection of the other equipment (HI-C655, QA-WS, etc.).
“5. Software Setup”
3. Verify the connection between the CL and RU as well as the connections to the other equipment. Also, generate film printouts to check for an improper format, unevenness on printed films, sensitivity, density and abnormal output characters.
“6. Checkout Procedures”
4. Back up the CL and RU setup files. Also, check the RU error mode, and delete an error log after completion of the check.
“7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/ Deletion”
5. Complete the installation procedures for the CL and RU.
See Chapter 10 and beyond in “Installation” of the RU Service Manual. 00056004.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A5
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking
4. CL Hardware Setup
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking Remove the following items from the packing box.
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking
PC (controller) Monitor Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan) Others (options, etc.)
4.2 Checking the Component Items 4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items 4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU
... Install the monitor, PC boards, insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan), keyboard, and mouse.
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
... Do not perform this procedure if the LP is not used.
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment
... Do not perform this procedure if other equipment (HI-C, QA-WS, RIS, etc.) is not used.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CAUTIONS When unloading, transferring, and unpacking the machine, observe the following precautions: Do not subject the machine to vibration or shock. If the machine is unduly vibrated or shocked while it is unloaded or transferred, it may become damaged or defective. Avoid moisture condensation inside the machine. If the machine is subjected to a drastic temperature change when it is transferred or unpacked, moisture condensation may occur inside the machine. If you turn ON the machine while moisture is condensed on its inner surface, the machine may become defective. To avoid such a problem, be sure to allow the machine to stand at a room temperature for a period of 1 hour or longer and then turn ON the power.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A6
4.2 Checking the Component Items
4.2 Checking the Component Items Check that the following component items are fully supplied.
PC box (Product code : IR 346 CL A-B) PC Keyboard Mouse Power cable CL-AP (CD-ROM) XG-1 Standard Key Software (CD-ROM) For details of the component items, see the documentation supplied with the PC0.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Monitor box (Product code : IR 346 DISPLAY LCD (15" monitor with the touch panel) or IR 346 DISPLAY CRT 17 IN (17" CRT monitor)) Monitor Monitor cable Serial cable (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel) Touch panel driver CD (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel) Power cable For details on the component items, see the documentation supplied with the monitor. When a Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300 to check the component parts. When an LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, see manuals provided with the SL-IC200 to check the component parts.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A7
4.2 Checking the Component Items
Others (separately packed items, options, etc.) Description
Product abbreviation
CL insulation power box kit (only for units used in Japan)
IR 346 INSULATION BOX
Local print key CD E-i/f board (PEI01A)
IR 346 LOCAL PRINT
DICOM print key CD
IR 346 DICOM PRINT
Qty. Remarks*1
1 each 1
1
DICOM CR STORAGE (standard/private) key CD
IR 346 DICOM CR STORAGE
1
LCD display stand*2
IR 346 LCD STAND
LCD display wallmounting bracket MFP key CD
IR 346 LCD BRACKET IR 346 MFP
Grid Pattern Removal processing key CD
CL GPR
Barcode reader (with a rack)
IR 346 BARCODE
Magnetic card reader (JIS)
Qty. Remarks*2 1
O
1 each
O
IR 346 MCR JIS
1
O
Magnetic card reader (ISO)
IR 346 MCR ISO
1
O
Magnetic card reader wall-mounting kit
IR 346 MCR BRACKET
1
O
Serial interface board (PSI04A)
IDT-4 IF BD FOR PCI
1
O
Cable for direct printer connection
ODF/PS IF CABLE nM*1
1
O
E-i/f conversion cable (1.2 m)
MF-PS667/DMS IF CBL
1
O
1
IR 346 DMS NET- WORK IN-OUT
FINP input/output key CD
Product abbreviation
Description
1
1
1
V, O
V, O
V, O
V, O
O
O
O
*1 n: Cable length Processed-image output key CD
IR 346 DICOM IM PROCESSED
1
O
*2 O: Option
*1 V: Variation; O: Option *2 Not required if the monitor type used is EIZO L350P-TS.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A8
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items Connect the boards (options), insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan), keyboard, mouse and monitor to the PC as illustrated below: Monitor power cable
Serial cable attached to the monitor* Monitor Monitor port Power source Serial port
PC power cable
Insulating transformer power cable To power Insulating source transformer To medical (only for Japan) grounding terminal Additional protective grounding conductor PSI board (option) RIS, etc.
Back of GX60
To LP
1 2
Mouse Keyboard
PEI board (option) To IR Remote power control box (only when an IR is connected)
* Only when the 15" monitor with the touch panel is used.
IN000001.EPS
u NOTE u Use the first serial port of the two that are provided on the PC.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A9
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
4.3.1 PC Boards To attach optional boards, observe the procedures described herein. PEI board (optional) PSI board (optional) For how to verify setup of and attach the PSI board, see “1. Hardware Setup”, under “CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)” in “OE7: Connection between CL and Other Equipment”.
1.
When connecting printers other than those mentioned on the left side DPSW1 DPSW2 DPSW3 SW0 SW2 and SW5 SW3 and SW4
Check that the switches on the PEI board are properly set. If their settings are incorrect, correct them accordingly.
1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON 1 to 8: ON 1 to 8: OFF 2 and 3 short-circuited. 1 and 2 short-circuited. Jumpers removed.
u NOTE u
1 2 3
SW0
When no remote signal is to be sent to the printer, turn OFF all the DPSW1 switches. When connecting the CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N/ FL-IM3543MN 2 and 3 DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; SW0 3 and 4: ON short-circuited. DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 3 to 8: ON short-circuited. DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed. ON 1 2 3
SW3 SW2
SW0
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
DPSW3
ON
SW3 SW2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF DPSW2 ON DPSW1 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF
1 2 3 4 OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
DPSW3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF DPSW2 ON DPSW1 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF
00000007.EPS
1 2 3 4 OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A10
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
2.
Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot.
u NOTE u The procedure presented below applies when the PC used is GX60. When the PC used is a model other than GX60, see “Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)” under “RI : Reinstalling the Software”.
I. Open the CL-PC cover. II. Holding the card cage handle, remove the card cage. III. Mount a PEI board in the lower PCI slot.
Handle PCI slot II. Card cage III. PEI board
AGP slot
Extension card slot connector
NT
O FR
CL-PC (GX60) IN000022.EPS
IV. Mount the card cage on the CL-PC. V. Close the CL-PC cover.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A11
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
4.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required only for units used in Japan) u NOTE u Ensure that the power cables connected to the insulating transformer are for the CL and monitor only.
2.
Connect the power cable between the insulating transformer and power source.
3.
Turn ON the insulating transformer.
OFF
1.
Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC. For details on the connection procedures, see the documentation supplied with the PC.
CAUTION For a PC provided with the source voltage changeover switch (between 115 and 230 VAC), set the PC source voltage according to the voltage supplied to the institution concerned and then connect the power cable to the power source.
Connect the power cable to the power source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
(3) Power ON
1.
Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
2.
Connect the power cable to the insulating transformer.
3.
Use the long bracket to secure that the power cable is not disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
(2) Power cable To power source
(1) Two connector covers
Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
2.
ON
Insulating transformer
4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable
For details on the connection procedures, see the documentation supplied with the PC.
Insulating transformer 00000301.EPS
Secure the long bracket using the two connector cover retaining screws. 00000383.EPS
REFERENCE To secure cables, eight brackets (four each of long and short ones) are attached to the insulating transformer. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A12
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
4.3.4 Monitor
1.
The following monitors can be connected. The connection procedure varies with the monitor type. 15" monitor with the touch panel 17" CRT monitor Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 For the connection procedure of the Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
LCD Monitor SL-IC200 For the connection procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200, see manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
For the 15" monitor with the touch panel The work procedures will differ depending on the installation method adopted of the monitor.
u NOTE u Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between PC and monitor. If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the touch panel driver may not be installed.
2.
Connect the power cable between the monitor and power source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
u NOTE u Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between PC and monitor. If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the touch panel driver may not be installed.
If the monitor type used is EIZO’s L350/351P-TS, it is stable enough even without optional rack for actual operations. Thus, it is not necessary now for you to mount optional rack.
Installation method 2 To replace the monitor with a wall-mounting type monitor, replace first the bracket with a wall-mounting type (option). Perform then step 1. thereafter.
For details on cable connections, see the documentation supplied with the monitor.
Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
REFERENCE
Installation method 1 To continue to use the monitor rack, perform step 1. thereafter.
Connect the monitor cable and serial cable to the PC.
2.
Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating transformer.
3.
Use the short bracket to secure that the power cable is not disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
When using the wall-mounting bracket, see “Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket [Option]” to replace the monitor rack.
Insulating transformer Secure the short bracket using the two connector cover retaining screws. 00000384.EPS 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A13
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
For the 17" CRT monitor
1.
Connect the monitor cable between the PC and monitor.
Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
2.
Connect the power cable between the monitor and power source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
2.
Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating transformer.
3.
Use the short bracket to secure that the power cable is not disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
Insulating transformer Secure the short bracket using the two connector cover retaining screws. 00000384.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A14
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU Connect a network cable between the RU and CL.
When using an E-i/f LP, connect an E-i/f cable between the LP and CL.
For the stand-alone type (independent type) RU operation Connect a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (cross) cable between the RU and CL. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (cross) LP
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
CL
LP
CL E-i/f cable
PEI board 00000035.EPS
RU 00000027.EPS
For the network type RU operation With 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX (straight) cables, connect the RU to the CL via a hub. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (straight) CL
HUB
10BASE-T cable (straight)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (straight) RU Other connected hosts (FN-PS, QA-WS, etc.) 00000028.EPS
u NOTES u Even if the CL and RU will eventually be incorporated into the network of a hospital for operation, connect the CL and RU while they are independent of the network (not incorporated into the hospital’s network). Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and RU network connectors. The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
REFERENCE The RU cable connector is located on the lower-left on the rear of the RU main unit. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A15
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment Connect the following equipment to the CL. HI-C654/HI-C655/QA-WS/ODF (FINP connection) See “1. Hardware Setup”, under “CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output)” in “OE2: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW/Synapse server (DICOM connection) See “1. Hardware Setup”, under “CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/ FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)” in “OE3: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
Other manufacturer’s equipment (DICOM CR Storage connection) See “1. Hardware Setup”, under “CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: transfer of processed images)” in “OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
DRYPIX, FM-DP L (DICOM Print) See “1. Hardware Setup”, under “CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/ FM-DP L (DICOM Print)” in “OE5: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A16
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5. Software Setup
5.1 CL-AP Startup The following procedures must be performed for CL-AP startup:
5.1 CL-AP Startup
... Make preparations for CL-AP startup (e.g., touch panel driver, option key, and AP key reinstallation).
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
... Perform setup for RU operations (e.g., RU M-Utility installation, RU-AP installation, and RU-Config setup).
5.3 Setup with Service Utility ... Perform CL system information setup (system information and IDT functionality), LP setup, and film annotation character setup. Replace menu database for equipment used abroad. 5.4 Procedures for Changing the .. This procedure is to be performed as CL and RU IP Addresses needed. 5.5 Procedures for Changing ... This procedure is to be performed as the CL Host Name needed. 5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other Equipment 5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic ... This procedure is to be performed as Card Reader Connection needed.
OS startup OS setups Touch panel driver installation Option key installation AP key reinstallation CL-AP startup verification
u NOTES u Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP. When setting procedures to be performed are different between Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
REFERENCE The following OS setup and software installation steps are completed at factory prior to shipment: CL setup steps CL IP address (172.16.1.20) Subnet mask (255.255.0.0) CL host name (CLxxxxxxxx, CRxxxxxxxx, CPxxxxxxxx: eight lowest digits of a manufacturer’s serial number in the xxxxxxxx position) Administrator password setup (fcr-iip) Display setup (screen saver, screen resolution, etc.) MS-IME setup (only for units used in Japan) CL-AP (MSDE and SQL included) installation XG-1 Standard Key Software installation AP key installation Image database initialization RU setup steps FTP server configuration and setup RU information registration for CL-Config (host name, IP address, and connected equipment information)
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A17
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.2 OS Setups
5.1.1 OS Startup u NOTE u
Perform the following OS-related setups.
Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC, otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly.
Setting the date, time and time zone. Defining the character to be used as a decimal point [applicable only to part of the area where the English software is used.]
1.
Turn ON the PC power. The following error display opens 10 seconds after CL-AP startup.
Setting the date, time, and time zone
1.
Perform settings as follows. For Windows 2000 Double-click
on the desktop.
The “My Computer” window opens.
Double-click
.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
For Windows XP 00000421.EPS
Select
IMPORTANT The above error display opens because an output system (print or image transfer) option key has not been installed/set up when the equipment was newly installed. For error details, see “3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
2.
Click
from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Date/Time Properties” window opens.
.
The error display opens again in about 20 seconds.
00000216.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A18
5.1 CL-AP Startup
3.
Verify the date and time. If the date and time indicated are incorrect, correct them accordingly and then click .
5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure if the 15" monitor with a touch panel is provided.] When the 15" monitor with the touch panel is going to be used, it is necessary to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel.
Installing the driver
1.
Click
5.
Verify the time zone setting.
.
If the setting is wrong, correct it and then click
To install the touch panel driver using the FD or employ the L362T monitor, see “Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver”.
For the previous-version CD-ROM When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like that shown below opens automatically. Click “Install MonitorMouse for Windows 2000”.
00000115.EPS
4.
Insert the driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
. IN000105.EPS
6. 7.
Click
.
00000117.EPS
For the new-version CD-ROM When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like that shown below opens automatically. Click “Install Drive For This Computer”. Click then “Install Serial Driver” on another window that opens.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Close the “Control Panel” window.
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point Select “.” (period) as the character to be sued as a decimal point. If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you select an image distribution destination with the QA function. This setup is applicable only to part of the area where the English software is used.
For details of the setup procedure, see “ Defining the character to be used as a decimal point” in “2.1.3 Setting the OS” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN000106.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A19
5.1 CL-AP Startup
After a while, the “Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup” window opens.
5.
Clic k
.
In about one minute, a window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
IN000104.EPS
2.
Click
.
The license agreement window opens. 00000418.EPS
00000412.EPS
3.
Click
.
6.
Click
.
The “Updating System Settings” window opens.
The port selection window opens.
7.
Remove the CD-ROM from the PC’s drive.
8.
Click
.
The PC restarts. The touch panel adjustment window will then opens automatically.
u NOTE u 00000413.EPS
u NOTE u
Start adjusting the touch panel as soon as the window below has opened, otherwise it will close with the touch panel left unadjusted.
An error will occur if the serial cable of the LCD display provided with a touch panel is connected to serial port No. 2.
4.
Click
.
The “Digital Signature Not Found” window opens in several seconds.
00000422.EPS
00000415.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A20
5.1 CL-AP Startup
Adjusting the touch panel
2.
u NOTE u The following window may suddenly open during the touch panel adjustment process. It does not indicate any touch panel adjustment problem. Click
Touch the The
3.
mark gently with your finger. mark moves to the upper right of the window.
Gently touch the
mark again with your finger.
The “Check Video Alignment” window opens.
to close the window and then continue with the
touch panel adjustment process.
00000316.EPS
4.
00000321.EPS
Click
.
u NOTE u
1.
With your finger, gently touch the
mark at the upper left
Click
of the window.
within a period of 30 seconds. Failure to click
within a 30-seco nd period invalidates the previous adjustments made.
Mark
The “Elo TouchSystems Setup” window opens.
5.
Deselect click
(
) and then
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
u NOTE u If a window opens to prompt FD insertion, click
00000227.EPS
mark moves to the lower right of the window. (A beep The will sound.) 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
.
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound) of the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel driver.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A21
5.1 CL-AP Startup
Adjusting the contrast and brightness Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows.
Model 9416TD15/H2 Contrast : 127 (Press the “Menu” switch on the right-hand side of the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.) Brightness : 255 (Press the or button on the right-hand side of the monitor while the “Main Menu” is not displayed on the screen.)
5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the following procedure as needed.
1.
(For Windows XP, select “Control Panel” from the menu.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1 Contrast : 65% (Press the “Menu” switch on the right-hand side of the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.) Brightness : 100% (Press the or button on the right-hand side of the monitor while the “Main Menu” is not displayed on the screen.)
From the menu, point to “Settings”, and then click “Control Panel”.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
Double-click
.
The “Power Options Properties” window opens.
3.
Click the “Advanced” tab (“Advance” tab for Windows XP).
Model L350P-TS Contrast : 80% Brightness : 80% (Press the “Enter” switch on the front of the monitor to adjust the brightness by selecting , then .)
IN000110.EPS
4.
Uncheck ( ).
Model L351P-TS Contrast : 90% Brightness : 90% (Press the “Enter” switch on the front of the monitor to adjust the brightness by selecting , then .)
Model L362T Contrast : Default (not determined) Brightness : 90%
IN000109.EPS
5.
Click
and then close the Control Panel.
You are returned to the desktop screen. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A22
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [applicable only in Japan] To have the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons be displayed on the CL-AP main window, those icons must be installed properly ahead of time.
Function Print output
Product Abbreviation IR346 LOCAL PRINT
LP (local printer) connection
IR346 DICOM PRINT
DICOM Print function
For how to install the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons, see “FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [applicable only in Japan]” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”. IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
5.1.6 Option Key Installation The following option keys are available. Install necessary option keys in compliance with the CL installation specifications.
IMPORTANT
Image input/output
Either the image input/output function or print output option key must be installed. If it is not installed, an error display (error code: 50001) will be indicated during CL-AP startup, resulting thus in disabling the CL-AP to be started up. Moreover, when the “IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE” or “IR346 DICOM PRINT” option key has been installed, be sure to perform configuration settings that result from Storage or DICOM Print. (This is because an error would occur if only optional key is installed.) The 50001 error display will be indicated if an output system (for print or image output) option key has not been installed/set up properly. For error details, see “3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options” under “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED
IR346 DMS NETWORK IN-OUT
Image processing
Description
DICOM-based image transmission functions available (Also include a function to transmit unstandardized images to the QA-WS.) Options installed are as follows. CR Storage SCU (Standard) CR Storage SCU (Private) (“Private Unstandardized CR Storage” is included in “Private”.) Functions available for processedimage transmission with DICOM The option installed is as follows. Processed image generation Function for image transfer (input/ output) with FINP Options installed are as follows. FINP output FINP input (Supports only the reprint function.)
IR346 MFP
MFP image processing
CL GPR
Grid Pattern Removal processing function
REFERENCE Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD-ROM for each product.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A23
5.1 CL-AP Startup
The installation procedure is described below. The same installation procedure applies to all the option keys. For the option key uninstallation procedure, see “Appendix A Uninstalling the APs” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
1.
Insert an option key CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation start window automatically opens in several seconds.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
The indication varies with the option key for installation.
5.1.7 AP Key Installation u NOTE u Install the AP key after all option keys have been installed. This is because once an option key has been installed, the AP key is invalidated requiring thus the AP key to be reinstalled.
REFERENCE The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry information is generated to define the encryption key. The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is installed. Install the AP key as follows:
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the CD-ROM drive. After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
2. Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
00000416.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
u NOTE u Depending on the option for installation, the installation start window will be displayed some times. Perform steps 2. and 3. as well.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
5.
To install other option key, change the CD and repeat steps 2 through 4.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.
Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A24
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.1.8 CL Startup Verification Verify the normal startup of the CL.
1.
From the
menu, select “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and
then “FCR”. The CL opening window appears on the display. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts up.
The CL is shipped from factory without installing the RU-AP (the RU is installed with the RU-AP). It is thus necessary to install the RU-AP in the CL. To operate the RU, the RU-AP data, etc. must have been installed in the CL. For installation of the RU-AP, the use of the RU M-Utility is required. The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that implements RU-AP installation, Configuration backup and other functions. Since also the RU M-Utility is not installed in the CL prior to shipment, it needs to be installed upon equipment installation.
u NOTE u
00000195.EPS
• When the OS used is Windows XP, be sure to use RU software version A09 or later. • When the OS used is Windows Vista, be sure to use RU software version A13 or later.
u NOTE u If the above window does not open or an error display appears, note the displayed error code and the applicable remedy, and then make necessary corrections to achieve AP startup. See “1. Error Code Table” in “MT: Machine Troubleshooting”.
2.
Click
in the
REFERENCE The RU-AP and RU M-Utility are included in the CD provided with the RU.
menu.
The exit window opens.
3.
Hold down the key and click
.
The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop screen.
REFERENCE To shut down the CL-AP only, click [Shut Down] and then [OK] while holding down the [Shift] key.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A25
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility
4.
The RU M-Utility installation procedure is described herein on the assumption that the RU application CD-ROM version A07 or later is used for the RU M-Utility (PC-MUTL hereinafter) that is to be installed as follows. A different installation procedure will be required if a version earlier than that mentioned above is used.
1.
.
After the completion of installation, the “FCR TOOL Setup/ Completing the...” window opens.
u NOTES u
Make sure to start the procedure below with the CL-AP quit accordingly.
Click
00000188.EPS
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS” window.
Have on hand the CD that is supplied with the RU. Insert this CD into the CD-ROM drive. After a while, the following window opens.
00000322.EPS
6.
Click
.
The “CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY” main menu window opens. Main menu window (the display differs depending on the software version used.)
00000214.EPS
2.
Click
.
The RU M-Utility installation start window opens.
00000185.EPS
3.
Cli ck
.
The “FCR TOOL Setup/Read to Install...” window opens. 010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000215.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
IN-A26
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP
2.
Verify the network connection between the CL and RU, and then install the RU AP in the CL’s FTP server.
Reply from 172.16.1.10: bytes=32 timeL
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP
Surgi
01
(10) Film mark (7) Gender (8) Age or birth date
0000000001 MARY ADAMS 1992 11 27 [17:43]
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE 50% RT-04
(8) Requesting department (9) Group process information (11) Reduction ratio (14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time (16) Image reversal mark (6) Exposure date (15) Normalization conditions + corrections (19) Technologist's code 00000034.EPS 010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE5-16
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Make a backup of the CL setup file. For making a backup, have the following item on hand: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup“ under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE5-17
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE5-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE5-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE5-20
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)
Connection/setup example • HOST name : FCR-CSL* • IP address : 172.16.1.20*
This chapter presents the procedure for printing images using the FINP via the FN-PS551 or 5000 series.
CL
IMPORTANT When using the FINP, the film character format specified will be printed out in accordance with the film format file defined in the FN-PS551 or 5000 series. Have the film character format be set up on the FN-PS551 or 5000 series. Note that a film character format set up on the CL will not be enabled.
Image transfer
TCP/IP
Print output
FRUP Other connected equipment
RU
LP
NOTE The “CR-IR346/348CL” and “FN-PS 551” or “5000 series” are abbreviated hereafter simply “CL” and “other connected equipment”, respectively.
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: A00 or later The FINP image input/output option key (IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT) is necessary.
• HOST name : FN-PS551* • IP address : 172.16.1.30* • Device attribute : PRINT* • Protocol ID : 110* Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need be changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
00000252.EPS
FN-PS551 requirements The FN-PS551 main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: A04 or later. 5000 series requirements The 5000 series main unit must have been set up accordingly.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-1
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)
Overall operation flow Use a network cable to connect the CL to other connected equipment and an E-i/f cable to connect it to a printer.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Make setups for transferring images to other connected equipment. Install the option key and reinstall the AP key. Make then the following setups. • Setup for other connected equipment (device attributes, data compression type, etc.) Perform the following as required. • Setup for changing the image compression type depending on the MPM code. • Registration of printer used for automatic image printout when a study is completed.
“2. Software Setup”
Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment to make sure that films can be printed from the printer.
“3. Connection Checkout”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Backing up the Setup File” 00000255.EPS
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated below. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX Cable TCP/IP
RU
CL
Other connected equipment
Printer
E-i/f Cable 00000253.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL and other connected equipment. The cable type applicable to these equipment models (CR-IR346CL and FN-PS5551) is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-3
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
Set up software for the CL and other connected equipment. Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other items.
To transfer images to other connected equipment using the FINP, the IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT option key is needed.
1.
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.3 Service Utility Startup 2.4 Printout Setup 2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES) 2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)
Insert the option key CD into the PC.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Tasks done on the CL
00000085.EPS
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
3.
.
The installation start window opens again.
4.
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown 2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment CL host name and IP address settings Basic printout settings Film character format settings
Click Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
· · · Tasks done on other connected equipment
5.
Click
.
The system return to the desktop screen.
6.
Remove the CD from the PC.
REFERENCE The installation start window opens twice because the two kinds of keys, for image input and output, are stored on the FINP image input/ output option key CD.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-4
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
2.3 Service Utility Startup 1.
In about one minute after Windows is started up, the CL-AP launches itself.
REFERENCE
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility mode as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
Turn ON the CL power.
2.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
The password entry window opens.
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-5
2.4 Printout Setup
REFERENCE If you cannot complete step 2. above from the initial window within a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility mode. 1. To exit the AP, choose “Shut Down” on the
(or
2.4 Printout Setup Set up the printout function as follows for other connected equipment.
Setup overview Service Utility “Setup Configuration Item” window
) menu. 2. Click [OK] while holding down the key on the shutdown window. 3. From the “Start” menu, sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
3.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
I
.
II
The Service Utility mode starts. The “IIP Service Utility” window opens. 00000054.EPS
OE000034.EPS
4.
Click [Setup Configuration Item]. The “Setup Cofiguration Item” window opens.
Setup of information on other connected equipment (I on the window display) Host name and IP address of other connected equipment Selection of protocol used (FINP) by other connected equipment Setup of the protocol ID (FINP100/110) of other connected equipment Setup of attribute of other connected equipment Setups for handling HQ images and image compression type Setup for changing the image data compression type depending on the MPM code (II on the window display) Perform this setup only when transferring images by changing the data compression type depending on the MPM code.
NOTE To enable this setup, the field must have been activated before setting the image data compression type (ALL OTHER NODES). 00000077.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-6
2.4 Printout Setup
4.
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)
1.
Enter the host name (e.g.: “FN-PS551”) of other connected equipment in
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the “IIP Service Utility” window.
5.
.
Enter the IP address (e.g.: “172.16.1.30”) of other connected equipment in
6.
.
Make sure that
is selected in the
column.
7.
Click
.
The “FINP Setup” window opens.
00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000404.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field. and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
00000436.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-7
2.4 Printout Setup
8.
Set information of other connected equipment as follows. I
II
III
IV
III. Select HQ images. Select
if other connected equipment can receive if it can receive mammographic images as well.
IV. Select when transferring HQ images to other connected equipment. V. Select the image data compression type used for transferring images to other connected equipment.
Select when transferring images by changing the data compression type depending on the MPM code. See “2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)”.
VI. To transfer annotation-embedded images, select . to transfer images not embedded with annotation. Select
V
VI 00000437.EPS
I.
Select the protocol ID ( equipment supports.
II. Select the device attribute ( equipment.
) that other connected ) for other connected
REFERENCE Select “PRINT” for the 5000 series and FN-PS551. Select “HD_FILE” for the HI-C/QA-WS system. Select “OD_FILE” for the ODF system. Select “OTHER” for the CL.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-8
2.4 Printout Setup
9.
Click
10. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu.
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCES Items just have been set up will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
11. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
. If the
key is pressed, currently selected items are
deleted. Device attribute
Protocol ID
Handling of HQ images Image data compression type
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Annotation transfer
00000438.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-9
2.4 Printout Setup
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)
3.
Set I. and II. on the display as follows.
Perform the following settings only when is selected for the image data compression type in “ALL OTHER NODES”.
I
1.
II
Select Item” window.
of the “Setup Configuration
A list showing the data compression type for each MPM code will be displayed on the right-side area of the window.
00000440.EPS
I.
List showing the data compression type for each MPM code
Select the exposure menu name.
REFERENCE The MPM code that is for the exposure menu selected will be displayed in the “MPM Code” column. Using the User Utility, the user thus can view which MPM code is for the exposure menu selected. II.
4.
Click
.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window. The MPM code set as above and the image data compression type for the code will appear on the right side of this window.
00000439.EPS
2.
Select the image data compression type.
5.
To set image data compression types for other MPM codes, repeat steps 2. to 4.
The “FINP Compression Type” window opens.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-10
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed – CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed – CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Described herein is the procedure used for registering the printer for automatic image printout when a study is completed. For a printer that outputs prints only through the QA operation, no registration is required at this step.
1.
Click Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
4.
Click
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Save”. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
6.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the window.
00000081.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “CONNECTING EQUIPMENT” window opens.
3.
Perform the following setup steps: Click the downward arrow mark
in the
field and select the function (PRINT) of the connected device. Click the downward arrow mark
in the field and select the host name
(e.g.: “FN-PS551”) of other connected equipment.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-11
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown 1.
Select “Close” from the “Config (F)” menu of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. The system return to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system return to the desktop screen.
2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment Make the following settings on other connected equipment. FN-PS 551 CL host name and IP address settings Basic printout settings Film character format settings See “7. Service Utility” in the Maintenance section of the FN-PS551 Service Manual.
5000 series EQUIPMENT (EQUIP file) settings HOST ADDRESS (HOST file) settings Film annotation character format (PRINT file) settings See “MU: Maintenance Utility” of the 5000 series Service Manuals.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-12
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout
3.2 Printout Checkout
After the CL-AP has been started up, make sure that images can be transferred from the CL to the FN-PS551.
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.1 CL-AP Startup From the
Print out a read image. For details on the print output procedure, see “FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL” in the CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Printout Checkout
1.
Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment to make sure that films can be printed from the printer.
2.
Make sure that the output queue of other connected equipment displays images transferred from the CL.
3.
When prints are output to the printer, make sure that those printouts are as per the film character format that has been set up on other connected equipment.
Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise abnormal character printings.
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-13
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Make a backup of the CL setup file. For making a backup, have the following item on hand: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE6-16
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) Presented herein is the procedure used for setup of the ID Online function that acquires patient information from the RIS.
NOTES The connection system will differ with each other for RIS and IDC4. The “CR-IR346/348CL” is abbreviated hereafter simply “CL”.
Before setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Software version required: A00 or later. The patient information online option key (IR346 ID ONLINE) is needed.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Overall operation flow For the RIS, add a serial connector and use a serial cable to connect the CL to the RIS. For the IDC4, use a network cable to connect the CL to the IDC4.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Install the patient information online option key, reinstall the AP key and make setups for the patient information online configuration file.
“2. CL Software Setup”
Make sure that the patient information can be received from the RIS or IDC4 and the ID Online function works properly.
“3. Verifying the Connection”
Back up the patient information online function configuration file.
“4. Backing Up the Setup File”
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-1
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector [Only when using the serial i/f]
1. Hardware Setup Set up hardware as follows for the CL and RIS. 1.1 Adding a Serial Connector · · · Add a serial connector to the CL-PC (only when using the [Only when using the serial i/f). serial i/f] 1.2 Connecting the Cable
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector [Only when using the serial i/f] When using the serial i/f, add a serial connector as appropriate. For details on how to add a serial connector, see “1. Adding a Serial Connector” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
· · · RIS: Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the RIS. IDC4: Use a network cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-2
1.2 Connecting the Cable
1.2 Connecting the Cable RIS (serial i/f cable) Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the RIS. When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS. Serial connector CL
RIS
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable + relay adapter + conversion cable 00000492.EPS IDC4 Use a network cable to connect the CL to the IDC4. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX Cable TCP/IP CL
IDC4 OE000008.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors. The cable type applicable to this CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-3
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation
2. CL Software Setup 2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation 2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation To use the ID Online function, the IR346 ID ONLINE option key is needed.
1.
Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.3 Driver Installation
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.4 Service Utility Startup 2.5 Port and Sevice Utility Setup
Insert the optional key CD into the PC.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of option key installation.
2.6 Configuration Setup 2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection 2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection 2.7 Service Utility Shutdown
00000241.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-4
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
2.3 Driver Installation When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant driver. For details of the driver installation procedure, see “2. Installing the Driver” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-5
2.4 Service Utility Startup
2.4 Service Utility Startup 1.
From the
REFERENCE If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility:
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and then “FCR”.
1. To exit the AP, choose “Shut Down” on the
The CL-AP will start up.
2.
(or
) menu.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
2. Click [OK] while holding down the key on the shutdown window. 3. From the “Start” menu, sequentially choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
3.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens.
The Service Utility mode starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000403.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-6
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B) or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly after adding a serial connector. For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see “3. Port and Service Utility Settings” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
2.6 Configuration Setup Set up the following configuration items for the ID Online function. Setting items will differ with each other for the RIS and IDC-IV. RIS IDC4
“2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection” “2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection”
Configuration Item
RIS IDC4
CP850(DOSLatin1)/ CP1252(WINLatin1)
No. of the CH to be inserted into the PSI board connector
Short/Long format
34 Various timeout No changes are required for settings. 35 values
Search key 36 type
ID No./Reception No./Accession No. (only when TypeB or Type-IDC4 is set for the i/f type.)
37 i/f type
TypeA/TypeB/Type-IDC4
31 Code set used 32
Serial port number
33 i/f format
38
IDC4 host name
idc4 (default)
39
IDC4 IP address
172.16.1.1 (default)
40
IDC4 port number
13001 (default)
: Essential
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remarks
: As required
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-7
2.6 Configuration Setup
2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection
1.
2.
Click
.
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the “IIP Service Utility” window.
IDT/Console function setup items
00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens. OE000038.EPS
3.
Select for
a Latin font code set
to be used for ID online connection. For details of the code set, see “ Detailed explanations” in “3.6 Configuration Details – 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
00000404.EPS
4.
In accordance with the PSI board CH No., set up a serial port .
number for
5.
To use extended format for the i/f format, change setting for to “1.Long”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-8
2.6 Configuration Setup
6.
Select i/f type for
7.
.
When “Type-B” has been selected in step 6. above, select for the search key type used.
REFERENCE Type-A : Used when transferring ID information from the RIS (no queries will be made by the CL). Type-B : Used when making queries by the CL with the search key to acquire ID information that corresponds to the search key from the RIS. CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
u NOTE u For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be used. For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
REFERENCE 0 : ID# 1 : ID#&RECEPT# 2 : ID#&EXAM# 3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#
ID No. only ID No. and Reception No. ID No. and Accession No. ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
If "Type-B" is selected, the search key entry box appears. If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear. 00000493.EPS
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software Search key (This window represents an example when “3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#” has been selected.) 00000494.EPS
If "Type-B" is selected, appears on the right of the search key entry box. If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear.
00000122.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-9
2.6 Configuration Setup
2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software
1.
On the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Configuration Item].
Search key (This window represents an example when “3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#” has been selected.)
00000131.EPS
00000120.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
8.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
9.
Click
.
00000404.EPS
The system saves the setup data.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-10
2.6 Configuration Setup
2.
Click
.
The IDT/console function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
IDT/Console function setup items
6.
With
, select a key type for search
(search key).
NOTE For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be used. For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
REFERENCE 0 : ID# 1 : ID#&RECEPT# 2 : ID#&EXAM# 3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#
ID No. only ID No. and Reception No. ID No. and Accession No. ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
OE000038.EPS
3.
With
, select a Latin font code
set for ID online connection. For detailed code set descriptions, see “ Detailed explanations” in “3.6 Configuration Details – 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
4.
When using an extended format as the interface format, change the
5.
Change the
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
setting to “1. Long”. setting to
Search key (This window represents an example when “3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#” has been selected.)
.
00000494.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-11
2.7 Service Utility Shutdown
2.7 Service Utility Shutdown
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software
1.
Select “Close” from the “Config (F)” menu of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.
Click “Exit Service Utility”. The system returns to the desktop screen.
Search key (This window represents an example when “3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#” has been selected.) 00000120.EPS
7.
In the
field, enter the IDC4 host
name.
8.
In the
field, enter the IDC4 IP
address.
9.
In the
field, enter the IDC4
port number.
10. From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Save”. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
11. Click
.
The system saves the entered setup data.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-12
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verifying the Connection
Version B software
Receive patient information from the RIS to verify the CL connection. 3.1 Starting the CL-AP 3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout Type-A setup checkout procedure Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout procedure
OE000099.EPS
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and then “FCR”. The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. Version A software
OE000017.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-13
3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout
3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout
Version B software
Shown below are the procedures used for connection checkout of Type-A, Type-B and Type-IDC4 interface setups.
Type-A setup checkout procedure
1.
Enter patient information on the RIS. The patient information entered will be transferred to the CL automatically.
2.
Patient information transferred from the RIS
OE000101.EPS
Check to see that the patient information items appear on the CL study registration display. Version A software
Patient information transferred from the RIS 00000496.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-14
3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout
2.
Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout procedure
1.
Enter the search key on the CL study registration display and click
(or
If patient information that is for the search key entered is detected on the RIS or IDC4, it will appear on the CL study registration display. Version A software
).
Version A software
Patient information transferred from the RIS Select the search key type and enter the search key. 00000497.EPS
Version B software Select the search key type.
Enter the search key.
OE000010.EPS
Version B software 00000121.EPS
Target patient information will be searched for on the RIS or IDC4.
Patient information transferred from the RIS
OE000102.EPS
NOTE If the target patient information is not found on the RIS or IDC4, a message will appear to indicate that no such information has been registered to the RIS. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-15
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Make a backup of the CL setup file. For making a backup, have the following item on hand: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE7-16
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS) This chapter describes the DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS setup procedures. MWM Abbreviation of the “Modality Worklist Management” function, which enables the CL to receive via networks patient information or exposure menu registered to the RIS and view it on the study reception window. The CL offers two kinds of MWM: MWM(ORDER) that receives both patient information and exposure menu and MWM (ID) that receives only patient information. PPS Abbreviation of the “Performed Procedure Step” function, which is responsible for sending patient's actual measurement values determined on the CL back to the RIS. Basically, the PPS function is used combined with MWM. Note however that the RIS does not support the PPS function depending on the model. For this reason, the CL offers the MWM and PPS functions individually.
NOTE The“CR-IR348CL” is abbreviated hereafter simply “CL”.
Prior to setup CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: A02 or later. The following option keys are needed. Key Name Functions Supported a. CL DICOM ORDER MWM key* Modality Worklist Management (patient information and exposure menu) b. CL DICOM ID MWM key* Modality Worklist Management (only patient information) c. CL DICOM PPS key Performed Procedure Step * Variation 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Connection/setup examples The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to describe the setup procedure. RIS setup example RIS_A* /172.16.1.80*............................. RIS_SCP* /5010*............................... Modality Worklist Management.... SCP.......................................... Performed Procedure Step.......... SCP..........................................
HOST name/IP address AE name/Port number Service Class (for MWM) Role Service Class (for PPS) Role
RIS DICOM MWM
TCP/IP
DICOM PPS RU
CL
CL setup example fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address CL-SCU*/Port number (setup not required**)......................... AE name/Port number Modality Worklist MFIND............... Service Class (for MWM) SCU.......................................... Role Modality Performed Procedure Step.. Service Class (for PPS) SCU.......................................... Role * Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. ** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU. 00000520.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-1
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)
Overall operation flow
MWM/PPS configuration setting information [reference]
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
“1. Hardware Stup”
Make setups for the DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS function. • Optional key installation • AP key reinstallation • DICOM MWM settings • DICOM PPS settings
“2. Software Setup”
When performing DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS setup, you might have to perform configuration setup procedures (IMAGE MODALITY and CSL/IDT FUNCTION) in addition to a normal DICOM connection setup procedure depending on the specifications for the RIS to be connected. Details are given below. For detailed setup procedure, see “2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup”.
When the employed RIS does not support the PPS (or makes the PPS inoperative) Select “No” for IMAGE MODALITY No. 18 (Display Performed Procedure on Worklist Tab). There are no operational problems even if “No” is selected when the employed RIS supports the PPS.
Make the following setups as required. • DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS configuration settings • Name element settings • Setups for exposure menu/study menu mapping Verify DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS operations.
“3. Verifying the Connection”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Backing Up the Setup File”
When the PPS function is not used, the information about the end of study cannot be returned to the RIS. This causes the system to send data about patients who have gone through a study process back to the RIS. For this reason, such data is displayed unavoidably. This configuration setting is used to avoid this situation. When “No” is selected as the configuration setting, the data about patients who have gone through a study process will be deleted from the CL worklist. When the employed RIS is manufactured by T company When T’s RIS is used, consult with the hospital administrator to determine whether or not to enable the following configuration settings. Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS The CL acquires patient information in accordance with a trigger signal from the RIS. Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan The following three items of information will be displayed within the exposure menu information sequence. First information item : Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast, etc.) Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.) Third information item
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
: Direction of exposure (Frontal, Lateral, etc.)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-2
1. Hardware Setup
When the employed RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation condition information When RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation condition information, additional MWM inquiry items can be set. These items should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations at the hospital. The following additional items can be set. Exposure dose sequence Radiation mode X-ray generator tube voltage [kV] to be used X-ray tube current [µA] X-ray exposure time [ms] Label on the filter placed in the X-ray beam X-ray absorption filter material When the employed RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status information through a private tag When the RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status information through a private tag, additional PPS items can be set. These items should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations at the hospital. The following additional items can be set.
1. Hardware Setup Connect the CL to the RIS via networks as illustrated below. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP RU
CL
RIS 00000522.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors. The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
Exposure status sequence Number of split exposures Exposure status
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-3
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation
Set up software for the CL as follows.
➥ REFERENCE
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation
You may install both the MWM (ORDER) option key and the MWM (ID) option key. Local patient information database, which cannot be used if only the MWM (ORDER) option key is installed, becomes available when both are installed.
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function 2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM Function 2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information 2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM 2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function 2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS Function 2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information 2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS 2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup 2.6 Changing Name Elements 2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Compulsory tasks
1.
Insert the DICOM MWM option key CD into the PC. Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. Tasks done only when the PPS function is used.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
Tasks done as necessary. Tasks done only when handling ordering information with the MWM function.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
5.
When using the DICOM PPS function, insert the optional DICOM PPS key CD to install it following the procedure described in steps 2. to 4. above.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-4
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. ➔ After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM MWM function.
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM Function The items listed below must be set up following the procedure described herein using “NETWORK CONFIG” and “THIS HOST (IIP)” of Service Utility mode. CL’s AE name (Application Entity Name) Service Class and Role, Device Attribute (OTHER) Other (timeout setting)
1.
.
➔ A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Start Service Utility mode and click [Setup Configuration Item] window. For how to start Service Utility mode, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC. 00000131.EPS
➔ The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-5
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
field. and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
4.
Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are displayed. CL host name CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE
00000442.EPS
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is connected to a network.
6.
Enter the AE name (e.g. CL-SCU) that is the SCU for the CL field.
in the
5.
Select “DICOM” and click
.
NOTE There is no need to set the Port number in the (Port number) field. When selecting SCU as the Role, the Port number will be disregarded even if it is set.
Select “DICOM”.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000405.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-6
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
7.
Click
11. Click downward arrow
.
in the
field to select “OTHER” for the device attribute.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
NOTE To set the SCU AE on the CL, select “OTHER” for the device attribute for the time being.
12. Click
.
The system return to the “Application Entity List” window. 00000533.EPS
8.
Click downward arrow
13. Click The system returns to the “Setup Configuration” window.
in the field to select Service
Class (Modality Worklist MFIND).
REFERENCE
REFERENCE Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click .
“Verification” is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must have been set.
CL’s AE name
For details of verification of connection, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment - Verify Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
9.
To set up the AE that is the User, select the Role.
(SCU) for
10. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value as necessary.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute)
REFERENCE You need not to check
.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9, above is the SCU. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
If the
00000538.EPS
key is clicked, currently selected items will
be deleted.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-7
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information The items listed below must be registered following the procedure described herein using “NETWORK CONFIG” and “ALL OTHER NODES” of Service Utility mode.
3.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens for setup of RIS information.
RIS host name and IP address RIS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER) Other (usage of two-byte characters, etc.)
1.
Select
of the “Setup Configuration
Item” window and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
2.
Makes the following settings. Enter the Host name (e.g. RIS_A) in the
field.
Enter the IP address (e.g. 172.16.1.80) in the field. Select “DICOM”.
00000444.EPS
4.
Make the following settings. Enter the RIS AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP) in the field.
Select “DICOM”.
00000405.EPS
NOTES Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. Enter the RIS Port number (e.g. 5010) in the field.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-8
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
5.
Click
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM
.
1.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
Click Configuration Item” window.
of the “Setup
A list of connecting equipment units appears on the right-side area of the window.
00000081.EPS
00000533.EPS
6 .
Click downward arrow
in the
field
to select Service Class (Modality Worklist MFIND).
7. 8.
3.
(SCP) is selected for the Role. (
box
Make the following settings. in the
field
to select function (MWM) of the connecting equipment.
).
Click downward arrow
needs not be set. Even if set, it will be disregarded.
Click downward arrow
in the
field
to select AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP).
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
in the
field to select “OTHER” for the device attribute of other connected equipment.
10. Click
.
Click downward arrow
REFERENCE
9.
Click
The “Connecting Equipment” window opens.
Because the RIS AE is the Provider, make sure that To handle two-byte characters, check the
2.
5.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the setup data.
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
11. Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-9
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
2.
Select
— (CL’s AE name).
—
Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM PPS function.
—
NOTE Do not perform settings for the DICOM PPS function if the optional DICOM PPS key has not been installed. Otherwise, an error (30151 or 20110) will occur.
2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS Function Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described herein. Use Service Utility “NETWORK CONFIG” — “THIS HOST (IIP)” for setup purposes. CL’s AE name and device attribute Service Class and Role Other (timeout setting)
1.
00000539.EPS
[Already set in 2.3]
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the “IIP Service Utility” window.
The right-hand side of the window will change to the “DICOMSetup” window.
3.
Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
00000533.EPS
00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-10
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
4.
Click downward arrow
2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information
in the field to select Service
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step).
REFERENCE “Verification” is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must have been set. For details of verification of connection, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
5.
To set up the AE that is the User, select the Role.
Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described herein. Use Service Utility “NETWORK CONFIG” — “ALL OTHER NODES” for setup purposes. RIS host name and IP address RIS AE name, port number and device attribute Service Class and Role Other (usage of two-byte characters)
1.
Select
—
[Already set in 2.3] [Already set in 2.3]
—
(RIS host name) — — (RIS AE name) in the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
(SCU) for
REFERENCE When setting up “SCU”, items in the “DICOMSetup” window that need not be set will be hidden.
6.
Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value ) as necessary.
(
REFERENCE You need not to check . Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 5, above is the SCU.
7.
Click
00000540.EPS
The right-hand side of the window will change to the “DICOMSetup” window.
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-11
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
2.
Click
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS
.
1.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
Click Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-side area of the window.
00000081.EPS 00000533.EPS
3.
Click downward arrow
2.
in the field to select Service
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step).
4.
Make sure that
3.
(SCP) has been selected for the Role
in the
field
and select the function (PPS) of the connected device. Click downward arrow
To handle two-byte characters, check
in the field and select the AE name
. (e.g.: RIS_SCP).
You need not to set
.
Even if set, it will be disregarded.
Click
Perform the following setup steps. Click downward arrow
REFERENCE
6.
.
The “Connection Equipment” window opens.
because the RIS AE is the Provider.
5.
Click
.
4.
Click
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the setup data.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-12
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup Perform the following configuration setup procedures, which are related to the MWM or PPS. General settings for MWM/PPS Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS Setting the additional MWM inquiry items Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan Setting the additional PPS items to be returned to the RIS Setup of timing for transmission of PPS study termination notice Embedding the exposure information into a PPS standard tag Exposure result editing setup Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a menu name Setting the reissue of StudyInstanceUID for a study retrieved by MWM
2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS
1.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2.
3.
Choose
4.
Make the following configuration settings.
.
Setups items related with the IDT functions appear on the righthand side of the window.
Item number
Configuration name
15
Examination No. Length (Character string length of the examination no.)
17
Patient ID Length (Character string length of the patient ID.)
22
Requesting Dept Name Field Setup (Setups for the menu contents to be displayed in the Requesting Department field.)
5.
, then
Description
These items are used to change the character string length in accordance with RIS settings.
This item selects Sbcs or Dbcs in accordance with RIS settings.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
Make the following configuration settings.
Item number
Configuration name
Description
16
SOP Class UID for PPS When No FILE Attribute Output
SOP Class UID to be returned to the PPS when the OD_FILE attribute output destination is not registered at the CL.
17
Protocol Name for PPS
Value to be set for the protocol name of the PPS.
18
Display Performed Procedure on Worklist Tab
This item is used to specify whether the CL worklist should display completed studies. Even if the MWM sends information about completed studies, they will not be displayed when “No” is selected as the setting. Select “No” when the PPS function cannot be used.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-13
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS
Function overview There are the following three methods of making patient information inquiries at the RIS. Trigger signal from the RIS Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 1 Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 2 Trigger signal from the RIS When the CL receives a trigger signal from the RIS, the CL makes inquires at the RIS to acquire patient information. An automatic transition occurs to switch from the worklist tab window to the study start window only when one piece of study information is acquired.
NOTES Trigger signal setup is to be performed only when the connection to T company’s equipment is established.
Setup procedure
1.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2.
With configuration item No. 66, select an inquiry method, and then set RIS information for items No. 64 and 65.
Item number
Configuration name
64
MWM RIS Trigger Port
RIS trigger reception port number for MWM use. Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS trigger reception port.
65
MWM RIS Trigger Timeout
RIS trigger reception timeout value (sec) for MWM use. Study start method for MWM use. Select a method in accordance with the RIS specifications and actual hospital operations.
When two or more pieces of study information are received at a time, the display does not automatically switch to the study start window but the study information remains within the worklist tab. The RIS trigger signal is accepted only when the CL’s worklist tab is selected. If the RIS transmits the trigger signal while a tab other than the worklist tab is selected, a timeout occurs at the RIS.
66
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 1 A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed intervals (user-selectable). Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 2 A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed intervals (user-selectable). An automatic transition occurs to switch from the worklist tab window to the study start window only when one piece of study information is acquired.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Description
3.
MWM Execute Study Type
0: Manual (default) Update procedure to be performed at the CL. 1: Trigger RIS trigger signal. 2: Auto Update procedure to be performed at the CL (automatic window transition).
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-14
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items
2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017 Guideline
Function overview
Function overview
As MWM inquiry items, the following information about radiation conditions can be added. When the PPS is supported, the same information as listed below will be returned to the RIS. Description
DICOM Tag
Meaning
Exposure Dose Sequence
0040,030E
Exposure dose sequence.
>Radiation Mode
0018,115A
Radiation mode.
>KVp
0018,0060
X-ray generator tube voltage [kV] to be used.
>X-ray Tube Current in µA 0018,8151
X-ray tube current [µA].
>Exposure Time
0018,1150
X-ray exposure time [ms].
>Filter Type
0018,1160
Label on the filter placed in the X-ray beam.
>Filter Material
0018,7050
X-ray absorption filter material.
Setup procedure
1.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2.
First information item : Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast, etc.) Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.) Third information item : Direction of exposure (Frontal, Lateral, etc.)
NOTE Setup is to be performed only for the connection to the equipment manufactured by T company.
REFERENCE At the CL, three values of the codes [(0040,0008)>(0008,0100)] fed from the RIS are sequentially concatenated and used as an extended menu code. If, for instance, three menus are fed, a total of nine codes exist. Sets of three items of information are sequentially concatenated, beginning with the leading one, and used as an extended menu code.
Setup procedure
1.
Select “Yes” for the following configuration setting.
Item number
67
3.
When JJ1017 compliance setup is performed, the following three items of information are used within the exposure menu information sequence to decide on the exposure menu.
Configuration name
MWM Request Exposure Dose Status
Description The configuration function for this inquiry item is disabled. This inquiry item will be validated when you add it as one of the inquiries (listed in the table of Function Overview above) to be addressed to the RIS by exercising “14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags”.
The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2.
Select “1: JJ1017” for the following configuration setting.
Item number
68
Use the “Configuration” menu to save the edited data.
3. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then .
Configuration name MWM Exposure Menu Code Treatment
Description Exposure menu code system for MWM use. This item is used to specify the setting in accordance with the RIS specifications. 0: Normal (default) 1: JJ1017 2: JJ1017 (Ver3)
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-15
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the RIS
Function overview The information about exposure status can be added as the PPS information to be returned to the RIS. A private tag is used to return the information. Description
DICOM Tag
Meaning
Exposure Status Sequence
0019,XXA0
>Division Count
>0019,XX71 Number of split exposures.
>Exposure Status
Exposure status >0019,XXA1 (NORMAL: Normal exposure; MIS: Improperly exposed image).
>Exposure Kind
Exposure kind >0019,XXA2 (NORMAL: Normal; ADD: Additional; AGAIN: Reexposure).
Distance Source to Detector
>0018,1110
Exposure status sequence.
Distance between X-ray source and detector.
2.
Choose one of the following three options to determine the time at which the PPS study termination notice should be transmitted to the RIS: : When the study is terminated after receipt of all images. : When the study is terminated after the completion of Subscribe IP registration or when the study is terminated in situations where setup is completed so as to delete unregistered menus. DownloadPDA : At the termination of transmitting the study to the POCKET id Console. Completed
The study completion sequence includes the beginning of the next study in which a magnetic card or the like is used.
Setup procedure
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . Select “1: Status Only” or “2: Status + Other Results” for the following configuration setting. Description Specifying whether the PPS should use a private tag to return the information about exposure status (improperly exposed image, reexposure, etc.).
76
PPS Exposure Status Sequence
0: No (default) Does not return exposure status information. 1: Status Only Returns only exposure status information. 2: Status + Other Results Returns exposure status information along with other results values.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the IDT function.
The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
Item Configuration number name
3.
Function overview
1.
Setup procedure
1.
2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study Termination Notice
2.
Select “0: Complete”, “1: Subscribe”, or “2: DownloadPDA” for the following configuration setting.
Item number
92
3.
Configuration name
PPS N-SET Timming
Description Specifying the time at which the PPS study termination notice (N-SET) should be transmitted to the RIS. 0: Complete [default] 1: Subscribe 2: DownloadPDA
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-16
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a PPS Standard Tag
Function overview This function is exercised at the time of PPS study termination notification to map image-incidental information (divided exposure count, exposure status, and exposure kind) with a PPS standard tag and transmit it to the RIS.
NOTE Although “2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the RIS” states that a private tag is used to return the information to the RIS, the captioned function maps the exposure information with a standard tag and returns it to the RIS.
Setup procedure
1. From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows on its righr-hand side the setup items about the IDT function.
2.
Perform the following configuration settings accordingly.
Item number
90
91
3.
Configuration name
Description
PPS Exposure Status Mapping Tag
Setting the tag for mapping exposure information (divided exposure count, exposure status, and exposure kind). 0040, 0260 > 0008, 0104 [default] If this field is left blank, the mapping operation does not take place.
PPS Exposure Status Mapping Kind
Specifying the exposure information to be mapped. 0: None (default).Does not perform the mapping operation. 1: Div+Status+KindDivided exposure count, exposure status, and exposure kind (all). 2: DivDivided exposure count only. 3: Status+KindExposure status and exposure kind only.
2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup
Function overview The exposure results to be returned to the RIS are edited from the study window at the PPS. The following information items can be edited: Discription
PPS Tag
Item
Setup target
0040,0340>0008,1070
Technologist information
For each study
0019,xxA0>0018,1110
Radiation source-todetector distance (SID)
For each menu (image)
Billing Supplies and Devices Sequence
0040,0324
Contrast media For each consumption study information
Number of Films
0040,0321>2100,0017
Number of films
For each menu (image)
Film SIze ID
0040,0321>2010,0050
Film size
For each menu (image)
Radiation Dose Sequence
0040,030E
X-ray dose
For each X-ray shot
Performed Procedure Step Description
0040,0254
Performed For each procedure step study description
Protocol Name
0040,0340>0018,1030
Protocol name
Operator’s Name Distace Source to Detector (SID)
For each study
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-17
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
Setup procedure
1.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the IDT function.
2.
Perform the following configuration settings accordingly.
Item number
87
Configuration name
PPS Edit Billing Supplies
Description Specifying from the exposure information editing dialog box whether the information about contrast media consumption should be editable.
2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a Menu Name
Function overview The [0040,0100]>[0040,0008]>[0008,0104] Code Meaning acquired from the RIS as the information about a response from the RIS (C-FIND-RSP) will be handled as an exposure menu name. The names received from the RIS will be used as the following menu names: Image-level menu names for various study lists Menu names for the study/QA window Menu names to be displayed on the Image Reader panel Menu names indicated on an output film Menu names for a filing device/image display device (output device) For details on DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup, see “14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags — DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
Yes : Editable. No [default] : Noneditable.
88
PPS Edit Exposure Result
Specifying whether or not to open the exposure information editing dialog box at the PPS for purposes other than radiographer information editing.
Setup procedure
1.
Yes : Opens. No [default] : Does not open.
3.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
From the “Setup Configuration Item” window, choose , then . The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the IDT function.
2.
Select “Yes” for the following configuration setting.
Item number
89
3. 010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Configuration name
MWM Menu Name Mapping
Description Handling the code meaning acquired as the information about a response from the RIS as an exposure menu name. Yes
: Handles as an exposure menu name. No [default] : Does not handle as an exposure menu name.
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the edited data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-18
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function
Function overview The StudyInstanceUID acquired via MWM was not allowed to modify so far, which now became possible to be modified from version V3.0(B). Modification is possible if “Yes” is specified for setup item No. 134 of CSL/IDT FUNCTION. Patient information and the like changed following the configuration settings for the UID generation will consequently modify SOPInstanceUID and StudyInstanceUID at the same time.
● Procedure used for performing configuration settings for generation of UID (applicable as necessary)
1.
Click the mark in the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
2.
Click
field on the
.
Setup item information for the CL system information appears at the right side of the window.
Setup procedure ● Procedure used for performing configuration settings for regeneration of StudyInstanceUID acquired using MWM
1.
Select and then on the “Setup Configuration Item” window. Setup items for the IDT function appear at the right side of the window.
2.
Select “Yes” for the configuration setting below.
Item number
134
3.
Configuration name MWM StudyInstanceUID Regeneration
00000408.EPS
Description Specifying whether or not to permit the MWM StudyInstanceUID to be regenerated. Yes : Permitted. No : Not permitted (default)
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the setup data.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-19
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
3.
Perform the following configuration settings that relate with the UID generation.
Table
UID-related setup items (IMAGE MODALITY)
No
Name
Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. ID Information NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when any ID information is modified on the CL.
10 UID Issuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. Normalized NO Parameter Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when image normalization conditions are modified on the CL.
11 UID Issuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. Image NO Processing Does not issue a new UID. Parameter
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when image processing conditions are modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance Before Sending Processed Data
Whether or not to output an SOP Instance UID as the UID of a processed CR image when outputting processed images from the CL.
YES Issues a new UID. NO Does not issue a new UID.
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance UID issuance logic. Generation Series - 1 image Logic Issues a number so that it See “3.4 Configuration has multiple series for one Details – 1. IMAGE study and only one image for MODALITY” under one series. “MU: Maintenance 0: 1 Study - N series Utility”. and 1 Series - M image Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study and multiple images for one series. 0: 1 Study - 1 series and 1 Series - N image Issues a number so that it has only one series for one study and multiple images for one series.
No
Name
Selection
Meaning
39 UID Issuance YES about a Issues a new UID. function NO (except Image Does not issue a new UID. Processing) to change to the image themselves
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when shuttering processing or energy subtraction processing condition is modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. Trimming NO Parameter Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when trimming information is modified.
46 UID Inssuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. FNC NO Parameter Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when a FNC parameter is modified.
: Default setting
4.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu.
5.
Click
A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
.
The setup data is saved accordingly.
: Default setting 010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-20
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3
■ Setup procedure
1.
NOTES This function cannot be used with portable radiographic function (CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL) (optional). If the exposure menu is added/edited on CL for a study supporting JJ1017 V3, JJ1017 V3 will not be applied to the study. An exposure menu received from RIS is displayed on CL by combining the code which is defined in JJ1017 V3. If a different menu name has been set for the menu code from User Utility, the contents to be displayed will be different. Up to 28 characters of menu name can be displayed on CL after being combined. Be careful when using menus with long codes. If a normal menu or a menu for JJ1017 V3 is edited in User Utility, the menu will be registered as a normal exposure menu when the first and last half of the extended menu code are left blank. If JJ1017 V3 is set, the study which can be received from RIS will be only the menu supporting JJ1017 V3. The mapping database will be backed up/restored in V8.0 HF0004 or later; so make sure to do it in V8.0 HF0004 or later when backing up/ restoring the menu database from User Utility. If the menu database is replaced from CL-AP CD (2 of 2), manually copy the mapping database (MWMMenuCodeMapping.mdb) from CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and paste it to “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\ MWMStudyList”. When upgrading from V8.0 HF0004 to V8.1, back up/restore the mapping DB manually because the mapping DB is not taken over. It will be taken over when upgrading from V8.1 or later.
■ Function overview If the setting for JJ1017 V3 is performed, the following functions can be added. 16 characters can be set in each of first half and last part as an extended menu code. The normal exposure menu can be used with the exposure menu for JJ1017 V3.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Select – the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
on
The IDT function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
2. No
Make the following configuration settings. Name
Selection
Meaning
68 MWM Exposure Menu Code Treatment
0:Normal 1:JJ1017 2:JJ1017(Ver3)
Exposure menu code system for MWM use. Make an appropriate selection in accordance with the RIS specifications.
89 MWM Menu Name Mapping
YES Handles as an exposure menu name. NO Does not handle as an exposure menu name.
Specifying whether the Code Meaning (0040,0100> 0040,0008>0008,0104) acquired as the information about a response from the RIS should be handled as an exposure menu name.
: Default setting
3.
From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Save”.
4.
Click
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
.
The system saves the setup data.
5.
From the “Config (F)” menu, choose “Close”. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-21
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
6.
Click [DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting].
7.
Make the following settings.
The “DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag & Mapping Setting” window opens.
ID Flag Description DICOM MWL Tag VR >>Code Valu
12
8.
Click
>>(0080, 0100)
TagSetting1
SH 007F260 00080100
.
The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-22
2.6 Changing Name Elements
2.6 Changing Name Elements See “3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping
The following examples describe the procedures for mapping the exposure menu or study menu defined by the RIS. Exposure menu Ensure that the ordering information defined by the DICOM tag ((0040,0008)>(0008,0100)) of the RIS agrees with the extended menu code of CL exposure menu.
Tag mapping When transmitting order information to the CL for MWM purposes, it is necessary to standardize the exposure and study menu tag information for the RIS and CL. More specifically, you must complete the following steps. Verify the DICOM tag number that contains RIS ordering information. Ensure that the RIS ordering information and CL exposure menu/ study menu agree in extended menu codes (this can be accomplished by rewriting the menu codes as needed with the CL’s user utility).
Ensure that this code agrees with the RIS ordering information (tag information). OE000056.EPS If the menu defined by the RIS is not registered in the CL, create a new exposure menu and then enter the RIS ordering information related to the exposure menu into the CL extended menu code field.
REFERENCE The CL performs exposure menu mapping in accordance with a tag number (0040,0008)>(0008,0100) transmitted from the RIS. Study menu mapping is performed when no exposure menu tag number is transmitted from the RIS. The study menu mapping tag numbers transmitted from the RIS vary from one RIS manufacturer to another. Therefore, Service Utility must be used to set such tag numbers for the CL. Service Utility’s initial setting is (0040,0100)>(0040,0007). For most of the RIS manufacturers in Japan, the initial setting (0040,0100)>(0040,0007) can be used as is. For most of RIS manufacturers other than in Japan, however, the initial setting needs to be changed.
Enter the RIS ordering information (tag information) in this field.
OE000058.EPS
REFERENCE
If the section 68 in “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” is set to “2: JJ1017 (Ver3)”, the first and last half part of the extended menu code can be set.
For details on setup, see under “ Tag mapping configuration setup”. OE080002.ai
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-23
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping
Study menu Since no study menu is registered in the CL, create a new study menu and then enter the RIS ordering information related to the study menu.
Tag mapping configuration setup Set the following configuration data (IMAGE MODALITY) as needed: Item number 23
24
Tag Mapped on Study Menu at MWM Use
Perform Mapping to Exposure Menu at MWM Use
Description DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped onto a study menu. The default setups are 0040, 0100>0040 and 0007. Specifying whether or not to perform study menu/exposure menu mapping. If “No” is selected, only the patient information will be used to initiate a study process. The default setup is to perform mapping.
Enter the RIS ordering information (tag information) in this field. OE000057.EPS 25
REFERENCE
Configuration name
Display Dialog When Failed in Mapping to Menu at MWM Use
Specifying whether or not to open a warning window when mapping is not successfully performed for a CL study menu or exposure menu. The default is to open a warning window.
The actual tag information (indicating whether mapping is properly completed) exchanged between the RIS and CL can be confirmed by viewing the log files that are generated when the DICOM Log Mode is enabled. For details on the DICOM Log Mode, see “FR4: Using the DICOM Log Mode” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-24
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verifying the Connection
3.2 Verifying MWM
After the CL-AP has been started up, verify MWM and PPS operations.
Check to see that the patient information registered to the RIS appears in the MWM worklist. Patient information registered to the RIS appears here.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 3.2 Verifying MWM 3.3 Verifying PPS
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. Version A software OE000015.EPS
3.3 Verifying PPS Make sure that the patient information of the study completed has been sent back to the RIS. OE000016.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-25
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Make a backup of the CL setup file. To make a backup, have the following item on hand. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-26
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE8-28
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push) This chapter describes the setup procedure for the Storage Commitment Push function on images to be transferred using DICOM CR Storage (Standard). The DICOM Commitment Push function is to assure that images transferred have been stored in the archiver. Images stored in the CL will not be deleted before a message comes from the archiver indicating that it has stored them accordingly.
NOTE The “CR-IR346/348CL” will be abbreviated hereinafter simply “CL”.
Connection/setup example This chapter describes the setup procedure using the connection/setup examples shown below. Archiver setup example Scommit* /172.16.1.90*...................... HOST name/IP address Scommit_SCP* /5020*................... AE name/Port number CR Image Storage..................... Service Class SCP....................................... Role ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.......... Transfer Syntax SC AE Name*....................... SCommit_SCP Storage Commitment Push....... Service Class SCP....................................... Role
Prior to setup
Archiver
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up. Software version required: A01 or later. Install the option key below. Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM COMMITMENT key CR Storage SCU Standard Storage Commitment Push
TCP/IP
DICOM Commitment Push DICOM CR Storage (Standard)
RU
CL
CL setup example fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address CL-SCU*/Port number (setup not required**)....................... AE name/Port number CR Image Storage......................... Service Class SCU.......................................... Role ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.................. Transfer Syntax SC AE Name*........................... Scommit_SCP Storage Commitment Push........... Service Class SCU.......................................... Role * Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. ** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU. 00000523.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-1
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)
Overall operation flow Use a network cable to connect the CL to the QA-WS.
“1. Hardware Setup”
After installing the DICOM CR Storage option, DICOM Commitment Push option and the AP key, make the following setups.
“2. Software Setup”
• DICOM CR Storage (OD_FILE attribute) • Information of this equipment for the Commitment Push function • Registration of archiver information for the Commitment Push function • Registration of SC AE Name
Make sure that the Commitment Push function is activated.
“3. Verifying the Function”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Backing Up the Setup File” 00000541.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup Connect the CL to the archiver via networks, as illustrated below. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP RU
CL
Archiver 00000524.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors. The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-3
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys
2. Software Setup Set up the CL software by performing the following steps:
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys NOTE
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys
Before installing the DICOM Commitment Push option key, install the DICOM CR Storage option keys.
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key
1.
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically opens.
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup 2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function
Insert the option key CD into the PC.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function 2.7 Registering the SC AE Name 00000085.EPS
3.
Click
.
The installation start window opens again.
4.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 2 and 3, click and then click . You are then returned to the desktop screen.
5.
Remove the CD from the PC.
REFERENCE The DICOM CR Storage option key CD stores two keys (Standard and Private). That is why the installation start window opens twice. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-4
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key 1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC. After several seconds, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key After option key installation, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A, Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The procedure is described below:
1.
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
3.
Click
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
The installation start window opens again.
4.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
Remove the CD from the PC.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-5
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup NOTE Before using Storage Commitment Push, complete DICOM CR Storage setup for the archiver. For details on DICOM CR Storage setup, see “2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function”, and subsequent sections under “CL + HI-C655/QA-WS/ FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)” in “Connecting the CL to Other Equipment (OE3)”.
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function The following information items are to be set up by performing the procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation to the application entity on this equipment that is defined as directed in 2.4. Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax Other (timeout setting, etc.)
1.
On the “Setup Configuration Item” window, sequentially choose , , and (DICOM CR Storage AE name).
00000543.EPS
The “DICOM Setup” window opens within the right-hand area of the current window.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-6
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function
2.
Click
(positioned slightly below the center of
the window).
7.
With the “Config (F)” menu, save the entered setup data.
REFERENCE Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
. AE name of this equipment
00000533.EPS
3.
Click the downward arrow mark
for the field and select “Service
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute)
Class (StorageCommitmentPush)”.
4. 5.
Since the AE for “User” is to be set, choose Role. Adjust the
as the
If the
00000545.EPS
key is clicked, currently selected items will be
deleted.
setting (timeout value for the
intervals between DICOM messages) as needed.
REFERENCE You do not have to check . Even if it is checked, it will be disregarded even if “SCU“ is chosen as the Role in step 4 above.
6.
Click
.
You are then returned to the "Setup Configuration Item" window.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-7
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function The following information items are to be set up by performing the procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation to the archiver’s application entity that is defined as directed in 2.4.
2.
Sequentially choose
, ,
and
(archiver’s host name), (AE name for DICOM CR
Storage).
Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax Other (2-byte character handling, setting for conversion from HQ images to standard images, etc.)
1.
On the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Configuration Item].
00000544.EPS
The “DICOM Setup” window appears within the right-hand area of the current window. 00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-8
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
3.
Click
(positioned slightly below the center of
8.
the window).
Click
.
You are then returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
9.
With the “Config (F)” menu, save the entered setup data.
00000533.EPS
4.
Click the downward arrow mark (
) for the field and select “Service
Class (StorageCommitmentPush)”.
5.
Since the AE of the connected equipment is “Provider”, is chosen as the Role. verify that
6.
When handling 2-byte characters, check (
7.
).
Enter an appropriate value in the
field.
Association control varies with the entered value as summarized below: When value 0 is entered: Uses an association other than that transmitted from the CL to wait for the connected equipment’s response. When a value other than 0 is entered: Uses the association transmitted from the CL to wait for the connected equipment’s response before the entered time elapses. After the entered time has elapsed, however, another association is used to wait for the connected equipment’s response. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-9
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name
2.
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name Perform the following procedure to register DICOM CR Storage (OD attribute) as the target of Commitment Push.
1.
From the list in the lower right corner of the window, select “CR Image Storage” for the Service Class and then click .
On the “Setup Configuration Item” window, sequentially choose , , (archiver’s host name),
and
(AE name of DICOM CR Storage).
00000548.EPS
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
3.
Click the downward arrow mark (
) for the
field and select the AE name of Commitment Push for the archiver (e.g.: Scommit_SCP).
00000544.EPS
The “DICOM Setup” window opens within the right-hand area of the current window.
4.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Use the “Config (F)” menu to save the entered setup data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-10
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verifying the Function
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver
Perform the following steps to start the CL-AP to verify Commitment Push function:
Perform the following steps to transfer an image stored in the CL to the archiver and verify that the Commitment Push function properly works.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
1.
Select the image to be transferred, and then transfer it to the archiver.
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver
2.
Check whether the CL displays a message to indicate the image has been stored in the archiver device.
Also, perform a deletion procedure in relation to an image that is not transferred to the archiver to verify that the image remains undeleted.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the and “FCR”.
menu, choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
For detailed descriptions of the image transfer and image deletion procedures, see the CL Operation Manual.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-11
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Back up the CL setup file. For backup, furnish the following items: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details of the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE9-12
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images) Described herein is the procedure used when transferring energy subtraction (“ES” hereinafter) images to the QA-WS. To transfer ES images, the two Application Entities, one for the transfer of raw data (unstandardized images) and the other for the transfer of standardized images, must be set up.
NOTE ES images can be transferred only via DICOM, and not via FINP.
NOTE The “CR-IR348CL” is abbreviated hereinafter simply “CL”.
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up being incorporated into the 5000 plus (CR-IR348CL) system. Software version required: A02 or later Install the following option keys. Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE Key CR Storage SCU Standard CR Storage SCU Standard (includes Private Unstandardized CR Storage.) CL ES ES image processing function QA-WS requirements Software version required : A04 or later Install the DICOM Storage option key. (Standard/Private)
REFERENCE The ES image consists of the following four types. Low-pressure image (L image) High-pressure image (H image) Bone image (B image) Soft tissue image (S image) The low-pressure and high-pressure images are raw data (unstandardized images). The bone and soft tissue images are standardized images generated from low-pressure and high-pressure images.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-1
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
Connection/setup examples
Overall operation flow
The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to describe the setup procedure. QA-WS setup example QAWS* /172.16.1.100*........................... HOST name/IP address QAWS_10_SCP* /5030*................... AE name/Port number Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images) SCP.......................................... Role JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax QAWS_11_SCP* /5040*.................... AE name/Port number Private Unstandardized CR Storage... Service Class (for L/H images) SCP.......................................... Role JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax QAWS_10_SCP....................... Substitute AE Name
QA-WS TCP/IP Transfer of ES images CR-IR348RU CL setup examples
CL
B/S images: Transferred with DICOM Private CR Storage. L/H images: Transferred with Private Unstandardized CR Storage.
fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address CL_10_SCU*/Port number (setup not required**)......................... AE name/Port number Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images) SCU.......................................... Role JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax CL_11_SCU*/Port number (setup not required**)......................... AE name/Port number Private Unstandardized CR Storage.... Service Class (for L/H images) SCU.......................................... Role JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the QA-WS.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Make the following setups for transferring ES images via DICOM. • Option key installation • AP key reinstallation • AE setup of this equipment for the transfer of B/S images • AE setup of this equipment for the transfer of L/H images • QA-WS AE registration for the transfer of B/S images • QA-WS AE registration for the transfer of L/H images
“2. Software Setup”
Make the following setups as needed. • Type of the image to be transferred (system configuration setting) • Automatic image distribution code • Name elements
Make sure that ES images can be transferred from the CL to the QA-WS.
“3. Verifying the Function”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Backing Up the Setup File” 00000531.EPS
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. ** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU. 00000527.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup Connect the CL to the QA-WS via networks, as illustrated below. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable TCP/IP CR-IR348RU
CL
QA-WS 00000528.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and QA-WS network connectors. The cable type applicable to the CL and QA-WS is the IEC950/ UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-3
2.1 CL Software Setup
2. Software Setup
2.1 CL Software Setup
Set up software for the CL and QA-WS as follows. Grayed-out items are those to be set up as necessary. Set up all other items. 2.1 CL Software Setup 2.1.1 Option Key Installation 2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation 2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment 2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information 2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be Transferred 2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution Function 2.1.7 Changing Name Elements 2.2 QA-WS Software Setup
2.1.1 Option Key Installation The option key of the following two types is installed according to the procedure presented below. IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE (Standard/Private) CL ES (ES image processing function)
1. Tasks done on the CL
Insert the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key into the PC. Within a few seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD. · · · Tasks done on the QA-WS.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of the installation processing.
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
REFERENCE The installation start window opens twice because the two kinds of keys, Standard and Private, are stored on the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key CD.
5.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Repeat steps 2. and 3. above to install the CL ES option key.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-4
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation If the option keys are installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 ) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. ➔ After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
For the transfer of B/S and L/H images, set up information of this equipment using Service Utility “NETWORK CONFIG” and “THIS HOST (IIP)”.
■ Setup for the transfer of B/S images The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items. AE name of this equipment for the transfer of B/S images (Application Entity Name) Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER) Other (timeout setting, etc.)
1. Click
.
➔ A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
Start up the Service Utility mode and click [Setup Configuration Item]. For how to start up the Service Utility mode, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC. 00000131.EPS
➔ The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-5
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.
Click the
3.
Select
sign within
. and click
5.
Select “DICOM” and click
.
.
The “New Node” window opens.
4.
Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are displayed.
Select “DICOM”.
00000405.EPS
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
CL host name CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE Unless the CL is network-connected, the IP address will not be displayed correctly.
00000442.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-6
2.1 CL Software Setup
6.
For the transfer of B/S images, enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_10_SCU) in the field.
(SCU) for
If “SCU” is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on the “DICOMSetup” window.
You need not to set (Port number). Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded.
Click
To set up the AE that is the User, select the Role.
REFERENCE
NOTE
7.
9.
10. Click the downward arrow
in the field and select the
.
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
NOTE For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer Syntax will be supported.
11. Set
(DICOM inter-message timeout
value) as necessary.
REFERENCE 00000533.EPS
8.
Click the downward arrow
in the
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be disregarded. (It is effective only when SCP is specified for the Role.)
field and select the Service Class (Private CR Storage).
REFERENCE “Verification” is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must be selected. For details of verification of connection, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment – Verify Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-7
2.1 CL Software Setup
12. Click the downward arrow
Setup for the transfer of L/H images
in the field to select the device attribute
(OTHER).
13. Click
.
AE name of this equipment for the transfer of L/H images (Application Entity Name) Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER) Other (timeout setting, etc.)
1.
You are returned to the “Application Entity List” window.
14. Click
The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items.
Select and click
.
on the “Setup Configuration Item” window .
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCE Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click . AE name of this equipment
00000535.EPS
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, device attribute (Attribute) OE000093.EPS
If the
key is clicked, currently selected items will be
deleted. 010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000442.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-8
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.
For the transfer of L/H images, enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_11_SCU) in the
6.
Click the downward arrow
in the field and select the
field. Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
NOTE
NOTE
You need not to set (Port number). Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded.
3.
Click
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer Syntax is supported.
7.
.
Set
(DICOM inter-message timeout
value) as necessary.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
REFERENCE needs not be checked. Even if set, it will be disregarded. (It is effective only when SCP is specified for the Role.)
8.
Click the downward arrow
in the field to select the device attribute
00000533.EPS
(OTHER).
4.
Click the downward arrow
in the field and select the Service
Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage).
5.
To set up the AE that is the User, select the Role.
(SCU) for
9.
Click
.
You are returned to the “Application Entity List” window.
10. Click
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCE If “SCU” is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on the “DICOMSetup” window.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-9
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information
3.
Follow the procedure described herein to register QA-WS information that is used for the transfer of both B/S and L/H images. Register QA-WS information using “NETWORK CONFIG” and “ALL OTHER NODES” in the Service Utility mode.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
Setup for the transfer of B/S images The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items. QA-WS Host name and IP address QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the transfer of B/S images Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE) Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from HQ image to standard image, etc.)
1.
Select
on the “Setup Configuration
Item” window and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
2.
00000444.EPS
Make the following settings.
4.
Make the following settings. Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) in the
Enter the Host name (e.g.: QAWS) in the field. Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.100) in the field. Select “DICOM”.
field.
NOTES Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5030) in the field.
Select “DICOM”.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000405.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-10
2.1 CL Software Setup
5.
Click
9.
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
Change the following settings as required. Setting of ST: Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images. ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images. SH: Do not select because this is for mammographic images. Setting of
00000533.EPS
6.
Click the downward arrow
of the and select the Service
Class (Private CR Storage).
7.
Check to see that
ST: Select when transferring standard images only. ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ images.
10. Select
in the
field.
(SCP) has been selected for the
Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
8.
Click the downward arrow
of the field and select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
NOTE For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer Syntax is supported.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-11
2.1 CL Software Setup
11. Set gradation correction as required. NOTE This setting item is displayed only when the LUT adjustment function key (one of the functions included in the Plus Standard Key) has been installed for competing PACS.
12. Change the following setting as required. Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images. No : To transfer images not embedded with annotation.
13. To handle two-byte characters, check the (
to
box
).
REFERENCE needs not be checked. OE030001.EPS
NOTE Gradation corrections can be set up only when “CR Image Storage” or “Private CR Storage” has been selected for the Service Class, and cannot be set up if “Private Unstandardized CR Storage” has been selected for it. For setup details, see “Display Gradation Correction Setup” under “FR5 : Function-specific Reference”.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
14. Click the downward arrow
of the field and select the QA-WS device
attribute (HD_FILE).
15. Click
.
You are returned to the “Application Entity List” window.
16. Click
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-12
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.
Setup for the transfer of L/H images
Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_11_SCP) in the
The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items. QA-WS Host name and IP address [already set as per the procedure described above] QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the transfer of L/H images Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE) Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from HQ image to standard image, etc.)
1.
Sequentially select
NOTES Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5040) in the field.
(QA-WS Host name) and
on the “Setup Configuration Item” window and then click
field.
, ,
Make the following settings.
3.
.
Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
00000533.EPS
4.
Click the downward arrow
of the and select the Service
Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage). 00000444.EPS
5.
Check to see that
(SCP) has been selected for the
Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-13
2.1 CL Software Setup
6.
Click the downward arrow
10. To handle two-byte characters, check the
of the field and select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
(
to
).
REFERENCE
NOTE
needs not be checked.
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer Syntax is supported.
7.
Click the downward arrow
of the field and select the AE name
(e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) used for the transfer of B/S images.
8.
box
Change the following settings as required.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
11. Click the downward arrow
of the field and select the QA-WS device
attribute (HD_FILE).
12. Click
.
You are returned to the “Application Entity List” window. Setting of ST: Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images. ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images. SH: Do not select because this is for mammographic images.
13. Click
.
You are returned to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
Setting of ST: Select when transferring standard images only. ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ images.
9.
Change the following setting as required.
Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images. No : To transfer images not embedded with annotation. 010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-14
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be Transferred
1.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution Function To automatically transfer images coming from the CR-IR348RU, set the automatic image distribution function.
NOTE To enable the automatic image distribution function, set “Enable Distribution Code Setup” (“SYSTEM CONFIG” and then item No. 3 of “5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION”) in Service Utility to “Yes”.
1.
Click Item” window.
on the “Setup Configuration
A list of devices to which images are distributed will appear on the right-hand side on the window. OE000021.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
2.
Select and then on the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
3.
Double-click
00000410.EPS
of to select the combination of
types of images to be transferred to the QA-WS.
REFERENCE
2.
4.
3.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Make the following settings. Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in the field.
L/H/B/S images L/B/S images L/S images L/B images L/H images
When a setup item is changed, save it using the [Config (F)] menu.
.
The “Distribution Code” window opens.
The following combinations are available. 0.L,H,B,S: 1.L,B,S: 2.L,S: 3.L,B: 4.L,H:
Click
Click the downward arrow
in the field and select the
equipment AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP).
4.
Click
to save the setup data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-15
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements “3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup Set up DICOM CR Storage so that the QA-WS can receive images coming from the CL. See the “Maintenance” section of the QA-WS Service Manual.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-16
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Verifying the Function
3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS
Start up the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be transferred from the CL to the QA-WS.
Transfer ES images that have been read on the 5501ES to the QA-WS.
1.
Register exposure menus for ES images and perform image reading on the FCR5501ES.
2.
Select images transferred from the FCR5501ES and send thus selected images to the QA-WS.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS
For details of the procedure used for transferring images to the QA-WS, see “FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL” of the CL Operation Manual.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”.
3.
Make sure on the QA-WS side that images have been transferred correctly.
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens. Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-17
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Back up the CL setup file. Have the following ready to use for backup. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details of the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE10-20
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicabl only in Japan]
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE11-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE11-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE11-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE11-4
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection) Described below is the procedure used for CL+X-Ray Controller (X-CON hereinafter) connection.
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Software version required: A04 or later The X-CON control function option key (CL X ONLINE) is required. X-CON for other than mammography use The connected host main unit must have been set up accordingly.
n Overall operation flow Add a serial connecter and connect the CL to the X-CON with a dedicated serial cable.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Install the X-CON control function option key, reinstall the AP key and set up configuration for the X-CON control function.
“2. Software Setup”
Check if the CL is serially connected to the X-CON correctly and can exchange data with the X-CON.
“3. Verifying the Connection/Data Exchange”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Backing Up the Setup FIle”
X-CON supported by the CL are as follows: Maker
Product Name
Toshiba Shimadzu Hitachi Philips Siemens X-CON for mammography use The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
X-CON supported by the CL are as follows: Maker
Product Name
Toshiba Planmed
MGU-100D Sophie / Sophie mobile / Sophie MaxView ready / Sophie with MaxView / Sophie Classic / Sophie Classic mobile / Sophie Classic MaxView ready / Sophie Classic with MaxView MAMMOMAT 3000 Nova V4.4 (no dose calculation function provided) / MAMMOMAT 3000 Nova V4.5 (dose calculation function provided; recommended version)
Siemens
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-1
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector
1. Hardware Setup
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector Add a serial connector as required.
NOTE When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, perform hardware setups as directed in “1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography X-CON]”.
For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see “1. Adding a Serial Connector” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
For details of the hardware setups, see “1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography X-CON]”.
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector
... Add a serial connector to the CL-PC.
1.2 Connecting the Cable
�� Connect the CL to the X-CON with a dedicated serial cable.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-2
1.2 Connecting the Cable
1.2 Connecting the Cable Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON. When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography X-CON] Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON. COM port
Serial Connecter CL
X-CON
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable + relay adapter + conversion cable
CL
X-CON Dedicated serial cable OE000048.EPS
OE000043.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-3
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key To use the X-CON, the CL X ONLINE option key is needed.
1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC. After a while, the installation start window opens.
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key
NOTE 2.3 Installing the Driver
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.4 Setting the Port and Service Utility
2. 2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]
00000085.EPS
3.
Click
.
The syetem then returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-4
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. After a while, the installation start window opens.
2.3 Installing the Driver When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant driver. For details of the driver installation procedure, see “2. Installing the Driver” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B) or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly after adding a serial connector.
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see “3. Port and Service Utility Settings” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system then returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-5
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items.
1.
3.
Click
.
The IDT/Console function setup items will be displayed on the right-hand side of the window.
IDT/Console function setup items
Start the Service Utility mode. For how to start the Service Utility mode, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
OE000038.EPS
00000131.EPS
The [Setup Configuration Item] window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-6
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
4.
Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items. Item
Configuration Item
Remarks
X-CON for other than mammography use
X-CON for mammography use
42
Timeout value
Setup not required to change.
43
Image display caption
Default: XCON
44
PSI board serial port number
Number of CH to be inserted into the PSI board connector
45
Operating condition reception setting
Default: Receives.
*1
46
Exposure condition transmission setting
Default: Not to transmit.
*2
47
Minimum tube voltage
Default: 28kV
48
Maximum tube voltage
Default: 110kV
49
Minimum tube current
Default: 9mA
50
Maximum tube current
Default: 400mA
51
Minimum irradiation time
Default: 10msec
52
Maximum irradiation time
Default: 5400msec
107 Whether mAs value is recalculated or not at PPS
108 X-CON model
109 Whether interlock command is sent or not
112 Timeout value
113 Timeout value
111 X-CON serial transfer rate
Default : 4800bits
117 Handling of dose value of Value 1
Only X-CON for mammography use.
–
118 Handling of dose value of Value 2
Only X-CON for mammography use.
–
120
Setting for output when there are no actual X-CON result values
136 X-CON control serial port number
Default: 0
–
142 X-CON serial transfer parity setting
Default: 2
: Essential
: Changed as required.
*1 : Be sure to set “Yes” (reception possible) for an X-CON for mammography use. *2 : Be sure to set “No” (transmission not possible) for an X-CON for mammography use.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-7
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
5.
NOTE When the mammography X-CON used is made by Toshiba, Planmed or Siemens, the following configuration items must be set up as shown in the table below. No.
Config item
Toshiba
Planmed
Xcon Serial_TX To be set in the Control Port range of 1 to 3.
To be set in the range of 1 to 3.
0
108
Xcon Format Type
Select 4: Mammo1.
Select 5: Mammo2.
Select 6: Mammo3.
Yes
Yes
No (Default)
3:9600.
3:9600.
Xcon Interlock 109 Command Transfer 111
Xcon Serial_TX 2:4800 (Default) Baudrate
No.
Siemens (*1)
44
Xcon No112 Response Timeout
100
20 (Default)
20 (Default)
Xcon Data 113 Reception Timeout
100
20 (Default)
20 (Default)
117
Xcon DoseValue1
1:Entrance Dose (Default)
1:Entrance Dose (Default)
1:Entrance Dose (Default)
118
Xcon DoseValue2
2:Dose Product (Default)
2:Dose Product (Default)
2:Dose Product (Default)
136
Xcon Serial_TX 0 (Default) Control Prot2
0 (Default)
1 (Serial Port No.)
142
Xcon Serial_Tx 2:even (Default) Parity
2:even (Default)
0:none
*1: For connection of the CL to the Siemens equipment, be sure to use a special cable provided with an isolator.
Click PRINETR and set up the following Printer-related configuration items. Config item
Meaning
33 Print Film Char 2/Examination Number
Specifying whether to output film annotation characters 2 (exposure unit information) or Accession number. 0 : Film char 2 [default] Outputs film annotation characters 2 (exposure unit information). 1 : Accession Number [default of the CR Console Lite/Plus] Outputs the Accession number.
74 Film String Format
Specifying whether to use ordinary film annotation characters for all images (as has been so previously) or film annotation characters that indicate mammographyspecific information for mammography images. 0 : GeneralFormatOnly [default] Uses ordinary film annotation characters. 1 : MammographyFormat Uses mammography film annotation characters.
87 Film Character Mode Specifying film annotation characters on Setting On XCON mammography X-CON material Material Info. information. 0 : DICOM Conforms to DICOM definitions (as has been so previously). 1 : X-CON-IF [default] Conforms to X-CON IF definitions.
6.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
7.
Click
.
The setup data will be saved.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-8
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]
5.
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]
Perform the following settings on the “Communications Port (COM2) Properties” window. I
When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, the COM ports must be set up accordingly.
1.
Right-click “My Computer” from the “Property”.
I
menu to select
II III
The “System Properties” window opens.
2.
Click the “Hardware” tab and then
IV
.
V VI
The “Device Manager” window opens.
3.
Click the mark to the left of “Ports (COM & LPT)” on the “Device Manager” window. OE000050.EPS
I. II. III. IV. V. VI.
OE000049.EPS
4.
Right-click the COM port that is connected to the serial cable and select “Property”. The “Communications Port (COM2) Properties” window then opens.
NOTE Be sure to right-click a port of the same number as to the COM port specified with the CL Config settings (“CONFIG” - “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “CSL/IDT FUNCTION” - “No 136 Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2” of “IIP Service Utility” - “Setup Configuration Item”).
6.
Select the “Port Settings” tab. Select “9600”. Select “8”. Select “None”. Select “1”. Select “None”.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Device Manager” window.
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
8.
Click
.
The system then returns to the desktop.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-9
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection
3. Verifying the Connection/Data Exchange
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”.
After starting up the CL-AP, check if the CL is serially connected to the X-CON correctly and can exchange data with the X-CON.
The CL opening window opens. After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection
Version A software
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
2.
Confirm the following displays. ● Version A software When the CL is serially connected to the XCON normally, “XCON” displayed on the window will be highlighted in white on the purple background. If serial connection between the CL and the XCON is not recognized for any reason, “XCON” will not be highlighted remaining thus in white on the gray background. ● Version B software Make sure that no error message box opens at the right top of the window (or “X-CON Offline” is displayed in the box).
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-10
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange Check to see that data can be exchanged with the X-CON as per configuration settings (CSL/IDT FUNCTION). If “45. Xcon Performed Info. Reception” in Configuration “CSL/IDT FUNCTION” is enabled: When X-CON’s actual values, including tube voltage, tube current and irradiation time, are received, a mark confirming the reception is displayed at the right top of the exposure menu on the window. Reception confirmation mark
OE000052.EPS
After the completion of exposures, X-CON’s actual values, including tube voltage, tube current and irradiation time, will be transferred to RIS or the like via the CL (the values can be verified also on film). If “46. Xcon Exposure Info. Transfer” in Configuration “CSL/IDT FUNCTION” is enabled: Setup items of the exposure menu, such as tube voltage, tube current and irradiation time, will be reflected on the X-CON during exposures.
NOTES ● For software version V7.1 or earlier To check if data is exchanged properly during exposures using a cassette, shot X-rays with targeted exposure menus selected accordingly (after each X-ray shot, a mark appears to show that the actual exposure result data was received), and then register the IP barcode. ● For software version V8.0 When your Image Reader is a cassette type machine, make sure to register the IP after completing the exposure processing. After receiving the actual exposure result data, a mark lights up at the moment when the IP is registered. Proceeding to the next exposure process without registering the IP will cause it to be considered as a split exposure, and disabling the correct exposure parameters to be displayed. To have a study be suspended, ensure that IP registration has been performed with respect to all the exposure menus already subjected to exposure, otherwise information on X-ray exposure parameters will be cancelled. ● For software version V8.1 or later The status of the reception confirmation mark when the actual exposure result information is received from XCON is shown below. User operation Before exposure
Status of reception confirmation mark
Remarks
None
Not connected to any menus. After the exposure, Blinking the actual exposure (on the current menu) result information is received from XCON
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
Select an exposure menu arbitrarily
Not connected to any menus so Blinking (on the selected menu) the reception confirmation mark is lighted up on the selected menu.
Confirm the IP for the arbitrary exposure menu
Lighting (on the menu that IP is registered)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
The information of actual exposure result data is connected to the menu for which IP is registered.
OE12-11
4. Backing Up the Setup File
4. Backing Up the Setup File Back up the CL setup file. Have the following ready to use for backup. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For detailed backup procedures, see "5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File - Configuration Restore/Backup" under "MU: Maintenance Utility".
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-12
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference] UD150B/B-10 HLZ110 (Tomography) RS232C UD150B: RS232C HLZ110: RS422 Communication I/F 4800BPS 4800BPS spec. Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Common for Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit semi-duplex and D-sub25p male straight UD150B: D-sub25p male cross start/stop system. (provided by the maker) (provided by Fuji) According to HLZ110: D-sub25p male cross JIS X-5002. (provided by the maker) CL → X-ray exposure conditions CL → X-ray exposure conditions setup kVmAms setup kVmAms X-ray exposure conditions → X-ray exposure conditions → Function actual CL exposure results actual CL exposure results kVmAms kVmAms DHF-155H (S)
X-ray tube/ technique code
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select according to the technique.) Techniques 1 to 8 1: General exposure 2: Bucky - 1 3: Bucky - 2 4: AUX1 5: Tomography 6: Spot 7: Continuous 8: AUX2 exposure
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select according to the technique.) Techniques 1 to 5 (8 at max.) 1: Spot 2: Bucky - 1 3: Bucky - 2 4: General 5: Tomography exposure
Exposure/ perspective flag Film-related code
SUPER 50 CP
Polydros50S
RS232C RS232C 4800BPS 4800BPS Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit D-sub25p male cross (the D-sub25p male cross same cable as the maker’s (provided by Fuji) will be provided by Fuji) CL → X-ray exposure conditions setup APR code X-ray exposure conditions → actual CL exposure results kVmAms X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select according to the technique.)
CL → X-ray exposure conditions setup Mode selection code X-ray exposure conditions → actual CL exposure results kVmAms Fixed at 0. Manually selected by the controller.
Techniques 1 to 9 Reserved
KXO-80F KXO-50F RS232C 4800BPS Start: 1bit Data: 8bits Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit D-sub25p male cross (provided by Fuji) CL → X-ray exposure conditions setup kVmAms X-ray exposure conditions →actual CL exposure results kVmAms KXO 50F is only for X-ray exposure conditions setup → CL CL → X-ray is not effective. Only X-ray → CL is effective. 00: BUCKY1 01: BUCKY2 02: GEN1/BKY3 03: GEN2 04: TOMO WO.APR 05: TOMO WITH APR 06: MAMMO 07: SPOT 08: SPOT-ATR 09: ANGIO 10: ANGIO WITH KVR
Without perspective flag: Fixed at 0.
11: DHF-155H Maker/model code 10: CR-250 (Perspective/tomography) Tube voltage (kV) 20–150 Irradiation time 1–8000 (ms)
Invalid 00000000 01: UD150B 00: HLZ110
30
40
20–150 1–8000
20 20–150
Invalid 0 X-ray→ actual CL result is effective.
Invalid 0 X-ray→ actual CL result is effective.
3–9999 10–1000 20, 50, 100, 160, 200, 250: Small focus 320, 400, 500, 640, 800: Large focus
Tube current (mA)
10–630,1250
10–1000
ID code
1 to 64, techniques (512 programs in total) mAs mode: 5 to 8000 If mAs mode is not used (normal): 0 Focus size specified0: Small focus 1000: Large focus 2: Standard 1–4 3: ±0 standard
0
1 to 16 or 1 to 32
1–7
0
0
0
0
0
Focus size specified0: Small focus 1000: Large focus 0: Standard 1–4 4: ±0 standard
0
0
0
0: Standard 1–4 4: ±0 standard
0
0
Reserved 1 Reserved 2 Film sensitivity Detection field Film density 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-13
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE12-16
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE13-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE13-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE13-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE13-4
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE14-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE14-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE14-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE14-4
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)
Connection/setup examples CL2 setup example • Host name : fcr-csl2* • IP address : 172.16.1.30*
The procedure for cluster-connecting two or more units of the CR-IR348CL is described below.
NOTE The “CR-IR348CL” is abbreviated hereafter “CL”.
CL2
Before setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: A09 or later The CLs to be cluster-connected must be found on the network and capable of transferring images.
RU2 FRUP
TCP/IP
FRUP RU1
CL1
CL1 setup example • Host name : fcr-csl1* • IP address : 172.16.1.20* Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need to be changed depending on the employed equipment and network environment. 00000200.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Overall operation flow Connect the CLs with network cables.
“1. Hardware Setup”
To permit study information sharing, perform the following procedures for all CLs to be clusterconnected.
“2. Software Setup”
Ensure that the CLs are network-connected as indicated below. 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX cable TCP/IP
Verifying the host name Initializing the output queue and image database Equalizing the configuration settings Equalizing the menu/environment/table settings Performing setup for drive sharing Performing NetBEUI setup Performing study information sharing setup Defining the share range Backing up/restoring the share settings
RU1
CL1
CL2
RU2 00000202.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connector. The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
Perform the following procedures as needed for individual CLs. Performing integrated output processing setup Performing centralized patient information management setup Performing study list setup Verifying that the CLs can share study information
“3. Connection Verification”
Backing up the configuration data
“4. Setup File Backup”
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-2
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2. Software Setup
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs To permit study information sharing, use Windows, Service Utility, and User Utility to complete various setup procedures at the CLs to be cluster-connected.
Perform the following CL software setup procedure. 2.1 Software Setup for All CLs 2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name 2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image Database 2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings 2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table Settings 2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing 2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup 2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range 2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings 2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs 2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup 2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information Management Setup 2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name
Tasks done on all CLs
To permit the CLs to share study information, ensure that their host names do not exceed ten characters in length. (By the default, the CL host name consists of no more than ten characters.) Verify the CL host name as directed below.
● For Windows 2000/XP
1.
From the
menu, choose “Settings”, “Control Panel”
and then “System”. The “System Properties” window opens.
2. Tasks done on individual CLs
Choose the “Network Identification” tab to verify that the “Full computer name” consists of no more than ten characters (excluding the period at the end).
00000270.EPS
If the host name exceeds ten characters in length, change it so that it consists of not more than ten characters. For details on how to change the CL host name, see “Appendix B - Changing the CL Host Name” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
3.
Click
.
The “System Properties” window closes. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-3
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
● For Windows Vista
1.
Select “Control Panel” from the
menu.
The “Control Panel” window opens.
2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image Database To establish a cluster connection, it is necessary to restore the output queue and image database of each CLs to their default states. Initialize the output queue and image database as directed below.
2.
Double-click
1.
.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [DataBase Utility].
The “System” window opens.
3.
Click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
4.
Select the “Computer Name” tab and check to see that the “Full Computer Name” is described at a maximum of 10 characters (a period at the tail end is not included).
00000615.EPS
The “DataBase Utility” window opens.
2.
Click “Clear Output Queue”.
OE000100.ai
When the host name is described with 10 or more characters, change it accordingly so that it is within the 10 characters. For how to change the CL host name, see “Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
5.
Click
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000616.EPS
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-4
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following message.
00000271.EPS
3.
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with each other in some Service Utility configuration settings. Perform the following steps to check the relevant configuration settings and equalize them as needed.
1.
Press the key.
For the configuration settings that need to be equalized, see the sections indicated below.
The output queue will then be initialized.
4.
With Service Utility, check the configuration settings.
Click [ImageDB Initialization].
“3.4 Confi guration Details - 1. IMAGE MODALITY”, “3.5 Configuration Details - 3. QA FUNCTION” and “3.6 Configuration Details - 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION” in the “MU: Maintenance Utility” “1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP” and “2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format” of “FR1 Print Output Function” in “FR: Function-specific Reference” Locate the setup item list in the above reference sections, note the column for cluster connection, and ensure that the CL agrees with the other CLs in items marked “Agreement required”. Items specified to be set up uniquely must be done so unfailingly. 00000617.EPS
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following message.
2.
When all the relevant settings are equalized to achieve agreement, click “Exit Service Utility” in the “IIP Service Utility” window. “IIP Service Utility” exits.
00000271.EPS
5.
Press the key. The image database will then be initialized.
6.
Click
.
You are then returned to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-5
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/ Table Settings
2.
For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with each other in some menu, environment, and table settings that can be accessed from User Utility.
From the
(or
) menu, choose
“User Utility” The “Main Menu” window opens.
Perform the following steps to check the relevant User Utility settings and equalize them as needed.
Starting User Utility
1.
From the
00000090.EPS
menu, choose “Programs”, “Fuji Film”
and then “FCR”. The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens. Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-6
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
Equalizing the menu settings
1.
Click
.
The “Menu Setup” window opens.
2.
Confirm the following settings and edit them as needed to achieve agreement with the other CLs. Image processing parameters Exposure menu parameters The X-ray control parameter setting, which is one of the exposure menu parameters, can be edited independently for all CLs. (The reason is that the X-ray control parameter setting needs to vary with the employed Image Reader model.) When the CLs do not agree in X-ray control parameter setting, the setting for the CL with which exposure menus are registered takes effect. Even if an exposure is suspended at a CL at which registration is completed and later made at another CL, the setting prevailing at the time of registration takes effect. The extended menu code and MPM code must basically be in agreement. If the CLs do not agree in extended menu code or MPM code, their operations differ depending on the procedure performed and menu code difference. To give an example, the table on the next page shows the relationship between the operations at CL-B and the exposure menu registrations at CL-A.
3.
Click
.
The “Main Menu” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-7
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
Relationship between operations at CL-B and exposure menu registrations at CL-A Operation No.
Function
When CL-B has MPM code but not extended menu code
When CL-B has neithe MPM code nor extended menu code
1
Starting a study after its move to CL-B
The study cannot be started unless there is an extended code for the “Unexposed” menu, and the following messages appear. “Failed in acquiring image information” “Failed in reading an exposure menu” The process can be resumed by registering a menu or changing the exposure menu. As regards the “Image entered” menu, a study can be started even when the extended code is unavailable.
Same as left.
2
Moving an image within a study after its move to CL-B
If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not registered in the menu datafase of a specific CL, it is reported to the user and no image changeover takes place.
Same as left.
3
Changing the exposure menu after a study is moved to CL-B
When a study can be started, a menu change can be applied (“Unexposed” Same as left. menu).
4
Exposure menu for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the currently set menu should be selected). The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
Same as left.
5
Changing the exposure menu parameters for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
Changes are possible.
Same as left.
6
Changing the image processing conditions for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
Changes are possible.
Same as left.
7
Shuttering processing and marking for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
Processing is possible.
Same as left.
8
Changing the exposure menu for intensive QA from CL-B
The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the currently set menu should be selected). The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
Same as left.
9
Changing the exposure menu parameters for intensive QA from CL-B
Changes are possible.
Same as left.
10 Changing the image processing condition parameters for intensive QA from CL-B
Changes are possible.
Same as left.
11
If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not available, it is reported to the user and no image changeover takes place.
Same as left.
Output is possible.
If the MPM code is not available, different image processing result is obtained because the output is generated according to the default value.
Image changeover for intensive QA from CL-B
12 Integrated output processing from CL-B
For details on User Utility, see the Operation Manual. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-8
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
Equalizing the environment settings (distribution settings)
1.
Click
.
The “Property setting” window opens.
2.
Choose the
tab.
The “Distribution Setting” window opens.
3.
Confirm the following settings and edit them as needed to achieve agreement with the other CLs.
Item no.
Item
Necessity for agreement
Symptom caused by disagreement
1
Auto distribution setting
The setting can be defined variously for all CLs.
The setting for the CL that has entered images takes effect (see *1).
2
PRINT Attribute
The setting can be defined variously for all CLs.
The Print properties set for the CL that has entered images will be employed (see *2).
3
FILE Attribute
Agreement is required.
If there is a disagreement, different distribution servers may be used even when the same study is handled.
4
Energy-Subtraction Exposure Output Image
Agreement is required.
The number of images varies with the processing CL.
5
Output stitched image
Agreement is required.
The number of images varies with the processing CL.
6
Setting for reduction ratio Agreement is required. for an output on 8"×10" film
The film varies with the output CL.
*1 When a study is moved in the middle of an exposure process from CL 1 which is set for image distribution after QA (Print Attribute setting. printer A) to CL 2 which is set for image distribution during reading (Print Attribute setting. printer B), the resulting operation is as indicated below. Menu status at startup Image input is completed.
Image distribution timing After completion of exposure and QA at CL 2.
Symptom caused by disagreement The output is delivered to the destination CL’s Print Attribute setting (printer A).
The image is not entered yet and At the time of image input. is to be entered after the move.
The output is delivered to the destination CL’s Print Attribute setting (printer B).
The menu is registered after the move.
The output is delivered to the destination CL’s Print Attribute setting (printer B).
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
At the time of image input.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-9
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
4.
Click
.
The “Main Menu” window opens.
Equalizing the table settings
1.
Click
.
The “Table Setting” window opens.
2.
Confirm the following settings and edit them as needed to achieve agreement with the other CLs.
Item no.
Item
Necessity for agreement
Symptom caused by disagreement
1
Technologist Agreement is Information Setting required.
The information about a technologist may be improperly displayed or output.
2
Agreement is Requesting required. Department Information Setting
The information about a requesting department may be improperly displayed or output.
3
Film Mark Setting
3.
Click
The setting can — be defined variously for all CLs.
.
The “Main Menu” window opens.
Exiting User Utility and AP
1.
Click
.
“User Utility” exits.
2.
On the
(or
) menu, click “Exit
System”. The “Exit” window opens.
3.
Hold down the key and click
.
The AP exits and the desktop screen appears. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-10
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing
7.
Click
.
The “Select Users, Computers, or Groups” window opens.
For study information sharing, perform the following drive C sharing setup procedure at each CL.
For Windows 2000
1. 2.
Open Windows Explorer. 00000609.EPS
Right-click drive C and then choose “Sharing”.
8.
The “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens.
Choose “Administrators”, click
, and then click
.
REFERENCE Although “Administrators” and “Administrator” are both selectable, be sure to choose “Administrators”. 00000606.EPS
3.
Choose the “Sharing” tab and then click
.
The “New Share” window opens.
4. 5.
00000610.EPS
In the “Share Name” field, enter “C”. Click
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
.
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
00000611.EPS
00000608.EPS
6.
Choose “Everyone” and then click “Everyone” is then deleted.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
9.
Choose “Administrators” and then check “Full Control” for “Permissions” ( ).
10. Repeatedly click
until the “Local Disk (C:)
Properties” window appears.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-11
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
15. Choose “Administrators” and then check “Full Control” for
11. Choose the “Security” tab. 12. Choose “Everyone” and then click
.
“Everyone” is then removed.
13. Click
“Permissions” (
16. Click
)
to close the “Local Disk (C:) Properties”
window. The entered setup data is then saved.
.
The “Select Users Computers, or Groups” window opens.
14. Choose “Administrators”, click
, and then click
REFERENCE When the sharing setup procedure for drive C is completed, the icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
.
REFERENCE Although “Administrators” and “Administrator” are both selectable, be sure to choose “Administrators”.
00000610.EPS
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
00000611.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-12
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
4.
For Windows XP
1.
Open Windows Explorer.
2.
Select “Folder Options...” from “Tools”.
Right-click drive C and then choose “Sharing and Security...”. The “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens.
The “Folder Option” window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
5.
Click
.
The “New Share” window opens. 00000XXX.EPS
3.
6.
In the “Share Name” field, enter “C”.
Select the “View” tab, and remove the checkmark from “Use simple file sharing (Recommended)” ( ). . Click
00000XXX.EPS
7.
Click
.
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-13
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
8.
Choose “Everyone” and then click
12. Select “Administrators” and click
.
until the “Permissions for C” window appears.
“Everyone” is then deleted.
9.
Click
repeatedly
.
The “Select Users or Groups” window opens.
00000XXX .EPS
REFERENCE 00000XXX.EPS
10. Click
Although “Administrators” and “Administrator” are both selectable, be sure to choose “Administrators”.
.
The “Common Queries” window opens.
11. Click
.
00000XXX.EPS
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX .EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-14
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
13. Choose “Administrators” and then check “Full Control” for “Allow” (
).
14. Click
repeatedly until the “Local Disk(C:)
Proterties” window appears.
■ For Windows Vista
1.
Open Windows Explorer.
2.
Open “Folder Options...” from the “Tools” menu. The “Folder Options” window opens.
15. Choose the “Security” tab. 16. Choose “Everyone” and then click
.
“Everyone” is then removed.
REFERENCE When “Administrators” is not displayed, repeat steps 9. to 12. OE150001.ai
17. Choose “Administrators” and then check “Full Control” for “Allow” (
18. Click
)
to close the “Local Disk (C:) Properties”
3.
Select the “View” tab and remove the checkmark from “Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)” ( ). Then click ➔ .
window. The entered setup data is then saved.
REFERENCE When the sharing setup procedure for drive C is completed, the icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
OE150002.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-15
4.
8.
Right-click drive C and select the “Sharing” tab. The “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens.
Select ”Everyone” and click
.
“Everyone” is then removed.
9.
Click [Add]. The “Select Users or Groups” window opens.
OE150003.ai
5.
Click “Advanced Sharing”. The “Advanced Sharing” window opens.
6.
Put a checkmark to “Share this folder” ( enter “C” in the “Share name” field.
➔
) and OE150006.ai
10. Click
.
The “Common Queries” window opens.
11. Click
.
OE150004.ai
7.
Click [Permissions...]. The “Permissions for C” window opens.
OE150007.ai
OE150005.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-16
12. Select “Administrators” and click
repeatedly
until the “Permissions for C” window opens.
16. Select “Everyone” if there is and then click
.
“Everyone” is then removed.
➥ REFERENCE If “Administrators” is not displayed, repeat steps 9 through 12. OE150008.ai
➥ REFERENCE Although “Administrators” and “Administrator” are both selectable, be sure to select “Administrators” here.
17. Select “Administrators” and then check “Full Control” for ). “Allow” (
18. Click
to close the “Local Disk (C:) Properties”
window. The entered setup data is then saved.
➥ REFERENCE
OE150009.ai
The “Permissions for C” window opens.
When the sharing setup procedure for drive C is completed, the icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
OE150010.ai
13. Select “Administrators” and put a checkmark to “Allow” in the “Full Control” field (
➔
).
14. Click
repeatedly until “Local Disk (C:) Properties” window opens.
15. Select the “Security” tab.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-17
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup
3.
NOTE
Click
.
The “Select Network Component Type” window opens.
If Windows2000 SP3 or later is used under Windows XP or Windows Vista, the NetBEUI setup is not required. To reduce the time required for file access between cluster-connected CLs, perform the following NetBEUI setup procedure at each CL.
1.
From the
menu, choose “Settings”, “Network and
Dial-up Connections” and then “Local Area Connection Status”. The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens.
00000602.EPS
4.
Choose “Protocol” and then click
.
The “Select Network Protocol” window opens.
00000600.EPS
2.
Click
.
00000603.EPS
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
00000601.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-18
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
5.
Choose [NetBEUI Protocol] and then click
.
“NetBEUI Protocol” is then added.
00000604.EPS
6.
Uncheck [NetBEUI Protocol] (
).
00000605.EPS
7.
Click
.
The entered setup data is then saved.
8.
Restart the CL.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-19
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup
3.
To permit study information sharing, perform the following study information sharing setup procedure at each CL.
1.
In the “Study Sharing Configuration” window, set [Study Sharing] to “YES”.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing].
00000614.EPS
4.
Click
.
The entered setup data is then saved. 00000612.EPS
The “SetCluster” window opens.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration].
00000613.EPS
The “Study Sharing Configuration” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-20
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2.
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range
Click [Host Sharing].
To define the study information share range, perform the following procedure to register the host name of the CLs that share the study information.
IMPORTANT When you register the host name of the CLs that share the study information, use only one CL. To the other study information sharing CLs, copy the registered data from the CL at which the host name registration procedure is completed (by backing up the data and restoring it).
00000618.EPS
The “HostSharing” window opens.
Do not change the registered host name individually at the CLs. If the host name is registered or its registration is changed at the CLs on an individual basis, the images related to shared study information may not be displayed.
1.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing].
00000619.EPS
3.
Click
.
The “Host” window opens.
00000612.EPS
The “SetCluster” window opens. 00000620.EPS
4.
Make entries in the [Hostname] and [Location] fields and then click
.
Hostname : Host name (computer name) of a CL that shares study information. Location : Name (any name will do) of the location at which the above CL is installed. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-21
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
The entered host name and installation location name are then displayed.
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings For cluster-connected CLs, the same sharing setup data about a registered host name must be used. Therefore, copy the registered host name data to the other CLs to be cluster-connected. For the copy operation, use the sharing setup backup/restore function. The procedure is indicated below.
IMPORTANT 00000621.EPS
5.
If two or more CLs share the study information, repeat steps 3. and 4. as needed.
6.
In the “HostSharing” window, click
.
The entered setup data is then saved, and the “SetCluster” window opens.
7.
Click
Be sure to perform sharing setup at only one CL. Copy the resulting setup data to the other CLs. If you register a host name individually at each CL, images may not be displayed.
REFERENCE Within the CL, the host name registered for sharing setup is managed with a unique ID. This ID varies with the order of registration.
.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
8.
Click [Exit Service Utility].
00000111.EPS
“IIP Service Utility” exits.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-22
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
4.
Backing up the sharing setup data Back up on storage media the sharing setup file of a CL for which the study information share setting was performed. For this operation, have the following ready for use.
While the “Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup” window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname (e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Backup] area, and then click .
Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like)
1.
Insert the media into the PC.
2.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing]. 00000042.EPS
Sharing setup data files
and
are then saved in the
media.
5.
Click
.
The “SetCluster” window opens. 00000612.EPS
The “SetCluster” window opens.
3.
6.
Click
.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
Click [Backup/Restore].
7.
Click [Exit Service Utility].
00000043.EPS
The “Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup” window opens.
00000111.EPS
“IIP Service Utility” exits.
8. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the media from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-23
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
4.
Restoring the sharing setup data Restore the sharing setup data file, backed up on media in previous steps, to other cluster-connected CLs.
1.
Insert the media into the PC created in “ Backing up the sharing setup data”.
2.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing].
While the “Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup” window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname (e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Restore] area, and then click .
00000041.EPS
The sharing setup data is then restored.
5.
Click
.
The “SetCluster” window opens.
00000612.EPS
6.
The “SetCluster” window opens.
3.
Click
.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
Click [Backup/Restore].
7.
Click [Exit Service Utility].
00000043.EPS 00000111.EPS
The “Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup” window opens.
“IIP Service Utility” exits.
8. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the media from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-24
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
3.
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup
While the “Study Sharing Configuration” window is open, set [OutputProcess] to “Centered”.
To permit a specific CL to exercise centralized management of output to a printer or other device, define the output processing CL by performing the following procedure.
1.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing].
00000622.EPS
4.
Click
.
The “OutputMasterList” window opens.
5.
In the “OutputMasterList”, check the host name for the output processing CL, and then click
.
00000612.EPS
The “SetCluster” window opens.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration]. 00000623.EPS
NOTE The “OutputMasterList” shows the host names that are registered as directed in “2.1.8 Defining the Share Range”.
00000613.EPS
The “Study Sharing Configuration” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-25
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
6.
From the “OutputMaster” pull-down menu, choose the host name of the output processing CL.
10. Click [Exit Service Utility].
00000111.EPS
00000624.EPS
“IIP Service Utility” exits.
NOTE The “OutputMaster” pull-down menu shows only the host names that are checked in step 5.
7.
To deliver output to the local printer for the output processing CL, check [Use LOCAL Printer] (
8.
Click
).
.
The entered setup data is then saved, and the “SetCluster” window opens.
9.
Click
.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-26
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information Management Setup
3.
While the “Study Sharing Configuration” window is open, set [PatientMaster] to “YES”.
To permit a specific CL to manage patient information in a centralized manner, define the patient database centralized management CL by performing the following procedure.
1.
Start Service Utility. In the “IIP Service Utility” window, click [Setup Study Sharing]. 00000625.EPS
4.
From the “Master” pull-down menu, choose the host name for the CL to be designated as the patient database centralized management CL.
00000612.EPS
The “SetCluster” window opens.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration].
00000626.EPS
NOTE The “Master” pull-down menu shows the host names that are registered as directed in “2.1.8 Defining the Share Range”.
5.
Click
.
The entered setup data is then saved, and the “SetCluster” window opens.
00000613.EPS
The “Study Sharing Configuration” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6.
Click
.
The “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-27
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
7.
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup
Click [Exit Service Utility].
To change the items of study information to be displayed within a study list, perform a display item setup procedure from the “Study List Setup” window at an individual CL. For details on how to set the items to be displayed within a study list, see “CL Operation Manual”.
NOTE
00000111.EPS
“IIP Service Utility” exits.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
If the “Maximum Display Count” for a study list is set to “limitless”, a considerable amount of time may be required for study information operation. The reason is that the number of study information items to be displayed within a study list may increase when multiple CLs share the study information. It is also well to remember that study information of your interest may not appear if you reduce the maximum display count setting. In such an instance, you can display the study information of your interest by executing the search/sort/filtering command from the study list window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-28
3.1 Study Registration
3. Connection Verification
3.1 Study Registration
Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs and then read an image from an Image Reader. Verify that another cluster-connected CL can display the information about the registered study and the associated image. 3.1 Study Registration
Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs.
1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
TCP/IP
Version A software
RU1
CL1
3.2 Image Reading
CL2
RU2
3.3 Study Information and Image Display 00000627.EPS
NOTE OE000017.EPS
Before performing the verification procedures, start all the clusterconnected CLs. If any CL is not operating, the study information possessed by that unit cannot be shared.
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
2.
From the registration window, register study information. For details on how to register study information, see “CL Operation Manual”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-29
3.2 Image Reading
3.2 Image Reading At the CL with which a study is registered, read an image from the RU.
1.
Perform an image read process in relation to the registered study information. For details on how to read an image, see “CL Operation Manual”.
2.
Verify that the image is saved in the CL and can be displayed accordingly.
3.3 Study Information and Image Display Verify that the study information registered by performing the aforementioned procedure and the associated image can be displayed at a CL other than the CL that has performed the registration and image read processes.
1.
Start the CL-AP at another CL.
2.
Verify that the “Study List” window shows the study information registered by performing the aforementioned procedure.
For details on how to display an image, see “CL Operation Manual”.
For details on how to verify the study information from the “Study List” window, see “CL Operation Manual”.
3.
Select the study information to verify that the associated image appears on the display. For details on the image display procedure, see “CL Operation Manual”.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-30
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up the CL setup files. When using a cluster connection, it is necessary to back up the cluster connection setup file as well as the normal setup files. For backup, have the following items ready for use. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the normal setup file backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Confiuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”. For details on the cluster connection setup file backup procedure, see “2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-31
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE15-32
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer) Described herein is the procedure for transferring digital mammography images from the CR-IR348CL to other maker’s equipment using the DICOM MG Storage function.
NOTE The “CR-IR348CL” and the equipment to which images are transferred are abbreviated hereafter “CL” and “other connected equipment”, respectively.
Connection/setup example Setup example of other connected equipment • HOST name : Mammo-View • IP address : 172.16.1.35* • AE name (Provider) : MammoView01-SCP* • Port number : 5001* • Service Class : MG Image Storage For Presentation (Image processing parameters not provided.) • Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian* Other connected equipment
(Other maker's equipment)
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: A09 or later Option keys are needed. Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM MAMMO S key
MG Storage SCU (Image processing parameters not provided.) MG Storage SCU (Image processing parameters provided.)
CL DICOM MAMMO P key
NOTE To install an option that provides image processing parameters, another option that does not provide image processing parameters must have been installed.
TCP/IP Data transfer 5000MA plus, etc.
DICOM MG Storage CL
CL setup example • HOST name : fcr-csl* • IP address : 172.16.1.20* • AE name (User) : CL-mammo-SCU* • Service Class : MG Image Storage For Presentation (Image processing parameters not provided.) • Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian* Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. 00001600.EPS
Requirements of other connected equipment Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly. The DICOM MG Storage (SCP) Service Class must be supported.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Overall operation flow Use a network cable to connect the CL to other connected equipment.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Make setups for inputting/outputting digital mammography images via DICOM.
“2. CL Software Setup”
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable TCP/IP
Install the option key and reinstall the AP key. Make then the following setups. • Setup on the CL (AE name, device attribute, Service Class, etc.). • Registration of AE name, device attribute, port number, Service Class, handling of HQ images, etc. on other connected equipment. Make the following setups as required. • Setup for automatic image distribution code. • Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only). • Setup for UID issuance. • Setup for name elements.
RU
CL
Other connected equipment 00000044.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL and other connected equipment. The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
Make sure that images can be transferred from the CL to other connected equipment.
“3. Connection Checkout”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Setup File Backup”
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated below.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-2
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu
2. CL Software Setup Set up software for the CL and other connected equipment. Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other items. 2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu Replace the exposure menu and exposure menu parameters with the DICOM MG Storage equivalents. See “5.2 Replacing the Menu Database” in “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmissioin Option Keys 2.3 Reinstalling the AP key 2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function 2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function 2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE) 2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method 2.9 Changing the Name Elements
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-3
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission Option Keys
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission Option Keys For “DICOM MG Storage” transmission of digital mammograms, it is necessary to install the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key and CL DICOM MAMMO P option key. However, if you do not attach image processing parameters to the images to be transmitted, install only the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key.
1.
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE
Insert the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key CD into the PC.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
.
A dialog box opens to indicate that the installation process is completed. 00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen. 00000046.EPS
3.
Click
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
5.
To install the CL DICOM MAMMO P option key as well, change the CD and then repeat step 2. through 4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-4
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function Make settings for the following items of the CL side. Host name and IP address of the CL AE name (Application Entity Name) of the CL Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute) Other (timeout settings, etc.)
1.
4.
Select
and click
The “New Node” window opens.
5.
Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are displayed. CL host name
Start Service Utility.
CL IP address
For the Service Utility startup procedure, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the “IIP Service Utility” window.
.
00000092.EPS
NOTE The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is connected to a network.
00000599.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000091.EPS
3.
Click the
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
mark of the
field.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-5
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function
6.
Select “DICOM” and click
8.
.
Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
Select "DICOM".
00000093.EPS
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
00000443.EPS
9.
Click downward arrow
in the field to select “MG Image
Storage For Presentation”.
NOTE To attach image processing parameters, select “MG Image Storage For Processing”.
REFERENCES 00000094.EPS
7.
Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: “CLmammo-SCU”) in the
field.
NOTE There is no need to set the port number in When selecting SCU as the Role, the set port number will be disregarded even if it is set.
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
If “MG Image Storage For Presentation” is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on the “DICOM Setup” window. “Verification” is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must be selected. For details of verification of connection, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment – Verify Connection” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-6
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function
10. To set up the AE that is the User, select Role.
(SCU) for the
13. Click downward arrow
field to select the device attribute (OTHER).
REFERENCE If “SCU” is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on the “DICOM Setup” window. For DICOM SCU settings on this equipment (THIS HOST (IIP)), two or more Service Class settings (e.g., CR Image Storage, DICOM Print, and other) can be selected for a single Application Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings (e.g., JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be selected for a single Service Class.
11. Click downward arrow
To attach image processing parameters, select “MG Image Storage For Processing”.
14.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCES
Transfer Syntax (e.g.: “ImplicitVRLittleEndian”). Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected) ImplictVR LittleEndian
ExplictVR LittleEndian
JPEG Lossless
MG Image Storage For Presentation
MG Image Storage For Processing
Verification
12. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value as necessary.
REFERENCES • To transfer large-capacity image data such as mammograms, check the time required to transfer those images using the “DICOMStorage.log” function, and then determine in the [Timeout1: ] box a time long enough to perform image transfer processing. • It is not necessary to check . Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 10. above is the SCU. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
NOTE
15. Click
in the field to select the
Service Class
in the
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click . If the
key is clicked, currently selected items are
deleted.
16. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
17. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-7
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
3.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens for setup of information on other connected equipment.
Register the following items of other connected equipment. Host name and IP address of other connected equipment AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other connected equipment Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, and device attribute (Attribute) Setups for gradation correction Other (usage of two-byte characters, settings for data conversion from HQ to standard image, etc.)
1.
Select
of the “Setup Configuration
Item” window and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
2.
00000098.EPS
Make the following settings.
4.
Enter the Host name (e.g.: “Mammo-View”) in the
Make the following settings. Enter the AE name of other connected equipment (e.g.: “MammoView01-SCP”) in the
field. Enter the IP address (e.g.: “172.16.1.35”) in the field. Select “DICOM”.
field.
NOTES Never fail to enter the SCP AE name. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly.
Select "DICOM".
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment 00000097.EPS
(e.g.: “5001”) in the
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
field.
OE16-8
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
5.
Click
8.
.
Click downward arrow
in the
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
field to select Transfer Syntax (e.g.: “ImplicitVRLittleEndian”). Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected) Service Class
00000443.EPS
6.
Click the downward arrow mark
in the
“Verification” is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must be selected.
7.
Because the AE of other connected equipment is the Provider, make sure that (SCP) is selected for the Role.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MG Image Storage For Presentation
MG Image Storage For Processing
Verification
For image transfer addressed to the image diagnosis server, select “MG Image Storage For Processing”.
NOTE
If “MG Image Storage For Presentation” is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on the “DICOM Setup” window.
JPEG Lossless
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for this equipment.
Image Storage For Presentation” function.
REFERENCES
ExplictVR LittleEndian
NOTES
field and select the “MG
To attach image processing parameters, select “MG Image Storage For Processing”. Do not select two or more Service Class settings for a single Application Entity (e.g., MG Image Storage For Presentation and MG Image Storage For Processing). Further, do not select two or more Transfer Syntax settings for a single Service Class (e.g., JPEG Lossless and Implicit VR Little Endian). Even if you select two or more settings, only the first one takes effect.
ImplictVR LittleEndian
9.
Change the following settings as required. Setting of ST :
Select if other connected equipment cannot receive HQ images. ST & HQ : Select if other connected equipment can receive HQ images. ST & HQ & SH : Select if the other connected equipment can receive 20 lines/mm mammographic images as well. Setting of ST : HQ/SH :
Select when transferring standard images only. Select when transferring HQ or 20 lines/mm mammographic images.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-9
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
10. To attach image processing parameters to images to be transfered, select
(
) within the
13. To handle two-byte characters, check the (
).
REFERENCE
field.
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
NOTE “Yes” cannot be selected when “MG Image Storage For Presentation” is specified for Abstract Syntax. This setup item is grayed out.
11. To transfer processed images to other connected (
equipment, select
) within the
14. Click downward arrow
12. If you have selected
15. Make setups for gradation correction as required. NOTE This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand PACS LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key functions) is installed.
at step 11. above, click of
of the
field and select device attribute of other connected equipment (“HD_FILE”).
field.
downward arrow
to
box
as required to change the
setup value. 10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output. 12 : Select when generating 12bit processed image output.
NOTE The value set up in “Bit Stored” is allowed to change only when either “CR Image Storage” or “MG Image Storage For Presentation” is selected for Service Class and “PROC” is selected for Image Processing.
OE030001.EPS
For setup details, see “Display Gradation Correction Setup” under “FR5: Function-specific Reference”.
16. Change the following setting as required. Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images. No : To transfer images not embedded with annotation. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-10
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
17. Set up the following, as necessary.
19. Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCES OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : Select when the minimum value of pixel value is set to white and the maximum value of pixel value is set to black. MONOCHROME2 : Select when the minimum value of pixel value is set to black and the maximum value of pixel value is set to white.
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the “Setup Configuration Item” window. A displayed item can be changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click . If the
key is clicked, currently selected items are
deleted.
NOTE Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following settings are set. Abstract Syntax Role LUT Operation
: MG Image Storage For Presentation : SCP : “Unable to apply LUT Operation” or “Apply LUT correction process to the image” Image Processing : PROC
18. Click
20. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
21. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-11
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
3.
Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in .
For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute, set up DISTRIBUTION CODE as follows.
Click downward arrow
of to select equipment’s
NOTE For an automatic image distribution processing, be sure to change to “Yes” ahead of time the setting (item 3 of “SYSTEM CONFIG ” “5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION”) under “Enable Distribution Code Setup” of the Service Utility. For an automatic distribution to equipment of OD_FILE attribute, perform the procedure described in “2.7 Setting up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT”.
1.
Make the following settings.
Click Item” window.
of the “Setup Configuration
A list of destination equipment for automatic image distribution appears on the right-side area of the window.
host or AE name (e.g.: “MammoView01-SCP”).
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
6.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
00000247.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “Distribution Code” window opens.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-12
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT as directed below.
1.
Click Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the window.
2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method Use the procedure below if the UID issuance method needs to be changed depending on the specifications of other connected equipment which the image is transferred to. For default settings, see Table: List of UID settings.
1.
Click the mark of Configuration Item” window.
2.
Click
of the “Setup
.
The content of the setup items for the CL system information appears on the right-side area of the window. OE000004.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “CONNECTING EQUIPMENT” window opens.
3.
Make the following settings. Click the downward arrow
within
and select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment. Click the downward arrow
within
00000248.EPS
and select equipment (ODF AE name).
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data.
6.
Click
.
The setup data will then be saved. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-13
2.9 Changing the Name Elements
3.
Make UID issuance settings as follows.
Table
List of UID setting (IMAGE MODALITY)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance after Modifying ID Information
YES Issues a new UID. NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when any ID information is modified on the CL.
10 UID Issuance after Modifying Normalized Parameter
YES Issues a new UID. NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when image normalization conditions are modified on the CL.
11 UID Issuance after Modifying Image Processing Parameter
YES Issues a new UID. NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when image processing conditions are modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance YES Before Sending Issues a new UID. Processed Data NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to output an SOP Instance UID as the UID of a processed CR image when outputting processed images from the CL.
13 DICOM Series Generation Logic
Setup of Series Instance 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 UID issuance logic. Series - 1 image Issues a number so that it has See multiple series for one study and “3.4 Configuration only one image for one series. Details – 1. IMAGE 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 MODALITY” under Series - M image “MU: Maintenance Issues a number so that it has Utility”. multiple series for one study and multiple images for one series. 0: 1 Study - 1 series and 1 Series - N image Issues a number so that it has only one series for one study and multiple images for one series.
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
39 UID YES Issues a new UID. Issuance about a function NO (except Image Does not issue a new UID. Processing) to change to the image themselves
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when shuttering processing or energy subtraction processing condition is modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance after Modifying Trimming Parameter
YES Issues a new UID. NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when trimming information is modified.
46 UID Inssuance YES after Modifying Issues a new UID. FNC Parameter NO Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP Instance UID when a FNC parameter is modified.
: Default setting
4.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
5.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
2.9 Changing the Name Elements See “3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
: Default setting 010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment
After the CL-AP is started, makes sure that images can be transferred from the CL to other connected equipment.
Transfer images accumulated in the CL to other connected equipment.
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the image transfer procedures, see the "CL Operation Manual".
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment
2.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1.
From the
Select an image for transfer, then transfer it to other connected equipment.
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
Make sure that the image has actually been transferred to other connected equipment. For details of the transferred image checking procedures, see the operation manual attached to each equipment.
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens. Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10 02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-15
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up the CL setup file. Have the following item ready for use for file backup: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE16-16
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage) This chapter describes the setting procedure used for storage of images from the CR-IR348CL to the storage media, using the DICOM Media Storage service.
NOTES The “CR-IR348CL” is abbreviated hereafter simply “CL”. With software version V8.0 or later, images can be stored in a USB memory stick using the DICOM Media Storage function.
IMPORTANT Installation of the CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key will enable you to use the two kinds of functions said above, (A) and (B). Use these two functions as appropriate in accordance with the equipment’s usage environment. (A) To use the DVD media (or USB memory stick) only on the CL, select “Private Unstandardized CR Storage”. (B) To write images onto the DVD media (or USB memory stick) on the CL and read those images on other maker’s DICOM server, select “CR Image Storage” or “MG Image Storage for Presentation”. (A)
Image writing
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V2.0 (B) or later The option key is required. Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key DICOM Media Storage Private Unstandardized CR Storage (A) CR Image Storage (B) MG Image Storage for Presentation (B)
NOTE To store digital mammograms, the mammography option key is required. For details of digital mammogram settings, see “OE16 CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)”. USB memory requirements (V8.0 or later) USB2.0 is supported. Dedicated drive and software need not to be installed. The capacity is 2GB or more. Writing and reading necessary data are proved to be possible. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Image reading
Removable media (DVD/USB memory)
CL (B)
Only image writing
CL
Removable media (DVD/USB memory) DVD
• LF-C1 • Other maker’s DICOM server Image reading
Removable media (DVD) Image reading
* A USB memory stick can be used with software version V8.0 or later.
OE170021.EPS
Removable media requirements In Japan, use the specified DVD-RAM drive. For other than in Japan, use locally procured removable media and storage media.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-1
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
Connection/setup example
Overall operation flow
TCP/IP Private Unstandardized CR Storage
Data transmission XG-1 RU, etc.
Removable media (DVD or USB memory)
CL
CL setup example • AE name (Provider) • Removable media (DVD) drive recognized by the CL • Service Class • Transfer Syntax
: MEDIA * : F:\ * : Private UnstandardizedCRStorage * : JPEG Lossless *
Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need to be changed depending on the equipment environment. OE170011.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Use a USB cable to connect the CL to removable media.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Use removable media to perform settings necessary for storage of images using DICOM.
“2. CL Software Setup”
Start to install the removable media driver and the option key, reinstall the AP key and then perform the following settings. • Registration of removable media information (including AE name, drive name, handling of high-density images, etc.) • CONNECTING EQUIPMENT settings Check to see that images can be stored from the CL to removable media.
“3. Connection Checkout”
Make backup copies of configuration files.
“4. Setup File Backup”
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
2. CL Software Setup
Connect the CL to removable media, as illustrated below.
NOTE This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
TCP/IP RU
CL
Removable media (DVD/USB memory) USB cable/USB port
Set up CL software as follows. 2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
OE170000.EPS
NOTE
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
To use a DVD in Japan, connect the specified DVD-RAM drive. To use a DVD outside Japan, make connections appropriately following the Operation Manual supplied with the locally procured removable media.
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key 2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function 2.5 CONNECTING EQUIMENT Settings 2.6 Configuration Settings
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-3
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver Install the removable media driver as follows.
NOTE When the OS installed is Windows Vista, the writing software supplied as a standard of the OS is used. For this reason, no driver needs to be installed.
■ For users other than in Japan Install the DLA driver according to the Operation Manual supplied with locally procured removable media.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-4
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key
To store an image using the DICOM Media Storage function, the CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B option key is required.
If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
1.
1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
.
OE170005.EPS
2.
Click
. 00000419.EPS
A window then opens to show that option key installation processing has been completed successfully.
3.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of reinstallation.
3.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-5
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
5.
Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are displayed.
Described below is the procedure used to set up following removable media information items.
CL host name
Removable media name and drive name Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Device Attribute Other (timeout value, etc.)
CL IP address
1.
Startup Service Utility.
00000092.EPS
For how to start up Service Utility, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
NOTE The IP address will not be displayed correctly unless the CL is connected to a network.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
6.
Select “MEDIA” and click
Select “MEDIA”. 00000599.EPS
.
OE170006.EPS
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
00000091.EPS
3.
Click
4.
Select
of the
field. and click
.
OE170008.EPS
The “New Node” window then opens. 010-054-11 07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-6
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
7.
Make the following settings.
9.
Enter the removable media name (e.g.: “MEDIA”) in
Unstandardized CRStorage” or “CR Image Storage”.
Enter the removable media drive name (e.g.: “F:\”) in
Private Unstandardized : For reading images on the CL. CRStorage Select this item when reading the DVD media (or USB memory) only on the CL.
.
Click
in the field and select “Private
.
8.
Click downward arrow
.
CR Image Storage
: For reading images on other maker’s DICOM server. MG Image Storage for Select either of these two items when Presentation reading the DVD media (or USB memory) on other maker’s DICOM server.
The “MEDIASetup” window opens.
See “ Prior to setup” for selection details.
10. Click downward arrow
in the field to select
“JPEGLossless”. OE170013.EPS
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected)
NOTE
Service Class
The following items have been selected automatically on the “MEDIASetup” window that opens. Role : SCP Attribute : OD_FILE
OE170014.EPS
ImplicitVR LittleEndian
ExplicitVR LittleEndian
JPEG Lossless
CR Image Storage
Private Unstandardized CRStorage
MG Image Storage for Presentation
11. To handle two-byte characters, check the (
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
to
box
).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-7
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
12. Make the following settings.
NOTE The value set up in “Bit Stored” is allowed to change only in the following cases:
I
When “CR Image Storage” is selected for the Service Class and “PROC” is selected for the Image Processing. When “MG Image Storage for Presentation” is selected for the Service Class.
II
15. Perform settings for gradation correction processing as required.
OE170009.EPS
I. Select “ST & HQ & SH” II. Select “HQ/SH”
13.
NOTE
Make the following settings as necessary.
These setup items are displayed only when the LUT adjustment function key for competing PACS is installed (one of functions enabled by the Plus Standard Key).
NONE : Selected when storing an image not subjected to image processing. PROC : Selected when storing an already processed image.
NOTE “PROC” can be set up only when “CR Image Storage” has been selected for the Service Class, which is disabled when “Private Unstandardized CRStorage” or “MG Image Storage for Presentation” is selected.
14. If you have selected downward arrow
at step 13. above, click of
as required to change the
setup value. 10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output. 12 : Select when generating 12bit processed image output.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE030001.EPS
NOTES The gradation correction setting is enabled only when “CR Image Storage” or “MG Image Storage for Presentation” is selected for the Service Class, and is disabled when “Private Unstandardized CRStorage” is selected. Do not select “Using Modality LUT module for using image” for “MG Image Storage for Presentation”. Even if it is selected, no operation will be activated. For details of this setting, see “Display Gradation Correction Setup” under “FR5: Function-specific Reference”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-8
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
16. Make the following settings as required.
19. Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
REFERENCES
OE170012.EPS
Yes : Selected for annotation-embedded storage. No : Selected for storage not embedded with annotation.
17. Set up the following, as necessary.
Data that has just been set up is displayed on the right-side of the “Setup Configuration Item” window that opens. You can change the display item as needed. Every time you have changed it, .
make sure to click
will delete the currently selected setup item.
Clicking
20. Select “Save” from the “Config” menu. OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : Select when setting the minimum pixel value to white and the maximum pixel value to black. MONOCHROME2 : Select when setting the minimum pixel value to black and the maximum pixel value to white.
A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
21. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
NOTE Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following settings are performed. Abstract Syntax
: “CR Image Storage” or “MG Image Storage for Presentation” Role : SCP LUT Operation : “Unable to apply LUT Operation” or “Apply LUT correction process to the image” Image Processing : PROC
18. Click
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-9
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings To record images on removable media, make settings for CONNECTING EQIUPMENT appropriately.
1.
Click Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right-side of the window.
OE170019.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “CONNECTING EQUIPMENT” window opens.
3.
Perform the following settings. Click downward arrow
in the
field
to select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment. Click downward arrow
in the
field
to select name (e.g.: MEDIA) of the removable media.
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
Select “Save” from the “Config” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
6.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data. 010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-10
2.6 Configuration Settings
3.
2.6 Configuration Settings Follow the procedure below to set up config items for the DICOM Media Storage function.
1.
Click
.
Setup items for the IDT/Console function appear on the right-side of the window.
Setup items for the IDT/Console function
Start Service Utility. For how to start Service Utility, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
OE000038.EPS
4.
Perform settings for the DICOM Media Storage function. Item Config name
114 00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
Media Auto Mount
Description Setting whether or not to mount media (DVD or USB memory) automatically at CL startup. Select “Yes” (to mount media automatically) or “No” (not to mount media automatically).
: Set it up as required.
5.
Select “Save” from the “Config” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
00000404.EPS
6.
Click
.
The setup data is then saved.
7.
Select “Close” from the “Config” menu. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility”.
8.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-11
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
Start running the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be saved from the CL to the removable media. 3.1 CL-AP Startup
Use removable media to save images stored in the CL onto the storage media.
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media Format the storage media on which images are to be saved.
NOTES
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
• In case a USB memory stick is used for the storage media, this procedure needs not to be performed. Connect the USB memory to the PC and then proceed to “3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media”. • For how to format storage media, procedures to be performed are different depending on whether it is to be performed in Japan or outside Japan.
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media 3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media 3.2.3 Image Storage
■ For users other than in Japan
NOTE This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
Format the storage media according to the Operation Manual supplied with locally procured removable media.
3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1.
From the
Have the CL-AP recognize removable media that stores images, as follows.
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
1.
“Fuji Film” and then “FCR”.
and then
on the CL
media window.
The CL opening window appears. The CL-AP reception window then opens in about two minutes.
2.
Click
A window opens prompting you to set up the volume label name.
Make sure that the “Media” tab has been selected.
OE170002.EPS
OE170020.EPS
2.
Change the volume label name as necessary and click .
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-12
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
3.2.3 Image Storage Described below is the procedure used to store images onto image storage.
1.
Select an image to be stored and save it on the image storage media accordingly. For details of how to store images on the image storage media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the removable media.
2.
Check to see that the image has been stored on the image storage media properly. For details of how to check images stored on the image storage media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the removable media.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-13
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up CL setup files appropriately. Have the following item ready for use for backup processing. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details of the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File–Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE17-16
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function) This chapter describes how to configure a setup procedure to transmit/ receive study reception information between the CR-IR348CL and the POCKET id Console (PDA) and perform portable exposure.
NOTES • The “CR-IR348CL” is hereafter referred to as “CL”. • When the OS used is Windows Vista, this function is not supported.
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V4.0 (B) or later Portable exposure function option key (CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL) is required. Requirements of the POCKET id Console Used model : PPT8846-R3BZ00WW manufactured by Symbol Technology (Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PC)
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Overall operation flow Unpack and charge the POCKET id Console. Also, add a serial connector as required.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Using the POCKET id Console, configure a setup to transmit/receive study reception information between the CL and the POCKET id Console. In the first place, connect the CL with the POCKET id Console, install the option key, and reinstall the AP key. Then do the following setup tasks. • Setting up the POCKET id Console • Making device ID registration • Installing and setting up the POCKET id Console application
“2. CL Software Setup”
Make sure that study reception information can be transmitted/ received between the CL and the POCKET id Console.
“3. Connection Verification”
Back up the configuration file.
“4. Setup File Backup”
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-1
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console
1. Hardware Setup
REFERENCE With the help of the cradle’s LED, you can tell when the battery becomes fully charged. The battery is fully charged when the LED changes from red to green.
With respect to the CL and the POCKET id Console, perform the following hardware setup. 1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console
· · · Take the POCKET id Console out of its box and set it in its cradle for charging.
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector (*1)
· · · Connect the add-in serial connector cable to the PC’s mother board.
*1 : The addition of the serial connector is required only when there is only one serial connector on the rear panel of a PC (such as the GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is already being used for the touch panel.
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console Take the POCKET id Console out of its box, set up the cradle, and put the POCKET id Console in the cradle to charge its battery. Make initial settings and the like on the side of the POCKET id Console in order to get it ready for use. For details of the procedure, see the POCKET id Console (PPT8846) Operation Manual.
1.
Connect the cradle for the POCKET id Console into a wall outlet. (It is not necessary to make a connection with the PC.)
2.
Attach the main battery to the POCKET id Console and insert the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
When the battery is used for the very first time, it takes about 24 hours for the backup battery to become fully charged. Therefore, do not disengage the main battery before 24 hours have passed.
3.
When full charging is completed, turn off the POCKET id Console.
4.
By following the directions provided by the wizard that opens, perform a setup (calibration).
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector If there is only one serial connector mounted on the rear panel of a PC (such as the GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is already being occupied by the touch panel, one additional serial connector is required to be mounted for use with the POCKET id Console. For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see “1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board” in “FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-2
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
2. CL Software Setup NOTE
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
This chapter uses Windows 2000 windows, whose contents are the same as those displayed by Windows XP.
In order to make it possible for the CL and the POCKET id Console communicate with each other, it is necessary to install software for this purpose (Microsoft ActiveSync3.7) on the CL side. The procedure for installing Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 is described below.
In this chapter, perform the software setup procedure on the CL and the POCKET id Console as follows.
1.
Insert the Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 installer CD that came with the POCKET id Console into the PC.
2.
Double-click the MSASYNC.EXE file that is in the following directory.
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
\ENGLISH\MSASYNC.EXE
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
The installer starts and the “Set Up Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7” window opens.
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console 2.5 Registering the Device ID 2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
OE180101.EPS
3.
Click
.
The “Select Installation Folder” window opens.
OE180077.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-3
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
4.
Click
A connection verification process starts. After successful connection has been verified, the “New Partnership” window opens.
.
The “Get Connected” window opens.
OE180080.EPS
OE180078.EPS
5.
Directly connect the serial cable of the cradle for the POCKET id Console to the serial connector (COM port) on the PC.
10. Click the “Guest partnership” radio button to enable it, and then click
.
NOTE Do not place the POCKET id Console into the cradle yet.
6.
Turn ON the power to the POCKET id Console.
7.
Insert the power to the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
8.
Click
on the “Get Connected” window.
OE180081.EPS
OE180078.EPS
The “Microsoft ActiveSync” (Connected) window opens.
The “Windows Security Alert” window opens.
OE180079.EPS
9.
Click
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-4
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
11. Make sure that “Guest” and “Connected” are being displayed.
Check to see these are being shown. OE180082.EPS
12. Click
at the upper right corner of the window.
The “Microsoft ActiveSync” (Connected) window closes.
13. Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-5
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
In order to make it possible to perform portable exposure using the POCKET id Console, the “CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL” option key is required.
Once the option key has been installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key installation CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00) to reinstall the AP key. The installation procedure is described below.
1.
1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE
NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
.
OE180016.EPS
2.
Click
.
A window then opens to show that option key installation processing has been completed successfully.
3.
Click
. OE180017.EPS
The system returns to the desktop.
4.
A window then opens to show that option key installation processing has been completed successfully.
Remove the CD from the PC.
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-6
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
3.
1.
From the
4.
By tapping on the
or
tab.
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
arrow next to the
field, set the current time of day.
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“Setting”, and then tap on the
next to the
field, and select the time zone appropriate to the use environment.
This section describes settings that need to be made on the POCKET id Console side.
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time
Tap on downward arrow
5.
Tap on downward arrow
next to the
field. The calendar window opens.
OE180085.EPS
6.
Repeatedly tap on the today’s date.
7.
Tap on
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-click
.
or
button as required to select
at the upper right corner of the window.
A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
The “Clock” window opens.
OE180086.EPS
8.
Tap on
.
OE180084.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-7
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
3.
2.4.2 Setting the Device ID
1.
From the
Tap on the “Device ID” tab.
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
"Setting", and then tap on the
tab. OE180088.EPS
The “System” tab window opens.
The “Device ID” tab window opens.
4.
Tap on
.
A data entry panel like that shown below opens.
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
.
The “About” window opens.
OE180089.EPS
5.
Tap on the
field to place the
cursor in the field, and then enter the device ID (e.g. FF001) using the data entry panel.
NOTES If two or more POCKET id Consoles are introduced at a given institution, unique device IDs should be assigned to them. For information, a single CL can handle up to three POCKET id Consoles. OE180087.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Characters that may be used are uppercase A to Z, lowercase a to z, numbers 0 to 9 and the underscore character (“_”).
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-8
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
6.
Tap on
.
The data entry panel closes.
7.
Tap on
at the upper right corner of the window.
2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties
Backlight setting
1.
From the
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“Setting”, and then tap on the
tab.
The “System” tab window opens.
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
.
The “Backlight” window opens.
OE180090.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-9
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
3.
Checkmark
4.
Tap on the “External Power” tab.
(
➔
).
(
➔
).
OE180091.EPS
The “External Power” tab window opens.
5.
Checkmark
6.
Tap on
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
at the upper right corner of the window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-10
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
3.
Brightness setting
1.
From the
Tap on the “Brightness” tab.
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“Setting”, and then tap on the
tab.
OE180093.EPS
The “Brightness” tab window opens.
The “System” tab window opens.
4.
Check to make sure that the
is being selected in field.
REFERENCE If the user wants, for example, “to prolong battery life”, it is possible to conserve battery consumption by changing the “Brightness level” setting. However, since the window becomes difficult to see (with reduced brightness), it is necessary for you to have the user understand this fact. OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
5.
Tap on
at the upper right corner of the window.
.
The “Symbol Settings” window opens.
OE180092.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-11
2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed
1.
From the
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“ActiveSync”. The “ActiveSync” tab window opens.
OE180106.EPS
4.
Tap on
.
The “PC Synchronization Option” window opens.
OE180094.EPS
2.
Tap on
3.
Tap on
. and select [Option].
OE180107.EPS OE180095.EPS
The “Option” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
Select
6.
Tap on
. at the upper right corner of the window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-12
2.5 Registering the Device ID
2.5 Registering the Device ID
4.
This section describes the procedure used for registering the POCKET id Console device ID on the CL side.
1.
Start up the Service Utility. For details of Service Utility mode startup, see “1. Starting/ Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
Click
field the device ID that
you have set on the POCKET id Console side (e.g. FF001).
5.
Click
.
REFERENCE
The main menu opens.
2.
Enter in the
If two or more POCKET id Consoles are used at the same institution (a maximum of 3 consoles for one CL), repeat steps 4 and 5 for the number of POCKET id Consoles to be used in the institution.
.
The “P-Console Setting” window opens.
6.
Click
.
The system returns to the “P-Console Setting” window.
7.
Click
on the
“P-Console Setting” window. The system returns to the main menu. OE180045.EPS
3.
8. Click
.
Click
.
The system then returns to the desktop.
The “PDA DeviceID Registration” window opens.
OE180046.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-13
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
4.
Enter “13” and press the key. The “Select PDA Type” window opens.
2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application
1. 2.
Place the POCKET id Console into the cradle. OE180100.EPS
Make sure that the
icon being shown at the bottom right
of the CL desktop turns
(green).
5.
Enter “2” and press the key. The installer opens, and the installation start window opens.
OE180102.EPS
OE180075.EPS
3.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
6.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu opens automatically.
Click
.
The installation process starts. As the installation process completes, the installation complete window opens.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
OE180103.EPS
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu.
8.
Enter “0” and press the key. The system returns to the desktop.
9.
Remove the CD from the PC.
OE180049.EPS
REFERENCE The “IIP Setup Tool” is a utility tool for performing CL-AP installation and the like. This tool is contained on the CD that came with the CL as a standard (Product name: Application software, Part No.: 114Y5342001A). 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-14
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
10. Soft-reset the POCKET id Console. REFERENCE While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function key at the same time, and then release these keys. Scan trigger Function key ( button)
Enter key ( button) Scan trigger
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180110.EPS
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-15
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.6.2 Setting Up the POCKET id Console Service Utility
1.
From the
4.
Double-click
.
The “S_UTL” window opens.
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“Programs”. The “Programs” window opens.
OE180098.EPS
5.
Tap on
6.
Tap on
.
OE180096.EPS
2. 3.
Double-click
.
Open the “My Device” ➔ “Program Files” ➔ “Fuji Film” ➔ “P-Console” ➔ “System” folder in this order.
at the upper right corner of the window.
The “S_UTL” window closes.
The contents in the folder are listed.
OE180097.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-16
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for the POCKET id Console
3.
Set configuration items related to the POCKET id Console in the following procedure.
1.
Under
, click
.
Configuration setup items concerning the POCKET id Console are listed on the right side of the window.
Start up the Service Utility on the CL side. For details of Service Utility mode startup, see “1. Starting/ Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
The main menu opens.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
Configuration items for the POCKET id OE180074.EPS Console are listed.
4. No. 1
Set the following configuration items concerning the POCKET id Console. Config name BatteryWarning1
Warning threshold for low remaining battery power (for the first-time warning) Default : Warning issued when only 30/100 of the battery power is remaining.
BatteryWarning2
Warning threshold for a low remaining battery power (for the second-time warning) Default : Warning issued when only 20/100 of the battery power is remaining.
StudyFilePath
Setting of the folder in which the study information file is to be stored. Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job
CustomFilePath
Setting of the folder path where the window customization setting file and display item setting file are to be stored. Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\ Custom
LoginFlag
Whether or not to display the login input window at startup time. Default : No
OE180072.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
2
3
OE180073.EPS
4
5
Meaning
: Default setting : May be changed as required. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-17
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
NOTE If you have set LoginFlag to ON, set the item no. 37 “Enable Security Function” under “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “IMAGE MODALITY” to “Yes” and define the technologist name and password in the User Utility, and then transfer the technologist information to the POCKET id Console.
5.
2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application and Transferring the Configuration File
1.
From the
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
“Programs”. The “Programs” window opens.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
6.
Click
.
The setup data is saved.
7.
Select “Close” from the “Config” menu. The system returns to the main menu.
REFERENCE
OE180096.EPS
Do not close the Service Utility and leave it up and running.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-18
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.
Double-click
.
4.
Click
.
The “P-Console Setting” window opens.
NOTE A transfer of the configuration file should be done with the POCKET id Console up and running. The startup window opens, and then the "Study list" window of the POCKET id Console application opens. OE180045.EPS
5.
Click
.
A dialog to confirm the execution of the file transfer opens.
OE180061.EPS OE180059.EPS
3.
Start the Service Utility on the CL side.
6.
Click
.
Data transfer to the POCKET id Console starts.
For details of Service Utility mode startup, see “1. Starting/ Exiting the Service Utility” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
When the transfer completes, a message appears informing you of the completion.
The main menu opens.
OE180062.EPS
7.
Click
in the message dialog appearing on the
CL display. The system returns to the “P-Console Setting” window. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-19
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
8.
Click
on the
“P-Console Setting” window. The system returns to the main menu.
9.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-20
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Connection Verification After starting the CL-AP, verify that study reception information can be transmitted/received properly between the CL and the POCKET id Console.
3.2 Transferring Study Reception Information from the CL to the POCKET id Console 1.
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
On the reception window of the CL-AP, register study information. For the procedure for registering study information, see the CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Transferring Study Reception Information from the CL to the POCKET id Console
2.
Select the “Local WL” tab.
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode 3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
OE180104.EPS
From the
menu, select “Program” ➔ “Fuji Film” ➔
“FCR”.
3.
On the CL’s “Local WL” window, select the row of a patient whose information you want to transfer to the POCKET id Console.
4.
Click
The CL opening window opens. In about 2 minutes, the reception window of the CL-AP opens.
and then
.
The study reception information is transferred to the POCKET id Console.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-21
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode
5.
Make sure that study reception information of the patient that was selected on the CL’s “Local WL” window has been successfully transferred to the POCKET id Console.
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode 1.
On the “Study list” window of the POCKET id Console, tap on the
2.
tab.
Select the patient whose information you have transferred from the CL, and tap on
.
The “Start study” window opens.
OE180108.EPS
OE180109.EPS
3.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Aim the scan window of the POCKET id Console at the IP’s barcode.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-22
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result
4.
Press either of the scan triggers located on the right and left sides of the POCKET id Console. When doing so, make sure that red scan beam focuses on the entire barcode. Scan window
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result 1.
Scan trigger
On the reception window of the CL-AP, select the “Local WL” tab.
Scan trigger OE180066.EPS
When a barcode is read, the green scan LED lights up and a beep sounds.
OE180104.EPS
2.
On the “Local WL” window of the CL-AP, select the row for the patient whose information has been transferred to the POCKET id Console.
3.
Click
and then
.
The CL now receives study reception information transmitted from the POCKET id Console.
4.
Make sure that the study reception information of the patient that you selected on the CL’s “Local WL” window is received from the POCKET id Consol, and the IP number has been registered.
REFERENCE If you see an IP number in the “IP #” column in the lower right portion of the window, it means that barcode reading using the POCKET id Console and data reception from the POCKET id Console have been successfully performed. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-23
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up CL setup files appropriately. Have the following item ready for use for backup processing. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details of the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File – Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE18-24
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query) This chapter describes the setup procedure required when using the Synapse server Web Query function from the CL.
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V2.0 (B) or later Microsoft Internet Explorer: Version 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is recommended.)
NOTE To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later. Synapse server The CL user account (Administrator) must be registered beforehand using the Synapse server’s Administrator Tool. Specify “Referring Physician” as the User Group for registration.
010-054-16 07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Overall operation flow Use a network cable to connect the CL and the Synapse.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Perform the following setups. • Uninstallation of the CL-AP Uninstallation of NetMeeting (for Windows XP only) Installation of the Synapse Client software Installation of the CL-AP Installation of the Synapse Web Query application Setup of system environment variables Web Query-related config settings Setup of the User Utility
“2. CL Software Setup”
Use the Web Query function to retrieve images on the Synapse server.
“3. Connection Checkout”
Make backup copies of Web Query function related configuration files.
“4. Setup File Backup”
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup Network-connect the CL and the Synapse server to each other, as illustrated below. 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable TCP/IP
CL
Synapse server OE000062.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL and Synapse server. The cable type applicable to the CL and the Synapse server is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-2
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP
2. CL Software Setup
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP 1.
Uninstall the CL-AP.
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP
NOTES
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only)
• Be sure to use the CL-AP CD. • Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used. For how to uninstall the CL-AP, see “■ Uninstalling the CLAP” in “Appendix D Upgrading the AP” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software 2.4 Installing the CL-AP 2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application 2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only) 1.
menu.
➔ The “Run...” window opens.
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings 2.8 Setting the User Utility
Select “Run…” from the
2.
Type in “conf.exe” in
and click
.
➔ The “NetMeeting” window opens.
3.
Select “Rem ote Desktop Sharing...” from the “Tools” menu.
OE190013.EPS
➔ The “Remote Desktop Sharing Settings” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-3
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software
4.
Uncheck
.(
➔
)
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software Install the Synapse Client software on the CL as follows.
OE190014.EPS
5.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the “NetMeeting” window.
6.
7.
Check to see that the “NetMeeting Remote Desktop Sharing” icon ( ) has disappeared from the taskbar at the lower right of the window. Select “Exit” from the “Call” menu.
Installation of the Synapse Client software Security setup for Microsoft Internet Explorer For the installation procedure and other settings of the Synapse Client software, see the Synapse Operation Manual.
NOTE To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is recommended.).
REFERENCE When installing the Synapse Client software, Microsoft Internet Explorer is used to download files and the like. If no Microsoft Internet Explorer windows are displayed but the internet connection wizard is displayed, make the following settings. For the first window
: Connection via LAN
For the second window : Connection via LAN For the third window
: No proxy settings are required. (Remove all checkmarks.)
For the fourth window : Do not set up mail account. OE190015.EPS
➔ “NetMeeting” shuts down and the system returns to the desktop.
8.
Restart the PC to make sure that NetMeeting is not up and running and also that the PC operates normally.
2.4 Installing the CL-AP 1.
Install the CL-AP. For how to install the CL-AP, see “■ Installing the CL-AP” in “Appendix D Upgrading the AP” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”.
NOTE Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-4
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application 1.
4.
The system then returns to the desktop.
5.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC.
Enter “0” and press the key.
Remove the CD from the PC.
The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu opens automatically.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup: bat) in the CD.
OE190016.EPS
2.
Enter “14” and press the key. A window like that shown below will open.
OE190017.EPS
3.
Enter “1” and press the key. The “SYNAPSE-WebQuery Application Install was Completed” message displays and the system returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-5
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables 1.
• From the
Perform the following settings.
menu, select “Settings” and then
“Control Panel”.
For Windows 2000 • From the
For Windows XP
The Control Panel opens.
menu, select “Settings” and then
“Control Panel”.
• Double-click
.
The Control Panel opens. The “System Properties” window opens.
• Double-click
.
• Click the “Advanced” tab and then
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
• Click the “Advanced” tab and then
.
OE190002.EPS
OE190001.EPS
The “Environment Variables” window opens.
The “Environment Variables” window opens.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-6
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
2.
For Windows Vista • Select “Control Panel” from the
Select a variable, “Path”, from the “System variables” field and click
menu.
.
The Control Panel opens.
• Double-click
.
The “System” window opens.
• Click
.
The “System Properties” window opens.
• Click the “Advanced” tab and then
.
OE190003.EPS
3.
The “Edit System Variable” window opens.
Type in the following text in one-byte characters, immediately after the already entered variable value (...\BINN), as illustrated below. ;C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System
OE190004.EPS
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Environment Variables” window. OE190018.ai
5.
Click
.
The system returns to the “System Properties” window.
6.
Click
.
The screen returns to the desktop. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-7
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings 1.
Start up the Service Utility.
3.
Click the symbol at the left of “Setup Configuration Item” window.
4.
Click
.
A list of configuration option setup items appears in the right-hand area of the window.
For how to start up the Service Utility function, see “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
on the
Configuration option setup items
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
OE190005.EPS
00000131.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
5.
Double-click
6.
Click
of
and select [Yes]. .
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appears in the righthand area of the window.
IDT/Console function setup items
00000404.EPS
OE000038.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-8
2.8 Setting the User Utility
7.
Double-click
2.8 Setting the User Utility
of
and enter the Synapse server host name (e.g.: synapse_server).
With the use of the User Utility’s screen display customization function (exposure parameter shortcut), add screen display icon for the Web Query function.
NOTE When an IP address was used to install the Synapse Client, the IP address must be input at this step.
8.
Double-click
of
and
For details of the setup procedure, see the CR Console Operation Manual.
Screen display customization function window (exposure parameter shortcut)
enter the most-significant directory path targeted for search by the Synapse server. Change this as required.
REFERENCE “%20” of “ALL%20Patients” stands for a one-byte space.
9.
Select “Save” from the “Config” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data.
10. Click
OE190006.EPS
.
The system saves the setup data.
Screen display sample
11. Select “Close” from the “Config” menu. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
12. Click [Exit Service Utility]. The screen returns to the desktop.
Web Query function icon OE190007.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-9
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout
3.2 Web Query Checkout
Use the Web Query function to search images handled by the Synapse server.
1.
Register patient ID and exposure menu on the CL’s study reception window.
NOTE
3.1 CL-AP Startup
Data is searched for on the Synapse server based on the patient ID, which requires the user to enter a patient ID that actually exists on the Synapse server.
3.2 Web Query Checkout
2.
Display the study window.
3.1 CL-AP Startup 1.
From the
menu, select “Programs”, “Fuji Film” and
then “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
OE000099.EPS
OE190008.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-10
3.2 Web Query Checkout
3.
Click
6.
.
After a while, the “Connect to synapse” window opens.
Ensure that the Synapse Client screen appears on the “Image browse” window. Synapse Client screen
OE190011.EPS OE190009.EPS
4.
Enter the Synapse server’s user name (e.g.: synapseae) and password (e.g.: synapseae) and click
.
REFERENCE If a domain is required to log onto the Synapse server, enter a domain name in the “Domain” box. Mark the “Remember my password” checkbox as necessary. When network authentication successfully confirms the user identity, the “Security Warning” window opens.
OE190010.EPS
5.
Click
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-11
4. Setup File Backup
7.
Click a list item (“Ec01v4.0e, Dicom...” for the Patient Name on the window above) to display a patient image.
4. Setup File Backup
NOTE
Back up the CL setup files.
When the Web Query function is used, there may be cases where a patient image is not displayed though the list appears at step 6. above. Make always sure that the patient image is displayed appropriately.
Have the following item ready for use for file backup: Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
OE190012.EPS
8.
Click
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE19-12
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint) This chapter describes the setup procedure necessary to search for/ acquire images stored in the DICOM server, from the CL using the DICOM Query/Retrieve function. This chapter also describes the procedure for the setup of service classes required for the acquisition of searched images. In addition, this chapter explains about the setup procedure used for the printout of acquired images from the CL to the DICOM printer using the DICOM Print function.
Connection/setup example (1) Connection/setup example (DICOM Query/Retrieve) Set up the DICOM/Query/Retrieve function following the example below. CL setup example • HOST name • IP address • AE name (User) • Service Class
fcr-csl* 172.16.1.20* CL- SCU-QR* Study Root Query Study Root Retrieve • Transfer Syntax : ImplicitVRLittleEndian
NOTE The “CR-IR348CL” is abbreviated hereinafter simply as “CL”. An equipment unit targeted for image search/acquisition (DICOM server) and that targeted for image printout (DICOM printer) are abbreviated herein as “other connected equipment”.
CL (This equipment) TCP/IP
Prior to setup CL requirements The CL main unit (including DICOM Print/DICOM Storage) must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V3.0(B) or later The option key is required.
Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM QR key
DICOM Query/Retrieve
Requirements of other connected equipment The main unit of other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly.
❍ DICOM server SYNAPSE and other manufacturer’s DICOM servers should be connectable. Connection requirements must be checked for in advance.
: : : :
DICOM CR Storage DICOM Query/Retrieve DICOM Server (Other connected equipment) Setup example of other connected equipment • HOST name • IP address • AE name (Provider) • Port number • Service Class • Transfer Syntax
: : : : :
D-Server* 172.16.1.40* ServerDicom* 12040* Study Root Query Study Root Retrieve : ImplicitVRLittleEndian
Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need to be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. 015039.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-1
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)
(2) Connection/setup example (CR Image Storage)
➥ REFERENCE
Set up the CR Image Storage function following the example below. Items other than those grayed out in the illustration below should be newly set up here.
NOTE Searched images will be input actually by using the CR Image Storage or Private CR Storage service class.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\ReverseLut.lut
CL setup example • HOST name • IP address • AE name (Provider) • Port number • Service Class • Transfer Syntax
When inputting an image from other connected equipment, if it has undergone image processing and LUT processing, whether to automatically perform LUT reverse-conversion processing or perform reverse-conversion processing on the printer side can be selected on this equipment. To perform LUT reverse-conversion processing on the CL, the reverse-conversion LUT file (ReverseLut.lut) that is stored in the directory shown below will be used on this equipment. However, replace this file for another if you wish to use a different LUT.
: : : : : :
fcr-csl* 172.16.1.20* CL- SCP* 12408* CR Image Storage* JPEGLossLess*
CL (This equipment) TCP/IP
DICOM CR Storage DICOM Query/Retrieve DICOM server (Other connected equipment) Setup example of other connected equipment • HOST name • IP address • AE name (User) • Service Class • Transfer Syntax
: : : : :
D-Server* 172.16.1.40* ServerDicom* CR Image Storage* JPEGLossLess*
Items marked with “*” constitute setup examples, which need to be changed depending on the equipment or network environment. 015061.EPS
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Overall operation flow Use a network cable to connect the CL to other equipment.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Connect the CL to other equipment via network, as illustrated below. ● FN-PS551
Perform the following setups that enable image reprint using DICOM. Start to install the option key, and reinstall the AP key. Perform then the following. • Setup of information on this equipment (AE name, host name, IP address, device attributes, Service Class, and other) • Registration of information on other connected equipment (AE name, device attributes, host name, IP address, port number, Service Class, handling of high-density images, and other) • Setup of CONNECTING EQUIPMENT • Setup of CONFIG QR
“2. Software Setup”
Printer
FN-PS551
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Other connected equipment
CL
00000044.EPS
● DRYPIX/FM-DPL DRYPIX/ FM-DPL
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Make sure that the CL can search for/retrieve images from the DICOM server and also that it can print retrieved images to the DICOM printer.
“3. Verification”
Make backup copies of configuration files.
“4. Setup File Backup”
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
E-i/f cable
CL
Other connected equipment 00000044.EPS
NOTES Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL and other connected equipment. The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-3
2.1 CL Software Setup
2. Software Setup
2.1 CL Software Setup
Set up software for the CL and other connected equipment. 2.1 CL Software Setup 2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option Key 2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key 2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment for Image Search/ Acquisition 2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition 2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function 2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function 2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT 2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR 2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility 2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment
2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option Key The CL DICOM QR option key must be installed as follows so that you can search for/acquire images.
1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC. In a few seconds, the installation start widow opens automatically.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
Tasks done on the CL
2.
Click
.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
· · · Task done on other connected equipment
00000046.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-4
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key Whenever the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition Set up the following information items on this equipment. Host name and IP address AE name (Application Entity Name) Service Class, Role, Attribute Other (timeout value setting, etc.)
1.
➔ The “IIP Service Utility” main menu opens. See “1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
2.
.
Start the Service Utility mode.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the “IIP Service Utility” main menu.
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
.
The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
015015.EPS
The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
015016.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-5
2.1 CL Software Setup
3. 4.
Click the
mark of the
Select
7.
. and click
the CL in the
.
field.
NOTES
The “New Node” window opens.
5.
Enter the AE name (e.g.: “CL-SCU-QR”) that is the SCU for
Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered.
Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are displayed.
fcr-csl
CL host name
1 72 16 1 20
CL IP address
➥ REFERENCE You need not to set up the port number in
8.
015017.EPS
Click
.
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
NOTES The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is network-connected. Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box.
6.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens. 015023.EPS
9.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
Class (Study Root Query).
015018.EPS
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-6
2.1 CL Software Setup
10. Select
(SCU) for the Role because this equipment is a user of the DICOM service class.
13. Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
REFERENCES If the Service Class and Role are selected, contents of Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at OTHER. “SCU” is the abbreviation of Service Class User.
11. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value as necessary.
015023.EPS
REFERENCE It is not necessary to place a checkmark to disregarded even if placed.
. It will be
14. Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
Class (Study Root Retrieve).
12. Click
.
15. Select
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
(SCU) for the Role because this equipment is a user of the DICOM service class.
NOTE If the Service Class and Role are selected, contents of Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at OTHER.
16. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value as necessary. 015018.EPS
REFERENCE It is not necessary to place a checkmark to disregarded even if placed.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
. It will be
OE20-7
2.1 CL Software Setup
17. Click
2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for Image Search/ Acquisition
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
18. Click
Register the following information items on other connected equipment.
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
Host name and IP address AE name (Application Entity Name ), port number Service Class, Role, Attribute Other (settings for the supported search key and default target for acquisition, etc.)
1.
Click the mark in Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
The “ALL OTHER NODES” list opens.
2. 015063 eps
Perform the following settings.
● When other connected equipment (D-Server, for example) has already been properly registered:
19. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
20. Click
.
The system saves the setup data. Already-registered other connected equipment (e.g.: D-Server) 015064.EPS
I.
On the “Setup Configuration Item” window, sequentially select , , (host name of the DICOM server that stores images), and then (AE name of the DICOM server).
II. Click (slightly below the center of the window). The “DICOMSetup” window opens. Skip steps 3. through 5. and continue with the processing from step 6. 010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-8
2.1 CL Software Setup
● If other connected equipment is unregistered:
3.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
Unregistered other connected equipment (e.g.: D-Server) 015065.EPS
I.
Select
and click
.
➔ The “New Node” window opens. 015005.EPS
II. Perform the following settings on the “New Node” window. Enter the host name (e.g.: D-Server) in Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.40) in
NOTE Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node field. III. Continue with the processing from step 3.
4.
. .
Perform the following settings. Enter the AE name (ServerDicom, for example) of other connected .
equipment in
NOTES Enter “SynapseDicomSCP” if the connected DICOM server is SYNAPSE. Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered. Enter the port number of other connected equipment (12040, for example) in
.
NOTE Enter “104” if other connected equipment is SYNAPSE.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-9
2.1 CL Software Setup
5.
Click
NOTE
.
Set any from 1 to 8 if “1: SendConfigurationInformation” is specified for No.2 in 10. CONFIG QR of the SYSTEM CONFIG, and set NONE for other cases.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
11. Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window. If other connected equipment is unregistered, the system returns to the “Application Entity List”. Click 015023.EPS
6.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
Class (Study Root Retrieve).
7.
Select
(SCP) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a provider of the service class.
NOTE If the Service Class and Role are selected, contents of Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at OTHER.
015066.eps
12. Click
.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
8.
To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to ( ). ➔
9.
Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value as necessary.
10. Set up
as necessary. 015023.EPS
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-10
2.1 CL Software Setup
13. Click
17. Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
Class (Study Root Query).
14. Select
(SCP) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a provider of the DICOM service class.
NOTES If the Service Class of Study Root Query is selected, contents of Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at QUERY. “SCP” is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider.
015073.eps
18. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu.
15. To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to (
➔
A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
).
➥ REFERENCE It is not necessary to place a checkmark to be disregarded even if placed.
. It will
19. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
16. Select the AE name of other connected equipment that is the default destination for retrieval.
015049.EPS
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-11
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
3.
Click
.
The “Application Entity List” window opens.
Set up the following information items on this equipment. AE name (Application Entity Name), port number Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute Other (settings of timeout value, etc.)
1.
Select
on the “Setup Configuration Item”
window and click
.
The “New Node” window opens.
2.
Check to see that the host name and IP address of the CL are displayed. 015005.EPS
fcr-csl
CL host name
1 72 16 1 20
CL IP address
4.
Perform the following settings. Enter the AE name that is the SCP for the CL field.
(e.g.: “CL-SCP”) in the 015004.EPS
NOTES
NOTES
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CR-IR348CL is network-connected.
Set up an AE name that is different from the AE name (for the FCR5000plus or DVD) of other SCP.
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box.
Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly. A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered. Enter the port number of this equipment (e.g.: 12408) in the field.
NOTE Set up a port number paying attention not to specify the same port number of other SCP (for the FCR5000plus or DVD). The port number used for DVD is fixed at 104.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-12
2.1 CL Software Setup
5.
Click
➥ REFERENCE
.
“SCP” is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
8.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example). Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable) Service Class 015006.EPS
6.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage). CR Image Storage Private CR Storage MGImageStorageForPresentation MGImageStorageForProcessing
NOTE Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageForProcessing only when an option has been installed.
➥ REFERENCE “Verification” included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must be selected accordingly. For details of connection verification, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
7.
Select
(SCP) for the Role because the CR-IR348CL is
a provider of the DICOM service class. 010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
ImplictVR LittleEndian
ExplictVR LittleEndian
JPEG Lossless
● CR Image Storage ● Private CR Storage ● MGImageStorageForPresentation ● MGImageStorageForProcessing
Verification
NOTE When setting up ImplicitVRLittleEndian, an image reception error may result. For the purpose of image storage, use ExplicitVRLittleEndian or JPEGLossless.
9.
To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to (
➔
).
10. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value (
)
as necessary.
11. Click
(downward arrow) in the
field to select the device attribute (HD_FILE).
12. Click
.
The system returns to the “Application Entity List” window.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-13
2.1 CL Software Setup
13. Click
2.
.
Click
(slightly below the center of the
window).
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
The “DICOMSetup” window opens.
015010.EPS 015008.EPS
14. Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
15. Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
3.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the Service
Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage). CR Image Storage Private CR Storage MGImageStorageForPresentation MGImageStorageForProcessing
NOTE Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageForProcessing only when an option has been installed.
Set up the following information items on other connected equipment.
➥ REFERENCE
Host name and IP address AE name (Application Entity Name) Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute
“Verification” included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection, “Verification” must be selected accordingly.
1.
On the “Setup Configuration Item” window, sequentially select , , (host name of the DICOM server that stores images), and then (AE name of the DICOM server).
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
For details of connection verification, see “7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment — Verify Connection” in “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-14
2.1 CL Software Setup
4.
Select
(SCU) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a user of the DICOM service class.
7.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
➥ REFERENCE “SCU” is the abbreviation of Service Class User.
5.
Click
(downward arrow) in the field to select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example). Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable) Service Class
ImplictVR LittleEndian
ExplictVR LittleEndian
JPEG Lossless 015011.eps
● CR Image Storage ● Private CR Storage ● MGImageStorageForPresentation ● MGImageStorageForProcessing
Verification
NOTE Be sure to set up the same Transfer Syntax as that set up on the Provider side (SCP).
8.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
9.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data.
➥ REFERENCES You need not to place a checkmark to It is not necessary to perform setting for be disregarded even if set up.
6.
Click
. . It will
(downward arrow) in the
field to select device attribute (OTHER) for other connected equipment.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-15
2.1 CL Software Setup
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT To search for images based on the DICOM Query protocol, perform settings of the AE name for the server targeted for inquiry using the CONNECTING EQUIPMENT function.
1.
Click Configuration Item” window.
on the “Setup
Registered equipment units are listed on the right side of the window.
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR To enable reprint of images acquired using the DICOM Query/Retrieve function, Service Utility settings are necessary. For the default settings, see the “Table CONFIG QR-related setup data”.
1.
Click the mark in Configuration Item” window.
2.
Click
on the “Setup
.
Setup information on the CL is displayed on the right side on the window.
OE000004.EPS
2.
Click
.
The “CONNECTING EQUIPMENT” window opens.
3.
Perform the following settings. Click
(downward arrow) in the
20000001.EPS
field to select function (QUERY) of other connected equipment. Click
(downward arrow) in the
field to select equipment (AE name of the server targeted for inquiry).
4.
Click
.
The system returns to the “Setup Configuration Item” window.
5.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
6.
Click
.
The system saves the setup data. 010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-16
2.1 CL Software Setup
3.
Perform CONFIG QR-related configuration settings as follows. Table CONFIG QR-related setup data No
Name
1 Retrieved Image Viewer Finish Mode
Selection 0 : Normal Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button) 1 : Finish After Reprint Finishes after generating reprint.
Meaning Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
2 Reverse LUT 0 : None For Processed No reverse-conversion processing is performed. Image 1 : SendConfigurationInformation Reverse-conversion processing is performed on the printer side after LUT type information is sent to the printer. 2 : ApplyReverseLUT Reverse-conversion processing is performed at the output process.
Specifying whether or not to perform LUT reverse-conversion processing when a processed image is retrieved.
3 The Patient Format For Search Condition
Specifying which element(s) of a patient name is to be matched with the search conditions.
: (1) family * : (2) family, given *^* : (3) family, given, middle *^*^* : (4) family, given, middle, prefix *^*^*^* : (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix *^*^*^*^* : (1) Multi-byte support to (1) above. *=* : (2) Multi-byte support to (2) above. *^*=*^* : (3) Multi-byte support to (3) above. *^*^*=*^*^* : (4) Multi-byte support to (4) above. *^*^*^*=*^*^*^* *^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above.
See “3.4 Configuration Details — 1. IMAGE MODALITY” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
* A patient name consists of the following five elements. This setup item is to determine which of those five elements are to be matched with the search conditions. family, given, middle, prefix, suffix * “*” appearing in the selective alternatives at left represents one of the patient name elements. “^”shows delimitation between the elements, and “=”shows that multi-byte characters can be typed in.
: Default setting
4.
Select “Save” from the “Config (F)” menu. A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
5.
Click
.
The system saves the setup date. 010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-17
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment
2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility
1.
Select “Close” from the “Config (F)” menu. The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment Set up DICOM Query/Retrieve in accordance with the software specification of other connected equipment so that other connected equipment is available for image data search/acquisition from the CL. ● DICOM server See descriptions related to DICOM Query/Retrieve included in the manuals of the individual equipment.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-18
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verification After starting up the CL-AP, make sure that images on the DICOM server can be searched for/acquired appropriately. Also make sure that acquired images can be output from the CL to the specified printer. 3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and then “FCR”. The CL opening window opens. The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server 3.3 Checking Film Output Images OE000099.EPS
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-19
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server Search for/acquire images stored in the DICOM server and print those images to the DICOM printer as follows.
1.
Specify search conditions to search for/acquire images from the DICOM server.
➥ REFERENCE The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be generated when the default film annotation character format is used (image size: 35 × 35cm (14" × 14"); print format: TWIN). When the default settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed out. (1) Hospital name (institution name) FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
04001676 A0000A020
(12) IP number (2) EDR mode + menu code (3) System ID + image number
For details of the procedure used to search for/acquire images, see the CL Operation Manual.
2.
Check to see that the specified image was transferred to this equipment. For details of the procedure used to check the transferred image, see the CL Operation Manual.
3.3 Checking Film Output Images 1.
Generate a printout of the transferred image. For details of how to generate printouts, see the CR Console Operation Manual.
2.
Make sure that the specified image has been transferred properly and output with the same patient and study information.
010-054-17E 07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
(13) Image processing conditions
(4) Patient ID (5) Patient name R->L
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5 SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP 01
Surgi
0000000001 MARY ADAMS 1992 11 27 [17:43]
(10) Film mark (7) Gender (8) Age or birth date G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE 50% RT-04
(8) Requesting department (9) Group process information (14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time(11) Reduction ratio (16) Image reversal mark (6) Exposure date (15) Normalization conditions + corrections (19) Technologist's code OE000032.EPS
For any problem that may occur, see “Print Output Function” in “FR1: Function-specific Reference”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-20
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up the CL setup file. Have the following item be ready for use. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-21
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14 07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE20-24
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE21-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15 11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE21-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE21-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE21-4
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging) Described herein is the setup procedure necessary to use the PDI function for saving study information and image data already output to the CL, onto the storage media (CD-R).
➥ REFERENCE A dedicated Viewer is stored on the storage media created using the PDI function. This Viewer enables you to view image data on a generalpurpose PC.
■ Overall operation flow Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Perform the following PDI-related setups.
“2. Software Setup”
Application installation Option key installation AP key reinstallation Configuration item settings Institution information settings
■ Prior to setup ● CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V6.0 or later The PDI option key (CL DICOM PDI STORAGE) is required.
NOTES
Write study information using the PDI function and verify if appropriately.
“3. Verification”
Make backup copies of configuration files.
“4. Setup File Backup”
The DICOM Media Storage function cannot be used on the CL where the PDI function is installed. For a clustered-connection system where study information can be used in a shared manner, only study information and image data stored on this CL equipment can be recorded onto the storage media (CD-R) by means of the PDI function. When any study information stored on other connected equipment is selected, an attempt to store such information onto a CD-R will automatically be restricted, following PDI wizard instructions, only to that stored on this CL equipment.
● Requirements of recommended CD-RW drive In Japan, use only the specified CD-RW drive. Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
● Requirements to add the PDI function under Windows XP To newly add the PDI function under Windows XP, upgrade the software version to V7.1(B) so that such function can be installed appropriately. For details of the software version upgrade procedure, see “Appendix D Upgrading the AP” under “RI: Reinstalling the Software”. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL, as illustrated below. TCP/IP
RU
CL
CD-RW drive USB cable
OE210000.EPS
NOTE Do not install the driver supplied with the CD-RW drive. Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
010-054-18E 05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-2
2.1 Installing the PDI Application
2. Software Setup 2.1 Installing the PDI Application
2.1 Installing the PDI Application NOTE When the DICOM Media Storage function is used, configuration settings and option key must be removed properly.
2.2 Installing the Option Key 2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) into the PC. ➔ The “IIP Setup Tool” main menu opens automatically.
NOTE
2.4 Starting the Service Utility
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup: bat) in the CD.
2.5 Setting the Configuration Items 2.6 Exiting the Service Utility 2.7 Editing the Institution Information
OE220001.EPS
2.
Type in “50” and pres the key. ➔ A menu opens to show listing of languages that can be installed.
OE220002.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-3
2.2 Installing the Option Key
3.
Select a desired language and press the key. ➔ Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation processing, the system soon returns to the “IIP Setup Tool” main menu window.
4.
2.2 Installing the Option Key 1.
➔ In a few seconds, the installation start window opens automatically.
Type in “0” and press the key.
NOTE
➔ The system returns to the desktop.
5.
Insert the PDI Option Key CD into the PC.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (Setup: bat) in the CD.
Remove the CD from the PC.
OE220003.EPS
2.
Type in “1” and press the key. ➔ A window like that shown below opens.
OE220021.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-4
2.2 Installing the Option Key
3.
Select the type of an installed OS and then press the key.
5.
Click
.
➔ Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation processing, a window like that shown below opens.
➔ A window like that shown below opens.
OE220005.EPS
NOTE When the OS installed is Windows XP, a window like that shown below opens.
OE220022.ai
NOTE When the OS used is Windows Vista, a window like that shown below opens.
OE220004.EPS OE220023.ai
Proceed straight to step 5.
4.
Click [Complete] to restart the PC.
Select a locale and press the key. ➔ A window like that shown below opens.
6.
Press the key. ➔ The system returns to the desktop.
7.
Remove the CD from the PC.
8.
Restart the PC.
OE220004.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-5
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key. Use the AP key CD (114Y5342001A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. ➔ After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE
2.4 Starting the Service Utility 1.
From the
“Fuji Film”, and then “FCR”. ➔ The CL-AP will start up.
2.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window.
In case the installation start window does not open automatically, double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
2.
Click
Click
Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
.
➔ A window opens to indicate completion of the reinstallation processing.
3.
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens.
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B) or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility mode starts without opening this window.
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-6
2.4 Starting the Service Utility
➥ REFERENCE If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility. 1. To shut down the AP, select “Shut Down” on the menu. 2. Click [OK] while holding down the key on the shutdown window. 3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
3.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
2.5 Setting the Configuration Items Perform settings for the PDI-related configuration items, as follows.
1.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the “IIP Service Utility” window.
.
➔ The Service Utility mode starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens. OE210004.EPS
➔ The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
OE210003.EPS
OE210005.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-7
2.5 Setting the Configuration Items
2.
Click
on the window that opens. No.
➔ The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
Name
Selection
171 PDI Transfer 0 : Explicit VR Little Syntax Endian 1 : Jpeg Lossless
IDT/Console function setup items
Meaning Specifying a DICOM contents transfer syntax * Select “0:Explicit VR Little Endian” if complied with IHE.
: Default setting, *: Note
4.
Select [Save] from the “Config” menu. ➔ A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
5.
Click
.
➔ The setup data is saved accordingly. OE210006.EPS
3.
Perform settings for the following PDI-related configuration items. No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
167 PDI Drive Letter
Example: E
Specifying drive letter of a connected CD-RW drive.
168 PDI Use CrtLut
A maximum of 64 singlebyte characters C:\Program Files\ FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\ PDI.lut
Specifying SoftcopyLUT applied to a processed image.
169 PDI Image Density
0 : ST 1 : HQ
Specifying pixel density of a stored image.
170 PDI Use Multibyte
Yes Included. No Not included.
Specifying whether or not to include multi-byte information in the DICOM contents.
* Perform the necessary setting adding extension “.lut”.
: Default setting, *: Note 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-8
2.6 Exiting the Service Utility
2.6 Exiting the Service Utility 1.
Select [Close] from the “Config” menu on the “Setup Configuration Item” window. ➔ The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ The system returns to the desktop.
2.7 Editing the Institution Information This section describes the procedure when editing the README.txt file created and stored onto a CD-R using the PDI function, following information specific to the institution.
1.
Select “Run…” from the
2.
Enter “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\PDIMaster\README.txt” and click .
menu.
OE220006.EPS
➔ The README.txt file opens.
3.
Perform the following settings.
I.
II. OE220007.EPS
I.
Edit details of “2. Facility at which the disk was created” following the institution-specific information. II. Edit details of “3. Application with which the disk was created” following the CL software version.
4. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Store edited data accordingly and close the README.txt file.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-9
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verification 3.1 Starting the CL-AP 3.2 Writing study information using the PDI function
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. ➔ The CL opening window opens. In about 2 minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
3.3 Verifying the created CD-R
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-10
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function
3.
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function 1.
Check to see that the selected study information is displayed properly and click
.
Select the “Delivered” tab.
OE220008.EPS
2.
Select study information you want to write onto CD-R and click
.
OE220009.EPS
➔ A window opens prompting you to insert a CD-R.
4.
Set a blank CD-R into the PC.
OE220010.EPS
➔ The “PDI Wizard” window opens.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-11
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
5.
Click
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
.
Use the procedure below to verify the data written onto the CD-R created as directed in “3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function”, above, by inserting it into a PC other than the CL.
1.
Set the CD-R created by using the PDI function into the PC other than the CL.
2.
Start up Explorer and select drive D. ➔ Contents of the CD-R will be displayed.
3.
Double-click “INDEX.HTM”.
OE220011.EPS
➔ When data writing is complete, a window like that shown below opens.
OE220012.EPS
OE220013.EPS
6.
Click
7.
Remove the CD-R from the PC.
.
➔ The “Portable Data for Image” window opens.
4.
Click [View Image] on the window that opens.
OE220014.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-12
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
8.
➔ The “File Download” window opens.
Check to see that the specified image data is displayed correctly on the Viewer window.
OE220015.EPS
5.
Click
.
➔ The “Download complete” window opens.
OE220018.EPS
9.
Click
.
OE220016.EPS
6.
Click
➔ The system returns to the “Portable Data for Image” window.
.
➔ The “FUJIFILM DICOM MEDIA Viewer” window opens.
7.
Select a patient’s name and click
.
OE220017.EPS
➔ The Viewer window opens. 010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-13
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup
10. Click [About this disk].
Make a backup copy of the CL setup file. To make a backup copy, have the following item on hand. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”. OE220019.EPS
➔ The “README.TXT” window opens.
OE220020.EPS
11. Check to see that what is displayed on the “README.TXT” window is as edited in “2.7 Editing the Institution Information”.
12. Click
to close the “README.TXT” window.
13. Remove the CD-R from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE22-16
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter) This chapter describes the procedure used to perform settings necessary for acquisition of X-ray radiation information (dose-area product information) when an X-ray image is taken, with a dose-area product meter (hereinafter referred simply to as the “DAP”) connected properly to the CL. The X-ray radiation information (dose-area product information) thus acquired is displayed in the study information list window on the study execution screen.
■ Prior to setup
■ Overall operation flow Connect a DAP to the CL.
“1. Hardware Setup”
Perform DAP-related settings.
“2. Software Setup”
Configuration item settings
Verify CL connection to the DAP and reception of dose-area product information.
“3. Verification”
Make backup copies of configuration files.
“4. Setup File Backup”
● CL requirements The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V7.0 or later
● Connected DAP For direct connection Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC directly to a serial port of the PC. For indirect connection Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC and an X-CON to a conversion box (Livingston’s CR BOX) and then connect the conversion box to the PSI04A board on the CL. For the CR-IR371/372, connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC to an X-CON and then connect the X-CON to the PSI04A board on the CL.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-1
1. Hardware Setup
1.
Hardware Setup
● For indirect connection When a conversion box is used Serial connecter
Connect a DAP to the CL, as illustrated below.
Dedicated serial cable
TCP/IP
● For direct connection When no X-CON is connected TCP/IP
RU
RU CL
Display Unit
CL
X-CON DAP
DAP
Dedicated serial cable
OE230003.ai
OE230001.ai
When a DAP and an X-CON are connected
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see “OE12: CL+XRay Controller (Serial Connection)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
When a CR-IR371/372 is connected
Serial connecter Dedicated serial cable
TCP/IP
Conversion box
Serial connecter Dedicated serial cable
TCP/IP
X-CON RU
CL Display Unit
RU
DAP
X-CON
DAP OE230004.ai
OE230002.ai
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see “OE12: CL+XRay Controller (Serial Connection)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see “OE12: CL+XRay Controller (Serial Connection)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-2
2.1 Starting the Service Utility
2. Software Setup 2.1 Starting the Service Utility 2.2 Setting the Configuration Items 2.3 Exiting the Service Utility
2.1 Starting the Service Utility 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and then “FCR”. ➔ The CL-AP will start up.
2.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of the window. Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
MU000031.EPS
➔ The password entry window opens.
MU000035.EPS
➥ REFERENCE If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally, perform the following steps to start the Service Utility. 1. To shut down the AP, select “Shut Down” on the menu. 2. Click [OK] while holding down the key on the shutdown window. 3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select “Programs”, “Fuji Film”, and “FCR”. 4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-3
2.1 Starting the Service Utility
3.
Enter “fieldengineer” and click
.
➔ The Service Utility mode starts and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
OE210003.EPS
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-4
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items Perform settings for the DAP-related configuration items, as follows.
1.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the “IIP Service Utility” window.
4.
Click
.
➔ The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
IDT/Console function setup items
OE210006.EPS
OE210004.EPS
➔ The “Setup Configuration Item” window opens.
OE210005.EPS
2.
Click
on the window that opens.
➔ The configuration option setup items appear in the right-hand area of the window.
3.
Select “Yes” for the following configuration setting. No. 13
Name
Meaning
Enable Connecting Specifying whether or not to connect CL DAP Directly directly to a DAP. Yes Connect directly to a DAP. No [default] Not to connect directly to a DAP.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-5
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items
5.
Perform settings for the following DAP-related configuration items. ● For direct connection No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
177 DAP Serial_ 0:none TX Parity 1:odd 2:even
Specifying a DAP serial transfer parity.
178 DAP Serial_ 0 to 32 ( 0) TX Control por
Specifying a DAP serial transfer control port number. (0: Not used.)
179 DAP Message Trial Count
3
Specifying a DAP message transfer trial count.
180 DAP Address
A
Specifying a DAP address character while a DAP is connected. (Specify a capital alphanumeric.)
181 Wait Time for Response. From DAP
1 to 30 ( 1)
Specifying a time to wait (in seconds) until a response is received after a related command was transferred to the DAP.
182 Dap Status Display Strings
A maximum of 5 onebyte characters ( DAP)
Specifying a caption used to indicate a related status while a DAP is connected.
6.
Select [Save] from the “Config” menu. ➔ A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be saved.
7.
Click
.
➔ The setup data is saved accordingly.
: Default setting, *: Note
● For indirect connection For details on indirect connection, see “2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON” in “OE12: CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
NOTE Select “0: Old” for No. 108 “Xcon Format Type”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-6
2.3 Exiting the Service Utility
2.3 Exiting the Service Utility 1.
Select [Close] from the “Config” menu on the “Setup Configuration Item” window. ➔ The system returns to the “IIP Service Utility” window.
2.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the window that opens. ➔ The system returns to the desktop.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-7
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verification Verify connection to a DAP, as follows. 3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “Programs”,
“Fuji Film”, and then “FCR”. ➔ The CL opening window will open. The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP 3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information
OE230005.ai
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP For whether a DAP is connected to the CL or not, look into the error message box at the upper-right corner of the window. When in online status
No error message box opens or no DAP Offline icon appears in the box that opens.
When in offline status
The DAP Offline icon appears in the box. OE230006.ai
010-054-20E 11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-8
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information 1.
Register any study menu, and then perform exposure to read an image.
NOTE When a cassette is used to perform exposure, IP registration is needed after a study menu was registered.
2.
Check the X-ray dose value shown on the display unit.
3.
On the CL’s study execution screen, display the study information list window to check the following values. Total dose-area product of a study Image-area dose product Exposure time (for each image)
4.
Display the CL’s study reception screen.
5.
Make sure that the data appearing on the display unit is reset appropriately.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-9
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product Information
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product Information
2.
Image-area dose product Exposure time (for each image) For details on the DICOM Storage function setup procedure, see “OE3: CL+HI-C655/QA-WS (DICOM CR Storage)” and “OE4: CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled
1.
For each of the image information items included in the received study, check the following values.
On the RIS system, select a study for which the reception of dose-area product information was definitely confirmed.
NOTE Select the study that was checked for in “3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information” above.
2.
1.
With regard to the received study, check the following of the actual measurement values. Total dose-area product of a study Image-area dose product Exposure time (for each image) For details on the DICOM PPS function setup procedure, see “OE8: CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)” under “OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment”.
3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled
1.
3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled
Transfer a study for which the reception of dose-area product information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM Storage device.
NOTE
Output a study for which the reception of dose-area product information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM Printer device.
NOTE Select the study that was checked for in “3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information” above.
2.
Make sure that dose-area product information (for each image) is printed on the output film.
NOTE As a standard function, no dose-area product information is printed on output film. Edit the FilmStrFm.env file so that necessary settings are performed to print dose-area product information on output film properly. For how to edit the FilmStrFm.env file, see “FR1: Print Output Function” under “FR: Function-specific Reference”.
Select the study that was checked for in “3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information” above.
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-10
4. Setup File Backup
4. Setup File Backup Back up the CL setup file. Have the following item be ready for use. Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) For details on the backup procedure, see “5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File — Configuration Restore/Backup” under “MU: Maintenance Utility”.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-11
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E 10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE23-12
Precise Enlargement Function
Precise Enlargement Function Setting procedure to display the display image read by CL and its overlay item on the 2nd monitor are described. The existent monitor (hereinafter called 1st monitor) is used as a regular exposure console.
■ Prior to setup ● CL requirements CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V7.1 or later Precise enlargement function option key (CR PRECISE ENLARGEMENT) is required. The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows Vista. The PC memory is 2GB or more. (If not sufficient, expand it as appropriate.) The 2nd monitor has been connected. For the detailed 2nd monitor connection procedure, see “Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor” under “Appx IN: Installation ― Appendix”.
NOTE This function is not supported on the PC models listed below, because memory expansion is not possible on them. OptiPlex GX50, 60, 150, 260, 270
■ Overall operation flow Install the Precise enlargement software, make settings for the firewall, and install the option key and reinstall the AP key, and then perform the following settings.
“1. Software Setup”
Setting the OS Setting the User Utility of Precise enlargement software Setting the Service Utility of Precise enlargement software Confirm that the image is displayed on the 2nd monitor.
“2. Confirming the Settings”
Back up the settings.
“3. Backup/Restore”
■ Procedure to be performed if necessary When restoring the setting files related to Precise enlargement function. “3. Backup/Restore”
When image display to the 2nd monitor is set to OFF. “4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function”
When turning ON again the 2nd monitor. “5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function”
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-1
1. Software Setup
1. Software Setup Set up the CL software following the flow chart below. 1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software 1.2 Setting the Firewall 1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key 1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key 1.5 Setting the System 1.5.1 Setting the OS 1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility 1.5.3 Setting the User Utility 1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-2
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
3.
1.1.1 For Software V7.1
4.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
NOTE
Turn ON the PC power.
2.
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically.
5.
➔ Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD (114Y5342318A00) into the PC. ➔ The “Install Echo application screen” window opens.
Perform steps 1. through 11. when the OS used is Windows XP SP2 or earlier. Performing steps 1. through 11. is not necessary when the OS used is Windows XP SP3 or Windows Vista. Proceed straight to step 12.
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility].
Click [Windows Installer 3.1 Redistributable(v2)].
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
OE240027.ai MU000031.EPS
NOTE When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
.
➥ REFERENCE Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click “No” and proceed to Step 12. ➔ The following window opens.
MU000035.EPS
OE240025.ai
➔ The Service Utility starts, and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-3
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
6.
Click
.
8.
➔ The “License Agreement” window opens.
Click
.
NOTE When a window like that shown below opens after is clicked at step above, click
on the window that
opens to proceed to the next step. OE240026.ai
7.
Select
, click
.
➔ The following window opens.
OE240029.ai
➔ After installation completed, the following window opens.
OE240030.ai OE240028.ai
9.
Click
.
➔ The following window opens.
OE240031.ai
10. Click
.
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-4
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
12. Turn ON the PC power.
16. Click [Visual C++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package].
➔ Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
13. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
OE240032.ai
➥ REFERENCE MU000031.EPS
NOTE
Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click “No” and proceed to Step 19.
When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
.
OE240033.ai
➔ The following window opens. MU000035.EPS
➔ The Service Utility starts, and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
14. Click [Exit Service Utility]. OE240034.ai
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
15. Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD (114Y5342318A00) into the PC.
17. Click
.
➔ After installation completed, the following window opens.
➔ The “Install Echo application screen” window opens.
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE240035.ai
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-5
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
18. Click
20. Click
.
➔ The system returns to the “Install Echo application screen” window.
➔ After installation completed, the following window opens.
21. Click
19. Click [.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1].
.
.
➔ The “Install Echo application screen” window opens.
22. Click [Echo Application].
OE240036.ai
➥ REFERENCE Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click “No” and proceed to Step 22. OE240039.ai
➔ The “Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard” window opens.
OE240038.ai
➔ The following window opens.
OE240040.ai
23. Click
.
➔ The “Select information” window opens.
OE240037.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-6
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
24. Make the following settings.
26. Click
.
NOTE Perform reinstallation from the step 8 after restarting PC when “[.NET Framework 3.5] is not installed” message displayed. I. II. OE240041.ai
I.
Select a language.
➔ After installation completed, the “Windows Security Alert” window opens.
27. Click [Unblock]. ➔ The “Installation Complete” window opens.
NOTE Select the same language as you selected at the “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “7. Language Setup for Screen Message” in the Service Utility. II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image confirmation.
OE240043.ai
➥ REFERENCE After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by clicking [Change Monitor] in the “Install Echo application screen” window.
25. Click
28. Click
.
➔ The system returns to the “Install Echo application screen” window.
29. Click [Exit].
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
➔ The “Confirm Installation” window opens.
OE240042.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-7
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
4.
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
1.
Turn ON the PC power.
➔ The “Install Precise enlargement function screen” window opens.
➔ Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
2.
Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD (114Y5342318A01) into the PC.
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
5.
Click [Precise enlargement function].
MU000031.EPS
NOTE When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
. AWS823070.ai
➥ REFERENCE Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click “OK” and proceed to Step 6. MU000035.EPS
➔ The Service Utility starts, and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
3.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-8
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image confirmation.
➔ The “Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard” window opens.
➥ REFERENCE After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by clicking [Change Monitor] in the “Install Echo application screen” window.
8.
Click
.
➔ The “Confirm Installation” window opens.
AWS823069.ai
6.
AWS823067.ai
Click
.
➔ The “Please select information to setup” window opens.
7.
9.
Click
.
➔ The “Installation Complete” window opens.
Make the following settings.
I II AWS825004.ai
I.
Select a language.
NOTE Select the same language as you selected at the “SYSTEM CONFIG” - “7. Language Setup for Screen Message” in the Service Utility.
AWS823068.ai
10. Click
.
➔ The system returns to the “Install Precise enlargement function screen” window.
11. Click [Exit]. ➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-9
1.2 Setting the Firewall
1.2 Setting the Firewall 1.
Open the explorer and double-click the “FirewallSetting.bat” directly below the Precise enlargement function installation CD. ➔ The following window opens.
OE240044.ai
2.
Press the key.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-10
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key 1.
Open the explorer and double-click the “OptionCooper_ Echo.exe” directly below the Precise enlargement function installation CD.
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use the AP key CD to reinstall the AP key. Installation procedures are shown below.
1.
➔ The installation start window opens.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC. ➔ After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically.
OE240045.ai
2.
Click
2.
Click
.
➔ The window to express the completion of installation opens.
.
➔ The window to express the completion of installation opens.
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen. OE240046.ai
3.
Click
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-11
1.5 Setting the System
3.
1.5 Setting the System NOTE
Select “Echo” and make the following settings according to the request from the institution. I. II. III. IV.
The Precise enlargement function has the dedicated “Service Utility” and “User Utility.” Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those of the Precise enlargement function.
OE240047.ai
1.5.1 Setting the OS
No.
Make settings so that the taskbar is not displayed at the time of starting the User Utility for Precise enlargement function.
1.
I
Press key and right-click on the displayed taskbar, then select “Properties.” ➔ The “Taskbar and [Start] Menu Properties” window opens.
2.
1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility
1.
menu and press
key. ➔ The “Service Utility” window for the linking application opens.
2.
Remarks
MS UI Gothic Select the display font Microsoft Sans Serif type for overlay item that is displayed on the image confirmation window. Select the image density to display. HQ image displayed as STD image if “Standard” is selected.
III
Zoom ratio for 10 a click (%) (5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50)
Zoom/reduction ratio for image Zoom/image reduction (%)
IV
Maximum 500 zoom ratio (%) (200, 300, 400, 500)
Maximum zoom ratio for image magnification (%)
: Settings for factory shipment
Input “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\ ServiceUtility.exe” into the “Start Searching” (“Run...” for Windows XP) column in the
Font Name of Overlay
Option
Image Density Highest density used to display Standard density
II
Remove the check mark from the “Keep the taskbar on top of other windows.”
Item Name
Select “System” and make sure that “Allow switch app by menu” is set to [No].
4.
Click
.
➔ The “Service Utility” window closes.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the 2nd monitor starts up with gray background when opening window for CL displayed.
NOTE When [No] is not set for “Allow switch app by menu”, be sure to set [No]. 010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-12
1.5 Setting the System
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility
No.
1.
Right-click on the 2nd monitor screen and select the “User Utility” while the patient information input window for CL-AP is displayed.
Option
I
II
Loupe area size
Loupe area size Small (small, medium, large)
III
Magnification ratio of Loupe (%)
300 (200, 300, 400, 500)
IV
Center point of Position of mouse scaling cursor Center of display area
V
Overlay Item Setting
–
VI
Version information
–
AWS823031.ai
➔ The “User Utility” window for Precise enlargement function opens.
2.
Make the following settings according to the request for the institution.
3.
Remarks
Display size of Full-scale display Initial Image at all the time. Use “Fit in Window” function only to the images larger than the image display area. “Fit in Window” at all the time.
NOTE The User Utility for Precise enlargement function should be started while CL-AP is running.
Item Name
Click
Select the initial display settings optionally when displayed CL image on the image confirmation window.
Zoom ratio for displayed images in the Loupe area. Determines the center coordinate of magnification reduction processing in image magnification/reduction mode. Refer to “1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item” Displays the version of Precise enlargement function
.
I II III IV V VI
OE240048.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-13
1.5 Setting the System
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item
1.
III. Display items for overlay item Set the display items for overlay item in the four corners of display area (top left, top right, bottom left, bottom right) on the 2nd monitor. The displayable overlay item is shown below.
Click on the “User Utility” window for Precise enlargement function. ➔ The “Additional Information Settings” window opens.
2.
Overlay item Patient ID, Patient's Name, Kanji Patient's Name, Sex, for patient Patient's Bitrth Date, Patient's Age
Make the following settings. I.
Order infomation
II.
Overlay item Menu Name, S/L, Pixel Spacing, kVp, X-ray Tube for image Current, Exposure Time, Exposure, Dose Area Product, Target/Filter, Grid, Focus, Thickness, Comp Force, Angle, AEC, VCS+VMCS, AGD, ESE, Laterality, Patient Orientation, GA/GS Display attribute infomation III.
OE240049.ai
I.
Accession Number, Acquisition Date, Acquisition Time
Font size Set the font size of overlay item. Select either 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 (default), 24, 26, 28, 36, or 48. II. Font color Set the display font colors of overlay item. Select either Gray (default), Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow.
Magnification Ratio
• Maximum of 10 items for each display area can be set. • Be able to set a overlay item can be see to display only in one corner. • User can edit the “Prefix” optionally for the overlay item item list. The “(item name) : ” is set for the “factory default setting”. If the item name does not need to be displayed, leave the “Prefix” blank, and only item value will be displayed. • The “Suffix” in the overlay item list cannot be edited. • To change the display position of an item, cancel the setting for the item once; and then, make the setting for the item again.
● Setting method
1.
Select the items to be displayed from the right-side of overlay item lists.
2.
Select the position (Top-left, Top-right, Bottom-left, Bottomright) to be displayed from the left-side of display area.
3.
Click
.
➔ Item name is displayed in the selected position.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-14
1.5 Setting the System
● Method for cancelling the settings
1.
Select the items to be hidden from the left-side display area.
2.
Click
.
➔ Item name is deleted from the selected position.
➥ REFERENCE Overlay items set as the factory default settings are shown below. Cancel unnecessary setting items. Top-left • Patient ID • Patient’s Name • Patient’s Sex • Patient’s Birth Date • Patient’s Age Bottom-left • Pixel Spacing • Magnification Ratio • S/L • GA/GS
Top-right • Accession Number • Acquisition Date • Acquisition Time • Menu Name • Laterality • Patient Orientation (Row/Column) • VCS+VMCS Bottom-right • X-ray Tube Current • Exposure Time • kVp • Exposure • Target/Filter • Grid • Focus • AEC • ESE • Image Area Dose Product
NOTE Cancel the “Focus” item.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-15
2.2 Confirming the Image Display
2. Confirming the Settings
2.2 Confirming the Image Display
Start up the CL-AP and confirm displayed images. 2.1 Starting the CL-AP 2.2 Confirming Image Display
1.
Start the QA processing function on read images.
2.
Confirm that the images are displayed on the 2nd monitor, and also that information set in “1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item” is displayed correctly.
2.1 Starting the CL-AP 1.
From the
menu, sequentially select “All Programs”,
“Fuji Film” and “FCR”. ➔ The CL opening window opens. In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
OE000099.EPS
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-16
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
3. Backup/Restore The procedures to back up/restore the setting values for the Precise enlargement function are described.
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later 3.2.1 Backup
1.
3.1 For Software V7.1 ● Backup
1.
Open Windows Explorer, and back up the Config folder in “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper” to the media.
Select the
menu and then click “User Utility”.
➔ The “User Utility” main menu window opens.
2.
Click [Ascent View]. ➔ The “Ascent View” window opens.
3.
Click the [Backup].
● Restore
1.
Open Windows Explorer on the PC to be restored, and overwrite the backed up Config folder to the Config folder in “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper”.
AWS825011.ai
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Insert the media for backup into the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-17
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
5.
➔ After backup completed, the following window opens.
Select the targeted backup drive/folder and click [OK].
AWS825013.ai
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Remove the media from the PC.
AWS825010.ai
CAUTION When the [Copy File] window opens, do not select [Copy, but keep both files].
AWS825014.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-18
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
5.
3.2.2 Restore CAUTION
Select the drive/folder in which the backup data is stored, and then click [OK].
Data cannot be restored If the version of the installed software and the version of software at the time of creating data to be restored are different with each other. See the version information of backup data (Version.xml) to restore, and confirm that the versions are the same before restoring.
1.
Select the
menu and then click “User Utility”.
➔ The “User Utility” main menu window opens.
2.
Click [Ascent View].
AWS825010.ai
➔ After restoring processing is completed, the following window opens.
➔ The “Ascent View” window opens.
3.
Click [Restore].
AWS825016.ai
AWS825012.ai
➔ The “Folder Selection” window opens.
4.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Remove the media from the PC.
Insert the media for backup into the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-19
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
4.
Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement function OFF and using only the CL in the case such as the 2nd monitor becoming defective.
1.
Confirm that no error is displayed. When an error occurred, perform steps 1 through 3 again, and correct the specified error appropriately. (In the window below, it is indicated that “ " ” corresponding to the 29th character on the 4th line is illegal. To be more specific, there is no “ " ” that is paired with the other.)
Input the following in the “Start Searching” column (“Run...” for Windows XP) from the
menu and press the
key. “notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml” ➔ “Version.xml” opens in Note Pad.
2.
AWS823066.ai
Correct the following parts and save. ● Before correction C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo. exe ● After correction (Add Managed=“False”) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\ Cooper\System\Echo.exe
3.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the Precise enlargement function does not start up.
Input the following in the “Start Searching” column (“Run...” for Windows XP) from the
menu and press the
key. “explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml” ➔ “Version.xml” opens in the browser.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-20
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement function ON after it was turned OFF following the procedure directed in “4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function”.
1.
Input the following in the “Start Searching” column (“Run...” for Windows XP) from the
menu and press the
key. “notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml” “Version.xml” opens in Note Pad.
2. Correct the following parts and save. ● Before correction
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\ Cooper\System\Echo.exe
● After correction (Delete Managed=“False”) C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo. exe
3.
Input the following in the “Start Searching” column (“Run...” for Windows XP) from the
menu and press the
key. “explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml” “Version.xml” opens in browser.
4.
Confirm that no error is displayed.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the Precise enlargement function starts up.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-21
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E 12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE24-24
QA ROI Measurement
QA ROI Measurement Described herein are the procedures to use the QA ROI Measurement function to set up an ROI on an image displayed on the CL and to display width and height of the displayed ROI, as well as the average pixel value, median pixel value, standard deviation and area.
■ Prior to setup ● CL requirements CL main unit must have been set up accordingly. Software version required: V8.0 or later ROI option key (CR QA ROI MEASUREMENT) is requiredey. The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows Vista.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
■ Overall operation flow Install the QA ROI Measurement software, set up the firewall, install the option key and reinstall the AP key. Perform then the following.
“1. Software Setup”
Setup of the Service Utility for the QA ROI Measurement software Settings necessary for the discontinued monitor Create an exposure menu used for the QA ROI Measurement.
“2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement”
Confirm that the QA ROI information is displayed properly.
“3. Confirming the Settings”
Back up the settings.
“4. Backup/Restore”
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-1
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software
1. Software Setup Set up the CL software following the flow chart shown below. 1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software 1.2 Setting the Firewall
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software 1.
Turn ON the PC power. ➔ The PC starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
2.
1.3 Installing the Option Key
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds. Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key 1.5 Setting the System 1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility 1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor
MU000031.EPS
NOTE When the following window is displayed, enter the login password (fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
.
MU000035.EPS
➔ The Service Utility starts, and then the “IIP Service Utility” window opens.
3.
Click [Exit Service Utility]. ➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-2
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software
4.
➔ The “Welcome to the QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard” window opens.
Insert the QA ROI Measurement Softeware installation CD (114Y5342319A00) into the PC. ➔ The “Install QA ROI Measurement screen” window opens.
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically.
5.
Click [QA ROI Measurement].
AWS824019.ai
6.
Click
.
➔ The “Please select information to setup” window opens.
AWS824020.ai
NOTE Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click “No” and proceed to step 6.
or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-3
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software
7.
Make the following settings on the window that opens.
9.
Click
.
➔ The “Installation Complete” window opens.
I II AWS825004.ai
I.
Select a language. AWS824022.ai
NOTE Select the same language as that you selected at “SYSTEM CONFIG” ― “7. Language Setup for Screen Message” in the Service Utility. II. Select the type of Primary monitor (1st monitor) for image confirmation.
➥ REFERENCE After installation is completed, the monitor type can be changed by clicking [Change Monitor] in the “Install QA ROI Measurement screen” window.
8.
Click
10. Click
.
➔ The system returns to the “Install QA ROI Measurement screen” window.
11. Click [Exit]. ➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
.
➔ The “Confirm Installation” window opens.
AWS824023.ai
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-4
1.2 Setting the Firewall
1.2 Setting the Firewall 1.
1.3 Installing the Option Key
Open Explorer and double-click “FirewallSetting_Roi.bat” directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation CD.
1.
➔ After completion of the installation processing, the “Press any key to continue.” window opens.
Open Explorer and double-click “OptionCooper_Roi.exe” directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation CD. ➔ The installation start window opens.
AWS823040.ai AWS824021.ai
2.
Press the key.
2.
Click
.
➔ A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the CD from the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-5
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key
1.4 Reinstalling the AP Key Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use the AP key CD to reinstall the AP key. Installation procedures are shown below.
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.
1.5 Setting the System NOTE The QA ROI Measurement function has the dedicated “Service Utility” and “User Utility.” Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those of the QA ROI Measurement software.
➔ After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility
NOTE Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in the CD when the window does not display automatically.
1.
Input “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\ ServiceUtility.exe” into the “Start Searching” column in the menu and press the key.
2.
Click
.
➔ The window to express the completion of installation opens.
3.
Click
.
➔ The system returns to the desktop screen.
4.
Remove the CD from the PC.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
➔ The “Service Utility” window for the linking application opens.
2.
Select “ROI” and then select [HQ Preferred] from the “Image Type” pull-down menu that opens.
3.
Click
.
➔ The “Service Utility” window closes.
4.
Restart the PC.
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-6
1.5 Setting the System
1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor
3.
When a discontinued monitor is used, there may be cases where the measurement results become illegal because of improperly determined monitor information. Determine monitor information properly observing the procedure described below.
NOTE Monitor models other than those shown in the table below require settings specific to discontinued monitors. Resolution
Monochrome/Color
Monitor Model
Copy the ENV file used by the CL-AP, as checked for at step 1. above.
NOTE Pay due attention not to move or delete the ENV file from the “C:\ Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut” folder.
4.
Paste the copied ENV file on to the “C:\Program Files\ FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor” folder.
5.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor\ MonitorDef.xml” folder.
6.
1024768
Color
FlexScan L362T
12801024
Color
Flex Scan L560T-C
16001200
Monochrome
RadiForce GS220
20481536
Color
RadiForce RX320
Use the Notepad capability to add monitor information checked for at step 1. above to the monitor setup file, “MonitorDef.xml”.
20481536
Monochrome
RadiForce GS310
I.
1.
Copy the “” line and paste it on to the last line of the file. II. Correct the following portion of the pasted line to what was checked for at step 1.
Check the used monitor for the following items. Monitor name Pixel pitch (unit: mm) ENV filename used by the CL-AP
NOTES The “Monitor name” is to be used as the filename or folder name at subsequent steps. Therefore, assign a simple name that can be used as a filename. Example: “NANAO_L560T-C”
7.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\ Manager” folder.
When the ENV filename for a certain monitor is unknown, use the file below to confirm it. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut\lut.txt
2.
Open the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut” folder.
010-054-21E 03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CR-IR346CL Service Manual
OE25-7
1.5 System Settings
8.
Copy the entire “monitor name folder of the same resolutions” and paste it on to the same folder.
NOTE The table below shows folders of the “monitor name folder of the same resolutions”. Copy and paste a folder of the resolution same as that of the monitor to be set up (regardless of whether it is monochrome or color). Monitor Name Folder
Resolution
Monochrome/Color
NANAO_L362T
1024x768
Color
NANAO_L560T-C
1280x1024
Color
NANAO_GS220
1600x1200
Monochrome
NANAO_RX320
2048x1536
Color
NANAO_GS310
2048x1536
Monochrome
12. Use the Notepad capability to add the monitor name
checked for at step 1. above to the system setup file, “SystemConfig.xml”. Correct the 3 lines of
View more...
Comments
